Apple Case-Design-Guidelines Case Design Guidelines for Apple Devices Release R3
Apple Case-Design-Guidelines Case Design Guidelines
for Apple Devices
Release R3
Apple sur FNAC.COM
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
ou juste avant la balise de fermeture -->
TELECHARGER LE PDF :
https://developer.apple.com/resources/cases/Case-Design-Guidelines.pdf
Voir également d'autres Guides APPLE :
Apple-Manuel_de_l'utilisateur_de_Final_Cut_Server
Apple-iMac_G5_de_lutilisateur
Apple-Cinema_Tools_4.0_User_Manual_F
Apple-Personal-LaserWriter300-User-s-Guide
Apple-QuickTake-100-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh
Apple-User-s-Guide-Macintosh-LC-630-DOS-Compatible
Apple-iPhone_iOS3.1_User_Guide
Apple-iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide
Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_F
Liste-documentation-apple
Apple-Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08
Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_br
Apple-macbook_pro-13-inch-mid-2012-important_product_info
Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_br
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_MainStage
Apple-Compressor_3_User_Manual_F
Apple-Color_1.0_User_Manual_F
Apple-guide_de_configuration_airport_express_4.2
Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide
Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Express_8
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_WaveBurner
Apple-Macmini_Guide_de_l'utilisateur
Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide
Disque dur, ATA parallèle Instructions de remplacement
Apple-final_cut_pro_x_logic_effects_ref_f
Apple-Leopard_Installationshandbok
Manuale Utente PowerBookG4
Apple-thunderbolt_display_getting_started_1e
Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch
Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug
Apple-macbook_air-mid-2012-important_product_info_j
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_de_reponse_d_impulsion
Apple-Aperture_2_Raccourcis_clavier
AppleTV_Setup-Guide
Apple-livetype_2_user_manual_f
Apple-imacG5_17inch_harddrive
Apple-macbook_air_guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-MacBook_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-Keynote-2-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Apple-PowerBook-User-s-Guide-for-PowerBook-computers
Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide-5200CD-and-5300CD
Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide
Apple-Workgroup-Server-Guide
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPad-User-Guide-For-iOS-5-1-Software
Apple-Boot-Camp-Guide-d-installation-et-de-configuration
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID
Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio
Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID
Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio
Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 5.1
PowerBook G4 Premiers Contacts APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur iphone pour le logiciel ios 5.1 APPLE
Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 4,3
Guide de l’utilisateur iPod nano 5ème génération
Guide de l'utilisateur iPod Touch 2.2 APPLE
Guide de l’utilisateur QuickTime 7 Mac OS X 10.3.9 et ultérieur Windows XP et Windows 2000
Guide de l'utilisateur MacBook 13 pouces Mi 2010
Guide de l’utilisateur iPhone (Pour les logiciels iOS 4.2 et 4.3)
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPod-touch-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPad-2-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE
Guide de déploiement en entreprise iPhone OS
Guide-de-l-administrateur-Apple-Remote-Desktop-3-1
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Xserve-Diagnostics-Version-3X103
Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802.11n-5e-Generation
Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802-11n-5e-Generation
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Capteur-Nike-iPod
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iMac-21-5-pouces-et-27-pouces-mi-2011-APPLE
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Qadministrator-4
Guide-d-installation-Apple-TV-3-eme-generation
User-Guide-iPad-For-ios-5-1-Software
Case Design Guidelines
for Apple Devices
Release R3Contents
General Case Design Guidelines 4
Mechanical Considerations 4
Device Layouts and Dimensions 4
Access to Controls 6
Access to the Audio Jack and 30-pin or Lightning Connector 7
Acoustical Considerations 6
Speaker and Microphone Openings 6
Speaker to Microphone Coupling 6
Call Quality 6
Sensor Considerations 7
Ambient Light and Proximity Sensor Interference 7
Magnetic Interference 7
Camera Considerations 7
Lens and Flash Occlusion 7
Image Degradation 8
Reliability Testing 10
Device Insertion and Removal 10
Colorfastness 10
Environmental Substance Restrictions 10
RF Absorbing Materials 11
Touchscreen Overlays 11
Document Revision History 12
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2Figures
General Case Design Guidelines 4
Figure 1-1 iPhone 5 and iPod touch (5th generation) sensors, controls, and connectors 5
Figure 1-2 iPad (3rd generation) sensors, controls, and connectors 5
Figure 1-3 Image degradation by color shifting 8
Figure 1-4 Image degradation by decrease of contrast 9
Figure 1-5 Image degradation by blocking 9
Figure 1-6 Image degradation by flash interference 9
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3The guidelines in this chapter apply to all Apple devices.
Mechanical Considerations
A well-designed case will securely house an Apple device while not interfering with the device’s operation.
Significant factors in mechanical design include access to the device’s sensors, controls, and connectors.
Device Layouts and Dimensions
Casesshould be designed to accommodate the full range of Apple device sizes within each product’s dimensional
variation. Dimensional drawings with tolerances can be downloaded fromdeveloper.apple.com/resources/cases/.
The locations of the sensors, controls, and connectors for the iPhone 5 and iPod touch (5th generation) are
shown in Figure 1-1 (page 5), and for the iPad (3rd generation) in Figure 1-2 (page 5).
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
4
General Case Design GuidelinesFigure 1-1 iPhone 5 and iPod touch (5th generation) sensors, controls, and connectors
Volume buttons
Sleep/wake control
Audio jack
Home button
Ringer switch
Lightning connector
iPod touch iPod touch
Bottom microphone
Rear flash
Proximity sensor
Ambient light
sensor
Speaker
Rear camera
Rear microphone
See engineering drawings
for “keep out” and “do not
obstruct” areas
Audio jack
Lightning connector
Speaker Loop
connector
Front microphone
Earpiece
Front Camera
Figure 1-2 iPad (3rd generation) sensors, controls, and connectors
Proximity sensor/
ambient light
sensor
Volume up/down
control
Side switch
Front camera
Home button
Sleep/wake control
Speaker
30-pin connector
Microphone
Headphone jack
Back camera
General Case Design Guidelines
Mechanical Considerations
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
5Access to Controls
The case should readily permit the user to access and manipulate the device’s mechanical controls, including
volume and ring/silent controls, sleep/wake control, and the home button.
Access to the Audio Jack and 30-pin or Lightning Connector
The case should provide ready accessto the audio jack. The case should be tested with a range of headphones,
including studio monitor types that have large plugs.
The case should also provide unobstructed access to either the 30-pin connector or the Lightning connector.
Some accessories, such as factory-installed automotive sound systems, have cables with large connector
housings.
In addition, the audio jack and 30-pin or Lightning connector openings should be designed with enough
margin to compensate for shifting or dimensional changes of the case material.
Acoustical Considerations
The case should not impair or degrade the acoustical performance of an Apple device.
Speaker and Microphone Openings
When Apple devices have speakers or microphones, their locations may vary from model to model. Refer to
the dimensional drawings for various Apple devices cited in "Device Layouts and Dimensions" (page 4). The
case should not obstruct the speaker or microphone ports.
Speaker to Microphone Coupling
The case should not facilitate the conduction of sound from the speaker to any microphone. Such sound
conduction can cause echoing in phone calls.
Call Quality
The case should not impair or degrade the user’s experience making and receiving both audio calls over a
cellular network or video calls using Apple’s FaceTime software. User testing should be conducted in handset,
speakerphone, and headset modes of operation, to confirm that the case does not change the loudness or
frequency response of the speakers or microphones. In addition, the user should not be able to detect any
sound distortion resulting from enclosing the Apple device in the case.
General Case Design Guidelines
Acoustical Considerations
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
6Sensor Considerations
Various Apple devices contain several environmental sensors, including an ambient light sensor, a magnetic
compass, a proximity sensor, an accelerometer, and a three-axis gyroscope. Cases should be designed so they
do not interfere with the operation of these sensors.
Ambient Light and Proximity Sensor Interference
The ambient light and proximity sensor locations for various Apple devices are shown in the dimensional
drawings cited in "Device Layouts and Dimensions" (page 4). Some of the dimensional drawings specify a
recommended keepout area around these sensors. No materialshould be allowed to cover either these sensors
or their keepout areas.
Magnetic Interference
Case designsfor Apple devicesshould avoid the use of magnets(for example, as closure devices) and magnetic
materials. Cases with parts made of any metal should be tested to verify that they do not affect an Apple
device’s built-in magnetic compass, if any.
Besides their effect on a built-in magnetic compass, magnets in cases can affect other sensors and electronic
components. Cases should not include magnets unless there is no other practical design solution and only if
they do not affect the operation of the Apple device in any way.
Camera Considerations
Pictures taken by the device’s built-in camera when the device is in the case should appear identical to those
taken without the case. This applies also to pictures taken using a built-in LED flash, if one is present. This
section describes some common picture differences that may occur. The camera test image used here can be
downloaded from developer.apple.com/resources/cases/.
Lens and Flash Occlusion
Various Apple devices have camera lenses on the back and/or the front. Some of the dimensional drawings
cited in "Device Layouts and Dimensions" (page 4) specify a recommended keepout area around these lenses.
No material should be allowed to cover any lenses or their keepout areas. The case openings for lenses should
also be large enough to eliminate any of the image degradation problems described below.
Some devices feature an LED flash to illuminate picture taking. The case should not cover or obstruct the flash
with any material.
General Case Design Guidelines
Sensor Considerations
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
7Image Degradation
A case that encroaches too closely on the perimeter of any camera lens may produce image degradation, even
without obstructing the lens. The case should not cause contrast decrease, color shift, image blocking, or flash
interference through any camera lens.
Color Shift
If the material of a colored case encroaches too closely on a camera lens or LED flash, it may impart a color
shift to the picture. This effect for various colors is illustrated in Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-3 Image degradation by color shifting
Reference
Degraded (red) Degraded (green) Degraded (blue)
Note A matte black ring around the interior of the lens opening of a case can reduce the incidence
and/or severity of color shift.
General Case Design Guidelines
Camera Considerations
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8Contrast Decrease
If the case opening is too close to a camera lens, it may decrease the contrast of pictures taken through that
lens, as illustrated in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-4 Image degradation by decrease of contrast
Reference Degraded
Image Blocking
If a camera opening in a case is too close to a lens, it may block part of the image, as illustrated in Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-5 Image degradation by blocking
Reference Degraded
Flash Interference
The case should not reflect any light from the LED flash into its camera lens. Doing so produces the effect
illustrated in Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-6 Image degradation by flash interference
Reference Degraded
General Case Design Guidelines
Camera Considerations
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9Reliability Testing
Cases for Apple devices should be tested to verify that they will withstand long-term use under typical use
conditions, and that they do not impair or degrade the functionality of the device, damage it or its immediate
surroundings, or adversely affect the user.
Device Insertion and Removal
The case should hold the Apple device securely while permitting its easy insertion and removal. The case and
the enclosed device should not be damaged by the repeated insertion and removal of the device from the
case under conditions representative of long-term use in a variety of environments.
Colorfastness
Any dyes, inks, or coatingsin or on the case should not bleed color onto either the device or its user, particularly
while the case is in contact with common substances such as water or sunscreen.
Environmental Substance Restrictions
Casesfor Apple devicesshould comply with applicable environmental regulationsin the regionsin which such
cases are to be sold, and any applicable substance or material restrictions, including applicable restrictions on
the following substances:
Lead (Pb)
Cadmium (Cd)
Mercury (Hg)
Hexavalent Chromium (Cr(VI))
Hexavalent Chromium (Cr(VI)) in leather
Nickel (Ni) plating on user-accessible surfaces
Azo-based dyes that release the aromatic amines specified in European Directive 2002/61/EC
Natural rubber latex
General Case Design Guidelines
Reliability Testing
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
10RF Absorbing Materials
Cases for Apple devices should not contain materials or coatings that absorb radio frequency energy. Such
materials can impair or degrade the performance of cellular communication antennas or GPS, WiFi, or Bluetooth
antennas. Examples include (but are not limited to) the following:
Metals (e.g. steel, aluminum, magnesium, titanium, etc.)
Plastics with any carbon content
Plastics with any glass content
Plastics with metallic plating
Metallic paints
Black paints with high carbon loading
White paints with high titanium dioxide loading
Metallic Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD) coatings
Touchscreen Overlays
The touch interface in an Apple device senses the presence of one or more fingers on its surface. Any material
between the surface and the user’s hand, even a very thin sheet of plastic, can affect the performance of the
touch interface. If a case design requires a touchscreen to be overlaid with another material, the materialshould
be thinner than 0.3 mm and should be designed so that there are no air gaps between it and the touchscreen
surface. Such an overlay should not be electrically conductive.
General Case Design Guidelines
RF Absorbing Materials
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11This table describes the changes to Case Design Guidelines for Apple Devices.
Date Notes
Revision R3: Added information for devices with the Apple Lightning™
connector: iPhone 5, iPod touch (5th generation), and iPod nano (7th
generation).
2012-09-12
2011-03-11 Revision R2: Updated guidelines to cover cases for iPads.
Changed document title from “iPhone Case Design Guidelines” to “Case
Design Guidelines for Apple Devices.”
2011-02-28 Revision R1: First release of “iPhone Case Design Guidelines.”
2012-09-12 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
12
Document Revision HistoryApple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, mechanical, electronic,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the
following exceptions: Any person is hereby
authorized to store documentation on a single
computer for personal use only and to print
copies of documentation for personal use
provided that the documentation contains
Apple’s copyright notice.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with
respect to any of the technology described in this
document. Apple retains all intellectual property
rights associated with the technology described
in this document. This document is intended to
assist application developers to develop
applications only for Apple-labeled computers.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, FaceTime, iPad, iPhone,
iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Even though Apple has reviewed this document,
APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY.
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR
INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer,
agent, or employee is authorized to make any
modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
Accessibility
Programming Guide for
iOSContents
Introduction 4
Organization of This Document 4
Accessibility on iPhone 5
iPhone Accessibility and VoiceOver 5
Why Should You Make Your Application Accessible? 6
iPhone Accessibility API and Tools 6
The UI Accessibility Programming Interface 7
Accessibility Attributes 7
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible 10
Make User Interface Elements Accessible 10
Make Custom Individual Views Accessible 11
Make the Contents of Custom Container Views Accessible 12
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information 14
Enhancing Default Attribute Information 14
Crafting Useful Labels and Hints 15
Identifying Appropriate Traits 17
Defining Custom Attribute Information in Interface Builder 18
Defining Custom Attribute Information Programmatically 20
Enhance the Accessibility of Table Views 22
Make Dynamic Elements Accessible 23
Make Nontextual Data Accessible 25
Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone Application 27
Using Accessibility Inspector to Test Your Application 27
Using VoiceOver to Test Your Application 30
Document Revision History 33
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2Figures and Listings
Accessibility on iPhone 5
Figure 1-1 VoiceOver speaks the information provided by accessible elements 8
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible 10
Figure 2-1 Default accessibility information for a standard text field, displayed in Interface Builder 19
Figure 2-2 Supplying accessibility information in Interface Builder 20
Listing 2-1 Make the contents of a custom container view accessible as separate accessibility elements
12
Listing 2-2 Providing attribute information in a custom subclass implementation 21
Listing 2-3 Providing attribute information in the code that instantiates a custom subclass object 22
Listing 2-4 Returning the correct accessibility information for the current conditions and sending a
layout-change notification 24
Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone Application 27
Figure 3-1 Turn on the Accessibility Inspector in Settings 28
Figure 3-2 Accessibility Inspector draws a rectangle around the selected element 29
Figure 3-3 The inactive appearance of Accessibility Inspector 30
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
3Using iOS 3.0 and later, VoiceOver is available to help users with visual impairments use their iOS-based devices.
The UI Accessibility programming interface, introduced in iOS 3.0, helps developers make their applications
accessible to VoiceOver users. Briefly, VoiceOver describes an application’s user interface and helps users
navigate through the application’s views and controls, using speech and sound. Users familiar with VoiceOver
in Mac OS X can leverage their experience to help them quickly come up to speed using VoiceOver on their
devices.
iPhone applications that run in iOS 3.0 and later should be accessible to VoiceOver users. iOS and the iOS SDK
support this goal by:
? Making standard UIKit controls and views accessible by default
? Supplying the UI Accessibility programming interface, which defines a streamlined process for making an
iPhone application accessible
? Providing tools that help you implement accessibility in your code and test the accessibility of your
application
If you’re developing or updating an iPhone application, you should read this document to learn how to make
your application accessible to VoiceOver users.
Organization of This Document
This document contains the following chapters:
?
“Accessibility on iPhone” (page 5) briefly describes how VoiceOver works on the device and introduces
the programming interface and tools you can use to make your application accessible.
?
“Making Your iPhone Application Accessible” (page 10) provides in-depth guidance for making your
application accessible to VoiceOver users.
?
“Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone Application” (page 27) introduces the Accessibility Inspector,
and describes how to use it and VoiceOver to test the accessibility of your application.
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
4
IntroductionFrom the beginning, iOS-based devices included several features that made the device easy for everyone to
use, including visual voicemail, large fonts in Mail, and zooming in webpages, photos, and maps. With the
addition of the following accessibility features, it’s even easier for people with visual, auditory, and physical
disabilities to use their devices:
? Zoom. Magnifies the entire device screen.
? White on Black. Inverts the colors on the display.
? Mono Audio. Combines the sound of the left and right channels into a mono signal played on both sides.
? Speak Auto-text. Speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPhone makes while users type.
? Voice Control. Allows users to make phone calls and control iPod playback using voice commands.
In addition, visually impaired users can rely on VoiceOver to help them use their devices.
iPhone Accessibility and VoiceOver
VoiceOver is Apple’sinnovative screen-reading technology, which gives users control over their devices without
having to see the screen. VoiceOver does this by acting as an intermediary between an application's user
interface and the user'stouch, providing audible descriptions of elements and actionsin the application. When
VoiceOver is active, users don’t have to worry about accidentally deleting a contact or calling a phone number,
because VoiceOver tells them where they are in the user interface, what actions they can take, and what the
results of those actions will be.
An application is accessible when all user interface elements with which users can interact are accessible. A
user interface element is accessible when it properly reports itself as an accessibility element.
To be useful, however, an accessible user interface element must provide accurate and helpful information
about its screen position, name, behavior, value, and type. This is the information VoiceOver speaks to users.
The iOS SDK contains a programming interface and tools that help you ensure that the user interface elements
in your application are both accessible and useful (for more information, see “iPhone Accessibility API and
Tools” (page 6)).
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
5
Accessibility on iPhoneWhy Should You Make Your Application Accessible?
You should make your iPhone application accessible to VoiceOver users because:
?
It increases your user base. You've worked hard to create a great application; don’t miss the opportunity
to make it available to even more users.
?
It allows people to use your application without seeing the screen. Users with visual impairments can use
your application with the help of VoiceOver.
?
It helps you address accessibility guidelines. Various governing bodies create guidelines for accessibility
and making your iPhone application accessible to VoiceOver users can help you meet them.
?
It's the right thing to do.
It’s important to be aware that supporting accessibility does not impact your ability to innovate and create
beautiful iPhone applications. The UI Accessibility programming interface allows you to add a thin layer of
functionality that does not alter your application’s appearance, or interfere with its main logic.
iPhone Accessibility API and Tools
iOS 3.0 and later includes the UI Accessibility programming interface, which is a lightweight API that helps an
application provide all the information VoiceOver needsto describe the user interface and help visually impaired
people use the application.
The UI Accessibility programming interface is part of UIKit and is implemented on standard UIKit controls and
views by default. This means that, when you use standard controls and views, much of the work of making
your application accessible is done for you. Depending on the level of customization in your application, making
it accessible can be as simple as providing accurate and helpful descriptions of your accessible user-interface
elements.
The iOS SDK also provides tools to help you make your application accessible:
? An Interface Builder inspector pane that provides an easy way to furnish descriptive accessibility information
while you're designing your nib files. To learn more about how to do this, see “Defining Custom Attribute
Information in Interface Builder” (page 18).
? Accessibility Inspector, which displays the accessibility information embedded in your application’s user
interface and allows you to verify this information when you run your application in iOS Simulator. To
learn how to examine the accessibility information in your application, see “Using Accessibility Inspector
to Test Your Application” (page 27).
Accessibility on iPhone
Why Should You Make Your Application Accessible?
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
6In addition, you can use VoiceOver itself to test the accessibility of your application. To learn how to test your
application with VoiceOver, see “Using VoiceOver to Test Your Application” (page 30).
The UI Accessibility Programming Interface
The UI Accessibility programming interface consists of two informal protocols, one class, a function, and a
handful of constants:
? The UIAccessibility informal protocol. Objectsthat implement the UIAccessibility protocol report
their accessibility status (that is, whether they are accessible) and supply descriptive information about
themselves. Standard UIKit controls and views implement the UIAccessibility protocol by default.
? The UIAccessibilityContainer informal protocol. This protocol allows a subclass of UIView to make
some or all of the objects it contains accessible as separate elements. This is particularly useful when the
objects contained in such a view are not themselves subclasses of UIView and, for this reason, are not
automatically accessible.
? The UIAccessibilityElement class. This class defines an object that can be returned through the
UIAccessibilityContainer protocol. You can create an instance of UIAccessibilityElement to
represent an item that isn’t automatically accessible, such as an object that does not inherit from UIView,
or an object that does not exist.
? The UIAccessibilityConstants.h header file. This header file definesthe constantsthat describe the
traits that an accessibility element can exhibit and the notifications that an application can post.
Accessibility Attributes
The attributes that describe an accessible user interface element make up the core of the UI Accessibility API.
VoiceOver supplies attribute information to users when they access or interact with a control or view.
Attributes are also the components of the programming interface that you’re most likely to use. Thisis because
attributes encapsulate the information that differentiates one control or view from another. For standard UIKit
controls and views, you might just need to ensure that the default attribute information is appropriate for your
application; for custom controls and views, you might have to supply most of the attribute information.
The UI Accessibility programming interface defines the following attributes:
? Label. A short, localized word or phrase that succinctly describes the control or view, but does not identify
the element’s type. Examples are “Add” or “Play.”
? Traits. A combination of one or more individual traits, each of which describes a single aspect of an
element’s state, behavior, or usage. For example, an element that behaves like a keyboard key and that
is currently selected can be characterized by the combination of the Keyboard Key and Selected traits.
Accessibility on iPhone
iPhone Accessibility API and Tools
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
7? Hint. A brief, localized phrase that describes the results of an action on an element. Examples are “Adds
a title” or “Opens the shopping list.”
? Frame. The frame of the element in screen coordinates, which is given by the CGRect structure that
specifies an element’s screen location and size.
? Value. The current value of an element, when the value is not represented by the label. For example, the
label for a slider might be “Speed,” but its current value might be “50%.”
Accessibility elements provide content for attributes, whether that content is supplied by default or by you.
An accessibility element always provides content for the frame and label attributes. The frame attribute is
required because an accessibility element must always be able to report its position in the user interface. (Note
that an object that inheritsfrom UIView includesthe frame attribute by default.) The label attribute isrequired
because it contains the name or description of the accessibility element that VoiceOver speaks.
An accessibility element is not required to provide content for the hint and traits attributes, if these attributes
do not apply to the element. For example, an element that does not perform an action does not need to
provide a hint.
An accessibility element provides information for the value attribute only when the element’s contents are
changeable and cannot always be described by the label. For example, a text field that contains an email
address might have the label “Email address,” but its contents depends on user input and is usually of the form
“username@address.” Figure 1-1 shows some of the information VoiceOver might provide.
Figure 1-1 VoiceOver speaks the information provided by accessible elements
“Show SMS Preview” “ON”
“General”
“Turn Passcode Off”
“Require Passcode Immediately”
Accessibility on iPhone
iPhone Accessibility API and Tools
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8VoiceOver users rely on the labels and hints they hear to help them use your application. For this reason, it’s
especially important to make sure that every accessible user interface element in your application provides
accurate and informative descriptions. For standard UIKit controls and views, the default attribute information
is often appropriate, but you should inspect these elements to make sure. For custom controls and views, you
may have to supply some or all of thisinformation yourself. Forsome guidelines on how to do this,see “Crafting
Useful Labels and Hints” (page 15).
Accessibility on iPhone
iPhone Accessibility API and Tools
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
9To be accessible, an iPhone application mustsupply information about its user interface elementsto VoiceOver
users. At a high level, this means you should make sure that:
? Every user interface element with which users can interact is accessible. Thisincludes elementsthat merely
supply information, such as static text, as well as controls that perform actions.
? All accessible elements supply accurate and helpful information.
In addition to these fundamentals, there are also a few things you can do to enhance a VoiceOver user’s
experience with table views and to make sure dynamic elements in your application are always accessible.
Make User Interface Elements Accessible
As mentioned in “iPhone Accessibility and VoiceOver” (page 5) a user interface element is accessible if it
reports itself as an accessibility element. Although being accessible is not enough to make a user interface
element useful to VoiceOver users, it representsthe firststep in the process of making your application accessible.
As stated in “iPhone Accessibility API and Tools” (page 6), standard UIKit controls and views are automatically
accessible. If you use only standard UIKit controls, you probably don’t have to do much additional work to
make sure your application is accessible. In this case, your next step is to ensure that the default attribute
information supplied by these controls makes sense in your application. To learn how to do this, see “Supply
Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information” (page 14).
If you create custom views that display information or with which users need to interact, you must ensure the
accessibility of these views yourself. After you’ve done this, you need to make sure these views supply
accessibility information that helps people use them (see “Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute
Information” (page 14)).
From the perspective of accessibility, a custom view is either an individual view or a container view. An individual
view does not contain any other viewsthat need to be accessible. For example, a custom subclass of UIControl
that displays an icon and behaves like a button does not contain any other elements with which the user can
interact, apart from the button itself. Read “Make Custom Individual Views Accessible” (page 11) to learn how
to make an individual view accessible.
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
10
Making Your iPhone Application AccessibleA container view, on the other hand, contains other elements with which users can interact. For example, in
a custom subclass of UIView that performsits own drawing of geometric shapes, the shapesrepresent elements
with which users can interact, and which are distinct from the container view. Such separate elements within
a container view are not automatically accessible (because they are not subclasses of UIView) and do not
provide any accessibility information. To learn how to make the contents of a container view accessible, read
“Make the Contents of Custom Container Views Accessible” (page 12).
Make Custom Individual Views Accessible
If your application contains a custom individual view with which users need to interact, you must make the
view accessible. (Recall that an individual view is a view containing no other views with which users interact.)
In addition to using Interface Builder to make a custom individual view accessible, there are two programmatic
ways to do this. One way is to set your custom view’s accessibility status in the code that instantiates it. The
following code snippet shows how to do this:
@implementation MyCustomViewController
- (id)init
{
_view = [[[MyCustomView alloc] initWithFrame:CGRectZero] autorelease];
[_view setIsAccessibilityElement:YES];
/* Set attributes here. */
}
Another way is to implement the isAccessibilityElement method of the UIAccessibility protocol
in the implementation of your custom subclass. The following code snippet shows how to do this:
@implementation MyCustomView
/* Implement attribute methods here. */
- (BOOL)isAccessibilityElement
{
return YES;
}
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Make User Interface Elements Accessible
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
11Note: In both of these code snippets, you can see comments in place of the code needed to set
accessibility attributes. For more complete code snippets that show how to do this, see “Defining
Custom Attribute Information Programmatically” (page 20).
Make the Contents of Custom Container Views Accessible
If your application displays a custom view that contains other elements with which users interact, you need
to make the contained elements separately accessible. At the same time, you need to make sure that the
container view itself is not accessible. The reason is that users interact with the contents of the container, not
with the container itself.
To accomplish this, your custom container view should implement the UIAccessibilityContainer protocol.
This protocol defines methods that make the contained elements available in an array.
The following code snippet shows the partial implementation of a custom container view. Note that this
container view creates the array of accessible elements only when methods of the
UIAccessibilityContainer protocol are called. As a result, if iPhone accessibility is not currently active,
the array is not created.
Listing 2-1 Make the contents of a custom container view accessible as separate accessibility elements
@implementation MultiFacetedView
- (NSArray *)accessibleElements
{
if ( _accessibleElements != nil )
{
return _accessibleElements;
}
_accessibleElements = [[NSMutableArray alloc] init];
/* Create an accessibility element to represent the first contained element and
initialize it as a component of MultiFacetedView. */
UIAccessibilityElement *element1 = [[[UIAccessibilityElement alloc]
initWithAccessibilityContainer:self] autorelease];
/* Set attributes of the first contained element here. */
[_accessibleElements addObject:element1];
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Make User Interface Elements Accessible
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
12/* Perform similar steps for the second contained element. */
UIAccessibilityElement *element2 = [[[UIAccessibilityElement alloc]
initWithAccessibilityContainer:self] autorelease];
/* Set attributes of the second contained element here. */
[_accessibleElements addObject:element2];
return _accessibleElements;
}
/* The container itself is not accessible, so MultiFacetedView should return NO
in isAccessiblityElement. */
- (BOOL)isAccessibilityElement
{
return NO;
}
/* The following methods are implementations of UIAccessibilityContainer protocol
methods. */
- (NSInteger)accessibilityElementCount
{
return [[self accessibleElements] count];
}
- (id)accessibilityElementAtIndex:(NSInteger)index
{
return [[self accessibleElements] objectAtIndex:index];
}
- (NSInteger)indexOfAccessibilityElement:(id)element
{
return [[self accessibleElements] indexOfObject:element];
}
@end
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Make User Interface Elements Accessible
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
13Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
There are two parts to the process of supplying attribute information for accessible elements:
? Crafting concise, accurate, and helpful information
? Ensuring that the accessible elements in your application report that content correctly
If you use custom views, you must supply all appropriate attribute information for them. For guidance, see
“Crafting Useful Labels and Hints” (page 15), “Guidelines for Creating Hints” (page 16), and “Identifying
Appropriate Traits” (page 17).
Even if you use only standard UIKit controls and views, you might find that some of the default attribute
information they supply could be enhanced to make more sense in the context of your application. For more
information, see “Enhancing Default Attribute Information” (page 14).
If you need to supply or change accessibility attributes on either standard or custom UI elements, you can do
so either in Interface Builder (see “Defining Custom Attribute Information in Interface Builder” (page 18)) or
programmatically (see “Defining Custom Attribute Information Programmatically” (page 20)).
Enhancing Default Attribute Information
As part of the built-in accessibility of standard UIKit controls and views, iOS also provides default attribute
information that describes these elements to VoiceOver users. In most cases, this information is appropriate
for applications that use the standard controls and views. However, there might be times when supplying
custom attribute information can enhance a VoiceOver user’s experience with your application:
?
If you use a standard UIKit control or view that displays a system-provided icon or title, first make sure
you’re using it in accordance with its intended purpose (see iPhone Human Interface Guidelines for more
information). Then, decide whether the default label attribute accurately conveys the result of using that
control or view in your application. If not, consider providing a hint attribute.
For example, if you place an Add button in your navigation bar by using the system-provided Add (+) icon
in a UIBarButtonItem object, you get the default label attribute, Add, automatically. If it’s always obvious
which item the user is adding when they activate this button, there’s no need to provide a hint attribute.
But if there might be confusion, you should consider providing a custom hint that describes the result of
using that control in your application, such as "Adds an account" or "Adds a comment."
?
If you display a custom icon or image in a standard UIKit view, such as a UIButton object, you need to
supply a custom label attribute that describes it.
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
14Crafting Useful Labels and Hints
When VoiceOver users run your application, they rely on the descriptions VoiceOver speaks to understand
what your application does and how to use it. Because these descriptions represent the bulk of the VoiceOver
user’s experience with your application it’s essential that they be as accurate and helpful as possible. The
guidelines in this section help you create labels and hints that will make your application easy and enjoyable
for people with disabilities to use.
Guidelines for Creating Labels
The label attribute identifies the user interface element. Every accessible user interface element, standard and
custom, must supply content for the label attribute.
Note: A table row can also have a label attribute. However, the guidelines for creating a table row’s
label differ from the guidelinesfor creating labelsfor other types of controls and views. See “Enhance
the Accessibility of Table Views” (page 22) to learn how to create useful labels for table rows.
A good way to determine what a label should convey is to think about what a sighted user infers about your
application just by looking at it. If you’ve designed a good user interface, sighted users should know what a
control or view does in the current application context by reading its title or understanding its icon. This is the
information you need to make available to VoiceOver users in the label attribute.
If you provide a custom control or view, or if you display a custom icon in a standard control or view, you need
to provide a label that:
? Very briefly describes the element. Ideally, the label consists of a single word, such as Add, Play, Delete,
Search, Favorites, or Volume.
Strive to design your application so that a single word identifies an element and makes its usage obvious
in the current context. Sometimes, however, it might be necessary to use a brief phrase to properly identify
an element. When this is the case, create a very short phrase, such as “Play music,” “Add name,” or “Add
to event.”
? Does not include the type of the control or view. The type information is contained in the traits attribute
of the element and should never be repeated in the label.
For example, if you include the control type in the label of an Add button, VoiceOver users hear “Add
button button” every time they access that control. This experience would quickly become annoying and
might motivate users to stop using your application.
? Begins with a capitalized word. This helps VoiceOver read the label with the appropriate inflection.
? Does not end with a period. The label is not a sentence and therefore should not end with a period.
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
15?
Is localized. Be sure to make your application available to as wide an audience as possible by localizing
all strings, including accessibility attribute strings. In general, VoiceOver speaks in the language that the
user specifies in International settings.
Guidelines for Creating Hints
The hint attribute describes the results of performing an action on a control or view. You should provide a hint
only when the results of an action are not obvious from the element’s label.
For example, if you provide a Play button in your application, the context in which the button appears should
make it easy for users to understand what happens when they tap it. However, if you allow users to play a
song by tapping the song title in a list, you might want to provide a hint that describes this result. The reason
is that the label of the list item describes the item itself (in this case, the song title), not what happens when
a user taps it.
Note: VoiceOver users can choose whether to hear available hints by selecting an option in VoiceOver
settings on their device. Spoken hints are turned on by default.
If the results of a user’s action on a control or view are not clearly implied by its label, create a hint that:
? Very briefly describes the results. Even though few controls and views need hints, strive to make the
hints you do need to provide as brief as possible. Doing so decreasesthe amount of time users mustspend
listening before they can use the element.
That said, however, avoid sacrificing clarity and good grammar for brevity. For example, changing “Adds
a city” to “Adds city” does notsignificantly decrease the length of the hint, but does make itsound awkward
and a bit less clear.
? Begins with a verb and omits the subject. Be sure to use the third-person singular declarative form of a
verb, such as “Plays,” and not the imperative, such as “Play.” You want to avoid using the imperative,
because using it can make the hint sound like a command. For example, you don’t want to tell users to
“Play the song”; instead, you want to tell users that tapping the element “Plays the song.”
To help you find the right word, imagine that you’re describing the use of a control to a friend. You might
say something like “Tapping this control plays the song.” Often, you can use the second phrase in such a
sentence (in this case, “Plays the song”) as a hint.
? Begins with a capitalized word and ends with a period. Even though a hint is a phrase, not a sentence,
ending the hint with a period helps VoiceOver speak it with the appropriate inflection.
? Does not include the name of the action or gesture. A hint does not tell users how to perform the action,
it tells users what will happen when that action occurs. Therefore, do not create hints such as “Tap to play
the song,” “Tapping purchases the item,” or “Swipe to delete the item.”
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
16This is especially important because VoiceOver users can use VoiceOver-specific gestures to interact with
elements in your application. If you name a different gesture in a hint, it would be very confusing.
? Does not include the name of the control or view. The user getsthisinformation from the label attribute,
so you should not repeat it in the hint. Therefore, do not create hints such as “Save saves your edits” or
“Back returns to the previous screen.”
? Does not include the type of the control or view. The user already knows whether, for example, the
control or view behaveslike a button or a search field, because thisinformation is available in the element’s
traits attribute. Therefore, do not create hints such as “Button that adds a name” or “Slider that controls
the scale.”
?
Is localized. As with accessibility labels, hints should be available in the user’s preferred language.
Identifying Appropriate Traits
The traits attribute contains one or more individual traits that, taken together, describe the behavior of an
accessible user interface element. Because some individual traits can be combined to describe a single element,
the element’s behavior can be precisely characterized.
Note: Individual traits are combined using the OR operator. Outside of code examples, this document
usesthe shorter terms“combine” and “combination” withoutspecifying the method of combination.
A standard UIKit control, such as a button or text field, provides default content in the traits attribute. If you
use only standard UIKit controls in your application (and do not customize their behavior in any way), you do
not have to make any changes to the traits attribute of these controls.
If you customize the behavior of a standard control, you might need to combine a new trait with the control’s
default traits. If you create a custom control or view, you need to provide content for the element’s traits
attribute.
The UI Accessibility programming interface defines 12 individual traits, some of which can be combined. Some
traits characterize an element by identifying its behavior with the behavior of a particular type of control (such
as a button) or type of object (such as an image). Other traits characterize an element by describing a specific
behavior the element can exhibit, such the ability to play sound.
You use the following traits to characterize elements in your application:
? Button
? Link
? Search Field
? Keyboard Key
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
17? Static Text
?
Image
? Plays Sound
? Selected
? Summary Element
? Updates Frequently
? Not Enabled
? None
In general, traits that correspond to controls can successfully be combined with traits that describe behaviors.
For example, you might combine the Button trait with the Plays Sound trait to characterize a custom control
that behaves like a button and plays sound when it is tapped.
For the most part, you should consider the traits that correspond to particular controls, specifically, the Button,
Link, Search Field, and Keyboard Key traits, to be mutually exclusive. That is, you should not use more than
one of these traits to characterize an element in your application. Instead, think about which one of these four
traits corresponds most closely to the element in your application. Then, if your element has additional behaviors,
you can combine the first trait with one of the behavioral traits.
For example, suppose you display an image in your application that responds to a user’s tap by opening a link
in Safari on iPhone. You could characterize this element by combining the Image and Link traits. Another
example is a keyboard key that modifies other keyboard keys when it is tapped. You could characterize this
element by combining the Keyboard Key and Selected traits.
To see some examples of how traits characterize controls, you can use Accessibility Inspector to see the default
traits that are set on the standard controls. For information on how to use Accessibility Inspector, read “Using
Accessibility Inspector to Test Your Application” (page 27).
Defining Custom Attribute Information in Interface Builder
When you install iOS SDK 3.0, you get a version of Interface Builder that includes features that help you make
your application accessible. If your application contains standard UIKit controls and views, you might be able
to do all your accessibility work in Interface Builder.
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
18Using Interface Builder, you can set an element’s accessibility status and provide custom content for the label,
hint, and traits attributes. To do this, select the user interface element in your nib file and open the Identity
inspector. Reveal the Accessibility section in the inspector and you should see something like Figure 2-1:
Figure 2-1 Default accessibility information for a standard text field, displayed in Interface Builder
As you can see in Figure 2-1, the standard text field used in the nib file is accessible by default and includes
default information for the label, hint, and traits attributes. (Note that, for a text field that displays placeholder
text, the default label is the placeholder text.) You can change any of these default values by supplying new
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
19information in the Identify inspector, as shown in Figure 2-2. (Figure 2-2 also shows how Accessibility Inspector
displays the accessibility information for the text field. See “Using Accessibility Inspector to Test Your
Application” (page 27) to learn about Accessibility Inspector.)
Figure 2-2 Supplying accessibility information in Interface Builder
Defining Custom Attribute Information Programmatically
If you prefer, you can supply custom information for attributes programmatically. You might want to do this
if you’re not using Interface Builder at all or if you generate your viewsin code instead of using Interface Builder.
As described in “Make Custom Individual Views Accessible” (page 11), you can set accessibility information in
the implementation of your view subclass or in the code that instantiates the view. Both techniques are valid,
but there is one reason why you might want to implement attribute methodsin yoursubclassinstead ofsetting
attributes in the instantiation code: If your view displays data that is dynamic or that changes frequently, such
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
20as the time of day, you should implement the subclass methods to return fresh data as needed. For those
situations, if you only set attributes when you instantiate the subclass, the returned data is likely to be out of
date.
The code snippets in this section build on those in “Make Custom Individual Views Accessible” (page 11), by
including some of the attribute-specific methods. For example, if you want to implement accessibility methods
in your subclass, you would write code similar to that in Listing 2-2.
Listing 2-2 Providing attribute information in a custom subclass implementation
@implementation MyCustomView
- (BOOL)isAccessibilityElement
{
return YES;
}
- (NSString *)accessibilityLabel
{
return NSLocalizedString(@"MyCustomView.label", nil);
}
/* This custom view behaves like a button. */
- (UIAccessibilityTraits)accessibilityTraits
{
return UIAccessibilityTraitButton;
}
- (NSString *)accessibilityHint
{
return NSLocalizedString(@"MyCustomView.hint", nil);
}
@end
If you want to use the property-setting methods of the UIAccessibility protocol in the code that instantiates
your custom view, you can write code similar to that in Listing 2-3.
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Supply Accurate and Helpful Attribute Information
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
21Listing 2-3 Providing attribute information in the code that instantiates a custom subclass object
@implementation MyCustomViewController
- (id)init
{
_view = [[[MyCustomView alloc] initWithFrame:CGRectZero] autorelease];
[_view setIsAccessibilityElement:YES];
[_view setAccessibilityTraits:UIAccessibilityTraitButton];
[_view setAccessibilityLabel:NSLocalizedString(@"view.label", nil)];
[_view setAccessibilityHint:NSLocalizedString(@"view.hint", nil)];
}
Enhance the Accessibility of Table Views
If your application displays a table view in which each cell contains items other than (or in addition to) text,
there are a few things you can do to make it more accessible. Similarly, if your table view displays more than
one piece of information per row, you can enhance a VoiceOver user’s experience by aggregating the information
in a single, easy-to-understand label.
Note: If your table cells contain any of the standard table-view elements, such as the disclosure
indicator, detail disclosure button, or delete control, you do not have to do anything to make these
elements accessible. If, however, your table cells include other types of controls, such as a switch or
a slider, you need to make sure that these elements are appropriately accessible.
If the table cells in your application contain a mix of different elements, determine whether users interact with
each cell as a unit, or with individual elements inside the cell. If users need to access individual elements inside
the cell, you should:
? Make each individual element accessible separately.
? Make sure the table cell itself is not accessible.
? Succinctly describe the overall contents of the cell and use this description for the label attribute of the
cell. Note that, in this case, the label is considered to be one of the accessible elements within the cell.
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Enhance the Accessibility of Table Views
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
22You’ve probably recognized that a table cell that contains multiple items, such as text and controls, fits the
criteria of a container view, as defined by the UI Accessibility programming interface. However, you do not
have to identify the cell as a container view or implement any of the methods of the
UIAccessibilityContainer protocol, because the table cell is automatically designated as a container.
If your table contains cells that provide information in discrete chunks, you should consider combining the
information from these chunks in the label attribute. When you do this, VoiceOver users can get the meaning
of the cell’s contents with one gesture, instead of having to access each piece of information separately.
A good example of how this can work is in the built-in Stocks application. Instead of providing the company
name, current stock price, and change in price as separate strings, Stocks combines this information in the
label, which might sound like this: “Apple Inc., $125.25, up 1.3%." Notice the commas in this label. When you
combine discrete pieces of information in this way, you can use commas to tell VoiceOver to pause briefly
between phrases, making it easier for users to understand the information.
Here’s a code snippet that shows how to combine the information in the labels of two separate elements into
a single label that describes both:
@implementation CurrentWeather
/* This is a view that provides weather information. It contains a city subview
and a temperature subview, each of which provides a separate label. */
- (NSString *)accessibilityLabel
{
NSString *weatherCityString = [_weatherCity accessibilityLabel];
NSString *weatherTempString = [_weatherTemp accessibilityLabel];
/* Combine the city and temperature information so that VoiceOver users can get
the weather information with one gesture. */
return [NSString stringWithFormat:@"%@, %@", weatherCityString,
weatherTempString];
}
@end
Make Dynamic Elements Accessible
If user interface elements in your application can change dynamically, you need to make sure that the
accessibility information they supply is accurate and up-to-date. You also need to send notifications when
changes occur in the layout of application screens, so that VoiceOver can help users navigate the new layout.
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Make Dynamic Elements Accessible
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
23The UI Accessibility programming interface provides two notification types you can use when these kinds of
changes occur on the screen. (To learn about these notifications, see "Notifications” in UIAccessibility Protocol
Reference .)
If user interface elements can be in different states depending on other conditions in your application, you
need to add logic to your code that returns the correct accessibility information for each state an element can
be in. Because these changes can occur as the result of user actions, it’s best to add this logic to a subclass’s
implementation, not to the code that instantiates the subclass.
The following code shows how to handle dynamic state changes and how to send a notification when a screen
layout changes. The code represents the implementation of a UIView subclass that behaves like a custom
keyboard key. The key’s accessibility label changes depending on whether the instance represents a letter or
other type of character, and on whether a shift key is currently selected. The key also returns different accessibility
traits, depending on what type of keyboard key it represents and whether it is currently selected. Note that
the code in Listing 2-4 assumes that there are a number of methods that query the state of the keyboard.
Listing 2-4 Returning the correct accessibility information for the current conditions and sending a layout-change
notification
@implementation BigKey
- (NSString *)accessibilityLabel
{
NSString *keyLabel = [_keyLabel accessibilityLabel];
if ( [self isLetterKey] )
{
if ( [self isShifted] )
{
return [keyLabel uppercaseString];
}
else
{
return [keyLabel lowercaseString];
}
}
else
{
return keyLabel;
}
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Make Dynamic Elements Accessible
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
24}
- (UIAccessibilityTraits)accessibilityTraits
{
UIAccessibilityTraits traits = [super accessibilityTraits] |
UIAccessibilityTraitKeyboardKey;
/* If this is the shift key and it's selected, users need to know that shift
is currently in effect. */
if ( [self isShiftKey] && [self isSelected] )
{
traits |= UIAccessibilityTraitSelected;
}
return traits;
}
- (void)keyboardChangedToNumbers
{
/* Code to perform the change to a number keyboard here. */
/* Send a notification of this change to the screen layout. */
UIAccessibilityPostNotification(UIAccessibilityLayoutChangedNotification, nil);
}
@end
Make Nontextual Data Accessible
Sometimes your application displays data that’s not automatically compatible with the way accessibility works.
For example, if you display an image, you should provide a description of it in its accessibility label so that
VoiceOver users can understand the information the image conveys. Or, if you provide information in a graphical
way, such as a rating system that displays stars, you should make sure the accessibility label conveys the
meaning behind the graphical representation.
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Make Nontextual Data Accessible
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
25The following code snippet usesthe example of a custom view that drawsthe number ofstarsthat corresponds
to the rating of an item. The code shows how this view returns an appropriate accessibility label, depending
on how many stars it draws.
@implementation RatingView
/* Other subclass implementation code here. */
- (NSString *)accessibilityLabel
{
/* _starCount is an instance variable that contains how many stars to draw. */
NSInteger starCount = _starCount;
if ( starCount == 1 )
{
ratingString = NSLocalizedString(@"rating.singular.label", nil); // here,
ratingString is "star"
}
else
{
ratingString = NSLocalizedString(@"rating.plural.label", nil); // here,
ratingString is "stars"
}
return [NSString stringWithFormat:@"%d %@", starCount, ratingString];
}
@end
Making Your iPhone Application Accessible
Make Nontextual Data Accessible
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
26In iOS 3.0 and later, there are two complementary ways to test the accessibility of your application:
? The Accessibility Inspector in iOS Simulator
? VoiceOver on the device
For the best results, you should test your application using both methods.
Using Accessibility Inspector to Test Your Application
Accessibility Inspector displays accessibility information about each accessible element in an application. You
can use Accessibility Inspector to simulate VoiceOver interaction with the accessible elementsin your application
and examine the information they provide.
Note: Accessibility Inspector is ideal for testing the accessibility of your application during
development, but it is no substitute for testing your application with VoiceOver. For one thing,
Accessibility Inspector does not speak accessibility information, so you can’t hear how your element
descriptions willsound. After you’ve used Accessibility Inspector to make sure that your user interface
elements supply the appropriate information, you should test your application on a device, with
VoiceOver turned on, to make sure that it behaves as users expect. See “Using VoiceOver to Test
Your Application” (page 30) for some tips on how to do this.
Accessibility Inspector runsin iOS Simulator and allows you to see at a glance whether an element is accessible.
To start Accessibility Inspector, follow these steps:
1. Run your application in iOS Simulator (for more information on how to do this, see “Using iOS Simulator”).
2. In the simulated device environment, click the Home button to reveal the Home screen.
3. Open Settings and go to General > Accessibility.
4. Slide the Accessibility Inspector switch control to on. After you do this, Accessibility Inspector remains
active until you turn it off, even if you quit iOS Simulator and restart it.
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
27
Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone ApplicationAfter you perform these steps, you should see the Accessibility Inspector panel, as shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 Turn on the Accessibility Inspector in Settings
If this is the first time you’ve used Accessibility Inspector, you might also see an alert that warns you about the
different interaction model the inspector uses (this interaction model is described next). After you’ve read the
alert, click OK to dismiss it.
Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone Application
Using Accessibility Inspector to Test Your Application
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
28When you run your application in iOS Simulator, a single click simulates a single tap, and scrolling with the
mouse or keyboard simulates flicking or dragging with the finger. But when Accessibility Inspector is active, a
single click focuses the inspector on an element; it does not simulate a tap on the element. To simulate a tap
on an application element while Accessibility Inspector is active, double-click the element. When Accessibility
Inspector focuses on an element, it draws a shaded box around the element, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Accessibility Inspector draws a rectangle around the selected element
To simulate scrolling, you must first deactivate Accessibility Inspector. Then, you can scroll as needed and
reactivate the inspector when you’ve reached the desired area in your application. To deactivate or reactivate
Accessibility Inspector, click the close control in the upper-left corner of the panel (the close control looks like
a circle with an “X” in it). Note that clicking this control does not turn off Accessibility Inspector; to turn it off,
you need to set the General > Accessibility setting to off.
Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone Application
Using Accessibility Inspector to Test Your Application
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
29When Accessibility Inspector is not active, it appears as it does in Figure 3-3 and it does not affect the way you
interact with any simulated application features in iOS Simulator.
Figure 3-3 The inactive appearance of Accessibility Inspector
Using VoiceOver to Test Your Application
It's a good idea to test your application using VoiceOver, because it allows you to experience the application
in the same way that VoiceOver users will experience it. Using VoiceOver to run your application can expose
problem areas, for example, confusing labels, unhelpful hints, and unreachable elements, that make your
application less accessible.
Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone Application
Using VoiceOver to Test Your Application
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
30VoiceOver is a sophisticated application that provides many powerful features to users with disabilities. For
example, VoiceOver users can use an invisible dial, known as the rotor control, to change the results of some
gestures on the fly. Although you don’t need to become an expert VoiceOver user to test your application with
it, you do need to know a handful of basic gestures. This section describes how to activate VoiceOver and use
it to run your application. (To learn more about using VoiceOver, see iPhone User Guide , available at Apple -
Support - Manuals.)
First, go to Settings > General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and tap the switch control to turn VoiceOver on. If
you provide hints for any accessible elements in your application, check to make sure the Speak Hints switch
is on (it is on by default). Before leaving VoiceOver settings, make sure the Speaking Rate slider is adjusted to
an appropriate value.
After you’ve turned VoiceOver on, you’ll notice that many familiar gestures have different effects. For example,
a single tap causes VoiceOver to speak the selected item and a double tap activates the selected item. There
are also a couple of new gestures you should learn to make testing your application with VoiceOver easier.
The gestures you’re most likely to need for testing are listed below:
? Drag over the screen. Select and speak each item as you touch it.
? Tap. Speak the selected item.
? Two-finger tap. Stop speaking the current item.
? Flick right or left. Select the next or previous item.
? Double tap. Activate the selected item.
? Two-finger flick up. Read all accessible items from the top of the screen.
? Two-finger flick down. Read all accessible items from the current position.
There are also a few tasks you might need to perform. For example:
? Enter text on the keyboard. Flick left or right to select the desired key, then double-tap to enter the
character. Alternatively, you can drag your finger over the keyboard until the desired key is selected. Then,
while holding the selected key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger to enter the character.
Flick up or down to move the insertion point forward or backward in the text.
? Scroll a list or area of the screen. Flick up or down with three fingers.
? Adjust a slider. Flick up or down (with a single finger) to increase or decrease the setting.
? Unlock iPhone. Select the Unlock switch, then double-tap the screen.
When an element is selected, VoiceOver draws a black rectangle around it (similar to the shaded rectangle
Accessibility Inspector draws), which is called the VoiceOver cursor. While you’re testing your application you
can use the VoiceOver cursor as another way to make sure elements are being selected as you expect.
Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone Application
Using VoiceOver to Test Your Application
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
31To simulate the experience a visually impaired user might have with your application, you can run it with the
VoiceOver Screen Curtain in place. When you activate the Screen Curtain, VoiceOver turns the device display
off. Testing with the display turned off obliges you to rely on the information VoiceOver speaks and removes
the temptation to use your application as a sighted user would. To turn off the display while you use VoiceOver,
triple-tap the screen with three fingers. To turn the display back on, perform the same gesture again.
Testing the Accessibility of Your iPhone Application
Using VoiceOver to Test Your Application
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
32This table describes the changes to Accessibility Programming Guide for iOS .
Date Notes
2012-02-16 Added missing return statement to code listing.
2011-07-20 Minor typo fix.
2010-07-07 Changed the title from "Accessibility Programming Guide for iPhone OS."
New document that describes how to make an iPhone application
accessible to users with disabilities.
2009-05-29
2012-02-16 | © 2012 Apple Inc. All Rights Reserved.
33
Document Revision HistoryApple Inc.
© 2012 Apple Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, mechanical, electronic,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of Apple Inc., with the
following exceptions: Any person is hereby
authorized to store documentation on a single
computer for personal use only and to print
copies of documentation for personal use
provided that the documentation contains
Apple’s copyright notice.
No licenses, express or implied, are granted with
respect to any of the technology described in this
document. Apple retains all intellectual property
rights associated with the technology described
in this document. This document is intended to
assist application developers to develop
applications only for Apple-labeled computers.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, iPhone, iPod, Mac, Mac
OS, Numbers, OS X, and Safari are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of
Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used
under license.
Even though Apple has reviewed this document,
APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENT, ITS QUALITY, ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.ASARESULT, THISDOCUMENT IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” AND YOU, THE READER, ARE ASSUMING THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO ITS QUALITY AND ACCURACY.
IN NO EVENT WILL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY DEFECT OR
INACCURACY IN THIS DOCUMENT, even if advised of
the possibility of such damages.
THE WARRANTY AND REMEDIES SET FORTH ABOVE
ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHERS, ORAL
OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. No Apple dealer,
agent, or employee is authorized to make any
modification, extension, or addition to this warranty.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of implied warranties or liability for incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation or
exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty gives
you specific legal rights, and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
iPhone 4
Guide d’informations
importantes sur le produitCe Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit contient des
informations relatives à la sécurité et à la garantie de l’iPhone.
Des informations sur le recyclage, l’élimination et l’environnement
sont disponibles dans le Guide de l’utilisateur de l’iPhone à l’adresse
suivante : support.apple.com/fr_FR/manuals/iphone
±Pour éviter tout risque de dommages corporels, lisez tout le
mode d’emploi et les consignes de sécurité ci-dessous avant
d’utiliser l’iPhone. Pour prendre connaissance des instructions
d’utilisation détaillées, consultez le Guide de l’utilisateur de
l’iPhone sur votre iPhone à l’adresse help.apple.com/iphone
ou à l’aide du signet Guide de l’utilisateur de l’iPhone
disponible dans Safari. Une version du Guide de l’utilisateur de
l’iPhone et la dernière version du présent Guide d’informations
importantes sur le produit sont disponibles à l’adresse :
support.apple.com/fr_FR/manuals/iphone
Informations importantes concernant la
sécurité et la manipulation
ATTENTION : le non-respect de ces consignes de sécurité peut
provoquer un incendie, une électrocution ou d’autres dommages
corporels et endommager l’iPhone ou d’autres biens.
Transport et manipulation de l’iPhone L’iPhone contient des
composants fragiles. Évitez de laisser tomber votre iPhone, de le démonter,
de le chauffer au four à micro-ondes, de le brûler, de le peindre ou d’y
insérer des corps étrangers. N’utilisez pas l’iPhone s’il a été endommagé,
par exemple s’il a été fissuré, troué ou endommagé par de l’eau.
Le devant et l’arrière de l’iPhone sont en verre. Ce verre peut se briser
en cas de chute de l’iPhone sur une surface dure, d’impact important,
d’écrasement, de torsion ou de déformation. En cas de détérioration du
verre (ébréchure ou fissure), évitez de toucher ou d’essayer de retirer le
verre brisé. Arrêtez d’utiliser l’iPhone tant que le verre n’a pas été remplacé
dans un Centre de services agréé Apple. Toute détérioration du verre due à
une utilisation inappropriée ou abusive n’est pas couverte par la garantie.
Pour éviter tout risque de rayure ou d’abrasion, utilisez un étui vendu
séparément.
Nettoyage de l’enveloppe extérieure de l’iPhone Nettoyez
immédiatement l’iPhone s’il entre en contact avec tout produit
contaminant susceptible de provoquer des taches (encre, colorant,
maquillage, saletés, aliments, huile ou lotion). Pour nettoyer l’iPhone,
débranchez tous les câbles et éteignez-le (appuyez sur le bouton
Marche/Arrêt et maintenez-le enfoncé, puis faites glisser le curseur à
l’écran). Utilisez ensuite un chiffon doux, légèrement humide et non
pelucheux. Évitez toute humidité dans les orifices de l’appareil. N’utilisez
pas de produit de nettoyage de vitres, de détergent ménager, d’aérosol,
de solvant, d’alcool, d’ammoniac ou de produit abrasif pour nettoyer
l’iPhone. La surface de verre avant est protégée par un revêtement
oléophobe. Pour effacez les traces de doigt, essuyez cette surface avec
un chiffon doux et non pelucheux. Les propriétés oléophobes de ce film diminuent avec le temps et une utilisation normale. Évitez de frotter
l’écran avec un matériau abrasif, afin de ne pas altérer davantage ses
propriétés oléophobes et de ne pas rayer le verre.
Évitez l’eau et les endroits humides Évitez d’exposer votre iPhone à
l’eau ou à la pluie ou de l’utiliser à proximité d’endroits humides tels
qu’un évier ou des toilettes. Veillez à ne pas renverser d’aliments ou de
liquides sur l’iPhone. Si l’iPhone est mouillé, débranchez tous les câbles et
éteignez-le avant de le nettoyer. Laissez-le ensuite sécher complètement
avant de le rallumer. N’essayez jamais de sécher l’iPhone à l’aide d’une
source externe de chaleur telle qu’un four à micro-ondes ou un sèchecheveux. Les dégâts causés à l’iPhone par tout contact avec un liquide
ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.
Réparation ou modification de l’iPhone N’essayez jamais de réparer
ou de modifier l’iPhone vous-même. Il ne contient aucune pièce réparable
par l’utilisateur, hormis (le cas échéant) la carte SIM et le plateau SIM.
Le démontage de l’iPhone, notamment le retrait des vis extérieures et
de la face arrière, peut provoquer des dégâts non couverts par la garantie.
Si l’iPhone a été plongé dans l’eau ou perforé, ou qu’il a subi une chute
grave, ne l’utilisez plus avant de l’avoir apporté à un Centre de services
agréé Apple. La réparation ne doit être réalisée que par un Centre de
services agréé Apple. Pour toute question, contactez Apple ou un Centre
de services agréé Apple. Pour toute information relative au service aprèsvente, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/support/iphone/service/faq
Remplacement de la batterie N’essayez pas de remplacer vous-même
la batterie rechargeable de l’iPhone. Seul Apple ou un Centre de services
agréé Apple est habilité à remplacer la batterie. Pour en savoir plus sur le
service de remplacement de batterie, consultez la page :
www.apple.com/fr/batteries/replacements.html
Recharge de l’iPhone Pour recharger l’iPhone, utilisez uniquement le
câble Apple Dock Connector vers USB avec : (i) un adaptateur secteur
Apple USB Power Adapter ; (ii) un autre appareil ou accessoire Apple
conçu pour fonctionner avec l’iPhone ; (iii) un accessoire de tierce partie
portant le logo Apple « Works with iPhone » ou « Made for iPhone » ;
(iv) le port USB haute puissance d’un autre appareil conforme à la norme
USB 2.0 ou 1.1 ; ou (v) un adaptateur secteur conforme à une ou plusieurs
des normes EN 301489-34, IEC 62684, YD/T 1591-2009, CNS 15285, ITU
L.1000 ou une autre norme applicable d’interopérabilité pour adaptateur
secteur de téléphone portable. Il se peut que vous ayez besoin d’un
adaptateur micro-USB pour iPhone ou d’un autre type d’adaptateur
pour connecter votre iPhone à certains modèles d’adaptateur secteur.
Remarque : seuls les adaptateurs secteur micro-USB de certaines régions
conformes aux normes d’interopérabilité pour adaptateur secteur de
téléphone portable sont compatibles. Adressez-vous au fabricant de
l’adaptateur secteur pour vérifier si votre adaptateur secteur micro-USB
est conforme à ces normes.
Avant d’utiliser tout produit ou accessoire avec l’iPhone, consultez
l’ensemble des consignes de sécurité le concernant. Apple n’est
responsable ni du fonctionnement d’accessoires tiers, ni de leur
conformité aux normes de réglementation et de sécurité.Lorsque vous utilisez l’adaptateur secteur Apple USB Power Adapter
pour recharger votre iPhone, assurez-vous qu’il est correctement
assemblé avant de le brancher dans une prise de courant. Insérez ensuite
fermement l’adaptateur secteur Apple USB Power Adapter dans la prise
de courant. Ne branchez ni ne débranchez en aucun cas l’adaptateur
secteur Apple USB Power Adapter lorsque vous avez les mains mouillées.
Il se peut que l’adaptateur secteur USB Apple chauffe pendant une
utilisation normale. Veillez à toujours assurer une ventilation correcte autour
de lui et à toujours le manipuler avec précaution. Débranchez l’adaptateur
secteur USB Apple si l’une des conditions suivantes se présente :
 Le câble d’alimentation ou la prise est effiloché ou endommagé.
 L’adaptateur est exposé à la pluie, à des liquides ou à une humidité
excessive.
 Le boîtier de l’adaptateur est endommagé.
 Vous pensez que l’adaptateur doit être réparé.
 Vous voulez nettoyer l’adaptateur.
Prévention de la perte d’acuité auditive Il existe des risques de
perte irréversible d’acuité auditive en cas d’utilisation du récepteur,
d’un casque, d’oreillettes, d’écouteurs ou du haut-parleur à un volume
excessivement élevé. N’utilisez que des récepteurs, écouteurs, hautparleurs, oreillettes ou casques compatibles avec votre appareil. Veillez
toujours à activer le son et à vérifier le volume avant d’insérer quoi que
ce soit dans vos oreilles. Vous pouvez vous habituer petit à petit à un
volume de son plus élevé qui peut vous paraître normal, mais entraîner
une détérioration de votre audition. Si vos oreilles bourdonnent ou si
les sons vous semblent sourds, arrêtez l’écoute et rendez-vous chez
votre médecin pour vérifier votre audition. Plus le volume est élevé,
plus vous risquez d’abîmer rapidement votre audition. Pour protéger
votre audition, les experts donnent les conseils suivants :
 Limitez la durée d’utilisation à volume élevé des écouteurs, du hautparleur ou du combiné.
 Évitez d’augmenter le volume pour bloquer le bruit ambiant.
 Diminuez le volume si vous ne pouvez plus entendre les personnes
parler autour de vous.
Pour plus de renseignements sur la manière de régler un volume
maximum sur l’iPhone, consultez le Guide de l’utilisateur de l’iPhone.
Appels d’urgence Ne dépendez pas des dispositifs sans fil pour des
communications essentielles, notamment relatives aux urgences médicales.
L’utilisation de l’iPhone pour appeler les services d’urgence peut ne
pas fonctionner partout ou dans toutes les conditions d’utilisation. Les
numéros et services d’urgence varient par région, et il arrive qu’un appel
d’urgence ne puisse être passé en raison de l’indisponibilité du réseau
ou d’interférences dues à l’environnement. Certains réseaux cellulaires
peuvent rejeter les appels d’urgence effectués à partir d’un iPhone si ce
dernier n’a pas été activé, s’il n’est pas compatible avec un réseau cellulaire
particulier, s’il n’a pas été configuré pour fonctionner sur un réseau
cellulaire particulier ou (dans certains cas) s’il ne possède pas de carte
SIM ou que cette dernière est verrouillée par un code PIN.
Consignes de sécurité en cas de conduite L’utilisation d’un iPhone au
volant ou à vélo peut constituer une source de distraction. Si l’utilisation de votre iPhone au volant ou à vélo a pour effet de vous perturber ou de
vous distraire, quittez la route et immobilisez votre véhicule pour effectuer
ou recevoir un appel. L’utilisation de l’iPhone seul ou avec des écouteurs
(même dans le cas d’une utilisation dans une seule oreille), au volant ou à
vélo, n’est pas recommandée et est même illégale sur certains territoires.
Pensez à utiliser un kit mains libres avec votre iPhone. L’utilisation d’un tel
dispositif est obligatoire dans certaines zones géographiques. Consultez et
respectez les lois et réglementations en vigueur en matière d’utilisation de
dispositifs mobiles comme l’iPhone sur le territoire où vous conduisez.
Navigation en sécurité Ne vous fiez pas aux applications iPhone
fournissant des cartes, des boussoles électroniques, des itinéraires,
des informations sur les conditions de circulation, des directions ou
une assistance à la navigation géodépendante pour déterminer avec
précision un lieu, la proximité d’un lieu, une distance, des conditions de
circulation ou une direction. Ces applications ne doivent être utilisées
que pour une simple aide à la navigation.
Les applications cartographiques, géodépendantes ou proposant des
itinéraires reposent sur des services de données. Ces services de données
sont susceptibles de faire l’objet de modifications et ne sont pas forcément
disponibles partout. Les cartes, les points cardinaux, les directions, les
conditions de circulation ou les renseignements basés sur l’emplacement
peuvent donc se révéler indisponibles, inexacts ou incomplets.
L’iPhone contient une boussole numérique intégrée, située dans le coin
supérieur droit de l’écran. Les indications de cette boussole peuvent
être faussées par des interférences magnétiques ou météorologiques, et
notamment par la proximité des aimants contenus dans les écouteurs
de l’iPhone. Ne vous fiez jamais uniquement à cette boussole numérique
pour déterminer une direction. Comparez les renseignements fournis
sur l’iPhone avec votre environnement et reportez-vous aux panneaux
indicateurs pour résoudre toute différence existante.
N’utilisez pas d’applications géodépendantes lorsque vous réalisez
des tâches nécessitant toute votre attention. Respectez toujours les
panneaux routiers ainsi que les lois et réglementations applicables à
l’endroit où vous utilisez l’iPhone.
Véhicules équipés d’un coussin gonflable de sécurité (airbag) Un
coussin de sécurité (« airbag ») se gonfle avec une grande force. Ne stockez
pas l’iPhone, ni aucun de ses accessoires, dans la zone située au-dessus du
coussin gonflable ou dans sa zone de déploiement.
Épilepsie, malaises et fatigue oculaire Certaines personnes, représentant
un faible pourcentage de la population, peuvent subir des malaises ou
des crises d’épilepsie (même si elles n’avaient jamais présenté auparavant
de tels symptômes) lors de l’exposition à des stimulations lumineuses et
notamment en jouant à des jeux vidéo ou en regardant des vidéos. Si vous
avez déjà subi des crises d’épilepsie ou des malaises ou que vous avez des
antécédents familiaux en la matière, vous devez consulter un médecin
avant de jouer à des jeux vidéo (le cas échéant) ou de visualiser des vidéos
sur votre iPhone. Arrêtez d’utiliser votre iPhone et consultez un médecin si
vous ressentez des maux de tête ou que vous souffrez d’un malaise, d’une
crise d’épilepsie, d’une convulsion, d’une contraction musculaire ou d’une
gêne oculaire, d’une perte de perception, de mouvements involontaires
ou d’une perte d’orientation. Afin de réduire les risques de maux de tête, de malaises, de crises d’épilepsie et de fatigue oculaire, évitez tout usage
prolongé de l’iPhone, éloignez-le de vos yeux, utilisez-le dans une pièce
bien éclairée et observez des pauses régulières.
Risques d’étouffement L’iPhone et ses accessoires peuvent contenir de
petits éléments constituant un risque potentiel d’étouffement pour les
enfants en bas âge. Veillez à maintenir ces éléments hors de la portée
des enfants en bas âge.
Mouvements répétés Lorsque vous effectuez des tâches répétitives
telles que taper du texte ou jouer sur votre iPhone, vous êtes susceptible
d’éprouver une gêne occasionnelle dans les mains, les bras, les épaules, le
cou ou d’autres parties du corps. Faites des pauses fréquentes et si vous
souffrez de ses désagréments pendant ou après utilisation, cessez de
l’utiliser et consultez un médecin.
Atmosphères potentiellement explosives Éteignez votre iPhone
avant de pénétrer dans toute zone où l’atmosphère est potentiellement
explosive. Ne rechargez pas l’iPhone et respectez toutes les pancartes et
consignes. Toute étincelle dans une telle zone pourrait provoquer une
explosion ou un incendie et résulter en une blessure grave, voire la mort.
Les zones présentant une atmosphère potentiellement explosive sont
souvent, mais pas toujours, indiquées clairement. Il peut s’agir notamment :
de zones de ravitaillement en carburant (stations-services), des zones
situées sous le pont des bateaux, d’installations de stockage ou de transfert
de produits chimiques ou combustibles, de véhicules fonctionnant au
gaz de pétrole liquéfié (comme le propane ou le butane), de zones dans
lesquelles l’air est chargé de vapeurs chimiques ou de particules (particules
de céréales, de poussière ou métalliques) ou toute autre zone dans laquelle
il est généralement conseillé d’éteindre le moteur de son véhicule.
Utilisation des connecteurs, des ports et des boutons N’essayez
jamais d’insérer un connecteur de force dans un port, ni d’appuyer
de manière exagérée sur un bouton, car cela risque de provoquer des
dommages non couverts par la garantie. Si le connecteur et le port
ne s’assemblent pas facilement, c’est probablement parce qu’ils ne
sont pas compatibles. Vérifiez l’absence de toute obturation du port et
assurez-vous que le connecteur correspond au port et que vous avez
correctement placé le connecteur par rapport au port.
Accessoires et performances des communications sans fil Tous les
accessoires iPod ne sont pas nécessairement totalement compatibles
avec l’iPhone. L’activation du mode Avion sur l’iPhone peut éliminer les
interférences audio entre l’iPhone et un accessoire. Pendant que le mode
Avion est activé, vous ne pouvez passer ou recevoir des appels, ni utiliser
les fonctionnalités qui exigent une communication sans fil. Dans certaines
conditions, certains accessoires peuvent altérer les performances sans
fil de l’iPhone. Celles-ci peuvent éventuellement être améliorées par la
réorientation ou le déplacement de l’iPhone et de l’accessoire connecté.
Maintien de l’iPhone dans une gamme de températures
acceptables L’iPhone est conçu pour une utilisation à des températures
comprises entre 0 et 35 ºC (32º et 95º F) et un stockage à des températures
comprises entre -20 et 45 ºC (-4º et 113º F). Des températures élevées ou
basses peuvent réduire temporairement la durée de vie de la batterie ou
provoquer un arrêt momentané du fonctionnement de l’iPhone. Ne laissez pas l’iPhone dans une voiture en stationnement ou exposé à la lumière
du soleil car la température pourrait dépasser la plage de températures
de stockage ou de fonctionnement. Évitez les changements brusques
de température ou d’humidité lors de l’utilisation de l’iPhone car de la
condensation peut se former sur l’iPhone ou à l’intérieur.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’iPhone ou rechargez sa batterie, il est normal
qu’il chauffe. La partie extérieure de l’iPhone agit en tant que surface
de refroidissement qui transfère la chaleur de l’intérieur de l’unité vers
l’air qui l’entoure.
Exposition à l’énergie de radiofréquence L’iPhone transmet et reçoit
de l’énergie de radiofréquence (RF) à travers ses antennes. Les antennes
cellulaires de l'iPhone sont situées en haut et en bas de l'iPhone.
L'antenne Wi-Fi et Bluetooth® est située près du haut de l'iPhone.
L’iPhone est conçu et fabriqué pour respecter les limites d’exposition
à l’énergie RF définies par des instances de régulation internationales
comme la FCC aux États-Unis, Industrie Canada (IC)
au Canada, le MIC au Japon et le Conseil de l’Union européenne.
L’expression « Débit d’absorption spécifique », ou DAS, fait référence au
taux d’absorption d’énergie RF par le corps humain. Le DAS maximum
pour téléphone portable a été fixé à 1,6 watts par kilogramme (W/kg)
par la FCC et IC et à 2,0 W/kg par le Conseil de l’Union européenne.
L’iPhone a été testé
1
et répond aux normes d’exposition RF fixées par la
FCC, IC et l’Union européenne en ce qui concerne les réseaux cellulaires,
Wi-Fi et Bluetooth.
Durant les tests de DAS, l’iPhone est transporté en position normale
d’utilisation (c’est-à-dire contre le corps) et ses radios sont réglées sur le
niveau de transmission maximal. Les niveaux DAS maximum de l’iPhone
pour chaque fréquence d’utilisation sont indiqués dans un tableau à la
fin de cette section.
Les niveaux DAS relevés durant une utilisation normale peuvent être plus
faibles que les niveaux DAS maximum. En utilisation normale, l’iPhone
règle automatiquement sa puissance de transmission radio sur le niveau
minimum nécessaire pour communiquer avec le réseau sans fil.
Lorsque vous transportez votre iPhone, veillez à le maintenir à environ
1,5 cm (5/8 pouces) de votre corps pour vous assurer que l’exposition
demeure sous les niveaux maximum. Évitez les étuis comportant des
pièces métalliques.
L’exposition à l’énergie RF varie en fonction du temps et de la distance.
Si vous êtes soucieux de limiter votre exposition à l’énergie RF, réduisez
votre temps de conversation total avec l’iPhone et tenez ce dernier plus
éloigné de votre corps en utilisant l’une des nombreuses options mains
libres disponibles, notamment le haut-parleur intégré, les écouteurs
inclus avec micro intégré ou d’autres accessoires de tierce partie.
1
Cet appareil a été testé conformément aux normes et procédures de
mesure spécifiées dans les documents FCC OET Bulletin 65, Supplement
C (Edition 01-01), IEEE 1528-2003 et Canada RSS 102, 4e édition, mars
2010. L’iPhone respecte la recommandation du Conseil de l’Europe
du 12 juillet 1999 relative à la limitation de l’exposition du public aux
champs magnétiques [1999/519/CE]. Pour en savoir plus sur l’exposition à l’énergie RF, consultez la page FCC
consacrée à ce sujet : www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety
Pour en savoir plus sur la recherche scientifique liée à l’exposition à
l’énergie RF, consultez la base de données de recherche sur les champs
électromagnétiques fournie par l’Organisation mondiale de la santé :
www.who.int/peh-emf/research/database/fr/index.html
Bande de
fréquences
2
Corps
3
Tête Limite de DAS FCC et IC
1g (W/kg)
GSM 850 1,15 1,04 1,6
GSM 1900 0,99 1,08 1,6
UMTS II 1900 0,578 1,18 1,6
UMTS V 850 0,981 1,13 1,6
Bande CDMA de
800 MHz Classe 0
1,11 1,15 1,6
Bande CDMA
de 1900 MHz
Classe 1
0,649 1,18 1,6
Wi-Fi 2,4 GHz 0,191 0,372 1,6
Bande de
fréquences
2
Corps
3
Tête Limite de DAS UE 10g (W/kg)
EGSM 900 0,989 0,766 2,0
GSM 1800 0,695 0,959 2,0
UMTS I 2100 0,495 0,98 2,0
UMTS VIII 900 0,681 0,988 2,0
Wi-Fi 2,4 GHz 0,106 0,267 2,0
Interférences de radiofréquence Les émissions de radiofréquence
des appareils électroniques peuvent perturber le fonctionnement
d’autres appareils électroniques et engendrer des dysfonctionnements.
Bien que l’iPhone ait été conçu, testé et fabriqué pour respecter les
réglementations sur les émissions de radiofréquence dans des pays
tels que les États-Unis, le Canada, les États de l’Union européenne et le
Japon, les émetteurs sans fil et circuits électriques de l’iPhone peuvent
2
Votre iPhone peut être configuré pour prendre en charge une ou
plusieurs des bandes de fréquences indiquées, en fonction de la
technologie utilisée par l’opérateur et de la disponibilité du réseau.
La bande de fréquences utilisée par l’iPhone varie en fonction du
fournisseur de services de communication sans fil, de la technologie
de communication sans fil et de la zone géographique.
3
iPhone placé à 10 mm (13/32 pouces) du corps.provoquer des interférences avec d’autres équipements électroniques.
Nous vous recommandons donc de prendre les précautions suivantes :
Avion L’utilisation de l’iPhone peut être interdite dans les avions. Pour
en savoir plus sur l’utilisation du mode Avion en vue de désactiver les
émetteurs sans fil de l’iPhone, consultez le Guide de l’utilisateur de l’iPhone.
Véhicules Les émissions de radiofréquence de l’iPhone peuvent affecter
le système électronique des véhicules motorisés. En ce qui concerne votre
véhicule, renseignez-vous auprès du constructeur ou de son représentant.
Stimulateurs cardiaques L’association des fabricants du secteur de la
santé (HMA) recommande de maintenir une séparation minimale de
15 cm (6 pouces) entre tout téléphone sans fil portable et un stimulateur
cardiaque, afin d’éviter tout risque d’interférences avec ce dernier. Les
personnes portant un stimulateur cardiaque :
 doivent toujours conserver l’iPhone à plus de 15 cm (6 pouces) de leur
stimulateur lorsque le téléphone est allumé ;
 ne doivent pas transporter l’iPhone dans une poche de poitrine ;
 doivent utiliser l’oreille opposée au stimulateur cardiaque afin de
minimiser toute interférence potentielle.
Si vous avez des raisons de suspecter l’existence d’interférences, éteignez
immédiatement votre iPhone.
Compatibilité avec les appareils auditifs L’iPhone a été testé et classé
selon la norme de compatibilité avec les appareils auditifs C63.19-2007
de l’ANSI (American National Standard Institute). La norme ANSI mesure
les interférences de radiofréquence pour le couplage acoustique
(classement « M ») et le couplage inductif avec des appareils auditifs à
bobine d’induction (classement « T »). Les téléphones doivent obtenir au
minimum les notes M3 et T3 pour être considérés comme compatibles
avec les appareils auditifs selon les règles FCC.
Pour plus d’informations à ce sujet, consultez la section « Compatibilité
avec les appareils auditifs » du Guide de l’utilisateur de l’iPhone. Pour
connaître les classements actuels de l’iPhone en matière de compatibilité
avec les appareils auditifs, consultez la page : www.apple.com/support/hac
L’iPhone peut provoquer des interférences avec certains appareils
auditifs. Si c’est le cas, consultez votre médecin ou le fabricant de votre
appareil auditif pour trouver d’autres options ou solutions.
Compatibilité avec d’autres technologies de communication sans
fil Ce téléphone a été testé et classé en fonction de la compatibilité de
certaines technologies sans fil qu’il utilise avec les appareils auditifs. Il
se peut toutefois que certaines technologies sans fil récentes utilisées
dans ce téléphone n’aient pas encore été testées pour une utilisation
avec des appareils auditifs. Il est important de tester minutieusement
les différentes fonctionnalités de ce téléphone, dans des emplacements
différents, en utilisant votre appareil auditif ou un implant cochléaire, afin
de déterminer si vous entendez un bruit parasite. Pour obtenir plus de
renseignements sur la compatibilité avec des appareils auditifs, consultez
votre fournisseur de services ou le fabricant de ce téléphone. Si vous avez
des questions concernant les politiques de retour ou d’échange, consultez
votre fournisseur de services ou le revendeur de votre téléphone.Autres dispositifs médicaux Si vous utilisez tout autre dispositif médical
personnel, consultez son fabricant ou votre médecin afin de déterminer s’il
est protégé de manière adéquate contre les émissions de radiofréquence
de l’iPhone.
Établissements de santé Les hôpitaux et établissements de santé
peuvent utiliser des équipements particulièrement sensibles aux
émissions de radiofréquence extérieures. Éteignez l’iPhone lorsque le
personnel ou des panneaux vous y invitent.
Zones à explosion et sites signalés Pour ne pas interférer avec les
opérations d’explosion, éteignez l’iPhone dans les « zones à explosion »
ou dans les zones indiquant d’arrêter les dispositifs radio. Respectez
toutes les pancartes et toutes les consignes.
Certification et conformité
Reportez-vous aux renseignements sur l’iPhone pour connaître les
symboles de certification et de conformité propres à l’appareil. Ils
sont disponibles dans le menu Réglages > Général > Informations >
Certifications.
Australie/
NouvelleZélande
Canada IC : 579C-E2430A
Union
européenne
Japon
Mexique Singapour
États-Unis
ID FCC : BCG-E2430A
Important : tout changement ou modification de ce produit non autorisé
par Apple risque d’annuler la compatibilité électromagnétique (CEM) et
la conformité du fonctionnement sans fil, et de supprimer votre droit à
utiliser le produit. Ce produit a prouvé sa compatibilité CEM dans des
conditions incluant l’utilisation de périphériques et de câbles blindés
conformes entre les composants du système. Il est important d’utiliser
des périphériques et des câbles blindés conformes entre les composants
du système pour réduire la possibilité d’interférences avec des radios,
télévisions et autres appareils électroniques.Déclaration de conformité FCC :
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Déclaration de conformité au Canada
Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil
numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. This Class B
device meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference-causing
equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte
toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de licence
d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences et (2) cet
appareil doit accepter toute interférence, y compris celles susceptibles de
provoquer un fonctionnement non souhaité de l’appareil.
Conformité réglementaire dans l’Union européenne
Cet équipement est conforme à la Recommandation 1999/519/CE du
Conseil, du 12 juillet 1999, relative à la limitation de l’exposition du public
aux champs électromagnétiques (de 0 Hz à 300 GHz). Cet équipement
respecte les normes de conformité suivantes :
EN 300 328, EN 301 489-17, EN 301 511, EN 301 908, EN 50385
Cet appareil sans fil est conforme à la directive R&TTE.Déclaration de conformité pour l’Union européenne
???????????Apple Inc. ?????????, ?? ???? ?????????? ? ????????,
Wi-Fi ? Bluetooth ?????????? ? ? ???????????? ??? ????????????
?????????? ? ??????? ????????? ??????? ?? ????????? 1999/5/??.
Cesky Spolecnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že toto mobilní zarízení s
technologií Wi-Fi a Bluetooth vyhovuje základním požadavkum a dalším
príslušným ustanovením smernice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr
cellular, Wi-Fi og Bluetooth overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dasssich Mobiltelefon,Wi-Fi und
Bluetooth in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befinden.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc., et see mobiil-, Wi-Fi- ja
Bluetooth-seade vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this cellular, Wi-Fi, and
Bluetooth device is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente Apple Inc. declara que este
dispositivo celular, Wi-Fi y Bluetooth cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles
de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
???????? Me t?? pa???sa, ? Apple Inc. d????e? ?t? a?t? ? s?s?e??
????t??, Wi-Fi ?a? Bluetooth s?µµ??f??eta? p??? t?? ßas????
apa?t?se?? ?a? t?? ???p?? s?et???? d?at??e?? t?? ?d???a? 1999/5/??.
Français Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que l’appareil cellulaire,
Wi-Fi, et Bluetooth est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Islenska Apple Inc. lýsir því hér með yfir að þetta tæki, sem er farsími,
þráðlaus og með blátannartækni (e: cellular, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth,)
fullnægir lágmarkskröfum og öðrum viðeigandi ákvæðum
Evróputilskipunar 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che questo dispositivo
cellulare, Wi-Fi e Bluetooth è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Apple Inc. deklare, ka cellular, Wi-Fi un Bluetooth ierice
atbilst Direktivas 1999/5/EK butiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to
saistitajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuviu Šiuo„Apple Inc.“ deklaruoja, kad korinio,„Wi-Fi“ ir„Bluetooth“
ryšio irenginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB
Direktyvos nuostatas.
Magyar Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a mobil, Wi-Fi és
Bluetooth megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Malti Hawnhekk, Apple Inc. tiddikjara li dan l-apparat cellulari, Wi-Fi,
u Bluetooth huwa konformi mar-rekwiziti essenzjali u dispozizzjonijiet
ohra relevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het toestel cellular, Wi-Fi, en
Bluetooth in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.Norsk Apple Inc. erklærer herved at dette mobiltelefon-, Wi-Fi- og
Bluetooth-apparatet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og
øvrige relevante krav i EU-direktivet 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Apple Inc. oswiadcza, ze ten telefon komórkowy,
urzadzenie Wi-Fi oraz Bluetooth sa zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami
oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo móvel, Wi-Fi e
Bluetooth está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Româna Prin prezenta, Apple Inc. declara ca acest aparat celular, Wi-Fi
?i Bluetooth este în conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si cu celelalte
prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko Apple Inc. izjavlja, da so celicne naprave ter naprave Wi-Fi in
Bluetooth skladne z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi ustreznimi dolocili
direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že toto mobilné, Wi-Fi &
Bluetooth zariadenie splna základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä matkapuhelin-, Wi-Fija Bluetooth-tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna mobiltelefoni-, Wi-Fi-,
och Bluetooth-enhet står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av
direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Une copie de la Déclaration de conformité pour l’UE est disponible à
l’adresse suivante : www.apple.com/euro/compliance
L’iPhone est utilisable dans les pays suivants :
Restrictions dans la communauté européenne
Français Pour usage en intérieur uniquement. Consultez l’Autorité de
Régulation des Communications Electroniques et des Postes (ARCEP)
pour connaître les limites d’utilisation des canaux 1 à 13. www.arcep.fr
Déclaration de conformité au Japon - Déclaration
VCCI Class B
Conditions générales de l’iPhone
IMPORTANT : LE FAIT D’UTILISER VOTRE iPHONE, iPAD ou iPOD TOUCH
(« APPAREIL iOS ») IMPLIQUE QUE VOUS ACCEPTEZ D’ÊTRE LIÉ PAR LES CONDITIONS D’APPLE ET DE TIERCES PARTIES SUIVANTES :
A. CONTRAT DE LICENCE DU LOGICIEL iOS APPLE
B. AVIS D’APPLE
C. CONDITIONS GÉNÉRALES DE GOOGLE MAPS
D. CONDITIONS GÉNÉRALES DE YOUTUBE
APPLE INC. CONTRAT DE LICENCE DE LOGICIEL DE
L’APPLE iOS
Licence individuelle
LISEZ ATTENTIVEMENT CE CONTRAT DE LICENCE DE LOGICIEL
(LA « LICENCE ») AVANT D’UTILISER VOTRE APPAREIL iOS OU DE
TÉLÉCHARGER LA MISE À JOUR DU LOGICIEL FOURNI AVEC LA
PRÉSENTE LICENCE. L’UTILISATION DE VOTRE APPAREIL iOS OU LE
TÉLÉCHARGEMENT D’UNE MISE À JOUR, LE CAS ÉCHÉANT, IMPLIQUE
QUE VOUS ACCEPTEZ LES CONDITIONS DE CETTE LICENCE. SI VOUS
ÊTES EN DÉSACCORD AVEC LES CONDITIONS DE CETTE LICENCE,
N’UTILISEZ PAS L’APPAREIL iOS ET NE TÉLÉCHARGEZ PAS CETTE
MISE À JOUR. POUR LES ACHETEURS D’APPAREIL iOS, SI VOUS ÊTES
EN DÉSACCORD AVEC LES CONDITIONS DE LA LICENCE, VEUILLEZ
RESTITUER L’iOS DANS LES DÉLAIS IMPARTIS AUPRÈS DE L’APPLE STORE
OU DU REVENDEUR AGRÉÉ OÙ VOUS L’AVEZ ACQUIS (SON PRIX VOUS
SERA ALORS REMBOURSÉ), D’APRÈS LA POLITIQUE DE RETOUR
PUBLIÉE À L’ADRESSE http://www.apple.com/legal/sales_policies/.
1. Généralités.
(a) Apple Inc. (« Apple ») vous concède une licence, et en aucun cas
ne vous cède des droits, sur le logiciel (y compris le code ROM de
démarrage et autre logiciel intégré), la documentation, les interfaces, le
contenu, les polices de caractères et toutes les données accompagnant
votre appareil iOS (« Logiciel original de l’iOS »), pouvant être mis à
jour ou remplacés par des mises à jour de logiciels ou des logiciels de
restauration du système fournis par Apple (« Mises à jour du Logiciel de
l’iOS »), qu’ils soient sur mémoire morte (ROM) ou sur tout autre support
ou sous toute autre forme (le Logiciel original de l’iOS et les Mises à jour
du Logiciel de l’iOS sont référencés dans leur ensemble sous le terme de
« Logiciel de l’iOS »), uniquement en vue d’une utilisation conforme aux
conditions de la Licence. Vous êtes propriétaire du support sur lequel le
Logiciel de l’iOS est enregistré mais Apple et ses concédants conservent
la propriété du Logiciel de l’iOS et se réservent tous les droits ne vous
étant pas expressément accordés.
(b) Apple pourrait rendre disponible des mises à jour futures du logiciel
de l’iOS de votre appareil iOS. Le cas échéant, ces mises à jour peuvent
ne pas inclure nécessairement l’ensemble des fonctions du logiciel
existantes ou de nouvelles fonctions publiées par Apple dans le cas
des modèles de l’iOS plus récents. Les conditions de la présente licence
régissent les mises à jour du logiciel de l’iOS fournies par Apple et qui
remplacent et/ou complètent le logiciel original de l’iOS, sauf si ces
mises à jour sont accompagnées d’une licence distincte ; auquel
cas les conditions de cette licence s’appliquent.2. Utilisations permises de la licence et restrictions.
(a) Sujet aux conditions générales de cette Licence, une licence de
non-exclusivité limitée vous est accordée pour utiliser le Logiciel de l’iOS
sur un seul appareil iOS de marque Apple. À l’exception de ce qui est
permis dans la section 2(b) ci-dessous, et à moins que cela ne soit prévu
dans le cadre d’un contrat distinct passé entre Apple et vous-même,
cette Licence n’autorise ni le fonctionnement du Logiciel de l’iOS sur plus
d’un appareil iOS de marque Apple à la fois, ni la distribution ou la mise à
disposition du Logiciel de l’iOS sur un réseau où le Logiciel pourrait être
utilisé par plusieurs appareils. Cette licence ne vous accorde aucun droit
d’utilisation des interfaces propriétaires Apple ou d’autres propriétés
intellectuelles touchant à la conception, le développement, la fabrication,
la concession de licence ou la distribution d’appareils et d’accessoires, ou
à des applications logicielles de tierce partie, utilisables avec un appareil
iOS. Certains de ces droits sont disponibles sous des licences distinctes de
celles d’Apple. Pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur le développement,
d’appareils et d’accessoires de tierce partie adaptés à un appareil iOS,
envoyez un courrier électronique à madeforipod@apple.com. Pour en
savoir plus sur le développement d’applications logicielles adaptées à un
appareil iOS, envoyez un courrier électronique à devprograms@apple.com.
(b) Sujet aux conditions générales de cette Licence, une licence de nonexclusivité limitée vous est accordée pour télécharger les Mises à jour
du Logiciel de l’iOS qu’Apple peut mettre à disposition pour le modèle
de votre appareil iOS afin de mettre à jour ou de restaurer le logiciel de
n’importe quel appareil iOS en votre possession ou sous votre contrôle.
La présente licence n’autorise pas la mise à jour ou la restauration d’iOS
n’étant pas sous votre contrôle ou que vous ne possédez pas, et vous
interdit la distribution et la mise à disposition des Mises à jour du Logiciel
des iOS sur un réseau où elles pourraient être utilisées par plusieurs
appareils ou ordinateurs. Si vous téléchargez une mise à jour du logiciel
d’un iOS sur votre ordinateur, vous ne pouvez réaliser qu’une seule
copie des Mises à jour du Logiciel de l’iOS, stockées sur votre ordinateur,
sous une forme compréhensible par des machines et aux fins exclusives
de sauvegarde, à condition que cette copie de sauvegarde reproduise
impérativement les renseignements relatifs aux droits d’auteur ou autres
droits de propriété figurant sur l’original.
(c) Vous ne pouvez pas ou vous acceptez de ne pas, que ce soit pour
votre compte ou le compte d’autrui, copier (sauf et exclusivement dans
les limites permises par la présente Licence), décompiler, procéder à
l’ingénierie inverse, désassembler, tenter de dériver le code source du,
déchiffrer, modifier ou créer des produits dérivés du, Logiciel de l’iOS ou
tout autre service proposé par le Logiciel de l’iOS, ou de toute partie de
ceux-ci (dans toute la mesure permise par les restrictions précédemment
mentionnées applicables par disposition légale ou dans toute la mesure
permise par la présente Licence régissant l’utilisation de composants
Open source inclus dans le Logiciel de l’iOS). Toute tentative de ce genre
constitue une violation des droits d’Apple et de ses concédants de licence
pour le Logiciel de l’iOS. Tout manquement à ces restrictions serait par
conséquent susceptible de poursuites et de dommages et intérêts.
(d) Le stockage d’informations sur votre appareil iOS revient à créer une
copie numérique. Pour certaines juridictions, la reproduction numérique sans autorisation préalable du titulaire des droits de reproduction est
illégale. Le Logiciel de l’iOS peut être utilisé pour la reproduction de
contenu pour autant que cette utilisation se limite à la reproduction de
contenu non protégé par des droits d’auteur dont vous avez la propriété,
pouvant être reproduit ou pour la reproduction duquel vous disposez
d’une autorisation légale.
(e) Vous acceptez d’utiliser le Logiciel de l’iOS et les Services (tel que défini
dans le paragraphe 5 ci-dessous) dans le respect de la réglementation
applicable, y compris de toutes les lois locales du pays ou de la région
dans laquelle vous résidez ou dans laquelle vous téléchargez ou utilisez
le Logiciel et les Services de l’iOS.
(f) L’utilisation et l’accès à certaines fonctions du Logiciel de l’iOS et de
certains Services (tels que définis dans le paragraphe 5) peuvent vous
obliger à demander une combinaison unique de nom d’utilisateur et
de mot de passe, connue en tant qu’Identifiant Apple. Par ailleurs, vous
reconnaissez que de nombreux fonctions et Services du Logiciel de l’iOS
transmettent des données et peuvent entraîner des frais sur votre plan
de données, frais dont vous êtes responsable. Pour plus d’informations,
veuillez consulter le Guide d’utilisateur de votre appareil iOS.
3. Transfert. Vous ne pouvez ni louer, ni louer en crédit bail, ni prêter, ni
vendre, ni redistribuer, ni concéder de sous-licences du Logiciel de l’iOS.
Vous pouvez toutefois effectuer le transfert unique et permanent de
tous vos droits sur le Logiciel de l’iOS à une autre partie dans le cadre
du transfert de propriété de votre appareil iOS, à condition : (a) que ce
transfert comprenne votre appareil iOS et la totalité du Logiciel de l’iOS,
y compris l’intégralité de ses composants, données d’origine, documents
imprimés ainsi que cette Licence ; (b) que vous ne conserviez aucune
copie du Logiciel de l’iOS, complète ou partielle, y compris toute copie
stockée sur ordinateur ou toute autre unité de stockage ; et (c) que la
partie bénéficiaire recevant le Logiciel de l’iOS prenne connaissance et
accepte les conditions générales de la présente Licence.
4. Accord relatif à l’utilisation des données.
(a) Données de diagnostic et d’utilisation. Si vous choisissez la collecte de
données de diagnostic et d’utilisation, vous acceptez qu’Apple ainsi que
ses filiales et agents puissent rassembler, maintenir, traiter et utiliser des
informations de diagnostic, techniques, d’utilisation et afférentes, incluant,
sans s’y limiter, des informations concernant votre appareil iOS, votre
ordinateur, vos logiciels système et applications, et les périphériques ;
ces informations sont recueillies régulièrement pour faciliter la mise
à disposition de mises à jour de logiciels, d’assistance produits et de
services divers proposés au client (le cas échéant) relatifs aux Logiciels
de l’iOS et pour vérifier la conformité aux conditions générales de cette
Licence. Apple peut utiliser ces informations, en veillant à ce que l’identité
du client ne soit pas dévoilée, afin de proposer et d’améliorer ses produits
ou ses services au client. Si vous avez choisi et activé les Services de
localisation, l’emplacement de votre appareil peut également être envoyé
à Apple pour l’aider à analyser les problèmes de performances sans fil ou
cellulaires (par exemple, la puissance ou la faiblesse d’un signal cellulaire
d’un emplacement particulier). Pour permettre aux partenaires d’Apple
et aux développeurs tiers d’améliorer leur logiciel, matériel et services
conçus pour être utilisés avec des produits Apple, Apple peut également leur fournir un sous-ensemble d’informations de diagnostic qui sont
adaptées à leur logiciel, matériel et/ou services tant que ces informations
ne permettent pas de vous identifier.
(b) Informations de localisation. Apple, ainsi que ses partenaires et
titulaires de licence, peuvent vous fournir certains services basés sur des
informations géographiques via l’appareil iOS. Pour fournir et améliorer ces
services, lorsqu’ils sont disponibles, Apple, ainsi que ses partenaires
et titulaires de licence, peuvent transmettre, recueillir, conserver, traiter
et utiliser les données concernant votre localisation, notamment la position
géographique en temps réel de votre appareil iOS, les informations
relatives à la vitesse de votre parcours et les requêtes de localisation. Les
données et les requêtes de localisation sont recueillies par Apple dans
un formulaire qui ne vous identifie pas personnellement et peuvent être
utilisées par Apple, ainsi que par ses partenaires et titulaires de licence,
pour fournir des produits et services géodépendants. En utilisant sur votre
appareil iOS l’un des quelconques services gérant la localisation, vous
acceptez qu’Apple, ainsi que ses partenaires et titulaires de licence,
transmettent, recueillent, conservent, traitent et utilisent les données et
les requêtes concernant votre localisation pour vous fournir et améliorer
des produits et des services en fonction de celle-ci et de la circulation
routière. Vous pouvez retirer votre accord à tout moment en accédant
au réglage des services de localisation sur votre appareil iOS, soit pour
désactiver le réglage global des services de localisation soit pour désactiver
chacune des fonctions de localisation géographique des éléments utilisant
ce service sur votre appareil iOS. Le fait de désactiver ces fonctions
de localisation affecte uniquement les fonctions géodépendantes de
votre appareil iOS. Cela n’affecte pas les fonctions iOS non dépendantes
des services de localisation. Lorsque vous utilisez sur l’appareil iOS des
applications ou services tiers qui utilisent ou fournissent des données de
localisation, vous êtes soumis aux conditions générales et à la politique de
confidentialité en matière d’utilisation des données de localisation de ces
applications ou services et devez les passer en revue.
(c) Siri. Si votre appareil iOS prend en charge l’application Siri qui
comprend la fonction de dictée vocale, ces fonctions vous permettent
d’effectuer des demandes, de donner des ordres et de dicter du texte sur
votre appareil en utilisant votre voix. Lorsque vous utilisez Siri, vos paroles
sont enregistrées et envoyées à Apple pour qu’il traite vos demandes. Votre
appareil envoie également à Apple d’autres informations, telles que vos
prénom et pseudonyme, les noms, pseudonymes et relations entre vos
contacts et vous-même (par ex., « mon père ») et les morceaux de musique
de votre collection (définis dans leur ensemble comme vos « Données
utilisateur »). Toutes de ces données sont utilisées pour permettre à Siri de
mieux vous comprendre et de reconnaître ce que vous dites. Elles ne sont
pas liées à d’autres données qu’Apple pourrait avoir du fait que vous ayez
utilisé d’autres services Apple. De par l’utilisation de Siri, vous acceptez
et convenez qu’Apple et ses filiales et agents transmettent, recueillent,
conservent, traitent et utilisent ces informations, y compris vos entrées
vocales et les Données utilisateur, pour offrir et améliorer Siri et d’autres
produits et services Apple. Si vous avez activé les Services de localisation,
l’emplacement de votre appareil iOS au moment où vous effectuez une
demande est également envoyé à Apple afin que Siri puisse améliorer
l’exactitude de sa réponse quant à vos demandes de localisation. Vous pouvez désactiver la fonctionnalité de localisation de Siri en accédant au
réglage des Services de localisation de votre appareil iOS et en désactivant
le réglage individuel de la localisation de Siri. Vous pouvez également
désactiver Siri à tout moment. Pour ce faire, ouvrez les Réglages, les onglets
Généralités et Siri puis faites coulisser la commande Siri sur « désactivé ».
Vous pouvez également limiter la capacité d’utilisation de Siri dans le
réglage Restrictions.
(d) FaceTime. La fonction d’appel vidéo FaceTime du logiciel de l’iOS
(« FaceTime ») nécessite un accès Internet et peut ne pas être applicable
dans tous les pays ou toutes les régions. Votre utilisation de FaceTime est
soumise à votre respect du paragraphe 2(e) ci-dessus. Pour configurer
FaceTime, initier et recevoir des appels FaceTime d’autres utilisateurs de
cette fonction, votre appareil iOS et votre compte doivent être dotés
de certains identifiants uniques. Ces derniers peuvent inclure votre (vos)
adresse(s) électronique(s), les informations relatives à votre identifiant
Apple, un identifiant matériel pour votre appareil iOS et votre numéro de
téléphone iPhone. De par l’utilisation du Logiciel de l’iOS, vous acceptez
qu’Apple transmette, réunisse, conserve, traite et utilise ces identifiants
dans le but de fournir et d’améliorer la fonction FaceTime. Vous
comprenez que votre numéro de téléphone iPhone s’affiche sur l’écran
de l’interlocuteur de l’appel vidéo (même si vous avez un numéro bloqué)
ou que votre adresse électronique s’affiche en fonction du réglage choisi.
Si vous utilisez un iPad ou iPod touch compatible avec FaceTime, votre
adresse électronique s’affiche sur l’écran de l’interlocuteur de l’appel
vidéo. Pour désactiver FaceTime, vous pouvez vous rendre dans les
réglages FaceTime de votre appareil iOS et désactiver cette fonction
ou utiliser le réglage Restrictions et activer la restriction FaceTime.
(e) iMessage. Il se peut que la fonction de messagerie du Logiciel de l’iOS
(« iMessage ») ne soit pas disponible dans tous les pays ni dans toutes les
régions. L’utilisation de votre iMessage est soumise à votre conformité
au paragraphe 2(e) ci-dessus. Pour configurer iMessage et pour initialiser
et recevoir des messages iMessages entre vous et d’autres utilisateurs
de l’appareil iOS, certains identifiants uniques sont nécessaires pour vos
appareil et compte iOS. Ces identifiants uniques peuvent inclure votre
(vos) adresse(s) électronique(s), les informations relatives à l’identifiant
Apple, un identifiant matériel pour votre appareil iOS et votre numéro
de téléphone iPhone. De par l’utilisation du Logiciel de l’iOS, vous
acceptez qu’Apple puisse transmettre, rassembler, conserver, traiter
et utiliser ces identifiants dans le but de fournir et d’améliorer le
service iMessage. Le service iMessage doit être doté d’une connexion
Wi-Fi ou d’une connexion de données cellulaire. Pour faciliter la livraison
de vos messages iMessages et pour vous permettre de conserver les
conversations effectuées sur vos appareils, Apple peut conserver vos
iMessages sous forme encodée pendant une période limitée. Si votre
message ne peut pas être envoyé comme un iMessage, il sera envoyé
en tant que message SMS ou MMS, pour lequel un tarif de messagerie
risque de s’appliquer. Vous reconnaissez que votre interlocuteur pourra
visualiser votre numéro de téléphone iPhone (même si vous avez un
numéro bloqué) ou votre adresse électronique en fonction du réglage
sélectionné. Si vous utilisez un iMessage compatible avec iPad ou iPod
touch, votre interlocuteur pourra visualiser votre adresse électronique. Vous pouvez désactiver le service iMessage en accédant au réglage
des Messages sur votre appareil iOS.
(f) Photo Stream. De par l’utilisation de la fonction Photo Stream
d’iCloud, vous acceptez qu’Apple stocke les photos prises sur votre
appareil iOS ou téléchargées de votre ordinateur pendant une période
limitée et qu’il les envoie automatiquement sur vos autres appareils
iOS d’Apple ou ordinateurs compatibles avec la fonction Photo Stream.
Veuillez noter qu’il est possible de stocker un nombre limité de photos
à tout moment, et que les photos plus anciennes sont supprimées
automatiquement du Photo Stream au fil du temps. Toutes les photos
que vous souhaitez conserver doivent être enregistrées sur votre pellicule,
un autre album ou sur votre ordinateur. La résolution photo peut varier
en fonction de l’appareil sur lequel les photos sont téléchargées. Si vous
ne souhaitez pas utiliser le Photo Stream, vous pouvez désactiver cette
fonction sur tous vos appareils iOS ou ordinateurs compatibles avec Photo
Stream. Toute utilisation de la fonction Photo Stream est soumise aux
conditions du présent contrat et aux conditions d’iCloud disponibles à
l’adresse : http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/.
(g) Publicité par centre d’intérêt. Apple peut vous fournir une publicité
mobile basée sur vos centres d’intérêt. Si vous ne souhaitez pas recevoir
de publicité pertinente sur votre appareil iOS, vous pouvez décider de
ne pas participer en accédant au lien suivant à partir de votre iOS :
http://oo.apple.com. Si vous décidez de ne pas participer, vous
continuerez à recevoir le même nombre de publicités mobiles, mais
celles-ci pourront être moins pertinentes car elles ne seront pas basées
sur vos centres d’intérêt. Vous pourrez toujours voir des publicités liées
au contenu sur une page web ou dans une application, ou des publicités
liées à d’autres informations d’ordre non personnel. Cette décision
de non-participation s’applique seulement aux services de publicité
d’Apple et n’a aucune influence sur la publicité par centre d’intérêt en
provenance d’autres réseaux publicitaires.
(h) Engagement de confidentialité. Vos informations seront à tout instant
traitées conformément à l’Engagement de confidentialité d’Apple, qui est
incorporé à la présente Licence à titre de référence et que vous pouvez
consulter à l’adresse : www.apple.com/fr/privacy/.
5. Services et Éléments de tierce partie.
(a) Le Logiciel de l’iOS active l’accès à l’iTunes Store d’Apple, à l’App Store,
au Game Center, à iCloud et à d’autres services et sites web proposés
par Apple et par des tiers (lesquels services et sites sont dénommés sous
l’appellation collective ou individuelle de « Services »). Il se peut que
ces Services ne soient pas disponibles dans toutes les langues, ni dans
tous les pays. L’utilisation de ces Services requiert un accès à Internet
et certains Services nécessitent un identifiant Apple, l’acceptation de
conditions de service complémentaires et peuvent être soumis à des frais
supplémentaires. Par l’utilisation de ce logiciel en lien avec un identifiant
Apple, un compte iTunes Store ou Game Center, ou un compte iCloud, vous
acceptez les conditions de service applicables pour ce compte telles que
les toutes dernières Conditions Générales de l’iTunes Store ou du Game
Center, disponibles à l’adresse http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/.
(b) Si vous vous inscrivez à iCloud, vous pouvez accéder directement à
certaines fonctions d’iCloud telles que « Backup » et « Find My iPhone » à
partir du Logiciel de l’iOS. Vous reconnaissez et acceptez que l’utilisation d’iCloud et de ces fonctions sont soumises aux toutes dernières conditions
de service d’iCloud, disponibles à l’adresse :
http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/.
(c) Vous acceptez qu’en utilisant ces Services vous pouvez rencontrer du
contenu à caractère considéré injurieux, indécent ou choquant, n’étant
pas nécessairement identifié comme tel et que les résultats de toute
recherche ou toute saisie d’adresse URL peuvent automatiquement
et involontairement créer des liens ou des références vers du contenu
choquant. Vous acceptez toutefois d’utiliser les Services à vos propres
risques et dégagez Apple de toute responsabilité envers vous quant
au contenu pouvant être considéré injurieux, indécent ou choquant.
(d) Certains Services peuvent afficher, contenir ou mettre à disposition
du contenu, des données, des informations, des applications ou des
documents de tierce partie, (« Éléments de tierce partie ») ou fournir des
liens vers des sites web de tierce partie. Par l’utilisation des Services, vous
reconnaissez et acceptez qu’Apple ne peut être responsable quant à
l’examen ou l’évaluation du contenu, de son exactitude, de son intégrité,
de son actualité, de sa validité, du respect des droits d’auteur, de sa
légalité, de sa décence, de sa qualité ou de tout autre aspect de ces
éléments ou sites web de tierce partie. Apple, ses dirigeants, ses affiliés
et ses filiales ne peuvent ni garantir, ni assumer la responsabilité ou
l’engagement, envers vous ou toute autre personne, pour tout Service,
Élément ou site web de tierce partie, ou toute autre élément, produit ou
service externe à ces tiers. Les Éléments de tierce partie et les liens vers
d’autres sites web ne vous sont fournis qu’à des fins de commodité.
(e) Les renseignements financiers affichés par les Services sont donnés
à titre informatif seulement et ne devraient pas être conçus pour avoir
valeur de conseils en placement. Avant de réaliser toute opération
boursière basée sur les renseignements obtenus par le biais des Services,
il vous est recommandé de consulter un spécialiste financier ou boursier
qualifié juridiquement pour donner des conseils financiers ou boursiers
dans votre pays ou région. Les données d’emplacement sont fournies
par les Services à des fins de navigation uniquement et ne sauraient être
utilisées dans des situations dans lesquelles des données d’emplacement
précises sont requises ni dans lesquelles des données d’emplacement
erronées, imprécises, différées dans le temps ou incomplètes risqueraient
d’entraîner la mort, des blessures ou des dégâts matériels ou écologiques.
Ni Apple ni aucun de ses fournisseurs de contenu ne garantissent la
disponibilité, l’exactitude, l’intégralité, la fiabilité ou le degré d’actualité
des informations boursières, des données d’emplacement fournies ou
des autres données fournies par un quelconque des Services.
(f) Vous reconnaissez que les Services reprennent du contenu, des
informations et des éléments protégés appartenant à Apple et/ou ses
concédants, et protégés par les lois relatives à la propriété intellectuelle
et lois connexes, notamment, mais sans s’y limiter, les droits d’auteur.
Vous acceptez de ne pas utiliser ce contenu, ces informations ou ces
éléments propriétaire que dans le cadre de l’utilisation autorisée des
Services - et non dans le cadre de pratiques étant en contradiction avec
les conditions générales de cette Licence ou enfreignant tout droit de
propriété intellectuelle d’une tierce partie ou d’Apple. Aucune partie des
Services ne peut être reproduite sous quelque forme ou par quelque moyen que ce soit. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, louer, louer
à bail, prêter, vendre, distribuer ou créer de produit dérivé des Services,
de quelque façon que ce soit, et à ne pas exploiter les Services de façon
non autorisée, notamment, mais sans s’y limiter, en utilisant les Services
pour transmettre n’importe quel virus, ver, cheval de Troie ou tout autre
logiciel malveillant ou en entraînant une surcharge des capacités réseau.
Vous acceptez également de ne pas utiliser les Services de quelque façon
que ce soit pour harceler, insulter, abuser, traquer, menacer, diffamer ou
encore enfreindre ou violer les droits de toute autre partie, et qu’Apple
n’est en aucun cas responsable de tels agissements de votre part, ni de
toute transmission ou message de harcèlement, de menace, d’action
diffamatoire, offensant, non-respectueux ou illégal dont vous pouvez
faire l’objet suite à l’usage de n’importe lequel desdits Services.
(g) De plus, les Services et les Éléments de tierce partie, pouvant être
accédés depuis, affichés sur ou faire l’objet de liens accessibles depuis
l’appareil iOS, ne sont pas proposés dans toutes les langues ou dans tous
les pays ou zones géographiques. Apple n’apporte aucune garantie que
lesdits Services et Éléments sont adéquats à, et disponibles dans, n’importe
quel localisation géographique. Dans la mesure où vous choisissez d’utiliser
ou d’accéder à ces Services et Éléments, vous agissez de votre propre chef
et êtes de fait responsable du respect de la réglementation applicable,
notamment, mais sans s’y limiter, des dispositions légales applicables
localement. Apple et ses concédants se réservent le droit de modifier,
suspendre, supprimer ou désactiver l’accès aux Services à tout moment et
sans préavis. Apple n’est en aucun cas responsable de la suppression ou
de la désactivation de l’accès à ces Services. Apple peut également limiter
l’utilisation ou l’accès à certains Services, de quelque façon que ce soit et
sans donner de préavis ni en assumer la responsabilité.
6. Résiliation. La présente Licence demeure valide jusqu’à résiliation.
Vos droits découlant de la Licence prendront automatiquement fin ou
cesseront d’être effectifs sans notification de la part d’Apple si vous ne
vous conformez pas à l’une des conditions de la présente Licence. Après
résiliation de cette Licence, vous devez cesser toute utilisation du Logiciel
de l’iOS. Les sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12 et 13 de cette Licence peuvent
survivre à une telle résiliation.
7. Exclusion de garanties.
7.1. Si vous êtes en client à titre privé (vous utilisez le Logiciel de l’iOS
en dehors de votre entreprise, commerce ou profession), il se peut que
vous disposiez dans votre pays de résidence de droits en vertu desquels
les limitations ci-après ne s’appliqueraient pas, si tel est le cas, elles ne
s’appliqueront pas pour vous. Pour obtenir plus d‘informations relatives
à ces droits, contactez votre association des consommateurs locale.
7.2. VOUS RECONNAISSEZ ET ACCEPTEZ EXPRESSÉMENT QUE, DANS
LES LIMITES MAXIMALES AUTORISÉES PAR LA LÉGISLATION EN VIGUEUR,
L’UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL DE L’iOS ET DES SERVICES RESTE À VOS
RISQUES ET PÉRILS ET QUE VOUS ASSUMEZ L’INTÉGRALITÉ DU RISQUE, DE
MANIÈRE RAISONNABLE, RELATIF À LA QUALITÉ, AUX PERFORMANCES,
À L’EXACTITUDE ET AU MANIEMENT DU LOGICIEL.
7.3. DANS LES LIMITES MAXIMALES AUTORISÉES PAR LA LÉGISLATION
EN VIGUEUR, LE LOGICIEL DE L’iOS AINSI QUE LES SERVICES POURVUS PAR
CELUI-CI SONT FOURNIS « TELS QUELS » ET « SELON DISPONIBILITÉ » AVEC TOUS LEURS DÉFAUTS ET SANS GARANTIE D’AUCUNE SORTE. APPLE ET LES
CONCÉDANTS D’APPLE (COLLECTIVEMENT DÉSIGNÉS PAR L’EXPRESSION
« APPLE » DANS LE CADRE DES ARTICLES 7 ET 8 DE LA PRÉSENTE LICENCE)
EXCLUENT PAR LA PRÉSENTE LICENCE TOUTE GARANTIE ET CONDITION
RELATIVE AU LOGICIEL DE L’iOS ET AUX SERVICES, EXPLICITE, TACITE OU
LÉGALE, Y COMPRIS, MAIS DE FAÇON NON LIMITATIVE, LES GARANTIES
IMPLICITES ET/OU LES CONDITIONS DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE, DE QUALITÉ
SATISFAISANTE, D’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, D’EXACTITUDE,
DE JOUISSANCE PAISIBLE ET DE NON-VIOLATION DES DROITS DES TIERS.
7.4. APPLE NE GARANTIT NULLEMENT L’ABSENCE DE PROBLÈMES LORS
DE L’UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL DE L’iOS ET DES SERVICES, L’ADÉQUATION
À VOS BESOINS DES FONCTIONS OU DES SERVICES CONTENUS DANS
LEDIT LOGICIEL, LA NON-INTERRUPTION OU L’ABSENCE D’ERREURS DU
FONCTIONNEMENT DUDIT LOGICIEL ET DESDITS SERVICES, LA MISE
À DISPOSITION CONTINUE DES SERVICES, LA CORRECTION DE TOUT
DÉFAUT DU LOGICIEL DE L’iOS OU DES SERVICES, LA COMPATIBILITÉ DU
LOGICIEL DE L’iOS, OU SON BON FONCTIONNEMENT AVEC UN LOGICIEL,
UNE APPLICATION OU UN SERVICE DE TIERCE PARTIE. IL SE PEUT QUE
L’INSTALLATION DE CE LOGICIEL AFFECTE LE BON FONCTIONNEMENT
DE LOGICIELS DE TIERCE PARTIE, D’APPLICATIONS OU DE SERVICES DE
TIERCE PARTIE.
7.5. DE PLUS, VOUS RECONNAISSEZ QUE LE LOGICIEL ET LES SERVICES
DE L’iOS NE SONT PAS DESTINÉS OU ADAPTÉS À UN USAGE DANS DES
SITUATIONS OU DANS DES ENVIRONNEMENTS OÙ UNE DÉFAILLANCE,
DES RETARDS, DES ERREURS OU DES INEXACTITUDES DANS LE CONTENU
DES DONNÉES OU DES INFORMATIONS FOURNIES, LE LOGICIEL OU LES
SERVICES DE L’iOS POURRAIT PROVOQUER LA MORT, DES BLESSURES OU
DE GRAVES DOMMAGES CORPORELS OU ÉCOLOGIQUES, NOTAMMENT,
MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LE FONCTIONNEMENT D’INSTALLATIONS
NUCLÉAIRES, DE SYSTÈMES DE NAVIGATION OU DE COMMUNICATION
AÉRIENNES, DE SYSTÈMES DE CONTRÔLE DU TRAFIC AÉRIEN, D’APPAREILS
DE MAINTIEN ARTIFICIEL EN VIE OU DE DISPOSITIFS D’ARMEMENT.
7.6. AUCUNE INFORMATION OU AUCUN CONSEIL COMMUNIQUÉ
VERBALEMENT OU PAR ÉCRIT PAR APPLE OU L’UN DE SES REPRÉSENTANTS
AUTORISÉS NE POURRA CONSTITUER UNE GARANTIE. SI LE LOGICIEL DE
L’iOS OU LES SERVICES S’AVÉRAIENT DÉFECTUEUX, VOUS ASSUMERIEZ SEUL
L’INTÉGRALITÉ DU COÛT DE TOUT DÉPANNAGE, TOUTE RÉPARATION OU
RECTIFICATION NÉCESSAIRES. CERTAINES LÉGISLATIONS NE PERMETTANT NI
L’EXCLUSION DE GARANTIES IMPLICITES, NI LES RESTRICTIONS AUX DROITS
DES CONSOMMATEURS EN VIGUEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE L’EXCLUSION ET
LES LIMITES MENTIONNÉES CI-DESSUS NE VOUS CONCERNENT PAS.
8. Limitation de responsabilité. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR
LA LOI EN APPLICATION, APPLE NE SERA EN AUCUN CAS RESPONSABLE
NI DE BLESSURES, NI DE TOUT DOMMAGE ACCIDENTEL, SPÉCIAL, INDIRECT
OU CONSÉCUTIF, Y COMPRIS, MAIS DE FAÇON NON LIMITATIVE, LES
DOMMAGES RÉSULTANTS DE MANQUES À GAGNER, DE CORRUPTION OU
DE PERTES DE DONNÉES, D’ÉCHEC DE TRANSMISSION OU DE RÉCEPTION
DE DONNÉES, D’INTERRUPTION DES ACTIVITÉS OU TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE
COMMERCIAL OU PERTE COMMERCIALE RÉSULTANT DE OU RELATIFS À
VOTRE UTILISATION OU VOTRE INAPTITUDE À UTILISER LE LOGICIEL DE
L’iOS ET LES SERVICES OU TOUT AUTRE LOGICIEL OU APPLICATION DE TIERCE PARTIE UTILISÉ AVEC LE LOGICIEL DE L’iOS, QUELLE QU’EN SOIT
LA CAUSE, SANS TENIR COMPTE DE LA THÉORIE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ
(QUE CE SOIT POUR RUPTURE DE CONTRAT, EN RESPONSABILITÉ CIVILE
OU AUTRE) ET CE, MÊME SI APPLE A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE LA POSSIBILITÉ
DE TELS DOMMAGES. CERTAINES JURIDICTIONS NE PERMETTANT PAS
LA LIMITATION DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ POUR DOMMAGES CORPORELS,
INDIRECTS OU ACCESSOIRES, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CETTE LIMITATION NE
VOUS CONCERNE PAS. La responsabilité totale d’Apple envers vous au titre
de tout dommage (en dehors de ce que la législation pourrait exiger dans
les cas impliquant une blessure) n’excédera en aucun cas la somme de
deux-cents cinquante dollars (250 $). Les limitations susdites s’appliqueront
même si le recours indiqué ci-dessus fait défaut à sa vocation essentielle.
9. Certificats numériques. Le logiciel de l’iOS inclut des fonctions
permettant d’accepter des certificats numériques émis soit par Apple, soit
par des tiers. VOUS ÊTES PAR CONSÉQUENT RESPONSABLE DÈS LORS QUE
VOUS DÉCIDEZ DE FAIRE CONFIANCE À UN CERTIFICAT, QU’IL PROVIENNE
D’APPLE OU D’UN TIERS. L’UTILISATION DE CERTIFICATS NUMÉRIQUES
RESTE À VOS RISQUES ET PÉRILS. DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE
PAR LA LOI EN APPLICATION, APPLE NE DONNE AUCUNE GARANTIE
OU REPRÉSENTATION, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, QUANT À LA QUALITÉ
MARCHANDE OU L’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, LA PRÉCISION,
LA SÉCURITÉ OU LA NON VIOLATION DES DROITS DE TIERS CONCERNANT
LES CERTIFICATS NUMÉRIQUES.
10. Contrôle des exportations. Vous ne pouvez utiliser, exporter ou
réexporter le Logiciel de l’iOS que conformément à la législation des ÉtatsUnis et à la législation du pays ou des pays dans lesquels vous avez acquis
le Logiciel de l’iOS. En particulier, mais sans limitation, le Logiciel de l’iOS
ne peut être exporté ou réexporté (a) vers tout pays soumis à embargo
par les États-Unis ou (b) à toute personne figurant sur la liste « Specially
Designated Nationals » du Ministère des Finances des États-Unis ou sur les
listes « Denied Persons » ou « Denied Entity » du Ministère du Commerce
des États-Unis. En utilisant le Logiciel de l’iOS, vous déclarez et garantissez
que vous n’êtes pas situé dans, sous le contrôle de, ni ressortissant ou
résident de, un pays appartenant aux cas mentionnés ci-dessus ou inscrit
sur une des listes précitées. Vous acceptez également de ne pas utiliser
le Logiciel de l’iOS à des fins interdites par la législation des États-Unis, y
compris, mais sans aucune limitation, le développement, la conception, la
fabrication ou la production d’éléments nucléaires, de missiles ou d’armes
chimiques ou biologiques.
11. Gouvernement des États-Unis. Le Logiciel de l’iOS et la documentation
qui s’y rapporte constituent des « Commercial Items » (éléments
commerciaux), tel que ce terme est défini dans la clause 48 C.F.R. (Code
of Federal Rules) §2.101, consistant en « Commercial Computer Software »
(logiciel commercial) et « Commercial Computer Software Documentation »
(documentation de logiciel commercial), tels que ces termes sont utilisés
dans les clauses 48 C.F.R. §12.212 ou 48 C.F.R. §227.7202. Conformément à la
clause 48 C.F.R. §12.212 ou 48 C.F.R. de §227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, les éléments
« Commercial Computer Software » et « Commercial Computer Software
Documentation » sont fournis sous licence aux utilisateurs finaux rattachés
au gouvernement des États-Unis (a) uniquement comme « Commercial
Items » et (b) uniquement accompagnés des droits octroyés à tous les
autres utilisateurs conformément aux conditions générales ci-inclus. Les droits non publiés sont réservés en vertu de la législation des droits
d’auteur en vigueur aux États-Unis.
12. Loi applicable et divisibilité du contrat. Cette licence sera régie et
interprétée en conformité avec la législation de l’État de Californie, mis
à part les conflits en matière de principes légaux. Cette licence ne sera
pas régie par la convention des Nations Unies sur les contrats de vente
internationale de biens, dont l’application est expressément exclue. Si
vous êtes un client basé dans l’Royaume-Uni, la présente Licence sera
régie par la législation de votre juridiction. Si pour une raison quelconque
un tribunal ayant juridiction juge qu’une stipulation de la Licence est
inapplicable, en totalité ou en partie, les autres stipulations de la Licence
resteront entièrement applicables.
13. Intégralité de l’accord (langue prévalente). Cette Licence constitue
l’intégralité de l’accord entre vous et Apple concernant le Logiciel de l’iOS
et remplace toutes les propositions ou accords antérieurs ou actuels à ce
sujet. Aucun amendement ou aucune modification de cette Licence ne
prendra effet à moins d’être stipulé par écrit et signé par un représentant
dûment agréé d’Apple. Toute traduction de la présente licence est
effectuée pour les besoins locaux. En cas de contradiction entre la version
anglaise et toute autre version, la version anglaise prévaudra dans les
limites non prohibées par les lois locales de votre juridiction.
14. Bénéficiaire de la tierce partie. Certaines parties du Logiciel de l’iOS
peuvent utiliser ou comporter des logiciels de tierces parties et des
mentions concernant les droits d’auteurs. Les remerciements, les conditions
des licences et les exclusions de garanties desdits éléments figurent dans
la documentation électronique du logiciel de l’iOS, et l’utilisation de ces
données est dictée par leurs conditions respectives. L’utilisation du service
de navigation sécurisée Google est sujet aux Conditions d’Utilisation
(http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) et aux Règles de
Confidentialité de Google (http://www.google.com/privacypolicy.html).
15. Utilisation de MPEG-4 ; H.264/Notice AVC.
(a) Le Logiciel de l’iOS prévoit des fonctions d’encodage et/ou de
décodage MPEG-4. La Licence de ce produit vous est par conséquent
concédée d’après les conditions de la licence du portefeuille de brevets
de MPEG-4 Visual dans le cadre d’une utilisation privée à but non
commercial par un consommateur pour (i) l’encodage de vidéo en
conformité avec la norme MPEG-4 Visual (« Vidéo au format MPEG-4 »)
et/ou (ii) le décodage de vidéo MPEG-4 encodée par un consommateur
engagé dans une activité privée à but non commercial et/ou obtenue
d’un fournisseur vidéo sous licence de MPEG LA pour distribuer de
la vidéo au format MPEG-4. Aucune licence ne saurait être accordée
ou être considérée comme implicite pour toute autre utilisation. Des
informations complémentaires sur l’utilisation à des fins promotionnelles,
interne ou commerciale sont disponibles auprès de MPEG LA, LLC.
Rendez-vous sur http://www.mpegla.com.
(b) Dans la mesure où le Logiciel de l’iOS inclut la fonctionnalité de
décodage et/ou d’encodage AVC, l’usage commercial de H.264/AVC
requiert une concession de licence complémentaire et la disposition
suivante s’applique : LA PRÉSENTE LICENCE POUR LA FONCTIONNALITÉ
AVC DU LOGICIEL DE L’iOS N’EST ACCORDÉE QUE DANS LE CADRE D’UN
USAGE PERSONNEL ET NON COMMERCIAL D’UN CONSOMMATEUR POUR (i) ENCODER DE LA VIDÉO EN SELON LA NORME AVC ( AVC VIDÉO ») ET/
OU (ii) DÉCODER DE LA VIDÉO AVC ENCODÉE PAR UN CONSOMMATEUR
DANS LE CADRE D’UNE ACTIVITÉ PERSONNELLE ET NON COMMERCIALE
ET/OU DE LA VIDÉO AVC PROVENANT D’UN FOURNISSEUR VIDÉO
AUTORISÉ À PROPOSER DE LA VIDÉO AVC. LES INFORMATIONS RELATIVES
AUX AUTRES USAGES ET LICENCES SONT DISPONIBLES AUPRÈS DE MPEG
LA L.L.C. CONSULTEZ LE SITE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
16. Restrictions du service Yahoo Search. Le service Yahoo Search
disponible via Safari n’est octroyé en licence d’utilisation que dans les
pays et régions suivants : Allemagne, Argentine, Aruba, Australie, Autriche,
Bahamas, Barbade, Belgique, Bermudes, Brésil, Bulgarie, Canada, Chili,
Chine, Colombie, Corée du Sud, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Équateur,
États-Unis, Finlande, France, Grèce, Grenade, Guatemala, Hong Kong,
Hongrie, Îles Caïmans, Islande, Inde, Indonésie, Irlande, Italie, Jamaïque,
Japon, Lettonie, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malaisie, Malte, Mexique, Nouvelle
Zélande, Nicaragua, Norvège, Panama, Pays-Bas, Pérou, Philippines,
Pologne, Portugal, Porto Rico, République Dominicaine, République
Tchèque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Sainte-Lucie, Saint-Vincent, Salvador,
Singapour, Slovaquie, Slovénie, Suède, Suisse, Taïwan, Thaïlande, Trinité-
et-Tobago, Turquie, Uruguay et Venezuela.
17. Avis sur Microsoft Exchange. Le paramètre de messagerie Microsoft
Exchange tiré du Logiciel de l’iOS vous est uniquement concédé sous
licence pour bénéficier de la synchronisation sans fil de données, telles
que vos courriers électroniques, vos contacts, votre calendrier et vos
tâches, entre votre iOS et Microsoft Exchange Server ou un autre serveur
concédé sous licence par Microsoft pour mettre en application le
protocole Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
EA0790
Révision 15 août 2011
NOTIFICATIONS DE LA PART D’APPLE
Si Apple a besoin de vous contacter au sujet de votre produit ou de
votre compte, vous acceptez de recevoir des notifications par courrier
électronique. Vous acceptez que de telles notifications, qui vous
parviennent électroniquement d’Apple, satisfassent toute disposition
légale en matière de communication.
CONDITIONS GÉNÉRALES DE GOOGLE MAPS
Merci de votre intérêt pour la version d’évaluation du logiciel Google
Maps pour mobile. Pour pouvoir utiliser ce logiciel, y compris tout logiciel
tiers fourni conjointement et/ou service associé (collectivement désignés
“Google Maps pour mobile”), vous vous engagez à vous conformer aux
Conditions d’utilisation suivantes, qui s’appliquent à la fois à votre utilisation
personnelle et à toute utilisation en entreprise de Google Maps for mobile
(“Conditions d’utilisation”). Les Conditions d’utilisation constituent un
contrat entre vous et Google et vous devez prendre le temps de les lire
attentivement. En téléchargeant Google Maps pour mobile, vous vous
engagez à vous conformer pleinement aux Conditions d’utilisation.
Dispositions supplémentaires Google Maps pour mobile est conçu
pour être utilisé en conjonction avec les services Google Maps et d’autres
services Google. En conséquence, vous reconnaissez et acceptez que votre utilisation de Google Maps pour mobile soit également soumise (a) aux
conditions d’utilisation spécifiques de Google Maps (que vous pouvez
consulter à l’adresse http://local.google.com/help/terms_local.html), y
compris les conditions afférentes relatives aux contenus (que vous pouvez
consulter à l’adresse http://local.google.com/help/legalnotices_local.
html), (b) aux conditions d’utilisation Google (que vous pouvez consulter
à l’adresse http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) et (c) à la
charte de confidentialité Google (que vous pouvez consulter à l’adresse
http://www.google.com/privacypolicy.html), ces dispositions étant
incorporées dans les présentes Conditions d’utilisation par référence. En
cas d’incohérence ou de contradiction entre les conditions d’utilisation
supplémentaires et ces Conditions d’utilisation, les dispositions de ces
Conditions d’utilisation sont prioritaires.
Frais liés au réseau Google ne facture ni le téléchargement de
Google Maps pour mobile ni son utilisation ; néanmoins, selon votre
abonnement et votre opérateur/fournisseur, votre opérateur ou un autre
fournisseur peut vous facturer le téléchargement de Google Maps pour
mobile ou l’utilisation de votre téléphone mobile lorsque vous accédez
à des informations ou à des services Google par l’intermédiaire de
Google Maps pour mobile.
Usage non commercial uniquement Google Maps pour mobile vous
est fourni uniquement pour un usage personnel et non commercial.
“Usage non commercial” signifie que Google vous accorde un droit limité
d’usage personnel de Google Maps pour mobile à votre domicile ou sur
votre lieu de travail, pour effectuer n’importe quelle recherche, dans les
limites des présentes Conditions d’utilisation.
Vous pouvez créer et distribuer des copies de Google Maps pour mobile
pour une utilisation au sein de l’organisation de votre employeur
(“Utilisation en entreprise”) dans l’une des situations suivantes :
(a) tous les individus de l’organisation concernée qui seront amenés
à utiliser Google Maps pour mobile ont eu la possibilité de lire ces
Conditions d’utilisation et d’indiquer formellement leur accord (et vous
vous engagez à en fournir la preuve sur demande de Google) ; OU
(b) vous possédez la capacité légale et l’autorisation requise pour
engager la responsabilité de l’organisation au sein de laquelle vous
prévoyez d’utiliser Google Maps pour mobile (et vous vous engagez
à en fournir la preuve sur demande de Google).
Si vous ne possédez pas cette autorité ou si les personnes concernées
n’ont pas la possibilité de lire ces Conditions d’utilisation et d’indiquer
leur accord comme spécifié ci-dessus, l’Utilisation en entreprise n’est
pas autorisée. Pour toute question concernant l’Utilisation en entreprise,
envoyez un e-mail à l’adresse mobile-support@google.com.
Vous n’êtes pas autorisé à vendre Google Maps pour mobile ou toute
information, service ou logiciel associé à Google Maps pour mobile ou
dérivé de Google Maps pour mobile, ni à le modifier, le copier (en dehors
des conditions dans lesquelles la copie est autorisée dans le cadre de
l’Utilisation en entreprise, qui sont décrites plus haut, le cas échéant), en
octroyer une licence ou créer des produits dérivés à partir de Google Maps
pour mobile sans un accord écrit préalable de Google (pour demander
cet accord, envoyez un e-mail à l’adresse mobile-support@google.com).Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter, traduire, décompiler ou
désassembler Google Maps pour mobile, en tirer des produits dérivés
ou tenter de toute autre façon d’en exploiter le code source sans avoir
préalablement obtenu l’accord écrit de Google de la manière décrite
plus haut.
Google Maps pour mobile ne doit être utilisé d’aucune façon qui
risquerait d’endommager, de désactiver, de surcharger ou d’altérer
les services Google (par exemple, vous ne pouvez pas automatiser
l’utilisation de Google Maps pour mobile), ni d’aucune manière
susceptible d’avoir une incidence sur l’utilisation et la jouissance,
par d’autres parties, des services Google.
Si vous avez des commentaires sur Google Maps pour mobile ou des
idées d’améliorations, envoyez un e-mail à l’adresse mobile-support@
google.com. Notez que ce faisant, vous accordez à Google et à des
tierces parties l’autorisation d’utiliser vos idées et commentaires et de
les incorporer dans Google Maps pour mobile (ou dans un logiciel tiers)
sans compensation.
Propriété intellectuelle Entre vous-même et Google, vous reconnaissez
et acceptez le fait que Google possède tous les droits, titres et intérêts
relatifs à Google Maps pour mobile, y compris de façon non limitative
tous les droits de propriété intellectuelle inclus. Les “Droits de propriété
intellectuelle” désignent tous les droits couvrant les inventions, brevets,
marques commerciales et marques de services, droits de conception,
appellations commerciales et d’entreprise, droits d’auteur (y compris,
pour éviter toute confusion, les droits relatifs aux logiciels informatiques),
bases de données et topographies de semi-conducteurs (que ces droits
aient été déposés ou pas et même si leur dépôt est en cours) et tous
les droits et formes de protection de même nature ou équivalentes
applicables dans tous les pays.
Vous vous engagez à ne pas supprimer, masquer ou modifier les
mentions de droits de propriété contenues ou accessibles directement
ou indirectement dans Google Maps pour mobile et dans le cadre de
son utilisation (y compris mais de façon non limitative les mentions de
copyright ou de marques liées aux droits détenus par Google ou toute
tierce partie).
Limitation de garantie Google peut apporter des modifications ou des
améliorations à Google Maps pour mobile sans notification préalable.
Google Maps pour mobile est fourni “en l’état” et Google n’offre aucune
garantie en ce qui le concerne. Sans limiter la portée générale des
clauses susmentionnées, Google ne garantit pas que : (i) l’utilisation de
Google Maps pour mobile réponde à vos besoins, soit ininterrompue,
sécurisée ou ne comporte pas d’erreur, (ii) les défauts soient corrigés, (iii)
Google Maps pour mobile ne contienne pas de virus ou d’autres logiciels
malveillants, et (iv) l’utilisation de Google Maps pour mobile et des
informations accessibles par l’intermédiaire de Google Maps pour mobile
soient correctes, précises, à jour ou fiables d’une manière quelconque.
Aucune condition, garantie ou autre disposition (y compris les garanties
implicites de qualité, d’adaptation à un usage particulier ou de conformité
à la description) ne s’applique à Google Maps pour mobile en dehors des
mentions expresses contenues dans ces Conditions d’utilisation.Limitation de responsabilité Aucune disposition des présentes Conditions
d’utilisation n’a pour but d’exclure ou de limiter la responsabilité de
Google dans le cas où une négligence, une fraude ou une présentation
erronée de la part de Google pourrait provoquer un décès ou des
dommages corporels. Selon ces termes, Google ne saurait être tenue pour
responsable envers vous (a) de perte indirecte ou consécutive ; (b) de
perte financière ; ou (c) de perte de réputation ou de clientèle dont vous
pourriez être victime suite à votre utilisation de Google Maps pour mobile,
que Google ait été informée ou non de la possibilité de ces pertes. De plus,
Google ne saurait être tenue pour responsable envers vous d’erreur ou
de défectuosité liée à votre utilisation de Google Maps pour mobile, ni de
quelque interruption, suspension, expiration, défaillance ou retard dans le
fonctionnement de Google Maps pour mobile que ce soit.
Dispositions diverses Les présentes Conditions d’utilisation sont régies
et interprétées conformément aux lois anglaises et vous vous engagez
par les présentes Conditions d’utilisation à ce que tout différend soit jugé
exclusivement dans le cadre de cette juridiction, qu’il découle de ces
Conditions d’utilisation ou soit en relation avec elles. Toute traduction
de la version en langue anglaise des éléments juridiques anglais de
ces Conditions d’utilisation (“Dispositions d’origine”) n’est fournie qu’à
titre indicatif et vous acceptez que, en cas de conflit entre la version
traduite et les Dispositions d’origine, ce soient les Dispositions d’origine
qui s’appliquent. Dans le cas où des dispositions de ces Conditions
d’utilisation ne seraient pas valides ou seraient illégales ou inapplicables,
cela n’aurait aucun impact sur les Conditions d’utilisation restantes.
Les présentes Conditions d’utilisation constituent l’intégralité de l’accord
entre vous et Google en ce qui concerne l’utilisation de Google Maps pour
mobile. Elles se substituent à tout accord ou échange précédent ou actuel,
écrit ou oral. Toute renonciation à l’une des dispositions des présentes
Conditions d’utilisation ne prendra effet que si elle est produite sous
forme écrite et signée par un représentant dûment autorisé de Google.
Septembre 2007
YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
http://www.youtube.com/t/terms
Garantie d’Apple Limitée à un (1) an - iPhone
Pour les produits de marque Apple uniquement
EN QUOI LE DROIT DE LA CONSOMMATION SE RAPPORTE-T-IL A CETTE
GARANTIE. CETTE GARANTIE VOUS CONFERE DES DROITS SPECIFIQUES ET
IL SE PEUT QUE VOUS BENEFICIIEZ D’AUTRES DROITS EN FONCTION DE
VOTRE PAYS, REGION OU ETAT, Y COMPRIS POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS
FRANÇAIS LES DROITS DETAILLES CI-DESSOUS.
A L’EXCEPTION DE CE QUI EST AUTORISE PAR LA LOI, APPLE N’EXCLUT,
NE LIMITE NI NE SUSPEND AUCUN DES AUTRES DROITS DONT VOUS
POURRIEZ BENEFICIER, NOTAMMENT CEUX RESULTANT DE LA GARANTIE
LEGALE DE CONFORMITÉ ATTACHEE AU CONTRAT DE VENTE. AFIN DE
PRENDRE PLEINEMENT CONNAISSANCE DE VOS DROITS, NOUS VOUS
INVITONS A CONSULTER LES LOIS DE VOTRE PAYS, REGION OU ETAT.LES LIMITATIONS DE GARANTIE POUVANT AFFECTER LE DROIT DE LA
CONSOMMATION. DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI, LA PRESENTE
GARANTIE ET LES RECOURS STIPULES CI-DESSUS SONT EXCLUSIFS ET
SONT EN LIEU ET PLACE DE TOUTES AUTRES GARANTIES, RECOURS ET
DROITS, QU’ILS SOIENT ECRITS OU ORAUX, LEGAUX, EXPRES OU TACITES.
APPLE EXCLUT EXPRESSEMENT TOUTES GARANTIES LEGALES ET TACITES,
Y COMPRIS ET SANS QUE CETTE LISTE NE SOIT LIMITATIVE, LES GARANTIES
DE QUALITE MARCHANDE, DE CONFORMITE A UN USAGE PARTICULIER
ET DES VICES CACHES OU LATENTS, DANS LA MESURE DE CE QUI EST
PERMIS PAR LA LOI. SI CES GARANTIES NE PEUVENT PAS VALABLEMENT
ETRE EXCLUES, APPLE LIMITERA, DANS LA MESURE AUTORISEE, LA DUREE
DE CELLES-CI ET LES RECOURS Y AFFERENTS, A LA DUREE DE LA PRESENTE
GARANTIE COMMERCIALE ET, A LA DISCRETION D’APPLE, A LA REPARATION
OU AU REMPLACEMENT DU PRODUIT, COMME DECRIT CI-DESSOUS.
CERTAINS PAYS, ETATS OU REGIONS N’AUTORISENT PAS LA LIMITATION
DE LA DUREE DES GARANTIES LEGALES. DE CE FAIT, LES LIMITATIONS
PREVUES CI-DESSUS PEUVENT NE PAS S’APPLIQUER A VOUS.
CE QUI EST COUVERT PAR LA PRESENTE GARANTIE COMMERCIALE.
Apple garantit le produit de marque Apple et ses accessoires tels que
contenus dans l’emballage d’origine (le “Produit Apple”) contre les vices
de fabrication et de matière, dans des conditions normales d’utilisation,
conformément aux instructions diffusées par Apple, pour une durée de
UN (1) AN à compter de la date d’achat par l’acheteur final (“Durée de la
Garantie”). Les instructions diffusées par Apple incluent, sans limitation,
les informations contenues dans la documentation technique, les
manuels d’utilisation et les communications.
CE QUI N’EST PAS COUVERT PAS LA PRESENTE GARANTIE COMMERCIALE.
La présente garantie commerciale ne s’applique pas aux produits ou
logiciels qui ne sont pas de la marque Apple, même s’ils sont emballés
ou vendus avec un Produit Apple. Les fabricants, fournisseurs ou éditeurs
autres que Apple peuvent vous fournir leurs propres garanties mais Apple,
dans la mesure de ce qui est permis par la loi, fournit leurs produits
« en l’état ». Les logiciels distribués par Apple, sous la marque Apple ou
non, (y compris, de façon non limitative, les logiciels de système) ne sont
pas couverts par cette garantie. Nous vous prions de bien vouloir vous
reporter au contrat de licence accompagnant le logiciel pour les détails
de vos droits concernant son utilisation. Apple ne garantit pas que le
fonctionnement du Produit Apple sera ininterrompu ou sans erreur.
Apple n’est pas responsable des dommages provenant du non-respect
des instructions d’utilisation du produit.
Cette garantie ne s’applique pas : (a) aux pièces consommables, telles
que les batteries ou les revêtements de protection qui par nature se
consument ou se dégradent au fil du temps, sauf si le dommage est dû
à un vice de matière ou de fabrication ; (b) à tout dommage esthétique,
comprenant notamment toute rayure, bosse ou élément en plastique
de ports cassé ; (c) à tout dommage causé par l’utilisation avec un
autre produit ; (d) à tout dommage causé par accident, abus, mauvaise
utilisation, contact avec des éléments liquides, feu, tremblement de
terre ou autres causes extérieures ; (e) à tout dommage causé par une
utilisation du Produit Apple non conforme aux instructions diffusées
par Apple ; (f) à tout dommage causé par toute intervention (y compris les mises à niveau et les extensions) effectuée par toute personne qui
n’est pas un représentant d’Apple ou un prestataire de services agréé
Apple (“PSAA”); (g) à un Produit Apple qui a été modifié de telle manière
à en altérer les fonctionnalités ou les capacités sans l’autorisation écrite
d’Apple ; (h) aux défauts causés par une usure normale ou dus au
vieillissement normal du produit ; ou (i) si un numéro de série Apple
a été enlevé du Produit Apple ou rendu illisible.
RESTRICTION IMPORTANTE. Apple peut restreindre le service de garantie
au pays dans lequel Apple ou ses distributeurs agréés ont vendus le
Produit Apple à l’origine.
VOS RESPONSABILITES. NOUS VOUS RECOMMANDONS D’EFFECTUER DES
COPIES DE SAUVEGARDE PERIODIQUES DES INFORMATIONS CONTENUES
SUR LE SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE DU PRODUIT APPLE AFIN D’EN
PROTEGER LE CONTENU ET DE VOUS PREMUNIR CONTRE D’EVENTUELLES
DEFAILLANCES DE FONCTIONNEMENT.
Avant de pouvoir bénéficier du service de garantie, Apple ou ses
représentants peuvent vous demander de fournir une preuve d’achat, de
répondre à des questions dans le but de les assister à diagnostiquer les
problèmes potentiels ou de suivre les procédures d’Apple pour obtenir
le service de garantie. Avant de déposer votre Produit Apple pour tout
service de garantie, vous vous engagez à créer une copie de sauvegarde
du support de stockage, à effacer toutes les informations personnelles que
vous souhaitez protéger ainsi qu’à désactiver tous vos mots de passe.
IL EST POSSIBLE QUE LE CONTENU DE VOTRE SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE
SOIT PERDU OU REFORMATE LORS DE LA MISE EN OEUVRE DES
SERVICES DE GARANTIE. APPLE ET SES REPRESENTANTS NE SONT PAS
RESPONSABLE DE LA PERTE DES LOGICIELS, DONNEES OU AUTRES
INFORMATIONS CONTENUES SUR LE SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE OU
TOUTE AUTRE PARTIE DU PRODUIT APPLE REMIS.
Votre Produit Apple, ou un Produit Apple de remplacement, vous sera
retourné configuré tel que vous l’avez acheté, sous réserve des mises à
jour applicables. Apple peut installer des mises à jour du logiciel système
dans le cadre de son intervention, afin qu’il ne revienne pas
à une version antérieure. A la suite de ces mises à jour, les applications
de tiers précédemment installées sur le Produit Apple peuvent ne pas
être compatibles ou ne pas fonctionner avec le Produit Apple. Il vous
appartiendra de réinstaller tous ces logiciels, données et informations.
La récupération et la réinstallation des autres programmes de logiciels,
données et informations ne sont pas couvertes par cette garantie.
Important : n’ouvrez pas le Produit Apple. L’ouverture du Produit Apple
est susceptible de provoquer des dommages qui ne sont pas couverts
par la présente garantie. Seule Apple ou un PSAA devrait effectuer des
opérations d’entretien sur le Produit Apple.
QUE FERA APPLE EN CAS DE MISE EN OEUVRE DE LA GARANTIE ? Si une
réclamation valable est reçue par Apple ou un PSAA pendant la Durée de
la Garantie, Apple va, à son choix (i) réparer le Produit Apple en utilisant
des pièces neuves ou des pièces dont les performances et la fiabilité
sont équivalentes à celles d’une pièce neuve, ou (ii) échanger le Produit
Apple avec un produit qui est au moins fonctionnellement équivalent
au produit d’origine et qui est constitué de plusieurs pièces neuves ou de pièces dont les performances et la fiabilité sont équivalentes, ou (iii)
rembourser le prix d’achat du Produit Apple.
Apple pourra vous demander de remplacer certaines pièces ou certains
produits pouvant être installés par l’utilisateur. Un produit ou une pièce
de rechange, y compris une pièce pouvant être installée par l’utilisateur
et qui aura été installée conformément aux instructions fournies par
Apple, sera garantie pour la plus longue des durées suivantes : la durée
restant à courir de la garantie du Produit Apple d’origine ou une durée
de quatre-vingt dix (90) jours à compter de la date du remplacement
ou de la réparation. Lorsqu’un produit ou une pièce est échangé(e)
ou remboursé(e), toute pièce de rechange devient votre propriété
et la pièce échangée ou remboursée devient la propriété d’Apple.
COMMENT OBTENIR LE SERVICE DE GARANTIE? Nous vous prions de
bien vouloir accéder à, et examiner les ressources d’assistance en ligne,
décrites ci-dessous avant de solliciter un service de garantie. Si le Produit
Apple ne fonctionne toujours pas correctement après avoir utilisé ces
ressources, vous pouvez contacter un représentant Apple ou le cas
échéant, un magasin propriété d’Apple (“Magasin Apple”) ou un PSAA,
en utilisant les informations fournies ci-dessous. Un représentant Apple
ou un PSAA vous aidera à déterminer si votre Produit Apple nécessite
l’intervention d’Apple, et le cas échéant, vous informera sur les modalités
de cette intervention. Des surtaxes peuvent s’appliquer, selon votre
localisation, lorsque vous contacter Apple par téléphone.
Les détails concernant l’obtention du service de garantie sont accessibles
en ligne, grâce au lien qui figure ci-dessous.
OPTIONS DU SERVICE DE GARANTIE. Apple fournira le service de garantie
selon l’une des options suivantes :
(i) Service sur place. Vous pouvez déposer votre Produit Apple dans un
Magasin Apple ou chez un PSAA offrant un service sur place. Le service
sera effectué sur place ou le Produit Apple pourra être envoyé par le
Magasin Apple ou par le PSAA à un service de réparation Apple (“SRA”)
afin d’être réparé. Une fois averti de la réparation de votre produit, vous
devrez rapidement venir le récupérer auprès du Magasin Apple ou chez
le PSAA, ou, le Produit Apple vous sera directement envoyé par le SRA.
(ii) Service prêt à poster. Si Apple estime que votre Produit Apple peut
être envoyé par courrier, Apple vous fera parvenir une enveloppe
prépayée et si nécessaire, des matériaux d’emballage, afin que vous
puissiez faire parvenir votre Produit Apple à un SRA ou à un PSAA,
conformément aux instructions d’Apple. Une fois le service effectué, le
SRA ou le PSAA vous renverra le Produit Apple. Si toutes les instructions
sont suivies, Apple assumera les frais d’envoi et de retour.
(iii) Service “faites-le vous-même” (“DIY”). Le service DIY vous permet de
réparer vous-même votre Produit Apple. Si le service DIY est applicable
compte tenu des circonstances, les procédures suivantes pourront, selon
les cas, s’appliquer :
(a) Service pour lequel Apple vous demande le retour du produit ou de
la pièce remplacé(e).
Apple pourra vous demander une autorisation de prélèvement sur votre
carte de crédit pour garantir le prix au détail du produit ou de la pièce de
remplacement ainsi que les coûts de transport applicables. Si vous n’êtes pas en mesure de fournir une telle autorisation, vous pourrez ne pas être
en mesure d’accéder au service DIY et Apple vous proposera alors une
solution alternative.
Apple vous enverra le produit ou la pièce de remplacement avec, le cas
échéant, les instructions pour l’installer, ainsi que les conditions de renvoi
du produit ou de la pièce remplacée. Si vous suivez les instructions, Apple
annulera l’autorisation de prélèvement, et vous ne supporterez pas les
coûts de transport du produit ou de la pièce détachée. Si vous ne retournez
pas le produit ou la pièce remplacée comme indiqué ou si le produit ou la
pièce remplacée ne remplit pas les conditions permettant de bénéficier du
service de garantie, Apple débitera la carte de crédit du montant autorisé.
(b) Service pour lequel Apple ne vous demande pas le retour du produit
ou de la pièce remplacé(e).
Apple vous enverra gratuitement une pièce ou un produit de
remplacement avec, le cas échéant, les instructions d’installation,
ainsi que toutes les conditions pour le traitement du produit ou
de la pièce remplacé(e).
(c) Apple n’est responsable d’aucun coût de main d’œuvre que vous
pourriez supporter en relation avec le service DIY. Si vous avez besoin
d’une assistance particulière, merci de bien vouloir contacter Apple au
numéro de téléphone indiqué ci-dessous.
Apple se réserve le droit de modifier les moyens par lesquels Apple pourrait
vous fournir le service de garantie ainsi que l’éligibilité de votre Produit
Apple à une méthode de service en particulier. Le service de garantie sera
limité aux options disponibles dans le pays où le service est demandé.
Les options du service, la disponibilité des pièces et les délais de traitement
varient en fonction des pays. Vous pourrez être tenu de payer les frais
d’expédition et de transport si le Produit Apple ne peut pas être réparé
dans le pays dans lequel il se trouve. Si vous demandez à bénéficier
du service dans un pays qui n’est pas le pays d’achat, vous devrez
vous conformer à toutes les lois applicables relatives à l’importation et
à l’exportation et serez redevable des droits de douane, de la TVA et
toutes autres taxes et coûts associés. En ce qui concerne les services
internationaux, Apple peut réparer ou échanger les produits ou les pièces
par des produits ou pièces comparables conformes aux standards locaux.
LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITE. A L’EXCEPTION DE CE QUI EST PREVU
DANS LA PRESENTE GARANTIE COMMERCIALE ET DANS LA MESURE
AUTORISEE PAR LA LOI, APPLE N’EST PAS RESPONSABLE DES DOMMAGES
DIRECTS, SPÉCIFIQUES, ACCESSOIRES OU INDIRECTS, CONSECUTIFS
OU NON, RESULTANT DE LA VIOLATION DE TOUTE GARANTIE OU
RESPONSABILITE OU DE TOUT AUTRE CONCEPT JURIDIQUE, Y COMPRIS
DE FACON NON LIMITATIVE TOUTE PERTE D’UTILISATION, PERTE DE
REVENU, PERTE DE PROFITS REELS OU ANTICIPES (Y COMPRIS TOUTE
PERTE DE PROFITS LIES A DES CONTRATS), PERTE DE DISPONIBILITE
FINANCIERE, PERTE D’ECONOMIES PREVUES, PERTE D’AFFAIRES, PERTE
D’OPPORTUNITES, PERTE DE CLIENTELE, DOMMAGE A LA REPUTATION,
PERTE, DOMMAGE A, OU ENDOMMAGEMENT DE DONNEES, OU PERTE OU
DOMMAGE INDIRECT OU CONSECUTIF, QUELLE QU’EN SOIT LA CAUSE, Y
COMPRIS LE REMPLACEMENT DE MATERIELS OU DE BIENS, TOUS FRAIS
DE RECUPERATION, DE PROGRAMMATION OU DE REPRODUCTION DE TOUT PROGRAMME OU DE TOUTE DONNEE STOCKEE OU UTILISEE AVEC
LES PRODUITS APPLE ET TOUT ECHEC DANS LA PRESERVATION DE LA
CONFIDENTIALITE DES DONNEES STOCKEES DANS LE PRODUIT APPLE.
LA PRESENTE LIMITATION NE S’APPLIQUE PAS AUX RECLAMATIONS
EN CAS DE DECES OU DE DOMMAGES CORPORELS OU EN CAS DE
RESPONSABILITÉ LÉGALE POUR DOL OU FAUTE LOURDE ET/OU
OMISSION. APPLE NE DONNE AUCUNE GARANTIE QUANT A SA CAPACITE
A REPARER TOUT PRODUIT APPLE AUX TERMES DE LA PRESENTE
GARANTIE NI A ECHANGER TOUT PRODUIT APPLE SANS AUCUN
RISQUE NI AUCUNE PERTE DE PROGRAMME OU DE DONNEES.
CERTAINS PAYS REGIONS, OU ETATS NE PERMETTENT PAS L’EXCLUSION OU
LA LIMITATION DE RESPONSABILITE VIS-A-VIS DE CERTAINES CATEGORIES
D’ACHETEURS TELS LES CONSOMMATEURS, DE TELLE SORTE QUE
CERTAINES EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS PREVUES CI-DESSUS PEUVENT
NE PAS S’APPLIQUER A VOUS.
Nonobstant les stipulations de la présente garantie commerciale, Apple
reste en toute hypothèse tenue, vis-à-vis des consommateurs, des
défauts de conformité, dans les conditions prévues aux articles L. 211-1 et
suivants du code de la consommation français et des vices rédhibitoires,
dans les conditions prévues aux articles 1641 à 1649 du code civil français.
Conformément aux dispositions de l’article L. 211-15 du code de
la consommation français, les articles suivants s’appliquent aux
consommateurs :
Article L. 211-4 du code de la consommation français
« Le vendeur est tenu de livrer un bien conforme au contrat et répond
des défauts de conformité existant lors de la délivrance.
Il répond également des défauts de conformité résultant de l’emballage,
des instructions de montage ou de l’installation lorsque celle-ci a été
mise à sa charge par le contrat ou a été réalisée sous sa responsabilité. »
Article L. 211-5 du code de la consommation français
« Pour être conforme au contrat, le bien doit :
1° Etre propre à l’usage habituellement attendu d’un bien semblable
et, le cas échéant :
- correspondre à la description donnée par le vendeur et posséder les
qualités que celui-ci a présentées à l’acheteur sous forme d’échantillon
ou de modèle ;
- présenter les qualités qu’un acheteur peut légitimement attendre eu
égard aux déclarations publiques faites par le vendeur, par le producteur
ou par son représentant, notamment dans la publicité ou l’étiquetage ;
2° Ou présenter les caractéristiques définies d’un commun accord par
les parties ou être propre à tout usage spécial recherché par l’acheteur,
porté à la connaissance du vendeur et que ce dernier a accepté. »
Article L. 211-12 du code de la consommation français
« L’action résultant du défaut de conformité se prescrit par deux ans à
compter de la délivrance du bien. »Article 1641 du code civil français
« Le vendeur est tenu de la garantie à raison des défauts cachés de la
chose vendue qui la rendent impropre à l’usage auquel on la destine, ou
qui diminuent tellement cet usage que l’acheteur ne l’aurait pas acquise,
ou n’en aurait donné qu’un moindre prix, s’il les avait connus.»
Article 1648 alinéa 1er du code civil français
« L’action résultant des vices rédhibitoires doit être intentée par l’acquéreur
dans un délai de deux ans à compter de la découverte du vice. »
RESPECT DE LA VIE PRIVEE
Apple, en sa qualité de responsable de traitement, conservera et utilisera
les informations du client conformément à la politique de confidentialité
Apple, qui peut être consultée sur la page web suivante:
www.apple.com/legal/warranty/privacy.
STIPULATIONS GENERALES
Aucun revendeur, agent ou salarié Apple n’est habilité à modifier,
proroger ou compléter la présente garantie.
Si une stipulation des présentes est déclarée illégale ou inapplicable,
la validité des autres stipulations ne sera pas affectée.
Cette garantie est régie et interprétée selon les lois du pays dans
lequel le Produit Apple a été acheté. Apple est identifiée à la fin de
ce document selon le pays dans lequel le Produit Apple a été acheté.
Apple et ses successeurs sont les garants en vertu de cette garantie.
INFORMATION EN LIGNE. De plus amples informations sont disponibles
en ligne sur les sujets suivants :
Information internationales de support
www.apple.com/support/country
Distributeurs agréés
www.apple.com/iphone/countries
Prestataire de Service Agréé Apple
support.apple.com/kb/HT1937
Magasins Apple («Apple Retail Store»)
www.apple.com/retail/storelist
Support et service Apple
www.apple.com/support/contact/phone_contacts.html
Support gratuit Apple
www.apple.com/support/country/index.html?dest=complimentary
SOCIETE APPLE GARANTE POUR LA RÉGION OU LE
PAYS D’ACHAT
Région/Pays d'achat Apple Adresse
Amérique
Brésil Apple Computer
Brasil Ltda
Av. Cidade Jardim 400, 2 Andar,
Sao Paulo, SP Brésil 01454-901
Canada Apple Canada, Inc. 7495 Birchmount Rd.; Markham,
Ontario, Canada; L3R 5G2 CanadaRégion/Pays d'achat Apple Adresse
Mexique Apple Operations
Mexico S.A de C.V.
Av. Paseo de la Reforma 505,
Piso 33, Colonia Cuauhtemoc,
Mexique DF 06500
Etats-Unis et autres
pays d'Amérique
Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino,
CA 95014, États-Unis
Europe, Moyen-Orient et Afrique
Tous les pays Apple Sales
International
Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill,
Cork, République d'Irlande
Asie/Pacifique
Australie ; Nouvelle
Zélande, Fidji, PapouasieNouvelle- Guinée ; Vanuatu
Apple Pty. Limited. PO Box A2629, Sydney South,
NSW 1235, Australie
Hong Kong Apple Asia Limited 2401 Tower One, Times Square,
Causeway Bay ; Hong Kong
Inde Apple India
Private Ltd.
19th Floor, Concorde Tower C, UB
City No 24, Vittal Mallya Road,
Bangalore 560-001, Inde
Japon Apple Japan, Inc. 3-20-2 Nishishinjuku, Shinjuku-ku,
Tokyo, Japon
Corée Apple Korea Ltd. 3201, ASEM Tower; 159, Samsungdong, Gangnam-Gu; Seoul 135-
798, République de Corée
Afghanistan, Bangladesh,
Bhoutan, Brunei, Cambodge
Guam, Indonésie, Laos,
Singapour, Malaisie, Népal,
Pakistan, Philippines, Sri
Lanka, Vietnam
Apple Computer
South Asia PTE Ltd
7 Ang Mo Kio Street 64
Singapour 569086
République populaire
de Chine
Apple Computer
Trading (Shanghai)
Co. Ltd.
B Area, 2/F, No. 6 Warehouse
Building, No. 500 Bing Ke Road,
Wai Gao Qiao Free Trade Zone,
Shanghai, P.R.C.
Thaïlande Apple South Asia
(Thailand) Limited
25th Floor, Suite B2, Siam Tower,
989 Rama 1 Road, Pataumwan,
Bangkok, 10330
Taiwan Apple Asia LLC 16A, No. 333 Tun Hwa S. Road.
Sec. 2, Taipei, Taiwan 106
Autres pays d'Asie
Pacifique
Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino,
CA 95014, États-Unis
iPhone F Warranty v3© 2011 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés.
Apple, le logo Apple, FaceTime, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes, Safari,
Siri, le logo Made for iPod et le logo Works with iPhone sont des
marques d’Apple Inc., déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Le logo Made for iPhone et iMessage sont des marques d’Apple Inc.
iTunes Store est une marque de service d’Apple Inc., déposée aux ÉtatsUnis et dans d’autres pays. App Store et iCloud sont des marques de
service d’Apple Inc. IOS est une marque ou marque déposée de Cisco
aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays, utilisée ici sous licence. La marque
et les logos Bluetooth® sont des marques déposées de Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. dont l’utilisation par Apple Inc. est soumise à un accord de licence.
F034-5992-A
Printed in XXXX
Important Product
Information Guide
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 1 9/3/09 3:06:12 PM2 3
This Important Product Information Guide contains safety, handling, disposal
and recycling, regulatory, and software license information, as well as the
one-year limited warranty for iPhone.
Look for recycling, disposal, and other environmental information in the
iPhone User Guide at: support.apple.com/manuals/iphone
±Read all safety information below and operating instructions
before using iPhone to avoid injury. For detailed operating
instructions read the iPhone User Guide on your iPhone by visiting
help.apple.com/iphone or using the iPhone User Guide bookmark
in Safari. For downloadable versions of the iPhone User Guide and
the latest version of this Important Product Information Guide, visit:
support.apple.com/manuals/iphone
Important Safety Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in fire,
electric shock, or other injury or damage.
Handling iPhone Do not drop, disassemble, open, crush, bend, deform,
puncture, shred, microwave, incinerate, paint, or insert foreign objects
into iPhone.
Avoiding Water and Wet Locations Do not use iPhone in rain, or near
washbasins or other wet locations. Take care not to spill any food or liquid
on iPhone. In case iPhone gets wet, unplug all cables, turn off iPhone (press
and hold the Sleep/Wake button, and then slide the onscreen slider) before
cleaning, and allow it to dry thoroughly before turning it on again. Do not
attempt to dry iPhone with an external heat source, such as a microwave
oven or hair dryer. An iPhone that has been damaged as a result of exposure
to liquids is not serviceable.
Repairing or Modifying iPhone Never attempt to repair or modify iPhone
yourself. Disassembling iPhone, including the removal of external screws,
may cause damage that is not covered under the warranty. iPhone does
not contain any user-serviceable parts, except for the SIM card and SIM tray.
Service should only be provided by an Apple authorized wireless service
provider. If iPhone has been submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to
a severe fall, do not use it until you take it to an Apple authorized wireless
service provider. For service information, choose iPhone Help from the Help
menu in iTunes or go to: www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/faq
Battery Replacement The rechargeable battery in iPhone should be
replaced only by Apple or an Apple authorized wireless service provider.
For more information about battery replacement service, go to:
www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/battery
Charging iPhone To charge iPhone, only use the Apple Dock Connector to
USB Cable with an Apple USB Power Adapter or a high-power USB port on
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 2 9/3/09 3:06:12 PM2 3
another device that is compliant with the USB 2.0 or 1.1 standards, another
Apple-branded product or accessory designed to work with iPhone, or
a third-party accessory certified to use Apple’s “Works with iPhone” logo.
Read all safety instructions for any products and accessories before using with
iPhone. Apple is not responsible for the operation of third-party accessories
or their compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
When you use the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge iPhone, make sure
that the power adapter is fully assembled before you plug it into a power
outlet. Then insert the Apple USB Power Adapter firmly into the power outlet.
Do not connect or disconnect the Apple USB Power Adapter with wet hands.
The Apple USB Power Adapter may become warm during normal use. Always
allow adequate ventilation around the Apple USB Power Adapter and use
care when handling. Unplug the Apple USB Power Adapter if any of the
following conditions exist:
 The power cord or plug has become frayed or damaged.
 The adapter is exposed to rain, liquid, or excessive moisture.
 The adapter case has become damaged.
 You suspect the adapter needs service or repair.
 You want to clean the adapter.
Avoiding Hearing Damage Permanent hearing loss may occur if the receiver,
earbuds, headphones, speakerphone, or earpieces are used at high volume.
Set the volume to a safe level. You can adapt over time to a higher volume
of sound that may sound normal but can be damaging to your hearing. If
you experience ringing in your ears or muffled speech, stop listening and
have your hearing checked. The louder the volume, the less time is required
before your hearing could be affected. Hearing experts suggest that to
protect your hearing:
 Limit the amount of time you use the receiver, earbuds, headphones,
speakerphone, or earpieces at high volume.
 Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings.
 Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking near you.
For information about how to set a maximum volume limit on iPhone, see
the iPhone User Guide.
Emergency Calls You should not rely on wireless devices for essential
communications, such as medical emergencies. Use of iPhone to call
emergency services may not work in all locations. Emergency numbers and
services vary by region, and sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed
due to network availability or environmental interference. Some cellular
networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if it does not have
a SIM, the SIM is PIN-locked, or if you have not activated your iPhone.
Driving and Riding Safely Use of iPhone alone or with headphones (even
if used only in one ear) while driving a vehicle or riding a bicycle is not
recommended and is illegal in some areas. Check and obey the laws and
regulations on the use of mobile devices like iPhone in the areas where you
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 3 9/3/09 3:06:12 PM4 5
drive or ride. Be careful and attentive while driving or riding a bicycle. If you
decide to use iPhone while driving, keep in mind the following guidelines:
1
 Give full attention to driving or riding and to the road.
Using a mobile device while driving or riding may be distracting. If you
find it disruptive or distracting while operating any type of vehicle, riding
a bicycle, or performing any activity that requires your full attention,
pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving
conditions require.
 Get to know iPhone and its features such as favorites, recents, and
speakerphone.
These features help you to place your call without taking your attention off
the road. See the iPhone User Guide for more information.
 Use a hands-free device.
Add an extra layer of convenience and safety to your iPhone with one of
the many hands-free accessories available.
 Position iPhone within easy reach.
Keep your eyes on the road. If you get an incoming call at an inconvenient
time, let your voicemail answer it for you.
 Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary.
Assess the traffic before dialing, or place calls when you are not moving or
before pulling into traffic.
 Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving.
If necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather
conditions. Driving in rain, sleet, snow, ice, fog, and even heavy traffic can
be hazardous.
 Do not text, email, take notes, look up phone numbers, or perform any
other activities that require your attention while driving.
Composing or reading texts and emails, jotting down a to-do list, or
flipping through your address book takes attention away from your
primary responsibility, driving safely.
 Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that
may be distracting.
Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend
conversations that have the potential to divert your attention from
the road.
Navigating Safely If your iPhone has applications that provide maps,
directions or location-based navigation assistance, these applications should
only be used for basic navigation assistance and should not be relied on to
determine precise locations, proximity, distance, or direction.
Maps, directions, and location-based applications provided by Apple depend
on data collected and services provided by third parties. These data services
are subject to change and may not be available in all geographic areas,
resulting in maps, directions or location-based information that may be
unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the information provided
on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve any
discrepancies.
1
Adapted from the CTIA-The Wireless Association® Safe Driving Tips.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 4 9/3/09 3:06:12 PM4 5
Do not use location-based applications while performing activities that
require your full attention. For important information about driving safety, see
the “Driving and Riding Safely” section. Always comply with posted signs and
the laws and regulations in the areas where you are using iPhone.
Seizures, Blackouts, and Eyestrain A small percentage of people may be
susceptible to blackouts or seizures (even if they have never had one before)
when exposed to flashing lights or light patterns such as when playing games
or watching video. If you have experienced seizures or blackouts or have a
family history of such occurrences, you should consult a physician before
playing games (if available) or watching videos on your iPhone. Discontinue
use of iPhone and consult a physician if you experience headaches, blackouts,
seizures, convulsion, eye or muscle twitching, loss of awareness, involuntary
movement, or disorientation. To reduce risk of headaches, blackouts, seizures,
and eyestrain, avoid prolonged use, hold iPhone some distance from your
eyes, use iPhone in a well lit room, and take frequent breaks.
Glass Parts The outside cover of the iPhone screen is made of glass. This
glass could break if iPhone is dropped on a hard surface or receives a
substantial impact. If the glass chips or cracks, do not touch or attempt to
remove the broken glass. Stop using iPhone until the glass is replaced by an
Apple authorized wireless service provider. Glass cracked due to misuse or
abuse is not covered under the warranty.
Choking Hazards iPhone contains small parts, which may present a choking
hazard to small children. Keep iPhone and its accessories away from small
children.
Repetitive Motion When you perform repetitive activities such as typing
or playing games on iPhone, you may experience occasional discomfort in
your hands, arms, shoulders, neck, or other parts of your body. Take frequent
breaks and if you have discomfort during or after such use, stop use and
see a physician.
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off iPhone (press and hold the
Sleep/Wake button, and then slide the onscreen slider) when in any area
with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Do not charge iPhone, and obey all
signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire,
resulting in serious injury or even death.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always,
marked clearly. Potential areas may include: fueling areas (such as gas
stations); below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities;
vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane); areas
where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain, dust, or metal
powders); and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn
off your vehicle engine.
For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag An air bag inflates with great force.
Do not store iPhone or any of its accessories in the area over the air bag or in
the air bag deployment area.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy iPhone contains radio transmitters
and receivers. When on, iPhone receives and sends out radio frequency (RF)
energy through its antenna. The iPhone cellular antenna is located on the
back of iPhone near the dock connector. The Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® antenna
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 5 9/3/09 3:06:12 PM6 7
is located near the back top edge of the iPhone. iPhone is designed and
manufactured to comply with the limits for exposure to RF energy set by the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the United States, Industry
Canada (IC) of Canada, and regulating entities of Japan, the European Union,
and other countries. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement
known as the specific absorption rate, or SAR. The SAR limit applicable to
iPhone set by the FCC is 1.6 watts per kilogram (W/kg), 1.6 W/kg by Industry
Canada, and 2.0 W/kg by the Council of the European Union. Tests for SAR
are conducted using standard operating positions (i.e., at the ear and worn
on the body) specified by these agencies, with iPhone transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although SAR
is determined at the highest certified power level in each frequency band,
the actual SAR level of iPhone while in operation can be well below the
maximum value because iPhone adjusts its cellular transmitting power based
in part on proximity to the wireless network. In general, the closer you are to
a cellular base station, the lower the cellular transmitting power level.
iPhone has been tested,
2
and meets the FCC, IC, and European Union RF
exposure guidelines for cellular, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth operation. When tested
for use at the ear and for body-worn operation (with iPhone positioned
15 mm (5/8 inch) from the body), iPhone’s maximum SAR value for each
frequency band is outlined below:
Frequency Band Body Ear FCC & IC 1g SAR Limit (W/kg)
GSM 850 1.030 0.521 1.6
GSM 1900 0.522 1.290 1.6
UMTS II 1900 0.402 1.388 1.6
UMTS V 850 0.733 0.516 1.6
Wi-Fi 0.088 0.779 1.6
Frequency Band Body Ear EU 10g SARLimit (W/kg)
GSM 900 0.559 0.235 2.0
GSM 1800 0.369 0.780 2.0
2
The device was tested by Compliance Certification Services, Fremont, CA
according to measurement standards and procedures specified in FCC OET
Bulletin 65, Supplement C (Edition 01-01) and IEEE P1528.1, April 21 2003 and
Canada RSS 102. iPhone adheres to the European Council Recommendation
of 12 July 1999 on the Limitation of Exposure of the General Public to
Electromagnetic Fields [1999/519/EC].
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 6 9/3/09 3:06:13 PM6 7
Frequency Band Body Ear EU 10g SARLimit (W/kg)
UMTS I 2100 0.231 0.878 2.0
Wi-Fi 0.051 0.371 2.0
iPhone’s SAR measurement may exceed the FCC exposure guidelines for
body-worn operation if positioned less than 15 mm (5/8 inch) from the
body (e.g. when carrying iPhone in your pocket). For optimal mobile device
performance and to be sure that human exposure to RF energy does not
exceed the FCC, IC, and European Union guidelines, always follow these
instructions and precautions: When on a call using the built-in audio receiver
in iPhone, hold iPhone with the dock connector pointed down toward your
shoulder to increase separation from the antenna. When using iPhone near
your body for voice calls or for wireless data transmission over a cellular
network, keep iPhone at least 15 mm (5/8 inch) away from the body, and only
use carrying cases, belt clips, or holders that do not have metal parts and that
maintain at least 15 mm (5/8 inch) separation between iPhone and the body.
If you are still concerned about exposure to RF energy, you can further limit
your exposure by limiting the amount of time using iPhone, since time is a
factor in how much exposure a person receives, and by placing more distance
between your body and iPhone, since exposure level drops off dramatically
with distance.
Additional Information For more information from the FCC about exposure
to RF energy, see: www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety
The FCC and the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) also maintain
a consumer website at www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/HomeBusinessandEntertainment/
CellPhones/default.htm to address inquiries about the safety of mobile
phones. Please check the website periodically for updates.
For information about the scientific research related to RF energy exposure,
see the EMF Research Database maintained by the World Health Organization
at: www.who.int/emf
Radio Frequency Interference Radio-frequency emissions from electronic
equipment can negatively affect the operation of other electronic equipment
causing them to malfunction. Although iPhone is designed, tested, and
manufactured to comply with regulations governing radio frequency
emission in countries such as the United States, Canada, the European Union,
and Japan, the wireless transmitters and electrical circuits in iPhone may
cause interference in other electronic equipment. Therefore, please take the
following precautions:
Aircraft Use of iPhone may be prohibited while traveling in aircraft. For
more information about using Airplane Mode to turn off the iPhone wireless
transmitters, see the iPhone User Guide.
Vehicles Radio frequency emissions from iPhone may affect electronic
systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its representative
regarding your vehicle.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 7 9/3/09 3:06:13 PM8 9
Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends
that a minimum separation of 15 cm (6 inches) be maintained between
a handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference
with the pacemaker. Persons with pacemakers:
 Should always keep iPhone more than 15 cm (6 inches) from the
pacemaker when the phone is turned on
 Should not carry iPhone in a breast pocket
 Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential
for interference
If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn
iPhone off immediately.
Hearing Aids iPhone may interfere with hearing aids. If it does, consult the
hearing aid manufacturer or your physician for alternatives or remedies.
Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult
the device manufacturer or your physician to determine if it is adequately
shielded from radio frequency emissions from iPhone.
Health Care Facilities Hospitals and health care facilities may use equipment
that is particularly sensitive to external radio frequency emissions. Turn
iPhone off when staff or posted signs instruct you to do so.
Blasting Areas and Posted Facilities To avoid interfering with blasting
operations, turn off iPhone when in a “blasting area” or in areas posted “Turn
off two-way radio.” Obey all signs and instructions.
Important Handling Information
NOTICE: Failure to follow these handling instructions could result in
damage to iPhone or other property.
Carrying and Handling iPhone iPhone contains sensitive components.
Do not bend, drop, or crush iPhone. If your iPhone’s back case has a highgloss finish, handle with care to maintain its appearance. If you are concerned
about scratching, you can use one of the many cases sold separately.
Using Connectors and Ports Never force a connector into a port. Check for
obstructions on the port. If the connector and port don’t join with reasonable
ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure that the connector matches
the port and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation
to the port.
Keeping iPhone Within Acceptable Temperatures Operate iPhone in
a place where the temperature is between 0º and 35º C (32º to 95º F).
Low- or high-temperature conditions might temporarily shorten battery
life or cause iPhone to temporarily stop working properly. Avoid dramatic
changes in temperature or humidity when using iPhone as condensation
may form on or within iPhone.
Store iPhone in a place where the temperature is between -20º and 45º C
(-4º to 113º F). Don’t leave iPhone in your car, because temperatures in parked
cars can exceed this range.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 8 9/3/09 3:06:13 PM8 9
When you’re using iPhone or charging the battery, it is normal for iPhone to
get warm. The exterior of iPhone functions as a cooling surface that transfers
heat from inside the unit to the cooler air outside.
Keeping the Outside of iPhone Clean To clean iPhone, unplug all cables
and turn off iPhone (press and hold the Sleep/Wake button, and then slide
the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Avoid
getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners,
aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPhone.
Certification and Compliance
Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by
Apple could void the EMC and wireless compliance and negate your authority
to operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance
under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices
and shielded cables between system components. It is important that you
use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system
components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios,
televisions, and other electronic devices.
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Canadian Compliance Statement
Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil
numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. This Class B device
meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment
regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte toutes les
exigences du Réglement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 9 9/3/09 3:06:13 PM10 11
European Union Regulatory Conformance
The equipment complies with the RF Exposure Requirement 1999/519/EC,
Council Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the
general public to electromagnetic fields (0–300 GHz). This equipment meets
the following conformance standards:
EN 300 328, EN 301 489-17, EN 301 511, EN 301 908, EN 50385
EU Declaration of Conformity
????????? Apple Inc. ?????????, ?? ???? ????????, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth
?????????? ? ? ???????????? ??? ???????????? ?????????? ? ???????
????????? ??????? ?? ????????? 1999/5/??.
Cesky Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth g
je ve shode se základními požadavky a dalšími príslušnými ustanoveními
smernice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr
cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dass sich das Gerät cellular, Wi-Fi, &
Bluetooth in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/
EG befindet.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc. seadme cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth
vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist
tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions
of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente Apple Inc. declara que el cellular, Wi-Fi,
& Bluetooth cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras
disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
???????? ?? ??? ?????S? Apple Inc. ??????? ??? cellular, Wi-Fi, &
Bluetooth S?????F?????? ???S ??S ??S?????S ??????S??S ??? ??S
?????S S??????S ????????S ??S ???G??S 1999/5/??.
Français Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que l’appareil cellular, Wi-Fi, &
Bluetooth est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions
pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Islenska Hér með lýsir Apple Inc. yfir því að cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth
er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun
1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che questo cellular, Wi-Fi,
& Bluetooth è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni
pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Apple Inc. deklare, ka cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth atbilst
Direktivas 1999/5/EK butiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to saistitajiem
noteikumiem.
Lietuviu Šiuo Apple Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth
atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 10 9/3/09 3:06:13 PM10 11
Magyar Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth
megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv
egyéb elõírásainak.
Malti Hawnhekk, Apple Inc., jiddikjara li dan cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth
jikkonforma mal-htigijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti ohrajn relevanti li
hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het toestel cellular, Wi-Fi, &
Bluetooth in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Norsk Apple Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret mobiltelefon, Wi-Fi og
Bluetooth er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav
i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski Niniejszym Apple Inc. oswiadcza, ze cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth
jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português Apple Inc. declara que este cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth está
conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva
1999/5/CE.
Româna Prin prezenta Apple Inc. declara ca acest aparat cellular, Wi-Fi, &
Bluetooth este in conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si cu celelalte prevederi
relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko Apple Inc. izjavlja, da je ta cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth v skladu z
bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolocili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovensky Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth splna
základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten että cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth tyyppinen
laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien
direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna cellular, Wi-Fi, & Bluetooth
står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga
relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
A copy of the Declaration of Conformity is available at:
www.apple.com/euro/compliance
0682
iPhone can be used in the following countries:
European Community Restrictions
Français Pour usage en intérieur uniquement. Consultez l’Autorité de
Régulation des Communications Electroniques et des Postes (ARCEP) pour
connaître les limites d’utilisation des canaux 1 à 9. www.arcep.fr
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 11 9/3/09 3:06:13 PM12 13
Italiano Approvato esclusivamente per l’uso in locali chiusi. L’utilizzo
all’esterno dei propri locali è subordinato al rilascio di un’autorizzazione
generale.
????da G?a ???s? se es?te?????? ?????? µ???
Japan Compliance Statement—VCCI Class B Statement
Compliance Marks
Singapore South Africa
TA-2008/712
APPROVED
United Arab
Emirates
TRA ID: 0016472/08
TA: 0016473/08
Russia
iPhone Terms and Conditions
IMPORTANT: BY USING YOUR iPHONE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY
THE FOLLOWING APPLE AND THIRD PARTY TERMS:
A. APPLE iPHONE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
B. NOTICES FROM APPLE
C. GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS
D. YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPLE INC. iPHONE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
Single Use License
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”) CAREFULLY
BEFORE USING YOUR iPHONE OR DOWNLOADING THE SOFTWARE UPDATE
ACCOMPANYING THIS LICENSE. BY USING YOUR iPHONE OR DOWNLOADING
THIS SOFTWARE UPDATE, AS APPLICABLE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND
BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, UNLESS YOU RETURN THE iPHONE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH APPLE’S RETURN POLICY. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE
TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, DO NOT USE THE iPHONE OR DOWNLOAD THIS
SOFTWARE UPDATE. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE,
YOU MAY RETURN THE iPHONE WITHIN THE RETURN PERIOD TO THE APPLE
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 12 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM12 13
STORE OR AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT FOR A
REFUND, SUBJECT TO APPLE’S RETURN POLICY FOUND AT http://www.apple.
com/legal/sales_policies/.
1. General. The software (including Boot ROM code and other embedded
software), documentation, interfaces, content, fonts and any data that
came with your iPhone (“Original iPhone Software”), as may be updated
or replaced by feature enhancements, software updates or system restore
software provided by Apple (“iPhone Software Updates”), whether in read
only memory, on any other media or in any other form (the Original iPhone
Software and iPhone Software Updates are collectively referred to as the
“iPhone Software”) are licensed, not sold, to you by Apple Inc. (“Apple”)
for use only under the terms of this License. Apple and its licensors retain
ownership of the iPhone Software itself and reserve all rights not expressly
granted to you.
Apple will provide you any iPhone OS software updates that it may release
from time to time, up to and including the next major iPhone OS software
release following the version of iPhone OS software that originally shipped
from Apple on your iPhone, for free. For example, if your iPhone originally
shipped with iPhone 2.x software, Apple would provide you with any iPhone
OS software updates it might release up to and including the iPhone 3.x
software release. Such updates and releases may not necessarily include all of
the new software features that Apple releases for newer iPhone models.
2. Permitted License Uses and Restrictions. (a) Subject to the terms and
conditions of this License, you are granted a limited non-exclusive license
to use the iPhone Software on a single Apple-branded iPhone. Except as
permitted in Section 2(b) below, this License does not allow the iPhone
Software to exist on more than one Apple-branded iPhone at a time or
on any other phone, and you may not distribute or make the iPhone
Software available over a network where it could be used by multiple
devices at the same time. This License does not grant you any rights to use
Apple proprietary interfaces and other intellectual property in the design,
development, manufacture, licensing or distribution of third party devices
and accessories, or third party software applications, for use with the
iPhone. Some of those rights are available under separate licenses from
Apple. For more information on developing third party devices and
accessories for the iPhone, please email madeforipod@apple.com. For
more information on developing software applications for the iPhone,
please email devprograms@apple.com.
(b) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted a
limited non-exclusive license to download iPhone Software Updates that may
be made available by Apple for your model of the iPhone to update or restore
the software on any such iPhone that you own or control. This License does
not allow you to update or restore iPhones that you do not control or own,
and you may not distribute or make the iPhone Software Updates available
over a network where they could be used by multiple devices or multiple
computers at the same time. You may make one copy of the iPhone Software
Updates stored on your computer in machine-readable form for backup
purposes only, provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or
other proprietary notices contained on the original.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 13 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM14 15
(c) You may not and you agree not to, or to enable others to, copy (except
as expressly permitted by this License), decompile, reverse engineer,
disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, decrypt, modify, or create
derivative works of the iPhone Software or any services provided by the
iPhone Software, or any part thereof (except as and only to the extent any
foregoing restriction is prohibited by applicable law or to the extent as may
be permitted by licensing terms governing use of open-sourced components
included with the iPhone Software). Any attempt to do so is a violation of the
rights of Apple and its licensors of the iPhone Software.
(d) By storing content on your iPhone you are making a digital copy. In some
jurisdictions, it is unlawful to make digital copies without prior permission
from the rightsholder. The iPhone Software may be used to reproduce
materials so long as such use is limited to reproduction of non-copyrighted
materials, materials in which you own the copyright, or materials you are
authorized or legally permitted to reproduce.
(e) You agree to use the iPhone Software and the Services (as defined in
Section 5 below) in compliance with all applicable laws, including local laws
of the country or region in which you reside or in which you download or use
the iPhone Software and Services.
3. Transfer. You may not rent, lease, lend, sell, redistribute, or sublicense the
iPhone Software. You may, however, make a one-time permanent transfer
of all of your license rights to the iPhone Software to another party in
connection with the transfer of ownership of your iPhone, provided that:
(a) the transfer must include your iPhone and all of the iPhone Software,
including all its component parts, original media, printed materials and this
License; (b) you do not retain any copies of the iPhone Software, full or partial,
including copies stored on a computer or other storage device; and (c) the
party receiving the iPhone Software reads and agrees to accept the terms
and conditions of this License.
4. Consent to Use of Non-Personal Data. (a) Diagnostic Data. You agree that
Apple and its subsidiaries and agents may collect, maintain, process and use
diagnostic, technical and related information, including but not limited to
information about your iPhone, computer, system and application software,
and peripherals, that is gathered periodically to facilitate the provision of
software updates, product support and other services to you (if any) related
to the iPhone Software, and to verify compliance with the terms of this
License. Apple may use this information, as long as it is in a form that does
not personally identify you, to improve our products or to provide services or
technologies to you.
(b) Location Data. Apple and its partners and licensees may provide certain
services through your iPhone that rely upon location information. To provide
these services, where available, Apple and its partners and licensees may
transmit, collect, maintain, process and use your location data, including the
real-time geographic location of your iPhone. The location data collected by
Apple is collected in a form that does not personally identify you and may
be used by Apple and its partners and licensees to provide location-based
products and services. By using any location-based services on your iPhone,
you agree and consent to Apple’s and its partners’ and licensees’ transmission,
collection, maintenance, processing and use of your location data to provide
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 14 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM14 15
such products and services. You may withdraw this consent at any time
by not using the location-based features or by turning off the Location
Services setting on your iPhone. Not using these features will not impact
the non location-based functionality of your iPhone. When using third party
applications or services on the iPhone that use or provide location data, you
are subject to and should review such third party’s terms and privacy policy
on use of location data by such third party applications or services.
5. Services and Third Party Materials. (a) The iPhone Software enables access
to Apple’s iTunes Store, App Store and other Apple and third party services
and web sites (collectively and individually, “Services”). Use of the Services
requires Internet access and use of certain Services requires you to accept
additional terms. By using this software in connection with an iTunes Store
account, you agree to the latest iTunes Store Terms and Conditions, which you
may access and review at http://www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/.
(b) You understand that by using any of the Services, you may encounter
content that may be deemed offensive, indecent, or objectionable, which
content may or may not be identified as having explicit language, and that
the results of any search or entering of a particular URL may automatically
and unintentionally generate links or references to objectionable material.
Nevertheless, you agree to use the Services at your sole risk and that Apple
shall have no liability to you for content that may be found to be offensive,
indecent, or objectionable.
(c) Certain Services may display, include or make available content, data,
information, applications or materials from third parties (“Third Party
Materials”) or provide links to certain third party web sites. By using the
Services, you acknowledge and agree that Apple is not responsible for
examining or evaluating the content, accuracy, completeness, timeliness,
validity, copyright compliance, legality, decency, quality or any other aspect
of such Third Party Materials or web sites. Apple, its officers, affiliates and
subsidiaries do not warrant or endorse and do not assume and will not have
any liability or responsibility to you or any other person for any third-party
Services, Third Party Materials or web sites, or for any other materials,
products, or services of third parties. Third Party Materials and links to other
web sites are provided solely as a convenience to you.
(d) Financial information displayed by any Services is for general informational
purposes only and should not be relied upon as investment advice. Before
executing any securities transaction based upon information obtained
through the Services, you should consult with a financial or securities
professional who is legally qualified to give financial or securities advice in
your country or region. Location data provided by any Services is for basic
navigational purposes only and is not intended to be relied upon in situations
where precise location information is needed or where erroneous, inaccurate,
time-delayed or incomplete location data may lead to death, personal injury,
property or environmental damage. Neither Apple nor any of its content
providers guarantees the availability, accuracy, completeness, reliability, or
timeliness of stock information, location data or any other data displayed
by any Services.
(e) You agree that the Services contain proprietary content, information and
material that is owned by Apple and/or its licensors, and is protected by
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 15 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM16 17
applicable intellectual property and other laws, including but not limited to
copyright, and that you will not use such proprietary content, information
or materials in any way whatsoever except for permitted use of the Services
or in any manner that is inconsistent with the terms of this License or that
infringes any intellectual property rights of a third party or Apple. No portion
of the Services may be reproduced in any form or by any means. You agree
not to modify, rent, lease, loan, sell, distribute, or create derivative works based
on the Services, in any manner, and you shall not exploit the Services in any
unauthorized way whatsoever, including but not limited to, using the Services
to transmit any computer viruses, worms, trojan horses or other malware, or
by trespass or burdening network capacity. You further agree not to use the
Services in any manner to harass, abuse, stalk, threaten, defame or otherwise
infringe or violate the rights of any other party, and that Apple is not in any
way responsible for any such use by you, nor for any harassing, threatening,
defamatory, offensive, infringing or illegal messages or transmissions that you
may receive as a result of using any of the Services.
(f) In addition, Services and Third Party Materials that may be accessed from,
displayed on or linked to from the iPhone are not available in all languages
or in all countries. Apple makes no representation that such Services and
Materials are appropriate or available for use in any particular location. To
the extent you choose to access such Services or Materials, you do so at your
own initiative and are responsible for compliance with any applicable laws,
including but not limited to applicable local laws. Apple and its licensors
reserve the right to change, suspend, remove, or disable access to any
Services at any time without notice. In no event will Apple be liable for the
removal of or disabling of access to any such Services. Apple may also impose
limits on the use of or access to certain Services, in any case and without
notice or liability.
6. Termination. This License is effective until terminated. Your rights under
this License will terminate automatically or otherwise cease to be effective
without notice from Apple if you fail to comply with any term(s) of this
License. Upon the termination of this License, you shall cease all use of the
iPhone Software. Sections 7, 8, 9, 12 and 13 of this License shall survive any
such termination.
7. Disclaimer of Warranties. YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE
THAT, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, USE OF THE iPHONE
SOFTWARE AND SERVICES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND
EFFORT IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW, THE iPHONE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE iPHONE
SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND APPLE AND APPLE’S LICENSORS
(COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS “APPLE” FOR THE PURPOSES OF SECTIONS 7
AND 8) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT
TO THE iPHONE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. APPLE DOES NOT
WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE iPHONE
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 16 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM16 17
SOFTWARE AND SERVICES, THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN OR SERVICES
PERFORMED BY THE iPHONE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS,
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE iPHONE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES WILL
BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, THAT ANY SERVICE WILL CONTINUE
TO BE MADE AVAILABLE, THAT DEFECTS IN THE iPHONE SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED, OR THAT THE iPHONE SOFTWARE WILL BE
COMPATIBLE OR WORK WITH ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS
OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES. INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE MAY AFFECT
THE USABILITY OF THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY
SERVICES. YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEGE THAT THE iPHONE SOFTWARE AND
SERVICES ARE NOT INTENDED OR SUITABLE FOR USE IN SITUATIONS OR
ENVIRONMENTS WHERE THE FAILURE OR TIME DELAYS OF, OR ERRORS OR
INACCURACIES IN, THE CONTENT, DATA OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE
IPHONE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES COULD LEAD TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY,
OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION
OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT OR
WEAPONS SYSTEMS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN
BY APPLE OR AN APPLE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY. SHOULD THE iPHONE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY RIGHTS
OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
8. Limitation of Liability. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE
LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR
ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF
PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE
ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES
OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE iPHONE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES OR ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR APPLICATIONS IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE iPHONE SOFTWARE, HOWEVER
CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall
Apple’s total liability to you for all damages (other than as may be required by
applicable law in cases involving personal injury) exceed the amount of two
hundred and fifty dollars (U.S.$250.00). The foregoing limitations will apply
even if the above stated remedy fails of its essential purpose.
9. Digital Certificates. The iPhone Software contains functionality that allows
it to accept digital certificates either issued from Apple or from third parties.
YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DECIDING WHETHER OR NOT TO RELY
ON A CERTIFICATE WHETHER ISSUED BY APPLE OR A THIRD PARTY. YOUR
USE OF DIGITAL CERTIFICATES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTIES
OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO MERCHANTABILITY
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 17 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM18 19
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, SECURITY, OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO DIGITAL
CERTIFICATES.
10. Export Control. You may not use or otherwise export or reexport the
iPhone Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of
the jurisdiction(s) in which the iPhone Software was obtained. In particular,
but without limitation, the iPhone Software may not be exported or reexported (a) into any U.S. embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the
U.S. Treasury Department’s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U.S.
Department of Commerce Denied Person’s List or Entity List. By using the
iPhone Software, you represent and warrant that you are not located in any
such country or on any such list. You also agree that you will not use the
iPhone Software for any purposes prohibited by United States law, including,
without limitation, the development, design, manufacture or production of
missiles, nuclear, chemical or biological weapons.
11. Government End Users. The iPhone Software and related documentation
are “Commercial Items”, as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting
of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software
Documentation”, as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
§227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer
Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being
licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and
(b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to
the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the
copyright laws of the United States.
12. Controlling Law and Severability. This License will be governed by
and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California,
excluding its conflict of law principles. This License shall not be governed
by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. If for any reason
a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof, to
be unenforceable, the remainder of this License shall continue in full force
and effect.
13. Complete Agreement; Governing Language. This License constitutes the
entire agreement between you and Apple relating to the iPhone Software
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings regarding
such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of this License will be
binding unless in writing and signed by Apple. Any translation of this License
is done for local requirements and in the event of a dispute between the
English and any non-English versions, the English version of this License shall
govern, to the extent not prohibited by local law in your jurisdiction.
14. Third Party Acknowledgements. Portions of the iPhone Software may
utilize or include third party software and other copyrighted material.
Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are
contained in the electronic documentation for the iPhone Software, and
your use of such material is governed by their respective terms. Use of the
Google Safe Browsing Service is subject to the Google Terms of Service
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 18 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM18 19
(http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and to Google’s Privacy
Policy (http://www.google.com/privacypolicy.html).
15. Use of MPEG-4; H.264/AVC Notice. (a) The iPhone Software contains
MPEG-4 video encoding and/or decoding functionality. The iPhone Software
is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License for the personal
and non-commercial use of a consumer for (i) encoding video in compliance
with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”) and/or (ii) decoding
MPEG-4 video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and
non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed
by MPEG LA to provide MPEG-4 video. No license is granted or shall be
implied for any other use. Additional information including that relating to
promotional, internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained
from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
(b) The iPhone Software contains AVC encoding and/or decoding
functionality, commercial use of H.264/AVC requires additional licensing and
the following provision applies: THE AVC FUNCTIONALITY IN THE iPHONE
SOFTWARE IS LICENSED HEREIN ONLY FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO
THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR AVC VIDEO THAT WAS OBTAINED
FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. INFORMATION
REGARDING OTHER USES AND LICENSES MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA
L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
16. Yahoo Search Service Restrictions. The Yahoo Search Service available
through Safari is licensed for use only in the following countries and regions:
Argentina, Aruba, Australia, Austria, Barbados, Belgium, Bermuda, Brazil,
Bulgaria, Canada, Cayman Islands, Chile, Colombia, Cyprus, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Finland, France, Germany,
Greece, Grenada, Guatemala, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, India, Indonesia,
Ireland, Italy, Jamaica, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Malta, Mexico,
Netherlands, New Zealand, Nicaragua, Norway, Panama, Peru, Philippines,
Poland, Portugal, Puerto Rico, Romania, Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, South
Korea, Spain, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, Thailand, The
Bahamas, Trinidad and Tobago, Turkey, UK, Uruguay, US and Venezuela.
17. Microsoft Exchange Notice. The Microsoft Exchange mail setting in
the iPhone Software is licensed only for over-the-air synchronization of
information, such as email, contacts, calendar and tasks, between your iPhone
and Microsoft Exchange Server or other server software licensed by Microsoft
to implement the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync protocol.
EA0567
Update Rev. 5/8/09
NOTICES FROM APPLE
If Apple needs to contact you about your product or account, you consent
to receive the notices by email. You agree that any such notices that we send
you electronically will satisfy any legal communication requirements.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 19 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM20 21
GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Thank you for trying out the Google Maps for mobile software application!
This page contains the terms and conditions (the “Terms and Conditions”)
for Google Maps for mobile and the enterprise version of Google Maps for
mobile. In order to use this software, including any third party software made
available to you in conjunction with this software and/or the related service,
(collectively referred to below as “Google Maps for mobile”) you agree to
be bound by these Terms and Conditions, either on behalf of yourself or
on behalf of your employer or other entity. If you are agreeing to be bound
by these Terms and Conditions on behalf of your employer or other entity,
you represent and warrant that you have full legal authority to bind your
employer or such entity to these Terms and Conditions. If you don’t have the
legal authority to bind, please press “No” when asked whether you agree to
these Terms and Conditions, and do not proceed with use of this product.
Additional Terms Google Maps for mobile is designed to be used in
conjunction with Google’s Maps services and other Google services.
Accordingly, you agree and acknowledge that your use of Google Maps for
mobile is also subject to (a) the specific terms of service for Google Maps
(which can be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/terms_local.html)
including the content notices applicable thereto (which can be viewed at
http://local.google.com/help/legalnotices_local.html), (b) the general Google
terms of service (which can be viewed at http://www.google.com/terms_of_
service.html) and (c) Google’s overall privacy policy (which can be viewed
at http://www.google.com/privacypolicy.html), as well as specific privacy
policies, such as the Google Maps for mobile privacy policy included with
this application, such provisions being hereby incorporated into these Terms
and Conditions by reference. To the extent that there is any inconsistency or
conflict between such additional terms and these Terms and Conditions, the
provisions of these Terms and Conditions take precedence.
Network Charges Google does not charge for downloading or using Google
Maps for mobile, but depending on your plan and your carrier or provider,
your carrier or other provider may charge you for downloading Google Maps
for mobile or for use of your mobile phone when you access information or
other Google services through Google Maps for mobile.
Non-Commercial Use Only Google Maps for mobile is made available to you
for your non-commercial use only. This means that you may use it for your
personal use only: you may use it at work or at home, to search for anything
you want, subject to the terms set out in these Terms and Conditions. You
need to obtain Google’s permission first, which you can do by contacting
mobile-support@google.com, if you want to sell Google Maps for mobile or
any information, services, or software associated with or derived from it, or
if you want to modify, copy, license, or create derivative works from Google
Maps for mobile.
Unless you have our prior written consent, you agree not to modify, adapt,
translate, prepare derivative works from, decompile, reverse engineer,
disassemble or otherwise attempt to derive source code from Google Maps
for mobile.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 20 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM20 21
Furthermore, you may not use Google Maps for mobile in any manner that
could damage, disable, overburden, or impair Google’s services (e.g., you may
not use the Google Maps for mobile in an automated manner), nor may
you use Google Maps for mobile in any manner that could interfere with
any other party’s use and enjoyment of Google’s services.
If you have comments on Google Maps for mobile or ideas on how to
improve it, please email mobile-support@google.com. Please note that by
doing so, you also grant Google and third parties permission to use and
incorporate your ideas or comments into Google Maps for mobile (or third
party software) without further notice or compensation.
Intellectual Property As between you and Google, you agree and
acknowledge that Google owns all rights, title and interest in and to Google
Maps for mobile, including without limitation all associated Intellectual
Property Rights. “Intellectual Property Rights” means any and all rights existing
from time to time under patent law, copyright law, trade secret law, trademark
law, unfair competition law, and any and all other proprietary rights, and any
and all applications, renewals, extensions and restorations thereof, now or
hereafter in force and effect worldwide. You agree to not remove, obscure,
or alter Google’s or any third party’s copyright notice, trademarks, or other
proprietary rights notices affixed to or contained within or accessed in
conjunction with or through the Google Maps for mobile.
Disclaimer of Warranties Google and any third party who makes its s
oftware available in conjunction with or through Google Maps for mobile
disclaim any responsibility for any harm resulting from your use of Google
Maps for mobile and/or any third party software accessed in conjunction
with or through Google Maps for mobile.
GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” WITH NO WARRANTIES
WHATSOEVER. GOOGLE AND SUCH THIRD PARTIES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM
TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. GOOGLE AND ANY
SUCH THIRD PARTIES DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE SECURITY,
RELIABILITY, TIMELINESS, AND PERFORMANCE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE
AND SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
YOU UNDERSTAND AND AGREE THAT YOU DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE GOOGLE
MAPS FOR MOBILE AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND THAT YOU WILL
BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES TO YOUR COMPUTER OR MOBILE
DEVICE SYSTEM OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOAD OR
USE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SOME STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE AND JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL GOOGLE OR ANY
THIRD PARTY WHO MAKE THEIR SOFTWARE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION
WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE BE LIABLE TO ANY
USER ON ACCOUNT OF THAT USER’S USE OR MISUSE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR
MOBILE. SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO PREVENT RECOVERY
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 21 9/3/09 3:06:15 PM22 23
OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
AND PUNITIVE DAMAGES WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON WARRANTY,
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), OR OTHERWISE, (EVEN IF
GOOGLE AND/OR A THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDER HAVE BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES). SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SHALL APPLY WHETHER THE DAMAGES ARISE FROM USE OR MISUSE OF AND
RELIANCE ON GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR ON PRODUCTS OR SERVICES
MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH GOOGLE MAPS FOR
MOBILE, FROM INABILITY TO USE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR PRODUCTS
OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH THE
GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, OR FROM THE INTERRUPTION, SUSPENSION,
OR TERMINATION OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR
SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH GOOGLE
MAPS FOR MOBILE (INCLUDING SUCH DAMAGES INCURRED BY THIRD
PARTIES). SUCH LIMITATION SHALL APPLY NOTWITHSTANDING A FAILURE
OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED REMEDY AND TO THE FULLEST
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. SOME STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Miscellaneous Provisions These Terms and Conditions will be governed
by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California,
without giving effect to the conflict of laws provisions of California or your
actual state or country of residence. If for any reason a court of competent
jurisdiction finds any provision or portion of these Terms and Conditions to
be unenforceable, the remainder of these Terms and Conditions will continue
in full force and effect.
These Terms and Conditions constitute the entire agreement between you
and Google with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersede and
replace all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements, written
or oral, regarding such subject matter. Any waiver of any provision of these
Terms and Conditions will be effective only if in writing and signed by Google.
September 2007
YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
http://www.youtube.com/t/terms
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 22 9/3/09 3:06:16 PM22 23
Apple One (1) Year Limited Warranty
FOR CONSUMERS, WHO ARE COVERED BY CONSUMER PROTECTION LAWS
OR REGULATIONS IN THEIR COUNTRY OF PURCHASE OR, IF DIFFERENT,
THEIR COUNTRY OF RESIDENCE, THE BENEFITS CONFERRED BY THIS
WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO ALL RIGHTS AND REMEDIES CONVEYED
BY SUCH CONSUMER PROTECTION LAWS AND REGULATIONS. THIS
WARRANTY DOES NOT EXCLUDE, LIMIT OR SUSPEND ANY RIGHTS OF
CONSUMERS ARISING OUT OF NONCONFORMITY WITH A SALES CONTRACT.
SOME COUNTRIES, STATES AND PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
OR ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR
CONDITION MAY LAST, SO THE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS DESCRIBED
BELOW MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC
LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY
COUNTRY, STATE OR PROVINCE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS GOVERNED
BY AND CONSTRUED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE COUNTRY IN WHICH THE
PRODUCT PURCHASE TOOK PLACE. APPLE, THE WARRANTOR UNDER
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, IS IDENTIFIED AT THE END OF THIS DOCUMENT
ACCORDING TO THE COUNTRY OR REGION IN WHICH THE PRODUCT
PURCHASE TOOK PLACE.
Apple’s warranty obligations for this hardware product are limited to the
terms set forth below:
Apple, as defined in the table below, warrants this Apple-branded hardware
product against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use
for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of retail purchase by the original
end-user purchaser (“Warranty Period”). If a hardware defect arises and a
valid claim is received within the Warranty Period, at its option and to the
extent permitted by law, Apple will either (1) repair the hardware defect at
no charge, using new parts or parts equivalent to new in performance and
reliability, (2) exchange the product with a product that is new or equivalent
to new in performance and reliability and is at least functionally equivalent
to the original product, or (3) refund the purchase price of the product. Apple
may request that you replace defective parts with new or refurbished userinstallable parts that Apple provides in fulfillment of its warranty obligation.
A replacement product or part, including a user-installable part that has been
installed in accordance with instructions provided by Apple, assumes the
remaining warranty of the original product or ninety (90) days from the date
of replacement or repair, whichever provides longer coverage for you. When a
product or part is exchanged, any replacement item becomes your property
and the replaced item becomes Apple’s property. Parts provided by Apple
in fulfillment of its warranty obligation must be used in products for which
warranty service is claimed. When a refund is given, the product for which the
refund is provided must be returned to Apple and becomes Apple’s property.
EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS This Limited Warranty applies only to the
hardware product manufactured by or for Apple that can be identified by
the “Apple” trademark, trade name, or logo affixed to it. The Limited Warranty
does not apply to any non-Apple hardware product or any software, even
if packaged or sold with the Apple hardware. Manufacturers, suppliers,
or publishers, other than Apple, may provide their own warranties to the
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 23 9/3/09 3:06:16 PM24 25
end user purchaser, but Apple, in so far as permitted by law, provides their
products “as is”. Software distributed by Apple with or without the Apple
brand name (including, but not limited to system software) is not covered
under this Limited Warranty. Refer to the licensing agreement accompanying
the software for details of your rights with respect to its use.
Apple does not warrant that the operation of the product will be
uninterrupted or error-free. Apple is not responsible for damage arising from
failure to follow instructions relating to the product’s use.
This warranty does not apply: (a) to consumable parts, such as batteries,
unless damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship;
(b) to cosmetic damage, including but not limited to scratches, dents,
and broken plastic on ports; (c) to damage caused by use with non-Apple
products; (d) to damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, liquid spill or
submersion, flood, fire, earthquake or other external causes; (e) to damage
caused by operating the product outside the permitted or intended uses
described by Apple; (f) to damage caused by service (including upgrades
and expansions) performed by anyone who is not a representative of
Apple or an Apple authorized wireless service provider); (g) to a product
or part that has been modified to alter functionality or capability without
the written permission of Apple; or (h) if any Apple serial number has been
removed or defaced.
Important: Do not open the hardware product. Opening the hardware
product may cause damage that is not covered by this warranty. Only
Apple or an authorized service provider should perform service on this
hardware product.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THIS WARRANTY AND THE REMEDIES
SET FORTH ABOVE ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
REMEDIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER ORAL, WRITTEN, STATUTORY, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED. AS PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, APPLE SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL STATUTORY OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND WARRANTIES AGAINST HIDDEN OR
LATENT DEFECTS. IF APPLE CANNOT LAWFULLY DISCLAIM STATUTORY OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES THEN TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ALL SUCH
WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF THE
EXPRESS WARRANTY AND TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT SERVICE AS
DETERMINED BY APPLE IN ITS SOLE DISCRETION. No Apple reseller, agent, or
employee is authorized to make any modification, extension, or addition to
this warranty. If any term is held to be illegal or unenforceable, the legality or
enforceability of the remaining terms shall not be affected or impaired.
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR CONDITION, OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE; LOSS OF REVENUE; LOSS
OF ACTUAL OR ANTICIPATED PROFITS (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS ON
CONTRACTS); LOSS OF THE USE OF MONEY; LOSS OF ANTICIPATED SAVINGS;
LOSS OF BUSINESS; LOSS OF OPPORTUNITY; LOSS OF GOODWILL; LOSS OF
REPUTATION; LOSS OF, DAMAGE TO OR CORRUPTION OF DATA; OR ANY
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 24 9/3/09 3:06:16 PM24 25
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE HOWSOEVER CAUSED
INCLUDING THE REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, ANY COSTS
OF RECOVERING, PROGRAMMING OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR
DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH THE APPLE PRODUCT AND ANY FAILURE
TO MAINTAIN THE CONFIDENTIALITY OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCT.
THE FOREGOING LIMITATION SHALL NOT APPLY TO DEATH OR PERSONAL
INJURY CLAIMS, OR ANY STATUTORY LIABILITY FOR INTENTIONAL AND
GROSS NEGLIGENT ACTS AND/OR OMISSIONS. APPLE DISCLAIMS ANY
REPRESENTATION THAT IT WILL BE ABLE TO REPAIR ANY PRODUCT UNDER
THIS WARRANTY OR MAKE A PRODUCT EXCHANGE WITHOUT RISK TO OR
LOSS OF PROGRAMS OR DATA.
OBTAINING WARRANTY SERVICE Please access and review the online help
resources referred to in the documentation accompanying this hardware
product before seeking warranty service. If the product is still not functioning
properly after making use of these resources, please contact the Apple
representatives or, if applicable, an Apple owned retail store (“Apple Retail”)
or Apple authorized wireless service provider located using the information
provided in the documentation. When contacting Apple via telephone,
other charges may apply depending on your location. When calling, an
Apple representative or Apple authorized wireless service provider will help
determine whether your product requires service and, if it does, will inform
you how Apple will provide it. You must assist in diagnosing issues with your
product and follow Apple’s warranty processes.
Apple may restrict service to the country where Apple or its authorized
distributors originally sold the hardware product, and provide warranty
service (i) at an Apple Retail or Apple authorized wireless service provider
location, where service is performed at the location, or the Apple Retail or
Apple authorized wireless service provider may send the product to an Apple
repair service location for service, (ii) by sending you prepaid way bills (and if
you no longer have the original packaging, Apple may send you packaging
material) to enable you to ship the product to Apple’s repair service location
for service, or (iii) by sending you new or refurbished customer-installable
replacement product or parts to enable you to service or exchange your own
product (“DIY Service”). Upon receipt of the replacement product or part,
the original product or part becomes the property of Apple and you agree
to follow instructions, including, if required, arranging the return of original
product or part to Apple in a timely manner. When providing DIY Service
requiring the return of the original product or part, Apple may require a
credit card authorization as security for the retail price of the replacement
product or part and applicable shipping costs. If you follow instructions,
Apple will cancel the credit card authorization, so you will not be charged
for the product or part and shipping costs. If you fail to return the replaced
product or part as instructed, Apple will charge the credit card for the
authorized amount.
Service options, parts availability and response times may vary according
to the country in which service is requested. Service options are subject
to change at any time. You may be responsible for shipping and handling
charges if the product cannot be serviced in the country in which service is
requested. If you seek service in a country that is not the country of original
purchase, you will comply with all applicable export laws and regulations
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 25 9/3/09 3:06:16 PM26 27
and be responsible for all custom duties, V.A.T. and other associated taxes
and charges. Where international service is available, Apple may repair or
exchange defective products and parts with comparable products and parts
that comply with local standards. In accordance with applicable law, Apple
may require that you furnish proof of purchase details and/or comply with
registration requirements before receiving warranty service. Please refer to
the accompanying documentation for more details on this and other matters
on obtaining warranty service.
Apple will maintain and use customer information in accordance with
the Apple Customer Privacy Policy available at the webpage listed in the
table below.
If your product is capable of storing software programs, data and other
information, you should protect its contents against possible operational
failures. Before you deliver your product for warranty service it is your
responsibility to keep a separate backup copy of the contents and disable any
security passwords. THE CONTENTS OF YOUR PRODUCT WILL BE DELETED
AND THE STORAGE MEDIA REFORMATTED IN THE COURSE OF WARRANTY
SERVICE. Your product or a replacement product will be returned to you as
your product was configured when originally purchased, subject to applicable
updates. Apple may install system software updates as part of warranty
service that will prevent the hardware from reverting to an earlier version
of the system software. Third party applications installed on the hardware
may not be compatible or work with the hardware as a result of the system
software update. You will be responsible for reinstalling all other software
programs, data and passwords. Recovery and reinstallation of software
programs and user data are not covered under this Limited Warranty.
A list of authorized wireless service providers is available online at:
http://images.apple.com/legal/warranty/docs/iPhoneAuthorizedDistributors.pdf
Complimentary support may be available. See:
http://www.apple.com/support/country/index.html?dest=complimentary
Warranty Obligor for Region or Country of Purchase
Region/
Country of Purchase
Apple Address
Americas
Brazil Apple Computer
Brasil Ltda
Av. Cidade Jardim 400, 2
Andar, Sao Paulo, SP Brasil
01454-901
Canada Apple Canada Inc. 7495 Birchmount Rd.;
Markham, Ontario, Canada;
L3R 5G2 Canada
Mexico Apple Operations
Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Av. Paseo de la Reforma 505,
Piso 33, Colonia Cuauhtemoc,
Mexico DF 06500
United States and
Other Americas Countries
Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino,
CA 95014, U.S.A.
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 26 9/3/09 3:06:16 PM26 27
Region/
Country of Purchase
Apple Address
Europe, Middle East and Africa
All countries Apple Sales
International
Hollyhill Industrial Estate
Hollyhill, Cork, Republic
of Ireland
Asia Pacific
Australia; New Zealand;
Fiji, Papua New Guinea;
Vanuatu
Apple Pty. Limited. PO Box A2629, South Sydney,
NSW 1235, Australia
Hong Kong Apple Asia Limited 2401 Tower One, Times
Square, Causeway; Hong
Kong
India Apple India Private Ltd. 19th Floor, Concorde Tower
C, UB City No 24, Vittal
Mallya Road, Bangalore
560-001, India
Japan Apple Japan Inc. 3-20-2 Nishishinjuku,
Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Korea Apple Computer
Korea Ltd.
3201, ASEM Tower; 159,
Samsung-dong, Kangnam-gu;
Seoul 135-090, Korea
Afghanistan, Bangladesh,
Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia,
Guam, Indonesia, Laos,
Singapore, Malaysia, Nepal,
Pakistan, Philippines, Sri
Lanka, Vietnam
Apple South Asia
Pte. Ltd.
7 Ang Mo Kio Street 64
Singapore 569086
People’s Republic of China Apple Computer
Trading (Shanghai)
Co. Ltd.
B Area, 2/F, No. 6 Warehouse
Building, No. 500 Bing Ke
Road, Wai Gao Qiao Free
Trade Zone, Shanghai, P.R.C.
Thailand Apple South Asia
(Thailand) Limited
25th Floor, Suite B2, Siam
Tower, 989 Rama 1 Road,
Pataumwan, Bangkok, 10330
Taiwan Apple Asia LLC 16A, No. 333 Tun Hwa S. Road.
Sec. 2, Taipei, Taiwan 106
Other Asian Pacific
Countries
Apple Inc. 1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino,
CA 95014, U.S.A.
Privacy Policy
All countries http://www.apple.com/legal/warranty/privacy
iPhone US Warranty v1.8
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 27 9/3/09 3:06:16 PM© 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Apple, the Apple logo, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. iTunes
Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Apple Inc. is under license.
034-5216-A
Printed in XXXX
034-5216_N82_iPig_63x116_4.5pt.indd 28 9/3/09 3:06:16 PM
User Guide
Manuel de l’utilisateur
Manual del usuarioEnglish 3
Congratulations on your new iPhone Bluetooth®
Headset. Follow the instructions to get started.
Pair the Headset with iPhone
1 Connect the included iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable to a
USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on the keyboard).
2 Connect iPhone and the headset to the cable. The
headset pairs with iPhone automatically.
Cable
The ? rst time you connect the headset, let it charge for
about an hour until the status light on the headset turns
from amber to green.
3 Remove iPhone and the headset from the cable.
To connect the headset to iPhone, press the button on
top of the headset. This allows calls to be routed through
the headset.
In some cases, you may need to reconnect the headset to
iPhone. See page 6.4 English
Make or Answer a Call
1 Place the headset in either ear with the microphone
pointed towards your mouth.
Microphone
Placing the included foam pad over the speaker may
provide a more comfortable ? t.
2 Make a call on iPhone. Press the button on top of the
headset to answer an incoming call.
Button Status light
If you answer an incoming call by tapping the iPhone
touchscreen, audio is routed through iPhone instead.
3 When you ? nish, press the button to end the call.English 5
Adjust the Volume
m Use the volume buttons on the side of iPhone.
WARNING: For important safety information about
avoiding hearing loss, see page 14.
What Else You Can Do
To Do this
Decline incoming call Press button for about one second, until
you hear a beep.
Switch to incoming or
on-hold call and put
current call on hold
Press button.
Switch to incoming or
on-hold call and end
current call
Press button for about one second, until
you hear a beep.
Check whether
headset is turned on
Press button. If headset is on, status
light blinks green and headset beeps.
Turn headset on Press and hold button for about three
seconds, until you see the status light
blink green or hear four rising tones.
Turn headset o? Press and hold button for about four
seconds, until you see the status light
blink amber or hear four falling tones. 6 English
Switch from the Headset to iPhone
To stop using the headset and hear calls through iPhone
instead, you can either:
m Turn the headset o? . You can turn it on again at any time
to use it with iPhone.
m During a call, tap Audio Source on iPhone and choose
iPhone or Speaker (for speakerphone).
Reconnect the Headset to iPhone
You can tell that calls will be routed through the headset
if the Bluetooth icon (?) in the iPhone status bar is blue
or white (depending on which application you’re using).
If the headset gets disconnected from iPhone, two low
beeps sound from the headset. You can tell that the
headset is disconnected from iPhone if the Bluetooth
icon in the status bar is gray or isn’t present.
To route calls through the headset:
m Press the button to reinitiate a connection.
m If that doesn’t work, make sure the headset is turned on,
charged, and in range of iPhone (within about 30 feet).
m If that doesn’t work, on iPhone make sure Bluetooth is
turned on. From the Home screen, choose Settings >
General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.English 7
m If that doesn’t work, pair the headset with iPhone again.
See page 3.
If the headset is paired with other Bluetooth devices,
you’ll need to reconnect it to iPhone after turning the
headset o? or after using it with one of the other devices.
Charge the Headset
When the headset doesn’t have much charge left, a long
beep sounds every ten seconds.
To charge the headset:
1 Connect the included iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable to
your computer. Or connect it to the Apple USB Power
Adapter that comes with iPhone and connect the adapter
to a power outlet.
2 Connect the headset to the cable.
A fully depleted headset recharges in about an hour
and a half.
Status light amber = Charging
Status light green = Completely charged
3 Remove the headset from the cable. Press the button to
connect the headset to iPhone, so that calls are routed
through the headset.8 English
To see how much charge is left:
m Connect the iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable to your
computer or an Apple USB Power Adapter plugged
into a power outlet. Then connect iPhone and the
headset to the cable. The iPhone screen shows the
headset’s battery level.
The headset contains an internal, non–user-replaceable
battery. Rechargeable batteries have a limited number
of charge cycles and will eventually wear out. Battery life
and number of charge cycles vary by use and settings.
For more information, go to www.apple.com/batteries.
For more information about disposal of the headset,
see page 57.
WARNING: For important safety information about
charging the headset, see page 13.
Use the Headset with Another Phone
or Device
You can use the headset with some other Bluetooth
devices, such as another phone. And you can pair the
headset with iPhone manually, if you don’t have the
iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable handy.English 9
You can also pair the headset with some Bluetooth
enabled computers and talk to friends using an audioenabled instant messaging application like iChat.
To set the headset to be discoverable, so the other
device can sense it:
1 Turn the headset o? .
2 Press and hold the headset button for about eight
seconds, until you hear the startup tones and then ? ve
quick high beeps.
The headset remains discoverable for about ? ve minutes.
The status light blinks green for as long as the headset
is discoverable.
To pair the headset with another phone or pair it with
iPhone manually:
1 On the phone, turn Bluetooth on and set the phone to
search for other Bluetooth devices. On iPhone, you do
this by choosing Settings > General > Bluetooth and
turning Bluetooth on.
2 Set the headset to be discoverable (see above).
3 On the phone, choose iPhone Bluetooth Headset and
enter the PIN code 0000.
See the instructions that came with your phone for more
information about pairing it with Bluetooth devices.10 English
To pair the headset with a Bluetooth enabled Mac using
Mac OS X version 10.4.9 or later:
1 Open System Preferences and click Bluetooth.
2 If this is the ? rst Bluetooth device you’ve set up, click the
Set Up New Device button. Otherwise, click the Add (+)
button below the list of your existing devices.
3 Choose Headset.
4 Set the headset to be discoverable.
5 Follow the onscreen instructions. When prompted for a
passkey, enter 0000.
To use the headset with iChat:
1 Pair the headset with your Mac.
2 In iChat, choose iChat > Preferences and click Audio/
Video.
3 Choose iPhone Bluetooth Headset from the Microphone
and Sound Output pop-up menus.
4 Start an audio or video chat.
To pair the headset with another computer (such as a
Windows PC) or Bluetooth device:
Follow the instructions that came with the computer or
device. When prompted for a passkey or PIN, enter 0000.English 11
Tips and Troubleshooting
If the headset isn’t responding or working correctly, try
these steps in order until it starts working.
m Make sure the headset is on. Press the button. If the
status light doesn’t blink green, press and hold the
button for about three seconds, until you see the status
light blink green or hear four rising tones.
m Make sure iPhone is turned on.
m Make sure the headset and iPhone are charged.
m During a call, make sure iPhone is set to play sound
through the headset. Tap Audio Source and choose
iPhone Bluetooth Headset.
m Make sure iPhone is paired with the headset. See page 3.
m On iPhone, make sure Bluetooth is turned on. From the
Home screen, choose Settings > General > Bluetooth and
turn Bluetooth on.
m On iPhone, choose Settings and turn Airplane Mode on.
Then wait about three seconds and turn it o? again.
For more tips and troubleshooting, go to:
www.apple.com/support/iphone12 English
±
Read all safety information below and operating
instructions before using the iPhone Bluetooth
Headset to avoid injury.
Important Safety Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these safety instructions could
result in ? re, electric shock, or other injury or damage.
Handling the iPhone Bluetooth Headset
Do not drop, disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform,
puncture, shred, microwave, incinerate, paint, or insert
foreign objects into the iPhone Bluetooth Headset.
Avoiding Water and Wet Locations
Do not use the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in rain, or near
washbasins or other wet locations. Take care not to spill any
food or liquid on the iPhone Bluetooth Headset. In case the
iPhone Bluetooth Headset gets wet, turn it o? (press and
hold the button for about four seconds, until the status light
blinks amber) before cleaning, and allow it to dry thoroughly
before turning it on again. Do not attempt to dry the iPhone
Bluetooth Headset with an external heat source, such as a
microwave oven or hair dryer.English 13
Repairing the iPhone Bluetooth Headset
Never attempt to repair or modify the iPhone Bluetooth
Headset yourself. The iPhone Bluetooth Headset does not
contain any user-serviceable parts. If the iPhone Bluetooth
Headset has been submerged in water, punctured, or
subjected to a severe fall, do not use it until you take it to an
Apple Authorized Service Provider.
Charging the iPhone Bluetooth Headset
To charge the iPhone Bluetooth Headset, use only the
iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable with an Apple USB Power
Adapter or a high-power USB port on another device that
is compliant with the USB 2.0 or 1.1 standards, or another
Apple-branded product or accessory designed to work with
the iPhone Bluetooth Headset.
Read all safety instructions for any products and accessories
before using with the iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Apple is
not responsible for the operation of third-party accessories
or their compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
When you use the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge
the iPhone Bluetooth Headset, make sure that the power
adapter is fully assembled before you plug it into a power
outlet. Then insert the Apple USB Power Adapter ? rmly into
the power outlet. Do not connect or disconnect the Apple
USB Power Adapter with wet hands. Do not use any power 14 English
adapter other than the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge
the iPhone Bluetooth Headset.
Avoiding Hearing Loss
Permanent hearing loss may occur if the iPhone Bluetooth
Headset is used at high volume. You can adapt over time to
a higher volume of sound, which may sound normal but can
be damaging to your hearing. Set the volume to a safe level
before that happens. If you experience ringing in your ears
or speech sounds mup ed, reduce the volume or discontinue
use of your headset and have your hearing checked. The
louder the volume, the less time is required before your
hearing could be a? ected. Hearing experts suggest that to
protect your hearing:
 Limit the amount of time you use your headset at high
volume.
 Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy
surroundings.
 Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking
near you.
In Case of Skin Irritation
Headsets can sometimes lead to ear infections if not
properly cleaned. Clean the speaker of your iPhone
Bluetooth Headset when necessary using water or an English 15
antiseptic, such as isopropyl alcohol, on a slightly damp, lintfree cloth. If skin irritation develops, discontinue use. If the
problem persists, consult a physician.
Driving Safely
Check and obey the laws and regulations on the use of
mobile devices like iPhone in the areas where you drive.
Be careful and attentive while driving. If you decide to use
iPhone while driving, keep in mind the following guidelines:
Give full attention to driving and to the road. Using a
mobile device while driving may be distracting. If you ? nd it
disruptive or distracting while operating any type of vehicle,
riding a bicycle, or performing any activity that requires your
full attention, pull o? the road and park before making or
answering a call if driving conditions require.
Choking Hazards
The iPhone Bluetooth Headset is small and may present a
choking hazard to small children. Keep from small children.
For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag
An air bag in? ates with great force. Do not store the iPhone
Bluetooth Headset or any of its accessories in the area over
the air bag or in the air bag deployment area.16 English
Radio Frequency Interference
Nearly every electronic device is subject to radio frequency
interference from external sources if inadequately shielded,
designed, or otherwise con? gured to be compatible. As a
result, the iPhone Bluetooth Headset may cause interference
with other devices. Follow these instructions to avoid
interference problems.
Aircraft
Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations may
prohibit using wireless devices while in the air. Turn the
iPhone Bluetooth Headset o? when on an airplane.
Vehicles
RF signals may a? ect installed or inadequately shielded
electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the
manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle.
Electronics Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from RF
signals. However, certain electronic equipment may not be
shielded against the RF signals from the iPhone Bluetooth
Headset.English 17
Hearing Aids
The iPhone Bluetooth Headset may interfere with some
hearing aids. If it does, consult the hearing aid manufacturer
or your physician for alternatives or remedies.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical device, consult the
manufacturer of your device or your physician to determine
if it is adequately shielded from external RF energy.
Turn the iPhone Bluetooth Headset o? in health care
facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct
you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Posted Facilities
Turn o? the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in any facility where
posted notices so require.
Blasting Areas
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn o? the
iPhone Bluetooth Headset when in a “blasting area” or in
areas posted “Turn o? two-way radio.” Obey all signs and
instructions.18 English
Important Handling Information
NOTICE: Failure to follow these handling instructions
could result in damage to the iPhone Bluetooth Headset
or other property.
Using Connectors and Ports
Never force a connector into a port. Check for obstructions
on the port. If the connector and port don’t join with
reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure
that the connector matches the port and that you have
positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port.
Keeping the iPhone Bluetooth Headset Within Acceptable
Temperatures
Operate the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in a place where the
temperature is always between 0º and 35º C (32º to 95º F).
The iPhone Bluetooth Headset battery life might temporarily
shorten in low-temperature conditions.
Store the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in a place where the
temperature is always between -20º and 45º C (-4º to 113º
F). Don’t leave the iPhone Bluetooth Headset in your car,
because temperatures in parked cars can exceed this range.Français 19
Félicitations pour l’achat de votre nouvelle oreillette
Bluetooth® iPhone. Pour commencer à utiliser votre
appareil, suivez les instructions ci-dessous.
Pour jumeler l’oreillette avec votre iPhone
1 Connectez le câble de voyage iPhone Bluetooth inclus à un
port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur (pas sur un port du clavier).
2 Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble sur l’iPhone et
l’oreillette sur l’embout du câble. L’oreillette est alors
automatiquement jumelée avec l’iPhone.
Câble
À la première connexion de l’oreillette, laissez-la se recharger
pendant environ une heure jusqu’à ce que son indicateur
d’état passe du orange au vert.
3 Débranchez le câble de l’iPhone et de l’oreillette.
Pour connecter l’oreillette à l’iPhone, appuyez sur le bouton
situé en bout d’oreillette. Ce bouton permet de rediriger les
appels vers l’oreillette.20 Français
Dans certains cas, il se peut que vous deviez rebrancher
l’oreillette sur l’iPhone. Voir page 23.
Pour e? ectuer un appel ou répondre à un appel
1 Placez l’oreillette dans une oreille en orientant le microphone
vers votre bouche.
Microphone
Le coussinet en mousse inclus peut être placé sur l’écouteur
pour mieux adapter ce dernier à votre oreille.
2 E? ectuez un appel avec l’iPhone. Appuyez sur le bouton
situé en bout d’oreillette pour répondre à un appel entrant.
Bouton Indicateur d’état
Si vous répondez à un appel entrant en touchant l’écran tactile
de l’iPhone, le son est dans ce cas acheminé vers l’iPhone.
3 Une fois votre conversation terminée, appuyez sur le bouton
pour mettre ? n à l’appel.Français 21
Pour régler le volume
m Utilisez les boutons de réglage du volume situés sur le côté
de l’iPhone.
ATTENTION : pour prendre connaissance des précautions
à prendre pour éviter toute perte d’audition, reportez-vous
à la page 31.
Autres fonctions
Pour Procédez ainsi :
Refuser un appel entrant Appuyez sur le bouton pendant environ
une seconde, jusqu’à ce que vous
entendiez un bip.
Passer à un appel
entrant ou en attente et
mettre l’appel en cours
en attente
Appuyez sur le bouton.
Passer à un appel entrant
ou en attente et mettre
? n à l’appel en cours
Appuyez sur le bouton pendant environ
une seconde, jusqu’à ce que vous
entendiez un bip.
Véri? er si l’oreillette
est activée
Appuyez sur le bouton. Si l’oreillette est
activée, un voyant d’état vert clignote
et l’oreillette émet un bip.22 Français
Activer l’oreillette Maintenez le bouton enfoncé pendant
environ trois secondes, jusqu’à ce que le
voyant d’état vert se mette à clignoter
ou que vous entendiez quatre tonalités
de plus en plus fortes.
Désactiver l’oreillette Maintenez le bouton enfoncé pendant
environ quatre secondes, jusqu’à ce que le
voyant d’état orange se mette à clignoter
ou que vous entendiez quatre tonalités de
plus en plus faibles.
Pour passer de l’oreillette à l’iPhone
Pour ne plus utiliser l’oreillette et écouter vos appels via
l’iPhone, vous avez deux possibilités :
m Désactivez l’oreillette. Vous pouvez toujours la réactiver
à tout moment de façon à l’utiliser avec l’iPhone.
m Durant un appel, appuyez sur Source audio sur l’écran
de l’iPhone, puis choisissez iPhone ou Haut-parleur
(pour le haut-parleur du téléphone).Français 23
Pour reconnecter l’oreillette à l’iPhone
Il est possible de s’assurer que les appels sont acheminés
vers l’oreillette en véri? ant si l’icône Bluetooth (?), située
dans la barre d’état de l’iPhone, est bleue ou blanche
(en fonction de l’application utilisée).
L’oreillette émet deux bips graves dès qu’elle est
déconnectée de l’iPhone. Il est possible de véri? er si
l’oreillette est déconnectée de l’iPhone en véri? ant si
l’icône Bluetooth de la barre d’état est grise ou absente.
Pour acheminer les appels vers l’oreillette :
m Appuyez sur le bouton pour rétablir une connexion.
m Si cela ne marche pas, assurez-vous que l’oreillette est
activée, rechargée et qu’elle se trouve à portée de l’iPhone
(dans un rayon d’environ 9 m).
m Si cela ne marche pas, assurez-vous que Bluetooth est activé
sur l’iPhone. À partir de l’écran Accueil, choisissez Réglages >
Généraux > Bluetooth, puis activez l’option Bluetooth.
m Si cela ne marche pas, jumelez à nouveau l’oreillette avec
l’iPhone. Voir page 19.
Si l’oreillette est jumelée avec d’autres appareils Bluetooth,
vous devez dans ce cas la rebrancher, après l’avoir éteinte
ou utilisée avec les appareils en question, sur l’iPhone.24 Français
Chargement de l’oreillette
L’oreillette émet un long bip toutes les 10 secondes pour
vous signaler que sa batterie est presque épuisée.
Pour recharger l’oreillette :
1 Branchez le câble de voyage iPhone Bluetooth inclus sur
votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également le connecter à
l’adaptateur secteur USB Apple fourni avec l’iPhone, puis
brancher l’adaptateur sur une prise électrique.
2 Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble sur l’oreillette.
Il faut environ une heure et demie pour recharger une
oreillette dont la batterie est complètement épuisée.
Voyant d’état orange = en cours de chargement
Voyant d’état vert = complètement rechargée
3 Retirez l’oreillette du câble. Appuyez sur le bouton pour
connecter l’oreillette à l’iPhone, a? n que les appels soient
acheminés vers l’oreillette.
Pour véri? er le niveau de charge restant :
m Connectez le câble de voyage pour iPhone Bluetooth à
votre ordinateur ou à un adaptateur secteur USB Apple
branché sur une prise de courant. Branchez l’autre
extrémité du câble sur l’iPhone et l’oreillette sur l’embout
du câble. L’écran de l’iPhone a? che le niveau de charge
de la batterie de l’oreillette.Français 25
L’oreillette contient une batterie interne qui ne peut être
remplacée par l’utilisateur. Les batteries rechargeables ont
un nombre de cycles de chargement limité et ? nissent
par s’user complètement. La durée de vie et le nombre de
cycles de chargement des batteries varient en fonction de
leur usage et des réglages utilisés. Pour plus d’informations,
rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/batteries. Pour en savoir
plus sur le recyclage de l’oreillette, reportez-vous à la page 57.
ATTENTION : pour prendre connaissance des
précautions à prendre pour recharger l’oreillette,
reportez-vous à la page 30.
Utilisation de l’oreillette avec un autre téléphone
ou un autre appareil
Vous pouvez utiliser l’oreillette avec d’autres appareils
Bluetooth tels que d’autres types de téléphones. Vous pouvez
aussi jumeler manuellement l’oreillette à votre iPhone si vous
ne disposez pas du câble de voyage iPhone Bluetooth.
L’oreillette peut également être jumelée avec certains
ordinateurs équipés de la technologie Bluetooth, a? n
de pouvoir converser avec des amis au moyen d’une
application de messagerie instantanée dotée de fonctions
audio, telle qu’iChat.26 Français
Pour régler l’oreillette a? n qu’elle soit détectable par
d’autres appareils :
1 Désactivez l’oreillette.
2 Maintenez le bouton de l’oreillette enfoncé pendant environ
huit secondes, jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez les tonalités de
démarrage suivies d’une succession rapide de cinq bips aigus.
L’oreillette demeure détectable pendant environ
cinq minutes. Le voyant d’état vert clignote tant que
l’oreillette est détectable.
Pour jumeler l’oreillette avec un autre téléphone ou
pour la jumeler manuellement avec l’iPhone :
1 Sur le téléphone, activez Bluetooth, puis réglez le téléphone
a? n qu’il recherche d’autres appareils Bluetooth. Pour ce faire,
choisissez Réglages > Généraux > Bluetooth, puis activez
Bluetooth.
2 Réglez l’oreillette a? n qu’elle soit détectable (voir ci-dessus).
3 Sur le téléphone, choisissez Oreillette Bluetooth iPhone,
puis tapez le code PIN 0000.
Consultez les instructions de votre téléphone pour obtenir
des informations sur la manière de le jumeler avec des
appareils Bluetooth.Français 27
Pour jumeler l’oreillette avec un ordinateur Mac équipé
de Bluetooth et fonctionnant sous Mac OS X 10.4.9 ou
ultérieur :
1 Ouvrez Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur Bluetooth.
2 Si l’appareil Bluetooth est le premier que vous con? gurez,
cliquez sur le bouton « Con? gurer le nouvel appareil ».
Dans le cas contraire, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter (+)
situé sous la liste des appareils déjà con? gurés.
3 Choisissez l’option Casque d’écoute.
4 Réglez l’oreillette a? n qu’elle soit détectable.
5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Lorsque vous êtes invité
à saisir un code d’accès, tapez 0000.
Pour utiliser l’oreillette avec iChat :
1 Jumelez l’oreillette avec votre Mac.
2 Dans iChat, choisissez iChat > Préférences, puis cliquez
sur Audio/Vidéo.
3 Choisissez Oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans les menus
locaux Microphone et Sortie audio.
4 Commencez une conversation audio ou vidéo.
Pour jumeler l’oreillette avec un autre ordinateur (un PC
Windows par exemple) ou un autre appareil Bluetooth :
Suivez les instructions fournies avec l’ordinateur où
l’appareil. Lorsque vous êtes invité à saisir un code
d’accès ou un code PIN, tapez 0000.28 Français
Astuces et dépannage
Si l’oreillette ne répond plus ou ne fonctionne plus
correctement, essayez les solutions suivantes dans
l’ordre jusqu’à ce qu’elle fonctionne à nouveau.
m Assurez-vous que l’oreillette est activée. Appuyez sur
le bouton. Si le voyant d’état vert ne clignote pas,
maintenez le bouton enfoncé pendant environ trois
secondes, jusqu’à ce que le voyant vert clignote ou que
vous entendiez quatre tonalités de plus en plus fortes.
m Assurez-vous que l’iPhone est allumé.
m Assurez-vous que l’oreillette et l’iPhone sont rechargés.
m Durant un appel, assurez-vous que l’iPhone est réglé pour
di? user le son à travers l’oreillette. Appuyez sur Source
audio, puis choisissez Oreillette Bluetooth iPhone.
m Assurez-vous que l’iPhone est jumelé avec l’oreillette.
Voir page 19.
m Sur l’iPhone, assurez-vous que Bluetooth est activé.
À partir de l’écran Accueil, choisissez Réglages >
Généraux > Bluetooth, puis activez l’option Bluetooth.
m Sur l’iPhone, choisissez Réglages, puis activez l’option
Mode Avion. Patientez ensuite pendant environ trois
secondes, puis désactivez à nouveau ce mode.Français 29
Pour obtenir des astuces et des instructions de
dépannage supplémentaires, rendez-vous sur :
www.apple.com/fr/support/iphone.
±
Pour éviter tout problème, lisez attentivement
toutes les informations relatives à la sécurité ainsi
que les instructions d’utilisation ci-dessous avant
d’utiliser votre oreillette Bluetooth pour iPhone.
Informations importantes relatives à la sécurité
ATTENTION : tout manquement à ces consignes de sécurité
est susceptible de provoquer un incendie, une décharge
électrique ou d’autres blessures ou dégâts.
Manipulation de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone
Évitez de laisser tomber, de démonter ou d’ouvrir, d’écraser, de
tordre ou de déformer, de percer, de broyer, de mettre au four
à micro-ondes, d’incinérer ou de peindre l’oreillette Bluetooth
iPhone, ni d’y insérer des corps étrangers.30 Français
Éviter l’eau et les endroits mouillés
N’utilisez jamais l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone sous la pluie,
à proximité d’un lavabo ou de tout autre endroit mouillé.
Veillez à ne pas renverser d’aliments ou de liquide sur l’oreillette
Bluetooth iPhone. Si l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone est mouillée,
désactivez-la (en maintenant le bouton enfoncé pendant environ
quatre secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état orange clignote)
avant de la nettoyer et attendez qu’elle soit complètement
sèche avant de l’activer à nouveau. N’essayez jamais de sécher
l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone à l’aide d’une source de chaleur
extérieure telle qu’un four à micro-ondes ou un sèche-cheveux.
Réparation de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone
N’essayez jamais de réparer ou de modi? er vous-même
l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone. L’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone
ne contient aucune pièce réparable par un utilisateur. Si
l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone a été plongée dans l’eau, a été
perforée ou a subi une chute grave, ne l’utilisez pas avant de
l’avoir fait réviser par un fournisseur de services agréé Apple.
Chargement de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone
Pour recharger l’oreillette Bluetooth pour iPhone, utilisez
exclusivement le câble de voyage iPhone Bluetooth avec
un adaptateur secteur USB Apple ou le port USB alimenté
d’un appareil conforme aux normes USB 2.0 ou 1.1, ou avec
un autre produit ou accessoire Apple conçu pour fonctionner
avec l’oreillette Bluetooth pour iPhone.Français 31
Lisez préalablement toutes les instructions de sécurité
des produits et accessoires que vous voulez utiliser avec
l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone. Apple n’est pas responsable
du fonctionnement d’accessoires tiers ni de leur conformité
aux normes de réglementation et de sécurité.
Si vous utilisez un adaptateur secteur USB Apple pour recharger
l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone, assurez-vous que l’adaptateur
secteur est complètement assemblé avant de le brancher sur
une prise électrique. Insérez ensuite fermement l’adaptateur
secteur USB Apple dans la prise de courant. Ne branchez ni ne
débranchez en aucun cas l’adaptateur secteur Apple USB Power
Adapter lorsque vous avez les mains mouillées. N’utilisez pas
d’autre adaptateur secteur que l’adaptateur secteur USB Apple
pour recharger l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone.
Prévention de la perte d’acuité auditive
L’utilisation de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone à des volumes
sonores élevés peut entraîner une perte irréversible de
l’audition. Vous pouvez vous habituer peu à peu à un volume
sonore plus élevé qui peut vous paraître normal mais peut
entraîner la détérioration de votre audition. Réglez le volume
à un niveau raisonnable, avant que le problème se présente.
Si vous entendez vos oreilles « sip er » ou que les sons vous
paraissent étou? és, réduisez le volume ou n’utilisez plus
votre oreillette et consultez un spécialiste de l’audition. 32 Français
Plus le volume d’écoute est élevé, moins il faut de temps
pour que votre audition soit endommagée. Voici quelques
conseils de spécialistes qui vous permettront de protéger
votre audition :
 Limitez la durée d’utilisation à des volumes élevés
de votre oreillette.
 Évitez d’augmenter le volume pour couvrir les bruits
environnants.
 Baissez le volume si vous ne pouvez plus entendre
les personnes qui parlent à côté de vous.
En cas d’irritation cutanée
L’usage d’une oreillette peut provoquer parfois des infections
de l’oreille si le dispositif n’est pas correctement entretenu.
Nettoyez régulièrement l’écouteur de votre oreillette Bluetooth
pour iPhone, avec de l’eau ou un produit antiseptique, par
exemple à l’aide d’un linge non pelucheux humidi? é d’alcool
isopropyle. Si l’irritation cutanée se développe, n’utilisez plus
le dispositif. Si le problème persiste, consultez un médecin.
Consignes de sécurité lors de la conduite
Consultez et respectez les lois et réglementations applicables en
matière d’utilisation de dispositifs mobiles à l’endroit où vous
conduisez. Soyez vigilant et attentif lorsque vous conduisez.
Si vous comptez utiliser l’iPhone en conduisant, n’oubliez pas Français 33
de rester bien attentif à votre conduite et au code de la route.
L’utilisation d’un dispositif mobile lors de la conduite peut vous
distraire de celle-ci. Si vous avez du mal à vous concentrer alors
que vous conduisez n’importe quel type de véhicule, que vous
utilisez une bicyclette ou que vous réalisez toute activité qui
demande votre attention complète, arrêtez-vous sur le bord de
la route avant de passer un appel ou de répondre à un appel si
les conditions de conduite l’exigent.
Risques d’étou? ement
L’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone constitue, du fait de sa taille réduite,
un risque d’étou? ement pour les jeunes enfants. Ne la laissez pas
à la portée des jeunes enfants.
Véhicules équipés d’un coussin gon? able de sécurité
Les coussins de sécurité se gon? ent brusquement. Ne placez
jamais l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone ou l’un de ses accessoires
dans la zone située au-dessus de l’airbag ou dans la zone de
déploiement de ce dernier.
Perturbations radioélectriques
Presque tous les appareils électroniques sont sensibles aux
perturbations radioélectriques dues à des sources externes
s’ils ne sont pas adéquatement blindés, conçus ou con? gurés
pour être compatibles. Il se peut, par conséquent, que l’oreillette
Bluetooth iPhone provoque des interférences avec d’autres 34 Français
appareils. Respectez les instructions suivantes pour éviter
tout problème d’interférence.
Avions
Les règlements de la FAA (Federal Aviation Administration)
peuvent interdire l’utilisation d’appareils de communication
sans ? l à bord des avions. Désactivez l’oreillette Bluetooth
iPhone lorsque vous voyagez en avion.
Véhicules
Les signaux RF peuvent a? ecter les systèmes électroniques
embarqués ou mal protégés des véhicules à moteur. En ce
qui concerne votre véhicule, véri? ez avec le constructeur
ou son représentant.
Appareils électroniques
La plupart des appareils électroniques modernes sont blindés
contre les signaux RF. Il se peut toutefois que certains d’entre
eux ne soient pas blindés contre les signaux RF émis par
l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone.
Appareils auditifs
L’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone peut provoquer des interférences
avec certains appareils auditifs. Si c’est le cas, consultez le
fabricant de votre prothèse ou votre médecin pour trouver
d’autres options ou remèdes.Français 35
Autres appareils médicaux
Si vous utilisez un autre type d’appareil médical, consultez
votre médecin ou le fabricant de l’appareil pour vous assurer
que cet appareil est adéquatement blindé contre les signaux
RF externes.
Dans les établissements de santé, désactivez l’oreillette
Bluetooth iPhone lorsque des a? ches vous invitent à le faire.
Certains équipements utilisés dans les hôpitaux ou dans les
établissements de santé sont sensibles aux signaux RF externes.
Installations sensibles
Désactivez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans les installations
au sein desquelles des a? ches vous demandent de le faire.
Zones de dynamitage
Pour éviter toute interférence avec des opérations de
dynamitage, désactivez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dès
que vous vous trouvez dans une « zone de dynamitage » ou
dans des endroits où sont a? chées des pancartes invitant à
« Désactiver les émetteurs récepteurs ». Respectez toutes les
pancartes et toutes les consignes.36 Français
Informations importantes concernant la manipulation
de l’appareil
AVIS : le non-respect de ces instructions de manipulation
risque d’endommager l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone ou
d’autres biens.
Utilisation des connecteurs et des ports
Ne forcez jamais l’insertion d’un connecteur dans un port.
Assurez-vous que le port n’est pas bouché. Si vous ne
parvenez pas à insérer le connecteur dans le port de manière
relativement aisée, c’est qu’ils ne sont probablement pas
compatibles. Veillez à ce que le connecteur corresponde au
port et à ce qu’il soit correctement positionné par rapport
au port.Français 37
Conservation de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans des plages
de température acceptables
N’utilisez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone que dans des endroits
où la température est comprise entre 0º et 35º C. Il se peut
que l’autonomie de la batterie de l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone
soit temporairement réduite dans des conditions de faible
température.
Conservez l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans un endroit où
la température est toujours comprise entre -20º et 45º C.
N’abandonnez pas l’oreillette Bluetooth iPhone dans votre
voiture, car les températures à l’intérieur d’une voiture en
stationnement peuvent dépasser ces limites.38 Español
Enhorabuena por su nuevo auricular manos
libres iPhone Bluetooth® Headset. Para empezar,
siga estas instrucciones.
Cómo enlazar el auricular manos libres con el iPhone
1 Conecte el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable incluido a
un puerto USB 2.0 del ordenador (no del teclado).
2 Conecte el iPhone y el auricular manos libres al cable.
El auricular manos libres se enlaza con el iPhone
automáticamente.
Cable
La primera vez que conecte el auricular manos libres,
déjelo cargar durante una hora aproximadamente,
hasta que su luz de estado pase de ámbar a verde.
3 Desconecte el iPhone y el auricular manos libres del
cable. Para conectar el auricular manos libres al iPhone,
pulse el botón situado en la parte superior del auricular.
De este modo, las llamadas se enviarán al auricular.Español 39
En algunos casos, deberá volver a conectar el auricular
manos libres al iPhone. Consulte la página 41.
Cómo realizar o responder a una llamada
1 Colóquese el auricular manos libres en cualquiera de
las orejas con el micrófono apuntando hacia la boca.
Micrófono
Si coloca la almohadilla acolchada (incluida) en el altavoz
del auricular, conseguirá un ajuste más cómodo.
2 Realice una llamada con el iPhone. Pulse el botón de la
parte superior del auricular manos libres para responder
a una llamada entrante.
Botón Luz de estado
Si responde a una llamada entrante pulsando la pantalla
táctil del iPhone, el sonido se recibirá a través del iPhone.
3 Cuando termine, pulse el botón para ? nalizar la llamada.40 Español
Cómo ajustar el volumen
m Utilice los botones de volumen laterales del iPhone.
ADVERTENCIA: Para obtener información de seguridad
importante sobre cómo evitar pérdidas auditivas,
consulte la página 51.
¿Qué más puede hacer?
Para Haga esto
Rechazar una llamada
entrante
Pulse el botón durante un segundo
aproximadamente, hasta que oiga
un sonido.
Pasar a la llamada
entrante o en espera
y poner la llamada
actual en espera
Pulse el botón.
Pasar a la llamada
entrante o en espera
y terminar la llamada
actual
Pulse el botón durante un segundo
aproximadamente, hasta que oiga
un sonido.
Comprobar si el
auricular manos libres
está encendido
Pulse el botón. Si el auricular manos
libres está encendido, la luz de estado
parpadea en verde y el auricular emite
un sonido.Español 41
Encender el auricular
manos libres
Mantenga pulsado el botón durante
unos tres segundos hasta que la luz de
estado parpadee en verde o escuche
cuatro tonos crecientes.
Apagar el auricular
manos libres
Mantenga pulsado el botón durante
unos cuatro segundos hasta que la
luz de estado parpadee en ámbar o
escuche cuatro tonos decrecientes.
Cómo pasar del auricular manos libres al iPhone
Para dejar de utilizar el auricular manos libres y escuchar
las llamadas a través del iPhone, puede hacer lo siguiente:
m Apague el auricular manos libres. Puede encenderlo en
cualquier momento para volver a utilizarlo con el iPhone.
m Durante una llamada, pulse “Fuente de audio” en el iPhone
y elija iPhone o Altavoz (para el altavoz del teléfono).
Cómo volver a conectar el auricular manos libres
al iPhone
Puede saber que las llamadas se enviarán al auricular
manos libres si el icono de Bluetooth (?) de la barra de
estado del iPhone es azul o blanco (según la aplicación
que utilice). 42 Español
Si el auricular manos libres se desconecta del iPhone,
emitirá dos sonidos graves. Puede saber que el auricular
está desconectado del iPhone si el icono de Bluetooth
de la barra de estado es gris o no aparece.
Para enviar las llamadas al auricular manos libres:
m Pulse el botón para reiniciar la conexión.
m Si no funciona, compruebe que el auricular manos libres
esté encendido, cargado y situado en el radio de alcance
del iPhone (hasta 10 metros).
m Si no funciona, compruebe que el iPhone tenga la
tecnología Bluetooth activada. En la pantalla Inicio,
seleccione Ajustes > General > Bluetooth y active
Bluetooth.
m Si no funciona, vuelva a enlazar el auricular manos libres
con el iPhone. Para ello, consulte la página 38.
Si el auricular manos libres está enlazado con otros
dispositivos Bluetooth, deberá volver a conectarlo al
iPhone después de haberlo apagado o de haberlo usado
con uno de dichos dispositivos.Español 43
Cómo cargar el auricular manos libres
Cuando el auricular tenga poca carga, se oirá un sonido
largo cada diez segundos.
Para cargar el auricular manos libres:
1 Conecte el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable incluido
al ordenador, o bien conéctelo al adaptador de corriente
USB de Apple que viene con el iPhone y enchufe el
adaptador a una toma eléctrica.
2 Conecte el auricular manos libres al cable.
Si está completamente descargado, el auricular se recarga
en una hora y media aproximadamente.
Luz de estado ámbar = Cargando
Luz de estado verde = Totalmente cargado
3 Desconecte el auricular manos libres del cable. Pulse el
botón para conectar el auricular manos libres al iPhone,
de manera que las llamadas se envíen al auricular.
Para ver cuánta carga queda:
m Conecte el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable al
ordenador o a un adaptador de corriente USB de
Apple que esté enchufado a una toma de corriente.
A continuación, conecte el iPhone y el auricular manos
libres al cable. La pantalla del iPhone indica el nivel de
batería del auricular.44 Español
El auricular manos libres lleva una batería interna que el
usuario no debe manipular en ningún caso. Las baterías
recargables permiten un número limitado de ciclos de
carga y con el tiempo se desgastan completamente. La
duración de las baterías y la cantidad de ciclos de carga
que pueden admitir varían según el uso y la con? guración.
Para más información, visite www.apple.com/es/batteries.
Para obtener más información sobre cómo deshacerse del
auricular, consulte la página 57.
ADVERTENCIA: Para obtener información de seguridad
importante sobre cómo cargar el auricular manos
libres, consulte la página 50.
Cómo utilizar el auricular manos libres con otro
teléfono o dispositivo
Puede utilizar el auricular manos libres con otros
dispositivos Bluetooth, como otros teléfonos, y enlazar
el auricular con el iPhone manualmente si no tiene
a mano el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable.Español 45
También puede enlazar el auricular manos libres a
algunos ordenadores equipados con Bluetooth y hablar
con sus amigos utilizando una aplicación de mensajería
instantánea que tenga audio, como iChat.
Para hacer visible el auricular manos libres de manera
que el otro dispositivo pueda detectarlo:
1 Apague el auricular manos libres.
2 Mantenga pulsado el botón del auricular durante unos
ocho segundos hasta que oiga los tonos de arranque y,
después, cinco sonidos agudos rápidos.
El auricular manos libres permanece en modo visible durante
cinco minutos aproximadamente. La luz de estado parpadea
en verde mientras el auricular está en modo visible.
Para enlazar el auricular manos libres con otro teléfono
o enlazarlo con el iPhone manualmente:
1 En el teléfono, active Bluetooth y ajuste el teléfono para que
busque otros dispositivos Bluetooth. En el iPhone, seleccione
Ajustes > General > Bluetooth y active Bluetooth.
2 Ajuste el auricular manos libres en modo visible
(véase más arriba).
3 En el teléfono, seleccione “iPhone Bluetooth Headset” e
introduzca el código PIN 0000.46 Español
Consulte las instrucciones del teléfono para obtener
más información sobre cómo enlazarlo con dispositivos
Bluetooth.
Para enlazar el auricular manos libres con un
Mac equipado con Bluetooth y con el sistema
Mac OS X 10.4.9 o posterior:
1 Abra Preferencias del Sistema y haga clic en Bluetooth.
2 Si este es el primer dispositivo Bluetooth que ha
con? gurado, haga clic en el botón “Con? gurar nuevo
dispositivo”. De lo contrario, haga clic en el botón
Añadir (+) situado en la parte inferior de la lista de
dispositivos existentes.
3 A continuación, seleccione “Auriculares con micrófono”.
4 Ajuste el auricular manos libres en modo visible.
5 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Cuando se le solicite
una clave, escriba 0000.
Para utilizar el auricular manos libres con iChat:
1 Enlace el auricular manos libres con su Mac.
2 En iChat, seleccione iChat > Preferencias y haga clic en
Audio/Vídeo.
3 Seleccione “iPhone Bluetooth Headset” en los menús
locales “Micrófono” y “Salida de sonido”.
4 Inicie un chat de audio o vídeo.Español 47
Para enlazar el auricular manos libres con otro ordenador
(como un PC con Windows) o con dispositivos Bluetooth:
Siga las instrucciones que venían con el ordenador
o dispositivo. Cuando se le solicite una clave o PIN,
escriba 0000.
Consejos y solución de problemas
Si el auricular manos libres no responde o no funciona
correctamente, siga estos pasos en el orden en que están
indicados hasta que vuelva a funcionar.
m Compruebe que el auricular manos libres esté encendido.
Pulse el botón. Si la luz de estado no parpadea en verde,
mantenga pulsado el botón durante unos tres segundos
hasta que la luz de estado parpadee en verde o escuche
cuatro tonos crecientes.
m Compruebe que el iPhone esté encendido.
m Compruebe que el auricular manos libres y el iPhone
estén cargados.
m Durante una llamada, compruebe que el iPhone esté
ajustado para reproducir sonido a través del auricular
manos libres. Pulse “Fuente de audio” y seleccione
“iPhone Bluetooth Headset”.
m Compruebe que el iPhone esté enlazado con el auricular
manos libres. Consulte la página 38.48 Español
m En el iPhone, compruebe que Bluetooth esté activado.
En la pantalla Inicio, seleccione Ajustes > General >
Bluetooth y active Bluetooth.
m En el iPhone, seleccione Ajustes y active el modo Avión.
Espere unos tres segundos y desactívelo.
Para obtener más consejos e información sobre solución
de problemas, visite www.apple.com/es/support/iphone.
± Lea toda la información sobre seguridad que ? gura
más abajo y las instrucciones de funcionamiento
antes de usar el auricular manos libres iPhone
Bluetooth Headset para evitar posibles daños.
Información importante sobre seguridad
ADVERTENCIA: Si no respeta estas instrucciones de
seguridad, pueden producirse incendios, descargas
eléctricas u otros daños.
Manipulación del auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth
Headset
No deje caer al suelo el auricular manos libres iPhone
Bluetooth Headset ni lo desmonte, abra, aplaste, doble,
deforme, perfore, desarme, incinere, pinte, ponga en el
microondas ni le introduzca objetos extraños.Español 49
Agua y lugares húmedos
No utilice el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset
bajo la lluvia ni cerca de lugares con agua o humedad.
Procure no derramar comida ni líquidos sobre el auricular
manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Si se moja, apáguelo
(mantenga pulsado el botón durante unos cuatro segundos,
hasta que la luz de estado parpadee en ámbar) antes de
limpiarlo y deje que se seque completamente antes de volver
a encenderlo. No intente secar el auricular manos libres
iPhone Bluetooth Headset mediante una fuente de calor
externa, como un horno microondas o un secador de cabello.
Reparación del auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth
Headset
No intente nunca reparar o modi? car el auricular manos
libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset por su cuenta. El auricular
manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset no contiene piezas
que el usuario pueda reparar. Si el auricular manos libres
iPhone Bluetooth Headset se sumerge en agua, se perfora o
sufre una fuerte caída, no lo utilice hasta que lo haya llevado
a un proveedor de servicios Apple autorizado.50 Español
Cómo cargar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth
Headset
Para cargar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset,
utilice únicamente el cable iPhone Bluetooth Travel Cable con
un adaptador de corriente USB de Apple o un puerto USB de
alta potencia de otro dispositivo que cumpla los estándares
USB 2.0 o 1.1, o bien con otro producto o accesorio de marca
Apple que haya sido diseñado para utilizarse con el auricular
manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset.
Lea todas las instrucciones sobre seguridad de todos los
productos y accesorios antes de utilizarlos con el auricular
manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset. Apple no es
responsable del funcionamiento de accesorios de otros
fabricantes ni del cumplimiento de la normativa aplicable y
las directrices de seguridad por parte de dichos accesorios.
Cuando utilice el adaptador de corriente USB de Apple para
cargar el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset,
compruebe que el adaptador de corriente esté totalmente
acoplado antes de conectarlo a una toma eléctrica. A
continuación, inserte ? rmemente el adaptador de corriente
USB de Apple a la toma eléctrica. No conecte ni desconecte
el adaptador de corriente USB de Apple con las manos
húmedas. No utilice ningún otro adaptador de corriente que
no sea el adaptador de corriente USB de Apple para cargar
el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset.Español 51
Prevención de la pérdida auditiva
Pueden ocurrir pérdidas auditivas permanentes si el auricular
manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset se utiliza a un
volumen elevado. Con el tiempo, puede acostumbrarse a un
volumen de sonido más alto, que, aunque puede parecer
normal, puede llegar a dañar su capacidad auditiva. Ajuste el
volumen a un nivel seguro antes de que esto ocurra. Si oye
pitidos o murmullos sordos, reduzca el volumen del sonido
o deje de usar el auricular y acuda a que le revisen el oído.
Cuanto más alto sea el volumen, menor es el tiempo necesario
para que su capacidad auditiva pueda verse afectada. Los
especialistas en audición recomiendan lo siguiente para
proteger su capacidad auditiva:
 Limite el tiempo de utilización del auricular manos libres a
un volumen elevado.
 No suba el volumen con el ? n de aislarse de ambientes
ruidosos.
 Si no puede oír a la gente que está hablando cerca de
usted, baje el volumen.
En caso de irritación de la piel
Si los auriculares no se limpian adecuadamente, pueden
provocar infecciones de oído. Limpie el altavoz de su
auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset cuando
sea necesario con un paño que no desprenda pelusas y 52 Español
que esté ligeramente humedecido en agua o un producto
antiséptico (por ejemplo, alcohol isopropílico). Si la irritación
de la piel va a más, deje de utilizarlo. Si el problema persiste,
consulte a su médico.
Cómo conducir de forma segura
Consulte y respete las leyes y normativas sobre el uso de
dispositivos móviles como el iPhone en los sitios por donde
conduzca. Sea prudente y preste atención cuando conduzca.
Si decide usar el iPhone mientras conduce, tenga en cuenta
las siguientes recomendaciones: Ponga los cinco sentidos
en la conducción y en la carretera. El uso de un dispositivo
móvil durante la conducción puede ocasionar distracciones.
Si su uso le impide conducir cualquier tipo de vehículo
(automóvil o bicicleta) o realizar cualquier actividad con toda
la atención necesaria, detenga el vehículo antes de realizar o
contestar una llamada.
Peligro de atragantamiento
El auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset
es de pequeño tamaño y puede presentar riesgo de
atragantamiento para los niños pequeños. Manténgalo
alejado de los niños pequeños.Español 53
Vehículos equipados con airbag
Los airbags se in? an con una gran fuerza. No coloque el
auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset o sus
accesorios sobre el airbag o su área de in? uencia.
Interferencia con las radiofrecuencias
Casi todos los dispositivos electrónicos están sujetos a
interferencias por radiofrecuencias procedentes de fuentes
externas si no están adecuadamente protegidos, diseñados
o con? gurados para evitarlas. Por lo tanto, el auricular
manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset puede provocar
interferencias con otros dispositivos. Siga estas instrucciones
para evitar problemas de interferencias.
Aviones
La normativa de la FAA (Administración Federal de Aviación)
puede prohibir el uso de dispositivos inalámbricos durante
los vuelos. Apague el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth
Headset cuando viaje en avión.
Vehículos
Las señales de radiofrecuencia pueden afectar a los equipos
electrónicos instalados o inadecuadamente protegidos
de los vehículos de motor. Consulte con el fabricante o
representante correspondiente a su vehículo.54 Español
Dispositivos electrónicos
La mayoría de los equipos electrónicos modernos están
protegidos contra las señales de radiofrecuencia. Sin
embargo, ciertos equipos electrónicos pueden no estar
protegidos contra las señales de radiofrecuencia procedentes
del auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset.
Audífonos
El auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset puede
interferir con algunos audífonos. En ese caso, consulte con
el fabricante del audífono o con su médico para buscar
alternativas o soluciones.
Otros dispositivos médicos
Si utiliza cualquier otro dispositivo médico personal, consulte
con el fabricante del dispositivo o con su médico para
determinar si está adecuadamente protegido contra la
energía de radiofrecuencia externa.
Apague el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth
Headset en los centros sanitarios cuando las normativas de
dichos centros así lo establezcan. Los hospitales o centros
sanitarios pueden utilizar equipos sensibles a la energía de
radiofrecuencia externa.Español 55
Avisos públicos
Apague el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset en
cualquier lugar en el que haya avisos públicos que lo exijan.
Zonas con riesgo de explosión
Para no interferir con operaciones que impliquen el uso
de explosivos, apague el auricular manos libres iPhone
Bluetooth Headset en zonas con riesgo de explosión o
en lugares donde se ordene desactivar la transmisión de
señales de radio bidireccionales. Respete todos los avisos
e instrucciones.
Información importante sobre manejo
ADVERTENCIA: Si no respeta estas instrucciones de manejo,
pueden producirse daños en el auricular manos libres iPhone
Bluetooth Headset o en otros bienes de su propiedad.
Conectores y puertos
No fuerce nunca un conector al enchufarlo en un puerto.
Compruebe que nada obstruya el puerto. Si la conexión
entre el conector y el puerto no es razonablemente fácil,
es probable que no se correspondan. Compruebe que el
conector encaja con el puerto y que lo ha colocado en la
posición correcta.56 Español
Temperaturas de funcionamiento y almacenamiento
Utilice el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset en
lugares donde la temperatura esté siempre entre 0 y 35 ºC.
La duración de la batería del auricular manos libres iPhone
Bluetooth Headset puede verse temporalmente reducida en
condiciones de bajas temperaturas.
Guarde el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth Headset
en lugares donde la temperatura esté siempre entre -20 y
45 ºC. No deje el auricular manos libres iPhone Bluetooth
Headset en su vehículo, pues la temperatura puede
sobrepasar estos márgenes en el interior de un vehículo
aparcado. 57
Regulatory Compliance Information
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Important: Changes or modi? cations to this product not authorized
by Apple could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to
operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance
under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices
and shielded cables between system components. It is important that
you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between
system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to
radios, televisions, and other electronic devices.
Disposal and Recycling Information
iPhone Bluetooth Headset Disposal and Recycling
Your iPhone Bluetooth Headset must be disposed of properly according
to local laws and regulations. Because the iPhone Bluetooth Headset
contains electronic components and a battery, it must be disposed of
separately from household waste. When your iPhone Bluetooth Headset
reaches its end of life, contact local authorities to learn about disposal
and recycling options, or simply drop it o? at your local Apple retail store
or return it to Apple. For more information, go to:
www.apple.com/environment/recycling58
Battery Disposal Information
Deutschland: Das Gerät enthält Batterien. Diese gehören nicht in den
Hausmüll. Sie können verbrauchte Batterien beim Handel oder bei den
Kommunen unentgeltlich abgeben. Um Kurzschlüsse zu vermeiden,
kleben Sie die Pole der Batterien vorsorglich mit einem Klebestreifen ab.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de
chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval
(kca) worden gedeponeerd.
European Union—Disposal Information:
The symbol above means that according to local laws and regulations
your product should be disposed of separately from household waste.
When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point
designated by local authorities. Some collection points accept products
for free. The separate collection and recycling of your product at the
time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it
is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. 59
Union Européenne: informations sur l’élimination
Ce symbole signi? e que vous devez vous débarasser de votre produit
sans le mélanger avec les ordures ménagères, selon les normes et
la législation de votre pays. Lorsque ce produit n’est plus utilisable,
portez-le dans un centre de traitement des déchets agréé par les
autorités locales. Certains centres acceptent les produits gratuitement.
Le traitement et le recyclage séparé de votre produit lors de son
élimination aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à protéger
l’environnement et la santé des êtres humains.
Europäische Union – Informationen zur Entsorgung
Dieses Symbol weist darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt entsprechend
den geltenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften und getrennt vom Hausmüll
entsorgt werden muss. Geben Sie dieses Produkt zur Entsorgung bei
einer o? ziellen Sammelstelle ab. Bei einigen Sammelstellen können
Produkte zur Entsorgung unentgeltlich abgegeben werden. Durch
getrenntes Sammeln und Recycling werden die Rohsto? -Reserven
geschont, und es ist sichergestellt, dass beim Recycling des Produkts alle
Bestimmungen zum Schutz von Gesundheit und Umwelt eingehalten
werden.
Unione Europea: informazioni per l’eliminazione
Questo simbolo signi? ca che, in base alle leggi e alle norme locali, il
prodotto dovrebbe essere eliminato separatamente dai ri? uti casalinghi.
Quando il prodotto diventa inutilizzabile, portarlo nel punto di raccolta
stabilito dalle autorità locali. Alcuni punti di raccolta accettano i prodotti
gratuitamente. La raccolta separata e il riciclaggio del prodotto al
momento dell’eliminazione aiutano a conservare le risorse naturali e
assicurano che venga riciclato in maniera tale da salvaguardare la salute
umana e l’ambiente.Europeiska unionen – uttjänta produkter
Den här symbolen betyder att produkten enligt lokala lagar och
bestämmelser inte får kastas tillsammans med hushållsavfallet. När
produkten har tjänat ut måste den tas till en återvinningsstation
som utsetts av lokala myndigheter. Vissa återvinningsstationer tar
kostnadsfritt hand om uttjänta produkter. Genom att låta den uttjänta
produkten tas om hand för återvinning hjälper du till att spara
naturresurser och skydda hälsa och miljö.
Apple and the Environment
At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental
impacts of our operations and products. For more information go to:
www.apple.com/environment
© 2008 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Apple, the Apple logo, iChat, Mac, and Mac OS are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a
trademark of Apple Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Apple is under license.
ZM034-4622-A
Printed in XXXX
iPhone OS
Enterprise Deployment
Guide
Second Edition, for Version 3.2 or laterK Apple Inc.
© 2010 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
This manual may not be copied, in whole or in part,
without the written consent of Apple.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard”
Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes
without the prior written consent of Apple may
constitute trademark infringement and unfair
competition in violation of federal and state laws.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the
information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not
responsible for printing or clerical errors.
Apple
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014
408-996-1010
www.apple.com
Apple, the Apple logo, Bonjour, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch,
iTunes, Keychain, Leopard, Mac, Macintosh, the Mac
logo, Mac OS, QuickTime, and Safari are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
iPad is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iTunes Store and App Store are service marks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. MobileMe
is a service mark of Apple Inc.
Other company and product names mentioned herein
are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention
of third-party products is for informational purposes
only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a
recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with
regard to the performance or use of these products.
Simultaneously published in the United States and
Canada.
019-1835/2010-04 3
3 Contents
Preface 6 iPhone in the Enterprise
6 What’s New for the Enterprise in iPhone OS 3.0 and Later
7 System Requirements
8 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
10 VPN
11 Network Security
11 Certificates and Identities
12 Email Accounts
12 LDAP Servers
12 CalDAV Servers
13 Additional Resources
Chapter 1 14 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch
15 Activating Devices
16 Preparing Access to Network Services and Enterprise Data
20 Determining Device Passcode Policies
21 Configuring Devices
22 Over-the-Air Enrollment and Configuration
27 Other Resources
Chapter 2 28 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles
29 About iPhone Configuration Utility
30 Creating Configuration Profiles
39 Editing Configuration Profiles
40 Installing Provisioning Profiles and Applications
40 Installing Configuration Profiles
43 Removing and Updating Configuration Profiles
Chapter 3 44 Manually Configuring Devices
44 VPN Settings
48 Wi-Fi Settings
49 Exchange Settings
54 Installing Identities and Root Certificates
55 Additional Mail Accounts4 Contents
55 Updating and Removing Profiles
55 Other Resources
Chapter 4 57 Deploying iTunes
57 Installing iTunes
59 Quickly Activating Devices with iTunes
60 Setting iTunes Restrictions
62 Backing Up a Device with iTunes
Chapter 5 63 Deploying Applications
63 Registering for Application Development
64 Signing Applications
64 Creating the Distribution Provisioning Profile
64 Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iTunes
65 Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iPhone Configuration Utility
65 Installing Applications Using iTunes
66 Installing Applications Using iPhone Configuration Utility
66 Using Enterprise Applications
66 Disabling an Enterprise Application
66 Other Resources
Appendix A 67 Cisco VPN Server Configuration
67 Supported Cisco Platforms
67 Authentication Methods
68 Authentication Groups
68 Certificates
69 IPSec Settings
69 Other Supported Features
Appendix B 70 Configuration Profile Format
70 Root Level
71 Payload Content
72 Profile Removal Password Payload
72 Passcode Policy Payload
73 Email Payload
75 Web Clip Payload
75 Restrictions Payload
76 LDAP Payload
76 CalDAV Payload
77 Calendar Subscription Payload
77 SCEP Payload
78 APN Payload
79 Exchange Payload
79 VPN PayloadContents 5
81 Wi-Fi Payload
84 Sample Configuration Profiles
Appendix C 88 Sample ScriptsPreface
6
iPhone in the Enterprise
Learn how to integrate iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad with
your enterprise systems.
This guide is for system administrators. It provides information about deploying and
supporting iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad in enterprise environments.
What’s New for the Enterprise in iPhone OS 3.0 and Later
iPhone OS 3.x includes numerous enhancements, including the following items of
special interest to enterprise users:
 CalDAV calendar wireless syncing is supported.
 LDAP server support for contact look-up in mail, address book, and SMS.
 Configuration profiles can be encrypted and locked to a device so that their removal
requires an administrative password.
 iPhone Configuration Utility allows you to add and remove encrypted configuration
profiles directly onto devices that are connected to your computer by USB.
 Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) is supported for certificate revocation.
 On-demand certificate-based VPN connections are now supported.
 VPN proxy configuration via a configuration profile and VPN servers is supported.
 Microsoft Exchange users can invite others to meetings. Microsoft Exchange 2007
users can also view reply status.
 Exchange ActiveSync client certificate-based authentication is supported.
 Additional EAS policies are supported, along with EAS protocol 12.1.
 Additional device restrictions are available, including the ability to specify the length
of time that a device can be left unlocked, disable the camera, and prevent users
from taking a screenshot of the device’s display.
 Local mail messages and calendar events can be searched. For IMAP, MobileMe,
and Exchange 2007, mail that resides on the server can also be searched.
 Additional mail folders can be designated for push email delivery.
 APN proxy settings can be made specified using a configuration profile.Preface iPhone in the Enterprise 7
 Web clips can be installed using a configuration profile.
 802.1x EAP-SIM is now supported.
 Devices can be authenticated and enrolled over-the-air using a Simple Certificate
Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) server.
 iTunes can store device backups in encrypted format.
 iPhone Configuration Utility supports profile creation via scripting.
 iPhone Configuration Utility 2.2 supports iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch. Mac OS X
v10.6 Snow Leopard is required. Windows 7 is also supported.
System Requirements
Read this section for an overview of the system requirements and the various
components available for integrating iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad with your enterprise
systems.
iPhone and iPod touch
iPhone and iPod touch devices you use with your enterprise network must be updated
to iPhone OS 3.1.x.
iPad
iPad must be updated to iPhone OS 3.2.x.
iTunes
iTunes 9.1 or later is required in order to set up a device. iTunes is also required in order
to install software updates for iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad. You also use iTunes to
install applications, and sync music, video, notes, or other data with a Mac or PC.
To use iTunes, you need a Mac or PC that has a USB 2.0 port and meets the minimum
requirements listed on the iTunes website. See www.apple.com/itunes/download/.
iPhone Configuration Utility
iPhone Configuration Utility lets you create, encrypt, and install configuration profiles,
track and install provisioning profiles and authorized applications, and capture device
information such as console logs.
iPhone Configuration Utility requires one of the following:
 Mac OS X v10.5 Snow Leopard
 Windows XP Service Pack 3 with .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1
 Windows Vista Service Pack 1 with .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1
 Windows 7 with .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1
iPhone Configuration Utility operates in 32-bit mode on 64-bit versions of Windows.8 Preface iPhone in the Enterprise
You can download the .Net Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1 installer at:
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=ab99342f-5d1a-413d-8319-
81da479ab0d7
The utility allows you to create an Outlook message with a configuration profile as an
attachment. Additionally, you can assign users’ names and email addresses from your
desktop address book to devices that you’ve connected to the utility. Both of these
features require Outlook and are not compatible with Outlook Express. To use these
features on Windows XP computers, you may need to install 2007 Microsoft Office
System Update: Redistributable Primary Interop Assemblies. This is necessary if Outlook
was installed before .NET Framework 3.5 Service Pack 1.
The Primary Interop Assemblies installer is available at:
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=59daebaa-bed4-4282-
a28c-b864d8bfa513
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad support the following versions of Microsoft Exchange:
 Exchange ActiveSync for Exchange Server (EAS) 2003 Service Pack 2
 Exchange ActiveSync for Exchange Server (EAS) 2007
For support of Exchange 2007 policies and features, Service Pack 1 is required.
Supported Exchange ActiveSync Policies
The following Exchange policies are supported:
 Enforce password on device
 Minimum password length
 Maximum failed password attempts
 Require both numbers and letters
 Inactivity time in minutes
The following Exchange 2007 policies are also supported:
 Allow or prohibit simple password
 Password expiration
 Password history
 Policy refresh interval
 Minimum number of complex characters in password
 Require manual syncing while roaming
 Allow camera
 Require device encryption
For a description of each policy, refer to your Exchange ActiveSync documentation.Preface iPhone in the Enterprise 9
The Exchange policy to require device encryption (RequireDeviceEncryption) is
supported on iPhone 3GS, on iPod touch (Fall 2009 models with 32 GB or more)
and on iPad. iPhone, iPhone 3G, and other iPod touch models don’t support device
encryption and won’t connect to an Exchange Server that requires it.
If you enable the policy “Require Both Numbers and Letters” on Exchange 2003, or
the policy “Require Alphanumeric Password” on Exchange 2007, the user must enter
a device passcode that contains at least one complex character.
The value specified by the inactivity time policy (MaxInactivityTimeDeviceLock or
AEFrequencyValue) is used to set the maximum value that users can select in both
Settings > General > Auto-Lock and Settings > General > Passcode Lock > Require
Passcode.
Remote Wipe
You can remotely wipe the contents of an iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad. Wiping removes
all data and configuration information from the device. The device is securely erased
and restored to original, factory settings.
Important: On iPhone and iPhone 3G, wiping overwrites the data on the device, which
can take approximately one hour for each 8 GB of device capacity. Connect the device
to a power supply before wiping. If the device turns off due to low power, the wiping
process resumes when the device is connected to power. On iPhone 3GS and iPad,
wiping removes the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted using 256-bit AES
encryption) which occurs instantaneously.
With Exchange Server 2007, you can initiate a remote wipe using the Exchange
Management Console, Outlook Web Access, or the Exchange ActiveSync Mobile
Administration Web Tool.
With Exchange Server 2003, you can initiate a remote wipe using the Exchange
ActiveSync Mobile Administration Web Tool.
Users can also wipe a device in their possession by choosing “Erase All Content and
Settings” from the Reset menu in General settings. Devices can also be configured to
automatically initiate a wipe after several failed passcode attempts.
If you recover a device that was wiped because it was lost, use iTunes to restore it using
the device’s latest backup.
Microsoft Direct Push
The Exchange server automatically delivers email, contacts, and calendar events to
iPhone and iPad Wi-Fi + 3G if a cellular or Wi-Fi data connection is available. iPod touch
and iPad Wi-Fi don’t have a cellular connection, so they receive push notifications only
when they’re active and connected to a Wi-Fi network.10 Preface iPhone in the Enterprise
Microsoft Exchange Autodiscovery
The Autodiscover service of Exchange Server 2007 is supported. When you
manually configure a device, Autodiscover uses your email address and password
to automatically determine the correct Exchange server information. For information
about enabling the Autodiscover service, see http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/
library/cc539114.aspx.
Microsoft Exchange Global Address List
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad retrieve contact information from your company’s
Exchange server corporate directory. You can access the directory when searching
in Contacts, and it’s automatically accessed for completing email addresses as you
enter them.
Additional Supported Exchange ActiveSync Features
In addition to the features and capabilities already described, iPhone OS supports:
 Creating calendar invitations. With Microsoft Exchange 2007, you can also view the
status of replies to your invitations.
 Setting Free, Busy, Tentative, or Out of Office status for your calendar events.
 Searching mail messages on the server. Requires Microsoft Exchange 2007.
 Exchange ActiveSync client certificate-based authentication.
Unsupported Exchange ActiveSync Features
Not all Exchange features are supported, including, for example:
 Folder management
 Opening links in email to documents stored on SharePoint servers
 Task synchronization
 Setting an “out of office” autoreply message
 Flagging messages for follow-up
VPN
iPhone OS works with VPN servers that support the following protocols and
authentication methods:
 L2TP/IPSec with user authentication by MS-CHAPV2 Password, RSA SecurID and
CryptoCard, and machine authentication by shared secret.
 PPTP with user authentication by MS-CHAPV2 Password, RSA SecurID, and
CryptoCard.
 Cisco IPSec with user authentication by Password, RSA SecurID, or CryptoCard,
and machine authentication by shared secret and certificates. See Appendix A for
compatible Cisco VPN servers and recommendations about configurations.Preface iPhone in the Enterprise 11
Cisco IPSec with certificate-based authentication supports VPN on demand for domains
you specify during configuration. See “VPN Settings” on page 35 for details.
Network Security
iPhone OS supports the following 802.11i wireless networking security standards as
defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance:
 WEP
 WPA Personal
 WPA Enterprise
 WPA2 Personal
 WPA2 Enterprise
Additionally, iPhone OS supports the following 802.1X authentication methods for WPA
Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise networks:
 EAP-TLS
 EAP -TTLS
 EAP-FAST
 EAP-SIM
 PEAP v0, PEAP v1
 LEAP
Certificates and Identities
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad can use X.509 certificates with RSA keys. The file
extensions .cer, .crt, and .der are recognized. Certificate chain evaluations are
performed by Safari, Mail, VPN, and other applications.
Use P12 (PKCS #12 standard) files that contain exactly one identity. The file extensions
.p12 and .pfx are recognized. When an identity is installed, the user is prompted for the
passphrase that protects it.
Certificates necessary for establishing the certificate chain to a trusted root certificate
can be installed manually or by using configuration profiles. You don’t need to add root
certificates that are included on the device by Apple. To view a list of the preinstalled
system roots, see the Apple Support article at http://support.apple.com/kb/HT3580.
Certificates can be securely installed over the air via SCEP. See “Overview of the
Authenticated Enrollment and Configuration Process” on page 22 for more information.12 Preface iPhone in the Enterprise
Email Accounts
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad support industry-standard IMAP4- and POP3-enabled
mail solutions on a range of server platforms including Windows, UNIX, Linux, and
Mac OS X. You can also use IMAP to access email from Exchange accounts in addition
to the Exchange account you use with direct push.
When a user searches their mail, they have the option of continuing the search on
the mail server. This works with Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 as well as most
IMAP-based accounts.
The user’s email account information, including Exchange user ID and password,
are securely stored on the device.
LDAP Servers
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad retrieve contact information from your company’s LDAPv3
server corporate directories.You can access directories when searching in Contacts, and
and they are automatically accessed for completing email addresses as you enter them.
CalDAV Servers
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad synchronize calendar data with your company’s CalDAV
server. Changes to the calendar are periodically updated between the device and
server.
You can also subscribe to read-only published calendars, such as holiday calendars or
those of a colleague’s schedule.
Creating and sending new calendar invitations from a device isn’t supported for CalDAV
accounts.Preface iPhone in the Enterprise 13
Additional Resources
In addition to this guide, the following publications and websites provide useful
information:
 iPhone in Enterprise webpage at www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise/
 iPad in Business webpage at: www.apple.com/ipad/business/
 Exchange Product Overview at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/
bb124558.aspx
 Deploying Exchange ActiveSync at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/
aa995962.aspx
 Exchange 2003 Technical Documentation Library at http://technet.microsoft.com/
en-us/library/bb123872(EXCHG.65).aspx
 Managing Exchange ActiveSync Security at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/
library/bb232020(EXCHG.80).aspx
 Wi-Fi for Enterprise webpage at www.wi-fi.org/enterprise.php
 iPhone VPN Connectivity to Cisco Adaptive Security Appliances (ASA) at
www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/security/vpn_client/cisco_vpn_client/iPhone/2.0/
connectivity/guide/iphone.html
 iPhone User Guide, available for download at www.apple.com/support/iphone/;
view the guide on iPhone, tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark in Safari or go to
http://help.apple.com/iphone/
 iPhone Guided Tour at www.apple.com/iphone/guidedtour/
 iPod touch User Guide, available for download at www.apple.com/support/ipodtouch;
view the guide on iPod touch, tap the iPod touch User Guide in Safari or go to
http://help.apple.com/ipodtouch/
 iPod touch Guided Tour at www.apple.com/ipodtouch/guidedtour/
 iPad User Guide, available for download at www.apple.com/support/ipad; view the
guide on iPad, tap the iPad User Guide in Safari or go to http://help.apple.com/ipad/
 iPad Guided Tour at www.apple.com/ipad/guided-tour/1
14
1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch
This chapter provides an overview of how to deploy iPhone,
iPod touch, and iPad in your enterprise.
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad are designed to easily integrate with your enterprise
systems, including Microsoft Exchange 2003 and 2007, 802.1X-based secure wireless
networks, and Cisco IPSec virtual private networks. As with any enterprise solution,
good planning and an understanding of your deployment options make deployment
easier and more efficient for you and your users.
When planning your deployment of iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad, consider the
following:
 How will your company’s iPhones and iPad (Wi-Fi + 3G models) be activated for
wireless cellular service?
 Which enterprise network services, applications, and data will your users need to
access?
 What policies do you want to set on the devices to protect sensitive company data?
 Do you want to manually configure devices individually, or use a streamlined process
for configuring a large fleet?
The specifics of your enterprise environment, IT policies, wireless carrier, and your
computing and communication requirements affect how you tailor your deployment
strategy.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 15
Activating Devices
Each iPhone must be activated with your wireless carrier before it can be used to make
and receive calls, send text messages, or connect to the cellular data network. Contact
your carrier for voice and data tariffs and activation instructions for consumer and
business customers.
You or your user need to install a SIM card in the iPhone. After the SIM card is installed,
iPhone must be connected to a computer with iTunes to complete the activation
process. If the SIM card is already active, iPhone is ready for immediate use; otherwise,
iTunes walks you through the process of activating a new line of service.
iPad must be connected to a computer with iTunes to activate the device. For
iPad Wi-Fi + 3G in the U.S., you sign up and manage (or cancel) an AT&T data plan
using iPad. Go to Settings > Cellular Data > View Account. iPad is unlocked, so
you can use your preferred carrier. Contact your carrier to set up an account and
obtain a compatible micro SIM card. In the U.S., micro SIM cards compatible with
AT&T are included with iPad Wi-Fi + 3G.
Although there is no cellular service or SIM card for iPod touch and iPad Wi-Fi, they
must also be connected to a computer with iTunes for activation.
Because iTunes is required in order to complete the activation process, you must
decide whether you want to install iTunes on each user’s Mac or PC, or whether
you’ll complete activation for each device with your own iTunes installation.
After activation, iTunes isn’t required in order to use the device with your enterprise
systems, but it’s required for synchronizing music, video, and web browser bookmarks
with a computer. It’s also required for downloading and installing software updates
for devices and installing your enterprise applications.
For more information about activating devices and using iTunes, see Chapter 4.16 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch
Preparing Access to Network Services and Enterprise Data
iPhone OS 3.x software enables secure push email, push contacts, and push calendar
with your existing Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007 solution, as well as Global
Address Lookup, Remote Wipe, and device passcode policy enforcement. It also
allows users to securely connect to company resources via WPA Enterprise and WPA2
Enterprise wireless networks using 802.1X wireless authentication and/or via VPN
using PPTP, LT2P over IPSec, or Cisco IPSec protocols.
If your company doesn’t use Microsoft Exchange, your users can still use iPhone or
iPod touch to wirelessly sync email with most standard POP or IMAP-based servers
and services. And they can use iTunes to sync calendar events and contacts from
Mac OS X iCal and Address Book or Microsoft Outlook on a Windows PC. For wireless
access to calendars and directories, CalDAV and LDAP are supported.
As you determine which network services you want users to access, refer to the
information in the following sections.
Microsoft Exchange
iPhone communicates directly with your Microsoft Exchange Server via Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync (EAS). Exchange ActiveSync maintains a connection between
the Exchange Server and iPhone or iPad Wi-Fi + 3G, so that when a new email
message or meeting invitation arrives, the device is instantly updated. iPod touch
and iPad Wi-Fi don’t have a cellular connection, so they receive push notifications
only when they’re active and connected to a Wi-Fi network.
If your company currently supports Exchange ActiveSync on Exchange Server 2003 or
Exchange Server 2007, you already have the necessary services in place. For Exchange
Server 2007, make sure the Client Access Role is installed. For Exchange Server 2003,
make sure you’ve enabled Outlook Mobile Access (OMA).
If you have an Exchange Server but your company is new to Exchange ActiveSync,
review the information in the following sections.
Network Configuration
 Make sure port 443 is open on the firewall. If your company uses Outlook Web
Access, port 443 is most likely already open.
 Verify that a server certificate is installed on the front-end Exchange server and turn
on basic authentication only, in the Authentication Method properties, to require an
SSL connection to the Microsoft Server ActiveSync directory of your IIS.
 If you’re using a Microsoft Internet Security and Acceleration (ISA) Server, verify that a
server certificate is installed and update the public DNS to properly resolve incoming
connections.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 17
 Make sure the DNS for your network returns a single, externally-routable address to
the Exchange ActiveSync server for both intranet and Internet clients. This is required
so the device can use the same IP address for communicating with the server when
both types of connections are active.
 If you’re using a Microsoft ISA Server, create a web listener as well as an Exchange
web client access publishing rule. See Microsoft’s documentation for details.
 For all firewalls and network appliances, set the idle session timeout to 30 minutes.
For information about heartbeat and timeout intervals, refer to the Microsoft
Exchange documentation at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/cc182270.aspx.
Exchange Account Setup
 Enable Exchange ActiveSync for specific users or groups using the Active Directory
service. These are enabled by default for all mobile devices at the organizational level
in Exchange Server 2003 and Exchange Server 2007. For Exchange Server 2007, see
Recipient Configuration in the Exchange Management Console.
 Configure mobile features, policies, and device security settings using the Exchange
System Manager. For Exchange Server 2007, this is done in the Exchange
Management Console.
 Download and install the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Mobile Administration Web
Tool, which is necessary to initiate a remote wipe. For Exchange Server 2007, remote
wipe can also be initiated using Outlook Web Access or the Exchange Management
Console.
WPA/WPA2 Enterprise Wi-Fi Networks
Support for WPA Enterprise and WPA2 Enterprise ensures that corporate wireless
networks are securely accessed on iPhone, iPod touch and iPad. WPA/WPA2 Enterprise
uses AES 128-bit encryption, a proven block-based encryption method that provides a
high level of assurance that corporate data remains protected.
With support for 802.1X authentication, iPhone OS devices can be integrated into a
broad range of RADIUS server environments. 802.1X wireless authentication methods
are supported, including EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-FAST, PEAPv0, PEAPv1, and LEAP.
WPA/WPA2 Enterprise Network Configuration
 Verify network appliances for compatibility and select an authentication type (EAP
type) supported by iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad. Make sure that 802.1X is enabled
on the authentication server, and if necessary, install a server certificate and assign
network access permissions to users and groups.
 Configure wireless access points for 802.1X authentication and enter the
corresponding RADIUS server information.
 Test your 802.1X deployment with a Mac or a PC to make sure RADIUS authentication
is properly configured.18 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch
 If you plan to use certificate-based authentication, make sure you have your public
key infrastructure configured to support device and user-based certificates with the
corresponding key distribution process.
 Verify the compatibility of your certificate formats with the device and your
authentication server. For information about certificates see “Certificates and
Identities” on page 11.
Virtual Private Networks
Secure access to private networks is supported on iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad using
Cisco IPSec, L2TP over IPSec, and PPTP virtual private network protocols. If your
organization supports one of these protocols, no additional network configuration or
third-party applications are required in order to use your devices with your VPN
infrastructure.
Cisco IPSec deployments can take advantage of certificate-based authentication via
industry-standard X.509 certificates. Additionally, certificate-based authentication
allows you to take advantage of VPN On Demand, which provides seamless, secure
wireless access to your enterprise network.
For two-factor token-based authentication, iPhone OS supports RSA SecurID and
CryptoCard. Users enter their PIN and token-generated, one-time password directly on
their device when establishing a VPN connection. For compatible Cisco VPN servers and
recommendations about configurations, see Appendix A.
iPhone, iPod touch and iPad also support shared secret authentication for Cisco IPSec
and L2TP/IPSec deployments, and MS-CHAPv2 for basic user name and password
authentication.
VPN Proxy auto-config (PAC and WPAD) is also supported, which allows you specify
proxy server settings for accessing specific URLs.
VPN Setup Guidelines
 iPhone OS integrates with most existing VPN networks, so minimal configuration is
necessary to enable devices to access to your network. The best way to prepare for
deployment is to check if your company’s existing VPN protocols and authentication
methods are supported by iPhone.
 Ensure compatibility with standards by your VPN concentrators. It’s also a good idea
to review the authentication path to your RADIUS or authentication server, to make
sure standards supported by iPhone OS are enabled within your implementation.
 Check with your solutions providers to confirm that your software and equipment
are up-to-date with the latest security patches and firmware.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 19
 If you want to configure URL-specific proxy settings, place a PAC file on a web server
that’s accessible with the basic VPN settings, and ensure that it’s served with a MIME
type of application/x-ns-proxy-autoconfig. Alternatively, configure your DNS or DHCP
to provide the location of a WPAD file on a server that is similarly accessible.
IMAP Email
If you don’t use Microsoft Exchange, you can still implement a secure, standards-based
email solution using any email server that supports IMAP and is configured to require
user authentication and SSL. For example, you can access Lotus Notes/Domino or
Novell GroupWise email using this technique. The mail servers can be located within
a DMZ subnetwork, behind a corporate firewall, or both.
With SSL, iPhone OS supports 128-bit encryption and X.509 certificates issued by the
major certificate authorities. It also supports strong authentication methods including
industry-standard MD5 Challenge-Response and NTLMv2.
IMAP Network Setup Guidelines
 For additional security protection, install a digital certificate on the server from
a trusted certificate authority (CA). Installing a certificate from a CA is an important
step in ensuring that your proxy server is a trusted entity within your corporate
infrastructure. See “Credentials Settings” on page 38 for information about installing
certificates on iPhone.
 To let iPhone OS devices retrieve email from your server, open port 993 in the firewall
and make sure that the proxy server is set to IMAP over SSL.
 To let devices send email, port 587, 465, or 25 must be open. Port 587 is used first,
and is the best choice.
LDAP Directories
iPhone OS lets you access standards-based LDAP directory servers and provide
a global address directory or other information similar to the Global Address List in
Microsoft Exchange.
When an LDAP account is configured on the device, the device searches for the
attribute namingContexts at the server’s root level to identify the default search base.
The search scope is set to subtree by default.
CalDAV Calendars
CalDAV support in iPhone OS provides global calendars and scheduling for
organizations that don’t use Microsoft Exchange. iPhone OS works with calendar
servers that support the CalDAV standard.20 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch
Subscribed Calendars
If you want to publish read-only calendars of corporate events, such as holidays or
special event schedules, iPhone OS devices can subscribe to calendars and display the
information alongside Microsoft Exchange and CalDAV calendars. iPhone OS works
with calendar files in the standard iCalendar (.ics) format.
An easy way to distribute subscribed calendars to your users is to send the fully
qualified URL in SMS or email. When the user taps the link, the device offers to
subscribe to the specified calendar.
Enterprise Applications
To deploy enterprise iPhone OS applications, you install the applications on your
devices using iPhone Configuration Utility or iTunes. Once you deploy an application to
users’ devices, updating those applications will be easier if each user has iTunes
installed on their Mac or PC.
Online Certificate Status Protocol
When you provide digital certificates for iPhone OS devices, consider issuing them so
they’re OCSP-enabled. This allows the device to ask your OCSP server if the certificate
has been revoked before using it.
Determining Device Passcode Policies
Once you decide which network services and data your users will access, you should
determine which device passcode policies you want to implement.
Requiring passcodes to be set on your devices is recommended for companies whose
networks, systems, or applications don’t require a password or an authentication token.
If you’re using certificate-based authentication for an 802.1X network or Cisco IPSec
VPN, or your enterprise application saves your login credentials, you should require
users to set a device passcode with a short timeout period so a lost or stolen device
cannot be used without knowing the device passcode.
Policies can be set on iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad in either of two ways. If the device is
configured to access a Microsoft Exchange account, the Exchange ActiveSync policies
are wirelessly pushed to the device. This allows you to enforce and update the policies
without any user action. For information about EAS policies, see “Supported Exchange
ActiveSync Policies” on page 8.
If you don’t use Microsoft Exchange, you can set similar policies on your devices by
creating configuration profiles. If you want to change a policy, you must post or send
an updated profile to users or install the profile using iPhone Configuration Utility. For
information about the device passcode policies, see “Passcode Settings” on page 32.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 21
If you use Microsoft Exchange, you can also supplement your EAS policies by using
configuration policies. This can provide access to policies that aren’t available in
Microsoft Exchange 2003, for example, or allow you to define policies specifically for
iPhone OS devices.
Configuring Devices
You need to decide how you’ll configure each iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad. This is
influenced in part by how many devices you plan on deploying and managing over
time. If the number is small, you may find that it’s simpler for you or your users to
manually configure each device. This involves using the device to enter the settings
for each mail account, Wi-Fi settings, and VPN configuration information. See Chapter 3
for details about manual configuration.
If you deploy a large number of devices, or you have a large collection of email
settings, network settings, and certificates to install, then you may want to configure
the devices by creating and distributing configuration profiles. Configuration profiles
quickly load settings and authorization information onto a device. Some VPN and Wi-Fi
settings can only be set using a configuration profile, and if you’re not using Microsoft
Exchange, you’ll need to use a configuration profile to set device passcode policies.
Configuration profiles can be encrypted and signed, which allows you to restrict their
use to a specific device, and prevents anyone from changing the settings that a profile
contains. You can also mark a profile as being locked to the device, so once installed it
cannot be removed without wiping the device of all data, or optionally, with an
administrative passcode.
Whether or not you’re configuring devices manually or using configuration profiles,
you also need to decide if you’ll configure the devices or if you will delegate this task to
your users. Which you choose depends on your users’ locations, company policy
regarding users’ ability to manage their own IT equipment, and the complexity of the
device configuration you intend to deploy. Configuration profiles work well for a large
enterprise, for remote employees, or for users that are unable to set up their own devices.
If you want users to activate their device themselves or if they need to install or update
enterprise applications, iTunes must be installed on each user’s Mac or PC. iTunes is also
required for iPhone OS software updates, so keep that in mind if you decide to not
distribute iTunes to your users. For information about deploying iTunes, see Chapter 4.22 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch
Over-the-Air Enrollment and Configuration
Enrollment is the process of authenticating a device and user so that you can automate
the process of distributing certificates. Digital certificates provide many benefits to
users. They can be used to authenticate access to key enterprise services, such as
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, WPA2 Enterprise wireless networks, and corporate VPN
connections. Certificate-based authentication also permits the use of VPN On Demand
for seamless access to corporate networks.
In addition to using the over-the-air enrollment capabilities to issue certificates for your
company’s public key infrastructure (PKI), you can also deploy device configuration
profiles. This ensures that only trusted users are accessing corporate services and that
their devices are configured according to your IT policies. And because configuration
profiles can be both encrypted and locked, the settings cannot be removed, altered,
or shared with others. These capabilities are available to you in the over-the-air process
described below, and also by using iPhone Configuration Utility to configure devices
while they’re attached to your administrative computer. See Chapter 2 to learn about
using iPhone Configuration Utility.
Implementing over-the-air enrollment and configuration requires development and
integration of authentication, directory, and certificate services. The process can be
deployed using standard web services, and once it’s in place, it permits your users to
set up their devices in a secure, authenticated fashion.
Overview of the Authenticated Enrollment and Configuration Process
To implement this process, you need to create your own profile distribution service
that accepts HTTP connections, authenticates users, creates mobileconfig profiles,
and manages the overall process described in this section.
You also need a CA (certificate authority) to issue the device credentials using
Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP). For links to PKI, SCEP, and related topics
see “Other Resources” on page 27.
The following diagram shows the enrollment and configuration process that iPhone
supports.Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 23
Phase 1 – Begin Enrollment: Enrollment begins with the user using Safari to access
the URL of the profile distribution service you’ve created. You can distribute this URL via
SMS or email. The enrollment request, represented as step 1 in the diagram, should
authenticate the user’s identify. Authentication can be as simple as basic auth, or you
can tie into your existing directory services.
In step 2, your service sends a configuration profile (.mobileconfig) in response. This
response specifies a list of attributes that the device must provide in the next reply and
a pre-shared key (challenge) that can carry the identity of the user forward during this
process so you can customize the configuration process for each user. The device
attributes that the service can request are iPhone OS version, device ID (MAC Address),
product type (iPhone 3GS returns iPhone2,1), phone ID (IMEI), and SIM information (ICCID).
For a sample configuration profile for this phase, see “Sample Phase 1 Server Response”
on page 84.
Profile service
Attributes required: UDID,
OS version, IMEI
Challenge token: AnneJohnson1
URL for response:
https://profiles.example.com
Phase 1 - Begin Enrollment
User: Anne Johnson
Enrollment request
Device information
request
sample
sample
1
224 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch
Phase 2 – Device Authentication: After the user accepts the installation of the
profile received in phase 1, the device looks up the requested attributes, adds the
challenge response (if provided), signs the response using the device’s built-in
identity (Apple-issued certificate), and sends it back to the profile distribution
service using HTTP Post.
For a sample configuration profile for this phase, see “Sample Phase 2 Device
Response” on page 85.
Profile service
Attributes: UDID,
OS Version, IMEI
Challenge token:
AnneJohnson1
Phase 2 - Device Authentication
Signed response via POST
sampleChapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 25
Phase 3 – Certificate Installation: In step 1, the profile distribution service responds
with specifications that the device uses to generate a key (RSA 1024) and where to
return it for certification using SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol).
In step 2, the SCEP request must be handled in automatic mode, using the challenge
from the SCEP packet to authenticate the request.
In step 3, the CA responds with an encryption certificate for the device.
For a sample configuration profile for this phase, see “Sample Phase 3 Server Response
With SCEP Specifications” on page 85.
Profile service
Certificate
issuing service
Phase 3 - Device Certificate Installation
Challenge
Key generation specs
URL for response
Challenge
Certificate Signing Request
Public key
Device certificate
RSA: 1024
Challenge: AnneJohnson1
URL:http://ca.example.com/
getkey.exe
sample
1
2
326 Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch
Phase 4 – Device Configuration: In step 1, the device replies with the list of attributes,
signed using the encryption certificate provided by the CA in the previous phase.
In step 2, the profile service responds with an encrypted .mobileconfig file that’s
automatically installed. The profile service should sign the .mobileconfig file. Its SSL
certificate can be used for this purpose, for example.
In addition to general settings, this configuration profile should also define enterprise
policies that you want to enforce and it should be a locked profile so the user cannot
remove it from the device. The configuration profile can contain additional requests for
enrollment of identities using SCEP, which are executed as the profile is installed.
Similarly, when a certificate installed using SCEP expires or is otherwise invalidated,
the device asks the user to update the profile. When the user authorizes the request,
the device repeats the above process to obtain a new certificate and profile.
For a sample configuration profile for this phase, see “Sample Phase 4 Device
Response” on page 87.
Profile service
UDID, OS version,
IMEI, MAC address
Exchange policies, VPN
settings, additional
SCEP payloads,
mail accounts, etc.
Phase 4 - Device Configuration
A .mobileconfig file
encrypted for device
and signed by profile service
Device attributes
signed with
device certificate
sample
sample
1
2Chapter 1 Deploying iPhone and iPod touch 27
Other Resources
 Digital Certificates PKI for IPSec VPNs at https://cisco.hosted.jivesoftware.com/docs/
DOC-3592
 Public key infrastructure at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Public_key_infrastructure
 IETF SCEP protocol specification at http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-noursescep-18.txt
Additional information and resources for iPhone, iPod touch and iPad in the enterprise
are available at www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise/ and www.apple.com/ipad/
business/.2
28
2 Creating and Deploying
Configuration Profiles
Configuration profiles define how iPhone, iPad and
iPod touch work with your enterprise systems.
Configuration profiles are XML files that contain device security policies and
restrictions, VPN configuration information, Wi-Fi settings, email and calendar
accounts, and authentication credentials that permit iPhone, iPod touch, and
iPad to work with your enterprise systems.
You can install configuration profiles on devices connected to a computer via USB
using iPhone Configuration Utility, or you can distribute configuration profiles by
email or using a webpage. When users open the email attachment or download
the profile using Safari on their device, they are prompted to begin the installation
process.
If you prefer not to create and distribute configuration profiles, you can configure
devices manually. See Chapter 3 for information.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 29
About iPhone Configuration Utility
iPhone Configuration Utility lets you easily create, encrypt and install configuration
profiles, track and install provisioning profiles and authorized applications, and capture
device information including console logs. When you run the iPhone Configuration
Utility installer, the utility is installed in /Applications/Utilities/ on Mac OS X, or in
Programs\iPhone Configuration Utility\ on Windows.
When you open iPhone Configuration Utility, a window similar to the one shown
below appears.
The content of the main section of the window changes as you select items in the sidebar.
The sidebar displays the Library, which contains the following categories:
 Devices shows a list of iPhone and iPod touch devices that have been connected to
your computer.
 Applications lists your applications that are available to install on devices attached
to your computer. A provisioning profile might be needed for an application to run
on a device.
 Provisioning Profiles lists profiles that permit the use of the device for iPhone OS
development, as authorized by Apple Developer Connection. For information,
see Chapter 5. Provisioning profiles also allow devices to run enterprise applications
that are not distributed using the iTunes Store.
 Configuration Profiles lists the configuration profiles you’ve previously created, and
lets you edit the information you entered, or create a new configuration that you can
send to a user or install on a connected device.30 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles
The sidebar also displays Connected Devices, which shows information about the
iPhone OS devices currently connected to your computer’s USB port. Information
about a connected device is automatically added to the Devices list, so you can view
it again without having to reconnect the device. After a device has been connected,
you can also encrypt profiles for use on only that device.
When a device is connected, you can use iPhone Configuration Utility to install
configuration profiles and applications on the device. See “Installing Configuration
Profiles Using iPhone Configuration Utility” on page 40,“Installing Applications Using
iPhone Configuration Utility” on page 66 and “Installing Provisioning Profiles Using
iPhone Configuration Utility” on page 65 for details.
When a device is connected, you can also view console logs and any available crash
logs. These are the same device logs that are available for viewing within the Xcode
development environment on Mac OS X.
Creating Configuration Profiles
This document uses the terms configuration profile and payload. A configuration profile
is the whole file that configures certain (single or multiple) settings for iPhone,
iPod touch, or iPad. A payload is an individual collection of a certain type of settings,
such as VPN settings, within the configuration profile.
Although you can create a single configuration profile that contains all of the payloads
you need for your organization, consider creating one profile for certificates and
another one (or more) for other settings so you can update and distribute each type of
information separately. This also allows users to retain the certificates they’ve already
installed when installing a new profile that contains VPN or account settings.
Many of the payloads allow you to specify user names and passwords. If you omit this
information, the profile can be used by multiple users, but the user will be asked to
enter the missing information when the profile is installed. If you do personalize the
profile for each user, and include passwords, you should distribute the profile in
encrypted format to protect its contents. For more information see “Installing
Configuration Profiles” on page 40.
To create a new configuration profile, click the New button in the toolbar of iPhone
Configuration Utility. You add payloads to the profile using the payloads list. Then, you
edit the payloads by entering and selecting options that appear in the editing pane.
Required fields are marked with a red arrow. For some settings such as W-Fi, you can
click the Add (+) button to add configurations. To remove a configuration, click the
Delete (–) button in the editing pane.
To edit a payload, select the appropriate item in the payloads list, then click the
Configure button, and fill in the information as described below. Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 31
Automating Configuration Profile Creation
You can also automate the creation of configuration files using AppleScript on a Mac,
or C# Script on Windows. To see the supported methods and their syntax, do the
following:
 Mac OS X: Use Script Editor to open the AppleScript Dictionary for iPhone
Configuration Utility.
 Windows: Use Visual Studio to view the method calls provided by iPCUScripting.dll.
To execute a script, on Mac, use the AppleScript Tell command. On Windows, pass the
script name to iPhone Configuration Utility as a command line parameter.
For examples, see Appendix C, “Sample Scripts.”
General Settings
This is where you provide the name and identifier of this profile, and specify if users are
allowed to remove the profile after it is installed.
The name you specify appears in the profiles list and is displayed on the device after
the configuration profile is installed. The name doesn’t have to be unique, but you
should use a descriptive name that identifies the profile.
The profile identifier must uniquely identify this profile and must use the format
com.companyname.identifier, where identifier describes the profile. (For example,
com.mycompany.homeoffice.)32 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles
The identifier is important because when a profile is installed, the value is compared
with profiles that are already on the device. If the identifier is unique, information in
the profile is added to the device. If the identifier matches a profile already installed,
information in the profile replaces the settings already on the device, except in the case
of Exchange settings. To alter an Exchange account, the profile must first be manually
removed so that the data associated with the account can be purged.
To prevent a user from deleting a profile installed on a device, choose an option from
the Security pop-up menu. The With Authorization option allows you to specify an
authorization password that permits the removal of the profile on the device. If you
select the Never option, the profile can be updated with a new version, but it cannot
be removed.
Passcode Settings
Use this payload to set device policies if you aren’t using Exchange passcode policies.
You can specify whether a passcode is required in order to use the device, as well as
specify characteristics of the passcode and how often it must be changed. When the
configuration profile is loaded, the user is immediately required to enter a passcode
that meets the policies you select or the profile won’t be installed.
If you’re using device policies and Exchange passcode policies, the two sets of policies
are merged and the strictest of the settings is enforced. For information about supported
Exchange ActiveSync policies, see “Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync” on page 8.
The following policies are available:
 Require passcode on device: Requires users to enter a passcode before using
the device. Otherwise, anyone who has the device can access all of its functions
and data.
 Allow simple value: Permits users to use sequential or repeated characters in their
passcodes. For example, this would allow the passcodes “3333” or “DEFG.”
 Require alphanumeric value: Requires that the passcode contain at least one letter
character.
 Minimum passcode length: Specifies the smallest number of characters a passcode
can contain.
 Minimum number of complex characters: The number of non-alphanumeric characters
(such as $, &, and !) that the passcode must contain.
 Maximum passcode age (in days): Requires users to change their passcode at the
interval you specify.
 Auto-Lock (in minutes): If the device isn’t used for this period of time, it automatically
locks. Entering the passcode unlocks it.
 Passcode history: A new passcode won’t be accepted if it matches a previously used
passcode. You can specify how many previous passcodes are remembered for this
comparison.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 33
 Grace period for device lock: Specifies how soon the device can be unlocked again
after use, without re-prompting for the passcode.
 Maximum number of failed attempts: Determines how many failed passcode attempts
can be made before the device is wiped. If you don’t change this setting, after six
failed passcode attempts, the device imposes a time delay before a passcode can be
entered again. The time delay increases with each failed attempt. After the eleventh
failed attempt, all data and settings are securely erased from the device. The
passcode time delays always begin after the sixth attempt, so if you set this value to
6 or lower, no time delays are imposed and the device is erased when the attempt
value is exceeded.
Restrictions Settings
Use this payload to specify which device features the user is allowed to use.
 Allow explicit content: When this is turned off, explicit music or video content
purchased from the iTunes Store is hidden. Explicit content is marked as such by
content providers, such as record labels, when sold through the iTunes Store.
 Allow use of Safari: When this option is turned off, the Safari web browser application
is disabled and its icon removed from the Home screen. This also prevents users from
opening web clips.
 Allow use of YouTube: When this option is turned off, the YouTube application is
disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen.
 Allow use of iTunes Music Store: When this option is turned off, the iTunes Music Store
is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users cannot preview,
purchase, or download content.
 Allow installing apps: When this option is turned off, the App Store is disabled and its
icon is removed from the Home screen. Users are unable to install or update their
applications.
 Allow use of camera: When this option is turned off, the camera is completely
disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users are unable to take
photographs.
 Allow screen capture: When this option is turned off, users are unable to save a
screenshot of the display.34 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles
Wi-Fi Settings
Use this payload to set how the device connects to your wireless network. You can add
multiple network configurations by clicking the Add (+) button in the editing pane.
These settings must be specified, and must match the requirements of your network,
in order for the user to initiate a connection.
 Service Set Identifier: Enter the SSID of the wireless network to connect to.
 Hidden Network: Specifies whether the network is broadcasting its identity.
 Security Type: Select an authentication method for the network. The following
choices are available for both Personal and Enterprise networks.
 None: The network doesn’t use authentication.
 WEP: The network uses WEP authentication only.
 WPA/WPA 2: The network uses WPA authentication only.
 Any: The device uses either WEP or WPA authentication when connecting to the
network, but won’t connect to non-authenticated networks.
 Password: Enter the password for joining the wireless network. If you leave this
blank, the user will be asked to enter it.
Enterprise Settings
In this section you specify settings for connecting to enterprise networks.
These settings appear when you choose an Enterprise setting in the Security Type
pop-up menu.
In the Protocols tab, you specify which EAP methods to use for authentication and
configure the EAP-FAST Protected Access Credential settings.
In the Authentication tab, you specify sign-in settings such as user name and
authentication protocols. If you’ve installed an identity using the Credentials section,
you can choose it using the Identity Certificate pop-up menu.
In the Trust tab, you specify which certificates should be regarded as trusted for the
purpose of validating the authentication server for the Wi-Fi connection. The Trusted
Certificates list displays certificates that have been added using the Credentials tab,
and lets you select which certificates should be regarded as trusted. Add the names of
the authentication servers to be trusted to the Trusted Server Certificates Names list.
You can specify a particular server, such as server.mycompany.com or a partial name
such as *.mycompany.com.
The Allow Trust Exceptions option lets users decide to trust a server when the chain of
trust can’t be established. To avoid these prompts, and to permit connections only to
trusted services, turn off this option and embed all necessary certificates in a profile.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 35
VPN Settings
Use this payload to enter the VPN settings for connecting to your network. You can add
multiple sets of VPN connections by clicking the Add (+) button.
For information about supported VPN protocols and authentication methods, see
“VPN” on page 10. The options available vary by the protocol and authentication
method you select.
VPN On Demand
For certificate-based IPSec configurations, you can turn on VPN On Demand so that a
VPN connection is automatically established when accessing certain domains.
The VPN On Demand options are:
The action applies to all matching addresses. Addresses are compared using simple
string matching, starting from the end and working backwards. The address
“.example.org” matches “support.example.org” and “sales.example.org” but doesn’t
match “www.private-example.org”. However, if you specify the match domain as
“example.com”—notice there is not a period at the start—it matches “www.privateexample.com” and all the others.
Note that LDAP connections won’t initiate a VPN connection; if the VPN hasn’t already
been established by another application, such as Safari, the LDAP lookup fails.
VPN Proxy
iPhone supports manual VPN proxy, and automatic proxy configuration using PAC or
WPAD. To specify a VPN proxy, select an option from the Proxy Setup pop-up menu.
Setting Description
Always Initiates a VPN connection for any address that matches the
specified domain.
Never Does not initiate a VPN connection for addresses that match the
specified domain, but if VPN is already active, it may be used.
Establish if needed Initiates a VPN connection for addresses that match the specified
domain only after a failed DNS look-up has occurred.36 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles
For PAC-based auto-proxy configurations, select Automatic from the pop-up menu and
then enter the URL of a PAC file. For information about PACS capabilities and the file
format, see “Other Resources” on page 55.
For Web Proxy Autodiscovery (WPAD) configurations, select Automatic from the pop-up
menu. Leave the Proxy Server URL field empty, iPhone will request the WPAD file using
DHCP and DNS. For information about WPAD see “Other Resources” on page 55.
Email Settings
Use this payload to configure POP or IMAP mail accounts for the user. If you’re adding
an Exchange account, see Exchange Settings below.
Users can modify some of the mail settings you provide in a profile, such as the
account name, password, and alternative SMTP servers. If you omit any of this
information from the profile, users are asked to enter it when they access the account.
You can add multiple mail accounts by clicking the Add (+) button.
Exchange Settings
Use this payload to enter the user’s settings for your Exchange server. You can create
a profile for a specific user by specifying the user name, host name, and email address,
or you can provide just the host name—the users are prompted to fill in the other
values when they install the profile.
If you specify the user name, host name, and SSL setting in the profile, the user can’t
change these settings on the device.
You can configure only one Exchange account per device. Other email accounts,
including any Exchange via IMAP accounts, aren’t affected when you add an Exchange
account. Exchange accounts that are added using a profile are deleted when the profile
is removed, and can’t be otherwise deleted.
By default, Exchange syncs contacts, calendar, and email. The user can change these
settings on the device, including how many days worth of data to sync, in Settings >
Accounts.
If you select the Use SSL option, be sure to add the certificates necessary to
authenticate the connection using the Credentials pane.
To provide a certificate that identifies the user to the Exchange ActiveSync Server,
click the Add (+) button and then select an identity certificate from the Mac OS X
Keychain or Windows Certificate Store. After adding a certificate, you can specify the
Authentication Credential Name, if necessary for your ActiveSync configuration. You
can also embed the certificate’s passphrase in the configuration profile. If you don’t
provide the passphrase, the user is asked to enter it when the profile is installed.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 37
LDAP Settings
Use this payload to enter settings for connecting to an LDAPv3 directory. You can
specify multiple search bases for each directory, and you can configure multiple
directory connections by clicking the Add (+) button.
If you select the Use SSL option, be sure to add the certificates necessary to
authenticate the connection using the Credentials pane.
CalDAV Settings
Use this payload to provide accounts settings for connecting to a CalDAV-compliant
calendar server. These accounts will be added to the device, and as with Exchange
accounts, users need to manually enter information you omit from the profile, such as
their account password, when the profile is installed.
If you select the Use SSL option, be sure to add the certificates necessary to
authenticate the connection using the Credentials pane.
You can configure multiple accounts by clicking the Add (+) button.
Subscribed Calendars Settings
Use this payload to add read-only calendar subscriptions to the device’s Calendar
application. You can configure multiple subscriptions by clicking the Add (+) button.
A list of public calendars you can subscribe to is available at
www.apple.com/downloads/macosx/calendars/.
If you select the Use SSL option, be sure to add the certificates necessary to
authenticate the connection using the Credentials pane.
Web Clip Settings
Use this payload to add web clips to the Home screen of the user’s device. Web clips
provide fast access to favorite web pages.
Make sure the URL you enter includes the prefix http:// or https://—this is required
for the web clip to function correctly. For example, to add the online version of
the iPhone User Guide to the Home screen, specify the web clip URL:
http://help.apple.com/iphone/
To add a custom icon, select a graphic file in gif, jpeg, or png format, 59 x 60 pixels in
size. The image is automatically scaled and cropped to fit, and converted to png format
if necessary.38 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles
Credentials Settings
Use this payload to add certificates and identities to the device. For information about
supported formats, see “Certificates and Identities” on page 11.
When installing credentials, also install the intermediate certificates that are necessary
to establish a chain to a trusted certificate that’s on the device. To view a list of the
preinstalled roots, see the Apple Support article at http://support.apple.com/kb/HT2185.
If you’re adding an identify for use with Microsoft Exchange, use the Exchange payload
instead. See “Exchange Settings” on page 36.
Adding credentials on Mac OS X:
1 Click the Add (+) button.
2 In the file dialog that appears, select a PKCS1 or PKSC12 file, then click Open.
If the certificate or identity that you want to install in your Keychain, use Keychain
Access to export it in .p12 format. Keychain Access is located in /Applications/Utilities.
For help see Keychain Access Help, available in the Help menu when Keychain Access
is open.
To add multiple credentials to the configuration profile, click the Add (+) button again.
Adding credentials on Windows:
1 Click the Add (+) button.
2 Select the credential that you want to install from the Windows Certificate Store.
If the credential isn’t available in your personal certificate store, you must add it, and
the private key must be marked as exportable, which is one of the steps offered by the
certificate import wizard. Note that adding root certificates requires administrative
access to the computer, and the certificate must be added to the personal store.
If you’re using multiple configuration profiles, make sure certificates aren’t duplicated.
You cannot install multiple copies of the same certificate.
Instead of installing certificates using a configuration profile, you can let users use
Safari to download the certificates directly to their device from a webpage. Or, you can
email certificates to users. See “Installing Identities and Root Certificates” on page 54
for more information. You can also use the SCEP Settings, below, to specify how the
device obtains certificates over-the-air when the profile is installed.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 39
SCEP Settings
The SCEP payload lets you specify settings that allow the device to obtain certificates
from a CA using Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP).
For more information about how the iPhone obtains certificates wirelessly,
see “Over-the-Air Enrollment and Configuration” on page 22.
Advanced Settings
The Advanced payload lets you change the device’s Access Point Name (APN) and cell
network proxy settings. These settings define how the device connects to the carrier’s
network. Change these settings only when specifically directed to do so by a carrier
network expert. If these settings are incorrect, the device can’t access data using the
cellular network. To undo an inadvertent change to these settings, delete the profile
from the device. Apple recommends that you define APN settings in a configuration
profile separate from other enterprise settings, because profiles that specify APN
information must be signed by your cell service provider.
iPhone OS supports APN user names of up to 20 characters, and passwords of up to
32 characters.
Editing Configuration Profiles
In iPhone Configuration Utility, select a profile in the Configuration Profiles list, and
then use the payload list and editing panes to make changes. You can also import a
profile by choosing File > Add to Library and then selecting a .mobileconfig file. If the
settings panes aren’t visible, choose View > Show Detail.
Setting Description
URL This is the address of the SCEP server.
Name This can be any string that will be understood by the certificate
authority, it can be used to distinguish between instances, for
example.
Subject The representation of a X.500 name represented as an array of OID
and value. For example, /C=US/O=Apple Inc./CN=foo/1.2.5.3=bar,
which would translate to:
[ [ [“C”, “US”] ], [ [“O”, “Apple Inc.”] ], ..., [ [ “1.2.5.3”, “bar” ] ] ]
Challenge A pre-shared secret the SCEP server can use to identify the request
or user.
Key Size and Usage Select a key size, and—using the checkboxes below this field—the
acceptable use of the key.
Fingerprint If your Certificate Authority uses HTTP, use this field to provide the
fingerprint of the CA’s certificate which the device will use to
confirm authenticity of the CA’s response. during the enrollment
process. You can enter a SHA1 or MD5 fingerprint, or select a
certificate to import its signature.40 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles
The Identifier field in the General payload is used by the device to determine whether a
profile is new, or an update to an existing profile. If you want the updated profile to
replace one that users have already installed, don’t change the Identifier.
Installing Provisioning Profiles and Applications
iPhone Configuration Utility can install applications and distribution provisioning
profiles on devices attached to the computer. For details, see Chapter 5, “Deploying
Applications,” on page 63.
Installing Configuration Profiles
After you’ve created a profile, you can connect a device and install the profile using
iPhone Configuration Utility.
Alternatively, you can distribute the profile to users by email, or by posting it to a
website. When users use their device to open an email message or download the
profile from the web, they’re prompted to start the installation process.
Installing Configuration Profiles Using iPhone Configuration Utility
You can install configuration profiles directly on a device that has been updated to
iPhone OS 3.0 or later and is attached to your computer. You can also use iPhone
Configuration Utility to remove previously installed profiles.
To install a configuration profile:
1 Connect the device to your computer using a USB cable.
After a moment, the device appears in the Devices list in iPhone Configuration Utility.
2 Select the device, and then click the Configuration Profiles tab.
3 Select a configuration profile from the list, and then click Install.
4 On the device, tap Install to install the profile.
When you install directly onto a device using USB, the configuration profile is
automatically signed and encrypted before being transferred to the device.
Distributing Configuration Profiles by Email
You can distribute configuration profiles using email. Users install the profile by
receiving the message on their device, then tapping the attachment to install it.
To email a configuration profile:
1 Click the Share button in the iPhone Configuration Utility toolbar.
In the dialog that appears, select a security option:
a None: A plain text .mobileconfig file is created. It can be installed on any device.
Some content in the file is obfuscated to prevent casual snooping if the file is examined.Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 41
b Sign Configuration Profile: The .mobileconfig file is signed and won’t be installed by
a device if it’s altered. Some fields are obfuscated to prevent casual snooping if the
file is examined. Once installed, the profile can only be updated by a profile that has
the same identifier and is signed by the same copy of iPhone Configuration Utility.
c Sign and Encrypt Profile: Signs the profile so it cannot be altered, and encrypts all
of the contents so the profile cannot be examined and can only be installed on
a specific device. If the profile contains passwords, this option is recommended.
Separate .mobileconfig files will be created for each of the devices you select from
the Devices list. If a device does not appear in the list, it either hasn’t been previously
connected to the computer so that the encryption key can be obtained, or it hasn’t
been upgraded to iPhone OS 3.0 or later.
2 Click Share, and new Mail (Mac OS X) or Outlook (Windows) message opens with the
profiles added as uncompressed attachments. The files must be uncompressed for the
device to recognize and install the profile.
Distributing Configuration Profiles on the Web
You can distribute configuration profiles using a website. Users install the profile by
downloading it using Safari on their device. To easily distribute the URL to your users,
send it via SMS.
To export a configuration profile:
1 Click the Export button in the iPhone Configuration Utility toolbar.
In the dialog that appears, select a security option:
a None: A plain text .mobileconfig file is created. It can be installed on any device.
Some content in the file is obfuscated to prevent casual snooping if the file is
examined, but you should make sure that when you put the file on your website it’s
accessible only by authorized users.
b Sign Configuration Profile: The .mobileconfig file is signed and won’t be installed by
a device if it’s altered. Once installed, the profile can only be updated by a profile that
has the same identifier and is signed by the same copy of iPhone Configuration
Utility. Some of the information in the profile is obfuscated to prevent casual
snooping if the file is examined, but you should make sure that when you put the file
on your website, it’s accessible only by authorized users.
c Sign and Encrypt Profile: Signs the profile so it cannot be altered, and encrypts all
of the contents so the profile cannot be examined and can only be installed on
a specific device. Separate .mobileconfig files will be created for each of the devices
you select from the Devices list.
2 Click Export, then select a location to save the .mobileconfig files.
The files are ready for posting on your website. Don’t compress the .mobileconfig file or
change its extension, or the device won’t recognize or install the profile. 42 Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles
User Installation of Downloaded Configuration Profiles
Provide your users with the URL where they can download the profiles onto their
devices, or send the profiles to an email account your users can access using the device
before it’s set up with your enterprise-specific information.
When a user downloads the profile from the web, or opens the attachment using Mail,
the device recognizes the .mobileconfig extension as a profile and begins installation
when the user taps Install.
During installation, the user is asked to enter any necessary information, such as
passwords that were not specified in the profile, and other information as required by
the settings you specified.
The device also retrieves the Exchange ActiveSync policies from the server, and will
refresh the policies, if they’ve changed, with every subsequent connection. If the device
or Exchange ActiveSync policies enforce a passcode setting, the user must enter a
passcode that complies with the policy in order to complete the installation.
Additionally, the user is asked to enter any passwords necessary to use certificates
included in the profile.
If the installation isn’t completed successfully—perhaps because the Exchange server
was unreachable or the user cancelled the process—none of the information entered
by the user is retained.
Users may want to change how many days worth of messages are synced to the device
and which mail folders other than the inbox are synced. The defaults are three days and
all folders. Users can change these by going to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars >
Exchange account name. Chapter 2 Creating and Deploying Configuration Profiles 43
Removing and Updating Configuration Profiles
Configuration profile updates aren’t pushed to users. Distribute the updated profiles to
your users for them to install. As long as the profile identifier matches, and if signed, it
has been signed by the same copy of iPhone Configuration Utility, the new profile
replaces the profile on the device.
Settings enforced by a configuration profile cannot be changed on the device.
To change a setting, you must install an updated profile. If the profile was signed, it
can be replaced only by a profile signed by the same copy of iPhone Configuration
Utility. The identifier in both profiles must match in order for the updated profile
to be recognized as a replacement. For more information about the identifier, see
“General Settings” on page 31.
Important: Removing a configuration profile removes policies and all of the Exchange
account’s data stored on the device, as well as VPN settings, certificates, and other
information, including mail messages, associated with the profile.
If the General Settings payload of the profile specifies that it cannot be removed by
the user, the Remove button won’t appear. If the settings allows removal using an
authorization password, the user will be asked to enter the password after tapping
Remove. For more information about profile security settings, see “General Settings” on
page 31.3
44
3 Manually Configuring Devices
This chapter describes how to manually configure iPhone,
iPod touch, and iPad.
If you don’t provide automatic configuration profiles, users can configure their
devices manually. Some settings, such as passcode policies, can only be set by using
a configuration profile.
VPN Settings
To change VPN settings, go to Settings > General > Network > VPN.
When you configure VPN settings, the device asks you to enter information based on
responses it receives from your VPN server. For example, you’ll be asked for an RSA
SecurID token if the server requires one.
You cannot configure a certificate-based VPN connection unless the appropriate
certificates are installed on the device. See “Installing Identities and Root Certificates”
on page 54 for more information.
VPN On Demand cannot be configured on the device, you set this up using a
configuration profile. See “VPN On Demand” on page 35.
VPN Proxy Settings
For all configurations you can also specify a VPN proxy. To configure a single proxy for
all connections, tap Manual and provide the address, port, and authentication if
necessary. To provide the device with an auto-proxy configuration file, tap Auto and
specify the URL of the PACS file. To specify auto-proxy configuration using WPAD, tap
Auto. The device will query DHCP and DNS for the WPAD settings. See Other Resources
at the end of this chapter for PACS file samples and resources.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 45
Cisco IPSec Settings
When you manually configure the device for Cisco IPSec VPN, a screen similar to the
following appears:
Use this chart to identify the settings and information you enter:
Field Description
Description A descriptive title that identifies this group of settings.
Server The DNS name or IP address of the VPN server to connect to.
Account The user name of the user’s VPN login account. Don’t enter the
group name in this field.
Password The passphrase of the user’s VPN login account. Leave blank for
RSA SecurID and CryptoCard authentication, or if you want the user
to enter their password manually with every connection attempt.
Use Certificate This will be available only if you’ve installed a .p12 or .pfx identity
that contains a certificate provisioned for remote access and the
private key for the certificate. When Use Certificate is on, the Group
Name and Shared Secret fields are replaced with an Identify field
that lets you pick from a list of installed VPN-compatible identities.
Group Name The name of the group that the user belongs to as defined on the
VPN server.
Secret The group’s shared secret. This is the same for every member of the
user’s assigned group. It’s not the user’s password and must be
specified to initiate a connection.46 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices
PPTP Settings
When you manually configure the device for PPTP VPN, a screen similar to the
following appears:
Use this chart to identify the settings and information you enter:
Field Description
Description A descriptive title that identifies this group of settings.
Server The DNS name or IP address of the VPN server to connect to.
Account The user name of the user’s VPN login account.
RSA SecurID If you’re using an RSA SecurID token, turn on this option, so the
Password field is hidden.
Password The passphrase of the user’s VPN login account.
Encryption Level The default is Auto, which selects the highest encryption level that
is available, starting with 128-bit, then 40-bit, then None. Maximum
is 128-bit only. None turns off encryption.
Send All Traffic The default is On. Sends all network traffic over the VPN link. Turn
off to enable split-tunneling, which routes only traffic destined for
servers inside the VPN through the server. Other traffic is routed
directly to the Internet. Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 47
L2TP Settings
When you manually configure the device for L2TP VPN, a screen similar to the
following appears:
Use this chart to identify the settings and information you enter:
Field Description
Description A descriptive title that identifies this group of settings.
Server The DNS name or IP address of the VPN server to connect to.
Account The user name of the user’s VPN login account.
Password The password of the user’s VPN login account.
Secret The shared secret (pre-shared key) for the L2TP account. This is the
same for all LT2P users.
Send All Traffic The default is On. Sends all network traffic over the VPN link. Turn
off to enable split-tunneling, which routes only traffic destined for
servers inside the VPN through the server. Other traffic is routed
directly to the Internet. 48 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices
Wi-Fi Settings
To change Wi-Fi settings, go to Settings > General > Network > Wi-Fi. If the network
you’re adding is within range, select it from the list of available networks. Otherwise,
tap Other.
Make sure that your network infrastructure uses authentication and encryption
supported by iPhone and iPod touch. For specifications, see “Network Security” on
page 11. For information about installing certificates for authentication, see “Installing
Identities and Root Certificates” on page 54.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 49
Exchange Settings
You can configure only one Exchange account per device. To add an Exchange account,
go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, and then tap Add Account. On the Add
Account screen, tap Microsoft Exchange.
When you manually configure the device for Exchange, use this chart to identify the
settings and information you enter:
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad support Microsoft’s Autodiscover service, which uses your
user name and password to determine the address of the front-end Exchange server. If
the server’s address can’t be determined, you’ll be asked to enter it.
If your Exchange server listens for connections on a port other than 443, specify the
port number in the Server field using the format exchange.example.com:portnumber.
Field Description
Email The user’s complete email address.
Domain The domain of the user’s Exchange account.
Username The user name of the user’s Exchange account.
Password The password of the user’s Exchange account.
Description A descriptive title that identifies this account.50 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices
After the Exchange account is successfully configured, the server’s passcode policies are
enforced. If the user’s current passcode doesn’t comply with the Exchange ActiveSync
policies, the user is prompted to change or set the passcode. The device won’t
communicate with the Exchange server until the user sets a compliant passcode.
Next, the device offers to immediately sync with the Exchange server. If you choose not
to sync at this time, you can turn on calendar and contact syncing later in Settings >
Mail, Contacts, Calendars. By default, Exchange ActiveSync pushes new data to your
device as it arrives on the server. If you prefer to fetch new data on a schedule or to
only pull new data manually, use Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Fetch New Data
to change the settings.
To change how many days’ worth of mail messages are synced to your device, go to
Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars, and then select the Exchange account. You can
also select which folders, in addition to the inbox, are included in push email delivery.
To change the setting for calendar data go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars >
Sync.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 51
LDAP Settings
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad can look up contact information on LDAP directory
servers. To add an LDAP server, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Add
Account > Other. Then tap Add LDAP Account.
Enter the LDAP server address, and user name and password if required, then tap Next.
If the server is reachable and supplies default search settings to the device, the settings
will be used. 52 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices
The following Search Scope settings are supported:
You can define multiple sets of search settings for each server.
CalDAV Settings
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad work with CalDAV calendar servers that provide group
calendars and scheduling. To add a CalDAV server, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts,
Calendars > Add Account > Other. Then tap Add CalDAV Account.
Enter the CalDAV server address, and user name and password if necessary, then tap Next.
After the server is contacted, additional fields appear that allow you to set more options.
Search Scope setting Description
Base Searches the base object only.
One Level Searches objects one level below the base object, but not the base
object itself.
Subtree Searches the base object and the entire tree of all objects
descended from it.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 53
Calendar Subscription Settings
You can add read-only calendars, such as project schedules or holidays. To add a
calendar, go to Settings > Mail, Contacts, Calendars > Add Account > Other and then
tap Add Subscribed Calendar.
Enter the URL for an iCalendar (.ics) file, and the user name and password if necessary,
then tap Save. You can also specify whether alarms that are set in the calendar should
be removed when the calendar is added to the device.
In addition to adding calendar subscriptions manually, you can send users a webcal://
URL (or an http:// link to a .ics file) and, after the user taps the link, the device will offer
to add it as a subscribed calendar.54 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices
Installing Identities and Root Certificates
If you don’t distribute certificates using profiles, your users can install them manually by
using the device to download them from a website, or by opening an attachment in an
email message. The device recognizes certificates with the following MIME types and
file extensions:
 application/x-pkcs12, .p12, .pfx
 application/x-x509-ca-cert, .cer, .crt, .der
See “Certificates and Identities” on page 11 for more information about supported
formats and other requirements.
When a certificate or identity is downloaded to the device, the Install Profile screen
appears. The description indicates the type: identity or certificate authority. To install
the certificate, tap Install. If it’s an identity certificate, you’ll be asked to enter the
certificate’s password.
To view or remove an installed certificate, go to Settings > General > Profile. If you
remove a certificate that’s required for accessing an account or network, your device
cannot connect to those services.Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 55
Additional Mail Accounts
You can configure only one Exchange account, but you can add multiple POP and
IMAP accounts. This can be used, for example, to access mail on a Lotus Notes or
Novell Groupwise mail server. Go to Settings > Accounts > Mail, Contacts, Calendars >
Add Account > Other. For more about adding an IMAP account, see the
iPhone User Guide, iPod touch User Guide, or iPad User Guide.
Updating and Removing Profiles
For information about how a user updates or removes configuration profiles, see
“Removing and Updating Configuration Profiles” on page 43.
For information about installing distribution provisioning profiles, see “Deploying
Applications” on page 63.
Other Resources
For information about the format and function of auto-proxy configuration files,
used by the VPN proxy settings, see the following:
 Proxy auto-config (PAC) at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Proxy_auto-config
 Web Proxy Autodiscovery Protocol at http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wpad
 Microsoft TechNet “Using Automatic Configuration, Automatic Proxy, and Automatic
Detection” at http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/dd361918.aspx
Apple has several video tutorials, viewable in a standard web browser, that show your
users how to set up and use the features of iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad:
 iPhone Guided Tour at www.apple.com/iphone/guidedtour/
 iPod touch Guided Tour at www.apple.com/ipodtouch/guidedtour/
 iPad Guided Tour at www.apple.com/ipad/guided-tours/
 iPhone Support webpage at www.apple.com/support/iphone/
 iPod touch Support webpage at www.apple.com/support/ipodtouch/
 iPad Support webpage at www.apple.com/support/ipad/
There is also a user guide for each device, in PDF, that provides additional tips and
usage details:
 iPhone User Guide: http://manuals.info.apple.com/en/iPhone_User_Guide.pdf
 iPod touch User Guide: http://manuals.info.apple.com/en/iPod_touch_User_Guide.pdf
 iPad User Guide: http://manuals.info.apple.com/en/iPad_User_Guide.pdf56 Chapter 3 Manually Configuring Devices 4
57
4 Deploying iTunes
You use iTunes to sync music and video, install applications,
and more.
This chapter describes how to deploy iTunes and enterprise applications, and defines
the settings and restrictions you can specify.
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad can sync each type of data (music, media, etc) to only one
computer at a time. For example, you can sync music with a desktop computer and
bookmarks with a portable computer, by setting iTunes sync options appropriately
on both computers. See iTunes Help, available in the Help menu when iTunes is open,
for more information about sync options.
Installing iTunes
iTunes uses standard Macintosh and Windows installers. The latest version and a list of
system requirements is available for downloading at www.itunes.com.
For information about licensing requirements for distributing iTunes, see:
http://developer.apple.com/softwarelicensing/agreements/itunes.html
Installing iTunes on Windows Computers
When you install iTunes on Windows computers, by default you also install the latest
version of QuickTime, Bonjour, and Apple Software Update. You can omit these
components by passing parameters to the iTunes installer, or by pushing only the
components you want to install on your users’ computers.58 Chapter 4 Deploying iTunes
Installing on Windows using iTunesSetup.exe
If you plan to use the regular iTunes installation process but omit some components,
you can pass properties to iTunesSetup.exe using the command line.
Silently Installing on Windows
To silently install iTunes, extract the individual .msi files from iTunesSetup.exe, then push
the files to client computers.
To extract .msi files from iTunesSetup.exe:
1 Run iTunesSetup.exe.
2 Open %temp% and find a folder named IXPnnn.TMP, where %temp% is your temporary
directory and nnn is a 3-digit random number. On Windows XP, the temporary directory
is typically bootdrive:\Documents and Settings\user\Local Settings\temp\. On Windows
Vista, the temporary directory is typically \Users\user\AppData\Local\Temp\.
3 Copy the .msi files from the folder to another location.
4 Quit the installer opened by iTunesSetup.exe.
Then use Group Policy Object Editor, in the Microsoft Management Console, to add the
.msi files to a Computer Configuration policy. Make sure to add the configuration to the
Computer Configuration policy, not the User Configuration policy.
Important: iTunes requires QuickTime and Apple Application Support. Apple
Application Support must be installed before installing iTunes. Apple Mobile Device
Services (AMDS) is necessary to use an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch with iTunes.
Before pushing the .msi files, you need to select which localized versions of iTunes you
want to install. To do so, open the .msi in the ORCA tool, which is installed by the
Windows SDK as Orca.msi, in bin\. Then edit the summary information stream and
remove the languages that you don’t want to install. (Locale ID1033 is English.)
Alternatively, use the Group Policy Object Editor to change the deployment properties
of the .msi files to Ignore Language.
Property Meaning
NO_AMDS=1 Don’t install Apple Mobile Device Services. This component is
required for iTunes to sync and manage mobile devices.
NO_ASUW=1 Don’t install Apple Software Update for Windows. This application
alerts users to new versions of Apple software.
NO_BONJOUR=1 Don’t install Bonjour. Bonjour provides zero-configuration network
discovery of printers, shared iTunes libraries, and other services.
NO_QUICKTIME=1 Don’t install QuickTime. This component is required to use iTunes.
Don’t omit QuickTime unless you’re sure the client computer
already has the latest version installed.Chapter 4 Deploying iTunes 59
Installing iTunes on Macintosh Computers
Mac computers come with iTunes installed. The latest version of iTunes is available
at www.itunes.com. To push iTunes to Mac clients, you can use Workgroup Manager,
an administrative tool included with Mac OS X Server.
Quickly Activating Devices with iTunes
Before a new iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad can be used, it must be activated by
connecting it to a computer that is running iTunes. Normally, after activating a device,
iTunes offers to sync the device with the computer. To avoid this when you’re setting
up a device for someone else, turn on activation-only mode. This causes iTunes to
automatically eject a device after it’s activated. The device is then ready to configure,
but doesn’t have any media or data.
To turn on activation-only mode on Mac OS X:
1 Make sure iTunes isn’t running, and then open Terminal.
2 In Terminal, enter a command:
 To turn activation-only mode on:
defaults write com.apple.iTunes StoreActivationMode -integer 1
 To turn activation-only mode off:
defaults delete com.apple.iTunes StoreActivationMode
To activate a device, see “Using Activation-only Mode,” below.
To turn on activation-only mode on Windows:
1 Make sure iTunes isn’t running, and then open a Command Prompt window.
2 Enter a command:
 To turn activation-only mode on:
"C:\Program Files\iTunes\iTunes.exe" /setPrefInt StoreActivationMode 1
 To turn activation-only mode off:
"C:\Program Files\iTunes\iTunes.exe" /setPrefInt StoreActivationMode 0
You can also create a shortcut, or edit the iTunes shortcut you already have, to include
these commands so you can quickly toggle activation-only mode.
To verify that iTunes is in activation-only mode, choose iTunes > About iTunes and look
for the text “Activation-only mode” under the iTunes version and build identifier.60 Chapter 4 Deploying iTunes
Using Activation-Only Mode
Make sure that you’ve turned on activation-only mode as described above, and then
follow these steps.
1 If you’re activating an iPhone, insert an activated SIM card. Use the SIM eject tool, or a
straightened paper clip, to eject the SIM tray. See the iPhone User Guide for details.
2 Connect iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad to the computer. The computer must be
connected to the Internet to activate the device.
iTunes opens, if necessary, and activates the device. A message appears when the
device is successfully activated.
3 Disconnect the device.
You can immediately connect and activate additional devices. iTunes won’t sync with
any device while activation-only mode is on, so don’t forget to turn activation-only
mode off if you plan on using iTunes to sync devices.
Setting iTunes Restrictions
You can restrict your users from using certain iTunes features. This is sometimes
referred to as parental controls. The following features can be restricted:
 Automatic and user-initiated checking for new versions of iTunes and device
software updates
 Displaying Genius suggestions while browsing or playing media
 Automatically syncing when devices are connected
 Downloading album artwork
 Using Visualizer plug-ins
 Entering a URL of streaming media
 Automatically discovering Apple TV systems
 Registering new devices with Apple
 Subscribing to podcasts
 Playing Internet radio
 Accessing the iTunes Store
 Library sharing with local network computers also running iTunes
 Playing iTunes media content that is marked as explicit
 Playing movies
 Playing TV showsChapter 4 Deploying iTunes 61
Setting iTunes Restrictions for Mac OS X
On Mac OS X, you control access by using keys in a plist file. On Mac OS X the key
values shown above can be specified for each user by editing ~/Library/Preferences/
com.apple.iTunes.plist using Workgroup Manager, an administrative tool included with
Mac OS X Server.
For instructions, see the Apple Support article at http://docs.info.apple.com/
article.html?artnum=303099.
Setting iTunes Restrictions for Windows
On Windows, you control access by setting registry values inside one of the following
registry keys:
On Windows XP and 32-bit Windows Vista:
 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Apple Computer, Inc.\iTunes\[SID]\Parental
Controls\
 HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Apple Computer, Inc.\iTunes\Parental Controls
On 64-bit Windows Vista:
 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Wow6432Node\Apple Computer,
Inc.\iTunes\[SID]\Parental Controls\
 HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Wow6432Node\Apple Computer,
Inc.\iTunes\Parental Controls
For information about the iTunes registry values, see the Apple Support article at
http://support.apple.com/kb/HT2102.
For general information about editing the Windows registry, see the Microsoft Help and
Support article at http://support.microsoft.com/kb/136393.
Updating iTunes and iPhone OS Manually
If you turn off automated and user-initiated software update checking in iTunes,
you’ll need to distribute software updates to users for manual installation.
To update iTunes, see the installation and deployment steps described earlier in this
document. It’s the same process you followed for distributing iTunes to your users.62 Chapter 4 Deploying iTunes
To update iPhone OS, follow these steps:
1 On a computer that doesn’t have iTunes software updating turned off, use iTunes to
download the software update. To do so, select an attached device in iTunes, click the
Summary tab, and then click the “Check for Update” button.
2 After downloading, copy the updater file (.ipsw) found in the following location:
 On Mac OS X: ~/Library/iTunes/iPhone Software Updates/
 On Windows XP: bootdrive:\Documents and Settings\user\Application Data\
Apple Computer\iTunes\iPhone Software Updates\
3 Distribute the .ipsw file to your users, or place it on the network where they can
access it.
4 Tell your users to back up their device with iTunes before applying the update. During
manual updates, iTunes doesn’t automatically back up the device before installation.
To create a new backup, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac) the device in the
iTunes sidebar. Then choose Back Up from the contextual menu that appears.
5 Your users install the update by connecting their device to iTunes, then selecting the
Summary tab for their device. Next, they hold down the Option (Mac) or Shift
(Windows) key and click the “Check for Update” button.
6 A file selector dialog appears. Users should select the .ipsw file and then click Open to
begin the update process.
Backing Up a Device with iTunes
When iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad is synced with iTunes, device settings are
automatically backed up to the computer. Applications purchased from the App Store
are copied to the iTunes Library.
Applications you’ve developed yourself, and distributed to your users with enterprise
distribution profiles, won’t be backed up or transferred to the user’s computer. But the
device backup will include any data files your application creates.
Device backups can be stored in encrypted format by selecting the Encrypt Backup
option for the device in the summary pane of iTunes. Files are encrypted using AES256.
The key is stored securely in the iPhone OS keychain.
Important: If the device being backed up has any encrypted profiles installed, iTunes
requires the user to enable backup encryption.5
63
5 Deploying Applications
You can distribute iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad applications
to your users.
If you want to install iPhone OS applications that you’ve developed, you distribute the
application to your users, who install the applications using iTunes.
Applications from the online App Store work on iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad without
any additional steps. If you develop an application that you want to distribute yourself,
it must be digitally signed with a certificate issued by Apple. You must also provide
your users with a distribution provisioning profile that allows their device to use the
application.
The process for deploying your own applications is:
 Register for enterprise development with Apple.
 Sign your applications using your certificate.
 Create an enterprise distribution provisioning profile that authorizes devices to use
applications you’ve signed.
 Deploy the application and the enterprise distribution provisioning profile to your
users’ computers.
 Instruct users to install the application and profile using iTunes.
See below for more about each of these steps.
Registering for Application Development
To develop and deploy custom applications for iPhone OS, first register for the iPhone
Enterprise Developer Program at http://developer.apple.com/.
Once you complete the registration process, you’ll receive instructions for enabling
your applications to work on devices.64 Chapter 5 Deploying Applications
Signing Applications
Applications you distribute to users must be signed with your distribution certificate.
For instructions about obtaining and using a certificate, see the iPhone Developer
Center at http://developer.apple.com/iphone.
Creating the Distribution Provisioning Profile
Distribution provisioning profiles let you create applications that your users can use on
their device. You create an enterprise distribution provisioning profile for a specific
application, or multiple applications, by specifying the AppID that is authorized by the
profile. If a user has an application, but doesn’t have a profile that authorizes its use, the
user isn’t able to use the application.
The designated Team Agent for your enterprise can create distribution provisioning
profiles at the Enterprise Program Portal at http://developer.apple.com/iphone.
See the website for instructions.
Once you create the enterprise distribution provisioning profile, download the
.mobileprovision file, and then securely distribute it and your application.
Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iTunes
The user’s installed copy of iTunes automatically installs provisioning profiles that are
located in the following folders defined in this section. If the folders don’t exist, create
them using the names shown.
Mac OS X
 ~/Library/MobileDevice/Provisioning Profiles/
 /Library/MobileDevice/Provisioning Profiles/
 the path specified by the ProvisioningProfilesPath key in ~/Library/Preferences/
com.apple.itunes
Windows XP
 bootdrive:\Documents and Settings\username\Application Data\Apple Computer\
MobileDevice\Provisioning Profiles
 bootdrive:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Apple Computer\
MobileDevice\Provisioning Profiles
 the path specified in the HKCU or HKLM by the ProvisioningProfilesPath registry key
SOFTWARE\Apple Computer, Inc\iTunesChapter 5 Deploying Applications 65
Windows Vista
 bootdrive:\Users\username\AppData\Roaming\Apple Computer\MobileDevice\
Provisioning Profiles
 bootdrive:\ProgramData\Apple Computer\MobileDevice\Provisioning Profiles
 the path specified in the HKCU or HKLM by the ProvisioningProfilesPath registry key
SOFTWARE\Apple Computer, Inc\iTunes
iTunes automatically installs provisioning profiles found in the locations above onto
devices it syncs with. Once installed, the provisioning profiles can be viewed on the
device in Settings > General > Profiles.
You can also distribute the .mobileprovision file to your users and have them drag
it to the iTunes application icon. iTunes will copy the file to the correct location as
defined above.
Installing Provisioning Profiles Using iPhone Configuration
Utility
You can use iPhone Configuration Utility to install provisioning profiles on connected
devices. Follow these steps:
1 In iPhone Configuration Utility, choose File > Add to Library, and then select the
provisioning profile that you want to install.
The profile is added to iPhone Configuration Utility and can be viewed by selecting the
Provisioning Profiles category in the Library.
2 Select a device in the Connected Devices list.
3 Click the Provisioning Profiles tab.
4 Select the provisioning profile in the list, and then click its Install button.
Installing Applications Using iTunes
Your users use iTunes to install applications on their devices. Securely distribute the
application to your users and then have them follow these steps:
1 In iTunes, choose File > Add to Library and select the application (.app) you provided.
You can also drag the .app file to the iTunes application icon.
2 Connect a device to the computer, and then select it in the Devices list in iTunes.
3 Click the Applications tab, and then select the application in the list.
4 Click Apply to install the application and all distribution provisioning profiles that are
located in the designated folders discussed in “Installing Provisioning Profiles Using
iTunes” on page 64.66 Chapter 5 Deploying Applications
Installing Applications Using iPhone Configuration Utility
You can use iPhone Configuration Utility to install applications on connected devices.
Follow these steps:
1 In iPhone Configuration Utility, choose File > Add to Library, and then select the
application that you want to install.
The application is added to iPhone Configuration Utility and can be viewed by
selecting the Applications category in the Library.
2 Select a device in the Connected Devices list.
3 Click the Applications tab.
4 Select the application in the list, and then click its Install button.
Using Enterprise Applications
When a user runs an application that isn’t signed by Apple, the device looks for a
distribution provisioning profile that authorizes its use. If a profile isn’t found, the
application won’t open.
Disabling an Enterprise Application
If you need to disable an in-house application, you can do so by revoking the identity
used to sign the distribution provisioning profile. The application will no longer be able
to be installed, and if it’s already installed, it will no longer open.
Other Resources
For more information about creating applications and provisioning profiles, see:
 iPhone Developer Center at http://developer.apple.com/iphone/Appendix A Cisco VPN Server Configuration 67
A Cisco VPN Server Configuration
Use these guidelines to configure your Cisco VPN server for
use with iPhone, iPod touch and iPad.
Supported Cisco Platforms
iPhone OS supports Cisco ASA 5500 Security Appliances and PIX Firewalls configured
with 7.2.x software or later. The latest 8.0.x software release (or later) is recommended.
iPhone OS also supports Cisco IOS VPN routers with IOS version 12.4(15)T or later. VPN
3000 Series Concentrators don’t support iPhone VPN capabilities.
Authentication Methods
iPhone OS supports the following authentication methods:
 Pre-shared key IPSec authentication with user authentication via xauth
 Client and server certificates for IPSec authentication with optional user
authentication via xauth
 Hybrid authentication where the server provides a certificate and the client provides
a pre-shared key for IPSec authentication; user authentication is required via xauth.
 User authentication is provided via xauth and includes the following authentication
methods:
 User name with password
 RSA SecurID
 CryptoCard68 Appendix A Cisco VPN Server Configuration
Authentication Groups
The Cisco Unity protocol uses authentication groups to group users together based on
a common set of authentication and other parameters. You should create an
authentication group for iPhone OS device users. For pre-shared key and hybrid
authentication, the group name must be configured on the device with the group’s
shared secret (pre-shared key) as the group password.
When using certificate authentication, no shared secret is used and the user’s group is
determined based on fields in the certificate. The Cisco server settings can be used to
map fields in a certificate to user groups.
Certificates
When setting up and installing certificates, make sure of the following:
 The server identity certificate must contain the server’s DNS name and/or IP address
in the subject alternate name (SubjectAltName) field. The device uses this
information to verify that the certificate belongs to the server. You can specify the
SubjectAltName using wildcard characters for per-segment matching, such as
vpn.*.mycompany.com, for more flexibility. The DNS name can be put in the common
name field, if no SubjectAltName is specified.
 The certificate of the CA that signed the server’s certificate should be installed on the
device. If it isn’t a root certificate, install the rest of the trust chain so that the
certificate is trusted.
 If client certificates are used, make sure that the trusted CA certificate that signed the
client’s certificate is installed on the VPN server.
 The certificates and certificate authorities must be valid (not expired, for example.).
 Sending of certificate chains by the server isn’t supported and should be turned off.
 When using certificate-based authentication, make sure that the server is set up to
identify the user’s group based on fields in the client certificate. See “Authentication
Groups” on page 68.Appendix A Cisco VPN Server Configuration 69
IPSec Settings
Use the following IPSec settings:
 Mode: Tunnel Mode
 IKE Exchange Modes: Aggressive Mode for pre-shared key and hybrid authentication,
Main Mode for certificate authentication.
 Encryption Algorithms: 3DES, AES-128, AES-256
 Authentication Algorithms: HMAC-MD5, HMAC-SHA1
 Diffie Hellman Groups: Group 2 is required for pre-shared key and hybrid.
authentication. For certificate authentication, use Group 2 with 3DES and AES-128.
Use Group 2 or 5 with AES-256.
 PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy): For IKE phase 2, if PFS is used the Diffie-Hellman group
must be the same as was used for IKE phase 1.
 Mode Configuration: Must be enabled.
 Dead Peer Detection: Recommended.
 Standard NAT Transversal: Supported and can be enabled if desired. (IPSec over TCP
isn’t supported).
 Load Balancing: Supported and can be enabled if desired.
 Re-keying of Phase 1: Not currently supported. Recommend that re-keying times on
the server be set to approximately one hour.
 ASA Address Mask: Make sure that all device address pool masks are either not set,
or are set to 255.255.255.255. For example:
asa(config-webvpn)# ip local pool vpn_users 10.0.0.1-10.0.0.254 mask
255.255.255.255.
When using the recommended address mask, some routes assumed by the VPN
configuration might be ignored. To avoid this, make sure that your routing table
contains all necessary routes and verify that the subnet addresses are accessible
before deployment.
Other Supported Features
iPhone, iPod touch, and iPad support the following features:
 Application Version: The client software version is sent to the server, allowing the
server to accept or reject connections based on the device’s software version.
 Banner: The banner, if configured on the server, is displayed on the device and the
user must accept it or disconnect.
 Split Tunnel: Split tunneling is supported.
 Split DNS: Split DNS is supported.
 Default Domain: Default domain is supported.70
B Appendix
B Configuration Profile Format
This appendix specifies the format of mobileconfig files for
those who want to create their own tools.
This document assumes that you’re familiar with the Apple XML DTD and the general
property list format. A general description of the Apple plist format is available at
www.apple.com/DTDs/PropertyList-1.0.dtd. To get started, use iPhone Configuration
Utility to create a skeleton file that you can modify using the information in this
appendix.
This document uses the terms payload and profile. A profile is the whole file that
configures certain (single or multiple) settings on iPhone, iPod touch, or iPad. A
payload is an individual component of the profile file.
Root Level
At the root level, the configuration file is a dictionary with the following key/value pairs:
Key Value
PayloadVersion Number, mandatory. The version of the whole configuration
profile file. This version number designates the format of the
whole profile, not the individual payloads.
PayloadUUID String, mandatory. This is usually a synthetically generated
unique identifier string. The exact content of this string is
irrelevant; however, it must be globally unique. On Mac OS X,
you can generate UUIDs with /usr/bin/uuidgen.
PayloadType String, mandatory. Currently, only “Configuration” is a valid value
for this key.
PayloadOrganization String, optional. This value describes the issuing organization of
the profile, as displayed to the user.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 71
Payload Content
The PayloadContent array is an array of dictionaries, where each dictionary describes an
individual payload of the profile. Each functional profile has at least one or more entries
in this array. Each dictionary in this array has a few common properties, regardless of
the payload type. Others are specialized and unique to each payload type.
PayloadIdentifier String, mandatory. This value is by convention a dot-delimited
string uniquely describing the profile, such as
“com.myCorp.iPhone.mailSettings” or
“edu.myCollege.students.vpn”. This is the string by which profiles
are differentiated—if a profile is installed which matches the
identifier of another profile, it overrides it (instead of being
added).
PayloadDisplayName String, mandatory. This value determines a very short string to
be displayed to the user describing the profile, such as “VPN
Settings”. It does not have to be unique.
PayloadDescription String, optional. This value determines what descriptive, freeform text will be shown to the user on the Detail screen for the
entire profile. This string should clearly identify the profile so the
user can decide whether to install it.
PayloadContent Array, optional. This value is the actual content of the profile.
If it is omitted, the whole profile has no functional meaning.
PayloadRemovalDisallowed Boolean, optional. Default is No. If set, the user won’t be able to
delete the profile. A profile with this set can be updated via USB
or web/email only if the profile identifier matches and is signed
by the same authority. If a removal password is provided, the
profile can be deleted by specifying the password.
With signed and encrypted profiles, having this locking bit in
plain view is without consequence because the profile can’t be
altered and this setting is also shown on the device.
Key Value
Key Value
PayloadVersion Number, mandatory. The version of the individual payload.
Each profile can consist of payloads with different version numbers.
For instance, the VPN version number can be incremented at a
point in the future while the Mail version number would not.
PayloadUUID String, mandatory. This is usually a synthetically generated unique
identifier string. The exact content of this string is irrelevant;
however, it must be globally unique.
PayloadType String, mandatory. This key/value pair determines the type of the
individual payload within the profile.
PayloadOrganization String, optional. This value describes the issuing organization of the
profile, as it will be shown to the user. It can be, but doesn’t have to
be, the same as the root level PayloadOrganization.72 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format
Profile Removal Password Payload
The Removal Password payload is designated by the
com.apple.profileRemovalPassword value of PayloadType. It’s purpose is to encode the
password that allows users to remove a configuration profile from the device. If this
payload is present, and has a password value set, the device will ask for the password
when the user taps a profile’s Remove button. This payload is encrypted with the rest of
the profile.
Passcode Policy Payload
The Passcode Policy payload is designated by the
com.apple.mobiledevice.passwordpolicy PayloadType value. The presence of this
payload type prompts device to present the user with an alphanumeric passcode entry
mechanism, which allows the entry of arbitrarily long and complex passcodes.
In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following:
PayloadIdentifier String, mandatory. This value is by convention a dot-delimited
string uniquely describing the payload. It’s usually the root
PayloadIdentifier with an appended subidentifier, describing the
particular payload.
PayloadDisplayName String, mandatory. This value is a very short string displayed to the
user which describes the profile, such as “VPN Settings”. It does not
have to be unique.
PayloadDescription String, optional. This value determines what descriptive, free-form
text is displayed on the Detail screen for this particular payload.
Key Value
Key Value
RemovalPassword String, optional. Specifies the removal password for the profile.
Key Value
allowSimple Boolean, optional. Default YES. Determines whether a simple
passcode is allowed. A simple passcode is defined as containing
repeated characters, or increasing/decreasing characters (such
as 123 or CBA). Setting this value to “NO” is synonymous to
setting minComplexChars to “1”.
forcePIN Boolean, optional. Default NO. Determines whether the user is
forced to set a PIN. Simply setting this value (and not others)
forces the user to enter a passcode, without imposing a length
or quality. Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 73
Email Payload
The email payload is designated by the com.apple.mail.managed PayloadType value.
This payload creates an email account on the device. In addition to the settings
common to all payloads, this payload defines the following:
maxFailedAttempts Number, optional. Default 11. Allowed range [2...11]. Specifies the
number of allowed failed attempts to enter the passcode at the
device’s lock screen. Once this number is exceeded, the device is
locked and must be connected to its designated iTunes in order
to be unlocked.
maxInactivity Number, optional. Default Infinity. Specifies the number of
minutes for which the device can be idle (without being
unlocked by the user) before it’s locked by the system. Once this
limit is reached, the device is locked and the passcode must be
entered.
maxPINAgeInDays Number, optional. Default Infinity. Specifies the number of days
for which the passcode can remain unchanged. After this
number of days, the user is forced to change the passcode
before the device is unlocked.
minComplexChars Number, optional. Default 0. Specifies the minimum number of
complex characters that a passcode must contain. A “complex”
character is a character other than a number or a letter, such as
&%$#.
minLength Number, optional. Default 0. Specifies the minimum overall
length of the passcode. This parameter is independent of the
also optional minComplexChars argument.
requireAlphanumeric Boolean, optional. Default NO. Specifies whether the user must
enter alphabetic characters (“abcd”), or if numbers are sufficient.
pinHistory Number, optional. When the user changes the passcode, it has
to be unique within the last N entries in the history. Minimum
value is 1, maximum value is 50.
manualFetchingWhenRoaming Boolean, optional. If set, all push operations will be disabled
when roaming. The user has to manually fetch new data.
maxGracePeriod Number, optional. The maximum grace period, in minutes, to
unlock the phone without entering a passcode. Default is 0,
that is no grace period, which requires a passcode immediately.
Key Value
Key Value
EmailAccountDescription String, optional. A user-visible description of the email account,
shown in the Mail and Settings applications.
EmailAccountName String, optional. The full user name for the account. This is the
user name in sent messages, etc.74 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format
EmailAccountType String, mandatory. Allowed values are EmailTypePOP and
EmailTypeIMAP. Defines the protocol to be used for that
account.
EmailAddress String, mandatory. Designates the full email address for the
account. If not present in the payload, the device prompts for
this string during profile installation.
IncomingMailServerAuthentication String, mandatory. Designates the authentication scheme for
incoming mail. Allowed values are EmailAuthPassword and
EmailAuthNone.
IncomingMailServerHostName String, mandatory. Designates the incoming mail server host
name (or IP address).
IncomingMailServerPortNumber Number, optional. Designates the incoming mail server port
number. If no port number is specified, the default port for a
given protocol is used.
IncomingMailServerUseSSL Boolean, optional. Default Yes. Designates whether the incoming
mail server uses SSL for authentication.
IncomingMailServerUsername String, mandatory. Designates the user name for the email
account, usually the same as the email address up to the @
character. If not present in the payload, and the account is set
up to require authentication for incoming email, the device will
prompt for this string during profile installation.
IncomingPassword String, optional. Password for the Incoming Mail Server. Use only
with encrypted profiles.
OutgoingPassword String, optional. Password for the Outgoing Mail Server. Use only
with encrypted profiles.
OutgoingPasswwordSameAsIncomi
ngPassword
Boolean, optional. If set, the user will be prompted for the
password only once and it will be used for both outgoing and
incoming mail.
OutgoingMailServerAuthentication String, mandatory. Designates the authentication scheme for
outgoing mail. Allowed values are EmailAuthPassword and
EmailAuthNone.
OutgoingMailServerHostName String, mandatory. Designates the outgoing mail server host
name (or IP address).
OutgoingMailServerPortNumber Number, optional. Designates the outgoing mail server port
number. If no port number is specified, ports 25, 587 and 465
are used, in this order.
OutgoingMailServerUseSSL Boolean, optional. Default Yes. Designates whether the outgoing
mail server uses SSL for authentication.
OutgoingMailServerUsername String, mandatory. Designates the user name for the email
account, usually the same as the email address up to the @
character. If not present in the payload, and the account is set
up to require authentication for outgoing email, the device
prompts for this string during profile installation.
Key ValueAppendix B Configuration Profile Format 75
Web Clip Payload
The Web Clip payload is designated by the com.apple.webClip.managed PayloadType
value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the
following:
Restrictions Payload
The Restrictions payload is designated by the com.apple.applicationaccess PayloadType
value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the
following:
Key Value
URL String, mandatory. The URL that the Web Clip should open when
clicked. The URL must begin with HTTP or HTTPS or it won’t work.
Label String, mandatory. The name of the Web Clip as displayed on the
Home screen.
Icon Data, optional. A PNG icon to be shown on the Home screen.
Should be 59 x 60 pixels in size. If not specified, a white square will
be shown.
IsRemovable Boolean, optional. If No, the user cannot remove the Web Clip,
but it will be removed if the profile is deleted.
Key Value
allowAppInstallation Boolean, optional. When false, the App Store is disabled and its
icon is removed from the Home screen. Users are unable to install
or update their applications.
allowCamera Boolean, optional. When false, the camera is completely disabled
and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users are unable to
take photographs.
allowExplicitContent Boolean, optional. When false, explicit music or video content
purchased from the iTunes Store is hidden. Explicit content is
marked as such by content providers, such as record labels, when
sold through the iTunes Store.
allowScreenShot Boolean, optional. When false, users are unable to save a
screenshot of the display.
allowYouTube Boolean, optional. When false, the YouTube application is disabled
and its icon is removed from the Home screen.
allowiTunes Boolean, optional. When false, the iTunes Music Store is disabled
and its icon is removed from the Home screen. Users cannot
preview, purchase, or download content.
allowSafari Boolean, optional. When false, the Safari web browser application is
disabled and its icon removed from the Home screen. This also
prevents users from opening web clips.76 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format
LDAP Payload
The LDAP payload is designated by the com.apple.ldap.account PayloadType value.
There’s a one-to-many relationship from LDAP Account to LDAPSearchSettings. Think of
LDAP as a tree. Each SearchSettings object represents a node in the tree to start the
search at, and what scope to search for (node, node+1 level of children, node + all
levels of children). In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload
defines the following:
CalDAV Payload
The CalDAV payload is designated by the com.apple.caldav.account PayloadType value.
In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following:
Key Value
LDAPAccountDescription String, optional. Description of the account.
LDAPAccountHostName String, mandatory. The host.
LDAPAccountUseSSL Boolean, mandatory. Whether or not to use SSL.
LDAPAccountUserName String, optional. The username.
LDAPAccountPassword String, optional. Use only with encrypted profiles.
LDAPSearchSettings Top level container object. Can have many of these for one
account. Should have at least one for the account to be useful.
LDAPSearchSettingDescription String, optional. Description of this search setting.
LDAPSearchSettingSearchBase String, required. Conceptually, the path to the node to start a
search at “ou=people,o=example corp”
LDAPSearchSettingScope String, required. Defines what recursion to use in the search.
Can be one of the following 3 values:
LDAPSearchSettingScopeBase: Just the immediate node pointed to
by SearchBase
LDAPSearchSettingScopeOneLevel: The node plus its immediate
children.
LDAPSearchSettingScopeSubtree: The node plus all children,
regardless of depth.
Key Value
CalDAVAccountDescription String, optional. Description of the account.
CalDAVHostName String, mandatory. The server address
CalDAVUsername String, mandatory. The user’s login name.
CalDAVPassword String, optional. The user’s password
CalDAVUseSSL Boolean, mandatory. Whether or not to use SSL.
CalDAVPort Number, optional. The port on which to connect to the server.
CalDAVPrincipalURL String, optional. The base URL to the user’s calendar.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 77
Calendar Subscription Payload
The CalSub payload is designated by the com.apple.subscribedcalendar.account
PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload
defines the following:
SCEP Payload
The SCEP (Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol) payload is designated by the
com.apple.encrypted-profile-service PayloadType value. In addition to the settings
common to all payloads, this payload defines the following:
Key Value
SubCalAccountDescription String, optional. Description of the account.
SubCalAccountHostName String, mandatory. The server address.
SubCalAccountUsername String, optional. The user’s login name
SubCalAccountPassword String, optional. The user’s password.
SubCalAccountUseSSL Boolean, mandatory. Whether or not to use SSL.
Key Value
URL String, mandatory.
Name String, optional. any string which is understood by the SCEP
server. For example, it could be a domain name like
example.org. If a certificate authority has multiple CA certificates
this field can be used to distinguish which is required.
Subject Array, optional. The representation of a X.500 name represented
as an array of OID and value. For example, /C=US/O=Apple Inc./
CN=foo/1.2.5.3=bar, which would translate to:
[ [ [“C”, “US”] ], [ [“O”, “Apple Inc.”] ], ..., [ [ “1.2.5.3”, “bar” ] ] ]
OIDs can be represented as dotted numbers, with shortcuts for
C, L, ST, O, OU, CN (country, locality, state, organization,
organizational unit, common name).
Challenge String, optional. A pre-shared secret.
Keysize Number, optional. The keysize in bits, either 1024 or 2048.
Key Type String, optional. Currently always “RSA”.
Key Usage Number, optional. A bitmask indicating the use of the key. 1 is
signing, 4 is encryption, 5 is both signing and encryption. Some
CAs, such as Windows CA, support only encryption or signing,
but not both at the same time.78 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format
SubjectAltName Dictionary Keys
The SCEP payload can specify an optional SubjectAltName dictionary that provides
values required by the CA for issuing a certificate. You can specify a single string or an
array of strings for each key. The values you specify depend on the CA you’re using, but
might include DNS name, URL, or email values. For an example, see “Sample Phase 3
Server Response With SCEP Specifications” on page 85.
GetCACaps Dictionary Keys
If you add a dictionary with the key GetCACaps, the device uses the strings you provide
as the authoritative source of information about the capabilities of your CA. Otherwise,
the device queries the CA for GetCACaps and uses the answer it gets in response. If the
CA doesn’t respond, the device defaults to GET 3DES and SHA-1 requests.
APN Payload
The APN (Access Point Name) payload is designated by the com.apple.apn.managed
PayloadType value. In addition to the settings common to all payloads, this payload
defines the following:
Key Value
DefaultsData Dictionary, mandatory. This dictionary contains two key/value
pairs.
DefaultsDomainName String, mandatory. The only allowed value is
com.apple.managedCarrier.
apns Array, mandatory. This array contains an arbitrary number of
dictionaries, each describing an APN configuration, with the
key/value pairs below.
apn String, mandatory. This string specifies the Access Point Name.
username String, mandatory. This string specifies the user name for this
APN. If it’s missing, the device prompts for it during profile
installation.
password Data, optional. This data represents the password for the user for
this APN. For obfuscation purposes, it’s encoded. If it’s missing
from the payload, the device prompts for it during profile
installation.
proxy String, optional. The IP address or URL of the APN proxy.
proxyPort Number, optional. The port number of the APN proxy.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 79
Exchange Payload
The Exchange payload is designated by the com.apple.eas.account PayloadType value.
This payload creates a Microsoft Exchange account on the device. In addition to the
settings common to all payloads, this payload defines the following:
VPN Payload
The VPN payload is designated by the com.apple.vpn.managed PayloadType value.
In addition to the settings common to all payload types, the VPN payload defines the
following keys.
There are two possible dictionaries present at the top level, under the keys “PPP” and
“IPSec”. The keys inside these two dictionaries are described below, along with the
VPNType value under which the keys are used.
Key Value
EmailAddress String, mandatory. If not present in the payload, the device
prompts for this string during profile installation. Specifies the
full email address for the account.
Host String, mandatory. Specifies the Exchange server host name
(or IP address).
SSL Boolean, optional. Default YES. Specifies whether the Exchange
server uses SSL for authentication.
UserName String, mandatory. This string specifies the user name for this
Exchange account. If missing, the devices prompts for it during
profile installation.
Password String, optional. The password of the account. Use only with
encrypted profiles.
Certificate Optional. For accounts that allow authentication via certificate,
a .p12 identity certificate in NSData blob format.
CertificateName String, Optional. Specifies the name or description of the
certificate.
CertificatePassword Optional. The password necessary for the p12 identity certificate.
Use only with encrypted profiles.
Key Value
UserDefinedName String. Description of the VPN connection displayed on the
device.
OverridePrimary Boolean. Specifies whether to send all traffic through the VPN
interface. If true, all network traffic is sent over VPN.
VPNType String. Determines the settings available in the payload for this
type of VPN connection. It can have three possible
values: “L2TP”, “PPTP”, or “IPSec”, representing L2TP, PPTP and
Cisco IPSec respectively.80 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format
PPP Dictionary Keys
The following elements are for VPN payloads of type PPP.
IPSec Dictionary Keys
The following elements are for VPN payloads of type IPSec.
Key Value
AuthName String. The VPN account user name. Used for L2TP and PPTP.
AuthPassword String, optional. Only visible if TokenCard is false. Used for L2TP
and PPTP.
TokenCard Boolean. Whether to use a token card such as an RSA SecurID
card for connecting. Used for L2TP.
CommRemoteAddress String. IP address or host name of VPN server. Used for L2TP and
PPTP.
AuthEAPPlugins Array. Only present if RSA SecurID is being used, in which case
it has one entry, a string with value “EAP-RSA”. Used for L2TP
and PPTP.
AuthProtocol Array. Only present if RSA SecurID is being used, in which case it
has one entry, a string with value “EAP”. Used for L2TP and PPTP.
CCPMPPE40Enabled Boolean. See discussion under CCPEnabled. Used for PPTP.
CCPMPPE128Enabled Boolean. See discussion under CCPEnabled. Used for PPTP.
CCPEnabled Boolean. Enables encryption on the connection. If this key and
CCPMPPE40Enabled are true, represents automatic encryption
level; if this key and CCPMPPE128Enabled are true, represents
maximum encryption level. If no encryption is used, then none
of the CCP keys are true. Used for PPTP.
Key Value
RemoteAddress String. IP address or host name of the VPN server. Used for Cisco
IPSec.
AuthenticationMethod String. Either “SharedSecret” or “Certificate”. Used for L2TP and
Cisco IPSec.
XAuthName String. User name for VPN account. Used for Cisco IPSec.
XAuthEnabled Integer. 1 if XAUTH is ON, 0 if it’s OFF. Used for Cisco IPSec.
LocalIdentifier String. Present only if AuthenticationMethod = SharedSecret.
The name of the group to use. If Hybrid Authentication is used,
the string must end with “[hybrid]”. Used for Cisco IPSec.
LocalIdentifierType String. Present only if AuthenticationMethod = SharedSecret.
The value is “KeyID”. Used for L2TP and Cisco IPSec.
SharedSecret Data. The shared secret for this VPN account. Only present if
AuthenticationMethod = SharedSecret. Used for L2TP and Cisco
IPSec.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 81
Wi-Fi Payload
The Wi-Fi payload is designated by the com.apple.wifi.managed PayloadType value.
This describes version 0 of the PayloadVersion value. In addition to the settings
common to all payload types, the payload defines the following keys.
For 802.1X enterprise networks, the EAP Client Configuration Dictionary must be
provided.
PayloadCertificateUUID String. The UUID of the certificate to use for the account
credentials. Only present if AuthenticationMethod = Certificate.
Used for Cisco IPSec.
PromptForVPNPIN Boolean. Whether to prompt for a PIN when connecting.
Used for Cisco IPSec.
Key Value
Key Value
SSID_STR String. SSID of the Wi-Fi network to be used.
HIDDEN_NETWORK Boolean. Besides SSID, the device uses information such as
broadcast type and encryption type to differentiate a network.
By default, it’s assumed that all configured networks are open or
broadcast. To specify a hidden network, you need to include a
boolean for the key “HIDDEN_NETWORK”.
EncryptionType String. The possible values for “EncryptionType” are “WEP”, “WPA”,
or “Any”. “WPA” corresponds to WPA and WPA2 and applies to
both encryption types. Make sure that these values exactly
match the capabilities of the network access point. If you’re
unsure about the encryption type, or would prefer that it applies
to all encryption types, use the value “Any”.
Password String, optional. The absence of a password doesn’t prevent the
network from being added to the list of known networks. The
user is eventually prompted to provide the password when
connecting to that network.82 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format
EAPClientConfiguration Dictionary
In addition to the standard encryption types, it’s possible to specify an enterprise
profile for a given network via the “EAPClientConfiguration” key. If present, its value is a
dictionary with the following keys.
Key Value
UserName String, optional. Unless you know the exact user name, this
property won’t appear in an imported configuration. Users can
enter this information when they authenticate.
AcceptEAPTypes Array of integer values. These EAP types are accepted:
13 = TLS
17 = LEAP
21 = TTLS
25 = PEAP
43 = EAP-FAST
PayloadCertificateAnchorUUID Array of strings, optional. Identifies the certificates to be trusted
for this authentication. Each entry must contain the UUID of a
certificate payload. Use this key to prevent the device from
asking the user if the listed certificates are trusted.
Dynamic trust (the certificate dialogue) is disabled if this
property is specified, unless TLSAllowTrustExceptions is also
specified with the value true.
TLSTrustedServerNames Array of string values, optional. This is the list of server certificate
common names that will be accepted. You can use wildcards to
specify the name, such as wpa.*.example.com. If a server
presents a certificate that isn’t in this list, it won’t be trusted.
Used alone or in combination with TLSTrustedCertificates, the
property allows someone to carefully craft which certificates to
trust for the given network, and avoid dynamically trusted
certificates.
Dynamic trust (the certificate dialogue) is disabled if this
property is specified, unless TLSAllowTrustExceptions is also
specified with the value true.
TLSAllowTrustExceptions Boolean, optional. Allows/disallows a dynamic trust decision by
the user. The dynamic trust is the certificate dialogue that
appears when a certificate isn’t trusted. If this is false, the
authentication fails if the certificate isn’t already trusted. See
PayloadCertificateAnchorUUID and TLSTrustedNames above.
The default value of this property is true unless either
PayloadCertificateAnchorUUID or TLSTrustedServerNames is
supplied, in which case the default value is false.Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 83
EAP-Fast Support
The EAP-FAST module uses the following properties in the EAPClientConfiguration
dictionary.
These keys are hierarchical in nature: if EAPFASTUsePAC is false, the other two
properties aren’t consulted. Similarly, if EAPFASTProvisionPAC is false,
EAPFASTProvisionPACAnonymously isn’t consulted.
If EAPFASTUsePAC is false, authentication proceeds much like PEAP or TTLS: the server
proves its identity using a certificate each time.
If EAPFASTUsePAC is true, then an existing PAC is used if it’s present. The only way to
get a PAC on the device currently is to allow PAC provisioning. So, you need to enable
EAPFASTProvisionPAC, and if desired, EAPFASTProvisionPACAnonymously.
EAPFASTProvisionPACAnonymously has a security weakness: it doesn’t authenticate the
server so connections are vulnerable to a man-in-the-middle attack.
Certificates
As with VPN configurations, it’s possible to associate a certificate identity configuration
with a Wi-Fi configuration. This is useful when defining credentials for a secure
enterprise network. To associate an identity, specify its payload UUID via the
“PayloadCertificateUUID” key.
TTLSInnerAuthentication String, optional. This is the inner authentication used by the
TTLS module. The default value is “MSCHAPv2”.
Possible values are “PAP”, “CHAP”, “MSCHAP”, and “MSCHAPv2”.
OuterIdentity String, optional. This key is only relevant to TTLS, PEAP, and EAPFAST.
This allows the user to hide his or her identity. The user’s actual
name appears only inside the encrypted tunnel. For example,
it could be set to “anonymous” or “anon”, or
“anon@mycompany.net”.
It can increase security because an attacker can’t see the
authenticating user’s name in the clear.
Key Value
Key Value
EAPFASTUsePAC Boolean, optional.
EAPFASTProvisionPAC Boolean, optional.
EAPFASTProvisionPACAnonymously Boolean, optional.
Key Value
PayloadCertificateUUID String. UUID of the certificate payload to use for the identity
credential.84 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format
Sample Configuration Profiles
This section includes sample profiles that illustrate the over-the-air enrollment and
configuration phases. These are excerpts and your requirements will vary from the
examples. For syntax assistance, see the details provided earlier in this appendix. For a
description of each phase, see “Over-the-Air Enrollment and Configuration” on page 22.
Sample Phase 1 Server Response
PayloadContent
URL
https://profileserver.example.com/iphone
DeviceAttributes
UDID
IMEI
ICCID
VERSION
PRODUCT
Challenge
optional challenge
or
base64-encoded
PayloadOrganization
Example Inc.
PayloadDisplayName
Profile Service
PayloadVersion
1
PayloadUUID
fdb376e5-b5bb-4d8c-829e-e90865f990c9
PayloadIdentifier
com.example.mobileconfig.profile-service
PayloadDescription
Enter device into the Example Inc encrypted profile service
string>
PayloadType
Profile Service
Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 85
Sample Phase 2 Device Response
UDID
VERSION
7A182
MAC_ADDRESS_EN0
00:00:00:00:00:00
CHALLENGE
either:
String
or:
"base64 encoded data"
Sample Phase 3 Server Response With SCEP Specifications
PayloadVersion
1
PayloadUUID
Ignored
PayloadType
Configuration
PayloadIdentifier
Ignored
PayloadContent
PayloadContent
URL
https://scep.example.com/scep
Name
EnrollmentCAInstance
Subject
86 Appendix B Configuration Profile Format
O
Example, Inc.
CN
User Device Cert
Challenge
...
Keysize
1024
Key Type
RSA
Key Usage
5
PayloadDescription
Provides device encryption identity
PayloadUUID
fd8a6b9e-0fed-406f-9571-8ec98722b713
PayloadType
com.apple.security.scep
PayloadDisplayName
Encryption Identity
PayloadVersion
1
PayloadOrganization
Example, Inc.
PayloadIdentifier
com.example.profileservice.scep
Appendix B Configuration Profile Format 87
Sample Phase 4 Device Response
UDID
VERSION
7A182
MAC_ADDRESS_EN0
00:00:00:00:00:00
88
C Appendix
C Sample Scripts
This appendix provides sample scripts for iPhone OS
deployment tasks.
The scripts in this section should be modified to fit your needs and configurations.
Sample C# Script for iPhone Configuration Utility
This sample script demonstrates creating configuration files using iPhone Configuration
Utility for Windows.
using System;
using Com.Apple.iPCUScripting;
public class TestScript : IScript
{
private IApplication _host;
public TestScript()
{
}
public void main(IApplication inHost)
{
_host = inHost;
string msg = string.Format("# of config profiles : {0}",
_host.ConfigurationProfiles.Count);
Console.WriteLine(msg);
IConfigurationProfile profile = _host.AddConfigurationProfile();
profile.Name = "Profile Via Script";
profile.Identifier = "com.example.configviascript";
profile.Organization = "Example Org";
profile.Description = "This is a configuration profile created via the
new scripting feature in iPCU";
// passcode
IPasscodePayload passcodePayload = profile.AddPasscodePayload();
passcodePayload.PasscodeRequired = true;Appendix C Sample Scripts 89
passcodePayload.AllowSimple = true;
// restrictions
IRestrictionsPayload restrictionsPayload =
profile.AddRestrictionsPayload();
restrictionsPayload.AllowYouTube = false;
// wi-fi
IWiFiPayload wifiPayload = profile.AddWiFiPayload();
wifiPayload.ServiceSetIdentifier = "Example Wi-Fi";
wifiPayload.EncryptionType = WirelessEncryptionType.WPA;
wifiPayload.Password = "password";
wifiPayload = profile.AddWiFiPayload();
profile.RemoveWiFiPayload(wifiPayload);
// vpn
IVPNPayload vpnPayload = profile.AddVPNPayload();
vpnPayload.ConnectionName = "Example VPN Connection";
vpnPayload = profile.AddVPNPayload();
profile.RemoveVPNPayload(vpnPayload);
// email
IEmailPayload emailPayload = profile.AddEmailPayload();
emailPayload.AccountDescription = "Email Account 1 Via Scripting";
emailPayload = profile.AddEmailPayload();
emailPayload.AccountDescription = "Email Account 2 Via Scripting";
// exchange
IExchangePayload exchangePayload = profile.AddExchangePayload();
exchangePayload.AccountName = "ExchangePayloadAccount";
// ldap
ILDAPPayload ldapPayload = profile.AddLDAPPayload();
ldapPayload.Description = "LDAP Account 1 Via Scripting";
ldapPayload = profile.AddLDAPPayload();
ldapPayload.Description = "LDAP Account 2 Via Scripting";
// webclip
IWebClipPayload wcPayload = profile.AddWebClipPayload();
wcPayload.Label = "Web Clip 1 Via Scripting";
wcPayload = profile.AddWebClipPayload();
wcPayload.Label = "Web Clip 2 Via Scripting";
}
}90 Appendix C Sample Scripts
Sample AppleScript for iPhone Configuration Utility
This sample script demonstrates creating configuration files using iPhone Configuration
Utility for Mac OS X.
tell application "iPhone Configuration Utility"
log (count of every configuration profile)
set theProfile to make new configuration profile with properties
{displayed name:"Profile Via Script", profile
identifier:"com.example.configviascript", organization:"Example Org.",
account description:"This is a configuration profile created via
AppleScript"}
tell theProfile
make new passcode payload with properties {passcode required:true,
simple value allowed:true}
make new restrictions payload with properties {YouTube allowed:false}
make new WiFi payload with properties {service set identifier:"Example
Wi-Fi", security type:WPA, password:"password"}
set theWiFiPayload to make new WiFi payload
delete theWiFiPayload
make new VPN payload with properties {connection name:"Example VPN
Connection"}
set theVPNPayload to make new VPN payload
delete theVPNPayload
make new email payload with properties {account description:"Email
Account 1 Via Scripting"}
make new email payload with properties {account description:"Email
Account 2 Via Scripting"}
make new Exchange ActiveSync payload with properties {account
name:"ExchangePayloadAccount"}
make new LDAP payload with properties {account description:"LDAP
Account 1 Via Scripting"}
make new LDAP payload with properties {account description:"LDAP
Account 2 Via Scripting"}
make new web clip payload with properties {label:"Web Clip Account 1
Via Scripting"}
make new web clip payload with properties {label:"Web Clip Account 2
Via Scripting"}
end tell
end tell
iMovie ’08
Premiers contacts
Familiarisez vous avec iMovie et
révolutionnez la manière dont vous lisez,
visualisez, stockez et partagez vos vidéos.2
1 Table des matières
Chapitre 1 4 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08
5 L’Interface iMovie
5 Une bibliothèque vidéo source unique
6 Exploration et lecture de votre vidéo
6 Création de diaporamas vidéo
6 À propos des formats de fichier vidéo
7 Éléments retenus
8 Avant de commencer
8 Éléments requis
Chapitre 2 9 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
9 Étape 1 : importez une séquence dans iMovie
10 Identification du type de votre caméra et importation de séquences vidéo
20 Étape 2 : organisez votre vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo
20 À propos des événements iMovie
22 Affichage de votre vidéo source.
25 Sélection de la vidéo source
26 Marquage de la vidéo comme favorite ou à supprimer
28 Tri (filtrage) de vidéo
29 Étape 3 : améliorez les images vidéo et réglez le volume sonore
29 Rognage d’images vidéo
31 Ajustement du volume des clips
33 Étape 4 : créez un projet iMovie
34 Création d’un projet iMovie
34 Ajout de vidéo à votre projet
36 Ajout de musique de fond à votre projet
38 Suppression des images indésirables dans les clips d’un projet
40 Affichage rapide des modifications
40 Ajout de transitions entre les clips d’un projet
42 Ajout de titres à votre projet
43 Ajout d’effets sonores et de commentaires à votre projet
45 Ajout de photos avec des effets d’animation
47 Étape 5 : partager votre film
48 Publication en vue d’un affichage sur votre iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV
48 Envoi de votre film terminé vers iDVD, iWeb ou d’autres applicationsTable des matières 3
49 Publication directe sur le web
51 Poursuivez votre exploration de iMovie
52 Ressources supplémentaires1
4
1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08
Voici iMovie ’08, un outil révolutionnaire pour profiter,
stocker et partager toutes vos vidéos personnelles.
Vous pouvez importer de la vidéo dans iMovie depuis une grande variété de sources et
d’appareils pour garder vos mémoires toujours à portée de main. Toutes ces séquences vidéo dont personne ne profite car elles restent dans votre appareil photo numérique ou dans votre caméscope ? Cette boîte pleine de disques et de bandes dans votre
armoire ? Ajoutez-les à votre bibliothèque de vidéos pour en profiter à tout moment.
Visionnez toutes vos vidéos personnelles sans avoir à déballer votre caméscope ou à le
brancher à votre ordinateur ou à votre télévision. Parcourez les événements qui marquent votre vie, un moment après l’autre, année après année, d’une personne à l’autre,
depuis un seul et même emplacement. iMovie facilite l’organisation et le classement de
vos vidéos, en vous permettant de séparer les meilleures des moins bonnes, et d’accé-
der facilement aux parties que vous recherchez.
Vous pouvez également créer des séquences rapides et simples, ajouter des titres à
la vidéo, des transitions de plan, une musique de fond, et des commentaires vocaux.
iMovie vous permet de partager avec vos proches vos vidéos sur le Web, sur votre
ordinateur, sur votre iPod, iPhone ou sur Apple TV.
Avant de suivre l’initiation qui débute dans le chapitre 2, lisez les sections suivantes
pour vous familiariser avec les concepts et les outils de lecture, d’organisation et de
manipulation de la vidéo d’iMovie. Même si vous avez utilisé les versions précédentes
d’iMovie ou d’autres applications de montage vidéo, vous tirerez profit des idées qui
font qu’iMovie ’08 est différent de ce que vous avez rencontré jusqu’à présent.Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 5
L’Interface iMovie
La fenêtre principale d’iMovie, ci-dessous, est la console à partir de laquelle vous visualisez, organisez et montez vos vidéos. Elle vous permet d’accéder directement à tous les
outils que vous pouvez utiliser pour manipuler vos vidéos.
Une bibliothèque vidéo source unique
Le fait d’importer toutes vos vidéos dans iMovie, quelle que soit leur source, permet de
créer une bibliothèque unique appelée bibliothèque vidéo. Dans cette bibliothèque,
sélectionnez simplement le nom d’un événement que vous avez enregistré et visualisez son contenu ; c’est aussi simple que d’ouvrir un livre et d’afficher ses pages. Regrouper toutes les vidéos d’un événement unique—vos dernières vacances, par exemple—
même si elles proviennent de sources différentes et sont enregistrées dans des formats
vidéos différents. Vous pouvez désormais accéder à toutes les vidéos en un simple clic.
Bibliothèque de Projet
Enumérez tous les projets iMovie que vous
avez créés.
Barre d’outils iMovie
La plupart des outils et
des commandes dont
vous avez besoin sont
disponibles à cet endroit.
Bibliothèque d’événements
Enumérez les noms de tous les
événements que vous avez enregistrés sur vidéo et assemblés
Vidéo source
Montre le contenu des événement
que vous avez sélectionnés dans
la Bibliothèque d’événements.
Projet iMovie
Assembler vos séquences, vos photos, votre
musique et plus encore pour créer des
vidéos que vous pouvez partager sur le
Web, sur votre iPod, ou sur Apple TV.
Visualiseur
Votre vidéo est
lue ici.6 Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08
Exploration et lecture de votre vidéo
Il n’a jamais été aussi facile de profiter de votre bibliothèque vidéo. Dès que vous sélectionnez un événement, votre vidéo est affichée sous la forme d’une pellicule cinématographique déroulée, ce qui vous permet de visualiser le contenu de chaque image du
film. Lorsque vous positionnez le pointeur sur les images, ces dernières se déplacent.
Ce « survol » de la vidéo vous permet de visionner un passage précis de façon instantanée sans avoir à rembobiner la bande, effectuer une avance rapide ou sélectionner et
lire des clips particuliers.
Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur la barre d’espace ou double-cliquez n’importe où dans
la vidéo pour commencer la lecture à vitesse normale.
Création de diaporamas vidéo
iMovie facilite la création de vidéos de meilleure qualité et plus rapides. La méthode
la plus simple pour créer une vidéo personnelle de qualité consiste à monter un
« diaporama vidéo », c’est-à-dire une succession de clips vidéo très courts et de durée
identique, reprenant uniquement les meilleurs extraits des vidéos qui se trouvent dans
votre bibliothèque. iMovie permet non seulement de réaliser ce diaporama vidéo pratiquement sans effort, mais aussi d’ajouter une musique de fond afin d’obtenir des
vidéos personnelles attrayantes et bien rythmées que vous pourrez montrer fièrement
à votre entourage.
À propos des formats de fichier vidéo
Vous pouvez à présent utiliser une multitude d’appareils vidéo pour filmer dans tous
les endroits où vous vous rendez. Le caméscope s’est ouvert à de nouveaux formats
pour enregistrer sur mini-DVD, disque dur, ou carte mémoire Flash. Même la plupart
des appareils photo numériques peuvent enregistrer des vidéos, ainsi que de nombreux autres appareils portables. De plus, chacun de ces appareils peut enregistrer une
vidéo dans des formats de fichier vidéo différents. iMovie travaille avec la génération
émergente d’appareils enregistreur vidéo. Vous pouvez importer de la vidéo depuis
les sources suivantes dans votre bibliothèque vidéo iMovie :
Type d’appareil photo Support d’enregistrement Format de fichier vidéo
Caméscopes USB
(appareils à accès aléatoire, RAD)
Disque dur MPEG-2 et AVCHD
DVD (petit DVD de 8 cm)
Mémoire Flash (carte mémoire)
Caméscopes FireWire Cassette Mini DV DV (standard) et HDV
(Vidéo haute définition)
Appareil photo iSight Disque dur
(sur votre ordinateur)
Séquence QuickTimeChapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08 7
Outre les sources vidéo indiquées ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi ajouter des données
vidéo issues de fichiers de séquence stockés au préalable sur un disque dur (y compris
celles qui proviennent de projets créés dans iMovie HD).
Remarque : un processeur Intel est indispensable pour prendre en charge
la vidéo AVCHD. Pour en savoir plus sur les caméscopes AVCHD, consultez
la page www.apple.com/fr/ilife/systemrequirements.html.
Éléments retenus
Pour comprendre la manière d’importer la vidéo dans iMovie, puis de l’organiser, de la
trier et de la gérer, suivez l’initiation rapide qui débute au chapitre 2. Vous apprendrez
comment :
 importer la vidéo dans iMovie ;
 organiser votre vidéo en événements ;
 classer vos segments par ordre de préférence pour les retrouver facilement ;
 classer les segments que vous souhaitez supprimer ;
 améliorer le son de vos vidéos ;
 rogner l’arrière-plan pour créer un gros plan ;
 créer un diaporama vidéo ;
 ajouter une photo avec des effets panoramique et de zoom (l’effet Ken Burns) ;
 partager votre film une fois qu’il est terminé.
Appareils photo numériques Mémoire Flash MPEG-2, MPEG-4, etc.
Téléphones portables avec
appareil photo
(ajoutés automatiquement
via iPhoto)
Type d’appareil photo Support d’enregistrement Format de fichier vidéo8 Chapitre 1 Bienvenue dans iMovie ’08
Avant de commencer
Vous pouvez imprimer ce document avant de commencer ou laisser ce fichier PDF
ouvert sur votre bureau pendant que vous travaillez. Bien entendu, vous n’êtes pas
obligé de terminer cette initiation en une seule fois. Ignorez les parties qui ne vous inté-
ressent pas et concentrez-vous sur celles que vous voulez assimiler immédiatement.
Dans plusieurs tâches décrites dans ce guide et dans l’Aide iMovie, vous devrez choisir
des commandes de menu dans la barre des menus. Les commandes de menu se pré-
sentent de la façon suivante :
Choisissez Édition > Copier.
Le premier terme après Choisissez correspond au nom d’un menu dans la barre des
menus d’iMovie. Le terme suivant est l’élément que vous choisissez dans ce menu.
Éléments requis
Pour terminer toutes les parties de cette initiation, vous devez disposer des éléments
suivants :
 Une vidéo numérique d’un des appareils énumérés dans le tableau de la page 6, ou
une vidéo présente sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou un disque dur externe
connecté à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble FireWire.
 Au moins plusieurs gigaoctets (Go) d’espace disponible sur le disque dur de votre
ordinateur ou sur un disque dur externe connecté par un câble FireWire. (L’espace
nécessaire dépend du format de fichier vidéo que vous utilisez. Vérifiez les instructions relatives à l’importation de vidéo depuis votre appareil enregistreur pour plus
d’informations.)
Si aucune vidéo n’est disponible, vous pouvez créer un diaporama à l’aide des photos
de votre bibliothèque iPhoto. Expérimentez et amusez-vous tout en vous familiarisant
avec iMovie.2
9
2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Importez des séquences de vos appareils vidéo les plus
récents et ressortez vos vieilles bandes des cartons.
Avec iMovie, vous pouvez importer, organiser, monter
vos séquences et redonner vie à vos souvenirs.
Ce guide d’initiation vous montrera comment importer votre vidéo dans iMovie, réorganiser votre Bibliothèque d’événements et lire et parcourir votre séquence vidéo.
Vous aurez également la possibilité de trouver et de repérer vos parties préférées pour
accéder à vos moments favoris et vous pourrez repérer les parties que vous voulez
supprimer. Vous allez ajuster la durée de votre vidéo en appliquant un Trim et la rogner,
créer un diaporama vidéo muni de titres, de transitions, de photos et de musique que
vous pourrez ensuite partager avec vos amis sur le web ou lire sur votre iPod ou un
téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) à l’aide de l’Apple TV.
Étape 1 : importez une séquence dans iMovie
Pour commencer à travailler sur votre séquence vidéo, vous devez d’abord la transférer
dans iMovie. L’importation de séquences vidéo dans iMovie ne les efface pas de votre
appareil d’enregistrement.
Au cours de cette opération, vous allez ouvrir iMovie et importer une séquence vidéo
d’un appareil d’enregistrement ou importer un fichier vidéo déjà stocké sur un disque
dur ; vous commencerez ensuite à créer votre vidéothèque.10 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour ouvrir iMovie :
m Double-cliquez sur l’icône iMovie dans votre dossier Applications ou cliquez sur l’icône
correspondante dans le Dock.
Lorsque vous ouvrez iMovie pour la première fois, la fenêtre iMovie ci-dessous s’affiche.
Identification du type de votre caméra et importation de séquences
vidéo
Il existe plusieurs méthodes d’importation de séquences vidéo dans iMovie. Suivez les
instructions correspondant à votre situation, puis passez à l’« Étape 2 : organisez votre
vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo » à la page 20.
 Si vous disposez d’un lecteur DVD, d’un disque dur ou d’un caméscope à mémoire
flash, consultez la page 11.
 Si votre séquence vidéo se trouve sur une bande d’un caméscope numérique équipé
d’une interface FireWire, consultez la page 14.
 Si vous avez des séquences vidéo dans votre photothèque iPhoto, consultez la page 16.
 Si vous voulez enregistrer une séquence vidéo directement dans iMovie, consultez
la page 17.
 Si votre séquence vidéo se trouve dans un ancien projet iMovie ou sur un disque dur,
consultez la page 18.
Affichez la liste de vos
projets dans la Bibliothè-
que de projets.
Importez et montez en
utilisant les boutons de
la barre d’outils iMovie.
Affichez la liste de vos événements dans la Bibliothèque
d’événements.
Parcourez votre vidéo source.
Créez votre projet.
Affichez votre séquence
vidéo dans ce visualiseur.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 11
Caméscopes DVD, HDD ou à mémoire Flash
Ces appareils sont connectés à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble USB. On les appelle
« appareils à accès aléatoire » (RAD, Random-Access Devices) parce qu’ils permettent
de sélectionner et d’importer des clips vidéo de manière aléatoire, ce qui évite d’avoir à
lire la vidéo pour l’importer, comme c’est le cas avec les caméscopes traditionnels qui
utilisent des cassettes.
Remarque : un processeur Intel est indispensable pour prendre en charge la vidéo
AVCHD. Pour en savoir plus sur les caméscopes AVCHD, consultez la page
www.apple.com/fr/ilife/systemrequirements.html.
Pour importer une séquence vidéo à partir d’un appareil à accès aléatoire :
1 Placez l’appareil en mode PC ou ordinateur, puis connectez-le à votre ordinateur à
l’aide d’un câble USB. (Pour obtenir des instructions sur cette connexion, reportez-vous
à la documentation fournie avec l’appareil.)
L’illustration ci-dessous montre comment connecter un caméscope à un iMac à l’aide
d’un câble USB.
Lorsque le caméscope est correctement connecté, la fenêtre Importer s’ouvre et affiche
tous les clips présents dans l’appareil.
La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre
lorsque votre appareil est
correctement connecté.12 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue
« Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de
séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence au
format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la
séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains
ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD
et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité
originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à
ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie).
Remarque : si vous utilisez un caméscope avec DVD, le branchement à votre Mac peut
entraîner l’ouverture du lecteur DVD. Dans ce cas, il vous suffit de le fermer.
2 Cliquez sur Importer tout pour importer tous les clips.
3 Dans le menu local Enregistrer dans, choisissez le disque dur sur lequel vous voulez
enregistrer la séquence vidéo importée.
Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV)
occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous
devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que
vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée
entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local.
4 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre
Bibliothèque d’événements :
 Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez « Ajouter à
l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement dans le menu local.
 Pour créer un nouvel événement, saisissez son nom dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »). Si vous souhaitez créer un
nouvel événement pour chaque date d’enregistrement de la vidéo, sélectionnez
« Créer un nouvel événement pour chaque jour ».
5 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local.
La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur un
téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si
vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou une autre,
vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire, choisissez
« Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au format : ».Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 13
6 Cliquez sur OK.
Selon la durée de votre vidéo, l’importation dans iMovie et la création de vignettes
pour chaque clip peut prendre de quelques minutes à plus d’une heure. La barre
de progression de la fenêtre Importation indique le clip en cours d’importation et
la vitesse à laquelle l’importation se déroule.
7 Une fois la séquence importée, éteignez votre caméscope et déconnectez-le de
l’ordinateur.
Importation d’une sélection de séquences vidéo à partir d’un appareil à accès
aléatoire :
Si vous ne souhaitez pas importer toutes les données vidéo qui se trouvent sur votre
appareil, vous avez la possibilité de sélectionner et d’importer uniquement les clips
vidéo qui vous intéressent. Vous pouvez utiliser les commandes de lecture sous le
visualiseur de la fenêtre Importer pour examiner les clips et sélectionner ceux que
vous voulez importer. Pour les besoins de ce guide d’initiation, il est préférable
d’importer de 10 à 15 minutes de vidéo comme base de travail.
Après avoir connecté votre appareil à votre ordinateur (voir ci-dessus), effectuez l’une
des actions suivantes.
Pour importer la plupart des clips vidéo :
1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel.
2 Désactivez les cases au-dessous des clips que vous ne souhaitez pas importer.
3 Cliquez sur Importer les clips cochés.
4 Ensuite, suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 3 à 6, à la page 12.
Pour importer seulement quelques clips vidéo :
1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel.
2 Cliquez sur Tout décocher.
3 Cochez les cases qui se trouvent sous les clips que vous souhaitez importer.
4 Cliquez sur Importer les clips cochés.
5 Ensuite, suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 3 à 6, à la page 12.
Une fois que l’importation de la vidéo est terminée, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection
qui se trouve près du menu local Caméra, puis éteignez le caméscope et déconnectez-le de l’ordinateur.14 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Caméscopes numériques équipés d’une interface FireWire
Si vous avez un caméscope DV ou HDV mini-DV que vous pouvez connecter à votre
ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire, vous importerez les séquences vidéo pendant leur lecture sur la bande.
Pour importer de la vidéo à partir d’un caméscope avec connexion FireWire :
1 Placez le caméscope en mode VTR (mode d’enregistrement sur bande vidéo que certains caméscopes appellent mode « Lecture » ou « VCR ») et allumez-le s’il ne le fait pas
automatiquement.
2 Connectez votre caméscope à votre ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble FireWire.
L’illustration ci-dessous montre comment connecter un caméscope à iMac à l’aide d’un
câble FireWire.
La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre lorsque la caméra est correctement connectée.
Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue
« Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de
séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence
au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la
séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains
ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD
et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité
originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à
ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie).
La fenêtre Importer s’ouvre
lorsque votre appareil est
correctement connecté.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 15
3 Assurez-vous que le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre est défini
sur Automatique.
4 Cliquez sur Importer.
5 Dans le menu local Enregistrement dans, choisissez le disque dur sur lequel vous
voulez enregistrer la séquence vidéo importée.
Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV)
occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous
devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que
vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée
entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local.
6 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre
Bibliothèque d’événements :
 Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez « Ajouter à
l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement dans le menu local.
 Pour créer un nouvel événement, saisissez son nom dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »). Si vous souhaitez créer un
nouvel événement pour chaque date d’enregistrement de la vidéo, sélectionnez
« Créer un nouvel événement pour chaque jour ».
7 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local.
La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur
un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou
une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire,
choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au
format : ».
8 Cliquez sur OK.
La bande de votre caméscope se rembobine automatiquement au début ; la vidéo
complète sur la bande est importée, puis la bande se rembobine à nouveau.
La bande est lue pendant l’importation. Vous pouvez regarder la vidéo pendant la
lecture (le son n’est lu que sur le caméscope) ou laisser votre ordinateur poursuivre
l’importation pendant que vous êtes ailleurs. Cela peut prendre plus de temps pour
importer la vidéo que pour la regarder. Après l’importation, iMovie prend quelques
minutes pour générer les vignettes de chaque clip vidéo.16 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
9 Une fois la séquence importée, vous pouvez éteindre votre caméscope et le déconnecter
de l’ordinateur.
Vidéo de votre photothèque iPhoto
Les séquences vidéo de votre appareil photo ou de votre téléphone que vous chargez
dans votre photothèque iPhoto sont automatiquement disponibles lorsque vous
ouvrez iMovie. Dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, sélectionnez Vidéos iPhoto, puis
l’événement que vous voulez. (Pour en savoir plus sur l’ajout de vidéo à votre photothèque iPhoto, ouvrez l’application iPhoto et consultez l’Aide iPhoto.)
Remarque : seuls les formats vidéo compatibles avec iMovie sont affichés dans
la Bibliothèque d’événements.
Importation d’une sélection de séquences vidéo à partir d’un caméscope FireWire
Si vous ne voulez pas importer la totalité du contenu de votre cassette, vous pouvez
choisir de n’importer que certaines séquences. Pour ce guide d’initiation, il est préférable d’importer au moins 10 à 15 minutes de vidéo sur laquelle vous pourrez travailler.
Après avoir connecté votre caméscope à votre ordinateur (voir ci-dessus), procédez
comme suit.
Pour importer une sélection de séquences vidéo :
1 Réglez le commutateur situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre Importer sur Manuel.
2 Servez-vous des commandes de lecture de la fenêtre Importer pour rembobiner,
effectuer une avance rapide ou visionner votre bande.
Lorsque vous avez fini d’examiner votre bande, rembobinez-la jusqu’à l’endroit à
partir duquel vous souhaitez commencer l’importation.
3 Cliquez sur Importer, puis suivez la procédure décrite dans les étapes 5 à 8, à la page 15.
La vidéo est importée à partir de l’endroit où vous l’avez arrêtée.
4 Cliquez sur Stop lorsque vous souhaitez arrêter l’importation. Chaque fois que vous
interrompez l’importation, iMovie prend quelques minutes pour créer des vignettes
de la vidéo importée.
5 Pour importer une autre vidéo, répétez les étapes 2 à 4 décrites ci-dessus.
6 Lorsque l’importation de la vidéo est terminée, vous pouvez éteindre votre
caméscope et le déconnecter de l’ordinateur.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 17
Enregistrement de séquences vidéo directement dans iMovie
Si votre Mac est équipé d’une webcam iSight intégrée, ou si vous connectez une
iSight, une autre webcam compatible ou un caméscope via un câble FireWire,
vous pouvez enregistrer de la vidéo directement dans iMovie pour la retravailler.
Pour enregistrer directement dans iMovie :
1 Connectez votre iSight si elle n’est pas intégrée (ou votre autre webcam ou votre
caméscope équipé d’une interface FireWire).
2 Cliquez sur le bouton Importer pour ouvrir la fenêtre Importer.
3 Si plusieurs appareils sont connectés à votre ordinateur, sélectionnez la caméra que
vous voulez utiliser dans le menu local Appareil.
4 Cliquez sur Capturer.
5 Dans le menu local Enregistrer dans, choisissez le disque sur lequel vous souhaitez
stocker la vidéo enregistrée.
Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo peut occuper plusieurs gigaoctets : vous devez donc vérifier que l’espace disponible est suffisant sur le disque que
vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée
entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local.
6 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo enregistrée dans votre
Bibliothèque d’événements :
 Pour créer un nouvel événement destiné à la vidéo enregistrée, saisissez son nom
dans le champ « Créer un nouvel événement » (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »).
 Pour ajouter la vidéo enregistrée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez
« Ajouter à l’événement existant », puis sélectionnez le nom de cet événement
dans le menu local.
7 Lorsque vous êtes prêt à commencer l’enregistrement, cliquez sur OK. iMovie
commence l’enregistrement immédiatement.
8 Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, cliquez sur Stop quand vous voulez.
Vous pouvez démarrer et arrêter l’enregistrement autant de fois que vous le voulez.
Chaque fois que vous arrêtez l’enregistrement, iMovie prend quelques minutes pour
générer les vignettes qui représentent les séquences vidéo. Chaque fois que vous
recommencez à enregistrer, vous pouvez créer un nouvel événement ou cliquer sur OK
pour ajouter la nouvelle vidéo au même événement.
9 Lorsque vous avez fini d’enregistrer, cliquez sur Terminé.
Bouton Importer18 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Projets iMovie HD ou autres fichiers de films sur votre disque dur
Vous pouvez importer les séquences vidéo brutes que vous avez déjà stockées sur le
disque dur de votre ordinateur ou sur un disque dur externe compatible et connecté à
votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire.
Pour importer de la vidéo à partir d’un disque dur :
1 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer des films et recherchez le projet dans la fenêtre Importer.
Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue
« Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de
séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence
au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la
séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains
ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD
et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité
originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à
ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie).
2 Sélectionnez le disque dans lequel vous voulez stocker l’enregistrement dans le menu
local Enregistrer dans.
Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo peut occuper plusieurs gigaoctets : vous devez donc vérifier que l’espace disponible est suffisant sur le disque que
vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée
entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local.
3 Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez organiser la vidéo importée dans votre
Bibliothèque d’événements :
 Pour créer un nouvel événement destiné à la vidéo importée, saisissez son nom dans
le champ Nom de l’événement (par exemple « Fête d’anniversaire »).
 Pour ajouter la vidéo importée à un événement qui existe déjà, choisissez Événement
existant, puis sélectionnez le nom de ce dernier dans le menu local.
4 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local.
La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur
un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou
une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire,
choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au
format : ».Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 19
5 Choisissez ce que vous souhaitez faire des fichiers originaux :
 Pour supprimer les fichiers originaux une fois qu’ils ont été copiés dans iMovie,
sélectionnez Déplacer les fichiers.
 Pour maintenir l’intégrité des fichiers originaux même s’ils ont déjà été copiés dans
iMovie, sélectionnez Copier les fichiers.
6 Cliquez sur Importer.
Vous pouvez aussi importer des données vidéo d’un projet créé avec iMovie HD. Lorsque vous importez un projet iMovie HD, seules les données vidéo importées à l’origine
dans le projet depuis un caméscope sont importées dans iMovie ; les autres données
vidéo qui se trouvent dans le projet parce que vous les y avez fait glisser depuis le Finder ne sont pas importées. Les clips dans le Visualiseur sont ajoutés à la vidéothèque et
regroupés en tant qu’événement ; les clips dans la chronologie sont placés dans un
nouveau projet iMovie. Toutes les transitions sont remplacées par des fondus enchaî-
nés. Aucun titre, aucun effet, aucune musique, aucun effet sonore et aucune photo ne
sont importés dans iMovie. Tous les marqueurs de chapitre sont également perdus.
Pour importer un ancien projet iMovie :
1 Choisissez Fichier > Importer le projet HD iMovie, puis recherchez ce dernier dans
la zone de dialogue Importer.
Si vous importez une séquence vidéo haute définition (HD), la zone de dialogue
« Réglage d’importation au format 1080i HD » s’ouvre. Si vous n’importez pas de
séquence vidéo au format 1080i, cliquez sur OK. Si vous importez une séquence
au format 1080i ou si vous envisagez de le faire par la suite, sélectionnez la taille de la
séquence vidéo devant être importée par iMovie. L’option Grande taille est recommandée dans la plupart des cas (y compris pour la visualisation sur Apple TV) car elle économise de l’espace sur le disque dur et peut être lue de manière plus fluide sur certains
ordinateurs. Cependant, si votre caméscope enregistre au format vidéo 1920x1080 HD
et que vous pensez utiliser cette séquence vidéo pour une diffusion ou une exportation vers Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez l’option Taille originale : celle-ci préserve la qualité
originale de la séquence vidéo mais utilise plus d’espace disque (pour en savoir plus à
ce sujet, recherchez 1080i dans l’Aide iMovie).
Vos projets iMovie se trouvent généralement dans votre dossier Séquences.
2 Sélectionnez le disque dans lequel vous voulez stocker le projet dans le menu local
Enregistrer dans.
Vous pouvez choisir n’importe quel disque pris en charge et connecté à votre ordinateur au moyen d’un câble FireWire. Une heure de vidéo en définition standard (DV)
occupe environ 13 Go (40 Go pour une heure de vidéo haute définition (HD) : vous
devez donc vérifier que vous disposez de suffisamment d’espace sur le disque que
vous choisissez. La quantité d’espace libre sur chaque disque disponible est affichée
entre parenthèses à côté du nom du disque dans le menu local.20 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
3 Si vous importez une vidéo au format 1080i, sélectionnez sa taille dans le menu local.
La qualité des vidéos de grande taille est suffisante pour permettre leur affichage sur
un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV) et pour la plupart des autres utilisations. Toutefois, si vous comptez exporter votre film vers Final Cut Pro ou si, pour une raison ou
une autre, vous souhaitez conserver la taille originale de votre vidéo sans la réduire,
choisissez « Entier - 1920x1080 » dans le menu local « Importer la vidéo 1080i au
format : ».
4 Cliquez sur Importer.
Étape 2 : organisez votre vidéothèque et visionnez la vidéo
Une fois que vous avez importé votre séquence, elle est prête à l’emploi. La vidéo est
classée par événement dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, où vous pouvez immédiatement la visualiser, la parcourir, la rechercher ou l’améliorer.
À propos des événements iMovie
Lorsque vous importez une séquence vidéo dans iMovie et que vous lui attribuez un
nom d’événement, un nouvel événement apparaît dans la Bibliothèque d’événements,
classé sous l’année où il s’est produit. En cliquant sur le triangle d’affichage d’une
année dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, vous affichez tous les événements de cette
année-là. Si la vidéo d’un même événement s’étale sur plusieurs jours et que vous avez
choisi d’établir une séparation lors de l’importation, chacun de ces jours apparaît dans
la liste.
Si vous choisissez le nom d’un événement existant lorsque vous importez une nouvelle séquence vidéo, vous regroupez les vidéos de plusieurs sources dans un même
événement. Vous pouvez également fusionner plusieurs événements (ou jours d’événements) en un même événement, ou scinder un événement en deux.
En fusionnant et en scindant des événements ou en déplaçant des clips vidéo d’un
événement à l’autre, vous pouvez organiser vos vidéos en catégories et périodes de
temps et les passer en revue comme s’il s’agissait de livres rangés sur une étagère.
Ainsi, si vous avez importé depuis plusieurs sources différentes des séquences vidéo
tournées pendant des vacances sur les îles Galápagos, vous pourriez regrouper toutes
ces séquences vidéo, quelle que soit leur source, sous un seul et unique événement
intitulé par exemple, « Vacances aux Galápagos », que vous pourrez retrouver facilement sous l’année pendant laquelle vous êtes parti en vacances là-bas.
Si vous sélectionnez un événement dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, vous pouvez
voir toutes les vidéos qu’il contient. De même, si vous sélectionnez plusieurs événements à la fois, vous voyez toutes les vidéos qu’ils contiennent.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 21
Pour parcourir plusieurs événements :
m Maintenez enfoncée la touche Commande (x) et cliquez sur les noms des événements
contenant la vidéo que vous voulez parcourir.
m Sélectionnez une année dans la Bibliothèque d’événements pour parcourir tous
les événements qu’elle contient.
Pour fusionner des événements :
m Sélectionnez-les dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, puis choisissez Fichier > Fusionner
les événements.
Pour scinder un événement en deux parties :
m Cliquez sur le clip vidéo que vous voulez placer en premier dans le nouvel événement,
puis sélectionnez Fichier > « Scinder l’événement avant le plan ».
Pour déplacer un segment vidéo (clip) d’un événement vers un autre :
m Faites-le glisser et déposez-le (dans la Bibliothèque d’événements) sur le titre de
l’événement dans lequel vous voulez le placer.
L’événement apparaît dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, sous l’année dans laquelle
le clip le plus récent a été tourné.
Vous pouvez également trier votre Bibliothèque d’événements en fonction du disque
dur sur lequel les vidéos sont stockées. Lorsque vos événements sont triés par disque
dur, vous pouvez parcourir tous les événements d’un disque en sélectionnant le nom
de ce disque.
Pour trier la Bibliothèque d’événements par disque dur :
m Cliquez sur le bouton avec une icône de disque dur dans la partie supérieure de
la sous-fenêtre Bibliothèque d’événements.
Clips vidéo apparaissant
comme des « pellicules
cinématographiques »
Noms d’événements répertoriés
dans la Bibliothèque d’événements, séparés par jour
Tri des événements par disque dur22 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour découvrir d’autres options relatives à l’organisation de votre Bibliothèque d’évé-
nements, consultez la rubrique « Réorganisation d’événements dans la Bibliothèque
d’événements » dans l’Aide iMovie.
Affichage de votre vidéo source.
Sélectionnez le nom d’un événement que vous avez créé dans la Bibliothèque d’événements et examinez les segments vidéo qu’il contient. La vidéo qui se trouve dans vos
événements est appelée vidéo source parce qu’elle reste toujours telle que vous l’avez
importée et qu’elle n’est pas modifiée par les opérations de montage réalisées dans
iMovie. Elle sert de source à la vidéo que vous pouvez utiliser pour créer des films.
Vous pouvez voir le contenu d’une vidéo en observant les images espacées dans le
temps, comme si vous examiniez une pellicule cinématographique sur une table lumineuse. Chaque pellicule représente un clip vidéo, c’est-à-dire un segment vidéo qui
commence au moment où la caméra a commencé à enregistrer et se termine
lorsqu’elle a arrêté d’enregistrer. Généralement, chaque événement comporte plusieurs clips, un pour chaque fois où vous avez démarré et arrêté la caméra pendant
l’enregistrement de l’événement.
Un ensemble de vignettes assemblées forme une pellicule qui
représente un clip vidéo.
Une vignette représente une
image d’un clip.
Les images dentelées indiquent que ce clip
continue à la ligne suivante ou représente
la suite de la ligne précédente.
Plusieurs clips, contenant
chacun plusieurs vignettesChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 23
Par défaut, iMovie affiche une image par intervalle de 5 secondes de vidéo du clip ;
vous pouvez modifier ce réglage pour « dérouler » (développer) ou « enrouler »
(contracter) la pellicule selon vos préférences. La durée de chaque clip est affichée à
l’extrême gauche lorsque vous passez le pointeur dessus.
Pour agrandir ou réduire les pellicules :
 Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes vers la droite pour réduire le nombre d’images
affichées par clip et raccourcir ainsi la pellicule.
 Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes vers la gauche pour augmenter le nombre
d’images affichées par clip et agrandir ainsi la pellicule.
L’agrandissement et la réduction des pellicules à l’aide de ce curseur ne modifient votre
vidéo en aucune manière : ces opérations modifient uniquement l’affichage pendant
votre travail.
Lecture de votre vidéo
Lorsque vous déplacez le pointeur sur les pellicules, vous remarquez que les images des
pellicules se déplacent avec la plus grande image dans le visualiseur. L’image dans le
visualiseur correspond au moment de la vidéo, ou à l’image, sur laquelle le pointeur se
trouve. Le déplacement du pointeur en avant ou en arrière dans la vidéo porte le nom
de défilement : il s’agit d’une manière rapide d’avoir une idée de l’apparence de la vidéo.
Lorsque vous parcourez votre vidéo, vous entendez également le son qui se lit en avant
ou en arrière suivant que vous avancez ou reculez dans la vidéo. Cela est parfois utile
pour rechercher un moment particulier dans votre vidéo. D’autres fois, vous voudrez
couper le son.
Pour couper le son pendant le défilement :
m Dans la barre d’outils d’iMovie, cliquez sur le bouton prévu pour couper le son lors du
survol de la vidéo ou choisissez Présentation > Écrémage audio et assurez-vous que
l’élément n’est pas coché dans le menu.
Pour rétablir le son, appuyez à nouveau sur ce bouton. Cela affecte uniquement
le défilement, mais pas la lecture du son en vitesse normale.
Vous pouvez également lire votre vidéo à la vitesse prévue.
Cliquez pour couper
le son pendant
le défilement24 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour lire la vidéo à n’importe quel endroit, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :
m Placez le pointeur à l’emplacement de la pellicule à partir duquel vous voulez démarrer
la lecture, puis appuyez sur la barre d’espace.
Si le pointeur est placé sur une bordure de sélection jaune, seule la portion sélectionnée de la vidéo est lue. Pour lire au-delà de la portion de vidéo sélectionnée, placez
le pointeur à gauche de la sélection avant d’appuyer sur la barre d’espace.
m Double-cliquez dans le clip à l’endroit à partir duquel vous voulez démarrer la lecture.
m Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip et sélectionnez Affichage > Lecture.
Pour arrêter la lecture de la vidéo :
m Cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie ou appuyez sur la barre d’espace pendant
la lecture.
Pour lire des événements sélectionnés à partir du début, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :
m Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip et sélectionnez Affichage > « Lire depuis
le début ».
m Appuyez sur la touche Barre oblique inverse (\).
m Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture qui se trouve au-dessous de la Bibliothèque d’événements.
Pour lire un événement en plein écran :
1 Sélectionnez n’importe quelle partie du clip, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Lire en plein
écran » qui se trouve au-dessous de la Bibliothèque d’événements pour lire l’événement depuis le début ou appuyez sur Commande (x) + G pour commencer la lecture à
partir de l’endroit où se trouve le pointeur.
2 Pour rembobiner ou avancer rapidement, déplacez le pointeur, puis cliquez sur la pellicule qui apparaît ; faites défiler la pellicule en avant ou en arrière ou appuyez sur les
touches fléchées pour vous déplacer image par image.
3 Pour quitter le mode plein écran, appuyez sur la touche Échap.
Pour ne lire que les images vidéo sélectionnées, effectuez l’une des opérations
suivantes :
m Appuyez sur la touche Barre oblique (/).
m Sélectionnez Affichage > Lire la sélection.
Cliquez pour commencer la lecture Cliquez ici pour commencer la lecture depuis le début.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 25
Sélection de la vidéo source
Chaque clip vidéo est composé de plusieurs images vidéo, apparaissant comme des
images fixes, comme les différents clichés qui composent les images d’une pellicule
photographique. (Le nombre d’images par seconde de vidéo animée dépend du format vidéo que vous utilisez). Généralement, la manipulation de vidéo dans iMovie consiste à sélectionner des plages d’images vidéo, ou plages d’images, qui ne représentent
qu’une petite partie du clip vidéo. Dans certains cas, il se peut toutefois que la plage
d’images sélectionnée couvre l’ensemble d’un clip vidéo voire plusieurs clips.
Par défaut, lorsque vous cliquez sur un clip vidéo source, iMovie sélectionne quatre
secondes de vidéo à partir du point où vous avez cliqué. Vous pouvez ainsi survoler rapidement votre vidéo à la recherche des meilleures scènes, puis cliquer simplement dessus pour sélectionner automatiquement des plages d’images de quatre secondes qui
vous permettront de monter un film constitué de plans bien rythmés. (Vous pouvez en
outre régler le nombre d’images vidéo qu’un simple clic peut sélectionner via la sousfenêtre Préférences d’iMovie. Pour savoir comment procéder, reportez-vous à la section «
Réglage de la sélection automatique d’une plage d’images » dans l’Aide iMovie.)
Un bord de sélection jaune apparaît autour de la plage d’images lorsque vous
la sélectionnez.
Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire une sélection de plage d’images, la recentrer ou sélectionner un clip entier ou plusieurs clips à la fois.
Pour sélectionner une plage d’images vidéo dans la bibliothèque des vidéos sources,
effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :
m Cliquez sur un clip pour sélectionner quatre secondes de vidéo à partir du point où
vous avez cliqué.
m Faites glisser le curseur sur le clip pour sélectionner autant d’images que vous le voulez.
Pour ajuster une sélection de plage d’images, effectuez l’une des opérations
suivantes :
m Faites glisser la poignée située à l’une des extrémités du bord de sélection pour agrandir ou réduire la sélection.
m Placez le pointeur au-dessus du point de départ ou de fin souhaité et cliquez tout en
maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée.
Faites glisser les poignées pourredimensionner la sélection.
La bordure jaune délimite l’étendue des
images sélectionnées dans un clip.26 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Si vous voulez déplacer la sélection dans une autre plage d’images du même clip sans
modifier sa taille, vous pouvez la recentrer.
Pour recentrer la sélection :
m Faites glisser le haut de la bordure de sélection vers n’importe quel emplacement du clip.
m Appuyez sur les touches Flèche droite ou Flèche gauche pour déplacer l’ensemble de
la sélection vers la gauche ou la droite image par image.
Vous pouvez « faire coulisser » la plage de sélection le long du clip pour déplacer la
sélection et sélectionner plusieurs plages de même taille, ce qui permet d’assurer
la régularité du rythme d’un film lors de sa création.
Pour sélectionner un clip vidéo entier dans la vidéothèque source :
m Cliquez sur un clip tout en maintenant enfoncée la touche Option.
m Cliquez sur un clip tout en maintenant enfoncée la touche Contrôle et choisissez
« Sélectionner le clip entier » dans le menu local qui s’affiche.
? Astuce : Si vous cliquez tout en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée, vous faites
apparaître des menus contextuels qui peuvent vous aider à travailler de manière plus
efficace. Ils vous proposent des options pertinentes en fonction de l’endroit où vous
cliquez.
Pour sélectionner plusieurs clips vidéo :
m Si les clips constituent une série de clips contigus, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj et
cliquez sur le premier et le dernier des clips de la plage à sélectionner.
m Si les clips ne sont pas contigus, maintenez enfoncée la touche Commande (x) et
cliquez sur chaque clip à sélectionner ; pour retirer un clip de la sélection, cliquez à
nouveau sur ce clip.
Lorsque vous avez sélectionné plusieurs clips, vous pouvez les faire glisser dans un
autre événement ou dans un projet iMovie. Vous pouvez aussi modifier l’apparence
d’un clip vidéo, puis copier-coller les modifications dans d’autres clips. Pour en savoir
plus à ce sujet, recherchez « ajustements vidéo » dans l’Aide iMovie.
Marquage de la vidéo comme favorite ou à supprimer
Avec iMovie, vous trouvez instantanément les meilleurs moments. Vous n’avez pas
besoin de parcourir des heures de vidéo, en effectuant des retours et avances rapides à
la recherche des passages souhaités. Désormais, en passant rapidement sur votre vidéo,
vous pouvez marquer les passages que vous pensez être les meilleurs ou les moins
bons, facilitant ainsi le filtrage ultérieur de votre vidéo et la recherche des séquences à
retravailler ou à supprimer.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 27
Pour organiser plus finement votre vidéo, vous pouvez également repérer une plage
d’images avec des mots-clés. Pour en savoir plus sur le repérage des vidéos et la recherche à l’aide de mots-clés, recherchez les termes « balisage avec mots-clés » dans l’Aide
iMovie.
Dans cette étape, vous devez sélectionner la portion de la vidéo que vous aimez et la
marquer comme favorite ; vous devrez également marquer la portion de vidéo que
vous n’aimez pas en vue de la supprimer.
Vous devez d’abord définir un filtre pour votre vidéo source pour afficher tous les clips :
sélectionnez Tous les clips dans le menu local Afficher sous la Bibliothèque d’événements.
Survolez ensuite votre vidéo pour localiser les passages particulièrement intéressants.
Pour marquer la vidéo comme favorite :
m Sélectionnez une plage d’images, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Marquer comme favorite »
dans la barre d’outils iMovie.
Une barre verte apparaît en haut de la plage d’images.
Menu local Afficher
Marquer comme favorite
Démarquer Refuser
Une barre verte indique
que la plage est marquée comme favorite.28 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour marquer une vidéo à supprimer :
m Sélectionnez une plage, puis cliquez sur le bouton Refuser de la barre d’outils iMovie.
Une barre rouge s’affiche au-dessus de la plage d’images.
Pour supprimer une marque :
m Sélectionnez une plage que vous avez marquée comme favorite ou que vous avez refusée, puis, dans la barre d’outils d’iMovie, cliquez sur le bouton Démarquer. La barre de
couleur disparaît.
Tri (filtrage) de vidéo
Maintenant que vous avez marqué certaines images vidéo, vous pouvez aisément filtrer la bibliothèque source de façon à ne voir que les meilleures ou les pires sélections.
Pour filtrer la bibliothèque source vidéo et afficher les clips favoris ou refusés :
m Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes dans le menu local Afficher sous la Bibliothèque
d’événements.
 Favoris uniquement : affiche uniquement la séquence vidéo que vous avez marquée
comme favorite.
 Favoris et démarqués : affiche toutes les séquences vidéo que vous avez marquées
comme favorites ou que vous n’avez pas marquées. (Affichage par défaut.)
 Tous les clips : affiche tous les clips de l’événement sélectionné.
 Refusés uniquement : affiche uniquement les clips que vous avez marqués pour
être supprimés.
Si vous choisissez Refusés uniquement, vous pouvez afficher un aperçu des clips refusés
avant de les supprimer.
Une barre rouge indique que
la plage est marquée pour
la suppression (refusée).Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 29
Pour supprimer les clips refusés :
1 Choisissez Présentation > Refusés uniquement ou sélectionnez Refusés uniquement
dans le menu local Afficher.
2 Cliquez sur « Placer dans la corbeille » dans le coin supérieur droit au-dessus des clips
refusés.
Si vous voulez récupérer l’espace disque libéré par les vidéos supprimées, vous devez
vider la Corbeille de votre ordinateur.
Pour récupérer l’espace disque des clips supprimés :
m Cliquez sur le bureau pour activer le Finder, puis choisissez Finder > Vider la Corbeille.
Affichage Favoris et démarqués
Lorsque vous travaillez dans iMovie, vous préférerez peut-être afficher uniquement
la vidéo que vous avez marquée comme favorite ou que vous n’avez pas marquée.
Pour cela, revenez à l’affichage par défaut.
La vidéo refusée disparaît immédiatement de cet affichage. Pour l’afficher à nouveau,
sélectionnez Rejeté dans le menu local Afficher.
Pour restaurer l’affichage par défaut (Favoris et démarqués), effectuez l’une des
opérations suivantes :
m Appuyez sur Commande (x) + L.
m Choisissez Favoris et démarqués dans le menu local Afficher.
m Choisissez Présentation > Favoris et démarqués.
m Si vous êtes en mode Refusés uniquement, cliquez sur l’option « Masquer les projets
rejetés » située dans l’angle supérieur droit du navigateur d’événements.
Étape 3 : améliorez les images vidéo et réglez le volume sonore
Lorsque vous regardez votre vidéo, vous voudrez peut-être améliorer vos moments
préférés. Le volume de votre clip favori est peut-être trop élevé ou trop bas. Dans un
autre clip, le sujet principal vous gratifie d’un superbe sourire, mais il est un peu trop
éloigné. Ou les couleurs mériteraient peut-être une petite correction. Avec iMovie,
vous pouvez facilement améliorer l’apparence et le son de votre vidéo.
Rognage d’images vidéo
De la même manière que vous découpez une photo, avec iMovie vous pouvez créer un
plan rapproché du sujet choisi alors que vous n’en aviez pas auparavant.
Si vous travaillez avec un format vidéo standard ou de résolution inférieure, le rognage
du clip peut créer du grain. Avec la vidéo haute définition, la qualité d’affichage des
clips rognés est quasiment la même que celle des originaux.30 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour rogner un clip :
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Rogner, puis sur un clip pour le sélectionner.
2 Dans le visualiseur, cliquez sur Rogner.
Un rectangle de découpage vert apparaît autour de l’image dans le visualiseur.
3 Faites glisser le rectangle vert pour le redimensionner et le repositionner afin de souligner la partie de l’image que vous voulez mettre en évidence.
Le découpage maximal est de 50 % de la taille de l’image originale. Les proportions du
rectangle de rognage restent celles du format 16:9 (écran large) si aucun projet n’est
sélectionné (dans le cas contraire, les proportions sont celles du projet sélectionné).
4 Pour afficher l’aperçu de votre travail, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture.
5 Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous avez obtenu le résultat souhaité. Le rognage
s’applique à l’ensemble du clip.
Une icône Rogner apparaît au début du clip.
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher un aperçu de votre travail.
Faites glisser le cadre et redimensionnez-le pour
définir la taille et l’emplacement du découpage.
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour rogner. faire pivoter toute l’image.
Cliquez sur ce bouton
pour restaurer complètement l’image.
Cliquez sur ce bouton
lorsque vous avez
terminé.
Icône RognerChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 31
Cliquez dessus pour modifier ou supprimer le rognage à tout moment. Vous pouvez
restaurer votre vidéo à sa taille d’origine à tout moment en ouvrant l’éditeur de
rognage et en cliquant sur Adapter.
Ajustement du volume des clips
iMovie offre deux manières simples de régler le volume sonore général de vos clips
vidéo : réduction du volume maximal ou réglage de tous les volumes du clip pour
qu’ils tiennent dans une plage « normalisée ». Vous effectuez ces deux réglages dans
la fenêtre Ajustements audio.
Modifications non destructives
L’expression « modifications non destructives » signifie que vous pouvez annuler toutes les modifications apportées à votre vidéo (ou aux autres données que vous ajoutez à vos projets iMovie) si, par exemple, vous changez d’avis ou vous n’êtes pas
satisfait du résultat. Cela est dû au fait qu’iMovie ne modifie jamais les données originales que vous modifiez ; iMovie ne crée pas non plus une copie de l’original. iMovie
stocke simplement les modifications que vous apportez et les applique à nouveau
chaque fois que vous visionnez la vidéo, sans qu’il soit nécessaire pour vous de les
enregistrer.
Pour annuler la dernière action :
m Sélectionnez Édition > Annuler [Action].
Pour restaurer les données dans leur état d’origine :
1 Sélectionnez le clip, puis cliquez sur le bouton pour ouvrir l’outil utilisé pour modifier l’image ou le son original.
2 Supprimez les modifications qui ne vous plaisent pas.
À la fin de chaque rubrique de ce guide d’initiation, vous trouverez des instructions particulières sur la restauration de vos données.32 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour ouvrir la fenêtre Ajustements audio :
m Cliquez sur un clip, puis sur le bouton Ajustements audio.
Réglage du volume d’un clip
Si le son de l’un de vos clips est trop élevé par rapport à celui de tous les autres ou, à
l’inverse, si vous trouvez qu’il n’est pas assez fort, il vous suffit d’augmenter ou de baisser le volume du clip en question.
Pour régler le volume d’un clip :
1 Avec la fenêtre Ajustements audio ouverte, cliquez sur un clip pour le sélectionner.
2 Faites glisser le curseur Volume jusqu’au niveau souhaité.
3 Cliquez sur Terminé pour fermer la fenêtre Ajustements audio, ou cliquez sur un autre
clip pour régler son volume.
Cliquez sur l’icône de réglage audio qui apparaît au début du clip pour ouvrir la fenê-
tre Ajustements audio et modifier ou supprimer les réglages audio à tout moment.
Cliquez sur « Revenir à l’original » dans la fenêtre Ajustements audio pour restaurer
le volume d’origine du clip.
Cliquez sur ce bouton
pour réinitialiser la plage
de volume du clip.
Faites glisser le curseur pour
régler le volume du clip.
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour
restaurer les volumes aux
niveaux d’origine.
Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé.
Cochez cette case pour
que le son de ce clip soit
prioritaire par rapport au
son d’autres clips.
Faites glisser le curseur
pour régler l’atténuation
du volume des autres
clips audio et vidéo.
Sélectionnez Manuel,
puis faites glisser les curseurs pour régler le taux
de fondu en entrée ou en
sortie du volume du clip.
Icône Ajustements audioChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 33
Normalisation du volume des clips
Si la voix est trop forte dans un clip et trop faible dans un autre, la normalisation du
volume vous permet de redéfinir les niveaux de son de sorte qu’ils soient compris dans
la plage de volume de votre choix.
Pour normaliser les volumes dans divers clips :
1 Avec la fenêtre Ajustements audio ouverte, cliquez sur un clip pour le sélectionner.
2 Cliquez sur Normaliser le volume.
Cela règle le volume du clip à son niveau maximal sans distorsion.
3 Sélectionnez un autre clip, puis cliquez à nouveau sur Normaliser le volume.
Les volumes des deux clips sont désormais réglés sur la même plage.
4 Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour tous les autres clips de sorte que leur volume se trouve à
l’intérieur de la même plage.
Vous pouvez annuler la normalisation audio à tout moment en cliquant sur « Supprimer la normalisation » ou « Revenir à l’original » dans la fenêtre Ajustements audio.
Étape 4 : créez un projet iMovie
Si vous voulez partager des parties de votre vidéothèque avec des amis, les publier sur
le web ou les transférer sur votre iPod ou votre Apple TV, vous pouvez créer un film à
l’aide de la vidéo source dans votre vidéothèque et y placer vos meilleurs clips comme
vous le voulez. Vous pouvez améliorer votre film avec de la musique de fond, des effets
sonores, des commentaires et des photos. iMovie intègre également plusieurs styles
de titres très pratiques pour ajouter du texte à votre film, ainsi que des styles de transitions pour passer en douceur d’un clip à l’autre. Commencez par créer un projet
iMovie dans lequel vous allez ensuite combiner toutes les pièces de ce qui deviendra
votre film.
Au cours de cette opération, vous allez commencer un projet iMovie, puis ajouter une
vidéo provenant de la bibliothèque source, l’organiser en une séquence qui vous plaît
et ajouter de la musique de fond pour créer un diaporama vidéo élémentaire. Ensuite,
vous allez supprimer les images inutiles de la vidéo, ajouter des titres et des transitions
et terminer votre montage en ajoutant des effets sonores.34 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Création d’un projet iMovie
Un projet iMovie peut être aussi simple ou complexe que vous le voulez, en fonction
de ce que vous voulez ajouter à votre film en plus de la vidéo de base. Les tâches pré-
sentées ici sont organisées dans l’ordre idéal pour tous vos projets iMovie. N’oubliez
pas que lorsque vous apportez des modifications ou des ajustements à une vidéo dans
iMovie, les données d’origine ne sont pas affectées. Vous pouvez à tout moment annuler les ajustements que vous avez apportés à la vidéo et votre vidéo originale demeure
intacte, protégée contre les modifications non souhaitées. N’hésitez donc pas à essayer
tout ce qui vous passe par la tête et amusez-vous bien.
Pour créer un projet iMovie
1 Choisissez Fichier > Nouveau projet.
2 Tapez un nom pour votre projet.
3 Choisissez les proportions souhaitées pour votre film terminé dans le menu local
Proportions.
Choisissez les proportions en fonction des dimensions de la vidéo et des photos que
vous utiliserez dans votre projet.
 Standard (4:3) : produit un film pour l’affichage sur un téléviseur standard TV ou sur
le web. S’il est affiché sur un téléviseur haute définition, un espace noir apparaît de
chaque côté de la vidéo.
 iPhone (3:2) : produit un film pour l’affichage sur iPhone.
 Écran large (16:9) : produit un film idéal pour l’affichage sur un écran large ou un
téléviseur haute définition (HDTV). Si vous affichez votre film sur un téléviseur standard, des bandes noires apparaîtront en haut et en bas de la vidéo.
Vous pouvez mélanger diverses tailles et formats vidéo dans un même projet. Si vous
utilisez des vidéos et des photos de tailles différentes, sélectionnez les proportions les
mieux adaptées aux données. Si cela provoque l’apparition de bandes noires en haut,
en bas ou sur les côtés de certains contenus, vous pouvez ajouter ces derniers à votre
projet, puis les rogner pour enlever ces bandes noires. (Pour en savoir plus sur le
rognage des images, voir « Rognage d’images vidéo » à la page 29).
Ajout de vidéo à votre projet
Vous pouvez ajouter autant de séquences vidéo que vous le souhaitez dans un projet :
sélectionnez-les à partir d’un ou de plusieurs événements, pour les regrouper dans
l’ordre que vous voulez. Lorsque vous ajoutez une plage d’images à votre projet, elle
apparaît sous la forme d’un clip entier dans votre projet, même s’il ne s’agissait que
d’une partie d’un clip vidéo source.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 35
Lorsque vous ajoutez à votre projet des données vidéo d’un événement, iMovie ne
déplace pas celles-ci et ne les duplique pas non plus. Il établit simplement une réfé-
rence à la vidéo source. C’est pourquoi, si votre vidéo source est stockée sur un disque
dur externe, ce dernier doit être connecté à votre ordinateur lorsque vous travaillez sur
un projet faisant référence à la vidéo source. Cela implique également que vous pouvez ajouter le même segment vidéo plusieurs fois si vous voulez le dupliquer dans
votre projet, ou ajouter la même séquence vidéo à plusieurs projets. Dans chaque cas,
la séquence vidéo fonctionnera comme un clip individuel.
Pour créer un diaporama vidéo, vos clips doivent avoir la même taille ou pratiquement
la même. En effet, des clips de même taille équilibrent le rythme de votre film. iMovie
facilite cette opération grâce à la fonctionnalité de sélection automatique dans la vidéo
source, qui permet de sélectionner toujours la même quantité de vidéo en un seul clic.
Pour ajouter des clips à votre projet :
1 Cliquez sur un clip de la vidéo source pour sélectionner une plage d’images vidéo que
vous voulez inclure dans votre projet.
Quatre secondes de vidéo sont automatiquement sélectionnées.
2 Cliquez sur le bouton « Ajouter au projet » au milieu de la barre d’outils iMovie pour
ajouter de la vidéo à la fin de votre projet ou faites glisser la sélection là où vous voulez la faire apparaître dans votre projet.
3 Continuez à sélectionner des données vidéo et à les ajouter à votre projet.
4 Dans le projet, faites glisser les clips pour les placer dans l’ordre souhaité.
Vous pouvez afficher un aperçu de votre projet en le lisant de l’une des manières
suivantes :
Pour lire un projet sélectionné à partir du début :
m Cliquez sur le bouton Lire le projet sous la Bibliothèque de projets ou appuyez sur
la touche Barre oblique inverse (\).
Pour lire un projet sélectionné à partir de n’importe quel point :
m Double-cliquez sur l’image à partir de laquelle vous voulez lancer la lecture ou appuyez
sur la barre d’espace.
Pour arrêter la lecture de la vidéo de votre projet :
m Appuyez sur la barre d’espace ou cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie.
Bouton « Ajouter
au projet »36 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour lire un clip ou une plage d’images sélectionné(e) dans votre projet :
m Appuyez sur la touche Barre Antislash (/).
Pour lire en plein écran un projet sélectionné :
1 Choisissez l’endroit à partir duquel vous souhaitez commencer la lecture du projet :
 Pour commencer la lecture à partir de la position du pointeur, quelle qu’elle soit,
appuyez sur Commande (x) + G.
 Pour démarrer la lecture au début du projet, sélectionnez n’importe quel clip de ce
dernier, puis cliquez sur le bouton « Lire en plein écran » qui se trouve au-dessous de
la Bibliothèque des projets.
2 Déplacez le pointeur et cliquez sur la pellicule qui apparaît, puis faites défiler la vidéo
en avant et en arrière.
3 Pour quitter le mode plein écran, appuyez sur la touche Échap.
Lorsque vous travaillez sur votre projet, vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire les pellicules
du projet pour afficher plus ou moins d’images de chaque clip. Les pellicules de votre
projet et de votre source vidéo ne sont pas nécessairement agrandies de la même
manière.
Pour agrandir ou réduire les pellicules d’un projet :
m Faites glisser le curseur des vignettes directement sous votre projet.
Ajout de musique de fond à votre projet
Vous pouvez animer un film en ajoutant une bande son musicale. Si vous avez des
morceaux musicaux dans votre bibliothèque iTunes, vous pouvez en faire glisser un
pour accompagner votre vidéo. Sinon, vous pouvez essayer d’utiliser l’un des jingles
de iLife.
Pour ajouter une musique de fond à votre projet iMovie :
1 Choisissez Fenêtre > « Musique et effets sonores » ou cliquez sur le bouton « Musique
et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils d’iMovie.
2 Dans la sous-fenêtre « Musique et effets sonores », cliquez sur iTunes pour voir toute
la musique que contient votre bibliothèque iTunes ou cliquez sur le dossier Effets sonores pour rechercher la musique de fond la plus adaptée à votre film.
Cliquez sur un fichier audio pour en obtenir un aperçu sonore.
3 Sélectionnez un fichier musical et faites-le glisser dans l’arrière-plan du projet en
veillant à ne pas le faire glisser dans un clip.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 37
Une icône représentant la musique sous forme d’un arrière-plan de couleur verte apparaît derrière les clips vidéo. Cet arrière-plan commence au début du clip et continue
pendant toute la durée de la chanson ou de la vidéo, suivant celle qui se termine la
première. Si la musique dure plus longtemps que la vidéo, un indicateur apparaît à la
fin de la vidéo. La musique se termine automatiquement par une baisse progressive du
son à la fin de la vidéo.
4 Si vous souhaitez ajuster le point de début et de fin de la musique de fond, cliquez sur
l’arrière-plan de couleur verte, puis choisissez Édition > « Appliquer un Trim à la musique ».
Le découpeur musical s’ouvre et affiche uniquement le clip de fond musical Dans le clip
audio qui correspond à la musique, on peut voir une forme d’onde ; chaque fois que
celle-ci est de couleur rose, cela signifie que la musique est associée à des données
vidéo, que vous pouvez voir dans le visualiseur en faisant défiler rapidement le clip
audio. La forme d’onde de couleur noire correspond à la partie du clip audio qui
s’étend au-delà du début ou de la fin de la vidéo. Si vous ajoutez d’autres clips pour
rallonger votre vidéo, la musique de fond couvre alors automatiquement les images
vidéo supplémentaires.
Musique de fond
Indicateur de musique
Poignée du point fin de
la musique
Poignée du point de
début de la vidéo38 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
5 Pour définir le point de la musique où la vidéo commence (point de début de la vidéo),
faites glisser la première poignée de sélection.
Lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée du début de la vidéo, la forme d’onde rose se
déplace à l’intérieur du clip audio et le visualiseur lit la vidéo correspondante, en indiquant la nouvelle position du point de début de la vidéo.
6 Pour définir l’endroit de la vidéo où la musique se termine (c’est-à-dire, le point de fin
de la musique), faites glisser la seconde poignée de sélection.
Lorsque vous faites glisser la poignée du point de fin de la musique, la vidéo correspondante est lue dans le visualiseur pour vous aider à trouver le point de fin qui vous
convient.
7 Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du découpeur pour obtenir un aperçu de votre travail ;
cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous êtes satisfait.
Pour découvrir d’autres façons d’arranger et de manipuler le son dans iMovie, y compris en ajoutant et en montant plusieurs clips musicaux de fond ou d’effets sonores,
en extrayant des clips audio de votre vidéo et en créant des fondus audio en entrée
et en sortie, consultez les rubriques d’Aide iMovie sous « Amélioration de l’audio »
(dans la section intitulée « Création d’un projet vidéo »).
Pour fermer la sous-fenêtre « Musique et effets sonores » :
m Cliquez sur le bouton « Musique et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils iMovie.
Pour supprimer la musique de fond :
m Cliquez derrière les clips vidéo pour sélectionner la musique, puis appuyez sur
la touche Suppr.
Vous venez de créer un simple diaporama vidéo que vous pouvez partager avec votre
famille et des amis. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez effectuer d’autres modifications
en suivant les instructions des sections ci-dessous.
Suppression des images indésirables dans les clips d’un projet
Il est facile de supprimer des images superflues aux extrémités d’un clip vidéo dans
votre projet iMovie ou de les restaurer dans votre projet à tout moment.
Pour effectuer un trim d’un clip vidéo :
m Sélectionnez les images que vous voulez conserver et choisissez Édition > Appliquer un
Trim à la sélection.
Les images jugées indésirables sont supprimées.
Si vous changez d’avis, vous pouvez à tout moment restaurer les images éliminées en
réajustant la durée du clip (ou la plage d’images) dans votre projet.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 39
Pour ajuster la durée du clip ou la plage d’images :
1 Sélectionnez un clip dans votre projet.
2 Choisissez Édition > Trim ou cliquez sur le bouton de durée du clip situé dans le coin au
début du clip (il apparaît lorsque vous placez le pointeur au-dessus du clip et ressemble à une horloge).
Le découpeur s’ouvre et affiche uniquement le clip sélectionné. Les poignées de sélection indiquent ses points de début et de fin dans votre projet.
3 Pour ajuster les points de départ et de fin du clip, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :
 Faites glisser les poignées qui se trouvent au début ou à la fin de la sélection.
 Maintenez enfoncée la touche Option en appuyant sur la touche Flèche gauche ou
Flèche droite pour déplacer le point de départ ou de fin de la sélection image par
image. Si le pointeur se trouve à proximité du début de la sélection, c’est le point de
départ du clip qui est ajusté, si le pointeur se trouve à proximité de la fin de la sélection, c’est le point de fin du clip qui est ajusté.
 Appuyez sur la touche Flèche droite ou Flèche gauche pour déplacer l’ensemble de
la plage d’images sélectionnée vers la gauche ou la droite, image par image.
4 Pour obtenir un aperçu des modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du Trimmer,
puis, lorsque vous êtes satisfait du résultat, cliquez sur Terminé.
Vous pouvez aussi agrandir ou réduire rapidement des clips de votre projet, image par
image, sans passer par la fonction Trim.
Icône Durée du clip
Poignée de fin du clip
Poignée de début du clip40 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour ajuster la durée d’un clip image par image :
1 Placez le pointeur à proximité de la fin du clip à ajuster, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :
 Maintenez enfoncée les touches Commande (x) et Option. Lorsque la poignée de
sélection orange apparaît à la fin du clip, faites-la glisser vers la droite ou la gauche
pour augmenter ou diminuer la durée du clip par incréments d’une image.
 Maintenez enfoncée la touche Option en appuyant sur la touche Flèche gauche ou
Flèche droite pour augmenter ou diminuer la durée du clip par incréments d’une
image.
Ajout de transitions entre les clips d’un projet
Pour varier et animer votre projet iMovie, vous pouvez insérer des transitions qui évitent le passage brutal d’un clip au suivant dans votre vidéo. Par exemple, vous pouvez
fondre les dernières images d’une séquence avec les premières de la séquence suivante ; vous pouvez également créer l’effet qu’une scène repousse la précédente en
dehors de l’écran. iMovie intègre plusieurs transitions attractives qui donnent du style à
votre projet.
Affichage rapide des modifications
Une fois que vous avez ajusté la durée d’un clip vidéo ou apporté une autre modification à votre projet, il est parfois utile d’observer les effets de la modification apportée
en visionnant quelques secondes de la vidéo pour apporter ensuite d’autres ajustements. iMovie contient des raccourcis clavier facilitant l’affichage des modifications.
Pour afficher un bref aperçu de votre modification :
m Assurez-vous que votre pointeur se trouve à l’endroit où vous avez apporté la
modification, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :
 Appuyez sur la touche Crochet gauche ([) pour lire une seconde de vidéo avant
l’endroit où le pointeur se trouve et une seconde après. Si le pointeur se trouve
au-dessus de la plage d’images sélectionnée, appuyer sur la touche Crochet gauche ne lit qu’une seconde de vidéo, au début ou à la fin de la sélection, selon
l’extrémité de la sélection dont le pointeur est le plus proche.
 Appuyez sur la touche Crochet droite (]) pour lire trois secondes de vidéo avant
l’endroit où le pointeur se trouve et trois secondes après. Si le pointeur se trouve
au-dessus de la plage d’images sélectionnée, appuyer sur la touche Crochet
droite ne lit que trois secondes de vidéo, au début ou à la fin de la sélection,
selon l’extrémité de la sélection dont le pointeur est le plus proche.
Pour d’autres raccourcis clavier permettant de travailler plus efficacement, recherchez
« Raccourcis clavier » dans l’Aide iMovie.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 41
Pour ajouter une transition entre deux clips :
1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Transitions ou cliquez sur le bouton Transitions de la barre
d’outils iMovie.
Dans la sous-fenêtre Transitions, vous pouvez obtenir un aperçu des transitions disponibles en plaçant le pointeur sur chacune d’entre elles.
2 Sélectionnez la transition voulue et faites-la glisser entre deux clips dans votre projet
iMovie.
Une icône de transition noire apparaît.
Pour afficher l’aperçu de la transition dans votre projet :
m Double-cliquez n’importe où dans le clip juste en face de la transition pour la lire ou faites-la défiler en faisant glisser le pointeur sur la transition à la vitesse que vous voulez.
Si le résultat obtenu ne vous convient pas, vous pouvez à tout moment faire glisser une
autre transition dessus pour remplacer l’existante ou la supprimer et ajouter une transition différente.
Pour supprimer une transition :
m Sélectionnez l’icône de transition de couleur noire, puis appuyez sur la touche Supprimer.
Essayez différentes transitions pour voir comment elles apparaissent à différents emplacements de votre projet.
Pour fermer la sous-fenêtre Transitions :
m Cliquez sur le bouton Transitions de la barre d’outils iMovie.
Le temps entre un clip et le suivant est appelé la durée de transition. La durée d’une
transition ne peut jamais être supérieure à la moitié de la durée du clip le plus court
précédent ou suivant. Par exemple, si vous avez une transition entre une séquence de
quatre secondes et une autre de six secondes, sa durée ne peut pas être supérieure à
deux secondes.
Par défaut, la durée de toutes les transitions de votre projet est définie à une seconde
et demie. Vous pouvez modifier la durée des transitions dans la fenêtre des propriétés
du projet ou en choisissant Édition > Définir la durée. Pour plus de détails, recherchez
« durée des transitions » dans l’Aide iMovie.
Vous pouvez également configurer iMovie pour insérer automatiquement la même
transition entre tous les clips de votre projet. Pour en savoir plus à ce sujet, recherchez
« transitions automatiques » dans l’Aide iMovie.
Icône de transition42 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Ajout de titres à votre projet
Vous pouvez ajouter du texte sur la vidéo à n’importe quel point de votre projet. Par
exemple, vous pouvez donner un titre ou un générique à votre film, ou encore utiliser
du texte pour identifier une scène ou une personne dans le film. Tous les textes ajoutés sont appelés titres.
Pour ajouter un titre à votre vidéo :
1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Titres ou cliquez sur le bouton Titres de la barre d’outils iMovie.
2 Sélectionnez le style de titre que vous voulez et faites-le glisser sur un clip de votre
projet iMovie.
Lorsque vous passez le titre sur le clip vidéo, une ombre rouge sur le clip indique que le
titre sera affiché sur tout le clip, sur le premier tiers ou sur le dernier tiers ; vous pouvez
toujours le déplacer et le redimensionner par la suite. Une fois que le titre est en place,
il apparaît dans le visualiseur iMovie et une icône de titre bleue apparaît au-dessus du
clip vidéo.
3 Dans le visualiseur, sélectionnez le texte de paramètre fictif et tapez le texte voulu.
Icône de titre
Sélectionnez le texte du
paramètre fictif et tapez
Cliquez sur ce bouton lorsque vous avez terminé.
Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la
fenêtre Police et modifier l’apparence du texte.
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher
un aperçu de votre travail.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 43
4 Pour modifier la couleur, la police ou le style du texte, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur
le bouton Afficher les polices dans le visualiseur, puis effectuez vos sélections dans
la fenêtre Police.
5 Cliquez sur le bouton Lecture du visualiseur pour obtenir un aperçu de votre travail ;
cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous êtes satisfait.
Pour raccourcir ou rallonger un titre :
m Passez le pointeur sur une extrémité du titre jusqu’à ce qu’il se transforme en ligne verticale, puis faites glisser l’icône de titre d’un côté ou de l’autre.
Pour repositionner le titre :
m Faites glisser le titre à l’emplacement où vous voulez qu’il apparaisse dans votre vidéo.
Vous pouvez même le placer de façon qu’il chevauche deux clips.
Pour modifier un titre déjà créé :
m Double-cliquez sur l’icône du titre et apportez vos modifications dans le visualiseur.
Pour supprimer un titre :
m Sélectionnez l’icône du titre et appuyez sur la touche Suppr.
Ajout d’effets sonores et de commentaires à votre projet
Vous pouvez ajouter un effet sonore ou un enregistrement de commentaire à votre
projet et l’ancrer à une image vidéo spécifique afin qu’il démarre et s’arrête aux emplacements voulus. Vous pouvez utiliser un fichier audio de votre bibliothèque iTunes ou
un effet sonore disponible dans les dossiers Effets sonores. Vous pouvez enregistrer un
commentaire directement sur la vidéo dans iMovie.
Pour ajouter un effet sonore :
1 Choisissez Fenêtre > « Musique et effets sonores » ou cliquez sur le bouton « Musique
et effets sonores » de la barre d’outils iMovie.
2 Cliquez sur un dossier d’effets sonores pour afficher une liste d’effets ou utilisez le champ
de recherche au bas de la sous-fenêtre pour trouver un fichier audio par son nom.
Cliquez sur un fichier audio pour en obtenir un aperçu sonore.
3 Sélectionnez un fichier audio et faites-le glisser là où vous voulez commencer sa
lecture dans votre projet iMovie.
Le pointeur se transforme pour vous permettre de faire glisser
les extrémités de l’icône
du titre.44 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Une icône de clip audio verte apparaît sous les clips vidéo.
4 Pour repositionner le clip audio sur la vidéo, faites-le glisser là où vous voulez
commencer sa lecture dans votre film.
5 Pour le raccourcir, faites glisser la fin du clip vers la gauche.
Pour enregistrer un commentaire :
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Voix commentaire pour ouvrir la fenêtre Voix hors-champ.
2 Sélectionnez le microphone que vous voulez utiliser dans le menu local Enregistrer
depuis.
3 Faites glisser le curseur Volume d’entrée vers la droite ou vers la gauche :
 Si vous avez une voix douce, faites glisser le curseur Volume d’entrée vers la droite
pour augmenter le volume de l’enregistrement.
 Si vous avez une voix forte, faites-le glisser vers la gauche pour le diminuer.
4 Faites glisser le curseur Réduction de bruit au maximum vers la droite pour éliminer
les bruits ambiants autant que possible.
Si vous voulez conserver un peu de bruit de fond dans votre enregistrement, faites
glisser le curseur vers la gauche.
5 Sélectionnez « Amélioration de la voix » si vous voulez adoucir le son de la voix
enregistrée.
6 Si vous souhaitez entendre l’audio tout en enregistrant votre voix hors-champ, cochez
la case « Lire l’audio du projet lors de l’enregistrement » et branchez des écouteurs afin
que l’audio ne passe pas par le micro. Pour couper l’audio alors que vous enregistrez
votre voix hors-champ, décochez la case.
7 Lorsque vous êtes prêt à commencer, cliquez sur le point du clip où vous voulez
commencer le commentaire. iMovie compte à rebours de trois à un.
Icône d’effet sonore
Indicateurs de niveau
sonore Gauche et DroiteChapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 45
8 Commencez à parler lorsque vous y êtes invité.
Parlez fort et distinctement dans le microphone de l’ordinateur, en veillant à ce que les
indicateurs de niveau Droite et Gauche restent dans le vert. La couleur jaune indique
que vous parlez légèrement trop fort ; rouge indique que vous parlez beaucoup trop
fort et que votre voix sera déformée (“hachée”) dans l’enregistrement.
9 Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, cliquez n’importe où dans la fenêtre iMovie ou appuyez
sur la barre d’espace.
Pour raccourcir un commentaire :
m Faites glisser la fin de l’icône de commentaire vers la gauche.
Il n’est pas possible d’allonger le commentaire au-delà de sa longueur d’origine.
Pour déplacer un commentaire dans votre projet :
m Faites glisser le clip audio jusqu’à l’image vidéo sur laquelle vous voulez que sa lecture
commence.
Pour supprimer un commentaire :
m Sélectionnez son icône et appuyez sur la touche Suppr.
Ajout de photos avec des effets d’animation
Pour ajouter un peu de variété à vos films, vous pouvez ajouter des photos de votre
bibliothèque iPhoto. Les images fixes s’animent lorsque vous vous servez des effets
Ken Burns de panoramique et de zoom puisque ceux-ci donnent l’impression que la
caméra balaie l’image fixe tout en s’en approchant ou en s’en éloignant.
Pour ajouter une photo :
1 Sélectionnez Fenêtre > Photos ou cliquez sur le bouton Photos de la barre d’outils iMovie.
2 Dans la sous-fenêtre Photos, recherchez celle que vous voulez.
Vous pouvez utiliser le champ de recherche au bas de la sous-fenêtre pour trouver une
photo par son nom.
3 Faites glisser la photo jusqu’à l’endroit où vous souhaitez la voir apparaître dans votre
projet.
Par défaut, iMovie définit une durée de 4 secondes pour les photos et applique l’effet
Ken Burns. En fonction de la configuration du curseur des vignettes de votre projet,
la photo peut se dérouler comme une pellicule.
4 Pour modifier la durée de la photo dans votre projet, cliquez sur le bouton Durée dans
le coin inférieur de la photo (il apparaît lorsque vous placez le pointeur presque à la fin
du clip) et tapez le nombre de secondes que vous voulez que votre photo reste à
l’écran dans votre film.
Si l’effet Ken Burns dans votre photo ne vous plaît pas, vous pouvez le modifier ou le
supprimer.46 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Pour modifier l’effet Ken Burns :
1 Sélectionnez la photo dans votre projet, puis cliquez sur le bouton Rogner de la barre
d’outils d’iMovie.
2 Dans le visualiseur, cliquez sur Ken Burns.
Deux rectangles de rognage apparaissent dans le visualiseur. Le rectangle de rognage
vert indique l’endroit où commence l’effet Ken Burns et le rectangle de rognage rouge
celui où il se termine. Vous pouvez rapidement échanger les positions des rectangles
de rognage rouge et vert en cliquant sur le petit bouton orné de deux flèches à l’inté-
rieur du rectangle de rognage sélectionné .
3 Faites glisser pour redimensionner et repositionner le rectangle de rognage vert de
façon à mettre en surbrillance le début souhaité pour l’effet Ken Burns.
4 Faites-le glisser pour redimensionner et repositionner le rectangle rouge jusqu’à ce qu’il
affiche en surbrillance la position finale de l’effet Ken Burns.
Les rectangles de rognage conservent toujours les proportions que vous avez choisies
pour votre projet.
5 Pour afficher l’aperçu de votre travail, cliquez sur le bouton Lecture.
Faites glisser et redimensionnez le rectangle de rognage rouge pour définir
la position finale.
Cliquez ici pour faire
pivoter toute l’image.
Cliquez sur ce bouton
pour rogner l’image sans
effet d’animation.
Cliquez sur ce bouton
pour rétablir l’image de
sorte qu’elle retrouve sa
taille complète et soit
dénuée d’effets d’animation.
Faites glisser et redimensionnez
le rectangle de rognage vert pour
définir la position de début.
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour créer
ou modifier l’effet Ken Burns.
Cliquez sur ce
bouton lorsque
vous avez terminé.
Cliquez sur ce bouton
pour afficher un aperçu
de votre travail.
Cliquez pour intervertir la
position des points de
début et de fin.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 47
6 Cliquez sur Terminé lorsque vous avez obtenu le résultat souhaité.
Une icône Rogner apparaît au début du clip. La même icône de rognage indique que le
clip a simplement été rogné, qu’on l’a fait pivoté ou que l’effet Ken Burns lui a été ajouté.
Cliquez dessus pour modifier ou supprimer le rognage à tout moment. Ouvrez l’éditeur de rognage et cliquez sur Adapter pour supprimer l’effet Ken Burns et restaurer
la taille d’origine de votre vidéo à tout moment.
Vous pouvez également faire pivoter une image dans iMovie. Pour savoir comment
procéder, recherchez les rubriques sur le pivotement des images dans l’Aide iMovie.
Étape 5 : partager votre film
Avec iMovie, vous pouvez partager votre film de différentes façons : dans un format
adapté pour une visualisation sur le web, sur votre ordinateur, sur un iPod, sur iPhone,
sur une Apple TV ou sur tout autre appareil. Vous pouvez même publier votre film terminé directement dans votre galerie MobileMe ou sur YouTube. Quelle que soit la
manière que vous choisissez pour visualiser votre film, iMovie permet d’exporter facilement le fichier d’un film au format adéquat.
Au cours de cette étape, vous allez finaliser votre film dans n’importe laquelle des
quatre tailles, chacune étant adaptée à la plupart des utilisations.
Icône Rogner
Pivotement et rognage des images
Les boutons de rotation qui apparaissent lorsque vous rognez des images ou lorsque
vous appliquez l’effet Ken Burns permettent de modifier l’orientation de l’image par
tranches de 90 degrés. Si votre photo ou votre vidéo a été prise avec la caméra
retournée, vous pouvez la redresser.
De la même manière, vous pouvez rogner des photos ou des vidéos qui n’ont pas les
proportions choisies pour votre projet. Lorsque vous exportez votre film, il prend les
dimensions de la vidéo ou de la photo la plus large qu’il contient, ce qui peut entraî-
ner l’apparition de bandes noires à gauche et à droite de l’image (« pillar box ») ou en
haut et en bas de l’image (« letterbox »). Le rognage de photos ou de vidéos pour
s’adapter aux mêmes dimensions évite ce phénomène.48 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Publication en vue d’un affichage sur votre iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV
Si vous voulez regarder votre film sur votre iPod, votre iPhone ou votre Apple TV,
vous devez d’abord transférer votre film terminé dans iTunes.
Pour créer un film prêt à être visualisé sur iPod, iPhone ou Apple TV :
1 Choisissez Partager > iTunes.
2 Sélectionnez la ou les tailles de film souhaitées.
Les films de taille moyenne sont préférables pour la lecture sur un iPod ; les films de
grande taille sont particulièrement indiqués si vous avez l’intention de les regarder sur
un téléviseur haute définition (HDTV). Pour votre iPhone, il est recommandé de créer
des films de petite taille et adaptés aux appareils mobiles. Il se peut que certaines
options relatives au choix de la taille ne soient pas disponibles. Cela est dû au fait que
la taille des données originales du projet n’est pas suffisante pour un rendu dans la ou
les tailles en question. Si vos données d’origine ne sont pas en haute définition, iMovie
ne produira pas le film en grande taille.
Le rendu du projet peut prendre un certain temps, notamment si vous avez choisi de
rendre plusieurs tailles à la fois. Une fois rendus, vos films sont affichés dans votre
bibliothèque de films iTunes d’où vous pouvez les télécharger sur votre iPod ou votre
iPhone, ou les regarder sur votre téléviseur haute définition via Apple TV.
Envoi de votre film terminé vers iDVD, iWeb ou d’autres applications
Une fois que le montage de votre film est terminé dans iMovie, vous pouvez le publier
dans le navigateur multimédia d’où il pourra être utilisé avec d’autres applications Apple.
Pour créer un film prêt à être utilisé avec iWeb, iDVD, GarageBand et d’autres
applications :
1 Choisissez Partager > Navigateur multimédia.
2 Sélectionnez la ou les tailles souhaitées pour votre film en fonction de l’utilisation que
vous comptez en faire.
Il se peut que certaines options relatives au choix de la taille ne soient pas disponibles.
Cela est dû au fait que la taille des données originales du projet n’est pas suffisante
pour un rendu dans la ou les tailles en question. Si vos données d’origine ne sont pas
en haute définition, iMovie ne produira pas le film en grande taille.
Le rendu du projet peut prendre un certain temps, notamment si vous avez choisi
de rendre plusieurs tailles à la fois. Une fois rendus, vos films apparaîtront dans le
Navigateur multimédia et vous pourrez les utiliser avec iDVD, iWeb et GarageBand.
Lorsque votre projet est finalisé pour le partage, des icônes apparaissent à côté de son
nom dans la Bibliothèque de projets pour indiquer les tailles finalisées.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 49
Si vous voulez encore modifier votre projet, iMovie vous avertit qu’il sera différent des
versions partagées dans iTunes et dans le Navigateur multimédia. Les icônes de partage disparaissent tant que vous n’avez pas à nouveau finalisé le projet. Si vous finalisez à nouveau le projet, les versions finalisées précédentes sont supprimées.
Si vous souhaitez conserver des copies de vos films rendus de façon à pouvoir y accé-
der sans utiliser le Navigateur multimédia ni iTunes, reportez-vous aux rubriques de
l’Aide d’iMovie qui traitent du partage et de l’exportation.
Publication directe sur le web
Si vous possédez un compte MobileMe, vous pouvez publier votre film dès qu’il est
terminé.
Pour publier votre film directement dans votre galerie MobileMe :
1 Sélectionnez votre projet dans la bibliothèque des projets, puis choisissez Partager >
Galerie MobileMe
2 Tapez un nom pour votre film dans le champ Titre, puis, si vous le souhaitez, saisissez
dans le champ Description une brève description que les spectateurs pourront lire.
3 Sélectionnez une taille pour la publication de façon à optimiser l’affichage pour vos
amis ou votre famille qui ont des connexions Internet plus ou moins rapides.
4 Si vous voulez que les gens puissent télécharger des copies de votre film, cochez
la case « Autoriser le téléchargement de la séquence ».
5 Si vous voulez limiter l’accès de votre film aux personnes autorisées, cochez la case «
Masquer le projet sur la page d’accueil de ma galerie ».
6 Cliquez sur Publier. iMovie télécharge automatiquement votre film vers votre galerie
MobileMe.
Une fois que le film a été téléchargé dans votre galerie MobileMe, la barre de titre du
projet dans iMovie affiche « Publié sur MobileMe ». Des boutons permettant d'accéder
à la page web du film sont également affichés et des notifications sont envoyées à vos
amis.
Indique que le projet est rendu dans n’importe laquelle des quatre tailles
Indique que le projet est publié sur le web
Indique que le projet a été modifié depuis sa dernière publication sur le web50 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
7 Pour visiter la page web de votre film, cliquez sur Visiter.
8 Pour informer vos amis que vous avez publié ce nouveau film, cliquez sur
« Recommander à un ami ».
Si vous n’avez pas de compte MobileMe, vous pouvez vous abonner à l’adresse
www.apple.com/fr/mobileme. Vous pouvez aussi publier votre film sur YouTube.
Pour publier votre projet sur YouTube :
1 Sélectionnez votre projet dans la bibliothèque des projets, puis choisissez Partager >
YouTube.
2 Sélectionnez votre compte dans le menu local Compte.
Si vous n’avez pas de compte YouTube, vous pouvez en ouvrir un en cliquant sur
Ajouter et en créant un compte sur le site web YouTube.
3 Tapez un nom pour votre film dans le champ Titre, puis saisissez une brève description
que les spectateurs liront dans le champ Description.
4 Tapez des mots-clés dans le champ Étiquettes de façon que les utilisateurs trouvent
facilement votre film s’ils le cherchent sur le site YouTube.
5 Sélectionnez une taille de publication. La taille Moyenne est recommandée.
6 Si vous ne voulez pas que votre film soit publiquement disponible, sélectionnez
« Rendre ce film privé ».
7 Cliquez sur Suivant, puis sur Publier pour accepter les conditions du service offert par
YouTube. iMovie télécharge automatiquement votre film sur le site web de YouTube.
Lorsque le film est téléchargé sur le site web YouTube, la barre de titre du projet dans
iMovie affiche « Publié sur YouTube ». Elle affiche également les boutons qui vous amè-
nent à la page web du film et envoie des notifications à vos amis.
8 Pour visiter la page web de votre film, cliquez sur Visiter.
9 Pour informer vos amis que vous avez publié ce nouveau film, cliquez sur
« Recommander à un ami ».
Lorsque votre projet est publié, une icône s’affiche à côté de son nom dans la Bibliothèque de projets pour indiquer sa publication. Si vous voulez modifier votre projet par
la suite, iMovie vous avertit qu’il sera différent de la version publiée ; un signal d’alerte
apparaît au-dessus de l’icône de publication tant que vous n’avez pas à nouveau publié
le film.Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie 51
Poursuivez votre exploration de iMovie
Félicitations, vous avez terminé votre initiation ! Maintenant que vous vous êtes familiarisé avec les principaux outils et fonctionnalités de iMovie, vous pouvez continuer à
importer et à profiter de vos vidéos quand vous le souhaitez, et à créer et à partager
d’autres films.
Dans l’Aide iMovie, vous trouverez d’autres conseils pour travailler avec des vidéos et
du son, ainsi que bien d’autres choses encore, entre autres :
 Régler les couleurs et la luminosité, ainsi que d’autres paramètres de qualité des images.
 Repérer votre vidéo avec des mots-clés pour retrouver facilement des moments
particuliers.
 Personnaliser votre espace de travail en fonction de votre style de travail.
 Partager votre film avec une multitude de formats et d’appareils
iMovie vous permet de créer des films dans de nombreux formats différents pour
que vous puissiez le visionner sur pratiquement tout type de support numérique,
et notamment :
 l’envoyer par courrier électronique ;
 le graver sur un DVD à l’aide d’iDVD ;
 l’enregistrer sous forme de séquence QuickTime sous divers formats.
Pour en savoir plus sur le partage de films, consultez les rubriques traitant du partage des films dans l’Aide iMovie.
iMovie offre des outils sophistiqués afin de travailler plus rapidement et plus facilement avec votre vidéo, une fois que vous connaissez les bases. Grâce à ces outils, vous
pouvez effectuer la plupart des tâches mentionnées dans ce guide d’initiation, y compris l’amélioration et le repérage de votre vidéo à l’aide de mots-clés. Pour en savoir
plus sur les outils sophistiqués, consultez les rubriques traitant de leur utilisation dans
l’Aide iMovie.52 Chapitre 2 Apprendre à utiliser iMovie
Ressources supplémentaires
Vous pouvez consulter diverses sources pour obtenir de l’aide supplémentaire sur l’utilisation de iMovie :
 Aide à l’écran : iMovie est fourni avec un système d’aide intégré. Lorsque l’application iMovie est ouverte, choisissez Aide > Aide iMovie. Lorsque l’Aide s’ouvre, tapez
un mot ou une expression dans le champ de recherche situé en haut de la page ou
cliquez sur l’une des zones de rubriques pour trouver des informations détaillées sur
un sujet en particulier.
 Didacticiels multimédias (www.apple.com/fr/ilife/tutorials/imovie/) : ces courtes
initiations à la vidéo montrent comment effectuer des tâches courantes dans iMovie.
Pour y accéder, choisissez Aide, puis cliquez sur How-To Videos. (Ces initiations vidéo
sont disponibles uniquement dans certaines langues.)
 Site web d’assistance iMovie (www.apple.com/fr/support/imovie) : consultez ce
site pour accéder à des forums de discussion, ainsi qu’à des informations de dépannage et à des mises à jour de logiciels.www.apple.com/ilife/imovie
© 2008 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés.
Apple, le logo Apple, Apple TV, FireWire, GarageBand, iDVD, iLife, iMac, iMovie, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iSight, iTunes et QuickTime sont des
marques d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. MobileMe est une marque de service d’Apple Inc. Les autres noms de
produit et d’entreprise mentionnés dans le présent document peuvent être des marques appartenant à leur détenteurs respectifs.
F019-1282
iPod shuffle
Guide des fonctions2
1 Table des matières
Chapitre 1 3 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle
4 Vue d’ensemble de l’iPod shuffle
4 Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle
5 Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle
7 Recharge de la batterie
8 Voyants d’état
Chapitre 2 11 Chargement et lecture de musique
11 À propos d’iTunes
12 Importation de musique dans votre bibliothèque iTunes
15 Organisation de votre musique
16 Chargement de musique sur l’iPod shuffle
19 Lecture de musique
Chapitre 3 23 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle
23 Utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe
Chapitre 4 24 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle
24 Écouteurs Apple Earphones
25 Le socle pour iPod shuffle
25 L’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter
25 Accessoires disponibles
Chapitre 5 26 Astuces et dépannage
30 Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle
Chapitre 6 31 Sécurité et manipulation
31 Informations importantes relatives à la sécurité
33 Informations importantes sur la manipulation
Chapitre 7 34 En savoir plus, service et assistance1
3
1 Notions élémentaires
de l’iPod shuffle
Apple vous félicite pour l’acquisition de votre iPod shuffle.
Lisez ce chapitre pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalités
de l’iPod shuffle, sur la manière d’utiliser ses commandes
et plus encore.
Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle, vous devez déposer des morceaux et d’autres fichiers audio
sur votre ordinateur puis charger ces fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle.
Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle pour :
 charger des chansons et les écouter lorsque vous êtes en déplacement ;
 écouter des podcasts, des sortes d’émissions de radio téléchargeables sur Internet ;
 écouter des livres audio achetés sur l’iTunes Store ou audible.com ;
 stocker ou sauvegarder des fichiers et autres données en utilisant l’iPod shuffle
comme disque externe.4 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle
Vue d’ensemble de l’iPod shuffle
Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle
Les commandes simples de l’iPod shuffle vous permettent de lire des morceaux,
des livres audio et des podcasts aisément.
Port de sortie casque
Bouton Précédent/
Retour rapide
Bouton
Lecture/Pause
Bouton Suivant/
Avance rapide
Bouton Baisser
le volume (-)
Bouton d'alimentation
Voyant d'état supérieur
Bouton Augmenter
le volume (+)
Bouton de
mode aléatoire
Voyant d'état inférieur
OFF
Pour : procédez ainsi :
Activer ou désactiver
l’iPod shuffle
Faites glisser le bouton d’alimentation (la couleur verte indique
que l’iPod shuffle est activé).
Lancer la lecture d’un morceau
(ou autre)
Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’).
Mettre un morceau en pause Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’).
Régler le volume Appuyez sur les boutons Augmenter le volume (?)
ou Baisser le volume (D).
Définir l’ordre de lecture
des morceaux
Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire (vers ¡ pour activer
la lecture aléatoire, vers / pour la désactiver et lire dans l’ordre).
Passer à la piste suivante Appuyez sur Suivant/Avance rapide (‘).
Revenir au début d’une piste Appuyez sur Précédent/Retour rapide (]).
Lancer la lecture de la piste
précédente
Appuyez deux fois sur Précédent/Retour rapide (]).
Aller à la première piste Appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’),
rapidement.
Effectuer une avance ou
un retour rapide
Maintenez enfoncé Suivant/Avance rapide (‘) ou Précédent/
Retour rapide (]).Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 5
Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle
Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur pour y charger des morceaux et d’autres
fichiers audio ainsi que pour recharger sa batterie. Déconnectez l’iPod shuffle lorsque
vous avez terminé.
Connexion de l’iPod shuffle
Pour connecter l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur :
m Branchez le socle de l’iPod shuffle, inclus, sur un port USB de votre ordinateur puis
placez l’iPod shuffle sur le socle.
Remarque : branchez le socle sur un port USB à forte alimentation pour recharger
la batterie de l’iPod shuffle. Il est recommandé d’utiliser un port USB 2.0. N’utilisez
pas le port USB du clavier.
La première fois que vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur l’ordinateur, l’Assistant
réglages de l’iPod vous aide à configurer l’iPod shuffle et à le synchroniser avec
votre bibliothèque iTunes.
Désactiver les boutons
de l’iPod shuffle
(pour ne pas les activer
par mégarde)
Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant
environ trois secondes (jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état soit
de couleur orange et clignote trois fois).
Répétez l’opération pour activer à nouveau les boutons
(le voyant d’état passe alors au vert et clignote trois fois).
réinitialiser l’iPod shuffle
(si votre iPod shuffle ne répond plus)
Retirez l’iPod shuffle du socle. Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez
5 secondes puis rallumez-le.
rechercher le numéro de série
de l’iPod shuffle
Observez l’encoche située sous la pince de l’ iPod shuffleou bien
sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes
(lorsque l’iPod shuffle est connecté à l’ordinateur) et cliquez sur
l’onglet Réglages.
Pour : procédez ainsi :6 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle
Important : une fois l’iPod shuffle synchronisé avec la bibliothèque iTunes d’un ordinateur, un message s’affichera chaque fois que vous brancherez l’iPod shuffle sur un autre
ordinateur et vous demandera si vous souhaitez le synchroniser avec la bibliothèque
de cet ordinateur. Si vous voulez conserver la musique actuellement présente sur
l’iPod shuffle, cliquez sur Annuler. Vous pouvez également cliquez sur Transférer les
achats, ce qui vous permettra de conserver le contenu de l’iPod shuffle et de copier les
morceaux achetés qui y sont présents sur la bibliothèque iTunes du nouvel ordinateur.
Pour en savoir plus, consultez l’Aide iTunes.
Déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle
Il est important de ne pas débrancher l’iPod shuffle de votre ordinateur lorsque des
fichiers audio sont en cours de chargement ou lorsque l’iPod shuffle est utilisé en tant
que disque externe. Pour savoir si vous pouvez débrancher l’iPod shuffle, observez
la partie supérieure de la fenêtre d’iTunes ou le voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle.
Important : si le message « Ne pas déconnecter » s’affiche dans iTunes ou si le voyant
d’état de l’iPod shuffle est de couleur orange et clignote, vous devez éjecter l’iPod shuffle
avant de le débrancher. Dans le cas contraire, vous pourriez endommager les fichiers de
l’iPod shuffle.
Si vous activez le mode d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle comme disque (voir la page 23),
vous devrez toujours éjecter l’iPod shuffle avant de le débrancher.
Pour éjecter l’iPod shuffle :
m Dans iTunes, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection (C) situé à côté de l’iPod shuffle dans
la sous-fenêtre Source.
Si vous utilisez un Mac : pour éjecter l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez également faire glisser
l’icône iPod shuffle du bureau vers la Corbeille.
Si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows, vous pouvez aussi éjecter l’iPod shuffle en cliquant
sur l’icône « Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité » située dans la zone de notification du PC et en sélectionnant votre iPod shuffle.
Pour débrancher l’iPod shuffle :
m Retirez l’iPod shuffle du socle.Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 7
Recharge de la batterie
L’iPod shuffle dispose d’une batterie interne et rechargeable.
Pour obtenir des résultats optimaux, rechargez entièrement la batterie lors de
la première utilisation de l’iPod shuffle. Il faut environ deux heures pour recharger
une batterie vide jusqu’à 80 % et quatre heures pour la recharger complètement.
Si l’iPod shuffle n’a pas été utilisé pendant un moment, il est possible qu’une recharge
de sa batterie soit nécessaire.
Pour recharger la batterie via votre ordinateur :
m Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation à l’aide du socle de
l’iPod shuffle, inclus. Votre ordinateur doit être allumé et non pas en mode veille
(certains modèles de Macintosh permettent cependant de recharger l’iPod shuffle
même en mode veille).
Lorsque la batterie est en cours de recharge, le voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle est de
couleur orange. Une fois la batterie complètement rechargée, le voyant passe au vert.
Remarque : si l’iPod shuffle est utilisé en tant que disque dur (voir la page 23) ou si des
morceaux ou des réglages sont en cours de chargement sur l’iPod shuffle depuis iTunes,
le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote, ce qui vous indique qu’il est nécessaire
d’éjecter l’iPod shuffle avant de le débrancher.
Si le voyant d’état ne s’allume pas, il est possible que l’iPod shuffle ne soit pas connecté
à un port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation. Essayez de le connecter à un autre port USB de
votre ordinateur.
Remarque : vous pouvez charger de la musique lorsque la batterie est en cours
de recharge.
Si vous souhaitez recharger l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous n’êtes pas devant votre ordinateur,
vous pouvez brancher l’iPod shuffle sur un adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter,
disponible à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/.8 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle
Pour recharger la batterie via un adaptateur iPod USB Power Adapter :
1 Connectez l’adaptateur CA à une prise électrique (si nécessaire).
2 Branchez le connecteur USB du socle de l’iPod shuffle sur l’adaptateur secteur.
3 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur à une prise de courant en état de fonctionnement.
4 Placez l’iPod shuffle sur le socle.
Vous pouvez déconnecter et utiliser l’iPod shuffle avant qu’il ne soit complètement
rechargé.
Remarque : les batteries rechargeables ont un nombre limité de cycles de recharge.
La durée de vie de la batterie et le nombre de cycles de recharge varient en fonction
de l’utilisation et des réglages du matériel. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur
le site www.apple.com/fr/batteries.
Vérification de l’état de la batterie
Lorsque vous allumez l’iPod shuffle ou lorsque vous le débranchez de l’ordinateur ou
de l’adaptateur secteur, le voyant d’état vous indique quelle est la charge approximative de la batterie. Consultez le tableau de la section suivante. Si l’iPod shuffle est déjà
allumé, il est possible de vérifier l’état de la batterie sans interrompre la lecture en
cours : pour ce faire, éteignez puis rallumez très rapidement l’iPod shuffle.
Voyants d’état
L’iPod shuffle est doté de deux voyants d’état : un en haut et un autre en bas. Ils vous
permettent de savoir quand un bouton est activé, de connaître l’état de la batterie, de
savoir si le mode d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque est activé ou encore
de détecter un éventuel problème.
AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter, lisez
les consignes de sécurité de la page 32 pour savoir comment vous en servir.
Adaptateur CA
Adaptateur secteur USB iPod
Câble du socle de l'iPod shuffleChapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle 9
À l’allumage ou lors du débranchement de l’iPod
vert Charge suffisante (entre 30 et 100 %)
orange Charge faible (entre 10 et 30 %)
rouge Charge très faible (moins de 10 %)
inactif Aucune charge
vert et deux fois orange en
alternance (10 secondes)
ERREUR : l’iPod shuffle doit être
restauré
Lorsque l’iPod est branché
orange (en permanence) En cours de recharge
vert (en permanence) Entièrement rechargé
orange et clignotant
(en permanence)
Ne le débranchez pas (synchronisation avec iTunes en cours ou mode
d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle comme
disque activé)
À l’appui sur les boutons
vert Lecture (’)
vert (1 minute) Pause (’)
Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton :
vert, puis trois fois orange Boutons désactivés
orange, puis trois fois vert Boutons activés
vert Augmentation (?) ou baisse (D)
du volume
trois fois orange Limite de volume fixée par l’utilisateur atteinte.
Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton :
vert Augmentation (?) ou baisse (D)
du volume
inactif Volume maximum ou coupé.
trois fois orange Limite de volume fixée par l’utilisateur atteinte
vert Piste précédente (])
Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton :
vert Retour rapide (])
vert Piste suivante (])
Si vous maintenez enfoncé le bouton :
vert Avance rapide (‘)
N’importe quel
bouton
orange Pas d’action en cours (les boutons
sont désactivés)
vert et orange
en alternance (2 secondes)
ERREUR : pas de musique chargée
sur l’appareil10 Chapitre 1 Notions élémentaires de l’iPod shuffle
Lorsque l’iPod shuffle est en cours de lecture
rouge et clignotant
(en permanence)
Batterie presque déchargée2
11
2 Chargement et lecture
de musique
Grâce à l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez emporter avec vous toute
votre musique, où que vous alliez. Lisez ce chapitre pour
apprendre à charger de la musique et à l’écouter sur votre
iPod shuffle.
Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle en important tout d’abord des morceaux, des livres
audio et des podcasts (sortes d’émissions radio) sur votre ordinateur puis en les chargeant sur l’iPod shuffle. Lisez ce qui suit pour en savoir plus sur les étapes de ce processus, notamment sur :
 le transfert de musique à partir de votre collection de CD, votre disque dur ou
l’iTunes Store (qui fait partie d’iTunes et n’est disponible que dans certains pays)
vers l’application iTunes de votre ordinateur ;
 l’organisation de votre musique et des autres fichiers audio en liste de lectures ;
 le chargement de morceaux, de livres audio et de podcasts sur l’iPod shuffle ;
 l’écoute de musique ou de tout autre fichier audio lorsque vous êtes en déplacement.
À propos d’iTunes
iTunes est l’application que vous devez utiliser pour synchroniser de la musique, des
livres audio et des podcasts avec l’iPod shuffle. Elle s’ouvre automatiquement dès que
vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
Ce guide vous explique comment utiliser iTunes pour importer des morceaux et
d’autres fichiers audio sur votre ordinateur, créer des compilations personnelles de vos
morceaux préférés (appelées listes de lecture), les charger sur l’iPod shuffle et définir
les réglages de l’iPod shuffle.
iTunes possède également bien d’autres fonctionnalités. Pour en savoir plus, ouvrez
iTunes puis choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes.12 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique
Importation de musique dans votre bibliothèque iTunes
Pour écouter de la musique sur l’iPod shuffle, il vous faut tout d’abord la transférer
depuis la bibliothèque iTunes de votre ordinateur.
Il existe trois façons d’importer de la musique dans la bibliothèque iTunes :
 En achetant de la musique et des livres audio ou en téléchargeant des podcasts en
ligne à partir de l’iTunes Store.
 En y important de la musique à partir de CD audio.
 En y ajoutant de la musique et des données audio déjà stockées sur votre ordinateur.
Achat de musique et téléchargement de podcasts via l’iTunes Store
Si vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet, vous pouvez facilement acheter et télé-
charger des morceaux, des albums et des livres audio en ligne via l’iTunes Store. Vous
pouvez également vous abonner à des podcasts, des sortes d’émissions de radio,
et les télécharger.
Pour acheter de la musique en ligne via l’iTunes Store, vous devez configurer un compte
Apple dans iTunes, rechercher les morceaux voulus, puis les acheter. Si vous disposez
déjà d’un compte Apple ou d’un compte America Online (AOL, disponible uniquement
dans certains pays), vous pouvez vous en servir pour vous inscrire à l’iTunes Store et
acheter des morceaux.
Pour entrer dans l’iTunes Store :
m Ouvrez iTunes, puis :
 Si vous disposez déjà d’un compte iTunes, choisissez Store > Ouvrir une session.
 Si vous n’avez pas encore de compte iTunes, choisissez Store > Créer un compte. Suivez
alors les instructions à l’écran pour configurer un compte Apple ou bien saisissez
les données de votre compte Apple ou AOL existant.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 13
Pour rechercher des morceaux, des livres audio et des podcasts :
Vous pouvez parcourir l’iTunes Store ou y faire une recherche pour trouver un album,
un morceau ou un artiste. Ouvrez iTunes puis cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sousfenêtre Source.
 Pour parcourir l’iTunes Store, choisissez un genre musical dans le menu local Genre,
cliquez sur l’un des morceaux ou l’une des publications ou bien cliquez sur le bouton
Explorer dans la fenêtre iTunes Store.
 Pour naviguer à la recherche de podcasts, cliquez sur le lien Podcasts situé dans
la fenêtre principale de l’iTunes Store.
 Pour faire une recherche dans l’iTunes Store, tapez le nom d’un album, d’un morceau,
d’un artiste ou d’un compositeur dans le champ Rechercher iTunes Store.
 Pour limiter votre recherche, tapez du texte dans la zone Rechercher iTunes Store,
appuyez sur la touche Retour ou Entrée de votre clavier, puis cliquez sur les éléments
de la barre de recherche. Par exemple, pour limiter la recherche à des titres de
morceaux et à des albums, cliquez sur MUSIQUE.
 Pour rechercher une combinaison d’éléments, cliquez sur Recherche avancée dans
la fenêtre de l’iTunes Store.
 Pour revenir à la page principale de l’iTunes Store, cliquez sur le bouton Accueil dans
l’angle supérieur gauche de la fenêtre principale de l’iTunes Store.
Pour acheter un morceau, un album ou un livre audio :
1 Cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sous-fenêtre Source puis recherchez l’élément que
vous souhaitez acheter.
Vous pouvez double-cliquer sur un morceau ou un autre élément pour en écouter
un extrait et vous assurer que c’est bien celui que vous voulez.
2 Cliquez sur Acheter le morceau, Acheter l’album ou Acheter le livre.
L’élément est alors téléchargé sur votre ordinateur et le prix est débité de la carte de
crédit indiquée sur votre compte Apple ou AOL.
Pour télécharger un podcast ou vous y abonner :
1 Cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
2 Cliquez sur le lien Podcasts dans la partie gauche de la page principale de l’iTunes Store.
3 Recherchez le podcast que vous souhaitez télécharger.
 Pour télécharger un seul épisode de podcast, cliquez sur le bouton Obtenir l’épisode
situé à côté de l’épisode.
 Pour vous abonner à un podcast, cliquez sur le bouton S’abonner situé à côté de
l’image du podcast. iTunes télécharge l’épisode le plus récent. Les nouveaux épisodes disponibles seront automatiquement téléchargés sur iTunes lorsque vous vous
connecterez à Internet.14 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique
Importation de musique dans iTunes à partir de CD audio
Suivez ces instructions pour importer de la musique de vos CD dans iTunes.
Pour importer de la musique dans iTunes à partir d’un CD audio :
1 Insérez un CD dans votre ordinateur puis ouvrez iTunes.
Si vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet, iTunes obtient le nom des morceaux sur
Internet (s’ils sont disponibles) et les affiche dans la fenêtre.
Si vous ne disposez pas de connexion à Internet, vous pouvez dans un premier temps
importer vos CD puis, ultérieurement, lorsque l’ordinateur est connecté à Internet,
choisir Avancé > Obtenir le nom des pistes du CD. iTunes obtiendra alors le nom des
pistes des CD importés.
Si le nom des pistes du CD n’est pas disponible en ligne, vous pouvez les saisir manuellement. Consultez « Saisie du nom des morceaux et d’autres informations » à la page 14.
Une fois les données des morceaux saisies, vous pouvez parcourir les morceaux dans
iTunes par titre, artiste, album ou autre critère.
2 Cliquez pour supprimer la coche située en regard des morceaux que vous ne souhaitez
pas importer depuis le CD.
3 Cliquez sur le bouton Importer un CD. La zone d’affichage située en haut de la fenêtre
iTunes indique le temps nécessaire à l’importation des différents morceaux.
Par défaut, iTunes lit les morceaux à mesure qu’ils sont importés. Si vous importez un
grand nombre de morceaux, il est possible que vous souhaitiez arrêter la lecture des
morceaux afin d’améliorer les performances.
4 Pour éjecter le CD, cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection (C).
5 Répétez ces opérations pour tout autre CD contenant des morceaux que vous
souhaitez importer.
Saisie du nom des morceaux et d’autres informations
Il est possible de saisir manuellement les titres et d’autres informations (y compris des
commentaires) pour les morceaux et les autres éléments de votre bibliothèque iTunes.
Pour saisir manuellement le titre des morceaux et d’autres informations du CD :
1 Sélectionnez la première piste du CD puis sélectionnez Fichier > Obtenir des informations.
2 Cliquez sur Infos.
3 Saisissez les informations concernant le morceau.
4 Cliquez sur Suivant pour saisir les informations concernant la piste suivante.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 15
Ajout de morceaux stockés sur votre ordinateur à la bibliothèque iTunes
Si votre ordinateur contient déjà des fichiers audio numériques, tels que les fichiers MP3,
vous pouvez facilement les ajouter à votre bibliothèque iTunes.
Pour ajouter des morceaux stockés sur votre ordinateur à la bibliothèque iTunes :
m Faites glisser le dossier ou l’unité contenant les fichiers audio vers l’en-tête BIBLIOTHÈQUE
de la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes (ou choisissez Fichier > Ajouter à la bibliothèque,
puis sélectionnez le dossier ou l’unité). Si iTunes prend en charge le format de fichier
des morceaux, ceux-ci sont automatiquement ajoutés à la bibliothèque iTunes.
Vous pouvez également faire glisser individuellement des fichiers audio dans iTunes.
Remarque : avec l’application iTunes pour Windows, vous avez la possibilité de convertir un fichier audio numérique sans protection créé avec Windows Media Player en
format de fichier compatible iTunes (AAC ou MP3, par exemple). Cela peut être utile
si vous disposez des fichiers de musique encodés au format WMA. Pour en savoir plus,
ouvrez iTunes puis choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes.
Organisation de votre musique
Grâce à iTunes, vous pouvez organiser à votre guise des morceaux et d’autres éléments
dans des listes appelées listes de lecture. Vous pouvez par exemple créer des listes de
lecture qui accompagnent votre séance d’exercice physique ou qui correspondent à
une humeur particulière.
Vous pouvez également créer des listes de lecture intelligentes qui se mettront automatiquement à jour selon les règles que vous aurez choisies. Lorsque vous ajoutez
à iTunes des morceaux qui correspondent à ces règles, ils seront automatiquement
ajoutés à la liste de lecture intelligente.
Vous pouvez créer autant de listes de lecture que vous le souhaitez avec n’importe
lequel des morceaux de la bibliothèque iTunes. Le fait d’ajouter un morceau à une
liste de lecture ou de l’en supprimer ne le supprime pas de la bibliothèque iTunes.
Pour créer une liste de lecture dans iTunes :
1 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter (?) ou bien choisissez Fichier > Nouvelle liste de lecture.
2 Tapez le nom de la liste de lecture.
3 Cliquez sur Musique dans la liste BIBLIOTHÈQUE, puis faites glisser un morceau ou un
autre élément vers la liste de lecture.
Pour sélectionner plusieurs morceaux, lorsque vous cliquez sur chaque morceau, maintenez la touche Maj ou Commande (x) enfoncée s’il s’agit d’un Mac, ou la touche Maj
ou Contrôle s’il s’agit d’un PC sous Windows.
Pour créer une liste de lecture intelligente :
m Sélectionnez Fichier > « Nouvelle liste de lecture intelligente » puis définissez les règles
de votre liste de lecture.16 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique
Chargement de musique sur l’iPod shuffle
Une fois votre musique importée et organisée dans iTunes, vous pouvez facilement
la charger sur l’iPod shuffle.
Il est possible de définir le mode de chargement de la musique d’iTunes vers l’iPod shuffle
en branchant ce dernier sur l’ordinateur, en sélectionnant iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre
Source puis en configurant les options situées dans la partie inférieure de la sous-fenêtre
Contenu. Des options supplémentaires concernant le chargement de musique et l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle s’affichent dans la sous-fenêtre Réglages.
Remplissage automatique de l’iPod shuffle
iTunes vous permet de charger de manière automatique une sélection de morceaux sur
l’iPod shuffle en un seul clic. Vous pouvez décider d’obtenir les morceaux de la totalité
de la bibliothèque ou bien d’une seule liste de lecture, mais aussi définir d’autres
options pour la fonction de remplissage automatique.
Pour charger automatiquement de la musique sur l’iPod shuffle :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la liste des dispositifs de la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Contenu.
4 Choisissez la liste de lecture que vous souhaitez charger automatiquement sur l’iPod
dans le menu local.
Pour charger automatiquement les morceaux de la totalité de votre bibliothèque,
sélectionnez Musique.
5 Sélectionnez une des options suivantes, au choix :
Choisir les éléments aléatoirement : iTunes modifie l’ordre des morceaux au cours de leur
chargement sur l’iPod shuffle. Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, iTunes télécharge
les morceaux dans l’ordre où ils apparaissent dans la liste de lecture sélectionnée ou
dans la bibliothèque.
Favoriser les éléments les mieux cotés: iTunes charge automatiquement les morceaux
que vous écoutez le plus souvent.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 17
Remplacer tous les éléments lors du remplissage automatique : iTunes remplace les morceaux présents sur l’iPod shuffle par les nouveaux morceaux sélectionnés. Si cette option
n’est pas sélectionnée, les morceaux déjà chargés sur l’iPod shuffle y demeurent et
iTunes sélectionne de nouveaux morceaux pour remplir l’espace qui y est disponible.
6 Cliquez sur Remplissage auto.
Lorsque le chargement de musique d’iTunes sur l’iPod shuffle est en cours, la fenêtre
d’état d’iTunes affiche sa progression. Une fois le « remplissage automatique » terminé,
le message « L’iPod est à jour » apparaît dans iTunes.
Comment limiter la fonction de remplissage automatique aux éléments cochés
dans la bibliothèque iTunes
Il est possible de configurer iTunes de manière à ce que la fonction de remplissage
automatique charge uniquement les éléments qui, dans la bibliothèque iTunes, sont
cochés. Les éléments désélectionnés seront ignorés.
Pour limiter la fonction de remplissage automatique aux éléments cochés :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Lorsque l’iPod shuffle apparaît dans la fenêtre d’iTunes, sélectionnez-le.
3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages.
4 Sélectionnez l’option « Ne mettre à jour que les morceaux cochés ».
5 Cliquez sur Appliquer.
Chargement manuel de morceaux, de livres audio et de podcasts
Il est possible de charger manuellement des morceaux et des listes de lecture sur
l’iPod shuffle. Si vous souhaitez charger des livres audio et des podcasts sur l’iPod shuffle,
vous devrez obligatoirement le faire manuellement.
Pour charger un morceau ou tout autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez une liste de lecture ou la bibliothèque dans la sous-fenêtre
Source.
3 Faites glisser le morceau (ou l’élément) vers l’iPod shuffle, situé dans la sous-fenêtre
Source.
Vous pouvez également faire glisser des listes de lecture entières afin de les charger sur
l’iPod shuffle.18 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique
Organisation des morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle
Une fois que les morceaux sont chargés sur l’iPod shuffle, vous pouvez les organiser et
les placer dans l’ordre que vous le souhaitez, tout comme vous le faites avec les listes
de lecture dans iTunes.
Pour organiser les morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Contenu.
4 Cliquez sur l’en-tête vide situé au-dessus de la première colonne pour classer
les morceaux par numéro.
5 Faites glisser les morceaux afin de les placer dans l’ordre souhaité.
Comment faire tenir davantage de morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle
Si vous avez importé des morceaux dans iTunes dans un format au débit plus élevé, tel
que le format AIFF, vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’iTunes convertisse automatiquement
les morceaux en fichiers AAC de 128 kbps lors de leur chargement sur l’iPod shuffle.
Cela n’influe pas sur la qualité ni sur la taille des morceaux dans iTunes.
Remarque : les morceaux aux formats non pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle, comme
Apple Lossless, doivent obligatoirement être convertis pour pouvoir être chargés sur
l’iPod shuffle. Pour en savoir plus sur les formats pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle, consultez la section « Si vous ne parvenez pas à charger un morceau ou un autre élément
sur l’iPod shuffle : » à la page 28.
Pour convertir des morceaux au débit plus élevé en fichiers AAC :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages.
4 Sélectionnez « Convertir en AAC 128 kbps les morceaux dont le débit est supérieur ».
5 Cliquez sur Appliquer.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 19
Suppression de morceaux et d’autres éléments de l’iPod shuffle
Vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’iTunes remplace automatiquement les éléments présents
sur l’iPod shuffle par ceux qui y sont chargés via la fonction de remplissage automatique.
Vous pouvez également supprimer les éléments de l’iPod shuffle manuellement.
Pour remplacer automatiquement les éléments de l’iPod shuffle par ceux importés
lors du processus de remplissage automatique :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Sélectionnez l’onglet Contenu.
4 Vérifiez que l’option « Remplacer tous les éléments lors du remplissage automatique »
est sélectionnée.
Pour supprimer un morceau ou un autre élément de l’iPod shuffle :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Sélectionnez un morceau ou autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle puis appuyez sur la touche
Supprimer ou Arrière de votre clavier.
La suppression manuelle d’un morceau ou d’un autre élément de l’iPod shuffle ne
supprime pas cet élément de votre bibliothèque iTunes.
Lecture de musique
Après avoir chargé de la musique et d’autres données audio sur votre iPod shuffle,
vous pouvez les écouter.
Pour écouter les morceaux et les autres éléments présents sur l’iPod shuffle :
1 Branchez les écouteurs sur l’iPod shuffle et placez-les dans vos oreilles.
2 Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’).
Appuyez sur Augmenter le volume (?) ou Baisser le volume (D) pour régler le volume
sonore. Évitez d’augmenter le volume à outrance. Consultez la section « Définition
d’une limite de volume » à la page 21.
Pour obtenir un résumé des commandes de l’iPod shuffle, consultez la section
« Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 4.
Remarque : si vous écoutez un livre audio, placez le bouton de mode aléatoire sur
la position de répétition (/) afin que les chapitres soient lus dans l’ordre.
AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser les écouteurs, lisez les consignes de sécurité de
la page 32 pour savoir comment éviter d’endommager votre audition.20 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique
Comment configurer l’iPod shuffle de manière à ce qu’il lise
les morceaux dans l’ordre ou dans un ordre aléatoire
Il est possible de régler l’iPod shuffle pour qu’il lise les morceaux de manière aléatoire
ou dans l’ordre.
Pour que l’iPod shuffle lise les morceaux dans un ordre aléatoire :
m Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire sur la position aléatoire (¡).
Pour changer l’ordre des morceaux de façon à les lire dans un autre ordre aléatoire,
appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’), rapidement.
Pour que l’iPod shuffle lise les morceaux dans l’ordre :
m Faites glisser le bouton de mode aléatoire sur la position de répétition (/).
Pour revenir au premier morceau, appuyez à trois reprises sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’),
rapidement.
Comment régler les morceaux pour qu’ils soient lus au même volume
Le niveau sonore des morceaux et des autres données audio peut varier en fonction
de leur mode d’enregistrement ou d’encodage. Avec iTunes, il est possible de régler
le volume des morceaux de manière automatique ; de cette manière, ils sont lus au
même niveau sonore. Vous pouvez configurer l’iPod shuffle de sorte qu’il utilise les
réglages de volume d’iTunes.
Pour régler iTunes de sorte qu’il lise les morceaux au même niveau sonore :
1 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez iTunes > Préférences si vous utilisez un Mac ou sélectionnez
Édition > Préférences si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows.
2 Cliquez sur Lecture puis choisissez Égaliseur de volume.
Pour régler l’iPod shuffle de manière à ce qu’il utilise les réglages de volume d’iTunes :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages.
4 Sélectionnez « Activer l’Égaliseur de volume ».
5 Cliquez sur Appliquer.
Important : si vous n’avez pas activé l’option Égaliseur de volume dans iTunes,
la configurer sur l’iPod shuffle n’a aucun effet.Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique 21
Définition d’une limite de volume
Il est possible d’établir une limite de volume sur l’iPod shuffle, mais aussi de définir
un mot de passe dans iTunes afin d’empêcher toute autre personne de modifier ce
réglage.
Si vous avez défini une limite de volume sur l’iPod shuffle, le voyant d’état devient orange
et clignote trois fois si vous essayez de monter le son au-delà de la limite établie.
Pour définir la limite du volume pour l’iPod Shuffle :
1 Réglez le son sur l’iPod shuffle sur le niveau que vous souhaitez établir comme volume
maximum.
2 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
3 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages.
5 Sélectionnez « Limiter le volume maximum ».
6 Faites alors glisser le curseur pour définir le niveau sonore maximum.
Il faut savoir que l’emplacement initial du curseur représente le volume qui était établi
sur l’iPod shuffle au moment de cocher la case « Limiter le volume maximum ».
7 Pour qu’un mot de passe vous soit demandé avant de modifier ce réglage, cliquez sur
le verrou et saisissez un mot de passe.
Si vous définissez un mot de passe, vous devrez alors le saisir avant de modifier
la llimite du volume ou de la supprimer.
Remarque : le niveau sonore peut varier selon le type d’écouteurs ou de casque utilisé.
Pour supprimer la limite de volume :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages.
4 Désélectionnez « Limiter le volume maximum ».
Au besoin, saisissez le mot de passe.
Remarque : si vous avez oublié le mot de passe, vous avez la possibilité de restaurer
l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la
page 30 pour en savoir plus.22 Chapitre 2 Chargement et lecture de musique
Activation et désactivation des boutons de l’iPod shuffle
Il est possible de désactiver les boutons de l’iPod shuffle. De cette manière, si vous
appuyez malencontreusement dessus, cela n’aura aucune incidence sur le fonctionnement de l’appareil.
Pour désactiver les boutons de l’iPod shuffle :
m Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant trois secondes.
Le voyant d’état devient vert, puis passe au orange et clignote trois fois lorsque
la désactivation des boutons est effective. Si vous appuyez sur un bouton lorsque
les boutons de l’iPod sont désactivés, le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote
une fois.
Pour réactiver les boutons :
m Maintenez à nouveau le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) enfoncé pendant trois secondes.
Le voyant d’état devient orange, puis passe au vert et clignote trois fois lorsque la réactivation des boutons est effective.3
23
3 Stockage de fichiers
sur l’iPod shuffle
L’iPod shuffle vous permet de transportez votre musique ainsi
que vos données.
Lisez ce chapitre pour savoir comment utiliser l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe.
Utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque externe
Vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe pour y stocker des fichiers
de données.
Remarque : pour charger sur l’iPod shuffle la musique et les diverses données audio que
vous souhaitez écouter, vous devez utiliser l’application iTunes. L’iPod shuffle ne pourra
pas lire des fichiers audio copiés via le Finder de Macintosh ou l’explorateur Windows.
Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages.
4 Dans la section Options, sélectionnez « Activer l’utilisation comme disque dur ».
Remarque : il vous sera peut-être nécessaire de faire défiler les éléments pour arriver
aux réglages concernant le disque.
5 En faisant glisser le curseur, définissez la quantité d’espace réservée aux morceaux
(par rapport à celle réservée aux données).
6 Cliquez sur Appliquer.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe, une icône de disque
iPod shuffle apparaît sur le bureau si vous utilisez un Mac, tandis que si vous utilisez
un PC sous Windows, la première lettre de disque disponible lui est attribuée dans
l’explorateur Windows.24 Chapitre 3 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle
Transfert de fichiers entre ordinateurs
Lorsque l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque dur est activée, vous pouvez
transférer des fichiers d’un ordinateur à un autre. L’iPod shuffle est formaté en FAT-32,
système pris en charge par les ordinateurs Mac et les PC sous Windows. De cette
manière, vous pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle pour transférer des fichiers entre ordinateurs fonctionnant sous systèmes d’exploitation différents.
Pour transférer des fichiers entre ordinateurs :
1 Après avoir activé la fonction d’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle en tant que disque dur,
branchez-le à l’ordinateur qui contient les fichiers que vous souhaitez copier.
Important : lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un ordinateur (ou un utilisateur de
votre ordinateur) qui n’est pas l’habituel, un message s’affiche et vous demande si vous
souhaitez effacer l’iPod shuffle et le synchroniser avec la nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes.
Si vous ne voulez pas effacer la musique actuellement présente sur l’iPod shuffle, cliquez
sur Annuler.
2 Faites glisser les fichiers désirés vers votre iPod shuffle via le système de fichiers de
l’ordinateur (le Finder sur un Mac et l’explorateur Windows sur un PC).
3 Débranchez ensuite l’iPod shuffle puis branchez-le sur l’autre ordinateur.
Cliquez à nouveau sur Annuler si vous ne voulez pas effacer la musique actuellement
présente sur l’iPod shuffle.
4 Faites glisser les fichiers depuis l’iPod shuffle vers une des unités du nouvel ordinateur.
Comment empêcher l’ouverture automatique d’iTunes
Il est possible d’empêcher iTunes de s’ouvrir automatiquement quand vous connectez
l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
Pour empêcher iTunes de s’ouvrir automatiquement :
1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source.
3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Réglages.
4 Dans la section Options, désélectionnez « Ouvrir iTunes à la connexion de cet iPod ».
5 Cliquez sur Appliquer.Chapitre 3 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle 254
24
4 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle
Avec l’iPod shuffle sont fournis des écouteurs et un socle
pour iPod shuffle.
Obtenez des informations sur vos écouteurs Apple Earphones, sur le socle pour
iPod shuffle et sur les autres accessoires disponibles pour l’iPod shuffle.
Écouteurs Apple Earphones
L’iPod shuffle est livré avec une paire d’écouteurs.
Pour utiliser des écouteurs :
m Branchez les écouteurs sur le port de sortie casque. Placez ensuite les écouteurs dans
vos oreilles comme sur l’illustration.
AVERTISSEMENT : avant d’utiliser les écouteurs, lisez les consignes de sécurité de
la page 32 pour savoir comment éviter d’endommager votre audition.
Le cordon
des écouteurs
est réglable.Chapitre 4 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle 25
Le socle pour iPod shuffle
L’iPod shuffle est livré avec un socle pour iPod shuffle (de deuxième génération) permettant de connecter l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur ou à d’autres périphériques USB.
Consultez « Connexion et déconnexion de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 5.
L’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter
L’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter est un accessoire vendu en option qui
vous permet de recharger l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous n’êtes pas devant votre ordinateur.
Accessoires disponibles
Pour acheter des accessoires iPod shuffle, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore.
Parmi les accessoires disponibles, citons :
 les écouteurs ergonomiques iPod In-Ear Headphones d’Apple ;
 le socle pour iPod shuffle (de deuxième génération) ;
 l’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter.5
26
5 Astuces et dépannage
La plupart des problèmes de l’iPod shuffle peuvent être
rapidement résolus si vous suivez les conseils de ce chapitre.
Si l’iPod shuffle ne s’allume ou ne répond pas :
 Si le voyant d’état devient orange et clignote lorsque vous appuyez sur un bouton,
cela signifie que les boutons de l’iPod shuffle sont désactivés. Maintenez enfoncé le
bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant environ trois secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant
d’état devienne vert et clignote.
 Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation de votre ordinateur.
La batterie de votre iPod shuffle peut avoir besoin d’être rechargée.
 Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez cinq secondes et rallumez-le.
 Il est possible que le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle ait besoin d’être restauré. Consultez
« Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30.
Les 5 R : Réinitialiser, Réessayer, Redémarrer, Réinstaller, Restaurer
Souvenez-vous de ces conseils élémentaires si un problème survient avec l’iPod shuffle.
Essayez de réaliser ces opérations l’une après l’autre jusqu’à ce que le problème soit
résolu. Si l’une des suggestions suivantes ne permet pas de résoudre le problème,
continuez à lire et consultez les solutions aux problèmes spécifiques.
 Réinitialisez l’iPod shuffle en l’éteignant, en attendant cinq secondes puis en
l’allumant à nouveau.
 Réessayez avec un port USB différent si l’iPod shuffle n’apparaît pas dans iTunes.
 Redémarrez votre ordinateur et assurez-vous que les mises à jour de logiciels
les plus récentes sont installées.
 Réinstallez le logiciel d’iTunes à partir de la dernière version disponible sur le web.
 Restaurez l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de
l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30.Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage 27
Si l’iPod shuffle ne lit pas de musique :
 Assurez-vous que le connecteur du casque ou des écouteurs est complètement
enfoncée dans la prise casque.
 Assurez-vous que le volume est correctement réglé. Il est possible qu’une limite
de volume ait été définie. Consultez « Définition d’une limite de volume » à la
page 21.
 Il se peut que l’iPod shuffle soit en pause. Tentez d’appuyer sur le bouton Lecture/
Pause (’).
Si rien ne se produit lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur votre ordinateur :
 Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB à forte alimentation de votre ordinateur.
L’iPod shuffle a peut-être besoin d’être rechargé.
 Assurez-vous que vous avez installé la dernière version d’iTunes sur
www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start.
 Essayez de le brancher sur un autre port USB de votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que
l’iPod shuffle est bien placé sur le socle. Vérifiez que le connecteur USB est orienté
correctement. Il ne peut être inséré que dans un sens.
 L’iPod shuffle a peut-être besoin d’être réinitialisé. Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, attendez
cinq secondes puis rallumez-le.
 Si le voyant d’état ne s’allume pas (ou s’il s’allume faiblement) et que l’iPod shuffle
n’apparaît pas dans iTunes ou dans le Finder, il est possible que la batterie soit entiè-
rement déchargée. Laissez l’iPod shuffle se recharger pendant plusieurs minutes pour
voir si cela lui permet de se réactiver.
 Assurez-vous que vous disposez de l’ordinateur et du logiciel requis. Consultez « Si vous
souhaitez effectuer une double vérification de la configuration requise : » à la page 29.
 Essayez de redémarrer votre ordinateur.
 Si aucune de ces suggestions n’aide à résoudre le problème, vous devrez éventuellement restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod. Consultez « Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel
de l’iPod shuffle » à la page 30.
 Si la restauration de l’iPod shuffle ne résout pas le problème, il se peut que
l’iPod shuffle ait besoin d’être réparé. Vous pouvez obtenir des services en
consultant le site web de service et d’assistance de l’iPod shuffle à l’adresse
www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle/service.
Si le chargement des morceaux est lent :
Branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur pour réaliser des
chargements plus rapides. Une connexion USB 2.0 permet de charger des morceaux
et des données beaucoup vite qu’une connexion USB 1.1.28 Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage
Si vous ne parvenez pas à charger un morceau ou un autre élément sur l’iPod shuffle :
Le morceau peut être encodé dans un format que l’iPod shuffle ne prend pas en
charge. Les formats de fichiers audio suivants sont pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle.
Ils comprennent les formats des livres audio et des podcasts :
 AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P) (jusqu’à 320 kbps)
 MP3 (jusqu’à 320 kbps)
 MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
 WAV
 AA (texte lu audible.com, formats 2, 3 et 4)
 AIFF
Un morceau encodé au format Apple Lossless possède la même qualité sonore qu’un
CD tout en occupant deux fois moins d’espace qu’un morceau encodé au format AIFF
ou WAV. Le même morceau encodé au format AAC ou MP3 utilise encore moins de
place. Quand vous importez de la musique depuis un CD à l’aide d’iTunes, elle est
convertie par défaut au format AAC.
Vous pouvez faire en sorte que l’iPod shuffle convertisse automatiquement les fichiers
encodés à des débits plus élevés (comme Apple Lossless) en fichiers AAC de 128 kbps
lors de leur chargement sur l’iPod shuffle. Consultez « Comment faire tenir davantage
de morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle » à la page 18.
Si vous utilisez iTunes pour Windows, vous pouvez convertir les fichiers WMA non
protégés en fichiers au format AAC ou MP3. Cela peut être utile si vous disposez
d’une collection de musique encodée au format WMA.
L’iPod shuffle ne prend pas en charge les fichiers audio Apple Lossless, WMA,
MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 ni le format 1 d’audible.com.
Si vous possédez dans iTunes un morceau qui n’est pas pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle,
vous pouvez le convertir en un format que l’iPod shuffle prend en charge. Pour en
savoir plus, consultez l’Aide iTunes.
Si les chapitres d’un livre audio ne se lisent pas dans l’ordre :
 Assurez-vous que le bouton de mode aléatoire de l’iPod shuffle est placé sur la position de répétition (/), ce qui permet une lecture des chapitres dans l’ordre.
 Si les chapitres n’ont pas été ajoutés à l’iPod shuffle dans l’ordre, branchez
l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur puis réorganisez les pistes via iTunes. Consultez
« Organisation des morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle » à la page 18.Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage 29
Si vous souhaitez effectuer une double vérification de la configuration requise :
Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants :
 Une des configurations d’ordinateur suivantes :
 Un ordinateur Macintosh doté d’un port USB (USB 2.0 recommandé).
 Un PC sous Windows doté d’un port ou d’une carte USB (USB 2.0 recommandé).
 Un des systèmes d’exploitation suivants : Mac OS X v10.3.9 ou ultérieur, Windows 2000
avec Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur ou Windows XP Édition Familiale ou Professionnel
avec Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur.
 Un accès à Internet (une connexion à haut débit est recommandée).
 iTunes 7.0.2 ou ultérieur (vous pouvez télécharger iTunes depuis l’adresse
www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start).
Si votre PC sous Windows n’est pas doté d’un port USB à forte alimentation, vous pouvez
acheter une carte USB 2.0 et l’installer. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur le site
www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore.
Si vous souhaitez utiliser l’iPod shuffle avec un Mac et un PC sous Windows :
Chaque fois que vous synchronisez l’iPod shuffle avec une nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes,
vous devez effacer la musique déjà présente sur l’iPod shuffle, quel que soit le système
d’exploitation. Lorsque vous branchez l’iPod shuffle sur un ordinateur ou un utilisateur
de votre ordinateur qui n’est pas l’habituel, un message s’affiche et vous demande si vous
souhaitez effacer l’iPod shuffle et le synchroniser avec la nouvelle bibliothèque iTunes.
Toutefois, il est possible d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque externe à la fois avec
les ordinateurs Macintosh et les PC sous Windows, ce qui vous permet de transférer
des fichiers d’un système d’exploitation à l’autre. Consultez le chapitre 3, « Stockage de
fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle, » à la page 23.
Port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation30 Chapitre 5 Astuces et dépannage
Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle
Vous pouvez utiliser iTunes pour mettre à jour ou restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle.
Il est recommandé de mettre à jour l’iPod shuffle et d’utiliser le logiciel le plus récent.
Vous pouvez également restaurer le logiciel et rétablir ainsi l’iPod shuffle à son état
d’origine.
 Si vous choisissez de mettre à jour, le logiciel sera mis à jour, mais vos réglages et
morceaux seront conservés.
 Si vous choisissez de restaurer, toutes les données sont effacées de l’iPod shuffle,
y compris les morceaux et toutes les autres données. Tous les réglages d’origine
de l’iPod shuffle seront rétablis.
Pour mettre à jour ou restaurer l’iPod shuffle :
1 Assurez-vous que vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet et que vous avez installé
la dernière version d’iTunes disponible sur www.apple.com/fr/ipod/start.
2 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.
3 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source, puis cliquez sur
l’onglet Réglages.
La section Version indique si l’iPod shuffle est à jour ou nécessite une version plus
récente du logiciel.
4 Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Pour installer la toute dernière version du logiciel, cliquez sur Mettre à jour.
 Pour restaurer l’iPod shuffle et rétablir ses réglages d’origine, cliquez sur Restaurer.
Cette opération efface toutes les données de l’iPod shuffle. Suivez les instructions
à l’écran pour terminer la restauration.6
31
6 Sécurité et manipulation
Ce chapitre contient des informations importantes sur
la sécurité et la manipulation de l’iPod shuffle.
Conservez ce guide des fonctions de l’iPod shuffle à portée de main pour pouvoir vous
y reporter facilement.
Informations importantes relatives à la sécurité
Manipulation de l’iPod shuffle Évitez de tordre, d’écraser, de perforer, d’incinérer,
d’ouvrir ou de laisser tomber l’iPod shuffle.
Utilisation près de l’eau et dans des endroits humides N’utilisez pas l’iPod shuffle
sous la pluie ni à proximité d’un lavabo ou de tout autre endroit humide. Veillez à ne
pas renverser d’aliments ou de liquides sur l’iPod shuffle. Si l’iPod shuffle est mouillé,
débranchez tous les câbles et éteignez l’iPod shuffle avant de procéder au nettoyage.
Laissez-le ensuite sécher entièrement avant de le rallumer.
Réparation de l’iPod shuffle N’essayez jamais de réparer l’iPod shuffle vous-même.
L’iPod shuffle ne contient aucune pièce démontable par l’utilisateur. Pour des informations sur le service, choisissez Aide iPod dans le menu Aide d’iTunes ou allez sur
www.apple.com/fr/support/ipod/service. La batterie de l’iPod shuffle ne peut pas être
remplacée par l’utilisateur. Pour plus d’informations sur les batteries, rendez-vous à
l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/batteries.
± Pour éviter toute blessure, lisez toutes les informations relatives à la sécurité
exposées ci-dessous, ainsi que le mode d’emploi, avant d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle.
AVERTISSEMENT : ne pas suivre les présentes consignes de sécurité pourrait provoquer
un incendie, un choc électrique ou un autre dommage.32 Chapitre 6 Sécurité et manipulation
Utilisation de l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter (disponible séparément)
Si vous utilisez l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter (vendu séparément sur
www.apple.com/fr/ipodstore) pour recharger l’iPod shuffle, assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est correctement assemblé avant de le brancher sur une prise de courant.
Insérez ensuite fermement l’adaptateur dans la prise de courant. Ne branchez ou
ne débranchez pas l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter en ayant les mains
mouillées. N’utilisez pas d’adaptateur secteur autre qu’un adaptateur secteur iPod USB
Power Adapter d’Apple pour recharger votre iPod shuffle.
Il se peut que l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter chauffe pendant une utilisation normale. Veillez à toujours assurer une ventilation correcte autour de lui et à
toujours le manipuler avec précaution.
Débranchez l’adaptateur secteur iPod USB Power Adapter si l’une des conditions
suivantes se présente :
 Le câble d’alimentation ou la prise est effiloché ou endommagé.
 L’adaptateur est exposé à la pluie ou à une humidité excessive.
 Le boîtier de l’adaptateur est endommagé.
 Vous pensez que l’adaptateur doit être réparé.
 Vous voulez nettoyer l’adaptateur.
Prévention de la diminution de l’acuité auditive Vous risquez une perte d’audition
irréparable si vous utilisez un casque ou des écouteurs à volume sonore élevé. Réglez le
volume à un niveau raisonnable. Vous pouvez vous habituer petit à petit à un volume
de son plus élevé qui peut vous paraître normal mais entraîner une détérioration de
votre audition. Si vos oreilles bourdonnent ou si les sons vous semblent sourds, arrêtez
l’écoute et rendez-vous chez votre médecin pour vérifier votre audition. Plus le volume
est élevé, plus vous risquez d’abîmer rapidement votre audition. Les spécialistes de
l’audition suggèrent de protéger votre audition de la façon suivante :
 Évitez au maximum d’écouter de la musique via des écouteurs ou un casque à un
volume élevé.
 Évitez de monter le son pour filtrer les bruits extérieurs.
 Baissez le son si vous n’entendez pas ce que disent les gens à côté de vous.
Pour en savoir plus sur la manière de définir un volume maximum sur l’iPod shuffle,
consultez la section « Définition d’une limite de volume » à la page 21.
Informations Importantes
A pleine puissance, l’écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager
l’oreille de l’utilisateur.Chapitre 6 Sécurité et manipulation 33
Utilisation d’un casque d’écoute en toute sécurité L’utilisation des écouteurs n’est
pas recommandée lorsque vous conduisez et constitue par ailleurs une infraction au
code de la route dans certains endroits. Soyez prudent et attentif au volant. Cessez
d’utiliser l’iPod shuffle si vous vous rendez compte que cela vous distrait ou vous
dérange lorsque vous conduisez un véhicule ou lorsque vous réalisez tout autre
activité nécessitant toute votre attention.
Informations importantes sur la manipulation
Transport de l’iPod shuffle Les composants de l’iPod shuffle sont délicats. Ne tordez,
n’écrasez ni ne laissez pas tomber l’iPod shuffle.
Utilisation des connecteurs et des ports Ne forcez jamais un connecteur à entrer dans
un port. Vérifiez que rien ne bloque l’entrée au port. Si le connecteur et le port ne
s’assemblent pas facilement, c’est probablement parce qu’ils ne sont pas compatibles.
Assurez-vous que le connecteur est compatible avec le port et que vous l’avez positionné correctement par rapport à ce dernier.
Conservation de l’iPod shuffle à température normale Utilisez toujours l’iPod shuffle
dans des endroits où la température se situe entre 0º et 35º C. Dans des conditions de
basses températures, l’autonomie de l’iPod peut diminuer temporairement.
Rangez l’iPod shuffle dans un endroit où la température est toujours comprise entre
-20º et 45º C. La température dans les voitures en stationnement pouvant dépasser
cette fourchette, ne laissez pas l’iPod shuffle dans votre voiture.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’iPod shuffle ou rechargez sa batterie, il est normal que l’iPod shuffle
chauffe. L’extérieur de l’iPod shuffle sert en effet de surface de refroidissement et transfère
la chaleur de l’intérieur de l’appareil vers l’extérieur, où l’air est moins chaud.
Nettoyage de la partie externe de l’iPod shuffle Pour nettoyer l’iPod shuffle, retirez-le
du socle et éteignez-le. Utilisez ensuite un chiffon doux, légèrement humide et non
pelucheux. Évitez toute pénétration d’humidité dans les orifices de l’appareil. N’utilisez
pas de produits pour le nettoyage des vitres, de produits d’entretien ménager, d’aérosols, de solvants, d’alcool, d’ammoniac ni d’abrasifs pour nettoyer l’iPod shuffle.
Respect des consignes en matière d’élimination pour l’iPod shuffle Pour obtenir
des informations sur la mise au rebut de l’iPod shuffle, y compris d’importantes
informations sur le respect des normes en vigueur, consultez la section « Regulatory
Compliance Information » à la page 35.
AVIS : ne pas suivre les présentes instructions sur la manipulation peut provoquer des
dommages à l’iPod shuffle ou à d’autres objets.7
34
7 En savoir plus, service
et assistance
Vous trouverez plus d’informations sur l’utilisation
de l’iPod shuffle dans l’aide à l’écran et sur le web.
Le tableau suivant décrit à quel endroit trouver des informations sur les services et
les logiciels de l’iPod.
Pour en savoir plus sur : procédez ainsi :
Les services et l’assistance, les
forums de discussion, les guides d’initiation et les téléchargements de logiciels Apple
Allez sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle.
L’utilisation d’iTunes Ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. Pour obtenir le
guide d’initiation d’iTunes en ligne (uniquement disponible dans
certains pays), allez sur www.apple.com/fr/ilife/tutorials/itunes.
Les toutes dernières informations sur l’iPod shuffle
Allez sur www.apple.com/fr/ipodshuffle
L’enregistrement
de l’iPod shuffle
Pour enregistrer l’iPod shuffle, installez iTunes sur votre ordinateur
et branchez-y l’iPod shuffle.
La recherche du numéro
de série de l’iPod shuffle
Observez l’encoche située sous la pince de l’ iPod shuffleou bien
sélectionnez l’iPod shuffle dans la sous-fenêtre Source d’iTunes
(lorsque l’iPod shuffle est connecté à l’ordinateur) et cliquez sur
l’onglet Réglages.
L’obtention des services
assurés dans le cadre de
la garantie
Suivez d’abord les conseils qui figurent dans le présent fascicule,
l’aide à l’écran et les ressources en ligne, puis allez sur
www.apple.com/fr/support/ipodshuffle/service 35
Regulatory Compliance Information
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. See instructions if interference
to radio or television reception is suspected.
Radio and Television Interference
This computer equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed
and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with
Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with
radio and television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in
accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC
rules. These specifications are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference in a
residential installation. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is
causing interference by turning it off. If the
interference stops, it was probably caused by the
computer or one of the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to
radio or television reception, try to correct the
interference by using one or more of the following
measures:
 Turn the television or radio antenna until the
interference stops.
 Move the computer to one side or the other of the
television or radio.
 Move the computer farther away from the
television or radio.
 Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a
different circuit from the television or radio. (That
is, make certain the computer and the television or
radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit
breakers or fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service
provider or Apple. See the service and support
information that came with your Apple product. Or,
consult an experienced radio/television technician
for additional suggestions.
Important: Changes or modifications to this product
not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC
compliance and negate your authority to operate
the product.
This product was tested for EMC compliance under
conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral
devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors
between system components.
It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices
and shielded cables and connectors between system
components to reduce the possibility of causing
interference to radios, television sets, and other
electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral
devices and the proper shielded cables and
connectors through an Apple Authorized Reseller.
For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the
manufacturer or dealer for assistance.
Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only):
Apple Inc. Product Compliance, 1 Infinite Loop
M/S 26-A, Cupertino, CA 95014-2084, 408-974-2000.
Industry Canada Statement
This Class B device meets all requirements of the
Canadian interference-causing equipment
regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte
toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
VCCI Class B Statement
Korea Class B Statement36
Russia
Communauté Européenne
Conforme aux directives européennes 2006/95/EEC
et 89/336/EEC.
Informations sur l’élimination et le recyclage
Votre iPod renferme une batterie. Débarrassez-vous
de l’iPod en respectant les lois et les directives
environnementales locales.
Pour en savoir plus sur le programme
de recyclage d’Apple, rendez-vous sur
www.apple.com/environment.
Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte
nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses
Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend
der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen.
China:
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden
ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale
batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca)
worden gedeponeerd.
Taiwan:
Union Européenne-informations sur l’élimination :
Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que vous devez vous
débarasser de votre produit sans le mélanger avec
les ordures ménagères, selon les normes et la
législation de votre pays. Lorsque ce produit n’est
plus utilisable, portez-le dans un centre de
traitement des déchets agréé par les autorités
locales. Certains centres acceptent les produits
gratuitement. Le traitement et le recyclage séparé
de votre produit lors de son élimination aideront à
préserver les ressources naturelles et à protéger
l’environnement et la santé des êtres humains.
Apple et l’environnement
Chez Apple, nous sommes conscients de la
responsabilité qui nous incombe de réduire les
impacts écologiques de nos activités et de nos
produits.
Pour plus d’informations, allez sur :
www.apple.com/environment
© 2007 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Apple, le logo Apple, FireWire,
iPod, iTunes, Mac, Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques d’Apple Inc.
déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Finder et Shuffle sont
des marques d’Apple Inc. Apple Store est une marque de service
d’Apple Inc. déposée aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les autres
noms de produits et de sociétés peuvent être la propriété de leurs
détenteurs respectifs.
La mention de produits tierces est réservée à des fins d’information
et n’équivaut pas à une approbation ou à une recommandation.
La responsabilité d’Apple n’est pas engagée concernant les
performances ou l’utilisation de ces produits. Tous les accords ou
garanties éventuels sont directement évoqués entre le fournisseur et
les éventuels utilisateurs. Apple s’est attaché à fournir aux utilisateurs
les informations les plus justes possible dans ce manuel. Apple n’est
pas responsable des erreurs d’impression ou d’écriture.
F019-0996/2-2007
iPhone 4
Important Product
Information GuideThis Important Product Information Guide contains safety and handling,
regulatory, software license, and warranty information for iPhone.
Look for recycling, disposal, and other environmental information in the
iPhone User Guide at:??support.apple.com/manuals/iphone
±To avoid injury, read all operating instructions and the following
safety information before using iPhone. For detailed operating
instructions, read the iPhone User Guide on your iPhone by
visiting help.apple.com/iphone or using the iPhone User Guide
bookmark in Safari. For downloadable versions of the latest
iPhone User Guide and this Important Product Information Guide,
visit:??support.apple.com/manuals/iphone
Important Safety and Handling Information
WARNING:??Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in fire,
electric shock, or other injury or damage to iPhone or other property.
Carrying and Handling iPhone iPhone contains sensitive components.
Do not drop, disassemble, microwave, burn, paint, or insert foreign objects
into iPhone. Do not use iPhone if it has been damaged—for example, if
iPhone is cracked, punctured, or damaged by water.
The front and back covers of iPhone are made of glass. This glass could
break if iPhone is dropped on a hard surface, is subjected to a substantial
impact, or is crushed, bent, or deformed. If the glass chips or cracks, do not
touch or attempt to remove the broken glass. Stop using iPhone until the
glass is replaced by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Glass
cracked due to misuse or abuse is not covered under the warranty.
If you are concerned about scratching or abrasion, use a case, sold
separately.
Keeping the Outside of iPhone Clean Clean iPhone immediately if it
comes into contact with any contaminants that may cause stains—for
example, ink, dyes, makeup, dirt, food, oils, and lotions. To clean iPhone,
unplug all cables and turn off iPhone (press and hold the On/Off button,
and then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free
cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners,
household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives
to clean iPhone. The front glass surface has an oleophobic coating. To
remove fingerprints, simply wipe these surfaces with a soft, lint-free
cloth. The ability of this coating to repel oil will diminish over time with
normal usage, and rubbing the screen with an abrasive material will further
diminish its effect and may scratch the glass.
Avoiding Water and Wet Locations Do not expose iPhone to water or
rain, or handle iPhone near wet locations—for example, near washbasins
or toilets. Take care not to spill any food or liquid on iPhone. In case
iPhone gets wet, unplug all cables, turn off iPhone before cleaning, and
allow it to dry thoroughly before turning it on again. Do not attempt
to dry iPhone with an external heat source, such as a microwave oven
or hair dryer. Damage to iPhone caused by contact with liquid is not
covered under the warranty.Repairing or Modifying iPhone Never attempt to repair or modify
iPhone yourself. iPhone does not contain any user-serviceable parts,
except (where applicable) for the SIM card and SIM tray. Disassembling
iPhone, including the removal of external screws and back cover, may
cause damage that is not covered under the warranty. If iPhone has been
submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to a severe fall, do not
use it until you take it to an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Service
should only be provided by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service
Provider. If you have questions, contact Apple or an Apple Authorized
Service Provider. For service information, go to:
www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/faq
Battery Replacement Do not attempt to replace the rechargeable
battery in iPhone yourself. The battery should be replaced only by
Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For more information
about battery replacement service, go to:??
www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html
Charging iPhone To charge iPhone, use only the Apple Dock Connector
to USB Cable with the following: (i) an Apple USB Power Adapter,
(ii) another Apple-branded product or accessory designed to work with
iPhone, (iii) a third-party accessory certified to use the Apple “Works with
iPhone” or “Made for iPhone” logo, (iv) a high-power USB port on another
device that is compliant with the USB 2.0 or 1.1 standard, or (v) a power
adapter compliant with one or more of the following standards EN
301489-34, IEC 62684, YD/T 1591-2009, CNS 15285, ITU L.1000, or another
applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standard.
An iPhone Micro USB Adapter (available separately in some areas) or
other adapter may be needed to connect iPhone to some compatible
power adapters.
Note:??Only micro USB power adapters in certain regions that comply
with applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standards
are compatible. Please contact the power adapter manufacturer to find
out if your micro USB power adapter complies with these standards.
Read all safety instructions for any products and accessories before using
with iPhone. Apple is not responsible for the operation of, or any damage
caused by, third-party accessories or their compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
When you use the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge iPhone, make
sure that the power adapter is fully assembled before you plug it into
a power outlet. Then insert the Apple USB Power Adapter firmly into
the power outlet. Do not connect or disconnect the Apple USB Power
Adapter with wet hands.
The Apple USB Power Adapter may become warm during normal use.
Always allow adequate ventilation around the Apple USB Power Adapter
and use care when handling. Unplug the Apple USB Power Adapter if any
of the following conditions exist:
 The power cord or plug has become frayed or damaged.
 The adapter is exposed to rain, liquid, or excessive moisture.
 The adapter case has become damaged.
 You suspect the adapter needs service or repair.
 You want to clean the adapter. Avoiding Hearing Damage Permanent hearing loss may occur if the
receiver, earbuds, headphones, speakerphone, or earpiece are used
at high volume. Use only compatible receivers, earbuds, headphones,
speakerphones, or earpieces with your device. Turn on the audio and
check the volume before inserting anything in your ear. You can adapt
over time to a higher volume of sound that may sound normal but can
be damaging to your hearing. If you experience ringing in your ears
or muffled speech, stop listening and have your hearing checked. The
louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be
affected. Hearing experts suggest that to protect your hearing:
 Limit the amount of time you use the receiver, earbuds, headphones,
speakerphone, or earpieces at high volume.
 Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings.
 Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking near you.
For information about how to set a maximum volume limit on iPhone,
see the iPhone User Guide.
Emergency Calls You should not rely on wireless devices for essential
communications, such as medical emergencies. Use of iPhone to call
emergency services may not work in all locations or all operating
conditions. Emergency numbers and services vary by region, and
sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network
availability or environmental interference. Some cellular networks may
not accept an emergency call from iPhone if iPhone is not activated, if
iPhone is not compatible with or configured to operate on a particular
cellular network, or (when applicable) if iPhone does not have a SIM or if
the SIM is PIN-locked.
Driving and Riding Safely Use of iPhone while driving a vehicle or
riding a bicycle may be distracting. If you find using iPhone disruptive
or distracting while driving or riding, pull off the road and park before
making or answering a call. Use of iPhone alone or with headphones
(even if used only in one ear) while driving or riding is not recommended
and is illegal in some areas. Consider using a compatible hands-free
device with iPhone. Use of a hands-free device may be required in some
areas. Check and obey the laws and regulations regarding the use of
mobile devices like iPhone in the areas where you drive or ride.
Navigating Safely Do not rely on iPhone applications that provide
maps, digital compass headings, orientation information, traffic
information, directions, or location-based navigation to determine
precise locations, proximity, orientation, distance, traffic conditions or
direction. These applications should only be used for basic navigation
assistance.
Maps, directions, and location-based applications depend on data
services. These data services are subject to change and may not be
available in all areas, resulting in maps, digital compass headings,
directions, traffic conditions or location-based information that may be
unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete.
iPhone contains an internal digital compass located in the upper-right
corner of iPhone. The accuracy of digital compass headings may be
negatively affected by magnetic or other environmental interference,
including interference caused by the close proximity of the magnets contained in the iPhone earbuds. Never rely solely on the digital
compass for determining direction. Compare the information provided
on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve
any discrepancies.
Do not use location-based applications while performing activities that
require your full attention. Always comply with posted signs and the laws
and regulations in the areas where you are using iPhone.
For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag An air bag inflates with great
force. Do not store iPhone or any of its accessories in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area.
Seizures, Blackouts, and Eyestrain A small percentage of people may
be susceptible to blackouts or seizures (even if they have never had one
before) when exposed to flashing lights or light patterns such as when
playing games or watching video. If you have experienced seizures
or blackouts or have a family history of such occurrences, you should
consult a physician before playing games (if available) or watching videos
on your iPhone. Discontinue use of iPhone and consult a physician if
you experience headaches, blackouts, seizures, convulsion, eye or muscle
twitching, loss of awareness, involuntary movement, or disorientation.
To reduce risk of headaches, blackouts, seizures, and eyestrain, avoid
prolonged use, hold iPhone further away from your eyes, use iPhone in a
well-lit room, and take frequent breaks.
Choking Hazards iPhone and its accessories may contain small parts,
which may present a choking hazard to small children. Keep such parts
away from small children.
Repetitive Motion When you perform repetitive activities such as
typing or playing games on iPhone, you may experience occasional
discomfort in your hands, arms, shoulders, neck, or other parts of your
body. Take frequent breaks and if you have discomfort during or after
such use, stop use and see a physician.
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off iPhone when in any area
with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Do not charge iPhone, and obey
all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
or fire, resulting in serious injury or even death.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always,
marked clearly. Potential areas may include: fueling areas (such as gas
stations); below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage
facilities; vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or
butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain,
dust, or metal powders); and any other area where you would normally be
advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
Using Connectors, Ports, and Buttons Never force a connector into
a port or apply excessive pressure to a button, because this may cause
damage that is not covered under the warranty. If the connector and port
don’t join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Check for
obstructions and make sure that the connector matches the port and that
you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port.
Accessories and Wireless Performance Not all iPod accessories are
fully compatible with iPhone. Turning on Airplane Mode on iPhone may
eliminate audio interference between iPhone and an accessory. While Airplane mode is on, you cannot make or receive calls or use features that
require wireless communication. Under some conditions, certain accessories
may affect iPhone wireless performance. Reorienting or relocating iPhone
and the connected accessory may improve wireless performance.
Keeping iPhone Within Acceptable Temperatures iPhone is designed
to be operated in temperatures between 0º and 35º C (32º to 95º F) and
stored in temperatures between -20º and 45º C (-4º to 113º F). Low- or
high-temperature conditions might temporarily shorten battery life or
cause iPhone to temporarily stop working properly. Leaving iPhone in
a parked vehicle or in direct sunlight can cause iPhone to exceed these
storage or operating temperature ranges. Avoid dramatic changes in
temperature or humidity when using iPhone as condensation may form
on or within iPhone.
When you’re using iPhone or charging the battery, it is normal for iPhone
to get warm. The exterior of iPhone functions as a cooling surface that
transfers heat from inside the unit to the cooler air outside.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy iPhone transmits and receives
radio frequency (RF) energy through its antennas. The iPhone cellular
antennas are located at the top and bottom edges of iPhone. The Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth® antenna is located near the top of iPhone.
iPhone is designed and manufactured to comply with the limits for
exposure to RF energy set by international regulatory agencies, including
the FCC of the United States, IC of Canada, MIC of Japan, and the Counsel
of the European Union, among others.
“Specific Absorption Rate,” or SAR, refers to the rate at which the body
absorbs RF energy. The SAR limits for mobile phones are 1.6 watts per
kilogram (W/kg) for the FCC and IC, and 2.0 W/kg for the Council of the
European Union.
iPhone has been tested,
1
and meets the FCC, IC, and European Union RF
exposure guidelines for cellular, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth operation.
During SAR testing, iPhone is held in standard operating positions (i.e.,
at the head and on the body) and its radios are set to transmit at the
highest power level. iPhone’s maximum SAR levels on each frequency of
operation are provided in a chart at the end of this section.
The SAR levels experienced during normal use may be lower than the
maximum SAR levels. In normal use, iPhone automatically adjusts radio
transmission power to the lowest level necessary to communicate with
the wireless network.
When carrying iPhone, keep it 1.5 cm (5/8 inch) or more away from your
body to ensure exposure levels remain at or below the maximum levels.
Avoid cases with metal parts.
1
The device was tested according to measurement standards and
procedures specified in FCC OET Bulletin 65, Supplement C (Edition
01-01) and IEEE 1528-2003, and Canada RSS 102, Issue 4, March 2010.
iPhone adheres to the European Council Recommendation of 12
July 1999 on the Limitation of Exposure of the General Public to
Electromagnetic Fields [1999/519/EC]. Exposure to RF energy is related to time and distance. If you are
concerned about RF exposure, decrease your total talk time on iPhone
and increase your distance to iPhone by using one of the many
hands-free options available, including the built-in speakerphone, the
supplied headphones with built-in mic, or other third-party accessories.
For more information about RF energy exposure, see the FCC’s Radio
Frequency Safety page at:??www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety
For information about the scientific research related to RF energy
exposure, see the World Health Organization’s EMF Research Database at:
www.who.int/peh-emf/research/database
Frequency Band
2
Body
3
Head FCC & IC 1g SAR Limit (W/kg)
GSM 850 1.15 1.04 1.6
GSM 1900 0.99 1.08 1.6
UMTS II 1900 0.578 1.18 1.6
UMTS V 850 0.981 1.13 1.6
CDMA 800 MHz
Band Class 0
1.11 1.15 1.6
CDMA 1900 MHz
Band Class 1
0.649 1.18 1.6
2.4 GHz Wi-Fi 0.191 0.372 1.6
Frequency Band
2
Body
3
Head EU 10g SAR Limit (W/kg)
EGSM 900 0.989 0.766 2.0
GSM 1800 0.695 0.959 2.0
UMTS I 2100 0.495 0.98 2.0
UMTS VIII 900 0.681 0.988 2.0
2.4 GHz Wi-Fi 0.106 0.267 2.0
Radio Frequency Interference Radio-frequency emissions from
electronic equipment can negatively affect the operation of other
electronic equipment, causing them to malfunction. Although iPhone is
designed, tested, and manufactured to comply with regulations governing
radio frequency emission in countries such as the United States, Canada,
the European Union, and Japan, the wireless transmitters and electrical
2
Your iPhone may be configured to support one or more of the listed
frequency bands, depending on carrier technology and network
availability. The frequency band used by iPhone varies depending on
wireless service provider, wireless technology, and region.
3
iPhone positioned 10 mm (13/32 inch) away from the body.circuits in iPhone may cause interference in other electronic equipment.
Therefore, please take the following precautions:
Aircraft Use of iPhone may be prohibited while traveling in aircraft.
For more information about using Airplane Mode to turn off the iPhone
wireless transmitters, see the iPhone User Guide.
Vehicles Radio frequency emissions from iPhone may affect electronic
systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its
representative regarding your vehicle.
Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends
that a minimum separation of 15 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a
handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference
with the pacemaker. Persons with pacemakers:
 Should always keep iPhone more than 15 cm (6 inches) from the
pacemaker when the phone is turned on
 Should not carry iPhone in a breast pocket
 Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential
for interference
If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn
iPhone off immediately.
Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) iPhone has been tested and rated
under the American National Standard Institute (ANSI) C63.19-2007 hearing
aid compatibility standard. The ANSI standard measures radio frequency
interference for acoustic coupling (“M” rating) and inductive coupling
with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode (“T” rating). Phones must
be rated M3 or greater and T3 or greater to be hearing aid compatible
under FCC rules.
For more information, see the “Hearing Aid Compatibility” section of the
iPhone User Guide. For current iPhone hearing aid compatibility ratings,
go to:??www.apple.com/support/hac
iPhone may interfere with some hearing aids. If you experience
interference, consult the hearing aid manufacturer or your physician for
alternatives or remedies.
Compatibility With Other Wireless Technologies This phone has been
tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless
technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless
technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use
with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this
phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or
cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult
your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information
on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or
exchange policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.
Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device,
consult the device manufacturer or your physician to determine if it is
adequately shielded from radio frequency emissions from iPhone.
Health Care Facilities Hospitals and health care facilities may use
equipment that is particularly sensitive to external radio frequency
emissions. Turn iPhone off when staff or posted signs instruct you to do so.Blasting Areas and Posted Facilities To avoid interfering with blasting
operations, turn off iPhone when in a “blasting area” or in areas posted
“Turn off two-way radio.” Obey all signs and instructions.
Certification and Compliance
See iPhone for the certification and compliance marks specific to that
device. To view, choose Settings > General > About > Regulatory.
Australia/
New Zealand
Canada IC: 579C-E2430A
E.U.
Japan
Mexico Singapore
U.S.
FCC ID: BCG-E2430A
Important:??Changes or modifications to this product not authorized
by Apple could void the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and
wireless compliance and negate your authority to operate the product.
This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that
included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables
between system components. It is important that you use compliant
peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components to
reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, televisions, and
other electronic devices.
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Canadian Compliance Statement
Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil
numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. This Class B
device meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference-causing
equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte
toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de licence
d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences et (2) cet
appareil doit accepter toute interférence, y compris celles susceptibles de
provoquer un fonctionnement non souhaité de l’appareil.
European Union Regulatory Conformance
The equipment complies with the RF Exposure Requirement 1999/519/EC,
Council Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of
the general public to electromagnetic fields (0–300 GHz). This equipment
meets the following conformance standards:
EN 300 328, EN 301 489-17, EN 301 511, EN 301 908, EN 50385
This wireless device complies with the R&TTE Directive.
EU Declaration of Conformity
???????????Apple Inc. ?????????, ?? ???? ?????????? ? ????????,
Wi-Fi ? Bluetooth ?????????? ? ? ???????????? ??? ????????????
?????????? ? ??????? ????????? ??????? ?? ????????? 1999/5/??.
Cesky??Spolecnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že toto mobilní zarízení s
technologií Wi-Fi a Bluetooth vyhovuje základním požadavkum a dalším
príslušným ustanovením smernice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk??Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr
cellular, Wi-Fi og Bluetooth overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch??Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dasssich Mobiltelefon,Wi-Fi und
Bluetooth in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befinden.Eesti??Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc., et see mobiil-, Wi-Fi- ja
Bluetooth-seade vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English??Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this cellular, Wi-Fi, and
Bluetooth device is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español??Por medio de la presente Apple Inc. declara que este
dispositivo celular, Wi-Fi y Bluetooth cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de
la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
??????????Me t?? pa???sa, ? Apple Inc. d????e? ?t? a?t? ? s?s?e??
????t??, Wi-Fi ?a? Bluetooth s?µµ??f??eta? p??? t?? ßas????
apa?t?se?? ?a? t?? ???p?? s?et???? d?at??e?? t?? ?d???a? 1999/5/??.
Français??Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que l’appareil cellulaire,
Wi-Fi, et Bluetooth est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Islenska??Apple Inc. lýsir því hér með yfir að þetta tæki, sem er farsími,
þráðlaus og með blátannartækni (e: cellular, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth,)
fullnægir lágmarkskröfum og öðrum viðeigandi ákvæðum
Evróputilskipunar 1999/5/EC.
Italiano??Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che questo dispositivo
cellulare, Wi-Fi e Bluetooth è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski??Ar šo Apple Inc. deklare, ka cellular, Wi-Fi un Bluetooth ierice
atbilst Direktivas 1999/5/EK butiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to
saistitajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuviu??Šiuo„Apple Inc.“ deklaruoja, kad korinio,„Wi-Fi“ ir„Bluetooth“
ryšio irenginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB
Direktyvos nuostatas.
Magyar??Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a mobil, Wi-Fi és
Bluetooth megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Malti??Hawnhekk, Apple Inc. tiddikjara li dan l-apparat cellulari, Wi-Fi,
u Bluetooth huwa konformi mar-rekwiziti essenzjali u dispozizzjonijiet
ohra relevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands??Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het toestel cellular, Wi-Fi, en
Bluetooth in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk??Apple Inc. erklærer herved at dette mobiltelefon-, Wi-Fi- og
Bluetooth-apparatet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og
øvrige relevante krav i EU-direktivet 1999/5/EF.
Polski??Niniejszym Apple Inc. oswiadcza, ze ten telefon komórkowy,
urzadzenie Wi-Fi oraz Bluetooth sa zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami
oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português??Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo móvel, Wi-Fi e
Bluetooth está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Româna??Prin prezenta, Apple Inc. declara ca acest aparat celular, Wi-Fi
?i Bluetooth este în conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si cu celelalte
prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko??Apple Inc. izjavlja, da so celicne naprave ter naprave Wi-Fi in
Bluetooth skladne z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi ustreznimi dolocili
direktive 1999/5/ES.Slovensky??Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že toto mobilné, Wi-Fi &
Bluetooth zariadenie splna základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi??Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä matkapuhelin-, Wi-Fija Bluetooth-tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska??Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna mobiltelefoni-, Wi-Fi-,
och Bluetooth-enhet står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av
direktiv 1999/5/EG.
A copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at:
www.apple.com/euro/compliance
iPhone can be used in the following countries:
European Community Restrictions
Français??Pour usage en intérieur uniquement. Consultez l’Autorité de
Régulation des Communications Electroniques et des Postes (ARCEP)
pour connaître les limites d’utilisation des canaux 1 à 13. www.arcep.fr
Japan Compliance Statement—VCCI Class B Statement
iPhone Terms and Conditions
IMPORTANT:??BY USING YOUR iPHONE, iPAD or iPOD TOUCH (“iOS
DEVICE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE FOLLOWING
APPLE AND THIRD PARTY TERMS:
A.??APPLE iOS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
B.??NOTICES FROM APPLE
C.??GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS
D.??YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPLE INC. iOS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
Single Use License
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”)
CAREFULLY BEFORE USING YOUR iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOADING THE
SOFTWARE UPDATE ACCOMPANYING THIS LICENSE. BY USING YOUR
iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOADING A SOFTWARE UPDATE, AS APPLICABLE,
YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, DO NOT USE THE iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOAD THE SOFTWARE UPDATE. FOR iOS DEVICE
PURCHASERS, IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE,
YOU MAY RETURN THE iOS DEVICE WITHIN THE RETURN PERIOD TO THE
APPLE STORE OR AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT
FOR A REFUND, SUBJECT TO APPLE’S RETURN POLICY FOUND AT
http://www.apple.com/legal/sales_policies/.
1. General.
(a) The software (including Boot ROM code and other embedded
software), documentation, interfaces, content, fonts and any data that
came with your iOS Device (“Original iOS Software”), as may be updated
or replaced by feature enhancements, software updates or system restore
software provided by Apple (“iOS Software Updates”), whether in read
only memory, on any other media or in any other form (the Original iOS
Software and iOS Software Updates are collectively referred to as the
“iOS Software”) are licensed, not sold, to you by Apple Inc. (“Apple”) for
use only under the terms of this License. Apple and its licensors retain
ownership of the iOS Software itself and reserve all rights not expressly
granted to you.
(b) Apple, at its discretion, may make available future iOS Software
Updates for your iOS Device. The iOS Software Updates, if any, may not
necessarily include all existing software features or new features that
Apple releases for newer or other models of iOS Devices. The terms of
this License will govern any iOS Software Updates provided by Apple
that replace and/or supplement the Original iOS Software product,
unless such iOS Software Update is accompanied by a separate license in
which case the terms of that license will govern.
2. Permitted License Uses and Restrictions.
(a) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted
a limited non-exclusive license to use the iOS Software on a single
Apple-branded iOS Device. Except as permitted in Section 2(b) below,
and unless as provided in a separate agreement between you and Apple,
this License does not allow the iOS Software to exist on more than one
Apple-branded iOS Device at a time, and you may not distribute or make
the iOS Software available over a network where it could be used by
multiple devices at the same time. This License does not grant you any
rights to use Apple proprietary interfaces and other intellectual property
in the design, development, manufacture, licensing or distribution of
third party devices and accessories, or third party software applications,
for use with iOS Devices. Some of those rights are available under
separate licenses from Apple. For more information on developing
third party devices and accessories for iOS Devices, please email
madeforipod@apple.com. For more information on developing software
applications for iOS Devices, please email devprograms@apple.com.
(b) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted
a limited non-exclusive license to download iOS Software Updates that
may be made available by Apple for your model of the iOS Device to
update or restore the software on any such iOS Device that you own
or control. This License does not allow you to update or restore any
iOS Device that you do not control or own, and you may not distribute
or make the iOS Software Updates available over a network where
they could be used by multiple devices or multiple computers at the same time. If you download an iOS Software Update to your computer,
you may make one copy of the iOS Software Updates stored on your
computer in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, provided
that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
(c) You may not and you agree not to, or to enable others to, copy
(except as expressly permitted by this License), decompile, reverse
engineer, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, decrypt,
modify, or create derivative works of the iOS Software or any services
provided by the iOS Software, or any part thereof (except as and only
to the extent any foregoing restriction is prohibited by applicable law
or to the extent as may be permitted by licensing terms governing use
of open-sourced components included with the iOS Software). Any
attempt to do so is a violation of the rights of Apple and its licensors of
the iOS Software.
(d) By storing content on your iOS Device you are making a digital copy.
In some jurisdictions, it is unlawful to make digital copies without prior
permission from the rights holder. The iOS Software may be used to
reproduce materials so long as such use is limited to reproduction of
non-copyrighted materials, materials in which you own the copyright, or
materials you are authorized or legally permitted to reproduce.
(e) You agree to use the iOS Software and the Services (as defined
in Section 5 below) in compliance with all applicable laws, including
local laws of the country or region in which you reside or in which you
download or use the iOS Software and Services.
(f) Use of and access to certain features of the iOS Software and certain
Services (as defined in Section 5) may require you to apply for a unique
user name and password combination, known as an Apple ID. In addition,
you acknowledge that many features and Services of the iOS Software
transmit data and could impact charges to your data plan, and that
you are responsible for any such charges. For more information, please
consult the User Guide for your iOS Device.
3. Transfer. You may not rent, lease, lend, sell, redistribute, or sublicense
the iOS Software. You may, however, make a one-time permanent transfer
of all of your license rights to the iOS Software to another party in
connection with the transfer of ownership of your iOS Device, provided
that: (a) the transfer must include your iOS Device and all of the iOS
Software, including all its component parts, original media, printed
materials and this License; (b) you do not retain any copies of the iOS
Software, full or partial, including copies stored on a computer or other
storage device; and (c) the party receiving the iOS Software reads and
agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License.
4. Consent to Use of Data.
(a) Diagnostic and Usage Data. If you opt in to diagnostic and usage
collection, you agree that Apple and its subsidiaries and agents may
collect, maintain, process and use diagnostic, technical, usage and related
information, including but not limited to information about your iOS
Device, computer, system and application software, and peripherals, that
is gathered periodically to facilitate the provision of software updates,
product support and other services to you (if any) related to the iOS
Software, and to verify compliance with the terms of this License. Apple may use this information, as long as it is collected in a form that does
not personally identify you, to provide and improve Apple’s products
and services. If you have opted in and have Location Services turned
on, the location of your device may also be sent to help Apple analyze
wireless or cellular performance issues (e.g. the strength or weakness of
a cellular signal in a particular location). To enable Apple’s partners and
third party developers to improve their software, hardware and services
designed for use with Apple products, Apple may also provide any such
partner or third party developer with a subset of diagnostic information
that is relevant to that partner’s or developer’s software, hardware and/or
services, as long as the diagnostic information is in a form that does not
personally identify you.
(b) Location Data. Apple and its partners and licensees may provide
certain services through your iOS Device that rely upon location
information. To provide and improve these services, where available,
Apple and its partners and licensees may transmit, collect, maintain,
process and use your location data, including the real-time geographic
location of your iOS Device, road travel speed information, and location
search queries. The location data and queries collected by Apple are
collected in a form that does not personally identify you and may be
used by Apple and its partners and licensees to provide location-based
products and services. By using any location-based services on your
iOS Device, you agree and consent to Apple’s and its partners’ and
licensees’ transmission, collection, maintenance, processing and use of
your location data and queries to provide and improve location-based
and road traffic-based products and services. You may withdraw this
consent at any time by going to the Location Services setting on your
iOS Device and either turning off the global Location Services setting or
turning off the individual location settings of each location-aware item
on your iOS Device. Disabling these location features will only impact
the location-based functionality of your iOS Device. It will not affect iOS
Device features unrelated to location services. When using third party
applications or services on the iOS Device that use or provide location
data, you are subject to and should review such third party’s terms and
privacy policy on use of location data by such third party applications
or services.
(c) Siri. If your iOS Device supports Siri, which includes the dictation
feature, these features allow you to make requests, give commands and
dictate text to your device using your voice. When you use Siri, the things
you say will be recorded and sent to Apple to process your requests.
Your device will also send Apple other information, such as your first
name and nickname; the names, nicknames, and relationship with you
(e.g., “my dad”) of your address book contacts; and song names in your
collection (collectively, your “User Data”). All of this data is used to help
Siri understand you better and recognize what you say. It is not linked to
other data that Apple may have from your use of other Apple services.
By using Siri, you agree and consent to Apple’s and its subsidiaries’
and agents’ transmission, collection, maintenance, processing, and
use of this information, including your voice input and User Data, to
provide and improve Siri and other Apple products and services. If
you have Location Services turned on, the location of your iOS Device
at the time you make a request will also be sent to Apple to help Siri improve the accuracy of its response to your location-based requests.
You may disable the location-based functionality of Siri by going to
the Location Services setting on your iOS Device and turning off the
individual location setting for Siri. You can also turn off Siri altogether
at any time. To do so, open Settings, tap General, tap Siri, and slide the
Siri switch to “off”. You may also restrict the ability to use Siri under the
Restrictions Setting.
(d) FaceTime. The FaceTime video calling feature of the iOS Software
(“FaceTime”) requires Internet access and may not be available in all
countries or regions. Your use of FaceTime is subject to your compliance
with Section 2(e) above. In order to set up FaceTime, and to initiate and
receive FaceTime calls between you and other FaceTime users, certain
unique identifiers for your iOS Device and account are needed. These
unique identifiers may include your email address(es), the Apple ID
information you provide, a hardware identifier for your iOS Device, and
your iPhone’s telephone number. By using the iOS Software, you agree
that Apple may transmit, collect, maintain, process and use these
identifiers for the purpose of providing and improving the FaceTime
feature. You understand that your iPhone’s telephone number will
be displayed to the other party on the video call (even if you have a
blocked number) or your email address will be shown, depending on
what setting you choose. If you are using a FaceTime-capable iPad or
iPod touch, your email address will be displayed to the other party on
the video call. You may turn off the FaceTime feature by going to the
FaceTime setting on your iOS Device or by going to the Restrictions
setting and enabling the FaceTime restriction.
(e) iMessage. The messaging feature of the iOS Software (“iMessage”)
may not be available in all countries or regions. Your use of iMessage
is subject to your compliance with Section 2(e) above. In order to set
up iMessage, and to initiate and receive iMessages between you and
other iOS Device users, certain unique identifiers for your iOS Device and
account are needed. These unique identifiers may include your email
address(es), the Apple ID information you provide, a hardware identifier
for your iOS Device, and your iPhone’s telephone number. By using the
iOS Software, you agree that Apple may transmit, collect, maintain,
process and use these identifiers for the purpose of providing and
improving the iMessage service. The iMessage service requires a Wi-Fi
or cellular data connection. To facilitate delivery of your iMessages and
to enable you to maintain conversations across your devices, Apple may
hold your iMessages in encrypted form for a limited period of time. If
your message cannot be sent as an iMessage, your message may be sent
as an SMS or MMS message, for which carrier messaging rates may apply.
You understand that your iPhone’s telephone number will be displayed
to the other party (even if you have a blocked number) or your email
address will be shown, depending on what setting you choose. If you are
using an iMessage-capable iPad or iPod touch your email address will be
displayed to the other party. You may turn off the iMessage service by
going to the Messages setting on your iOS Device.
(f) Photo Stream. By using the Photo Stream feature of iCloud, you
agree that Apple may store photos taken on your iOS Device or
uploaded from your computer for a limited period of time and
automatically send the photos to your other Apple iOS Devices or computers that are Photo Stream-enabled. Please note that a limited
number of photos may be stored at any one time, and older photos will
be automatically deleted from Photo Stream over time. Any photos you
want to keep must be saved to your camera roll, another album or your
computer. Photo resolution may vary depending on the device to which
the photos are downloaded. If you do not wish to use Photo Stream, you
can turn Photo Stream off on all of your iOS Devices or computers that
are Photo Stream-enabled. All use of the Photo Stream feature is subject
to the terms and conditions of this agreement and the iCloud Terms and
Conditions located at: http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/.
(g) Interest-Based Advertising. Apple may provide mobile, interest-based
advertising to you. If you do not want to receive relevant ads on your
iOS Device, you can opt out by going to this link on your iOS Device:
http://oo.apple.com. If you opt out, you will continue to receive the
same number of mobile ads, but they may be less relevant because
they will not be based on your interests. You may still see ads related
to the content on a web page or in an application or based on other
non-personal information. This opt-out applies only to Apple advertising
services and does not affect interest-based advertising from other
advertising networks.
(h) Privacy Policy. At all times your information will be treated in
accordance with Apple’s Privacy Policy, which is incorporated by
reference into this License and can be viewed at: www.apple.com/
privacy/.
5. Services and Third Party Materials.
(a) The iOS Software enables access to Apple’s iTunes Store, App Store,
Game Center, iCloud and other Apple and third party services and web
sites (collectively and individually, “Services”). Such Services may not be
available in all languages or in all countries. Use of these Services requires
Internet access and use of certain Services may require an Apple ID, may
require you to accept additional terms and may be subject to additional
fees. By using this software in connection with an Apple ID, iTunes Store
account, Game Center account, or iCloud account, you agree to the
applicable terms of service for that account, such as the latest iTunes
Store Terms and Conditions or Game Center Terms and Conditions, which
you may access and review at http://www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/,
or the iCloud Terms and Conditions which can be found at
http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/, respectively.
(b) If you sign up for iCloud, certain iCloud features like “Back Up” and
“Find My iPhone” may be accessed directly from the iOS Software. You
acknowledge and agree that your use of iCloud and these features is
subject to the latest terms and conditions of the iCloud service, which
you may access and review at: http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/
(c) You understand that by using any of the Services, you may encounter
content that may be deemed offensive, indecent, or objectionable,
which content may or may not be identified as having explicit language,
and that the results of any search or entering of a particular URL may
automatically and unintentionally generate links or references to
objectionable material. Nevertheless, you agree to use the Services at
your sole risk and that Apple shall have no liability to you for content
that may be found to be offensive, indecent, or objectionable. (d) Certain Services may display, include or make available content, data,
information, applications or materials from third parties (“Third Party
Materials”) or provide links to certain third party web sites. By using the
Services, you acknowledge and agree that Apple is not responsible for
examining or evaluating the content, accuracy, completeness, timeliness,
validity, copyright compliance, legality, decency, quality or any other
aspect of such Third Party Materials or web sites. Apple, its officers,
affiliates and subsidiaries do not warrant or endorse and do not assume
and will not have any liability or responsibility to you or any other person
for any third-party Services, Third Party Materials or web sites, or for any
other materials, products, or services of third parties. Third Party Materials
and links to other web sites are provided solely as a convenience to you.
(e) Financial information displayed by any Services is for general
informational purposes only and should not be relied upon as
investment advice. Before executing any securities transaction based
upon information obtained through the Services, you should consult
with a financial or securities professional who is legally qualified to give
financial or securities advice in your country or region. Location data
provided by any Services is for basic navigational purposes only and
is not intended to be relied upon in situations where precise location
information is needed or where erroneous, inaccurate, time-delayed or
incomplete location data may lead to death, personal injury, property or
environmental damage. Neither Apple nor any of its content providers
guarantees the availability, accuracy, completeness, reliability, or
timeliness of stock information, location data or any other data displayed
by any Services.
(f) You agree that the Services contain proprietary content, information
and material that is owned by Apple and/or its licensors, and is protected
by applicable intellectual property and other laws, including but not
limited to copyright. You agree that you will not use such proprietary
content, information or materials other than for permitted use of the
Services or in any manner that is inconsistent with the terms of this
License or that infringes any intellectual property rights of a third party
or Apple. No portion of the Services may be reproduced in any form or
by any means. You agree not to modify, rent, lease, loan, sell, distribute,
or create derivative works based on the Services, in any manner, and
you shall not exploit the Services in any unauthorized way whatsoever,
including but not limited to, using the Services to transmit any computer
viruses, worms, trojan horses or other malware, or by trespass or
burdening network capacity. You further agree not to use the Services in
any manner to harass, abuse, stalk, threaten, defame or otherwise infringe
or violate the rights of any other party, and that Apple is not in any way
responsible for any such use by you, nor for any harassing, threatening,
defamatory, offensive, infringing or illegal messages or transmissions that
you may receive as a result of using any of the Services.
(g) In addition, Services and Third Party Materials that may be accessed
from, displayed on or linked to from the iOS Device are not available in all
languages or in all countries or regions. Apple makes no representation
that such Services and Materials are appropriate or available for use
in any particular location. To the extent you choose to use or access
such Services and Materials, you do so at your own initiative and are
responsible for compliance with any applicable laws, including but not limited to applicable local laws. Apple and its licensors reserve the right
to change, suspend, remove, or disable access to any Services at any
time without notice. In no event will Apple be liable for the removal
of or disabling of access to any such Services. Apple may also impose
limits on the use of or access to certain Services, in any case and without
notice or liability.
6. Termination. This License is effective until terminated. Your rights
under this License will terminate automatically or otherwise cease to be
effective without notice from Apple if you fail to comply with any term(s)
of this License. Upon the termination of this License, you shall cease all
use of the iOS Software. Sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12 and 13 of this License
shall survive any such termination.
7. Disclaimer of Warranties.
7.1 If you are a customer who is a consumer (someone who uses the
iOS Software outside of your trade, business or profession), you may
have legal rights in your country of residence which would prohibit the
following limitations from applying to you, and where prohibited they
will not apply to you. To find out more about rights, you should contact a
local consumer advice organization.
7.2 YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT, TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, USE OF THE iOS SOFTWARE
AND SERVICES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU.
7.3 TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE
ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND APPLE AND APPLE’S
LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS “APPLE” FOR THE PURPOSES
OF SECTIONS 7 AND 8) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
7.4 APPLE DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH
YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES, THAT THE
FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN OR SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE iOS
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR
ERROR-FREE, THAT ANY SERVICE WILL CONTINUE TO BE MADE AVAILABLE,
THAT DEFECTS IN THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED,
OR THAT THE iOS SOFTWARE WILL BE COMPATIBLE OR WORK WITH ANY
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES.
INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE MAY AFFECT THE USABILITY OF THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES.
7.5 YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE iOS SOFTWARE AND
SERVICES ARE NOT INTENDED OR SUITABLE FOR USE IN SITUATIONS OR
ENVIRONMENTS WHERE THE FAILURE OR TIME DELAYS OF, OR ERRORS
OR INACCURACIES IN, THE CONTENT, DATA OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES COULD LEAD TO DEATH, PERSONAL
INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT
NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE
SUPPORT OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS.
7.6 NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
APPLE OR AN APPLE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY. SHOULD THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8. Limitation of Liability. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL
INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO
TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED
TO YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES
OR ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS IN CONJUNCTION
WITH THE iOS SOFTWARE, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE
THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF
APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall Apple’s
total liability to you for all damages (other than as may be required by
applicable law in cases involving personal injury) exceed the amount of
two hundred and fifty dollars (U.S.$250.00). The foregoing limitations will
apply even if the above stated remedy fails of its essential purpose.
9. Digital Certificates. The iOS Software contains functionality that
allows it to accept digital certificates either issued from Apple or from
third parties. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DECIDING WHETHER
OR NOT TO RELY ON A CERTIFICATE WHETHER ISSUED BY APPLE OR A
THIRD PARTY. YOUR USE OF DIGITAL CERTIFICATES IS AT YOUR SOLE
RISK. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, APPLE
MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AS TO MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ACCURACY, SECURITY, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS
WITH RESPECT TO DIGITAL CERTIFICATES.
10. Export Control. You may not use or otherwise export or re-export the
iOS Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of
the jurisdiction(s) in which the iOS Software was obtained. In particular,
but without limitation, the iOS Software may not be exported or reexported (a) into any U.S. embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the
U.S. Treasury Department’s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the
U.S. Department of Commerce Denied Person’s List or Entity List. By using
the iOS Software, you represent and warrant that you are not located
in any such country or on any such list. You also agree that you will not use the iOS Software for any purposes prohibited by United States law,
including, without limitation, the development, design, manufacture or
production of missiles, nuclear, chemical or biological weapons.
11. Government End Users. The iOS Software and related documentation
are “Commercial Items”, as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting
of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software
Documentation”, as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
§227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer
Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being
licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and
(b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to
the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the
copyright laws of the United States.
12. Controlling Law and Severability. This License will be governed by
and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California,
excluding its conflict of law principles. This License shall not be governed
by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. If you are
a consumer based in the United Kingdom, this License will be governed
by the laws of the jurisdiction of your residence. If for any reason a
court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof,
to be unenforceable, the remainder of this License shall continue in full
force and effect.
13. Complete Agreement; Governing Language. This License constitutes
the entire agreement between you and Apple relating to the iOS
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings
regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of
this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by Apple. Any
translation of this License is done for local requirements and in the event
of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the
English version of this License shall govern, to the extent not prohibited
by local law in your jurisdiction.
14. Third Party Acknowledgements. Portions of the iOS Software may
utilize or include third party software and other copyrighted material.
Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material
are contained in the electronic documentation for the iOS Software,
and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms. Use
of the Google Safe Browsing Service is subject to the Google Terms of
Service (http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and to Google’s
Privacy Policy (http://www.google.com/privacypolicy.html).
15. Use of MPEG-4; H.264/AVC Notice.
(a) The iOS Software contains MPEG-4 video encoding and/or decoding
functionality. The iOS Software is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual
Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of a
consumer for (i) encoding video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual
Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”) and/or (ii) decoding MPEG-4 video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial
activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA
to provide MPEG-4 video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any
other use. Additional information including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained from MPEG
LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
(b) The iOS Software contains AVC encoding and/or decoding
functionality, commercial use of H.264/AVC requires additional licensing
and the following provision applies: THE AVC FUNCTIONALITY IN THE
iOS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED HEREIN ONLY FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii)
DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR AVC VIDEO
THAT WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
AVC VIDEO. INFORMATION REGARDING OTHER USES AND LICENSES MAY
BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
16. Yahoo Search Service Restrictions. The Yahoo Search Service
available through Safari is licensed for use only in the following countries
and regions: Argentina, Aruba, Australia, Austria, Barbados, Belgium,
Bermuda, Brazil, Bulgaria, Canada, Cayman Islands, Chile, China, Colombia,
Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Grenada, Guatemala, Hong
Kong, Hungary, Iceland, India, Indonesia, Ireland, Italy, Jamaica, Japan,
Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Netherlands, New
Zealand, Nicaragua, Norway, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Poland, Portugal,
Puerto Rico, Romania, Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, South Korea, Spain,
St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, Thailand, The Bahamas,
Trinidad and Tobago, Turkey, UK, Uruguay, US and Venezuela.
17. Microsoft Exchange Notice. The Microsoft Exchange mail setting
in the iOS Software is licensed only for over-the-air synchronization of
information, such as email, contacts, calendar and tasks, between your
iOS and Microsoft Exchange Server or other server software licensed by
Microsoft to implement the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync protocol.
EA0790
Rev. 8/15/11
NOTICES FROM APPLE
If Apple needs to contact you about your product or account, you
consent to receive the notices by email. You agree that any such notices
that we send you electronically will satisfy any legal communication
requirements.
GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Thank you for trying out the Google Maps for mobile software application!
This page contains the terms and conditions (the “Terms and Conditions”)
for Google Maps for mobile and the enterprise version of Google Maps for
mobile. In order to use this software, including any third party software
made available to you in conjunction with this software and/or the related
service, (collectively referred to below as “Google Maps for mobile”) you
agree to be bound by these Terms and Conditions, either on behalf of
yourself or on behalf of your employer or other entity. If you are agreeing
to be bound by these Terms and Conditions on behalf of your employer or
other entity, you represent and warrant that you have full legal authority
to bind your employer or such entity to these Terms and Conditions. If you don’t have the legal authority to bind, please press “No” when asked
whether you agree to these Terms and Conditions, and do not proceed
with use of this product.
Additional Terms??Google Maps for mobile is designed to be used in
conjunction with Google’s Maps services and other Google services.
Accordingly, you agree and acknowledge that your use of Google Maps
for mobile is also subject to (a) the specific terms of service for Google
Maps (which can be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/terms_local.
html) including the content notices applicable thereto (which can
be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/legalnotices_local.html),
(b) the general Google terms of service (which can be viewed at
http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and (c) Google’s
overall privacy policy (which can be viewed at http://www.google.com/
privacypolicy.html), as well as specific privacy policies, such as the Google
Maps for mobile privacy policy included with this application, such
provisions being hereby incorporated into these Terms and Conditions
by reference. To the extent that there is any inconsistency or conflict
between such additional terms and these Terms and Conditions, the
provisions of these Terms and Conditions take precedence.
Network Charges??Google does not charge for downloading or using
Google Maps for mobile, but depending on your plan and your carrier or
provider, your carrier or other provider may charge you for downloading
Google Maps for mobile or for use of your mobile phone when you access
information or other Google services through Google Maps for mobile.
Non-Commercial Use Only??Google Maps for mobile is made available
to you for your non-commercial use only. This means that you may use it
for your personal use only: you may use it at work or at home, to search
for anything you want, subject to the terms set out in these Terms and
Conditions. You need to obtain Google’s permission first, which you can
do by contacting mobile-support@google.com, if you want to sell Google
Maps for mobile or any information, services, or software associated
with or derived from it, or if you want to modify, copy, license, or create
derivative works from Google Maps for mobile.
Unless you have our prior written consent, you agree not to modify,
adapt, translate, prepare derivative works from, decompile, reverse
engineer, disassemble or otherwise attempt to derive source code from
Google Maps for mobile.
Furthermore, you may not use Google Maps for mobile in any manner
that could damage, disable, overburden, or impair Google’s services (e.g.,
you may not use the Google Maps for mobile in an automated manner),
nor may you use Google Maps for mobile in any manner that could
interfere with any other party’s use and enjoyment of Google’s services.
If you have comments on Google Maps for mobile or ideas on how to
improve it, please email mobile-support@google.com. Please note that
by doing so, you also grant Google and third parties permission to use
and incorporate your ideas or comments into Google Maps for mobile
(or third party software) without further notice or compensation.
Intellectual Property??As between you and Google, you agree and
acknowledge that Google owns all rights, title and interest in and to
Google Maps for mobile, including without limitation all associated Intellectual Property Rights. “Intellectual Property Rights” means any
and all rights existing from time to time under patent law, copyright
law, trade secret law, trademark law, unfair competition law, and any
and all other proprietary rights, and any and all applications, renewals,
extensions and restorations thereof, now or hereafter in force and effect
worldwide. You agree to not remove, obscure, or alter Google’s or any
third party’s copyright notice, trademarks, or other proprietary rights
notices affixed to or contained within or accessed in conjunction with or
through the Google Maps for mobile.
Disclaimer of Warranties??Google and any third party who makes its
software available in conjunction with or through Google Maps for
mobile disclaim any responsibility for any harm resulting from your use
of Google Maps for mobile and/or any third party software accessed in
conjunction with or through Google Maps for mobile.
GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” WITH NO WARRANTIES
WHATSOEVER. GOOGLE AND SUCH THIRD PARTIES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM
TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. GOOGLE
AND ANY SUCH THIRD PARTIES DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING
THE SECURITY, RELIABILITY, TIMELINESS, AND PERFORMANCE OF GOOGLE
MAPS FOR MOBILE AND SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
YOU UNDERSTAND AND AGREE THAT YOU DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE
GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND
THAT YOU WILL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES TO YOUR
COMPUTER OR MOBILE DEVICE SYSTEM OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS
FROM THE DOWNLOAD OR USE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SOME
STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE AND JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
Limitation of Liability??UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL GOOGLE
OR ANY THIRD PARTY WHO MAKE THEIR SOFTWARE AVAILABLE IN
CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE
BE LIABLE TO ANY USER ON ACCOUNT OF THAT USER’S USE OR MISUSE
OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL
APPLY TO PREVENT RECOVERY OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, AND PUNITIVE DAMAGES
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON WARRANTY, CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), OR OTHERWISE, (EVEN IF GOOGLE AND/
OR A THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDER HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES). SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SHALL APPLY WHETHER THE DAMAGES ARISE FROM USE OR MISUSE
OF AND RELIANCE ON GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR ON PRODUCTS
OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH
GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, FROM INABILITY TO USE GOOGLE MAPS FOR
MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION
WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, OR FROM THE
INTERRUPTION, SUSPENSION, OR TERMINATION OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR
MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE (INCLUDING SUCH
DAMAGES INCURRED BY THIRD PARTIES). SUCH LIMITATION SHALL APPLY
NOTWITHSTANDING A FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED
REMEDY AND TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. SOME
STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Miscellaneous Provisions??These Terms and Conditions will be governed
by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California,
without giving effect to the conflict of laws provisions of California or
your actual state or country of residence. If for any reason a court of
competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion of these Terms
and Conditions to be unenforceable, the remainder of these Terms and
Conditions will continue in full force and effect.
These Terms and Conditions constitute the entire agreement between
you and Google with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersede
and replace all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements,
written or oral, regarding such subject matter. Any waiver of any
provision of these Terms and Conditions will be effective only if in writing
and signed by Google.
September 2007
YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
http://www.youtube.com/t/terms
Apple One (1) Year Limited Warranty—iPhone
For Apple Branded Products Only
HOW CONSUMER LAW RELATES TO THIS WARRANTY. THIS WARRANTY
GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR BY COUNTRY OR PROVINCE).
OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE DOES NOT EXCLUDE, LIMIT
OR SUSPEND OTHER RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE, INCLUDING THOSE THAT
MAY ARISE FROM THE NONCONFORMITY OF A SALES CONTRACT. FOR
A FULL UNDERSTANDING OF YOUR RIGHTS YOU SHOULD CONSULT THE
LAWS OF YOUR COUNTRY, PROVINCE OR STATE.
WARRANTY LIMITATIONS THAT MAY AFFECT CONSUMER LAW. TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THIS WARRANTY AND THE REMEDIES
SET FORTH ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
REMEDIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER ORAL, WRITTEN, STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. APPLE DISCLAIMS ALL STATUTORY AND IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
WARRANTIES AGAINST HIDDEN OR LATENT DEFECTS, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW. IN SO FAR AS SUCH WARRANTIES CANNOT BE
DISCLAIMED, APPLE LIMITS THE DURATION AND REMEDIES OF SUCH
WARRANTIES TO THE DURATION OF THIS EXPRESS WARRANTY AND, AT
APPLE’S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT SERVICES DESCRIBED
BELOW. SOME STATES (COUNTRIES AND PROVINCES) DO NOT ALLOW
LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY (OR CONDITION)
MAY LAST, SO THE LIMITATION DESCRIBED ABOVE MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.WHAT IS COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY? Apple warrants the Applebranded hardware product and accessories contained in the
original packaging (“Apple Product”) against defects in materials
and workmanship when used normally in accordance with Apple’s
published guidelines for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of
original retail purchase by the end-user purchaser (“Warranty Period”).
Apple’s published guidelines include but are not limited to information
contained in technical specifications, user manuals and service
communications.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY? This warranty does not
apply to any non-Apple branded hardware products or any software,
even if packaged or sold with Apple hardware. Manufacturers, suppliers,
or publishers, other than Apple, may provide their own warranties to
you but Apple, in so far as permitted by law, provides their products
“AS IS”. Software distributed by Apple with or without the Apple brand
(including, but not limited to system software) is not covered by this
warranty. Please refer to the licensing agreement accompanying the
software for details of your rights with respect to its use. Apple does not
warrant that the operation of the Apple Product will be uninterrupted
or error-free. Apple is not responsible for damage arising from failure to
follow instructions relating to the Apple Product’s use.
This warranty does not apply: (a) to consumable parts, such as
batteries or protective coatings that are designed to diminish over
time, unless failure has occurred due to a defect in materials or
workmanship; (b) to cosmetic damage, including but not limited to
scratches, dents and broken plastic on ports; (c) to damage caused by
use with another product; (d) to damage caused by accident, abuse,
misuse, liquid contact, fire, earthquake or other external cause; (e)
to damage caused by operating the Apple Product outside Apple’s
published guidelines; (f) to damage caused by service (including
upgrades and expansions) performed by anyone who is not a
representative of Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider
(“AASP”); (g) to an Apple Product that has been modified to alter
functionality or capability without the written permission of Apple;
(h) to defects caused by normal wear and tear or otherwise due to the
normal aging of the Apple Product, or (i) if any serial number has been
removed or defaced from the Apple Product.
IMPORTANT RESTRICTION. Apple may restrict warranty service to the
country where Apple or its Authorized Distributors originally sold the
Apple Product.
YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES. YOU SHOULD MAKE PERIODIC BACKUP COPIES
OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE APPLE PRODUCT’S STORAGE
MEDIA TO PROTECT THE CONTENTS AND AS A PRECAUTION AGAINST
POSSIBLE OPERATIONAL FAILURES.
Before receiving warranty service, Apple or its agents may require that
you furnish proof of purchase details, respond to questions designed to
assist with diagnosing potential issues and follow Apple’s procedures
for obtaining warranty service. Before submitting your Apple Product
for warranty service you should maintain a separate backup copy of the
contents of its storage media, remove all personal information that you
want to protect and disable all security passwords.DURING WARRANTY SERVICE THE CONTENTS OF THE STORAGE MEDIA
WILL BE DELETED AND REFORMATTED. APPLE AND ITS AGENTS ARE NOT
RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF SOFTWARE PROGRAMS, DATA OR OTHER
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE STORAGE MEDIA OR ANY OTHER
PART OF THE APPLE PRODUCT SERVICED.
Following warranty service your Apple Product or a replacement product
will be returned to you as your Apple Product was configured when
originally purchased, subject to applicable updates. Apple may install
system software updates as part of warranty service that will prevent
the Apple Product from reverting to an earlier version of the system
software. Third party applications installed on the Apple Product may
not be compatible or work with the Apple Product as a result of the
system software update. You will be responsible for reinstalling all other
software programs, data and information. Recovery and reinstallation of
other software programs, data and information are not covered under
this warranty.
Important: Do not open the Apple Product. Opening the Apple Product
may cause damage that is not covered by this warranty. Only Apple or
an AASP should perform service on this Apple Product.
WHAT WILL APPLE DO IN THE EVENT THE WARRANTY IS BREACHED?
If during the Warranty Period you submit a valid claim to Apple or an
AASP, Apple will, at its option, (i) repair the Apple Product using new or
previously used parts that are equivalent to new in performance and
reliability, (ii) replace the Apple Product with a product that is at least
functionally equivalent to the Apple Product and is formed from new
and/or previously used parts that are equivalent to new in performance
and reliability, or (iii) exchange the Apple Product for a refund of your
purchase price.
Apple may request that you replace certain user-installable parts or
products. A replacement part or product, including a user-installable
part that has been installed in accordance with instructions provided by
Apple, assumes the remaining warranty of the Apple Product or ninety
(90) days from the date of replacement or repair, whichever provides
longer coverage for you. When a product or part is replaced or a refund
provided, any replacement item becomes your property and the replaced
or refunded item becomes Apple’s property.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE. Please access and review the
online help resources described below before seeking warranty service.
If the Apple Product is still not functioning properly after making
use of these resources, please contact an Apple representative or, if
applicable, an Apple owned retail store (“Apple Retail”) or AASP, using the
information provided below. An Apple representative or AASP will help
determine whether your Apple Product requires service and, if it does,
will inform you how Apple will provide it. When contacting Apple via
telephone, other charges may apply depending on your location.
Online information with details on obtaining warranty service is
provided below.
WARRANTY SERVICE OPTIONS. Apple will provide warranty service
through one or more of the following options:(i) Carry-in service. You may return your Apple Product to an Apple Retail
or AASP location offering carry-in service. Service will be performed at
the location, or Apple Retail or an AASP may send your Apple Product
to an Apple Repair Service (“ARS”) location to be serviced. Once you are
notified that service is complete, you will promptly retrieve the Apple
Product from the Apple Retail or AASP location, or the Apple Product will
be sent directly to your location from the ARS location.
(ii) Mail-in service. If Apple determines that your Apple Product is eligible
for mail-in service, Apple will send you prepaid waybills and if applicable,
packaging material, so that you may ship your Apple Product to an ARS
or AASP location in accordance with Apple’s instructions. Once service is
complete, the ARS or AASP location will return the Apple Product to you.
Apple will pay for shipping to and from your location if all instructions
are followed.
(iii) Do-it-yourself (DIY) parts service. DIY parts service allows you to
service your own Apple Product. If DIY parts service is available in the
circumstances, the following process will apply.
(a) Service where Apple requires return of the replaced product or part.
Apple may require a credit card authorization as security for the retail
price of the replacement product or part and applicable shipping costs. If
you are unable to provide credit card authorization, DIY parts service may
not be available to you and Apple will offer alternative arrangements
for service. Apple will ship a replacement product or part to you with
installation instructions, if applicable, and any requirements for the return
of the replaced product or part. If you follow the instructions, Apple will
cancel the credit card authorization, so you will not be charged for the
product or part and shipping to and from your location. If you fail to
return the replaced product or part as instructed or return a replaced
product or part that is ineligible for service, Apple will charge your credit
card for the authorized amount.
(b) Service where Apple does not require return of the replaced product
or part. Apple will ship you free of charge a replacement product or
part accompanied by instructions on installation, if applicable, and any
requirements for the disposal of the replaced product or part.
(c) Apple is not responsible for any labor costs you incur relating to DIY
parts service. Should you require further assistance, contact Apple at the
telephone number listed below.
Apple reserves the right to change the method by which Apple may
provide warranty service to you, and your Apple Product’s eligibility
to receive a particular method of service. Service will be limited to the
options available in the country where service is requested. Service
options, parts availability and response times may vary according to
country. You may be responsible for shipping and handling charges if
the Apple Product cannot be serviced in the country it is in. If you seek
service in a country that is not the original country of purchase, you will
comply with all applicable import and export laws and regulations and
be responsible for all custom duties, V.A.T. and other associated taxes
and charges. Where international service is available, Apple may repair
or replace products and parts with comparable products and parts that
comply with local standards.LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY
AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE IS NOT
RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR
CONDITION, OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE; LOSS OF REVENUE; LOSS OF ACTUAL OR
ANTICIPATED PROFITS (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS ON CONTRACTS);
LOSS OF THE USE OF MONEY; LOSS OF ANTICIPATED SAVINGS; LOSS
OF BUSINESS; LOSS OF OPPORTUNITY; LOSS OF GOODWILL; LOSS OF
REPUTATION; LOSS OF, DAMAGE TO, COMPROMISE OR CORRUPTION
OF DATA; OR ANY INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE
HOWSOEVER CAUSED INCLUDING THE REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT
AND PROPERTY, ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, PROGRAMMING, OR
REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH THE
APPLE PRODUCT OR ANY FAILURE TO MAINTAIN THE CONFIDENTIALITY
OF INFORMATION STORED ON THE APPLE PRODUCT.
THE FOREGOING LIMITATION SHALL NOT APPLY TO DEATH OR PERSONAL
INJURY CLAIMS, OR ANY STATUTORY LIABILITY FOR INTENTIONAL AND
GROSS NEGLIGENT ACTS AND/OR OMISSIONS. APPLE DISCLAIMS ANY
REPRESENTATION THAT IT WILL BE ABLE TO REPAIR ANY APPLE PRODUCT
UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR REPLACE THE APPLE PRODUCT WITHOUT
RISK TO OR LOSS OF INFORMATION STORED IN THE APPLE PRODUCT.
SOME STATES (COUNTRIES AND PROVINCES) DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU.
PRIVACY. Apple will maintain and use customer information in
accordance with the Apple Customer Privacy Policy available at www.
apple.com/legal/warranty/privacy.
GENERAL. No Apple reseller, agent, or employee is authorized to make
any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty. If any term
is held to be illegal or unenforceable, the legality or enforceability of
the remaining terms shall not be affected or impaired. This warranty
is governed by and construed under the laws of the country in which
the Apple Product purchase took place. Apple is identified at the end
of this document according to the country or region in which the
Apple Product purchase took place. Apple or its successor in title is the
warrantor under this warranty.
ONLINE INFORMATION. More information of the following is available
online:
International Support Information
www.apple.com/support/country
Authorized Distributors
www.apple.com/iphone/countries
Apple Authorized Service Providers
support.apple.com/kb/HT1937
Apple Retail Store
www.apple.com/retail/storelistApple Support and Service
support.apple.com/kb/HE57
Apple Complimentary Support
www.apple.com/support/country/index.html?dest=complimentary
Warranty Obligor for Region or Country of Purchase
Region/Country of Purchase Apple Address
Americas
Brazil Apple Computer Brasil Ltda
Av. Cidade Jardim 400, 2 Andar, Sao Paulo,
SP Brasil 01454-901
Canada Apple Canada Inc.
7495 Birchmount Rd.; Markham, Ontario,
Canada; L3R 5G2 Canada
Mexico Apple Operations México S.A. de C.V.
Prolongación Paseo de la Reforma #600,
Suite 132
Colonia Peña Blanca, Santa Fé
Delegación Álvaro Obregón
México D. F., CP 01210, México
United States and
Other Americas Countries
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino, CA 95014, USA
Europe, Middle East and Africa
All countries Apple Sales International
Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill, Cork,
Republic of Ireland
Asia Pacific
Australia; New Zealand; Fiji,
Papua New Guinea; Vanuatu
Apple Pty. Limited.
PO Box A2629, Sydney South,
NSW 1235, Australia
Hong Kong Apple Asia Limited
2401 Tower One, Times Square,
Causeway Bay, Hong Kong
India Apple India Private Ltd.
19th Floor, Concorde Tower C,
UB City No 24, Vittal Mallya Road,
Bangalore 560-001, India
Japan Apple Japan Inc.
3-20-2 Nishishinjuku, Shinjuku-ku,
Tokyo, Japan
Korea Apple Korea Ltd.
3201, ASEM Tower; 159, Samsung-dong,
Gangnam-Gu; Seoul 135-798,
Republic of Korea
Afghanistan, Bangladesh,
Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia,
Guam, Indonesia, Laos,
Singapore, Malaysia, Nepal,
Pakistan, Philippines,
Sri Lanka, Vietnam
Apple South Asia Pte. Ltd.
7 Ang Mo Kio Street 64
Singapore 569086Region/Country of Purchase Apple Address
People’s Republic of China Apple Computer Trading (Shanghai) Co. Ltd.
Room 1815, No. 1 Jilong Road, Waigaoqiao
Free Trade Zone, Shanghai 200131 China
Thailand Apple South Asia (Thailand) Limited
25th Floor, Suite B2, Siam Tower,
989 Rama 1 Road, Pataumwan,
Bangkok, 10330
Taiwan Apple Asia LLC
16A, No. 333 Tun Hwa S. Road. Sec. 2,
Taipei, Taiwan 106
Other Asian Pacific Countries Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino, CA 95014, USA
iPhone US Warranty v3.0© 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Apple, the Apple logo, FaceTime, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes,
Safari, Siri, the Made for iPod logo, and the Works with iPhone logo are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The Made for iPhone logo and iMessage are trademarks of Apple Inc.
iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries. App Store and iCloud are service marks of Apple Inc.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other
countries and is used under license. The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license.
034-5992-A
Printed in XXXX
iPhone
User Guide
For iPhone OS 3.1 SoftwareContents
9 Chapter 1: Getting Started
9 Viewing the User Guide on iPhone
9 What You Need
10 Activating iPhone
10 Installing the SIM Card
10 Registering iPhone
11 Setting Up iPhone Using VoiceOver
11 Syncing
16 Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts
18 Installing Configuration Profiles
19 Disconnecting iPhone from Your Computer
20 Chapter 2: Basics
20 iPhone at a Glance
23 Home Screen
26 Buttons
28 Touchscreen
31 Onscreen Keyboard
37 Searching
38 Voice Control
39 Stereo Headset
40 Connecting to the Internet
43 Battery
45 Security Features
46 Cleaning iPhone
46 Restarting and Resetting iPhone
47 Chapter 3: Phone
47 Phone Calls
51 Visual Voicemail
54 Contacts
54 Favorites
54 Ringtones and the Ring/Silent Switch
255 Bluetooth Devices
56 International Calls
59 Chapter 4: Mail
59 Setting Up Email Accounts
59 Sending Email
60 Checking and Reading Email
64 Searching Email
64 Organizing Email
66 Chapter 5: Safari
66 Viewing Webpages
69 Searching the Web
69 Bookmarks
70 Web Clips
71 Chapter 6: iPod
71 Getting Music, Video, and More
73 Music and Other Audio
81 Videos
84 Setting a Sleep Timer
85 Changing the Browse Buttons
86 Chapter 7: Messages
86 Sending and Receiving Messages
88 Sharing Photos and Videos
88 Sending Voice Memos
89 Editing Conversations
89 Using Contact Information and Links
90 Managing Previews and Alerts
91 Chapter 8: Calendar
91 About Calendar
91 Syncing Calendars
92 Viewing Your Calendar
93 Searching Calendars
93 Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars
94 Adding Calendar Events to iPhone
95 Responding to Meeting Invitations
96 Alerts
97 Chapter 9: Photos
97 About Photos
97 Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer
Contents 398 Viewing Photos and Videos
99 Slideshows
100 Sharing Photos and Videos
102 Assigning a Photo to a Contact
102 Wallpaper
103 Chapter 10: Camera
103 About Camera
104 Taking Photos and Recording Videos
105 Viewing and Sharing Photos and Videos
105 Trimming Videos
106 Uploading Photos and Videos to Your Computer
107 Chapter 11: YouTube
107 Finding and Viewing Videos
108 Controlling Video Playback
109 Managing Videos
109 Getting More Information
110 Using YouTube Account Features
111 Changing the Browse Buttons
111 Sending Videos to YouTube
112 Chapter 12: Stocks
112 Viewing Stock Quotes
113 Getting More Information
114 Chapter 13: Maps
114 Finding and Viewing Locations
119 Bookmarking Locations
119 Getting Directions
121 Showing Traffic Conditions
121 Finding and Contacting Businesses
123 Chapter 14: Weather
123 Viewing Weather Summaries
124 Getting More Weather Information
125 Chapter 15: Voice Memos
125 Recording Voice Memos
126 Listening to Voice Memos
127 Managing Voice Memos
128 Trimming Voice Memos
128 Sharing Voice Memos
129 Syncing Voice Memos
4 Contents130 Chapter 16: Notes
130 Writing and Reading Notes
131 Searching Notes
131 Emailing Notes
131 Syncing Notes
132 Chapter 17: Clock
132 World Clocks
133 Alarms
133 Stopwatch
134 Timer
135 Chapter 18: Calculator
135 Using the Calculator
135 Standard Memory Functions
136 Scientific Calculator Keys
138 Chapter 19: Settings
138 Airplane Mode
139 Wi-Fi
140 VPN
140 Notifications
141 Carrier
141 Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch
142 Brightness
142 Wallpaper
142 General
150 Mail, Contacts, Calendars
153 Phone
156 Safari
157 Messages
158 iPod
159 Photos
159 Store
159 Nike + iPod
160 Chapter 20: iTunes Store
160 About the iTunes Store
161 Finding Music, Videos, and More
162 Purchasing Ringtones
162 Purchasing Music or Audiobooks
163 Purchasing or Renting Videos
164 Streaming or Downloading Podcasts
Contents 5165 Checking Download Status
165 Syncing Purchased Content
165 Changing the Browse Buttons
166 Viewing Account Information
166 Verifying Purchases
167 Chapter 21: App Store
167 About the App Store
167 Browsing and Searching
169 Info Screen
170 Downloading Applications
171 Deleting Applications
171 Writing Reviews
172 Updating Applications
172 Syncing Purchased Applications
173 Chapter 22: Compass
173 Getting Compass Readings
174 Compass and Maps
176 Chapter 23: Contacts
176 About Contacts
176 Adding Contacts
177 Searching Contacts
178 Managing Contacts on iPhone
180 Chapter 24: Nike + iPod
180 Activating Nike + iPod
181 Additional Nike + iPod Settings
182 Chapter 25: Accessibility
182 Accessibility Features
183 VoiceOver
189 Zoom
190 White on Black
190 Mono Audio
190 Speak Auto-text
191 Triple-click Home
191 Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features
193 Appendix A: Troubleshooting
193 Apple iPhone Support Site
193 General
195 iTunes and Syncing
6 Contents196 Phone and Voicemail
197 Safari, Text, Mail, and Contacts
200 Sound, Music, and Video
201 iTunes Stores
201 Removing the SIM Card
202 Backing Up iPhone
204 Updating and Restoring iPhone Software
205 Appendix B: Other Resources
205 Safety, Software, and Service Information
206 Viewing the User Guide on iPhone
206 Disposal and Recycling Information
207 Apple and the Environment
208 Index
Contents 7Getting Started
1
· WARNING: To avoid injury, read all operating instructions in this guide and
safety information in the iPhone Important Product Information Guide at
www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone before using iPhone.
Viewing the User Guide on iPhone
The iPhone User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPhone, is available at
help.apple.com/iphone.
View the guide on iPhone: In Safari, tap , then tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark.
Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then
tap “Add to Home Screen.”
The iPhone User Guide is available in many languages.
View the guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the
screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want.
What You Need
To use iPhone, you need:
• A wireless service plan with a carrier that provides iPhone service in your area
• A Mac or a PC with a USB 2.0 port and one of the following operating systems:
• Mac OS X version 10.4.11 or later; version 10.5.7 or later is required for syncing
Notes and for using iPhone as a modem
• Windows XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 or later
• Windows Vista Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, or Ultimate edition
• Display resolution on your computer set to 1024 x 768 or higher
• iTunes 8.2 or later, available at www.itunes.com/download (iTunes 9 or later required
for certain features)
• QuickTime 7.6.2 or later (for playing videos recorded by iPhone 3GS on your
computer)
9• An iTunes Store account (for purchases from the iTunes Store or App Store)
• An Internet connection for your computer (broadband recommended)
Activating iPhone
Before you can use any of iPhone’s features, you must activate iPhone by signing up
for a service plan with an iPhone service carrier in your area and registering iPhone
with the network.
Your iPhone may have been activated at the time of purchase. If it isn’t activated,
contact your iPhone retailer or cellular service provider.
For more information about iPhone, go to www.apple.com/iphone.
Installing the SIM Card
If your SIM card was not preinstalled, you must install the SIM card before you can use
iPhone.
SIM
card
SIM tray
SIM eject tool
Install the SIM card:
1 Insert the end of the SIM eject tool into the hole on the SIM tray.
Press firmly and push it straight in until the tray pops out. If you don’t have a SIM eject
tool, you can use the end of a paper clip.
2 Pull out the SIM tray and place the SIM card in the tray.
The angled corner of the SIM ensures that the card fits only the correct way in the tray.
3 With the tray aligned as shown, carefully replace the SIM tray containing the SIM card
in iPhone.
Registering iPhone
Registering iPhone with iTunes enables iTunes to identify your iPhone when it’s
connected to your computer and help you manage its contents. You can then sync
information with your computer and media from iTunes, and create backups of
iPhone’s contents and settings. You can create an iTunes Store account, or specify an
existing account, to enable purchases with iPhone. iTunes also records iPhone’s serial
number in the event you need it for service or in case of loss.
10 Chapter 1 Getting StartedRegister iPhone:
1 Download and install the latest version of iTunes from www.itunes.com/download.
2 Connect iPhone to a USB 2.0 port on your Mac or PC using the cable that came with
iPhone.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions in iTunes to register iPhone and sync iPhone with
your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks on your computer, and with music, video,
and other content from your iTunes library.
In the Set Up Your iPhone screen, select “Automatically sync contacts, calendars
and bookmarks” to configure those items to sync automatically when you connect
iPhone to your computer. You can also customize your sync settings in iTunes.
See the following section.
Setting Up iPhone Using VoiceOver
If you’re visually impaired, VoiceOver (available only on iPhone 3GS) can help you set
up iPhone without a sighted assistant. VoiceOver describes aloud what appears on
the screen, so you can use iPhone without seeing it. When you connect iPhone to
your computer, iTunes detects whether you’re using a compatible screen reader on
your computer, such as VoiceOver on a Mac or GW Micro Window-Eyes on a PC, and
automatically enables VoiceOver on iPhone. A sighted user can also enable VoiceOver
on iPhone for you, using Accessibility settings. See “Using VoiceOver” on page 187.
Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages.
Syncing
With iPhone, you can have easy access to important information on your computer,
including your contacts, calendars, and even your browser bookmarks, as well as to
music, video, and other content in your iTunes library.
About Syncing
Syncing copies information and content between iPhone and your computer, keeping
it current and up-to-date, whether you make changes on iPhone or on your computer.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 11iTunes lets you specify the information and content on your computer that you want
to sync with iPhone. By default, iTunes syncs automatically with iPhone whenever you
connect iPhone to your computer.
You can also set up iPhone to sync your MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange accounts,
over the air. See “Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts” on page 16.
Syncing with iTunes
You can set iTunes to sync any or all of the following:
• Contacts—names, phone numbers, addresses, email addresses, and more
• Calendars—appointments and events
• Email account settings
• Webpage bookmarks
• Notes (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003
or 2007 on a PC)
• Ringtones
• Music and audiobooks
• Photos and videos (in your computer’s photo application or folder)
• iTunes U collections
• Podcasts
• Movies, TV shows, and music videos
• Applications downloaded from the iTunes Store
You can adjust sync settings whenever iPhone is connected to your computer.
Ringtones, music, audiobooks, podcasts, iTunes U collections, videos, and applications
can be synced from your iTunes library. If you don’t already have content in iTunes,
the iTunes Store (available in some countries) makes it easy to preview and download
content to iTunes. You can also add music to your iTunes library from your CDs. To
learn about iTunes and the iTunes Store, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
Contacts, calendars, notes, and webpage bookmarks are synced with applications
on your computer, as described in the following section. Contacts and calendars are
synced both ways between your computer and iPhone. New entries or changes you
make on iPhone are synced to your computer, and vice versa. Notes and webpage
bookmarks are also synced both ways. Photos and videos (Mac only) can be synced
from an application or from a folder.
Email account settings are synced only from your computer’s email application to
iPhone. This allows you to customize your email accounts on iPhone without affecting
email account settings on your computer.
12 Chapter 1 Getting StartedNote: You can also set up email accounts directly on iPhone. See “Mail, Contacts, and
Calendar Accounts.”
Purchases you make on iPhone in the iTunes Store or the App Store are synced back
to your iTunes library. You can also purchase or download content and applications
directly from the iTunes Store on your computer, and then sync them to iPhone.
You can set iPhone to sync with only a portion of what’s on your computer.
For example, you might want to sync only a group of contacts from your address
book, or only unwatched video podcasts.
Important: You should be logged in to your own computer user account before
connecting iPhone.
Set up iTunes syncing:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer, and open iTunes (if it doesn’t open automatically).
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 Configure the sync settings in each of the settings panes.
See the following section for descriptions of the panes.
4 Click Apply in the lower-right corner of the screen.
By default, “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” is selected.
iPhone Settings Panes in iTunes
The following sections provide an overview of each of the iPhone settings panes.
For more information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
Summary Pane
Select “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” to have iTunes sync iPhone
automatically whenever you connect it to your computer. Deselect this option if you
want to sync only by clicking the Sync button in iTunes. For more information about
preventing automatic syncing, see “Preventing Automatic Syncing” on page 15.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 13Select “Sync only checked songs and videos” if you want iTunes to skip unchecked
items in your iTunes library when syncing.
Select “Manually manage music and videos” to turn off automatic syncing in the Music
and Video settings panes. See “Manually Managing Content” on page 72.
Select “Encrypt iPhone backup” if you want to encrypt the information stored on your
computer when iTunes makes a backup. Encrypted backups are indicated by a padlock
icon, and a password is required to restore the information to iPhone. See “Backing Up
iPhone” on page 202.
Click Configure Universal Access to turn on Accessibility features (available only on
iPhone 3GS). See Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182.
Info Pane
The Info pane lets you configure the sync settings for your contacts, calendars, email
accounts, and web browser.
• Contacts
Sync contacts with applications such as Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address
Book, and Google Contacts on a Mac, or with Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts,
Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Windows Vista Contacts, or Microsoft
Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync contacts with multiple
applications. On a PC, you can sync contacts with only one application at a time.)
If you sync with Yahoo! Address Book, you only need to click Configure to enter your
new login information when you change your Yahoo! ID or password after you’ve
set up syncing.
• Calendars
Sync calendars from applications such as iCal on a Mac, or from Microsoft Outlook
2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync calendars with multiple applications.
On a PC, you can sync calendars with only one application at a time.)
• Mail Accounts
Sync email account settings from Mail on a Mac, and from Microsoft Outlook 2003
or 2007 or Outlook Express on a PC. Account settings are transferred only from your
computer to iPhone. Changes you make to an email account on iPhone don’t affect
the account on your computer.
Note: The password for your Yahoo! email account isn’t saved on your computer,
so it can’t be synced and must be entered on iPhone. In Settings, choose “Mail,
Contacts, Calendars,” tap your Yahoo! account, and enter the password.
• Web Browser
You can sync bookmarks on iPhone with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft
Internet Explorer on a PC.
14 Chapter 1 Getting Started• Notes
Sync notes in the Notes application on iPhone with notes in Mail on a Mac or with
Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you must have Mac OS version
10.5.7 or later installed to sync notes.)
• Advanced
These options let you replace the information on iPhone with the information on
your computer during the next sync.
Applications Pane
Use the Applications pane to specify which App Store applications to sync on
iPhone, or to arrange your Home screen (requires iTunes 9 or later). Any applications
downloaded directly to iPhone are automatically backed up to your iTunes library
when you sync. If you manually delete an application on iPhone, you can reinstall it
from this pane as long as it was previously synced.
Ringtones Pane
Use the Ringtones pane to select the ringtones you want to sync to iPhone.
Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U Panes
Use these panes to specify the media you want to sync. You can sync all music, movies,
TV shows, podcasts, and iTunes U collections, or select the content you want on
iPhone.
If you want to watch rented movies on iPhone, transfer them to iPhone using the
Movies pane in iTunes.
If there’s not enough room on iPhone for all the media you’ve specified, iTunes can
create a special playlist and set it to sync with iPhone.
Note: The iTunes U pane appears only in iTunes 9 or later. In earlier versions of iTunes,
iTunes U content appeared in the Podcasts pane.
Photos Pane
You can sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 required) with iPhoto 4.0.3 or later,
or Aperture on a Mac; or with Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later on a PC. You can
also sync photos and videos in any folder on your computer that contains images.
Preventing Automatic Syncing
You can prevent iPhone from syncing automatically when you connect iPhone to a
computer other than the one you usually sync with.
Turn off automatic syncing for iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer. In iTunes,
select iPhone in the sidebar, then click the Summary tab. Deselect “Automatically sync
when this iPhone is connected.” You can still sync by clicking the Sync button.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 15Prevent automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods: In iTunes choose iTunes >
Preferences (on a Mac) or Edit > Preferences (on a PC), click Devices, and select “Disable
automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods.”
If this checkbox is selected, iPhone won’t sync automatically, even if “Automatically
sync when this iPhone is connected” is selected in the Summary pane.
Prevent automatic syncing one time, without changing settings: Open iTunes,
connect iPhone to your computer, then press and hold Command-Option (on a Mac)
or Shift-Control (on a PC) until you see iPhone appear in the sidebar.
Sync manually: In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar, then click Sync in the bottomright corner of the window. Or, if you’ve changed any sync settings, click Apply.
Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts
iPhone works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular
email systems.
Setting Up Accounts
MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange provide not only email, but contact and calendar
information that can be synced to iPhone automatically, over the air. MobileMe can
also sync your bookmarks on iPhone with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft
Internet Explorer on a PC. You set up MobileMe, Exchange, and other email accounts
directly on iPhone.
iPhone uses the Exchange ActiveSync protocol to sync email, calendars, and contacts
with the following versions of Microsoft Exchange:
• Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2
• Exchange Server 2007 Service Pack 1
For many popular email accounts, iPhone automatically enters most of the settings
for you.
If you don’t already have an email account, you can get a free account online at
www.yahoo.com, www.google.com, or www.aol.com. You can also try MobileMe,
free for 60 days. Go to www.me.com.
Set up an account on iPhone:
1 From the iPhone Home screen, tap Settings.
2 Tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
3 Tap an account type:
• Microsoft Exchange
• MobileMe
• Google email
16 Chapter 1 Getting Started• Yahoo! Mail
• AOL
• Other
4 Enter your account information and tap Save.
Your service provider or system administrator can provide the account settings you
need.
Exchange accounts: Enter your complete email address, domain (optional), user name,
password, and a description. The description can be whatever you like.
iPhone supports Microsoft’s Autodiscovery service, which uses your user name and
password to determine the address of the Exchange server. If the server’s address
can’t be determined, you’re asked to enter it. (Enter the complete address in the Server
field.) Once you connect to the Exchange server, you may be prompted to change your
passcode to match the policies set on the server.
5 If you’re setting up a MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange account, tap the items you want
to use on iPhone—mail, contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only).
MobileMe includes the Find My iPhone feature that helps you locate iPhone if it’s been
lost or stolen, and remotely lock, set a passcode, or erase the information on iPhone if
necessary. See “Security Features” on page 45.
If you enable Find My iPhone for your MobileMe account, make sure that Push is
turned on for Fetch New Data. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch
New Data, and if Push is off, tap to turn it on.
For Exchange accounts, you can set how many days of email you want to sync to
iPhone.
If you already have contact or calendar information on iPhone when you enable the
account, iPhone asks what you want to do with existing information on iPhone. You
can choose to merge the existing data into your MobileMe or Exchange account. If
you don’t merge the data, you can choose to keep it in a separate account on iPhone
(the account is labeled “On My iPhone”), or delete it. Existing bookmarks can only be
merged or deleted.
Similarly, when you disable contacts or calendars in an MobileMe or Exchange account,
or if you delete an account, iPhone asks if you want to keep information or delete it.
You can add contacts using an LDAP account if your company or organization
supports it. See “Adding Contacts” on page 176.
You can subscribe to CalDAV or iCal (.ics) calendars. See “Subscribing to and Sharing
Calendars” on page 93.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 17Push Accounts
MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and Yahoo! Mail are known as “push” accounts. When
new information is available, such as the arrival of an email message, the information
is automatically delivered (pushed) to iPhone. (In contrast, “fetch” services require your
email software to periodically check with your service provider to see if new messages
have arrived, and then request them to be delivered.) MobileMe and Exchange also
use push to sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) if you have
those items selected in the account settings.
Synced information is transferred automatically over your wireless connection; you
don’t need to connect iPhone to your computer to sync. If you don’t have a cellular
connection, iPhone can receive pushed data over a Wi-Fi connection when iPhone is
awake (the screen is on, or iPhone is connected to your computer or a power adapter).
Installing Configuration Profiles
If you’re in an enterprise environment, you may be able to set up accounts and
other items on iPhone by installing a configuration profile. Configuration profiles
provide a way for system administrators to quickly set up your iPhone to work with
the information systems at your company, school, or organization. For example, a
configuration profile might set up your iPhone to access the Microsoft Exchange
servers at work, enabling iPhone to access your Exchange email, calendars, and
contacts.
Configuration profiles can configure multiple settings on iPhone all at once. For
example, a configuration profile can set up your Microsoft Exchange account, VPN
account, and certificates for secure access to your company’s network and information.
A configuration profile may turn on the Passcode Lock, requiring you to create and
enter a passcode for using iPhone.
Your system administrator may distribute configuration profiles by email or by putting
them on a secure webpage. A system administrator may also install a configuration
profile directly on iPhone for you.
Install a configuration profile:
1 Using iPhone, open the email message or download the configuration profile from the
website provided by your system administrator.
2 When the configuration profile opens, tap Install.
3 Enter passwords and other information as requested.
Important: You may be asked to verify that the configuration profile is trusted. If in
doubt, consult your system administrator before installing a configuration profile.
18 Chapter 1 Getting StartedSettings provided by a configuration profile cannot be altered. If you want to change
these settings, you must first remove the configuration profile or install an updated
configuration profile.
Remove a profile: In Settings, choose General > Profile, then select the configuration
profile and tap Remove.
Removing a configuration profile deletes the settings and all other information
installed by the configuration profile from iPhone.
Disconnecting iPhone from Your Computer
Unless iPhone is syncing with your computer, you can disconnect it from your
computer at any time.
When iPhone is syncing with your computer, iPhone shows “Sync in progress.” If you
disconnect iPhone before it finishes syncing, some data may not get transferred. When
iPhone finishes syncing, iTunes shows “iPhone sync is complete.”
Cancel a sync: Drag the slider on iPhone.
If you get a call during a sync, the sync is canceled automatically and you can unplug
iPhone to answer the call. Connect iPhone after the call to finish syncing.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 19Basics
2
iPhone at a Glance
Headset jack
Receiver
Ring/Silent
switch
Camera
(on back)
SIM card tray
Volume
buttons
Touchscreen
Speaker
Dock
connector
Home button
Sleep/Wake
button
Microphone
Application
icons
Status bar
Your Home screen may look different, depending on the model of iPhone you have
and whether you have rearranged its icons.
iPhone Included Accessories
Dock Connector to USB Cable
Stereo headset
USB power adapter SIM eject tool
20Item What you can do with it
Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic
(iPhone 3GS)
iPhone Stereo Headset (iPhone 3G)
Listen to music, videos, and phone calls. Use
the built-in microphone to talk. Press the center
button to answer or end a call. When listening
to iPod, press the button once to play or pause
a song, or press twice quickly to skip to the next
track. Use the + and – buttons to adjust the
volume (iPhone 3GS only). Press and hold the
center button to use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS
only).
Dock Connector to USB Cable Use the cable to connect iPhone to your
computer to sync and charge. The cable can be
used with the optional dock or plugged directly
into iPhone.
USB power adapter Connect the power adapter to iPhone using
the included cable, then plug it into a standard
power outlet to charge iPhone.
SIM eject tool Eject the SIM card.
Status Icons
The icons in the status bar at the top of the screen give information about iPhone:
Status icon What it means
Cell signal Shows whether you’re in range of the cellular
network and can make and receive calls. The
more bars, the stronger the signal. If there’s no
signal, the bars are replaced with “No service.”
Airplane mode Shows that airplane mode is on—you cannot use
the phone, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth®
devices. Non-wireless features are available.
See “Airplane Mode” on page 138.
3G Shows that your carrier’s 3G network is available,
and iPhone can connect to the Internet over 3G.
Available on iPhone 3G or later. See “How iPhone
Connects to the Internet” on page 40.
Chapter 2 Basics 21Status icon What it means
EDGE Shows that your carrier’s EDGE network is
available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet
over EDGE. See “How iPhone Connects to the
Internet” on page 40.
GPRS Shows that your carrier’s GPRS network is
available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet
over GPRS. See “How iPhone Connects to the
Internet” on page 40.
Wi-Fi Shows that iPhone is connected to the Internet
over a Wi-Fi network. The more bars, the stronger
the connection. See “Joining a Wi-Fi Network” on
page 41.
Network activity Shows over-the-air syncing or other network
activity. Some third-party applications may also
use this icon to indicate an active process.
Call Forwarding Shows that Call Forwarding is set up on iPhone.
See “Call Forwarding” on page 154.
VPN Shows that you’re connected to a network using
VPN. See “Network” on page 143.
Lock Shows that iPhone is locked. See “Sleep/Wake
Button” on page 26.
TTY Shows that iPhone is set to work with a TTY
machine. See “Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY)
Machine” on page 154.
Play Shows that a song, audiobook, or podcast is
playing. See “Playing Songs” on page 73.
Alarm Shows that an alarm is set. See “Alarms” on
page 133.
Bluetooth Blue or white icon: Bluetooth is on and a device,
such as a headset or car kit, is connected. Gray
icon: Bluetooth is on, but no device is connected.
No icon: Bluetooth is turned off. See “Bluetooth
Devices” on page 55.
Battery Shows battery level or charging status.
See “Battery” on page 43.
22 Chapter 2 BasicsHome Screen
Press the Home button at any time to go to the Home screen, which contains your
iPhone applications. Tap any application icon to get started.
iPhone Applications
The following applications are included with iPhone:
Phone
Make calls, with quick access to recent callers, favorites, and all your contacts. Dial
manually using the numeric keypad. Or just use voice dialing. Visual voicemail presents
a list of your voicemail messages. Just tap to listen to any message you want, in any
order you want.
Mail
iPhone works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email
systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as most industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. View PDFs and other attachments within Mail.
Save attached photos and graphics to your Camera Roll album.
Safari
Browse websites over a cellular data network or over Wi-Fi. Rotate iPhone sideways
for widescreen viewing. Double-tap to zoom in or out—Safari automatically fits the
webpage column to the iPhone screen for easy reading. Open multiple pages. Sync
bookmarks with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on your computer. Add Safari web
clips to the Home screen for fast access to favorite websites. Save images from websites
to your Photo Library.
iPod
Listen to your songs, audiobooks, and podcasts. Create on-the-go playlists, or use
Genius to create playlists for you. Listen to Genius Mixes of songs from your library.
Watch movies and video podcasts in widescreen.
Messages
Send and receive SMS text messages. Conversations are saved in an iChat-like
presentation, so you can see a history of messages you’ve sent and received. Send
photos, video clips (iPhone 3GS only), contact information, and voice memos to MMS
devices (iPhone 3G or later).
Calendar
View and search your MobileMe, iCal, Microsoft Entourage, Microsoft Outlook, or
Microsoft Exchange calendars. Enter events on iPhone and they get synced back to the
calendar on your computer. Subscribe to calendars. Set alerts to remind you of events,
appointments, and deadlines.
Photos
View photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) you’ve taken with iPhone, received in Mail or
MMS (iPhone 3GS only) messages, or synced from your computer’s photo application.
(Video syncing on Macs only.) View them in portrait or landscape orientation. Zoom
in on photos for a closer look. Watch a slideshow. Email photos and videos, send them
in MMS messages (iPhone 3G or later), or publish them to MobileMe galleries. Assign
images to contacts, and use them as wallpaper.
Chapter 2 Basics 23Camera
Take photos, and record videos (iPhone 3GS only). View them on iPhone, email them,
send them in an MMS message (iPhone 3G or later), or upload them to your computer.
Trim and save video clips. Upload videos directly to YouTube. Take a friend’s picture and
set iPhone to display it when that person calls you.
YouTube
Play videos from YouTube’s online collection. Search for any video, or browse featured,
most viewed, most recently updated, and top-rated videos. Set up and log in to your
YouTube account—then rate videos, sync your favorites, show subscriptions, and more.
Upload your own videos taken with iPhone.
Stocks
Watch your favorite stocks, updated automatically from the Internet. View company
news and current trading information, such as opening or average price, trading
volume, or market capitalization. Rotate iPhone to see detailed charts in landscape
orientation. Drag your finger along the charts to track price points, or use two fingers
to see a range between points.
Maps
See a street map, satellite view, or hybrid view of locations around the world. Zoom
in for a closer look, or check out the Google Street View. Find and track your current
(approximate) location. See which way you’re facing (iPhone 3GS only, using its builtin compass). Get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and see current
highway traffic conditions. Find businesses in the area and call with a single tap.
Weather
Get current weather conditions and a six-day forecast. Add your favorite cities for a
quick weather report anytime.
Voice
Memos
Record voice memos on iPhone. Play them back on iPhone or sync them with iTunes
to listen to voice memos on your computer. Attach voice memos to email or MMS
messages (iPhone 3G or later).
Notes
Jot notes on the go—reminders, grocery lists, brilliant ideas. Send them in email.
Sync notes to Mail or Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express.
Clock
View the time in cities around the world—create clocks for your favorites. Set one or
more alarms. Use the stopwatch, or set a countdown timer.
24 Chapter 2 BasicsCalculator
Add, subtract, multiply, and divide. Rotate iPhone sideways to use expanded scientific
functions.
Settings
Set up accounts and adjust all iPhone settings in one convenient place. Set your own
volume limit for listening comfort. Set your ringtone, wallpaper, screen brightness,
and settings for network, phone, mail, web, music, video, photos, and more. Set autolock and a passcode for security. Restrict access to explicit iTunes content and certain
applications. Reset iPhone.
iTunes
Search the iTunes Store for music, ringtones, audiobooks, TV shows, music videos, and
movies. Browse, preview, purchase, and download new releases, top items, and more.
Rent movies to view on iPhone. Stream and download podcasts. Read reviews or write
your own reviews for your favorite store items.
App Store
Search the App Store for iPhone applications you can purchase or download using
your Wi-Fi or cellular data network connection. Read reviews or write your own reviews
for your favorite apps. Download and install the application on your Home screen.
Compass
Use the built-in digital compass (iPhone 3GS only) to determine your heading. Get your
current coordinates. Choose between true north and magnetic north.
Contacts
Get contact information synced from MobileMe, Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo!
Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Microsoft
Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange. Search, add, change, or delete contacts, which get
synced back to your computer.
Nike + iPod
Nike + iPod (which appears when you activate it in Settings) turns iPhone into a
workout companion. Track your pace, time, and distance from one workout to the next
and choose a song to power through your routine. (iPhone 3GS only. Requires select
Nike shoes and a Nike + iPod Sensor, sold separately.)
Note: Application functionality and availability may vary depending on the country or
region where you purchase and use iPhone. Contact your carrier for more information.
Customizing the Home Screen
You can customize the layout of icons on the Home screen—including the Dock
icons along the bottom of the screen. If you want, arrange them over multiple
Home screens.
Rearrange icons:
1 Touch and hold any Home screen icon until the icons begin to wiggle.
2 Arrange the icons by dragging them.
3 Press the Home button to save your arrangement.
You can also add links to your favorite webpages on the Home screen. See “Web
Clips” on page 70.
Chapter 2 Basics 25You can also rearrange the Home screen icons and the order of the screens (in iTunes
9 or later) when iPhone is connected to your computer. Select iPhone in the iTunes
sidebar, then click the Applications tab.
Create additional Home screens: While arranging icons, drag an icon to the right
edge of the screen until a new screen appears. You can flick to return to the original
screen and drag more icons to the new screen.
You can create up to 11 screens. The number of dots above the Dock shows the
number of screens you have, and indicates which screen you’re viewing.
Switch to another Home screen: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row
of dots.
Go to the first Home screen: Press the Home button.
Reset your Home screen to the default layout: Choose Settings > General > Reset
and tap Reset Home Screen Layout.
Buttons
A few simple buttons make it easy to turn iPhone on and off, adjust the volume, and
switch between ring and silent modes.
Sleep/Wake Button
When you’re not using iPhone but you still want to receive calls and text messages,
you can lock it.
When iPhone is locked, nothing happens if you touch the screen. You can still listen to
music and adjust the volume, and use the center button on your iPhone headset (or
the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to play or pause a song, or answer
or end a call.
26 Chapter 2 BasicsBy default, if you don’t touch the screen for a minute, iPhone locks automatically.
Sleep/Wake
button
Lock iPhone Press the Sleep/Wake button.
Unlock iPhone Press the Home button or the Sleep/Wake
button, then drag the slider.
Turn iPhone completely off Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few
seconds until the red slider appears, then drag
the slider. When iPhone is off, incoming calls go
straight to voicemail.
Turn iPhone on Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the
Apple logo appears.
For information about changing how long before iPhone locks, see “Auto-Lock” on
page 145. For information about setting iPhone to require a passcode to unlock it,
see “Passcode Lock” on page 145.
Volume Buttons
When you’re on the phone or listening to songs, movies, or other media, the buttons
on the side of iPhone adjust the audio volume. Otherwise, the buttons control the
volume for the ringer, alerts, and other sound effects.
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important
Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
To adjust the volume, use the buttons on the side of iPhone.
Volume
up
Volume
down
To set a volume limit for music and videos on iPhone, see “Music” on page 158.
Chapter 2 Basics 27Ring/Silent Switch
Flip the Ring/Silent switch to change between ring and silent modes.
Ring
Silent
When set to ring mode, iPhone plays all sounds. When set to silent mode, iPhone
doesn’t ring or play alerts and other sound effects.
Important: Clock alarms, audio-dependent applications such as iPod, and many games
still play sounds through the built-in speaker when iPhone is set to silent mode.
By default, when you get a call, iPhone vibrates whether it’s set to ring mode, or in
silent mode. If iPhone is set to ring mode, you can silence a call by pressing the Sleep/
Wake button or one of the volume buttons once. Press a second time to send the call
to voicemail.
For information about changing sound and vibrate settings, see “Sounds and the Ring/
Silent Switch” on page 141.
Touchscreen
The controls on the iPhone touchscreen change dynamically depending on the task
you’re performing.
Opening Applications
Open an application: Tap an icon.
28 Chapter 2 BasicsClose an application and return to the Home screen: Press the Home button
below the display.
Scrolling
Drag up or down to scroll. On some screens such as webpages, you can also scroll side
to side.
Dragging your finger to scroll won’t choose or activate anything on the screen.
Flick to scroll quickly.
You can wait for the scrolling to come to a stop, or touch anywhere on the screen to
stop it immediately. Touching the screen to stop scrolling won’t choose or activate
anything.
To quickly scroll to the top of a list, webpage, or email, just tap the status bar.
Chapter 2 Basics 29Lists
Some lists have an index along the right side, which helps you navigate quickly.
Find items in an indexed list: Tap a letter to jump to items starting with that letter.
Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly through the list.
Index
Choose an item: Tap an item in the list.
Depending on the list, tapping an item can do different things—for example, it may
open a new list, play a song, open an email, or show someone’s contact information so
you can call that person.
Return to a previous list: Tap the back button in the upper-left corner.
Zooming In or Out
When viewing photos, webpages, email, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your
fingers together or apart. For photos and webpages, you can double-tap (tap twice
quickly) to zoom in, then double-tap again to zoom out. For maps, double-tap to zoom
in and tap once with two fingers to zoom out.
30 Chapter 2 BasicsViewing in Landscape
Many iPhone applications let you view the screen in either portrait or landscape
orientation. Rotate iPhone and the display rotates too, adjusting automatically to fit
the new screen orientation.
You may prefer landscape for viewing webpages in Safari, or when entering text, for
example. Webpages automatically scale to the wider screen in landscape, making the
text and images larger. Similarly, the onscreen keyboard is larger in landscape, which
may help increase your typing speed and accuracy.
The following applications support both portrait and landscape orientation:
• Mail
• Safari
• Messages
• Notes
• Contacts
• Stocks
• iPod
• Photos
• Camera
• Calculator
Movies viewed in iPod and YouTube appear only in landscape orientation. Street views
in Maps also appear in landscape.
Onscreen Keyboard
Use the onscreen keyboard to enter text, such as contact information, text messages,
and web addresses.
Chapter 2 Basics 31Typing
Depending on the application you’re using, the intelligent keyboard may automatically
suggest corrections as you type to help prevent mistyped words.
Enter text:
1 Tap a text field, such as in a note or new contact, to bring up the keyboard.
2 Tap keys on the keyboard.
Start by typing with just your index finger. As you get more proficient, you can type
more quickly using two thumbs.
As you type, each letter appears above your thumb or finger. If you touch the wrong
key, you can slide your finger to the correct key. The letter isn’t entered until you
release your finger from the key.
Type uppercase Tap the Shift key before tapping a letter. Or
touch and hold the Shift key, then slide to a letter.
Quickly type a period and space Double-tap the space bar. (You can turn
this feature on or off in Settings > General >
Keyboard.)
Turn caps lock on Double-tap the Shift key. The Shift key turns
blue, and all letters you type are uppercase. Tap
the Shift key again to turn caps lock off. (You can
turn this feature on or off in Settings > General >
Keyboard.)
Show numbers, punctuation, or symbols Tap the Number key. Tap the Symbol key
to see additional punctuation and symbols.
Type letters or symbols that aren’t on the
keyboard
Touch and hold the related letter or symbol, then
slide to choose a variation.
32 Chapter 2 BasicsDictionary
For many languages, iPhone has dictionaries to help you type. The appropriate
dictionary is activated automatically when you select a supported keyboard.
For a list of supported languages, see www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html.
iPhone uses the active dictionary to suggest corrections or complete the word you’re
typing. You don’t need to interrupt your typing to accept the suggested word.
Suggested
word
Accept or reject dictionary suggestions:
m To reject the suggested word, finish typing the word as you want it, then tap the “x” to
dismiss the suggestion before typing anything else. Each time you reject a suggestion
for the same word, iPhone becomes more likely to accept your word.
m To use the suggested word, type a space, punctuation mark, or return character.
Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction
on or off. Auto-Correction is on by default.
Note: If you’re entering Chinese or Japanese, tap one of the suggested alternatives.
Editing
An onscreen magnifying glass helps you position the insertion point for typing and
editing text. You can select text to cut, copy, and paste.
Chapter 2 Basics 33Position the insertion point: Touch and hold to bring up the magnifying glass,
then drag to position the insertion point.
Select text: Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons. Tap Select to
select the adjacent word or tap Select All to select all text. When you’re typing, you can
also double-tap to select a word. In read-only documents, such as webpages, or email
or text messages you’ve received, touch and hold to select a word.
Drag the grab points to select more or less text.
Cut or copy text: Select text, then tap Cut or Copy.
Paste text: Tap the insertion point and tap Paste. The last text that you cut or copied is
inserted. Or select text and tap Paste to replace the text.
Undo the last edit: Shake iPhone and tap Undo.
34 Chapter 2 BasicsInternational Keyboards
iPhone provides keyboards that allow you to enter text in many different languages,
including languages that read from right to left. For a complete list of supported
keyboards, go to www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html.
Turn international keyboards on or off:
1 In Settings, choose General > International > Keyboards.
2 Turn on the keyboards you want. Languages with more than one keyboard, such as
Japanese and Chinese, indicate the number of keyboards available. Tap to choose a
keyboard for that language.
Switch keyboards if more than one keyboard is
turned on
Tap to switch keyboards. When you tap
the symbol, the name of the newly activated
keyboard appears briefly.
Type letters, numbers, or symbols that aren’t on
the keyboard
Touch and hold the related letter, number, or
symbol, then slide to choose a variation. On the
Hebrew and Thai keyboards, for example, you can
choose native numbers by touching and holding
the related Arabic number.
Enter Japanese Kana Use the Kana keypad to select syllables. For more
syllable options, tap the arrow key and select
another syllable or word from the window.
Enter Japanese QWERTY Use the QWERTY keyboard to input code for
Japanese syllables. As you type, suggested
syllables appear. Tap the syllable to choose it.
Enter Emoji picture characters Use the Emoji keyboard. Available only on
iPhones purchased and used in Japan.
Enter Korean Use the 2-Set Korean keyboard to type Hangul
letters. To type double consonants or compound
vowels, touch and hold the letter, then slide to
choose the double letter.
Enter Simplified or Traditional Chinese Pinyin Use the QWERTY keyboard to enter Pinyin for
Chinese characters. As you type, suggested
Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to
choose it, or continue entering Pinyin to see
more character options.
Chapter 2 Basics 35Enter Traditional Chinese Zhuyin Use the keyboard to enter Zhuyin letters. As you
type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap
a character to choose it, or continue entering
Zhuyin to see more character options. After you
type an initial letter, the keyboard changes to
show more letters.
Enter handwritten Simplified or Traditional
Chinese
Use the touchpad to enter Chinese characters
with your finger. As you write character strokes,
iPhone recognizes them and shows matching
characters in a list, with the closest match at the
top. When you choose a character, its related
characters appear in the list as additional choices.
You can get some complex characters by
entering two or more component characters.
For example, enter ? (fish), then ? (bristle), to
get ? (partial name of Hong Kong International
Airport), which appears in the character list with
an arrow next to it. Tap the character to replace
the characters you entered.
When Simplified or Traditional Chinese handwriting formats are turned on, you can
enter Chinese characters with your finger, as shown:
Touchpad
36 Chapter 2 BasicsSearching
You can search many applications on iPhone, including Mail, Calendar, iPod, Notes,
and Contacts. You can search an individual application, or search all the applications at
once using Spotlight.
Go to Spotlight: From the main page of the Home screen, flick left to right.
If you’re on the main Home screen page, you can press the Home button to go to
Spotlight. From the Spotlight page, press the Home button to return to the main
Home screen page. You can also set iPhone to go to Spotlight when you double-click
the Home button. See “Home” on page 147.
Search iPhone: On the Spotlight page, enter text in the Search field. Search results
appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of
the results.
Icons to the left of the search results let you know which application the results are
from. Tap an item in the results list to open it.
Application What’s searched
Contacts First, last, and company names
Mail To, From, and Subject fields of all accounts (the
text of messages isn’t searched)
Calendar Event titles, invitees, and locations (notes aren’t
searched)
iPod Music (names of songs, artists, and albums) and
the titles of podcasts, video, and audiobooks
Notes Text of notes
Spotlight also searches the names of the native and installed applications on iPhone,
so if you have a lot of applications you may want to use Spotlight as a way to locate
and open applications.
Open applications from Spotlight: Enter the application name, then tap to open the
application directly from the search results.
Use the Search Results settings to choose which applications are searched and the
order in which they’re searched. See “Home” on page 147.
Chapter 2 Basics 37Voice Control
Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) lets you make phone calls and control
iPod music playback using voice commands.
Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages.
Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen
appears and you hear a beep. You can also press and hold the center button on the
iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset).
Use the following commands to make calls or play songs.
Call someone in contacts Say “call” or “dial,” then say the name of the
person. If the person has more than one phone
number, you can add “home” or “mobile,” for
example.
Dial a number Say “call” or “dial,” then say the number.
Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause”
or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or
“previous song.”
Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist”
and the name.
Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.”
Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who
sings this song,” or “who is this song by.”
Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more
songs like this.”
Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.”
For best results:
• Speak into the iPhone microphone as if you were making a phone call. You can also
use the microphone in your iPhone or Bluetooth headset.
• Speak clearly and naturally.
38 Chapter 2 Basics• Say only iPhone commands and names, and numbers. Pause slightly between
commands.
• Use full names.
By default, Voice Control expects you to speak voice commands in the language that’s
set for iPhone (the General > International > Language setting). The Voice Control
settings let you change the language for speaking voice commands. Some languages
are available in different dialects or accents.
Change language or country: In Settings, choose General > International > Voice
Control and tap the language or country.
Voice Control for the iPod application is always on, but for security you can prevent
voice dialing when iPhone is locked.
Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode
Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing.
See“Voice Dialing” on page 48 and“Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 77.
Stereo Headset
The headset included with iPhone features a microphone and an integrated button
that allows you to answer and end calls easily, and control audio and video playback.
The headset included with iPhone 3GS (shown here) also has volume buttons.
Center button
Plug in the headset to listen to music or make a phone call. Callers hear you through
the built-in microphone. Press the center button to control music playback and answer
or end calls, even when iPhone is locked. (You can also use the equivalent button on
your Bluetooth headset to control these functions.)
Pause a song or video Press the center button once. Press again to
resume playback.
Skip to the next song Press the center button twice quickly.
Return to previous song Press the center button three times quickly.
Fast-forward Press the center button twice quickly and hold.
Chapter 2 Basics 39Rewind Press the center button three-times quickly and
hold.
Adjust the volume (iPhone 3GS only) Press the + or – button.
Answer an incoming call Press the center button once.
End the current call Press the center button once.
Decline an incoming call Press and hold the center button for about two
seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you
declined the call.
Switch to an incoming or on-hold call and put
the current call on hold
Press the center button once. Press again to
switch back to the first call.
Switch to an incoming or on-hold call and end
the current call
Press and hold the center button for about two
seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you
ended the first call.
Use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only) Press and hold the center button. See “Voice
Control” on page 38.
If you get a call while the headset is plugged in, you can hear the ringtone through
both the iPhone speaker and the headset.
Connecting to the Internet
iPhone connects to the Internet automatically whenever you use Mail, Safari, YouTube,
Stocks, Maps, Weather, the App Store, or the iTunes Store.
How iPhone Connects to the Internet
iPhone connects to the Internet using either a Wi-Fi network or a cellular data network.
iPhone does the following, in order, until connected:
• Connects over the last Wi-Fi network you used that’s available.
• If no previously used Wi-Fi networks are available, iPhone shows a list of Wi-Fi
networks in range. Tap a network and, if necessary, enter the password to join.
Networks that require a password show next to them. You can prevent iPhone
from automatically showing available networks. See “Wi-Fi” on page 139.
• If no Wi-Fi networks are available or you choose not to join any, iPhone connects to
the Internet over a cellular data network ( , , or ).
If no Wi-Fi networks are available and a cellular data network isn’t available, iPhone
cannot connect to the Internet.
Note: If you don’t have a 3G connection, you cannot use the Internet over a cellular
data network when you’re on a call. You must have a Wi-Fi connection to use Internet
applications while also talking on the phone.
40 Chapter 2 BasicsMany Wi-Fi networks can be used free of charge including, in some regions, Wi-Fi
hotspots provided by your iPhone carrier. Some Wi-Fi networks require a fee. To join a
Wi-Fi network at a hotspot where charges apply, you can usually open Safari to see a
webpage that allows you to sign up for service.
Joining a Wi-Fi Network
The Wi-Fi settings let you turn on Wi-Fi and join Wi-Fi networks.
Turn on Wi-Fi: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on.
Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPhone detects
networks in range, then select a network (fees may apply to join some Wi-Fi networks).
If necessary, enter a password and tap Join (networks that require a password appear
with a lock icon).
Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPhone automatically connects to it
whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in
range, iPhone joins the one last used.
When iPhone is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the
top of the screen shows the connection strength. The more bars you see, the stronger
the connection.
For information about configuring Wi-Fi settings, see “Wi-Fi” on page 139.
Cellular Data Network Access
3G, EDGE, and GPRS allow Internet connectivity over the cellular network available
through your iPhone carrier’s wireless service. Check the carrier’s network coverage in
your area for availability.
You can tell iPhone is connected to the Internet via the cellular data network if you see
the 3G ( ), EDGE ( ), or GPRS ( ) icon in the status bar at the top of the screen.
Note: If you don’t have a 3G connection, you may not be able to receive calls while
iPhone is actively transferring data over a cellular network—downloading a webpage,
for example. Incoming calls then go directly to voicemail.
Turn 3G on: In Settings, choose General > Network and tap Enable 3G.
If you’re outside your carrier’s network, you may be able to access the Internet through
another carrier. To enable email, web browsing, and other data services whenever
possible, turn Data Roaming on.
Turn Data Roaming on: In Settings, choose General > Network and turn Data
Roaming on.
Important: Roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, make sure
Data Roaming is turned off.
Chapter 2 Basics 41Internet Access on an Airplane
Airplane mode turns off the iPhone radio transmitters to avoid interfering with aircraft
operation. In some regions, where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws
and regulations, you can turn on Wi-Fi while airplane mode is on, to:
• Send and receive email
• Browse the Internet
• Sync your contacts and calendars over the air
• Stream YouTube videos
• Get stock quotes
• Get map locations
• Get weather reports
• Purchase music and applications
For more information, see “Airplane Mode” on page 138.
VPN Access
VPN (virtual private network) provides secure access over the Internet to private
networks, such as the network at your company or school. Use Network settings to
configure and turn on VPN. See “Network” on page 143.
VPN can also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing
Configuration Profiles” on page 18. When VPN is set up by a configuration profile,
iPhone may turn on VPN automatically whenever it’s needed. Contact your system
administrator for more information.
Using iPhone as a Modem
You can use iPhone 3G or later as a modem to connect, or tether, your computer to the
Internet. You can connect iPhone to your computer using the Dock Connector to USB
Cable, or via Bluetooth.
Note: Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for more information.
Tethering works over the cellular data network. You can’t share a Wi-Fi connection to
the Internet. If you have a 3G connection, you can make and receive phone calls while
tethering.
Note: To use iPhone as a modem with a Mac computer, it must be running Mac OS X
version 10.5.7 or later.
Set up a tethering connection:
1 In Settings, choose General > Network > Internet Tethering.
2 Slide the Internet Tethering switch to On.
3 Connect iPhone to your computer:
42 Chapter 2 Basics• USB: Connect your computer to iPhone, using the Dock Connector to USB Cable.
In your computer’s Network services settings, choose iPhone.
On a Mac, a pop-up window appears the first time you connect, saying “A new
network interface has been detected.” Click Network Preferences, configure the
network settings for iPhone, then click Apply. On a PC, use the Network Control
Panel to configure the iPhone connection.
• Bluetooth: On iPhone, choose Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn on
Bluetooth. Then refer to the documentation that came with your computer system
software to pair and connect iPhone with your computer.
When you’re connected, a blue band appears at the top of the screen. Tethering
remains on when you connect with USB, even when you aren’t actively using the
Internet connection.
Monitor your cellular data network usage: In Settings, choose General > Usage.
Battery
iPhone has an internal rechargeable battery.
Charging the Battery
WARNING: For important safety information about charging iPhone, see the
Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
The battery icon in the upper-right corner shows the battery level or charging status.
You can also display the percentage of the battery charge (iPhone 3GS only).
Charging Charged
Charge the battery: Connect iPhone to a power outlet using the included Dock
Connector to USB Cable and USB power adapter.
Chapter 2 Basics 43Charge the battery and sync iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer using the
included Dock Connector to USB Cable. Or connect iPhone to your computer using the
included cable and the Dock, available separately.
Unless your keyboard has a high-powered USB 2.0 port, you must connect iPhone to a
USB 2.0 port on your computer.
Important: The iPhone battery may drain instead of charge if iPhone is connected to a
computer that’s turned off or is in sleep or standby mode.
If you charge the battery while syncing or using iPhone, it may take longer to charge.
Important: If iPhone is very low on power, it may display one of the following images,
indicating that iPhone needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it.
If iPhone is extremely low on power, the display may be blank for up to two minutes
before one of the low-battery images appears.
or
Maximizing Battery Life
iPhone uses lithium-ion batteries. To learn more about how to maximize the lifespan
and battery life of your iPhone, go to www.apple.com/batteries.
Replacing the Battery
Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and may
eventually need to be replaced. The iPhone battery isn’t user replaceable; it can
only be replaced by an authorized service provider. For more information, go to
www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/battery.
44 Chapter 2 BasicsSecurity Features
Security features help protect the information on iPhone from being accessed by
others.
You can set up a passcode that you must enter each time you turn on or wake up
iPhone.
Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then
enter the passcode again to verify it. iPhone then requires you to enter the passcode
to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings.
For addition information about using a passcode lock, see “Passcode Lock” on
page 145.
Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode
Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing.
The Find My iPhone feature helps you locate iPhone if it’s been lost or misplaced, and
display a message on your iPhone to help someone return it to you. It includes Remote
Wipe, which lets you erase all your information on iPhone in case you don’t recover
it. The Remote Passcode Lock feature lets you remotely lock your iPhone and create a
new or replacement 4-digit passcode.
Find My iPhone requires a MobileMe account. MobileMe is an online service, available
by subscription. Go to www.apple.com/mobileme for more information.
To enable this feature, turn on Find My iPhone in your MobileMe account settings.
See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16.
Find your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com and go to the
Find My iPhone pane. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate your device on a map
and display a message on its screen along with an optional sound to help you find it.
Remotely wipe information on your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at
www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click “Remote Wipe…,” and follow
the onscreen instructions.
A remote wipe is equivalent to the “Erase all content and settings” feature in Settings.
It resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media.
See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149.
Remotely lock your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then
go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click Remote Passcode Lock, and follow the onscreen
instructions.
Chapter 2 Basics 45Cleaning iPhone
To clean iPhone, unplug all cables and turn off iPhone (press and hold the Sleep/ Wake
button, then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth.
Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners,
aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPhone. If your iPhone
has an oleophobic coating on the screen (iPhone 3GS only), simply wipe your iPhone’s
screen with a soft, lint-free cloth to remove oil left by your hands and face.
For additional information about handling iPhone, see the iPhone Important Product
Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Restarting and Resetting iPhone
If something isn’t working right, try restarting, force quitting an application, or
resetting iPhone.
Restart iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the red slider appears.
Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPhone. To turn iPhone back on, press and
hold the Sleep/Wake until the Apple logo appears.
If you can’t turn off iPhone or if the problem continues, you may need to reset. A reset
should be done only if turning iPhone off and on doesn’t resolve the problem.
Force quit an application: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone
for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button
until the application quits.
Reset iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button at the
same time for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears.
For more troubleshooting suggestions, see Appendix A,“Troubleshooting,” on
page 193.
46 Chapter 2 BasicsPhone
3
Phone Calls
Making a call on iPhone is as simple as tapping a name and number in your contacts,
tapping one of your favorites, or tapping a recent call to return it.
Making Calls
Buttons at the bottom of the Phone screen give you quick access to your favorites,
recent calls, your contacts, and a numeric keypad for dialing manually.
WARNING: For important information about driving safely, see the Important Product
Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Number of missed calls
Number of unheard
voicemail messages
Use Contacts to call someone Tap Contacts, choose a contact, then tap a phone
number.
Call a favorite Tap Favorites, then choose a contact.
Return a recent call Tap Recents, then tap a name or number in the
list.
Dial a number Tap Keypad, enter the number, then tap Call.
If you copy a phone number to the clipboard, you can paste it to the keypad and
dial it.
47Paste a number to the keypad: Tap the screen above the keyboard, then tap Paste.
If the phone number you copied included letters, iPhone automatically converts them
to the appropriate digits.
Jump to favorites from anywhere: Double-click the Home button. You can change
this preference in Settings. See “Home” on page 147.
Bring up the last number you dialed: Tap Keypad, then tap Call. Tap Call again to dial
the number.
Voice Dialing
You can use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only) to call someone in your contacts or dial a
specific number.
Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages.
Use Voice Control to make phone calls: Press and hold the Home button until the
Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described
below to make calls.
You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the
equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to use Voice Control.
Call someone in contacts Say “call” or “dial” then say the name of the person.
If the person has more than one number, specify
which one you want to call.
Examples:
 Call John Appleseed
 Call John Appleseed at home
 Call John Appleseed, mobile
Dial a number Say “call” or “dial,” then say the number.
For best results, speak the full name of the person you’re calling. If you give only the
first name, and you have more than one contact with that same name, iPhone asks
which of those contacts you want to call. If there’s more than one number for the
person you’re calling, specify which number to use. If you don’t specify which number,
iPhone asks you which one to use.
When voice dialing a number, speak each digit separately—for example, say “four one
five, five five five, one two one two.”
Note: For the “800” area code in the U.S., you can say “eight hundred.”
Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode
Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing.
48 Chapter 3 PhoneReceiving Calls
When you receive a call, tap Answer. If iPhone is locked, drag the slider. You can also
press the center button on your iPhone headset or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset to answer a call.
Center button
Silence a call: Press the Sleep/Wake button or either volume button. You can still
answer the call after silencing it, until it goes to voicemail.
Decline a call: Do one of the following to send a call directly to voicemail.
• Press the Sleep/Wake button twice quickly.
Sleep/Wake
button
• Press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button
on your Bluetooth headset) for about two seconds. Two low beeps confirm that the
call was declined.
• Tap Decline (if iPhone is awake when a call comes in).
Block calls and maintain Wi-Fi access to the Internet: In Settings, turn on Airplane
Mode, then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on.
While On a Call
When you’re on a call, the screen shows call options.
Chapter 3 Phone 49Mute your line Tap Mute. You can still hear the caller, but the
caller can’t hear you.
Use the keypad to enter information Tap Keypad.
Use the speakerphone or a Bluetooth device Tap Speaker. The Button is labeled Audio Source
when a Bluetooth device is available, which
lets you select the Bluetooth device, iPhone,
or Speaker Phone.
See contact information Tap Contacts.
Put a call on hold Tap Hold. Neither party can hear the other.
Make another call Tap Add Call.
Use other applications during a call: Press the Home button, then tap an
application icon.
End a call: Tap End Call. Or press the center button on your iPhone headset (or the
equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset).
Second Calls
During a call, you can make or receive another call. If you receive a second call, iPhone
beeps and shows the caller’s information and a list of options.
Note: Making and receiving a second call may be an optional service in some
countries. Contact your carrier for more information.
Respond to a second call:
• To ignore the call and send it to voicemail, tap Ignore.
• To hold the first call and answer the new one, tap Hold Call + Answer.
• To end the first call and answer the new one, tap End Call + Answer.
Make a second call: Tap Add Call. The first call is put on hold.
Switch between calls: Tap Swap. The active call is put on hold.
Create a conference call: Tap Merge Calls. See “Conference Calls” below.
Conference Calls
You can talk to more than one person at a time, and merge up to five calls, depending
on your carrier.
Note: Conference calling may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your
carrier for more information.
Create a conference call:
1 Make a call.
2 Tap Add Call and make another call. The first call is put on hold.
3 Tap Merge Calls. The calls are merged on one line and everyone can hear each other.
50 Chapter 3 Phone4 Repeat steps two and three to add up to five calls.
Drop one call Tap Conference and tap next to a call.
Then tap End Call.
Talk privately with a call Tap Conference, then tap Private next to a call.
Tap Merge Calls to resume the conference.
Add an incoming call Tap Hold Call + Answer, then tap Merge Calls.
If your service includes conference calling, iPhone always has a second line available in
addition to the conference call.
Emergency Calls
If iPhone is locked with a passcode, you may still be able to make an emergency call.
Make an emergency call when iPhone is locked: On the Enter Passcode screen, tap
Emergency Call, then dial the number using the keypad.
Important: Only emergency numbers valid in the region where you’re making the call
will work. In some countries, you can’t make emergency calls unless your SIM card is
installed and activated, and the SIM PIN has been correctly entered or turned off.
In the U.S., location information (if available) is provided to emergency service
providers when you dial 911.
Important: You should not rely on wireless devices for essential communications, such
as medical emergencies. Use of any cellular phone to call emergency services may not
work in all locations. Emergency numbers and services vary by region, and sometimes
an emergency call cannot be placed due to network availability or environmental
interference. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if
it doesn’t have a SIM, if you locked your SIM, or if you haven’t activated your iPhone.
Visual Voicemail
On iPhone, visual voicemail lets you see a list of your messages and choose which ones
to listen to or delete, without having to listen to instructions or prior messages.
Note: Visual voicemail may not be available in all regions, or may be an optional
service. Contact your carrier for more information. If visual voicemail isn’t available,
tap Voicemail and follow the voice prompts to retrieve your messages.
Number of missed calls and unheard
voicemail messages appears on the
Home screen Phone icon.
Chapter 3 Phone 51Setting Up Voicemail
The first time you tap Voicemail, iPhone prompts you to create a voicemail password
and record your voicemail greeting.
Change your greeting:
1 Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, then tap Custom.
2 Tap Record when you’re ready to start.
3 When you finish, tap Stop. To review, tap Play.
To rerecord, repeat steps 2 and 3.
4 Tap Save.
Use your carrier’s default greeting Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, then tap Default.
Set an alert sound for new voicemail In Settings, choose Sounds and turn New
Voicemail on. The alert sounds once for each new
voicemail. If the Ring/Silent switch is off, iPhone
won’t sound alerts.
Change the voicemail password In Settings, choose Phone > Change Voicemail
Password.
Checking Voicemail
When you tap Phone, iPhone shows the number of missed calls and unheard
voicemail messages.
Number of missed calls
Number of unheard
voicemail messages
52 Chapter 3 PhoneTap Voicemail to see a list of your messages.
Skip to any point in
a message: Drag the
playhead.
Unheard
messages Play/Pause
Contact info
Scrubber bar
Speakerphone (Audio,
when a Bluetooth device
is connected. Tap to
choose audio output.)
Return the call
Listen to a message: Tap the message. (If you’ve already heard the message, tap the
message again to replay it.) Use and to pause and resume playback.
Once you listen to a message, it’s saved until your carrier automatically erases it.
Check voicemail from another phone: Dial your own number or your carrier’s remote
access number.
Deleting Messages
Select a message, then tap Delete. Deleted visual voicemail messages are saved on
iPhone until your carrier permanently erases them.
Listen to a deleted message Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the list),
then tap the message.
Undelete a message Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the list),
then tap the message and tap Undelete.
Getting Contact Information
Visual voicemail saves the date and time of the call, the length of the message, and
any available contact information.
See a caller’s contact information: Tap next to a message.
You can use the information to email or text the caller, or update contact info.
Chapter 3 Phone 53Contacts
From a contact’s Info screen, a quick tap lets you make a phone call, create a new email
message, find the location of their address, and more. See “Searching Contacts” on
page 177.
Favorites
Favorites gives you quick access to your most-used phone numbers.
Add a contact’s number to your favorites list: Tap Contacts and choose a contact.
Then tap “Add to Favorites” and choose the number you want to add.
Add a recent caller’s number to your favorites list: Tap Recents and tap next to a
caller, then tap “Add to Favorites.”
Go to favorites: Double-click the Home button. See “Home” on page 147.
Call a contact from your favorites Tap Favorites and choose a contact.
Delete a contact from your favorites Tap Favorites and tap Edit. Then tap next to a
contact or number and tap Remove.
Reorder your favorites list Tap Favorites and tap Edit. Then drag next to a
contact to a new place in the list.
Ringtones and the Ring/Silent Switch
iPhone comes with ringtones you can use for incoming calls, Clock alarms, and the
Clock timer. You can also create and purchase ringtones from songs in iTunes.
Ring/Silent Switch and Vibrate Modes
A switch on the side of iPhone makes it easy to turn the ringer on or off.
Turn the ringer on or off: Flip the switch on the side of iPhone.
Ring
Silent
Important: Clock alarms still sound even if you set the Ring/Silent switch to silent.
Set iPhone to vibrate: In Settings, choose Sounds. Separate controls let you set vibrate
for both ring mode and silent mode.
54 Chapter 3 PhoneFor more information, see Chapter 19,“Settings,” on page 138.
Setting Ringtones
You can set the default ringtone for calls and Clock alarms and timers. You can also
assign individual ringtones to contacts so you know who’s calling.
Set the default ringtone: In Settings, choose Sounds > Ringtone, then choose a
ringtone.
Assign a ringtone to a contact: From Phone, tap Contacts and choose a contact.
Then tap Ringtone and choose a ringtone.
Purchasing Ringtones
You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on your iPhone. See “Purchasing
Ringtones” on page 162.
Bluetooth Devices
You can use iPhone with hands-free Bluetooth headsets and Bluetooth car kits.
iPhone also supports Bluetooth stereo headphone devices when using iPod.
Pairing a Device with iPhone
You must first pair a Bluetooth device with iPhone before you can use it.
Pair with iPhone:
1 Follow the instructions that came with the device to make it discoverable or to set it to
search for other Bluetooth devices.
2 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.
3 Choose the device on iPhone and enter its passkey or PIN number. See the instructions
about the passkey or PIN that came with the device.
After you pair a Bluetooth device to work with iPhone, you must make a connection to
have iPhone use the device for your calls.
Connect with iPhone: See the documentation that came with the headset or car kit.
When iPhone is connected to a Bluetooth device, outgoing calls are routed through
the device. Incoming calls are routed through the device if you answer using the
device, and through iPhone if you answer using iPhone.
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss and
about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at
www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Chapter 3 Phone 55Bluetooth Status
The Bluetooth icon appears in the iPhone status bar at the top of the screen:
• (blue) or (white): Bluetooth is on and a device is connected to iPhone. (The color
depends on the current color of the status bar.)
• (gray): Bluetooth is on but no device is connected. If you’ve paired a device with
iPhone, it may be out of range or turned off.
• No Bluetooth icon: Bluetooth is turned off.
Routing Calls Back Through iPhone
When iPhone is connected to a Bluetooth device, you listen to calls through iPhone by
doing one of the following:
• Answer a call by tapping the iPhone screen.
• During a call, tap Audio on iPhone. Choose iPhone to hear calls through iPhone or
Speaker Phone to use the speakerphone.
• Turn off Bluetooth. In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and drag the switch to
Off.
• Turn off the Bluetooth device, or move out of range. You must be within about 30
feet of a Bluetooth device for it to be connected to iPhone.
Unpairing a Device from iPhone
If you’ve paired iPhone with a device and want to use another device instead, you
must unpair the first device.
Unpair a device:
1 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.
2 Choose the device and tap Unpair.
International Calls
iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS are multi-band phones, supporting UMTS/HSDPA (850,
1900, 2100 MHz) and GSM (850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz), ensuring broad international
coverage.
Making International Calls from Your Home Area
For information about making international calls from your home area, including rates
and other charges that may apply, contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website.
Using iPhone Abroad
You can use iPhone to make calls in many countries around the world.
Enable international roaming: Contact your carrier for information about availability
and fees.
56 Chapter 3 PhoneSet iPhone to add the correct prefix when dialing from another country: In Settings,
tap Phone, then turn International Assist on. This lets you make calls to your home
country using the numbers in your contacts and favorites, without having to add a
prefix or your country code. International Assist works for U.S. telephone numbers only.
When you make a call using International Assist, “International Assist” appears on the
iPhone screen, alternating with the “calling ...” message, until your call is connected.
Note: International Assist is not available in all areas.
Set the carrier to use: In Settings, tap Carrier, then select the carrier you prefer. This
option is available only when you’re traveling outside your carrier’s network. You can
make calls only on carriers that have roaming agreements with your iPhone service
provider. For more information, see “Carrier” on page 141.
Important: Voice and data roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges,
turn Data Roaming off.
Turn Data Roaming on or off: In Settings, choose General > Network and turn Data
Roaming on or off. Data Roaming is turned off by default.
Turning Data Roaming off helps to avoid data roaming charges when traveling outside
your carrier’s network by disabling data transmission over the cellular network. You
can still access the Internet if you have a Wi-Fi connection. If Wi-Fi network access isn’t
available, however, you cannot:
• Send or receive email
• Browse the Internet
• Sync your contacts, calendars, or bookmarks with MobileMe or Exchange
• Stream YouTube videos
• Get stock quotes
• Get map locations
• Get weather reports
• Purchase music or applications
Other third-party applications that use data roaming may also be disabled.
If Data Roaming is turned off, you can still make and receive phone calls, and send and
receive text messages. Voice roaming charges may apply. Visual voicemail is delivered
if there’s no charge; if your carrier charges for delivery of visual voicemail when
roaming, turning Data Roaming off prevents the delivery of visual voicemail.
To enable email, web browsing, and other data services, turn Data Roaming on.
Chapter 3 Phone 57Important: If Data Roaming is turned on, you may incur charges when roaming
outside your carrier’s network for the use of any of the features listed above, as well as
for delivery of visual voicemail. Check with your carrier for information about roaming
charges.
Get voicemail when visual voicemail isn’t available: Dial your own number, or touch
and hold “1” on the keypad.
You can use Airplane Mode to turn off cellular services and then turn Wi-Fi on to get
access to the Internet, while preventing voice roaming charges.
Use Airplane Mode to turn off cellular services: In Settings, tap Airplane Mode to turn
it on, then tap Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. See “Airplane Mode” on page 138.
Incoming phone calls are sent to voicemail. To make and receive calls again and get
your voicemail messages, turn Airplane Mode off.
58 Chapter 3 PhoneMail
4
Mail works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email
systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as other industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. You can send and receive embedded photos
and graphics, and view PDFs and other attachments.
Setting Up Email Accounts
You can set up email accounts on iPhone in either of the following ways:
• Set up an account directly on iPhone. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16.
• In iTunes, use the iPhone preference panes to sync email accounts settings from
your computer. See “Syncing” on page 11.
Sending Email
You can send an email message to anyone who has an email address.
Compose and send a message:
1 Tap .
2 Type a name or email address in the To field, or tap to add a name from your
contacts.
As you type an email address, matching email addresses from your contacts list appear
below. Tap an address to add it. To add more names, tap Return or .
Note: If you’re composing a message from your Microsoft Exchange account and
have access to your enterprise Global Address List (GAL), matching addresses from the
contacts on iPhone appear first, followed by matching GAL addresses.
3 Tap Cc/Bcc/From if you want to copy or blind copy the message to others, or change
the account you send the message from. If you have more than one email account,
you can tap the From field to change the account you’re sending from.
594 Enter a subject, then your message.
You can tap Return to move from one field to another.
5 Tap Send.
Send a photo or video (iPhone 3GS only) in an
email message
In Photos, choose a photo or video, tap ,
then tap Email Photo or Email Video. You can
also copy and paste photos and videos.
The photo or video is sent using your default
email account (see “Mail” on page 152).
Send a video in an email message (iPhone and
iPhone 3G)
In Photos, choose a video, then touch and hold
the video until the Copy command appears. Tap
Copy. Go to Mail and create a new message. Tap
to place an insertion point where you want the
video, then tap the insertion point to display the
edit commands and tap Paste.
The video is sent using your default email
account (see “Mail” on page 152).
Save a draft of a message to complete later Tap Cancel, then tap Save. The message is saved
in the Drafts mailbox.
Reply to a message Tap . Tap Reply to reply only to the sender
or tap Reply All to reply to the sender and all
recipients. Type your return message, then tap
Send.
Files or images attached to the initial message
aren’t sent back.
Forward a message Open a message and tap , then tap Forward.
Add one or more email addresses, type your
message, then tap Send.
When you forward a message, you can include
the files or images attached to the original
message.
Share contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact
at the bottom of the Info screen, then tap Email.
Checking and Reading Email
The Mail icon shows the total number of unread messages in all your inboxes. You may
have other unread messages in other mailboxes.
Number of unread
emails in your inboxes
Check for new messages: Choose a mailbox or tap at any time.
60 Chapter 4 MailOn each account screen, you can see the number of unread messages in each mailbox.
Number of unread
messages
Tap to see all your
email accounts
Tap a mailbox to see its messages. Unread messages have a blue dot next to them.
Unread messages
When you open a mailbox, Mail loads the number of most recent messages specified
in your Mail settings, if the messages haven’t already been loaded automatically.
(See “Mail” on page 152.)
Load additional messages: Scroll to the bottom of the list of messages and tap Load
More Messages.
Read a message: Tap a mailbox, then tap a message. Within a message, tap or to
see the next or previous message.
Zoom in on part of a message Double-tap an area of the message to zoom in.
Double-tap again to zoom out.
Resize any column of text to fit the screen Double-tap the text.
Resize a message manually Pinch to zoom in or out.
Chapter 4 Mail 61Follow a link Tap the link.
Text links are typically underlined and blue. Many
images are also links. A link can take you to a
webpage, open a map, dial a phone number, or
open a new preaddressed email message.
Web, phone, and map links open Safari, Phone,
or Maps on iPhone. To return to your email, press
the Home button and tap Mail.
See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. The address is displayed,
and you can choose to open the link in Safari or
copy the link address to the clipboard.
iPhone displays picture attachments in many commonly used formats (JPEG, GIF, and
TIFF) inline with the text in email messages. iPhone can play many audio attachments
(such as MP3, AAC, WAV, and AIFF). You can download and view files (such as PDF,
webpage, text, Pages, Keynote, Numbers, and Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
documents) attached to messages you receive.
Open an attached file: Tap the attachment. It downloads to iPhone and then opens.
Tap attachment
to download
You can view attachments in portrait or landscape orientation. If the format of an
attached file isn’t supported by iPhone, you can see the name of the file but you can’t
open it. iPhone supports the following document types:
.doc Microsoft Word
.docx Microsoft Word (XML)
.htm webpage
.html webpage
.key Keynote
.numbers Numbers
.pages Pages
62 Chapter 4 Mail.pdf Preview, Adobe Acrobat
.ppt Microsoft PowerPoint
.pptx Microsoft PowerPoint (XML)
.rtf Rich Text Format
.txt text
.vcf contact information
.xls Microsoft Excel
.xlsx Microsoft Excel (XML)
Save an attached photo to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo, then tap Save
Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first.
Save an attached video to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the attachment,
then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download
notice first.
See all the recipients of a message Tap Details.
Tap a name or email address to see the recipient’s
contact information. Then tap a phone number,
email address, or text message to contact the
person. Tap Hide to hide the recipients.
Add an email recipient to your contacts list Tap the message and, if necessary, tap Details
to see the recipients. Then tap a name or email
address and tap Create New Contact or “Add to
Existing Contact.”
Mark a message as unread Open the message and tap “Mark as Unread.”
A blue dot appears next to the message in the
mailbox list until you open it again.
Open a meeting invitation: Tap the invitation.
You can get contact information for the organizer and other attendees, set an alert,
add notes to the event, and add comments that are included in your response emailed
to the organizer. You can accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation. See
“Responding to Meeting Invitations” on page 95.
Turn Push on or off: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data,
then turn Push on or off. See “Fetch New Data” on page 151.
Chapter 4 Mail 63Searching Email
You can search the To, From, and Subject fields of email messages. Mail searches the
downloaded messages in the currently open mailbox. For MobileMe, Exchange, and
some IMAP mail accounts, you can also search messages on the server.
Search email messages: Open a mailbox, scroll to the top, and enter text in the Search
field. Tap From, To, Subject, or All (From, To, and Subject) to choose which fields you
want to search. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of the list and reveal the
search field.)
Search results for the messages already downloaded to iPhone appear automatically
as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results.
Search messages on the server: Tap “Continue Search on Server” at the end of the
search results.
Note: Search results of messages on servers may vary depending on the type of
account. Some servers may search only whole words.
Organizing Email
You can delete messages one at a time, or select a group to delete all at once. You can
also move messages from one mailbox or folder to another.
Delete a message: Open the message and tap .
You can also delete a message directly from the mailbox message list by swiping left
or right over the message title, then tapping Delete.
To show the
Delete button,
swipe left or
right over
the message.
64 Chapter 4 MailDelete multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the
messages you want to delete, then tap Delete.
Move a message to another mailbox or folder: When viewing a message, tap , then
choose a mailbox or folder.
Move multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the
messages you want to move, then tap Move and select a mailbox or folder.
Chapter 4 Mail 65Safari
5
Viewing Webpages
Safari lets you surf the web and view webpages on iPhone in the same way as if you
were on your computer. You can create bookmarks on iPhone and sync bookmarks
with your computer. Add web clips for quick access to your favorite sites directly from
the Home screen.
You can view webpages in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPhone and
the webpage rotates too, automatically adjusting to fit the page.
Opening Webpages
Open a webpage: Tap the address field (on the left side of the title bar), then type the
web address and tap Go. If the address field isn’t visible, tap the status bar at the top of
the screen to quickly scroll to the address field at the top of the webpage.
As you type, web addresses that start with those letters appear. These are bookmarked
pages or recent pages you’ve opened. Tap an address to go to that page. Keep typing
if you want to enter a web address that’s not in the list.
Erase the text in the address field: Tap the address field, then tap .
66Zooming and Scrolling
Zoom in or out: Double-tap a column on a webpage to expand the column. Doubletap again to zoom out.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out manually.
Scroll around a webpage Drag up, down, or sideways. When scrolling,
you can touch and drag anywhere on the page
without activating any links.
Scroll within a frame on a webpage Use two fingers to scroll within a frame on a
webpage. Use one finger to scroll the entire
webpage.
Scroll quickly to the top of a webpage Tap the status bar at the top of the iPhone screen.
Navigating Webpages
Links on webpages typically take you to another place on the web.
Follow a link on a webpage: Tap the link.
Links on iPhone can also initiate a phone call, display a location in Maps, or create a
preaddressed Mail message. To return to Safari after a link opens another application,
press the Home button and tap Safari.
See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. The address pops up
next to your finger. You can touch and hold an
image to see if it has a link.
Stop a webpage from loading Tap .
Reload a webpage Tap .
Return to the previous or next page Tap or at the bottom of the screen.
Return to a recently viewed page Tap and tap History. To clear the history list,
tap Clear.
Send a webpage address via email Tap and tap “Mail Link to this Page.”
Save an image or photo to your Camera Roll
album
Touch and hold the image, then tap Save Image.
Chapter 5 Safari 67Opening Multiple Pages
You can have up to eight pages open at a time. Some links automatically open a new
page instead of replacing the current one.
The number inside the pages icon at the bottom of the screen shows how many
pages are open. If there’s no number inside, just one page is open. For example:
= one page is open
= three pages are open
Open a new page: Tap and tap New Page.
Go to another page: Tap and flick left or right. Tap the page you want to view.
Close a page: Tap and tap . You can’t close a page if it’s the only one open.
Entering Text and Filling Out Forms
Some webpages have text fields and forms to fill out. You can set Safari to remember
names and passwords of websites you visit and fill out text fields automatically with
information from Contacts. See “Safari” on page 156.
Bring up the keyboard Tap inside a text field.
Move to another text field Tap another text field, or tap the Next or Previous
button.
Submit a form Once you finish filling out a form, tap Go or
Search. Most pages also have a link you can tap
to submit the form.
Close the keyboard without submitting the
form
Tap Done.
68 Chapter 5 SafariEnable AutoFill to help you fill out web forms: In Settings, choose Safari > AutoFill,
then do one of the following:
• To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and
select the contact you want to use.
Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms.
• To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on.
When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you
visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website.
• To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All.
Searching the Web
By default, Safari searches using Google. You can search using Yahoo!, instead.
Search the web:
1 Tap the search field (on the right side of the title bar).
2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Google.
3 Tap a link in the list of search results to open a webpage.
Set Safari to search using Yahoo!: From the Home screen choose Settings > Safari >
Search Engine, then choose Yahoo!.
Bookmarks
You can bookmark webpages you want to return to later.
Bookmark a webpage: Open the page and tap . Then tap Add Bookmark.
When you save a bookmark you can edit its title. By default, bookmarks are saved at
the top level of Bookmarks. Tap Bookmarks to choose another folder.
If you use Safari on a Mac, or Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC, you can sync
bookmarks with the web browser on your computer.
Sync bookmarks with your computer:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 Click the Info tab, select “Sync … bookmarks” under Web Browser, then click Apply.
See “Syncing” on page 11.
Sync bookmarks with MobileMe: In Settings on iPhone, select Bookmarks in your
MobileMe account. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16.
Open a bookmarked webpage: Tap , then choose a bookmark or tap a folder to
see the bookmarks inside.
Chapter 5 Safari 69Edit a bookmark or bookmark folder: Tap , choose the folder that has the
bookmark or folder you want to edit, then tap Edit. Then do one of the following:
• To make a new folder, tap New Folder.
• To delete a bookmark or folder, tap , then tap Delete.
• To reposition a bookmark or folder, drag .
• To edit the name or address, or to put it in a different folder, tap the bookmark or folder.
When you’re finished, tap Done.
Web Clips
Add web clips to the Home screen for fast access to your favorite webpages. Web clips
appear as icons on the Home screen, and you can arrange your web clips along with
the other icons. See “iPhone Applications” on page 23.
Add a web clip: Open the webpage and tap . Then tap “Add to Home Screen.”
When you open a web clip, Safari automatically zooms and scrolls to the area of the
webpage that was displayed when you saved the web clip. The displayed area is also
used to create the icon for the web clip on your Home screen, unless the webpage
comes with its own custom icon.
When you add a web clip, you can edit its name. If the name is too long (more than
about 10 characters), it may appear abbreviated on the Home screen.
Web clips aren’t bookmarks, and aren’t synced by MobileMe or iTunes.
Delete a web clip:
1 Touch and hold any icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle.
2 Tap in the corner of the web clip you want to delete.
3 Tap Delete, then press the Home button to save your arrangement.
70 Chapter 5 SafariiPod
6
iPhone syncs with iTunes on your computer to get songs, videos, and other content
you’ve collected in your iTunes library. For information about adding music and other
media to your iTunes library, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
Getting Music, Video, and More
To get music, video, and other content onto iPhone, you can set up iTunes on your
computer to automatically sync content in your library, or you can manually manage
the media you put on iPhone.
Syncing Content from iTunes
You can transfer music, video, and more onto iPhone by syncing content from iTunes.
You can sync all of your media, or you can select specific songs, videos, podcasts, and
iTunes U collections.
Set iTunes to sync iPod content:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 On the Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U tabs, select the content you
want to sync to iPhone. For example, you could set iTunes to sync selected music
playlists and the three most recent episodes of your favorite video podcast.
4 Click Apply.
To set iTunes to sync iPod content and other info automatically, click the Summary tab
and select “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected.”
Important: If you delete an item from iTunes, it will also be deleted from iPhone the
next time you sync.
71Only songs and videos encoded in formats that iPhone supports are transferred to
iPhone. For information about which formats iPhone supports, see “Song, Video, or
Other Items Won’t Play” on page 200.
If there are more songs in your iTunes library than can fit on your iPhone, iTunes
offers to create a special playlist to sync with iPhone. iTunes fills the playlist with
random selections from your library. You can add or delete songs from the playlist
and sync again.
If you listen to part of a podcast or audiobook, your place in the story is included if you
sync the content with iTunes. If you started listening to the story on iPhone, you can
pick up where you left off using iTunes on your computer—or vice versa.
For more information about using iTunes to get music and other media onto your
computer, see “What You Need” on page 9.
Manually Managing Content
The manually managing feature lets you choose just the music, video, and podcasts
you want to have on iPhone.
Set up iPhone for manually managing content:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 Click the Summary tab and select “Manually manage music and videos.”
4 Click Apply.
Add items to iPhone: Drag a song, video, podcast, or playlist in your iTunes library to
iPhone (in the sidebar). Shift-click or Command-click (Mac) or Control-click (Windows)
to select multiple items to add at the same time.
iTunes syncs the content immediately. If you deselect “Manually manage music and
videos,” the content you added manually is removed from iPhone the next time iTunes
syncs content.
Remove items from iPhone: With iPhone connected to your computer, select the
iPhone icon in the iTunes sidebar. Click the disclosure triangle to the left of the icon
to show the contents. Select a content area, such as Music or Movies, then select the
items you want to delete and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Removing an item from iPhone doesn’t delete it from your iTunes library.
Purchasing and Downloading Content from the iTunes Store
You can use the iTunes Store on iPhone to purchase and download songs, albums,
TV shows, movies, music videos, ringtones, and audiobooks directly to iPhone. You can
also stream and download audio and video podcasts, as well as iTunes U content.
See “About the iTunes Store” on page 160.
72 Chapter 6 iPodTransferring Purchased Content to Another Computer
You can transfer content on iPhone that was purchased using iTunes on one
computer to an iTunes library on another authorized computer. The computer must be
authorized to play content from your iTunes Store account. To authorize the computer,
open iTunes on the computer and choose Store > Authorize Computer.
Transfer purchased content: Connect iPhone to the other computer. iTunes asks if
you want to transfer purchased content.
Converting Videos for iPhone
You can add videos other than those purchased from the iTunes Store to iPhone, such
as videos you create in iMovie on a Mac, or videos you download from the Internet
and then add to iTunes.
If you try to add a video from iTunes to iPhone and a message says the video can’t play
on iPhone, you can convert the video.
Convert a video to work with iPhone: Select the video in your iTunes library and
choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” Then add the converted video to
iPhone.
Music and Other Audio
The high-resolution Multi-Touch display makes listening to songs on iPhone as much
a visual experience as a musical one. You can scroll through your playlists, or use Cover
Flow to browse through your album art.
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important
Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Playing Songs
Browse your collection: Tap Playlists, Artists, or Songs. Tap More to browse Albums,
Audiobooks, Compilations, Composers, Genres, iTunes U, or Podcasts.
Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. If Genius doesn’t appear, you need to turn on
Genius in iTunes 9 or later, and then sync iPhone with iTunes. See “Using Genius on
iPhone” on page 79.
Play a song: Tap the song.
Shake to shuffle: Shake iPhone to turn shuffle on and immediately change songs.
Shake anytime to change to another song.
You can turn the “Shake to Shuffle” feature on or off in Settings > iPod (it’s on by
default). See “Music” on page 158.
Chapter 6 iPod 73Controlling Song Playback
When you play a song, the Now Playing screen appears.
Next/Fast-forward
Play/Pause
Track List
Back
Previous/ Volume
Rewind
Pause a song Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset).
Resume playback Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset).
Raise or lower the volume Drag the volume slider or use the buttons on
the side of iPhone. You can also use the volume
buttons on the iPhone headset (iPhone 3GS only).
Restart a song or a chapter in an audiobook or
podcast
Tap .
Skip to the next song or chapter in an
audiobook or podcast
Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) twice quickly.
Go to the previous song or chapter in an
audiobook or podcast
Tap twice, or press the center button on the
iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) three times quickly.
Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . The longer you hold
the control, the faster the song rewinds or fastforwards. On the iPhone headset, press the
center button (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) twice quickly and hold to
fast forward, or three times quickly and hold to
rewind.
74 Chapter 6 iPodReturn to the iPod browse lists Tap , or swipe to the right over the album
cover.
Return to the Now Playing screen Tap Now Playing.
Display a song’s lyrics Tap the album cover when playing a song. (Lyrics
appear if you’ve added them to the song using
the song’s Info window in iTunes.)
You can display playback controls at any time when you’re listening to music and
using another application—or even when iPhone is locked—by double-clicking the
Home button. See “Home” on page 147.
If you’re using an application, the playback controls appear on top of the application.
After using the controls, you can close them or tap Music to go to the Now Playing
screen. If iPhone is locked, the controls appear onscreen, then disappear automatically
after you finish using them.
Additional Song Controls
From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover.
The repeat, Genius, and shuffle controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can
see elapsed time, remaining time, and the song number. The song’s lyrics also appear,
if you’ve added them to the song in iTunes.
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the
scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the
playhead along the scrubber bar.
Repeat Genius Shuffle
Scrubber bar Playhead
Chapter 6 iPod 75Set iPhone to repeat songs Tap . Tap again to set iPhone to repeat only
the current song.
= iPhone is set to repeat all songs in the
current album or list.
= iPhone is set to repeat the current song
over and over.
= iPhone isn’t set to repeat songs.
Skip to any point in a song Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar.
Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate.
The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down
you slide your finger.
Make a Genius playlist Tap , and the Genius playlist appears.
See “Using Genius on iPhone” on page 79.
Set iPhone to shuffle songs Tap . Tap again to set iPhone to play songs
in order.
= iPhone is set to shuffle songs.
= iPhone is set to play songs in order.
Shuffle the tracks in any playlist, album, or other
list of songs
Tap Shuffle at the top of the list. For example, to
shuffle all the songs on iPhone, choose Songs >
Shuffle.
Whether or not iPhone is set to shuffle, if you tap
Shuffle at the top of a list of songs, iPhone plays
the songs from that list in random order.
Podcast and Audiobook Controls
From the Now Playing screen, tap the cover.
The email, 30-second repeat, and playback speed controls appear along with the
scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the episode or chapter
number.
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the
scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the
playhead along the scrubber bar.
Scrubber bar Playhead
Playback
speed
Email 30-second repeat
76 Chapter 6 iPodSend an email link to this podcast Tap .
Skip to any point Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide
your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The
scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you
slide your finger.
Play back the last 30 seconds Tap .
Set the playback speed Tap . Tap again to change the speed.
= Play at double speed.
= Play at half speed.
= Play at normal speed.
Using Voice Control with iPod
You can use Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) to control music playback on
iPhone.
Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages.
Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen
appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described below to play songs.
You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the
equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to bring up Voice Control.
Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause”
or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or
“previous song.”
Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist”
and the name.
Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.”
Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who
sings this song,” or “who is this song by.”
Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more
songs like this.”
Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.”
Chapter 6 iPod 77Browsing Album Covers in Cover Flow
When you’re browsing music, you can rotate iPhone sideways to see your iTunes
content in Cover Flow and browse your music by album artwork.
Browse album covers Drag or flick left or right.
See the tracks on an album Tap a cover or .
Play any track Tap the track. Drag up or down to scroll through
the tracks.
Return to the cover Tap the title bar. Or tap again.
Play or pause the current song Tap or . You can also press the center button
on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button
on your Bluetooth headset).
78 Chapter 6 iPodViewing All Tracks on an Album
See all the tracks on the album that contains the current song: From the Now
Playing screen tap . Tap a track to play it. Tap the album cover thumbnail to return to
the Now Playing screen.
Rating bar
Back to Now
Playing
screen
Album tracks
In track list view, you can assign ratings to songs. You can use ratings to create smart
playlists in iTunes that dynamically update to include, for example, your highest rated
songs.
Rate a song: Drag your thumb across the rating bar to give the song zero to five stars.
Searching Music
You can search the titles, artists, albums, and composers of songs, podcasts, and other
content you’ve synced to iPhone.
Search music: Enter text in the search field at the top of a song list, playlist, artist list,
or other view of your iPod content. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of a
list and reveal the search field.)
Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard
and see more of the results.
You can also use Spotlight to search for music. See “Searching” on page 37.
Using Genius on iPhone
Genius finds songs in your iTunes library that go great together. A Genius playlist is a
collection of songs that are picked for you to go with a song you choose from your
library. A Genius Mix is a selection of songs of the same kind of music. Genius Mixes
are recreated each time you listen to them, so they’re always new and fresh.
You can create Genius playlists in iTunes and sync them to iPhone. You can also create
and save Genius playlists directly on iPhone.
Chapter 6 iPod 79Genius Mixes are created in iTunes. iTunes creates different mixes depending on the
variety of music you have in your iTunes library. For example, you may have Genius
Mixes that highlight R&B songs, or Alternative Rock songs.
To use Genius on iPhone, first turn on Genius in iTunes, then sync iPhone with iTunes.
Genius Mixes are synced automatically, unless you manually manage your music and
choose which mixes you want to sync in iTunes. Genius is a free service, but requires
an iTunes Store account.
Genius Mixes require iTunes 9 or later. When you sync a Genius Mix, iTunes may select
and sync songs from your library that you haven’t otherwise chosen to sync.
Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. The number of dots at the bottom of the screen
shows the number of mixes you’ve synced from iTunes, and indicates which mix you’re
viewing. Flick left or right to access your other mixes.
Play a Genius Mix: Tap the mix or tap .
Make a Genius playlist on iPhone:
1 Tap Playlists and tap Genius.
2 Tap a song in the list. Genius creates a playlist with additional songs that go great with
that song.
You can also make a Genius playlist of songs that go great with the song you’re
playing. From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover to display additional
controls, then tap .
Save a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Save. The playlist is saved in Playlists with
the title of the song you picked.
You can make and save as many Genius playlists as you want. If you save a Genius
playlist created on iPhone, it syncs back to iTunes the next time you connect.
80 Chapter 6 iPodRefresh a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Refresh.
Refreshing a playlist creates a playlist of different songs that go great with the song
you picked. You can refresh any Genius playlist, whether it was created in iTunes and
synced to iPhone, or created directly on iPhone.
Create a Genius playlist from a new song: In the playlist, tap New, then pick a new
song.
Delete a saved Genius playlist: In a playlist that you saved directly on iPhone, tap Edit,
then tap Delete Playlist.
Once a Genius playlist is synced back to iTunes, you won’t be able to delete it directly
from iPhone. You can use iTunes to edit the playlist name, stop syncing, or delete the
playlist.
Making On-The-Go Playlists
Make an on-the-go playlist:
1 Tap Playlists and tap On-The-Go.
2 Browse for songs using the buttons at the bottom of the screen. Tap any song or video
to add it to the playlist. Tap Add All Songs at the top of any list of songs to add all the
songs in the list.
3 When you finish, tap Done.
When you make an on-the-go playlist and then sync iPhone to your computer, the
playlist is saved on iPhone and in your iTunes library, then deleted from iPhone. The
first is saved as “On-The-Go 1,” the second as “On-The-Go 2,” and so on. To put a playlist
back on iPhone, select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, click the Music tab, and set the
playlist to sync.
Edit an on-the-go playlist: Tap Playlists, tap On-The-Go, tap Edit, then do one of the
following:
• To move a song higher or lower in the list, drag next to the song.
• To delete a song from the playlist, tap next to a song, then tap Delete. Deleting a
song from the on-the-go playlist doesn’t delete it from iPhone.
• To clear the entire playlist, tap Clear Playlist.
• To add more songs, tap .
Videos
With iPhone, you can view video content such as movies, music videos, and video
podcasts. If a video contains chapters, you can skip to the next or previous chapter,
or bring up a list and start playing at any chapter that you choose. If a video provides
alternate language features, you can choose an audio language or display subtitles.
Chapter 6 iPod 81Playing Videos
Play a video: Tap Videos and tap the video.
Display playback controls: Tap the screen to show the controls. Tap again to hide
them.
Controlling Video Playback
Videos play in widescreen to take full advantage of the display.
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust
the scrub rate by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the
scrubber bar.
Scrubber bar Playhead
Play/Pause
Next/Fastforward
Scale
Restart/Rewind Volume
Lovers in Japan by Coldplay is available in the iTunes Store
Pause a video Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset).
Resume playback Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset).
Raise or lower the volume Drag the volume slider. You can also use
the volume buttons on the iPhone headset
(iPhone 3GS only).
Start a video over Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar all the
way to the left, or tap if the video doesn’t
contain chapters.
Skip to the next chapter (if available) Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) twice quickly.
Go to the previous chapter (if available) Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) three times quickly.
Start playing at a specific chapter (if available) Tap , then choose a chapter from the list.
82 Chapter 6 iPodRewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or .
Skip to any point in a video Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide
your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The
scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you
slide your finger.
Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done. Or press the Home button.
Scale a video to fill the screen or fit to the
screen
Tap to make the video fill the screen. Tap
to make it fit the screen. You can also double-tap
the video to toggle between fitting and filling the
screen.
When you scale a video to fill the screen, the
sides or top may be cropped from view. When
you scale it to fit the screen, you may see black
bars on the sides or above and below the video.
Select an alternate audio language (if available) Tap , then choose a language from the Audio
list.
Show or hide subtitles (if available) Tap , then choose a language, or Off, from the
Subtitles list.
Searching Video
You can search the titles of movies, TV shows, and video podcasts you’ve synced to
iPhone.
Search video: Enter text in the search field at the top of the list of videos.
Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard
and see more of the results.
Watching Rented Movies
You can rent movies in standard (480p) definition from the iTunes Store and watch
them on iPhone. You can download rented movies directly to iPhone, or transfer them
from iTunes on your computer to iPhone. You can also transfer rented movies back to
iTunes from iPhone. (Rented movies aren’t available in all regions.)
The movie must be fully downloaded before you can start watching. You can pause
a download and resume it later. Rented movies expire after a certain number of days,
and once you start a movie you have a limited amount of time to finish watching it.
The time remaining appears near a movie’s title. Movies are automatically deleted
when they expire. Check the iTunes Store for the expiration time before renting
a movie.
Chapter 6 iPod 83Transfer rented movies to iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer. Then select
iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, click Movies, and select the rented movies you want to
transfer. Your computer must be connected to the Internet.
View a rented movie: On iPhone, choose iPod > Videos and select a movie.
Watching Videos on a TV
You can connect iPhone to your TV and watch your videos on the large screen. Use the
Apple Component AV Cable, Apple Composite AV Cable, or other authorized iPhone
compatible cable. You can also use these cables with the Apple Universal Dock to
connect iPhone to your TV. (The Apple Universal Dock includes a remote that lets you
control playback from a distance.) Apple cables and docks are available for purchase
separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/ipodstore (not available in all
countries).
Deleting Videos from iPhone
You can delete videos from iPhone to save space.
Delete a video: In the videos list, swipe left or right over the video, then tap Delete.
When you delete a video (other than rented movies) from iPhone, it isn’t deleted from
your iTunes library and you can sync the video back to iPhone later. If you don’t want
to sync the video back to iPhone, set iTunes to not sync the video. See “What You
Need” on page 9.
Important: If you delete a rented movie from iPhone, it’s deleted permanently and
cannot be transferred back to your computer.
Setting a Sleep Timer
You can set iPhone to stop playing music or videos after a period of time.
Set a sleep timer: From the Home screen choose Clock > Timer, then flick to set the
number of hours and minutes. Tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod, tap Set,
then tap Start to start the timer.
When the timer ends, iPhone stops playing music or video, closes any other open
application, and then locks itself.
84 Chapter 6 iPodChanging the Browse Buttons
You can replace the browse buttons at the bottom of the screen with buttons you
use more frequently. For example, if you often listen to podcasts, you can replace the
Songs button with Podcasts.
Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the
bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them.
Tap Done when you finish. Tap More at any time to access the buttons you replaced.
Chapter 6 iPod 85Messages
7
Sending and Receiving Messages
WARNING: For important information about driving safely, see the Important Product
Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Messages lets you exchange text messages with anyone using an SMS-capable phone.
Messages also supports MMS, so you can send photos, video clips (iPhone 3GS only),
contact information, and voice memos to other MMS-capable devices. You can enter
multiple addresses and send a message to several people at the same time.
Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later. SMS or MMS support may not be
available in all regions. Additional fees may apply for use of Messages. Contact your
carrier for complete information.
You can use Messages whenever you’re in range of the cellular network. If you can
make a call, you can send a message. Depending on your phone plan, you may be
charged for the messages you send or receive.
Send a message: Tap , then enter a phone number or name, or tap and choose a
contact from your contacts list. Tap the text field above the keyboard, type a message,
and tap Send.
The Messages icon on the Home screen shows the total number of unread messages
you have.
Number of
unread messages
86Your conversations are saved in the Messages list. Conversations that contain unread
messages have a blue dot next to them. Tap a conversation in the list to see that
conversation or add to it.
Text messages
you sent
Text messages
from the other
person
iPhone displays the 50 most recent messages in the conversation. To see earlier
messages, scroll to the top and tap Load Earlier Messages.
Send a message to more than one person: Tap , then add recipients. If you enter
a phone number manually (instead of selecting it from Contacts), tap Return before
entering another entry.
Replies from any of the recipients are sent only to you, not to the other people you
texted.
Reply or send a message to a person (or group) you’ve texted before: Tap an entry
in the Messages list, then type a new message in the conversation and tap Send.
Send a message to a favorite or to a recent call:
1 From the Home screen tap Phone, then tap Favorites or Recents.
2 Tap next to a name or number, then tap Text Message.
3 If multiple phone numbers appear, tap the one you want to text.
When MMS is available, Messages allows you to include a subject in your text
messages. You can turn this feature on or off in Messages settings. It is turned on by
default.
Include or remove the subject field: In Settings, tap Messages, then tap Show Subject
Field to turn it on or off.
Note: The subject field and the Show Subject Field setting don’t appear if MMS isn’t
supported by your carrier.
Chapter 7 Messages 87Turn MMS messaging on or off: In Settings, tap Messages, then tap MMS Messaging
to turn it on or off. You may want to turn MMS Messaging off, for example, to prevent
sending or receiving attachments when fees apply.
Note: The MMS Messaging setting doesn’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your
carrier.
Sharing Photos and Videos
You can take a photo or make a video (iPhone 3GS only) from within Messages and
include it in your conversation with another MMS-capable device. You can save photos
or videos you receive in Messages to your Camera Roll album.
If MMS isn’t supported by your carrier, the button doesn’t appear and you can’t
send photos or videos.
Send a photo or video: Tap and tap “Take Photo or Video” (iPhone 3GS only; on
earlier models, tap “Take Photo”) or “Choose Existing” and select an item from a photo
album and tap Choose.
The limit to the size of attachments is determined by your carrier. If necessary, iPhone
may compress the photo or video. To learn about taking photos and videos, see
Chapter 10,“Camera,” on page 103.
Save a photo or video attachment to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo or
video in the conversation, tap , then tap Save Image or Save Video.
Copy a photo or video: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Copy. You can paste
the photo or video to an Mail message or another MMS message.
Sending Voice Memos
You can send voice memos in a message to another MMS-capable device.
Send a voice memo: In Voice Memos, tap , tap the voice memo you want to send,
then tap Share and tap MMS. Address the message and tap Send.
88 Chapter 7 MessagesEditing Conversations
If you want to keep a conversation but not the entire thread, you can delete the parts
you don’t want. You can also delete entire conversations from the Messages list.
Edit a conversation: Tap Edit. Tap the circles along the left side to select the parts of
the conversation you want to delete, then tap Delete. When you’re finished, tap Done.
Clear all text and files, without deleting the conversation: Tap Edit, then tap Clear All.
Tap Clear Conversation to confirm.
Forward a conversation: Select a conversation, then tap Edit. Tap the circles on the
left side of the screen to select the parts of the conversation you want to include,
then tap Forward, enter one or more recipients, and tap Send.
Delete a conversation: Tap Edit, then tap next to the conversation and tap Delete.
You can also swipe left or right over the conversation and tap Delete.
To show the
Delete button,
swipe left or right
over the message.
Using Contact Information and Links
Call or email someone you’ve texted: Tap a message in the Text Messages list and
scroll to the top of the conversation. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of
the screen.)
• To call the person, tap Call.
• To email the person, tap Contact Info, then tap an email address.
Follow a link in a message: Tap the link.
A link may open a webpage in Safari, initiate a phone call in Phone, open a
preaddressed message in Mail, or display a location in Maps. To return to your text
messages, press the Home button and tap Messages.
Add someone you’ve texted to your contacts list: Tap a phone number in the
Messages list, then tap “Add to Contacts.”
Send contact information: In Contacts, tap the person whose information you want
to share. Tap Share Contact at the bottom of the screen, then tap MMS. Address the
message and tap Send.
Save contact information received: Tap the contact bubble in the conversation and
tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.”
Chapter 7 Messages 89Managing Previews and Alerts
By default, iPhone displays a preview of new messages when iPhone is locked or you
are using another application. You can turn this preview on or off in Settings. You can
also enable alerts for text messages.
Turn previews on or off: In Settings, choose Messages and tap Show Preview.
Repeat previews: In Settings, choose Messages and tap Repeat Alert. If you don’t
respond to the first preview of a new message, the preview will be displayed twice
more.
Set whether an alert sounds when you get a text message or preview: In Settings,
choose Sounds, then tap New Text Message. Tap the alert sound you want, or None if
you don’t want an audible alert.
Important: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, text alerts won’t sound.
90 Chapter 7 MessagesCalendar
8
About Calendar
Calendar lets you view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined
calendar for all accounts. You can view your events in a continuous list, by day, or by
month, and search events by title, invitee, or location.
You can sync iPhone with the calendars on your computer. You can also make, edit,
or cancel appointments on iPhone, and have them synced back to your computer.
You can subscribe to Google, Yahoo!, or Mac OS X iCal calendars using a CalDAV or
iCalendar (.ics) account. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account, you can receive and
respond to meeting invitations.
Syncing Calendars
You can sync Calendar in either of the following ways:
• In iTunes, use the iPhone preference panes to sync with iCal or Microsoft Entourage
on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC when you connect iPhone to
your computer. See “Syncing” on page 11.
• In Settings on iPhone, select Calendar in your MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange
accounts to sync your calendar information over the air. See “Setting Up
Accounts” on page 16.
91Viewing Your Calendar
You can view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar
for all accounts.
View a different calendar: Tap Calendars, then select a calendar. Tap All Calendars to
view combined events from all calendars.
You can view your calendar events in a list, by day, or by month. The events for all of
your synced calendars appear in the same calendar on iPhone.
Switch views: Tap List, Day, or Month.
• List view: All your appointments and events appear in a scrollable list.
• Day view: Scroll up or down to see the events in a day. Tap or to see the
previous or next day’s events.
• Month view: Tap a day to see its events. Tap or to see the previous or next
month.
Add an event
Days with dots
have scheduled
events
Go to today Switch views
Respond to
calendar invitation
Events for
selected day
See the details of an event: Tap the event.
Set iPhone to adjust event times for a selected time zone:
1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars.”
2 Under Calendars, tap Time Zone Support, then turn Time Zone Support on.
3 Tap Time Zone and search for a major city in the time zone you want.
When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time
zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events
in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time.
92 Chapter 8 CalendarSearching Calendars
You can search the titles, invitees, and locations of the events in your calendars.
Calendar searches the calendar you’re currently viewing, or all calendars if you’re
viewing them all.
Search events: In list view, enter text in the search field.
Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard
and see more results.
Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars
You can subscribe to calendars that use the CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) formats. Many
calendar-based services, including Yahoo!, Google, and the Mac OS X iCal application,
support either format.
Subscribed calendars are read only. You can read events from subscribed calendars on
iPhone, but can’t edit them or create new events. You also can’t accept invitations from
CalDAV accounts.
Subscribe to a CalDAV or .ics calendar:
1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
2 Choose Other, then choose either Add CalDAV Account or Add Subscribed Calendar.
3 Enter your account information, then tap Next to verify the account.
4 Tap Save.
Apple provides links to a number of free iCal calendars—for national holidays or
sports events, for example—that you may want to subscribe to. The calendars are
automatically added to iCal on your desktop when you download them. You can
then sync them to iPhone as described in “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on
page 93. Go to /www.apple.com/downloads/macosx/calendars.
Chapter 8 Calendar 93You can also subscribe to an iCal (or other .ics) calendar published on the web by
tapping a link to the calendar you receive in an email or text message on iPhone.
Adding Calendar Events to iPhone
You can also enter and edit calendar events directly on iPhone.
Add an event: Tap and enter event information, then tap Done.
You can enter any of the following:
• Title
• Location
• Starting and ending times (or turn on All-day if it’s an all-day event)
• Repeat times—none, or every day, week, two weeks, month, or year
• Alert time—from five minutes to two days before the event
When you set an alert, the option to set a second alert appears. When an alert
goes off, iPhone displays a message. You can also set iPhone to play a sound
(see “Alerts” on page 96).
Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re
traveling, iPhone may not alert you at the correct local time. To manually set the
correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 147.
• Notes
To select which calendar to add the event to, tap Calendar. Read-only calendars don’t
appear in the list.
Edit an event Tap the event, then tap Edit.
Delete an event Tap the event, tap Edit, then scroll down and tap
Delete Event.
94 Chapter 8 CalendarResponding to Meeting Invitations
If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPhone with Calendars enabled,
you can receive and respond to meeting invitations from people in your organization.
When you receive an invitation, the meeting appears in your calendar with a dotted
line around it. The icon in the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the total
number of new invitations you have, as does the Calendar icon on the Home screen.
Number of
meeting invitations
Respond to an invitation in Calendar:
1 Tap a meeting invitation in the calendar, or tap to display the Event screen and tap
an invitation.
• Tap “Invitation from” to get contact information for the meeting organizer.
Tap the email address to send a message to the organizer. If the organizer is
in your contacts, you can also tap to call or send a text message.
Chapter 8 Calendar 95• Tap Attendees to see the other people invited to the meeting. Tap a name to see
an attendee’s contact information. Tap the email address to send a message to the
attendee. If the attendee is in your contacts, you can also tap to call or send a text
message.
• Tap Alert to set iPhone to sound an alert before the meeting.
• Tap Add Comments to add comments in the email response to the meeting
organizer. You comments will also appear in your Info screen for the meeting.
Notes are made by the meeting organizer.
2 Tap Accept, Maybe, or Decline.
When you accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation, a response email that
includes any comments you added is sent to the organizer.
If you accept or tentatively accept the meeting, you can change your response later.
Tap Add Comments if you want to change your comments.
Exchange meeting invitations are also sent in an email message, which lets you open
the meeting’s Info screen from Mail.
Open a meeting invitation in an email message: Tap the invitation.
Alerts
Set calendar alerts: In Settings, choose Sounds, then turn Calendar Alerts on.
If Calendar Alerts is off when an event is about to occur, iPhone displays a message
but makes no sound.
Important: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, calendar alerts won’t sound.
Sound alerts for invitations: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendar.”
Under Calendars, tap New Invitation Alert to turn it on.
96 Chapter 8 CalendarPhotos
9
About Photos
iPhone lets you carry photos and videos with you, so you can share them with your
family, friends, and associates. You can sync photos and videos (Mac only) from your
computer, view photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) taken with the built-in camera,
use photos as wallpaper, and assign photos to identify contacts when they call.
You can also send photos and videos in email messages, send photos and videos
(iPhone 3GS only) in MMS messages, and upload photos and videos to MobileMe
galleries.
Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later and if supported by your carrier.
Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer
iTunes can sync your photos and videos (Mac only) with the following applications:
• Mac: iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture
• PC: Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later
See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 12.
iPhone supports H.264 and MPEG-4 video formats, with AAC audio. If you are having
trouble syncing a video to iPhone, you might be able to use iTunes to create an iPhone
version of the video.
Create an iPhone version of a video:
1 Copy the video to your iTunes library.
2 In iTunes, select Movies in the Library list and select the video you want to sync.
3 Choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.”
For additional information, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1211.
97Viewing Photos and Videos
Photos and videos (Mac only) synced from your computer’s photo application can
be viewed in Photos. You can also view the photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only)
you’ve taken with iPhone’s built-in camera or saved from an email or MMS message
(iPhone 3GS only).
View photos and videos:
1 In Photos, tap a photo album.
2 Tap a thumbnail to see the photo or video in full screen.
Show or hide the controls: Tap the full-screen photo or video to show the controls.
Tap again to hide the controls.
Play a video: Tap in the center of the screen.
To replay a video, tap at the bottom of the screen. If you don’t see , tap the screen
to show the controls.
View a photo or video in landscape orientation: Rotate iPhone sideways. The photo
or video reorients automatically and, if it’s in landscape format, expands to fit the
screen.
98 Chapter 9 PhotosZoom in on part of a photo: Double-tap where you want to zoom in. Double-tap
again to zoom out. You can also pinch to zoom in or out.
View video in full screen, or fit video to screen: Double tap the screen to scale the
video to fill the screen. Double-tap again to fit the video to the screen.
Pan around a photo: Drag the photo.
See the next or previous photo or video: Flick left or right. Or tap the screen to show
the controls, then tap or .
Slideshows
You can view photo albums as slideshows, complete with background music.
View a photo album as a slideshow: Tap an album, then tap .
Videos play automatically when they appear during the slideshow.
Stop a slideshow: Tap the screen.
Set slideshow settings: In Settings, choose Photos and set the following options:
• To set the length of time each slide is shown, tap Play Each Slide For and choose a time.
• To set transition effects when moving from photo to photo, tap Transition and choose a
transition type.
• To set whether slideshows repeat, turn Repeat on or off.
• To set whether photos and videos are shown in random order, turn Shuffle on or off.
Chapter 9 Photos 99Play music during a slideshow: In iPod, play a song, then choose Photos from the
Home screen and start a slideshow.
Sharing Photos and Videos
You can send photos and videos in email and MMS messages, add photos and videos
to MobileMe galleries, and publish videos to YouTube. You can also copy and paste
photos and videos, save photos and videos from email messages to Photos, and save
images from webpages to Photos.
Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later and if supported by your carrier.
MMS video attachments are supported only on iPhone 3GS.
Sending a Photo or Video in an Email or MMS Message
Send a photo or video: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap Email Photo/
Video or MMS.
If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls.
The limit to the size of attachments is determined by your carrier. If necessary, iPhone
may compress the photo or video. To learn about taking photos and videos, see
Chapter 10,“Camera,” on page 103.
Copying and Pasting Photos and Videos
You can copy a photo or video from Photos and paste it to an email or MMS message.
Some third-party applications may also support copying and pasting photos and
videos.
Copy a photo or video: Hold your finger on the screen until the Copy button appears,
then tap Copy.
Paste a photo or video: Tap to place an insertion point where you want to place the
photo or video, then tap the insertion point and tap Paste.
Adding a Photo or Video to a MobileMe Gallery
If you have a MobileMe account, you can add photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only)
directly from iPhone to a gallery you’ve created. You can also add photos and videos to
someone else’s MobileMe gallery if that person has enabled email contributions.
Before you can add photos or videos to a gallery in your MobileMe account, you must:
• Set up your MobileMe account on iPhone
• Publish a MobileMe gallery, and allow adding photos via email or iPhone
For more information about creating a gallery and adding photos and videos to it,
see MobileMe Help.
100 Chapter 9 PhotosAdd a photo or video to your gallery: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap
“Send to MobileMe.” Enter a title and description, if you like, then select the album to
add the photo or video to and tap Publish.
If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls.
iPhone tells you when the photo or video has been published, and gives you options
to view it on MobileMe or email a link to a friend.
Adding a photo or video to someone else’s gallery: Choose a photo or video and tap
, then tap “Email Photo/Video.” Enter the album’s email address, then click Send.
Publishing Videos to YouTube
If you have a YouTube account, you can publish videos directly from iPhone to
YouTube (iPhone 3GS only). You can’t publish videos longer than than ten minutes.
Publish a video to You Tube:
1 While viewing a video, tap , then tap “Send to YouTube.”
2 Sign in to your YouTube account.
3 Enter publishing information such as Title, Description, and Tags.
4 Tap Category to choose a category.
5 Tap Publish.
Saving Photos and Videos from Email Messages, MMS Messages,
and Webpages
Save a photo in an email message to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo,
then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download
notice first.
Save a video in an email message to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the
attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the
download notice first.
Save a photo on a webpage to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the photo,
then tap Save Image.
Save a photo or video in an MMS message to your Camera Roll album: Tap the
image in the conversation, tap , and tap Save Image or Save Video.
If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls.
You can download the photos and videos in your Camera Roll album to your
computer’s photo application by connecting iPhone to your computer.
Chapter 9 Photos 101Assigning a Photo to a Contact
You can assign a photo to a contact. When that person calls, iPhone displays the photo.
Assign a photo to a contact:
1 Choose Camera from the Home screen and take someone’s picture. Or choose any
photo already on iPhone and tap .
2 Tap “Assign to Contact” and choose a contact.
3 Position and size the photo until it looks the way you want.
Drag the photo to pan, and pinch to zoom in or out.
4 Tap Set Photo.
You can also assign a photo to a contact in Contacts by tapping Edit and then tapping
the picture icon.
Wallpaper
You see a wallpaper background picture as you unlock iPhone or when you’re on a call
with someone you don’t have a high-resolution photo for.
Set a photo as wallpaper:
1 Choose any photo and tap , then tap Use As Wallpaper.
2 Drag the photo to pan, or pinch the photo to zoom in or out, until it looks the way
you want.
3 Tap Set Wallpaper.
You can also choose from several wallpaper pictures included with iPhone by choosing
Settings > Wallpaper > Wallpaper from the Home screen.
102 Chapter 9 PhotosCamera
10
About Camera
With the built-in camera, it’s easy to take photos and record videos with iPhone.
The lens is on the back of iPhone, so you can use the screen to see the photo or video
you’re taking. “Tap to focus” (iPhone 3GS only) lets you focus on a specific area of your
shot and automatically adjust the exposure. You can quickly review—and keep or
delete—photos and videos you’ve taken.
Note: Video features are available only on iPhone 3GS.
Camera photos are tagged with location data, including your current geographical
coordinates provided by the built-in compass (iPhone 3GS only), if Location Services
is turned on. You can use location data with some applications and photo-sharing
websites to track and post where you took your pictures. If Location Services is turned
off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. If you don’t want to include location data with
your photos and videos, you can still use Camera without having Location Services
turned on. See “Location Services” on page 144.
103Taking Photos and Recording Videos
Taking photos and recording videos with iPhone is as easy as point and tap.
Photo/Video switch
Focus area
Thumbnail of
last shot
Click to
take photo
Take a photo: Aim iPhone and tap .
Make sure the Camera/Video switch is set to .
When you take a photo or start a video recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound.
The sound isn’t played if you’ve set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. See “Sounds and
the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141.
Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Camera are played even if the Ring/Silent
switch is set to silent.
Record a video: Slide the Camera/Video switch to . Tap to start recording.
The record button blinks while Camera is recording. Tap again to stop recording.
You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button
on your Bluetooth headset) to start and stop recording.
If you take a picture or record a video with iPhone rotated sideways, the picture is
saved in landscape orientation.
A rectangle on the screen shows the area where Camera is focusing the shot.
Change the focus area and set exposure: Tap where you want to focus. Camera
automatically adjusts the exposure for the selected area of the image.
Review a photo or video you’ve just taken: Tap the thumbnail of your last shot, in the
lower-left corner of the screen.
Delete a photo or video: Tap . If you don’t see , tap the screen to display the
controls.
104 Chapter 10 CameraTake a screenshot of the iPhone display: Quickly press and release the Sleep/
Wake and Home buttons at the same time. A flash of the screen lets you know the
screenshot was taken. The screenshot is added to the Camera Roll album.
Viewing and Sharing Photos and Videos
The photos and videos you take with Camera are saved in the Camera Roll album on
iPhone. You can view the Camera Roll album from either Camera or Photos.
View photos and videos in the Camera Roll album: In Camera, tap the thumbnail
image in the lower-left corner of the screen. In Photos, tap the Camera Roll album.
Tap the left or right button, or flick left or right to flip through the photos and videos.
When viewing a photo or video in the Camera Roll album, tap the screen to display
the controls.
For more information about viewing and sharing photos and videos, see:
• “Viewing Photos and Videos” on page 98
• “Sharing Photos and Videos” on page 100
Trimming Videos
You can trim the frames from the beginning and end of videos that you record.
You can trim the original video or save the trim as a new clip.
Chapter 10 Camera 105Trim a video:
1 While viewing a video, tap the screen to display the controls.
2 Drag either end of the frame viewer at the top of the video, then tap Trim.
3 Tap Trim Original or tap Save as New Clip.
Important: Trimming the original video permanently deletes the frames you edit from
the video.
New clips are saved in the Camera Roll album along with the original video.
Uploading Photos and Videos to Your Computer
You can upload the photos and videos you take with Camera to photo applications on
your computer, such as iPhoto on a Mac.
Upload images to your computer: Connect iPhone to your computer.
• Mac: Select the photos you want and click the Import or Download button in
iPhoto or other supported photo application on your computer.
• PC: Follow the instructions that came with your camera or photo application.
If you delete the photos and videos from iPhone when you upload them to your
computer, they’re removed from the Camera Roll album. You can use the iTunes
Photos setup pane to sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 or later required)
back to the Photos application on iPhone. See “iPhone Settings Panes in iTunes” on
page 13.
106 Chapter 10 CameraYouTube
11
Finding and Viewing Videos
YouTube features short videos submitted by people from around the world. To use
some features on iPhone, you need to sign in to a YouTube account when prompted.
For information about requirements and how to get a YouTube account, go to
www.youtube.com.
Note: YouTube isn’t available in all languages and locations.
Browse videos: Tap Featured, Most Viewed, or Favorites. Or tap More to browse by
Most Recent, Top Rated, History, Subscriptions, or Playlists.
• Featured: Videos reviewed and featured by YouTube staff.
• Most Viewed: Videos most seen by YouTube viewers. Tap All for all-time most viewed
videos, or Today or This Week for most-viewed videos of the day or week.
• Favorites: Videos you’ve added to Favorites. When you sign in to a YouTube account,
account favorites appear and any existing favorites can be synced to your account.
• Most Recent: Videos most recently submitted to YouTube.
• Top Rated: Videos most highly rated by YouTube viewers. To rate videos, go to
www.youtube.com.
• History: Videos you’ve viewed most recently.
• Subscriptions: Videos from YouTube accounts to which you’ve subscribed. You must
be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature.
• Playlists: Videos you’ve added to playlists. You must be signed in to a YouTube
account to use this feature.
Search for a video:
1 Tap Search, then tap the YouTube search field.
2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Search.
107YouTube shows results based on video titles, descriptions, tags, and user names. Listed
videos show title, rating, number of views, length, and the account name that posted
the video.
Play a video: Tap the video.
The video begins to download to iPhone and a progress bar appears. When enough of
the video has downloaded, it begins to play. You can also tap to start the video.
Controlling Video Playback
When a video starts playing, the controls disappear so they don’t obscure the video.
Show or hide the video controls: Tap the screen.
Next/
Fast-forward
Play/Pause
Email
Scale
Download progress
Volume
Playhead Scrubber bar
Bookmark Previous/rewind
Play or pause a video Tap or . You can also press the center button
on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button
on your Bluetooth headset).
Adjust the volume Drag the volume slider, or use the volume
buttons on the side of iPhone. You can also use
the volume buttons on the iPhone headset
(iPhone 3GS only).
Start a video over Tap .
Skip to the next or previous video in a list Tap twice to skip to the previous video.
Tap to skip to the next video.
Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or .
Skip to any point in a video Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar.
Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done, or press the Home button.
Toggle between scaling a video to fill the screen
or fit to the screen
Double-tap the video. You can also tap to
make the video fill the screen, or tap to make
it fit the screen.
Add a video to Favorites using video controls Start playing a video and tap .
Email a link to the video using video controls Start playing a video and tap .
108 Chapter 11 YouTubeManaging Videos
Tap next to a video to see related videos and more controls for managing videos.
Add the video to Favorites Tap “Add to Favorites.”
Add the video to a playlist Tap “Add to Playlist,” then select an existing
playlist or tap to create a new playlist.
Email a link to the video Tap Share Video.
Browse and view related videos Tap a video in the list of related videos to view,
or tap next to a video for more information.
Getting More Information
Tap next to the video to show the video’s comments, description, date added,
and other information.
Chapter 11 YouTube 109Rate the video or add a comment On the More Info screen, tap “Rate, Comment, or
Flag,” then choose “Rate or Comment.” You must
be signed in to a YouTube account to use this
feature.
See more videos from this account On the More Info screen, tap More Videos.
Subscribe to this YouTube account On the More Info screen, tap More Videos, then
tap “Subscribe to ” at the bottom of
the video list. You must be signed in to a YouTube
account to use this feature.
Using YouTube Account Features
If you have a YouTube account, you can access account features such as subscriptions,
comments and ratings, and playlists. To create a YouTube account, go to
www.youtube.com.
Show favorites you’ve added to your account: In Favorites, tap Sign In, then enter
your username and password to see your account favorites. Any existing favorites
you’ve added to iPhone can be merged with your account favorites when you sign in.
Delete a favorite: In Favorites, tap Edit, tap next to a video, then tap Delete.
Show subscriptions you’ve added to your account: In Subscriptions, tap Sign In, then
enter your username and password to see your account subscriptions. Tap an account
in the list to see all videos for that account.
Unsubscribe from a YouTube account: In Subscriptions, tap an account in the list,
then tap Unsubscribe.
View playlists: In Playlists, tap a playlist to see the list of videos you’ve added. Tap any
video in the playlist to begin playing videos from that point in the playlist.
Edit a playlist: In Playlists, tap Edit, then do one of the following:
• To delete the entire playlist, tap next to a playlist, then tap Delete.
• To create a new playlist, tap , then enter a name for the playlist.
Add a video to a playlist: Tap next to a video, then tap “Add to Playlist” and choose
a playlist.
Delete a video from a playlist:
1 In Playlists, tap a playlist, then tap Edit.
2 Tap next to a playlist, then tap Delete.
110 Chapter 11 YouTubeChanging the Browse Buttons
You can replace the Featured, Most Viewed, Bookmarks, and Search buttons at the
bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you watch
top rated videos often but don’t watch many featured videos, you could replace the
Featured button with Top Rated.
Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the
bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them.
When you finish, tap Done.
When you’re browsing for videos, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t
visible.
Sending Videos to YouTube
If you have a YouTube account, you can send videos directly from iPhone 3GS to
YouTube. See “Publishing Videos to YouTube” on page 101.
Chapter 11 YouTube 111Stocks
12
Viewing Stock Quotes
Stocks lets you see the latest available quotes for your selected stocks, funds, and
indexes.
Quotes are updated every time you open Stocks when connected to the Internet.
Quotes may be delayed by up to 20 minutes or more depending upon the reporting
service.
Add a stock, fund, or index to the stock reader:
1 Tap , then tap .
2 Enter a symbol, company name, fund name, or index, then tap Search.
3 Select an item from the search results and tap Done.
View charts in landscape orientation: Rotate iPhone sideways. Flick left or right to
view the other charts in your stock reader.
Show the progress of a stock, fund, or index over time: Tap the stock, fund, or index
in your list, then tap 1d, 1w, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1y, or 2y. The chart adjusts to show progress
over one day, one week, one month, three months, six months, one year, or two years.
When you’re viewing a chart in landscape orientation, you can touch the chart to
display the value for a specific point in time.
112Use two fingers to see the change in value over a specific period of time.
Delete a stock: Tap and tap next to a stock, then tap Delete.
Change the order of the list: Tap . Then drag next to a stock or index to a new
place in the list.
Switch the display to percentage change, price change, or market capitalization:
Tap any of the values along the right side of the screen. Tap again to switch to another
view. Or tap and tap %, Price, or Mkt Cap, then tap Done.
Getting More Information
See the summary, chart, or news page about a stock, fund, or index: Select the stock,
fund, or index in your list, then flick the pages underneath the stock reader to view the
summary, chart, or recent news page.
On the news page, you can scroll up and down to read headlines, or tap a headline to
view the article in Safari.
See more information at Yahoo.com: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list,
then tap .
Chapter 12 Stocks 113Maps
13
Finding and Viewing Locations
WARNING: For important information about driving and navigating safely, see the
Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Maps provides street maps, satellite photos, a hybrid view, and street views of locations
in many of the world’s countries. You can get detailed driving, public transit, or walking
directions and traffic information. Find and track your current (approximate) location,
and use your current location to get driving directions to or from another place. The
built-in digital compass lets you see which way you’re facing. (iPhone 3GS only).
Important: Maps, digital compass (iPhone 3GS only), directions, and location-based
applications provided by Apple depend on data collected and services provided by
third parties. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in
all geographic areas, resulting in maps, compass headings, directions, or locationbased information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the
information provided on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to
resolve any discrepancies. In order to provide your location, data is collected in a form
that doesn’t personally identify you. If you don’t want such data collected, don’t use
the feature. Not using this feature won’t impact the non–location-based functionality
of your iPhone.
Find a location and see a map:
1 Tap the search field to bring up the keyboard.
2 Type an address, intersection, area, landmark, bookmark, contact, or zip code.
3 Tap Search.
114A pin marks the location. Tap the pin to see the name or description of the location.
Tap to get
information about
the location, get
directions, add the
location to your
bookmarks or
contacts list, or
email a link to
Google Maps.
Locations can include places of interest added by Google My Maps users (“Usercreated content”), and sponsored links that appear as special icons (for example, ).
Zoom in to a part of a map Pinch the map with two fingers. Or double-tap
the part you want to zoom in on. Double-tap
again to zoom in even closer.
Zoom out Pinch the map. Or tap the map with two fingers.
Tap with two fingers again to zoom out further.
Pan or scroll to another part of the map Drag up, down, left, or right.
Find your current location and turn tracking mode on: Tap .
Chapter 13 Maps 115Your current (approximate) location is indicated by a blue marker. If your location can’t
be determined precisely, a blue circle also appears around the marker. The size of the
circle depends on how precisely your location can be determined—the smaller the
circle, the greater the precision.
As you move around, iPhone updates your location, adjusting the map so that the
location indicator remains in the center of the screen. If you tap again or drag the
map, iPhone continues to update your location but stops centering it, so the location
information may move off the screen.
iPhone uses Location Services to determine your location. Location Services uses
available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi
turned on), and GPS ( iPhone 3G or later; GPS not available in all locations). This feature
isn’t available in all areas.
If Location Services is turned off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. You can’t find and
track your current location if Location Services is turned off. See “Location Services” on
page 144.
To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it. In Settings,
choose General > Location Services.
Get information about your current location: Tap the blue marker, then tap .
iPhone displays the address of your current location, if available. You can use this
information to:
• Get directions
• Add the location to contacts
• Send the address via email or MMS (iPhone 3G or later)
• Bookmark the location
116 Chapter 13 MapsShow which way you’re facing (iPhone 3GS only): Tap again. (The icon changes to
.) Maps uses the built-in compass to determine which way you’re facing. The angle
shows the accuracy of the compass reading—the smaller the angle, the greater the
accuracy.
Maps uses true north to determine your heading, even if you have magnetic north
set in Compass. If the compass needs calibrating, iPhone asks you to wave the phone
in a figure eight. If there’s interference, you may be asked to move from the source of
interference. See Chapter 22,“Compass,” on page 173.
Use the dropped pin: Tap , then tap Drop Pin.
A pin drops down on the map, which you can then drag to any location you choose.
Replace the pin: Tap , then tap Replace Pin. iPhone drops the pin in the area you’re
currently viewing.
Chapter 13 Maps 117See a satellite or hybrid view: Tap , then tap Satellite or Hybrid to see just a satellite
view or a combined street map and satellite view.
To return to map view, tap Map.
See the Google Street View of a location: Tap . Flick left or right to pan through
the 360° panoramic view. (The inset shows your current view.) Tap an arrow to move
down the street.
Tap to return to map view
To return to map view, tap the map inset in the lower-right corner. Street View isn’t
available in all areas.
118 Chapter 13 MapsSee the location of someone’s address in your
contacts list
Tap in the search field, then tap Contacts
and choose a contact.
To locate an address in this way, the contact
must include at least one address. If the contact
has more than one address, choose the one you
want to locate. You can also find the location of
an address by tapping the address directly in
Contacts.
Add a location to your contacts list Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap
next to the name or description, tap “Add to
Contacts,” then tap “Create New Contact” or “Add
to Existing Contact.”
Email a link to a Google Maps location Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap
next to the name or description, then tap
Share Location and tap Email.
Send a link via MMS to a Google Maps location Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap
next to the name or description, then tap
Share Location and tap MMS (iPhone 3G or later).
Bookmarking Locations
You can bookmark locations that you want to find again later.
Bookmark a location: Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the
name or description, then tap “Add to Bookmarks” at the bottom of the Info screen.
See a bookmarked location or recently viewed location: Tap in the search field,
then tap Bookmarks or Recents.
Getting Directions
You can get step-by-step directions for driving, taking public transit, or walking to a
destination.
Get directions:
1 Tap Directions.
2 Enter starting and ending locations in the Start and End fields. By default, iPhone starts
with your current approximate location (if available). Tap in either field to choose a
location in Bookmarks (including your current approximate location and the dropped
pin, if available), Recents, or Contacts.
For example, if a friend’s address is in your contacts list, you can tap Contacts and tap
your friend’s name instead of having to type the address.
To reverse the directions, tap .
Chapter 13 Maps 1193 Tap Route (if you entered locations manually), then select driving ( ), public transit ( ),
or walking ( ) directions.
The travel options available depend on the route.
4 Do one of the following:
• To view directions one step at a time, tap Start, then tap to see the next leg of the
trip. Tap to go back.
• To view all the directions in a list, tap , then tap List. Tap any item in the list to see
a map showing that leg of the trip. Tap Route Overview to return to the overview
screen.
If you’re driving or walking, the approximate distance and travel time appear at the top
of the screen. If traffic data is available, the driving time is adjusted accordingly.
If you’re taking public transit, the overview screen shows each leg of the trip and the
mode of transportation, including where you need to walk. The top of the screen
shows the time of the bus or train at the first stop, the estimated arrival time, and the
total fare. Tap to set your departure or arrival time, and to choose a schedule for
the trip. Tap the icon at a stop to see the departure time for that bus or train, and to
get a link to the transit provider’s website or contact info. When you tap Start and step
through the route, detailed information about each leg of the trip appears at the top
of the screen.
You can also get directions by finding a location on the map, tapping the pin that
points to it, tapping , then tapping Directions To Here or Directions From Here.
Switch start and end points, for reverse directions: Tap .
If you don’t see , tap List, then tap Edit.
See recently viewed directions: Tap in the search field, then tap Recents.
120 Chapter 13 MapsShowing Traffic Conditions
When available, you can show highway traffic conditions on the map.
Show or hide traffic conditions: Tap , then tap Show Traffic or Hide Traffic.
Highways are color-coded according to the flow of traffic:
Green = more than
50 miles per hour
Yellow = 25–50
miles per hour
Gray = no data
currently available
Red = less than 25
miles per hour
If you don’t see color-coded highways, you may need to zoom out to a level where you
can see major roads, or traffic conditions may not be available for that area.
Finding and Contacting Businesses
Find businesses in an area:
1 Find a location—for example, a city and state or country, or a street address—or scroll
to a location on a map.
2 Type the kind of business in the text field and tap Search.
Pins appear for matching locations. For example, if you locate your city and then type
“movies” and tap Search, pins mark movie theatres in your city.
Tap the pin that marks a business to see its name or description.
Find businesses without finding the location first: Type things like:
• restaurants san francisco ca
• apple inc new york
Contact a business or get directions: Tap the pin that marks a business, then tap
next to the name.
From there, you can do the following:
• Tap a phone number to call, an email address to send email to, or a web address to
visit.
• For directions, tap Directions To Here or Directions From Here.
Chapter 13 Maps 121• To add the business to your contacts list, scroll down and tap “Create New Contact”
or “Add to Existing Contact.”
• Share the location of the business by email or text message
See a list of the businesses found in the search: From the Map screen, tap List.
Tap a business to see its location. Or tap next to a business to see its information.
Get
directions
Visit
website
Tap to show
contact info
Call
122 Chapter 13 MapsWeather
14
Viewing Weather Summaries
Tap Weather from the Home screen to get the current temperature and six-day
forecast for one or more cities around the world.
Six-day forecast
Current temperature
Current conditions
Add and delete cities
Number of cities stored
Today’s high and low
If the weather board is light blue, it’s daytime in that city—between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00
p.m. If the board is dark purple, it’s nighttime—between 6:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.
Add a city:
1 Tap , then tap .
2 Enter a city name or zip code, then tap Search.
3 Choose a city in the search list.
Switch to another city: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots.
The number of dots below the weather board shows how many cities are stored.
Reorder cities: Tap , then drag next to a city to a new place in the list.
123Delete a city: Tap and tap next to a city, then tap Delete.
Display temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius: Tap , then tap °F or °C.
Getting More Weather Information
You can see a more detailed weather report, news and websites related to the city,
and more.
See information about a city at Yahoo.com: Tap .
124 Chapter 14 WeatherVoice Memos
15
Recording Voice Memos
Voice Memos lets you use iPhone as a portable recording device using the built-in
microphone, iPhone or Bluetooth headset mic, or supported external microphone.
Note: External microphones must be designed to work with the iPhone headset
jack or Dock Connector, such as Apple-branded earbuds or authorized third-party
accessories marked with the Apple “Works with iPhone” logo.
You can adjust the recording level by moving the microphone closer to or further
away from what you’re recording. For better recording quality, the loudest level on the
level meter should be between –3dB and 0 dB.
Record button
Audio level meter
Go to voice memos
125Record a voice memo:
1 Tap to start recording. You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset
(or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset).
2 Tap to pause or to stop recording. You can also press the center button on the
iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset).
Recordings using the built-in microphone are mono, but you can record stereo using
an external stereo microphone.
When you start a voice recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound. The sound isn’t
played if you’ve set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent
Switch” on page 141.
Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Voice Memos are played even if the Ring/
Silent switch is set to silent.
To use other applications while recording your voice memo, you can lock iPhone or
press the Home button.
Play back a voice memo you just recorded: Tap .
Listening to Voice Memos
Scrubber bar
Playhead
Play a voice memo you’ve previously recorded:
1 Tap .
Memos are listed in chronological order, with the most recent memo first.
2 Tap a memo, then tap .
Tap to pause, then tap again to resume playback.
Skip to any point in a memo: Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar.
126 Chapter 15 Voice MemosListen through the built-in speaker: Tap Speaker.
Managing Voice Memos
Delete a voice memo: Tap a memo in the list, then tap Delete.
See more information: Tap next to the memo. The Info screen displays information
about the length, recording time and date, and provides additional editing and
sharing functions.
Add a label to a memo: On the Info screen tap , then select a label in the list on the
Label screen. To create a custom label, choose Custom at the bottom of the list, then
type a name for the label.
Chapter 15 Voice Memos 127Trimming Voice Memos
You can trim the beginning or ending of a voice memo to eliminate unwanted pauses
or noise.
Trim a voice memo:
1 On the Voice Memos screen, tap next to the memo you want to trim.
2 Tap Trim Memo.
3 Using the time markers as a guide, drag the edges of the audio region to adjust the
beginning and end of the voice memo. To preview your edit, tap .
4 Tap Trim Voice Memo.
Important: Edits you make to voice memos can’t be undone.
Sharing Voice Memos
You can share your voice memos as attachments in email or MMS messages
(iPhone 3G or later).
Share a voice memo:
1 On the Voice Memos screen or Info screen, tap Share.
2 Choose Email Voice Memo to open a new message in Mail with the memo attached,
or choose MMS to open a new message in Messages.
A message appears if the file you’re trying to send is too large.
128 Chapter 15 Voice MemosSyncing Voice Memos
iTunes automatically syncs voice memos to your iTunes library when you connect
iPhone to your computer. This lets you listen to voice memos on your computer and
provides a backup if you delete them from iPhone.
Voice memos are synced to the Voice Memos playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it
doesn’t exist. When you sync voice memos to iTunes, they remain in the Voice Memos
application until you delete them. If you delete a voice memo on iPhone, it isn’t
deleted from the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. However, if you delete a voice memo
from iTunes, it is deleted from iPhone the next time you sync with iTunes.
You can sync the iTunes Voice Memos playlist to the iPod application on iPhone using
the Music pane in iTunes.
Sync the Voice Memos playlist to iPhone:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 Select the Music tab.
4 Select the “Include voice memos” checkbox and click Apply.
Chapter 15 Voice Memos 129Notes
16
Writing and Reading Notes
Notes are listed in the order of the last modified date, with the most recently modified
note at the top. You can see the first few words of each note in the list. Rotate iPhone
to view notes in landscape orientation and type using a larger keyboard.
Add a note: Tap , then type your note and tap Done.
Read a note: Tap the note. Tap or to see the next or previous note.
Edit a note: Tap anywhere on the note to bring up the keyboard.
Delete a note: Tap the note, then tap .
130Searching Notes
You can search the text of notes.
Search for notes:
1 Drag the note list down or tap the status bar to expose the search window.
2 Enter text in the search field.
Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard
and see more of the results.
Emailing Notes
Email a note: Tap the note, then tap .
To email a note, iPhone must be set up for email. See “Setting Up Email Accounts” on
page 59.
Syncing Notes
You can set up iTunes to automatically sync your notes with email applications such as
Mac OS X Mail (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later) or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or
2007 on a PC. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 12.
Chapter 16 Notes 131Clock
17
World Clocks
You can add clocks to show the time in other major cities and time zones around the
world.
View clocks: Tap World Clock.
If the clock face is white, it’s daytime in that city. If the clock face is black, it’s nighttime.
If you have more than four clocks, flick to scroll through them.
Add a clock:
1 Tap World Clock.
2 Tap , then type the name of a city.
Cities matching what you’ve typed appear below.
3 Tap a city to add a clock for that city.
If you don’t see the city you’re looking for, try a major city in the same time zone.
Delete a clock: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then tap next to a clock and tap
Delete.
Rearrange clocks: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then drag next to a clock to a new
place in the list.
132Alarms
You can set multiple alarms. Set each alarm to repeat on days you specify, or to sound
only once.
Set an alarm:
1 Tap Alarm and tap .
2 Adjust any of the following settings:
• To set the alarm to repeat on certain days, tap Repeat and choose the days.
• To choose the ringtone that sounds when the alarm goes off, tap Sound.
• To set whether the alarm gives you the option to hit snooze, turn Snooze on or off.
If Snooze is on and you tap Snooze when the alarm sounds, the alarm stops and
then sounds again in ten minutes.
• To give the alarm a description, tap Label. iPhone displays the label when the alarm
sounds.
If at least one alarm is set and turned on, appears in the iPhone status bar at the top
of the screen.
Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling,
iPhone alerts may not sound at the correct local time. See “Date and Time” on page 147.
Turn an alarm on or off: Tap Alarm and turn any alarm on or off. If an alarm is turned
off, it won’t sound again unless you turn it back on.
If an alarm is set to sound only once, it turns off automatically after it sounds. You can
turn it on again to reenable it.
Change settings for an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap next to the alarm
you want to change.
Delete an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap next to the alarm and tap
Delete.
Stopwatch
Use the stopwatch to time an event:
1 Tap Stopwatch.
2 Tap Start to start the stopwatch.
• To record lap times, tap Lap after each lap.
• To pause the stopwatch, tap Stop. Tap Start to resume.
• To reset the stopwatch, tap Reset when the stopwatch is pause.
If you start the stopwatch and go to another iPhone application, the stopwatch
continues running in the background.
Chapter 17 Clock 133Timer
Set the timer: Tap Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap Start
to start the timer.
Choose the sound: Tap When Timer Ends.
Set a sleep timer: Set the timer, then tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod.
When you set a sleep timer, iPhone stops playing music or video when the timer ends.
If you start the timer and then switch to another iPhone application, the timer
continues running.
134 Chapter 17 ClockCalculator
18
Using the Calculator
Tap numbers and functions in Calculator just as you would with a standard calculator.
When you tap the add, subtract, multiply, or divide button, a white ring appears
around the button to let you know the operation to be carried out. Rotate iPhone to
get an expanded scientific calculator.
Standard Memory Functions
• C: Tap to clear the displayed number.
• MC: Tap to clear the memory.
• M+: Tap to add the displayed number to the number in memory. If no number is in
memory, tap to store the displayed number in memory.
• M-: Tap to subtract the displayed number from the number in memory.
• MR: Tap to replace the displayed number with the number in memory. If the button
has a white ring around it, there is a number stored in memory.
The stored number remains in memory when you switch between the standard and
scientific calculators.
135Scientific Calculator Keys
Rotate iPhone to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator.
2nd Changes the trigonometric buttons (sin, cos, tan, sinh, cosh, and tanh) to their inverse
functions (sin
-1
, cos
-1
, tan
-1
, sinh
-1
, cosh
-1
, and tanh
-1
). It also changes ln to log2, and e
x
to
2
x
. Tap 2nd again to return the buttons to their original functions.
( Opens a parenthetical expression. Expressions can be nested.
) Closes a parenthetical expression.
% Calculates percentages, adds markups, and subtracts discounts. To calculate a
percentage, use it with the multiplication (x) key. For example, to calculate 8% of 500,
enter
500 x 8 % =
which returns 40.
To add a markup or subtract a discount, use it with the plus (+) or minus (–) key.
For example, to compute the total cost of a $500 item with an 8% sales tax, enter
500 + 8 % =
which returns 540.
1/x Returns the reciprocal of a value in decimal format.
x
2
Squares a value.
x
3
Cubes a value.
y
x
Tap between values to raise the first value to the power of the second value.
For example, to compute 3
4
, enter
3 y
x
4 =
which returns 81.
x! Calculates the factorial of a value.
v Calculates the square root of a value.
x
vy Use between values to calculate the x root of y. For example to compute
4
v81, enter
81
x
vy 4 =
which returns 3.
136 Chapter 18 Calculatorlog Returns the log base 10 of a value.
sin Calculates the sine of a value.
sin
-1
Calculates the arc sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
cos Calculates the cosine of a value.
cos
-1
Calculates the arc cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
tan Calculates the tangent of a value.
tan
-1
Calculates the arc tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
ln Calculates the natural log of a value.
log2 Calculates the log base 2. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
sinh Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a value.
sinh
-1
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is
tapped.)
cosh Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a value.
cosh
-1
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is
tapped.)
tanh Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a value.
tanh
-1
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is
tapped.)
e
x
Tap after entering a value to raise the constant “e” (2.718281828459045...) to the power
of that value.
2
x
Calculates 2 to the power of the displayed value. For example, 10 2
x
= 1024. (Available
when the 2nd button is tapped.)
Rad Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in radians.
Deg Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in degrees.
p Enters the value of p (3.141592653589793...).
EE An operator that multiplies the currently displayed value by 10 to the power of the next
value you enter.
Rand Returns a random number between 0 and 1.
Chapter 18 Calculator 137Settings
19
Settings allows you to customize iPhone applications, set the date and time, configure
your network connection, and enter other preferences for iPhone.
Airplane Mode
Airplane mode disables the wireless features of iPhone to avoid interfering with
aircraft operation and other electrical equipment.
Turn on airplane mode: Tap Settings and turn airplane mode on.
When airplane mode is on, appears in the status bar at the top of the screen.
No phone, radio, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth signals are emitted from iPhone and GPS
reception is turned off, disabling many of iPhone’s features. You won’t be able to:
• Make or receive phone calls
• Get visual voicemail
• Send or receive email
• Browse the Internet
• Sync your contacts, calendars, or bookmarks (MobileMe only) with MobileMe or
Microsoft Exchange
• Send or receive text messages
• Stream YouTube videos
• Get stock quotes
• Get map locations
• Get weather reports
• Use the iTunes Store or the App Store
If allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can
continue to use iPhone to:
• Listen to music and watch video
138• Listen to visual voicemail previously received
• Check your calendar
• Take or view pictures
• Hear alarms
• Use the stopwatch or timer
• Use the calculator
• Take notes
• Record voice memos
• Use Compass
• Read text messages and email messages stored on iPhone
Where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can
turn Wi-Fi back on, enabling you to:
• Send and receive email
• Browse the Internet
• Sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) with MobileMe and
Microsoft Exchange
• Stream YouTube videos
• Get stock quotes
• Get map locations
• Get weather reports
• Use the iTunes Store or the App Store
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi settings determine whether iPhone uses local Wi-Fi networks to connect to the
Internet. If no Wi-Fi networks are available, or you’ve turned Wi-Fi off, then iPhone
connects to the Internet via your cellular data network, when available. You can use
Mail, Safari, YouTube, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the iTunes Store, and the App Store over a
cellular data network connection.
Turn Wi-Fi on or off: Choose Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on or off.
Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPhone detects networks in
range, then select a network. If necessary, enter a password and tap Join. (Networks
that require a password appear with a lock icon.)
Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPhone automatically joins it whenever
the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPhone
joins the one last used.
Chapter 19 Settings 139When iPhone is joined to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top
of the screen shows signal strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the signal.
Set iPhone to ask if you want to join a new network: Choose Wi-Fi and turn “Ask to
Join Networks” on or off.
When you’re trying to access the Internet, by using Safari or Mail for example, and you
aren’t in range of a Wi-Fi network you‘ve previously used, this option tells iPhone to
look for another network. iPhone displays a list of all available Wi-Fi networks that you
can choose from. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) If “Ask
to Join Networks” is turned off, you must manually join a network to connect to the
Internet when a previously used network or a cellular data network isn’t available.
Forget a network, so iPhone doesn’t join it automatically: Choose Wi-Fi and tap
next to a network you’ve joined before. Then tap “Forget this Network.”
Join a closed Wi-Fi network: To join a Wi-Fi network that isn’t shown in the list of
scanned networks, choose Wi-Fi > Other, then enter the network name. If the network
requires a password, tap Security, tap the type of security the network uses, and enter
the password.
You must already know the network name, password, and security type to connect to
a closed network.
Some Wi-Fi networks may require you to enter or adjust additional settings, such as a
client ID or static IP address. Ask the network administrator which settings to use.
Adjust settings to connect to a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, then tap next to a
network.
VPN
This setting appears when you have VPN configured on iPhone, allowing you to turn
VPN on or off. See “Network” on page 143.
Notifications
This setting appears when you’ve installed an application from the App Store that uses
the Apple Push Notification service.
Push notifications are used by applications to alert you of new information, even when
the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but
may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on
the Home screen.
You can turn notifications off if you don’t want to be notified or want to conserve
battery life.
Turn all notifications on or off: Tap Notifications and turn notifications on or off.
140 Chapter 19 SettingsTurn sounds, alerts, or badges on or off for an application: Tap Notifications, then
choose an application from the list and choose the types of notification you want to
turn on or off.
Carrier
This setting appears when you’re outside of your carrier’s network and other local
carrier data networks are available to use for your phone calls, visual voicemail, and
cellular network Internet connections. You can make calls only on carriers that have
roaming agreements with your carrier. Additional fees may apply. Roaming charges
may be billed to you by the carrier of the selected network, through your carrier.
For information about out-of-network coverage and how to enable roaming, contact
your carrier or go to your carrier’s website.
Select a carrier: Choose Carrier and select the network you want to use.
Once you select a network, iPhone uses only that network. If the network is
unavailable, “No service” appears on the iPhone screen and you can’t make or receive
calls or visual voicemail, or connect to the Internet via cellular data network. Set
Network Settings to Automatic to have iPhone select a network for you.
Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch
Switch between ring and silent mode: Flip the Ring/Silent switch on the side of
iPhone.
When set to silent, iPhone doesn’t play any ring, alert, or effects sounds. It does,
however, play alarms set using Clock.
Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Camera and Voice Memos are played even
if the Ring/Silent switch is set to silent.
Set whether iPhone vibrates when you get a call: Choose Sounds. To set whether
iPhone vibrates in silent mode, turn Vibrate under Silent on or off. To set whether
iPhone vibrates in ring mode, turn Vibrate under Ring on or off.
Adjust the ringer and alerts volume: Choose Sounds and drag the slider. Or, if no
song or video is playing and you aren’t on a call, use the volume buttons on the side of
iPhone.
Set the ringtone: Choose Sounds > Ringtone.
Set alert and effects sounds: Choose Sounds and turn items on or off under Ring .
When the Ring/Silent switch is set to ring, iPhone plays sounds for alerts and effects
that are turned on.
You can set iPhone to play a sound whenever you:
• Get a call
Chapter 19 Settings 141• Get a text message
• Get a voicemail message
• Get an email message
• Send an email message
• Have an appointment that you’ve set up to alert you
• Lock iPhone
• Type using the keyboard
Brightness
Screen brightness affects battery life. Dim the screen to extend the time before you
need to recharge iPhone, or use Auto-Brightness.
Adjust the screen brightness: Choose Brightness and drag the slider.
Set whether iPhone adjusts screen brightness automatically: Choose Brightness
and turn Auto-Brightness on or off. If Auto-Brightness is on, iPhone adjusts the screen
brightness for current light conditions using the built-in ambient light sensor.
Wallpaper
You see a wallpaper background picture when you unlock iPhone. You can select one
of the images that came with iPhone, or use a photo you’ve synced to iPhone from
your computer.
Set wallpaper: Choose Wallpaper and choose a picture.
General
The General settings include date and time, security, network, and other settings that
affect more than one application. This is also where you can find information about
your iPhone, and reset iPhone to its original state.
About
Choose General > About to get information about iPhone, including:
• Name of your phone network
• Number of songs, videos, and photos
• Total storage capacity
• Space available
• Software version
• Serial and model numbers
• Wi-Fi and Bluetooth addresses
142 Chapter 19 Settings• IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) and ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card
Identifier, or Smart Card) numbers
• Modem firmware version of the cellular transmitter
• Legal information
• Regulatory information
Usage
Show battery percentage: Tap Usage and turn Battery Percentage on to display the
percentage of battery charge next to the battery icon in the upper-right corner of
iPhone (iPhone 3GS only).
See your usage statistics: Choose Usage. There, you can see:
• Usage—Amount of time iPhone has been awake and in use since the last full
charge. iPhone is awake whenever you’re using it—including making or receiving
phone calls, using email, sending or receiving text messages, listening to music,
browsing the web, or using any other iPhone features. iPhone is also awake while
performing background tasks such as automatically checking for and retrieving
email messages.
• Standby—Amount of time iPhone has been powered on since its last full charge,
including the time iPhone has been asleep.
• Current period call time and lifetime call time.
• Amount of data sent and received over the cellular data network.
Reset your usage statistics: Tap Usage and tap Reset Statistics to clear the data and
cumulative time statistics. The statistics for the amount of time iPhone has been
unlocked and in standby mode aren’t reset.
Network
Use the Network settings to configure a VPN (virtual private network) connection,
access Wi-Fi settings, or turn Data Roaming on or off.
Enable or disable 3G: Tap to turn 3G on or off.
Using 3G loads Internet data faster in some cases, but may decrease battery
performance. If you’re making a lot of phone calls, you may want to turn 3G off to
extend battery performance.
Turn Data Roaming on or off: Choose General > Network, then turn Data Roaming on
or off.
Data Roaming turns on Internet and visual voicemail access over a cellular data
network when you’re in an area not covered by your carrier’s network. For example,
when you’re traveling, you can turn off Data Roaming to avoid potential roaming
charges. By default, Data Roaming is turned off.
Chapter 19 Settings 143Turn Internet Tethering on or off: Choose General > Network > Internet Tethering,
then turn Internet Tethering on or off.
Internet Tethering lets you share iPhone’s Internet connection with a computer
connected via USB or Bluetooth (not available in all regions). Follow the onscreen
instructions to complete the setup. Additional fees may apply. See “Using iPhone as a
Modem” on page 42.
Add a new VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN > Add VPN
Configuration.
VPNs used within organizations allow you to communicate private information
securely over a non-private network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, to
access your work email on iPhone.
iPhone can connect to VPNs that use the L2TP, PPTP, or Cisco IPSec protocols. VPN
works over both Wi-Fi and cellular data network connections.
Ask your network administrator which settings to use. In most cases, if you’ve set up
VPN on your computer, you can use the same VPN settings for iPhone.
Once you’ve entered VPN settings, a VPN switch appears in the Settings menu that you
can use to turn VPN on or off.
VPN may also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing
Configuration Profiles” on page 18.
Change a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN and tap the
configuration you want to update.
Turn VPN on or off: Tap Settings and turn VPN on or off.
Delete a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN, tap the blue arrow
to the right of the configuration name, and tap Delete VPN at the bottom of the
configuration screen.
Bluetooth
iPhone can connect wirelessly to Bluetooth devices such as headsets, headphones, and
car kits for music listening and hands-free talking. See “Bluetooth Devices” on page 55.
Turn Bluetooth on or off: Choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on or off.
Location Services
Location Services allows applications such as Maps Camera, and Compass to gather
and use data indicating your location. Location Services doesn’t correlate the data
it collects with your personally identifiable information. Your approximate location
is determined using available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi
networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on), and GPS (iPhone 3G or later; GPS may not be
available in all locations).
144 Chapter 19 SettingsYou can turn Location Services off if you don’t want to use this feature. If you turn
Location Services off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on again the next time an
application tries to use this feature.
Turn Location Services on or off: Choose General > Location Services and turn
location services on or off.
To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it.
Auto-Lock
Locking iPhone turns off the display to save your battery and to prevent unintended
operation of iPhone. You can still receive calls and text messages, and you can adjust
the volume and use the mic button on the iPhone stereo headset when listening to
music or on a call.
Set the amount of time before iPhone locks: Choose General > Auto-Lock and
choose a time.
Passcode Lock
By default, iPhone doesn’t require you to enter a passcode to unlock it.
Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then
enter the passcode again to verify it. iPhone then requires you to enter the passcode
to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings.
Turn passcode lock off: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and
tap Turn Passcode Off, then enter your passcode again.
Change the passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and
tap Change Passcode. Enter your passcode again, then enter and reenter your new
passcode.
If you forget your passcode, you must restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and
Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204.
Set how long before your passcode is required: Choose General > Passcode Lock and
enter your passcode. Tap Require Passcode, then select how long iPhone can be idle
before you need to enter a passcode to unlock it.
Turn Voice Dial on or off: Choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial on
or off.
Erase data after ten failed passcode attempts: Choose General > Passcode Lock,
enter your passcode, and tap Erase Data to turn it on.
After ten failed passcode attempts, your settings are reset to their defaults and all your
information and media is erased:
• On iPhone 3GS: by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted
using 256-bit AES encryption)
• On iPhone and iPhone 3G: by overwriting the data
Chapter 19 Settings 145Important: You can’t use iPhone while data is being overwritten. This can take up to
two hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPhone.
(On iPhone 3GS, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.)
Restrictions
You can set restrictions for the use of some applications and for iPod content on
iPhone. For example, parents can restrict explicit music from being seen on playlists,
or turn off YouTube access entirely.
Turn on restrictions:
1 Choose General > Restrictions, then tap Enable Restrictions.
2 Enter a four-digit passcode.
3 Reenter the passcode.
Turn off restrictions: Choose General > Restrictions, then enter the passcode.
Tap Disable Restrictions, then reenter the passcode.
If you forget your passcode, you must restore your iPhone software from iTunes.
See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204.
Set application restrictions: Set the restrictions you want by tapping individual
controls on or off. By default, all controls are on (not restricted). Tap an item to turn it
off and restrict its use.
Safari is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot use Safari
to browse the web or access web clips. Other third-party applications may allow web
browsing even if Safari is disabled.
YouTube is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen.
The iTunes Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot
preview, purchase, or download content.
The App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot
install applications on iPhone.
Camera is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot take
pictures.
Location data isn’t provided to applications.
Restrict purchases within applications: Turn In-App Purchases off. When enabled,
this feature allows you to purchase additional content or features within applications
downloaded from the App Store.
Set content restrictions: Tap Ratings For, then select a country from the list. You can
then set restrictions using that country’s ratings system for the following categories of
content:
146 Chapter 19 Settings• Music & Podcasts
• Movies
• TV Shows
• Apps
In the United States for example, to allow only movies rated PG or below, tap Movies,
then select PG from the list.
Note: Not all countries have rating systems.
Home
Choose General > Home to set preferences for double-clicking the Home button and
searching categories on the Spotlight page. You can set iPhone so that double-clicking
the Home button goes to the Home screen, Search, Phone Favorites, Camera, or iPod.
Set whether double-clicking the Home button shows iPod controls: Turn on iPod
Controls to display iPod controls when you’re playing music and double-click the
Home button. This feature works even when the display is turned off or iPhone is
locked.
Set what categories appear in search results: Tap Search Results. All search categories
in the list are selected by default. Tap an item to deselect it.
Set the order of search result categories: Tap Search Results, then drag next to a
search category to a new place in the list.
Date and Time
These settings apply to the time shown in the status bar at the top of the screen, and
in world clocks and calendars.
Set whether iPhone shows 24-hour time or 12-hour time: Choose General > Date &
Time and turn 24-Hour Time on or off. (Not available in all countries.)
Set whether iPhone updates the date and time automatically: Choose General >
Date & Time and turn Set Automatically on or off.
If iPhone is set to update the time automatically, it gets the correct time over the
cellular network, and updates it for the time zone you’re in.
Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone
may not be able to automatically set the local time.
Set the date and time manually: Choose General > Date & Time and turn Set
Automatically off. Tap Time Zone and enter the name of a major city in your time zone.
Tap the “Date & Time” return button, then tap “Set Date & Time” and enter the date
and time.
Chapter 19 Settings 147Keyboard
Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction
on or off.
By default, if the default keyboard for the language you select has a dictionary, iPhone
automatically suggests corrections or completed words as you type.
Turn Auto-Capitalization on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn AutoCapitalization on or off.
By default, iPhone automatically capitalizes words after you type sentence-ending
punctuation or a return character.
Set whether caps lock is enabled: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Enable Caps
Lock on or off.
If caps lock is enabled and you double-tap the Shift key on the keyboard, all letters
you type are uppercase. The Shift key turns blue when caps lock is on.
Turn the “.” shortcut on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn “.” Shortcut on
or off.
The “.” shortcut lets you double-tap the space bar to enter a period followed by a space
when you’re typing. It’s on by default.
Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > Keyboards > International
Keyboards and turn on the keyboards you want.
If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re
typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears
briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 35.
International
Use International settings to set the language for iPhone, turn keyboards for different
languages on or off, and set the date, time, and telephone number formats for your
region.
Set the language for iPhone: Choose General > International > Language, choose the
language you want to use, then tap Done.
Set the Voice Control language for iPhone: Choose General > International > Voice
Control, then choose the language you want to use (available only on iPhone 3GS).
Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > International > Keyboards,
and turn on the keyboards you want.
If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re
typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears
briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 35.
Set date, time, and telephone number formats: Choose General > International >
Region Format, and choose your region.
148 Chapter 19 SettingsThe Region Format also determines the language used for the days and months that
appear in native iPhone applications.
Accessibility
To turn on accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS), choose Accessibility
and choose the features you want. See Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182.
Resetting iPhone
Reset all settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset All Settings.
All your preferences and settings are reset. Information, such as your contacts and
calendars, and media, such as your songs and videos, aren’t deleted.
Erase all content and settings: Connect iPhone to your computer or a power adapter.
Choose General > Reset and tap “Erase All Content and Settings.”
This resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media:
• On iPhone 3GS: by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted
using 256-bit AES encryption)
• On iPhone and iPhone 3G: by overwriting the data
Important: You can’t use iPhone while data is being overwritten. This can take up to
two hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPhone.
(On iPhone 3GS, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.)
Reset network settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Network Settings.
When you reset network settings, your list of previously used networks and VPN
settings not installed by a configuration profile are removed. Wi-Fi is turned off and
then back on, disconnecting you from any network you’re on. The Wi-Fi and “Ask to
Join Networks” settings are left turned on.
To remove VPN settings installed by a configuration profile, choose Settings > General
> Profile, then select the profile and tap Remove.
Reset the keyboard dictionary: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Keyboard
Dictionary.
You add words to the keyboard dictionary by rejecting words iPhone suggests as you
type. Tap a word to reject the correction and add the word to the keyboard dictionary.
Resetting the keyboard dictionary erases all words you’ve added.
Reset the Home screen layout: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen
Layout.
Reset the location warnings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Location
Warnings.
Chapter 19 Settings 149Location warnings are the requests made by applications (such as Camera, Compass,
and Maps) to use Location Services with those applications. iPhone stops presenting
the warning for an application the second time you tap OK. Tap Reset Location
Warnings to resume the warnings.
Mail, Contacts, Calendars
Use Mail, Contacts, Calendars settings to set up and customize accounts for iPhone:
• Microsoft Exchange
• MobileMe
• Google email
• Yahoo! Mail
• AOL
• Other POP and IMAP mail systems
• LDAP accounts for Contacts
• CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) accounts for Calendars
Accounts
The Accounts section lets you set up accounts on iPhone. The specific settings that
appear depend on the type of account you’re setting up. Your service provider or
system administrator should be able to provide the information you need to enter.
For more information, see:
• “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16
• “Adding Contacts” on page 176
• “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 93
Change an account’s settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account,
then make the changes you want.
Changes you make to an account’s settings on iPhone are not synced to your
computer, so you can configure your accounts to work with iPhone without affecting
the account settings on your computer.
Stop using an account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then
turn Account off.
If an account is off, iPhone doesn’t display the account and doesn’t send or check email
from or sync other information with that account, until you turn it back on.
Adjust advanced settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account,
then do one of the following:
150 Chapter 19 Settings• To set whether drafts, sent messages, and deleted messages are stored on iPhone or
remotely on your email server (IMAP accounts only), tap Advanced and choose Drafts
Mailbox, Sent Mailbox, or Deleted Mailbox.
If you store messages on iPhone, you can see them even when iPhone isn’t
connected to the Internet.
• To set how long before messages are removed permanently from Mail on iPhone, tap
Advanced and tap Remove, then choose a time: Never, or after one day, one week,
or one month.
• To adjust email server settings, tap Host Name, User Name, or Password under
Incoming Mail Server or Outgoing Mail Server. Ask your network administrator or
Internet service provider for the correct settings.
• To adjust SSL and password settings, tap Advanced. Ask your network administrator or
Internet service provider for the correct settings.
Delete an account from iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an
account, then scroll down and tap Delete Account.
Deleting an account means you can no longer access the account with your iPhone.
All email and the contacts, calendar, and bookmark information synced with the
account are removed from iPhone. However, deleting an account doesn’t remove the
account or its associated information from your computer.
Fetch New Data
This setting lets you turn Push on or off for MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Yahoo!
Mail, and any other push accounts you’ve configured on iPhone. Push accounts
automatically deliver new information to iPhone when new information appears
on the server (some delays may occur). You might want to turn Push off to suspend
delivery of email and other information, or to conserve battery life.
When Push is off, and with accounts that don’t support push, data can still be
fetched—that is, iPhone can check with the server and see if new information is
available. Use the Fetch New Data setting to determine how often data is requested.
For optimal battery life, don’t fetch too frequently.
Turn Push on: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then tap to turn
Push on.
Set the interval to fetch data: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data,
then choose how often you want to fetch data for all accounts.
To conserve battery life, fetch less frequently.
Setting Push to OFF or setting Fetch to Manually in the Fetch New Data screen
overrides individual account settings.
Chapter 19 Settings 151Mail
The Mail settings, except where noted, apply to all accounts you’ve set up on iPhone.
To turn alerts sounds for new or sent mail on or off, use the Sounds settings.
Set the number of messages shown on iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” >
Show, then choose a setting.
Choose to see the most recent 25, 50, 75, 100, or 200 messages. To download additional
messages when you’re in Mail, scroll to the bottom of your inbox and tap Load More
Messages.
Note: For Microsoft Exchange accounts, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose
the Exchange account. Tap “Mail days to sync” and choose the number of days of mail
you want to sync with the server.
Set how many lines of each message are previewed in the message list: Choose
“Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Preview, then choose a setting.
You can choose to see up to five lines of each message. That way, you can scan a list of
messages in a mailbox and get an idea of what each message is about.
Set a minimum font size for messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Minimum
Font Size, then choose Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large, or Giant.
Set whether iPhone shows To and Cc labels in message lists: Choose “Mail, Contacts,
Calendars,” then turn Show To/Cc Label on or off.
If Show To/Cc Label is on, To or Cc next to each message in a list indicates whether
the message was sent directly to you or you received a copy.
Set whether iPhone confirms that you want to delete a message: Choose “Mail,
Contacts, Calendars” and turn Ask Before Deleting on or off.
If Ask Before Deleting is on, to delete a message you must tap , then confirm by
tapping Delete.
Set whether iPhone automatically loads remote images: Choose “Mail, Contacts,
Calendars” and turn Load Remote Images on or off. If Load Remote Images is off, you
can load images manually when reading a message.
Set whether iPhone sends you a copy of every message you send: Choose “Mail,
Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Always Bcc Myself on or off.
Set the default email account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Default Account,
then choose an account.
This setting determines which of your accounts a message is sent from when you
create a message from another iPhone application, such as sending a photo from
Photos or tapping the email address of a business in Maps. To send the message from
a different account, tap the From field in the message and choose another account.
Add a signature to your messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Signature,
then type a signature.
152 Chapter 19 SettingsYou can set iPhone to add a signature—your favorite quote, or your name, title, and
phone number, for example—to the bottom of every message you send.
Contacts
Set how contacts are sorted: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts
tap Sort Order and do one of the following:
• To sort by first name first, tap First, Last.
• To sort by last name first, tap Last, First.
Set how contacts are displayed: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under
Contacts tap Display Order and do one of the following:
• To show first name first, tap First, Last.
• To show last name first, tap Last, First.
Import contacts from a SIM: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Import SIM
Contacts.
The contact information on the SIM is imported to iPhone. If you have Contacts
enabled for both MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange, you’re prompted to choose which
account you want to add the SIM contacts to.
Calendar
Set alerts to sound when your receive meeting invitation: Choose “Mail, Contacts,
Calendars,” and under Calendar tap “New Invitation Alerts” to turn it on.
Set how far back in the past to show your calendar events on iPhone: Choose “Mail,
Contacts, Calendars” > Sync, then choose a period of time.
Turn on Calendar time zone support: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Time Zone
Support, then turn Time Zone Support on. Select a time zone for calendars by tapping
Time Zone and entering the name of a major city.
When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time
zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events
in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time.
Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling,
iPhone may not display events or sound alerts at the correct local time. To manually
set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 147.
Phone
Use Phone settings to forward incoming calls, turn call waiting on or off, change your
password, and other things. Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for pricing
and availability.
Chapter 19 Settings 153Calling from Abroad
Set iPhone to add the correct prefix when dialing from another country: In Settings,
tap Phone, then turn International Assist on. This lets you make calls to your home
country using the numbers in your contacts and favorites, without having to add a
prefix or your country code. International Assist works for U.S. telephone numbers only.
For more information, see “Using iPhone Abroad” on page 56.
Call Forwarding
You can set iPhone to forward incoming calls to another number. For example, you
may be on vacation and want all calls to go somewhere else. If you’re going to an area
with no cellular coverage, you may want to forward calls to a place where you can be
reached.
Set iPhone to forward your calls:
1 Choose Phone > Call Forwarding and turn Call Forwarding on.
2 Tap Forwarding To and enter the phone number you want calls forwarded to.
When Call Forwarding is on, an icon appears in the status bar the top of the screen.
You must be in range of the cellular network when you set iPhone to forward calls, or
calls won’t be forwarded.
Call Waiting
Activate or deactivate call waiting: Choose Phone > Call Waiting, then turn Call
Waiting on or off. If you turn call waiting off and someone calls you when you’re
already on the phone, the call goes to voicemail.
Show My Caller ID
Show or hide your caller ID: Choose Phone > Show My Caller ID, then turn Show My
Caller ID on or off.
If Show My Caller ID is off, people you call can’t see your name or phone number on
their phone.
Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine
In some regions, Teletype (TTY) machines are used by deaf or hearing-impaired people
to communicate by typing and reading text. You can use iPhone with a TTY machine
if you have the iPhone TTY Adapter cable, available for purchase separately in many
countries. Go to www.apple.com/store (not available in all countries).
Connect iPhone to a TTY machine: Choose Phone, then turn TTY on. Then connect
iPhone to your TTY machine using the iPhone TTY Adapter.
For information about using a TTY machine, see the documentation that came with
the machine.
154 Chapter 19 SettingsFor more information about other accessibility features of iPhone, go
to Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182.
Changing Your Voicemail Password
A voicemail password helps prevent others from access your voicemail. You need to
enter the password only when you’re calling in to get your messages from another
phone. You won’t need to enter the password when using voicemail on iPhone.
Change your voicemail password: Choose Phone > Change Voicemail Password.
Locking Your SIM Card
You can lock your SIM card, so it can’t be used without a Personal Identification
Number (PIN). You must enter the PIN each time you turn iPhone off and turn it back
on again. Some carriers require a SIM PIN in order to use iPhone.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card
documentation or contact your carrier. Some cellular networks may not accept an
emergency call from iPhone if the SIM is locked.
Turn the SIM PIN on or off:
1 Choose Phone > SIM PIN, then turn SIM PIN on or off.
2 Enter your PIN to confirm. Use the PIN assigned by your carrier, or your carrier’s default
PIN.
Change the PIN for your SIM card:
1 Choose Phone > SIM PIN.
2 Turn SIM PIN on, then tap Change PIN.
3 Enter your current PIN, then enter your new PIN.
4 Enter your new PIN again to confirm, then tap Done.
Accessing Your Carrier’s Services
Depending on your carrier, you may be able to access some of your carrier’s services
directly from iPhone. For example, you may be able to check your bill balance, call
directory assistance, and view how many minutes you have left.
Access your carrier’s services: Choose Phone. Then scroll down and tap the button for
your carrier’s services.
When you request information such as your bill balance, your carrier may provide the
information in a text message. Contact your carrier to find out if there are any charges
for these services.
Chapter 19 Settings 155Safari
Safari settings let you select your Internet search engine, set security options, and for
developers, turn on debugging.
General
You can use Google or Yahoo! to perform Internet searches.
Select a search engine: Choose Safari > Search Engine and select the search engine
you want to use.
You can set Safari to automatically fill out web forms using contact information, names
and passwords you previously entered, or both.
Enable AutoFill: Choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following:
• To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and
select the contact you want to use.
Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms.
• To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on.
When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you
visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website.
• To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All.
Security
By default, Safari is set to show features of the web, such as some movies, animation,
and web applications. You may wish to change security settings to help protect iPhone
from possible security risks on the Internet.
Change security settings: Choose Safari, then do one of the following:
• To set whether you’re warned when visiting potentially fraudulent websites, turn Fraud
Warning on or off.
Fraud warning protects you from potentially fraudulent Internet sites. When you
visit a suspicious site, Safari warns you about its suspect nature and doesn’t load the
page.
• To enable or disable JavaScript, turn JavaScript on or off.
JavaScript lets web programmers control elements of the page—for example, a
page that uses JavaScript might display the current date and time or cause a linked
page to appear in a new pop-up page.
• To enable or disable plug-ins, turn Plug-ins on or off. Plug-ins allow Safari to play some
types of audio and video files and to display Microsoft Word files and Microsoft
Excel documents.
• To block or allow pop-ups, turn Block Pop-ups on or off. Blocking pop-ups stops only
pop-ups that appear when you close a page or open a page by typing its address.
It doesn’t block pop-ups that open when you tap a link.
156 Chapter 19 Settings• To set whether Safari accepts cookies, tap Accept Cookies and choose Never, “From
visited,” or Always.
A cookie is a piece of information that a website puts on iPhone so the website can
remember you when you visit again. That way, webpages can be customized for you
based on information you may have provided.
Some pages won’t work correctly unless iPhone is set to accept cookies.
• To clear the history of webpages you’ve visited, tap Clear History.
• To clear all cookies from Safari, tap Clear Cookies.
• To clear the browser cache, tap Clear Cache.
The browser cache stores the content of pages so the pages open faster the next
time you visit them. If a page you open doesn’t show new content, clearing the
cache may help.
Developer
The debug console can help you resolve webpage errors. If it’s turned on, the console
appears automatically when a webpage error occurs.
Turn the debug console on or off: Choose Safari > Developer, and turn Debug
Console on or off.
Messages
Use Messages settings to adjust settings for SMS and MMS messages.
Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later. The MMS Messaging and Show
Subject Field settings doesn’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your carrier.
Choose whether or not to see a preview of messages on the Home screen: Choose
Messages and turn Show Preview on or off.
Choose whether or not to repeat message alerts: Choose Messages and turn Repeat
Alert on or off. If you ignore a message alert, you’ll be alerted two more times.
Turn MMS messaging on or off: Choose Messages and turn MMS Messaging on or
off. If MMS messaging is turned off, you won’t be able to receive MMS file attachments
such as images or audio.
Show a subject line for messages you send or receive: Choose Messages and turn
Show Subject Field on.
Chapter 19 Settings 157iPod
Use iPod Settings to adjust settings for music and video playback on your iPod.
Music
The Music settings apply to songs, podcasts, and audiobooks.
Turn Shake to Shuffle on or off: Choose iPod, then turn Shake to Shuffle on or off.
When Shake to Shuffle is on, you can shake iPhone to turn shuffle on and immediately
change the currently playing song.
Set iTunes to play songs at the same sound level: In iTunes, choose iTunes >
Preferences if you’re using a Mac, or Edit > Preferences if you’re using a PC, then click
Playback and select Sound Check.
Set iPhone to use the iTunes volume settings (Sound Check): Choose iPod and turn
Sound Check on.
Use the equalizer to customize the sound on iPhone: Choose iPod > EQ and choose
a setting.
Set a volume limit for music and videos: Choose iPod > Volume Limit and drag the
slider to adjust the maximum volume.
Tap Lock Volume Limit to assign a code to prevent the setting from being changed.
Setting a volume limit only limits the volume of music (including podcasts and
audiobooks) and videos (including rented movies), and only when headphones,
earphones, or speakers are connected to the headset jack on iPhone.
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important
Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Video
Video settings apply to video content, including rented movies. You can set where to
resume playing videos that you previously started, turn closed captioning on or off,
and set up iPhone to play videos on your TV.
Set where to resume playing: Choose iPod > Start Playing, then select whether
you want videos that you previously started watching to resume playing from the
beginning or where you left off.
Turn closed captioning on or off: Choose iPod and turn Closed Captioning on or off.
158 Chapter 19 SettingsTV Out
Use these settings to set up how iPhone plays videos on your TV. For more information
about using iPhone to play videos on your TV, see “Watching Videos on a TV” on
page 84.
Turn widescreen on or off: Choose iPod and turn Widescreen on or off.
Set TV signal to NTSC or PAL: Choose iPod > TV Signal and select NTSC or PAL.
NTSC and PAL are TV broadcast standards. NTSC displays 480i and PAL displays 576i.
Your TV might use either of these, depending on where you bought it. If you’re not
sure which to use, check the documentation that came with your TV.
Photos
Use Photos settings to specify how slideshows display your photos.
Set the length of time each slide is shown: Choose Photos > Play Each Slide For and
select the length of time.
Set a transition effect: Choose Photos > Transition and select a transition effect.
Set whether to repeat slideshows: Choose Photos and turn Repeat on or off.
Set photos to appear randomly or in order: Choose Photos and turn Shuffle on or off.
Store
Use Store settings to change or create an iTunes Store account. By default, the iTunes
account you’re signed in to when you sync iPhone with your computer appears in
Store settings. You can change accounts on iPhone to purchase music or applications
from another account. If you don’t have an iTunes account, you can create one in Store
settings.
Sign in to an account: Choose Store and tap Sign in, then enter your user name and
password.
View your iTunes Store account information: Choose Store and tap View Account,
then type your password and follow the onscreen instructions.
Sign in to a different account: Choose Store and tap Sign out, then tap Sign in and
enter your username and password.
Create a new account: Choose Store and tap Create New Account, then follow the
onscreen instructions.
Nike + iPod
Use Nike + iPod settings to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application
(iPhone 3GS only). See Chapter 24,“Nike + iPod,” on page 180.
Chapter 19 Settings 159iTunes Store
20
About the iTunes Store
You can search for, browse, preview, purchase, and download music, ringtones,
audiobooks, TV shows, movies, and music videos from the iTunes Store directly to
iPhone. You can listen to audio or watch video podcasts from the iTunes Store, either
by streaming them from the Internet or by downloading them directly to iPhone.
Note: The iTunes Store is not available in all regions, and iTunes Store content may
vary across regions.
To access the iTunes Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting
to the Internet” on page 40.
To purchase songs or write reviews, you need an iTunes Store account. By default,
iPhone gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes
Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account,
go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 159.
You don’t need an iTunes Store account to play or download podcasts.
160Finding Music, Videos, and More
Browse content: Tap Music, Videos, Ringtones, or Podcasts. Or tap More to browse
by Audiobooks, iTunes U, or Downloads. Choose a sorting method at the top of the
screen to browse by lists such as Featured, Top Tens, or Genres.
Search for content: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words,
then tap Search. Search results are grouped by category, such as Movies, Albums,
or Podcasts.
Tap an item in a list to see more details on its Info screen. You can read reviews, write
your own review, or email a link about the item to a friend. Depending on the item,
you can also buy, download, or rent it.
Note: If you join a Starbucks Wi-Fi network in a select Starbucks location (available
in the U.S. only), the Starbucks icon appears at the bottom of the screen. You can
preview and purchase the currently playing and other songs from featured Starbucks
Collections.
Chapter 20 iTunes Store 161Purchasing Ringtones
You can preview and purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store and download them to
iPhone.
Note: Ringtones may not be available in all countries.
Browse for ringtones: Tap Ringtones or use Search to find a specific song in the
iTunes Store.
Preview a ringtone: Tap the item to preview. Double-tap the item for more
information.
Purchase and download ringtones:
1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK.
When you purchase a ringtone, you can set it as your default ringtone, or assign it to a
contact.
If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up.
Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made
within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again.
You can change your default ringtone or assign individual ringtones to contacts in
Settings > Sounds. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141.
Ringtones you purchase on iPhone are synced to your iTunes library when you
connect iPhone to your computer. You can sync purchased ringtones to more than one
iPhone, if they’re all synced to the same account you used to purchase the ringtones.
You can’t edit ringtones you purchase from the iTunes Store.
You can create custom ringtones in Garage Band. For information, see Garage Band
Help.
Purchasing Music or Audiobooks
When you find a song, album, or audiobook you like in the iTunes Store, you can
purchase and download it to iPhone. You can preview an item before you purchase it
to make sure it’s what you want.
Preview a song or audiobook: Tap the item.
Purchase and download a song, album, or audiobook:
1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK.
If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up.
162 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreYour purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made
within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again.
An alert appears if you’ve previously purchased one or more songs from an album.
Tap Buy if you want to purchase the entire album including the songs you’ve already
purchased, or tap Cancel if you want to purchase any remaining songs individually.
Some albums include bonus content, which is downloaded to your iTunes library on
your computer. Not all bonus content is downloaded directly to iPhone.
Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads
screen. See “Checking Download Status” on page 165.
Purchased songs are added to a Purchased playlist on iPhone. If you delete the
Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one when you buy an item from the iTunes
Store.
You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to
make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit
appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens.
Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen
and follow the onscreen instructions.
Purchasing or Renting Videos
When you find a movie, TV show, or music video you like in the iTunes Store, you
can purchase and download it to iPhone. You can purchase movies and TV shows in
standard (480p) or high definition (720p) format.
When you purchase a high-definition video on iPhone, a standard definition version
compatible with iPod and iPhone immediately downloads for viewing. The high
definition version appears in iTunes on your computer in the Downloads queue.
You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account on your computer to view and
download items from the Downloads queue.
Rented movies are available in standard definition only (not available in all regions).
See “Watching Rented Movies” on page 83.
Preview a video: Tap Preview.
Purchase or rent a video:
1 Tap Buy or Rent.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK.
If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up.
Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made
within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again.
Chapter 20 iTunes Store 163Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads
screen. Rented movies won’t begin playing until the download completes. See
“Checking Download Status” on page 165.
Purchased videos are added to a Purchased playlist on iPhone. If you delete the
Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one the next time you buy an item from the
iTunes Store.
You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to
make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit
appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens.
Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen
and follow the onscreen instructions.
Streaming or Downloading Podcasts
You can listen to audio podcasts or watch video podcasts streamed over the Internet
from the iTunes Store. You can also download audio and video podcasts to iPhone.
Podcasts you download to iPhone are synced to your iTunes library when you connect
iPhone to your computer.
Tap Podcasts to browse podcasts in the iTunes Store. To see a list of episodes, tap a
podcast. Video podcasts are indicated by the icon.
Stream a podcast: Tap the podcast title.
Download a podcast: Tap the Free button, then tap Download. Downloaded podcasts
appear in the Podcasts list in iPod.
Listen to or watch a podcast you’ve downloaded: In iPod, tap Podcasts at the bottom
of the screen (you may need to tap More first), then tap the podcast. Video podcasts
also appear in your list of videos.
Get more episodes of the podcast you’ve downloaded: In the Podcasts list in iPod,
tap the podcast, then tap Get More Episodes.
Delete a podcast: In the Podcasts list in iPod, swipe left or right over the podcast, then
tap Delete.
164 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreChecking Download Status
You can check the Downloads screen to see the status of in-progress and scheduled
downloads, including purchases you’ve pre-ordered.
See the status of items being downloaded: Tap Downloads.
To pause a download, tap .
If a download is interrupted, iPhone starts the download again the next time it has an
Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the
download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and
signed in to the same iTunes account).
See the status of pre-ordered items: Tap Downloads.
Pre-ordered items appear in a list until the date the item is released. Tap the item for
release date information. Once the item is available for download, a download icon
appears next to the download.
Download a pre-ordered item: Tap the item, then tap .
Pre-ordered items don’t download automatically when they’re released. Return to the
Downloads screen to begin the download.
Syncing Purchased Content
iTunes automatically syncs everything you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPhone to
your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you access
the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete purchased
content from iPhone.
Purchased content is synced to the “Purchased on ” playlist.
iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. iTunes also copies your purchases to the
Purchased playlist that iTunes uses for purchases you make on your computer, if that
playlist exists and is set to sync with iPhone.
Downloaded podcasts are synced to the Podcast list in your iTunes library.
Changing the Browse Buttons
You can replace the Music, Podcasts, Videos, and Search buttons at the bottom of the
screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you download audiobooks
often but don’t watch many videos, you could replace the Videos button with
Audiobooks.
Chapter 20 iTunes Store 165Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the
bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them.
When you finish, tap Done.
When you’re browsing, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible.
Viewing Account Information
To view your iTunes Store account information on iPhone, tap your account (at the
bottom of most iTunes Store screens). Or go to Settings > Store and tap View Account.
You must be signed in to view your account information. See “Store” on page 159.
Verifying Purchases
You can use iTunes on your computer to verify that all the music, videos, applications,
and other items you bought from the iTunes Store or App Store are in your iTunes
library. You might want to do this if a download was interrupted.
Verify your purchases:
1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet.
2 In iTunes, choose Store > Check for Available Downloads.
3 Enter your iTunes Store account ID and password, then click Check.
Purchases not yet on your computer are downloaded.
The Purchased playlist displays your purchases. However, because you can add or
remove items in this list, it might not be accurate. To see all of your purchases, sign in
to your account, choose Store > View My Account, and click Purchase History.
166 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreApp Store
21
About the App Store
You can search for, browse, review, purchase, and download applications from the App
Store directly to iPhone. Applications you download and install from the App Store on
iPhone are backed up to your iTunes library the next time you sync iPhone with your
computer. You can also install applications you’ve purchased or downloaded through
iTunes on your computer when you sync with iPhone.
Note: The App Store is not available in all regions.
To use the App Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to
the Internet” on page 40. You also need an iTunes Store account (not available in some
countries) to download applications. By default, iPhone gets your iTunes Store account
settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make
purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on
page 159.
Browsing and Searching
Browse the featured selections to see new, notable, or recommended applications,
or browse Top 25 to see the most popular applications. If you’re looking for a specific
application, use Search.
167Browse applications: Tap Featured, Categories, or Top 25. Choose a category, or
choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as New,
What’s Hot, Genius, Top Paid, or Top Free.
Browse using Genius: Tap Genius to see a list of recommended apps based on what’s
already in your app collection. To turn Genius on, follow the onscreen instructions.
Genius is a free service, but it requires an iTunes Store account.
Search for applications: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words,
then tap Search.
168 Chapter 21 App StoreInfo Screen
Tap any application in a list to see more information, such as the application’s price,
screenshots, ratings, and other information.
If you’ve already installed the application, “Installed” appears instead of the price on
the Info screen.
Email a link to the application’s Info page in iTunes: Tap “Tell a Friend” near the
bottom of the Info screen.
View screenshots: Swipe left or right over a screenshot to view additional screenshot
pages. Double-tap to zoom in.
Get ratings and read reviews: Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen.
Report a problem: Tap “Report a Problem” near the bottom of the Info screen. Select a
problem from the list or type optional comments, then tap Report.
Chapter 21 App Store 169Downloading Applications
When you find an application you want in the App Store, you can purchase and
download it to iPhone. If the application is free, you can download it without charge
after providing your iTunes account information.
Once you download an application, it’s immediately installed on iPhone.
Purchase and download an application:
1 Tap the price (or tap Free), then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK.
If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up.
Downloads for purchase are charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional
downloads made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your
password again.
Some applications allow you to make purchases within the application. You can restrict
in-app purchases in Settings. See “Restrictions” on page 146.
Some applications use push notifications to alert you of new information, even when
the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but
may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on
the Home screen. See “Notifications” on page 140.
You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to
make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit
appears with your account information at the bottom of most App Store screens.
Enter a redemption code: Tap Redeem near the bottom of the Featured screen, then
follow the onscreen instructions.
See the status of downloading applications: After you begin downloading an
application, its icon appears on the Home screen and shows a progress indicator.
If a download is interrupted, iPhone starts the download again the next time it has an
Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the
download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and
signed in to the same iTunes account).
170 Chapter 21 App StoreDeleting Applications
You can delete applications you’ve installed from the App Store. If you delete an
application, data associated with the application will no longer be available to iPhone,
unless you reinstall the application and restore its data from a backup.
You can reinstall an application and restore its data as long as you backed up iPhone
with iTunes on your computer. (If you try to delete an application that hasn’t been
backed up to your computer, an alert appears.) To retrieve the application data,
you must restore iPhone from a backup containing the data. See “Restoring from a
Backup” on page 203.
Delete an App Store application:
1 Touch and hold any application icon on the Home screen until the icons start to
wiggle.
2 Tap in the corner of the application you want to delete.
3 Tap Delete, then press the Home button to save your arrangement.
When you delete an application, its data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user
interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all
content and settings, see “Erase All Content and Settings” in iPhone settings.
See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149.
Writing Reviews
You can write and submit your own application reviews directly on iPhone.
Write a review:
1 Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen.
2 On the Reviews screen, tap “Write a Review.”
3 Select the number of stars (1–5) for your rating of the application, and enter your
nickname, a title for the review, and optional review comments. If you’ve written
reviews before, the nickname field is already filled in. Otherwise, you’re asked to create
a reviewer nickname.
4 Tap Send.
You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account and have purchased or
downloaded the item in order to submit reviews.
Chapter 21 App Store 171Updating Applications
Whenever you access the App Store, it checks for updates to applications you’ve
installed. The App Store also automatically checks for updates every week. The App
Store icon shows the total number of application updates available.
If an update is available and you access the App Store, the Updates screen appears
immediately. Application updates are downloaded and automatically installed when
you choose to update them. Application upgrades are new releases that can be
purchased or downloaded through the App Store on iPhone or the iTunes Store on
your computer.
Update an application:
1 At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates.
2 Tap an application to see more information about the update.
3 Tap Update.
Update all applications: At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates, then tap
Update All.
If you try to update an application purchased from a different iTunes Store account,
you’re prompted for that account’s ID and password in order to download the update.
Syncing Purchased Applications
iTunes automatically syncs applications you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPhone
to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you access
the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete applications
from iPhone.
Downloaded applications are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes.
Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes.
Applications are synced to the Applications list in your iTunes library. iTunes creates
the list if it doesn’t exist.
172 Chapter 21 App StoreCompass
22
Getting Compass Readings
The built-in compass (iPhone 3GS only) shows which direction you’re facing, along
with the geographical coordinates of your current location. You can choose magnetic
north, or have Compass adjust the declination to show true north.
Important: The accuracy of digital compass headings may be negatively affected by
magnetic or other environmental interference, including interference caused by the
close proximity of the magnets contained in the iPhone earbuds. The digital compass
should only be used for basic navigation assistance and should not be solely relied on
to determine precise locations, proximity, distance, or direction.
The compass needs to be calibrated the first time you use it, and may need to be
calibrated occasionally after that. iPhone alerts you whenever calibration is needed.
Calibrate iPhone: Wave iPhone in a figure eight. You may be asked to move away
from a source of interference.
173See which way you’re facing: Hold iPhone level to the ground. The compass needle
rotates to point north. Your current direction appears at the top of the screen.
The coordinates of your current location are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Switch between true north and magnetic north: Tap and tap the setting
you want.
Compass and Maps
The icon at the bottom of the Compass screen lets you find your current location
in Maps. Maps also takes advantage of the built-in compass to show which way you’re
facing.
See your current location in Maps: Tap . Maps opens and indicates your current
location with a blue marker.
174 Chapter 22 CompassShow which way you’re facing: In Maps, tap again. (The icon changes to .)
The angle shows the accuracy of the compass reading—the smaller the angle,
the greater the accuracy.
See “Finding and Viewing Locations” on page 114.
Chapter 22 Compass 175Contacts
23
About Contacts
Contact makes it easy to call, email, and text your friends and associates with iPhone.
You can add contacts directly on iPhone, or sync contacts from applications on your
computer, or with your MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Google, or Yahoo! accounts.
You can open Contacts directly from the Home screen, or from within the Phone
application.
Adding Contacts
You can add contacts to iPhone in the following ways:
• In iTunes, sync contacts from Google or Yahoo!, or sync with applications on your
computer (see “Syncing” on page 11)
• Set up MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange accounts on iPhone, with Contacts enabled
(see “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16)
• Install a profile that sets up an Exchange account, with Contacts enabled
(see “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 18)
• Set up an LDAP account on iPhone
• Enter contacts directly on iPhone
• Import contacts from a SIM
The number of contacts you can add is limited only by the amount of memory on
iPhone.
176Set up an LDAP account:
1 In Settings, tap “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
2 Tap Other, then tap Add LDAP Account.
3 Enter your LDAP account information and tap Next to verify the account.
4 Tap Save.
When you set up an LDAP account, you can view and search for contacts on your
company or organization’s LDAP server. The server appears as a new group in Contacts.
Since LDAP contacts aren’t downloaded to iPhone, you must have an Internet
connection to view them. Check with your system administrator for specific account
settings and other requirements (such as VPN).
Import contacts from another phone’s SIM: In Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts,
Calendars,” then tap Import SIM Contacts.
The contact information on the SIM is imported to iPhone. If you have Contacts
enabled for both MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange, you’re prompted to choose which
account you want to add the SIM contacts to.
Important: iPhone doesn’t store contacts on its SIM.
Searching Contacts
You can search first, last, and company names in your contacts on iPhone. If you have
a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPhone, you may also be able to search your
enterprise Global Address List (GAL) for contacts in your organization. If you have an
LDAP account set up on iPhone, you can search contacts on your organization’s LDAP
server.
When you enter search information, contacts with matching information appear
immediately as you start to type.
Search contacts: In Contacts, tap the search field at the top of any list of contacts
and enter a first, last, or company name. (To scroll quickly to the top of the list, tap the
status bar.)
Search a GAL: Tap Groups, tap Directories at the bottom of the list, then enter a first,
last, or company name.
You can’t edit GAL contacts or save them to iPhone.
Search an LDAP server: Tap Groups, tap the LDAP server name, then enter a first, last,
or company name.
You can’t edit LDAP contacts or save them to iPhone.
Chapter 23 Contacts 177Managing Contacts on iPhone
Add a contact on iPhone: Tap Contacts and tap .
Delete a contact In Contacts, choose a contact, than tap Edit. Scroll
down and tap Delete Contact.
Add a contact from the keypad Tap Keypad, enter a number, then tap .
Tap Create New Contact and enter the caller’s
information, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and
choose a contact.
Edit contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, then tap Edit. To
add an item, tap . To delete an item, tap .
Enter a pause in a number Tap , then tap Pause. One or more pauses
may be required by a phone system before
dialing an extension, for example. Pauses appear
as commas when the number is saved.
Add a recent caller’s phone number to your
contacts
Tap Recents and tap next to the number.
Then tap Create New Contact, or tap “Add to
Existing Contact” and choose a contact.
Assign a photo to a contact:
1 Tap Contacts and choose a contact.
2 Tap Edit and tap Add Photo, or tap the existing photo.
3 Tap Take Photo to use the camera. Or tap Choose Existing Photo and choose a photo.
4 Drag and scale the photo as desired.
5 Tap Set Photo.
178 Chapter 23 ContactsUse a contact’s info screen: Tap Contacts and choose a contact. Then tap an item.
Visit the website
Call
Send an email
Send a text message
Add a phone
number to your
favorites list
See a map and
get directions
Note: The Contacts screen shown here includes the buttons across the bottom that
are available when you view Contacts from within the Phone application. These
buttons don’t appear if you open Contacts directly from the Home screen.
A star next to a phone number means the number is in your favorites list.
See your own phone number: Tap Contacts and scroll to the top of the list.
(Not available in all regions.)
Chapter 23 Contacts 179Nike + iPod
24
Activating Nike + iPod
When activated in Settings, the Nike + iPod application appears on the Home screen
(iPhone 3GS only). With a Nike + iPod Sensor (sold separately), the Nike + iPod
application provides audible feedback on your speed, distance, time elapsed, and
calories burned during a running or walking workout. When iPhone is connected to
iTunes on your computer, you can send your workout information to Nikeplus.com,
where you can track your progress, set goals, and participate in challenges.
See the Nike + iPod documentation for information about activating and using
Nike + iPod.
Turn Nike + iPod on or off: In Settings, choose Nike + iPod and turn Nike + iPod on or
off. When Nike + iPod is turned on, its icon appears on the Home screen.
180Additional Nike + iPod Settings
In Settings, choose Nike + iPod to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod
application.
Choose a PowerSong: Choose PowerSong and select a song from your music library.
Turn spoken feedback on or off: Choose Spoken Feedback and select a male or
female voice to accompany your workout, or Off to turn off spoken feedback.
Set a distance preference: Choose Distance, then select Miles or Kilometers to
measure your workout distance.
Set your weight: Choose Weight, then flick to enter your weight.
Set the screen orientation: Choose Lock Screen, then select a screen orientation
preference.
Set up the Nike + iPod Sensor: Choose Sensor, then follow the onscreen instructions
to set up your sensor (sold separately).
You can use a Nike+ compatible remote (sold separately) to control Nike + iPod
wirelessly. Before using a remote for the first time, you must set it up on iPhone.
Set up the Nike + iPod remote: Choose Remote, then follow the onscreen instructions
to set up your remote (third-party product sold separately).
Chapter 24 Nike + iPod 181Accessibility
25
Accessibility Features
In addition to the many features that make iPhone easy to use for everyone,
accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS) are designed to make it easier
for users with visual, auditory, or other physical disabilities to use iPhone. These
accessibility features include:
• VoiceOver
• Zoom
• White on Black
• Mono Audio
• Speak Auto-text
With the exception of VoiceOver, these accessibility features work with all iPhone
applications, including third-party applications you download from the App Store.
VoiceOver works with all applications that come preinstalled on iPhone. In addition,
third-party developers can use the iPhone Accessibility API to make their applications
accessible for VoiceOver users.
For more information about the accessibility features of iPhone, go to
www.apple.com/accessibility.
Each accessibility feature can be turned on or off in the Accessibility settings on
iPhone. You can also turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes when iPhone is
connected to your computer.
Turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 In the Summary pane, click Configure Universal Access in the Options section.
1824 Select the accessibility features that you want to use and click OK.
VoiceOver
VoiceOver describes aloud what appears onscreen, so that you can use iPhone without
seeing it. VoiceOver speaks in the language specified in International settings, which
may be influenced by the Region Locale setting.
Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages.
VoiceOver tells you about each element on the screen as it’s selected. When an
element is selected, it’s enclosed by a black rectangle (for the benefit of those who can
see the screen) and VoiceOver speaks the name or describes the item. The enclosing
rectangle is referred to as the VoiceOver cursor. If text is selected, VoiceOver reads the
text. If a control (such as a button or switch) is selected and Speak Hints is turned on,
VoiceOver may tell you the action of the item or provide instructions for you—for
example, “double-tap to open.”
When you go to a new screen, VoiceOver plays a sound and automatically selects and
speaks the first element of the screen (typically, the item in the upper-left corner).
VoiceOver also lets you know when the display changes to landscape or portrait,
and when the screen is locked or unlocked.
Setting Up VoiceOver
Important: VoiceOver changes the gestures used to control iPhone. Once VoiceOver
is turned on, you have to use VoiceOver gestures to operate iPhone—even to turn
VoiceOver off again to resume standard operation.
Turn VoiceOver on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and
tap the VoiceOver On/Off switch.
You can also set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off. See “Triple-click
Home” on page 191.
Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time.
Chapter 25 Accessibility 183Turn spoken hints on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver,
and tap the Speak Hints On/Off switch. Spoken hints are turned on by default.
Set the VoiceOver speaking rate: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility >
VoiceOver, and adjust the Speaking Rate slider.
You can choose what kind of feedback you get when you type. You can set VoiceOver
to speak characters, words, both, or nothing. If you choose to hear both characters and
words, VoiceOver speaks each character as you type it, then speaks the whole word
when you finish it by entering a space or punctuation.
Choose typing feedback: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver >
Typing Feedback, then choose Characters, Words, Characters and Words, or Nothing.
Change the language spoken by VoiceOver: In Settings, choose General >
International > Language, then select a language and tap OK. Some languages may be
influenced by the Region Local setting. In Settings, choose General > International >
Region Format and select the format.
Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages.
Practice gestures: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice
Gestures, then tap Practice VoiceOver Gestures. Practice the gestures described in
“VoiceOver Gestures,” below. When you’re finished practicing, tap Done.
VoiceOver Gestures
When VoiceOver is turned on, the standard touchscreen gestures have different effects.
These and some additional gestures allow you to move around the screen and to
control the individual elements when they’re selected. VoiceOver gestures include
using two and three fingers to tap or flick. For best results when using two- and threefinger gestures, relax and let your fingers touch the screen with some space between
your fingers.
You can use standard gestures when VoiceOver is turned on, by double-tapping and
holding your finger on the screen. A series of tones indicates that normal gestures
are in force. They remain in effect until you lift your finger. Then VoiceOver gestures
resume.
You can use many different techniques to enter VoiceOver gestures. For example, you
can enter a two-finger tap using two fingers from one hand, or one finger from each
hand. You can also use your thumbs. Try different techniques to discover which works
best for you.
If your gestures don’t work, try quicker movements, especially for double-tap and
flicking gestures. To flick, try quickly brushing the screen with your finger or fingers.
You can practice VoiceOver gestures in Settings: choose General > Accessibility >
VoiceOver > Practice Gestures and tap the Practice VoiceOver Gestures button.
Here’s a summary of key VoiceOver gestures:
184 Chapter 25 AccessibilityNavigate and Read
• Tap: Speak item.
• Flick right or left: Select the next or previous item.
• Flick up or down: Depends on the Rotor Control setting. See “Rotor Control” on
page 185.
• Two-finger tap: Stop speaking the current item.
• Two-finger flick up: Read all from top of screen.
• Two-finger flick down: Read all from current position.
• Three-finger flick up or down: Scroll one page at a time.
• Three-finger flick right or left: Go to the next or previous page (such as the Home
screen, Stocks, or Safari).
• Three-finger tap: Speak the scroll status (which page or rows are visible).
Select and Activate
• Double-tap: Activate selected item.
• Touch an item with one finger, tap the screen with another finger (“split-tapping”):
Activate item.
• Double-tap and hold (1 second) + standard gesture: Use a standard gesture.
The double-tap and hold gesture tells iPhone to interpret the subsequent gesture as
standard. For example, you can double-tap and hold, then without lifting your finger,
drag your finger to slide a switch.
• Two-finger double tap: Answer or end a call. Play or pause in iPod, YouTube, Voice
Memos, or Photos. Take a picture (Camera). Start or pause recording in Camera or
Voice Memos. Start or stop the stopwatch.
• Three-finger double tap: Mute or unmute VoiceOver.
• Three-finger triple tap: Turn the display on or off.
Do single-finger flicking gestures quickly, to distinguish them from dragging gestures.
Rotor Control
The rotor control is an invisible dial that you can use to change the results of up and
down flick gestures when VoiceOver is turned on.
Operate the rotor: Rotate two fingers on the iPhone screen to “turn” the dial to
choose between options.
Chapter 25 Accessibility 185The effect of the rotor depends on what you’re doing. For example, if you’re reading
text in an email you received, you can use the rotor to switch between hearing text
spoken word-by-word or character-by-character when you flick up or down. If you’re
browsing a webpage, use the rotor to choose whether you hear text word-by-word
or character-by-character, hear just the headers, hear just the links (all of them, visited
links, or links not yet visited), hear form elements, or hear descriptions of images. In
other words, you can use the rotor setting to hear all the text, or to jump from one
element to another of a certain type, such as headers or links.
Rotor options depend on the context of what you’re doing.
Reading text
• Select and hear text character-by-character
• Select and hear text word-by-word
Browsing a webpage
• Select and hear text character-by-character
• Select and hear text word-by-word
• Select and hear headers
• Select and hear links
• Select and hear form controls
• Select and hear visited links
• Select and hear links not visited
• Select and hear images
• Select and hear static text
• Zoom in or out
Entering text
• Move insertion point and hear text character-by-character
• Move insertion point and text word-by-word
• Text editing functions
• Auto-text
Using a control (such as the spinner for setting the time in Clock)
• Select and hear value character-by-character
• Select and hear value word-by-word
• Adjust the value of the control object
186 Chapter 25 AccessibilityUsing VoiceOver
Select items on the screen: Drag your finger over the screen. VoiceOver identifies
each element as you touch it. You can also move systematically from one element to
the next by flicking left or right with a single finger. Elements are selected from leftto-right, top-to-bottom. Flick right to go to the next element, or flick left to go to the
previous element.
“Tap” a selected item when VoiceOver is turned on: Double-tap anywhere on the
screen.
Speak the text of an element, character by character or word by word: With the
element selected, flick up or down with one finger. Flick down to read the next
character, or flick up to read the previous character. Twist the rotor control to read
word by word.
Adjust a slider: With a single finger, flick up to increase the setting or down to
decrease the setting. VoiceOver announces the setting as you adjust it.
Scroll a list or area of the screen: Flick up or down with three fingers. Flick down
to page down through the list, or flick up to page up through the list. When paging
through a list, VoiceOver speaks the range of items displayed (for example, “showing
rows 5 through 10”).
You can also scroll continuously through a list, instead of paging through it. Doubletap and hold. When you hear a series of tones, you can move your finger up or down
to scroll the list. Continuous scrolling stops when you lift your finger.
Use a list index: Some lists have an alphabetical index along the right side. The index
cannot be selected by flicking between elements; you must touch the index directly
to select it. With the index selected, flick up or down to move along the index. You can
also double-tap, then slide your finger up or down.
Unlock iPhone: Select the Unlock switch, then double-tap the screen.
Rearrange the Home screen: On the Home screen select the icon you want to move.
Double-tap and hold, then drag the icon. VoiceOver speaks the row and column
position as your drag the icon. Release the icon when it’s in the location you want. You
can drag additional icons. Drag an item to the left or right edge of the screen to move
it to another page of the Home screen. When you’re finished rearranging the icons,
press the Home button.
Chapter 25 Accessibility 187Mute VoiceOver Double-tap with three fingers. Double-tap again
with three fingers to turn speaking back on.
To turn off only VoiceOver sounds, set the
Ring/Silent switch to Silent.
Stop speaking an item Tap once with two fingers. Tap again with
two fingers to resume speaking. Speaking
automatically resumes when you select
another item.
Turn off the display while you use VoiceOver Triple-tap with three fingers. Triple-tap again with
three fingers to turn on the display again.
Speak entire screen from the top Flick up with two fingers.
Speak from current item to bottom of screen Flick down with two fingers.
Status information about iPhone can be heard by touching the top of the screen.
This can include the time, battery life, Wi-Fi signal strength, and more.
Entering and Editing Text
When you select a text field with VoiceOver, you can use the onscreen keyboard to
enter text. You can use the editing features of iPhone to cut, copy, or paste in the
text field.
Note: Safari doesn’t support copying webpage content. The editing features work only
in editable text fields.
Enter text:
1 Use VoiceOver to select an editable text field, then double tap to display the insertion
point and bring up the onscreen keyboard. If the field already contains text, the
insertion point is placed at the beginning or at the end of the text. Double-tap again
to place the insertion point at the opposite end. VoiceOver tells you the position of the
insertion point.
The insertion point and onscreen keyboard may appear automatically when you select
a text field. VoiceOver announces when you’re in editing mode.
2 To type, select a key on the keyboard by flicking left or right, then double-tap to
enter the character. Or drag you finger around the keyboard to select a key, and,
while holding the key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger to enter the
character. VoiceOver speaks the key when it’s selected, and again when it’s entered.
To enter an accented character, double-tap and hold until you hear a sound that
indicates the alternate characters have appeared, then drag left or right to select and
hear the choices. Release your finger to enter the current selection.
188 Chapter 25 AccessibilityMove the insertion point: Flick up or down to move the insertion point forward or
backward in the text. VoiceOver makes a sound when the insertion point moves, and
speaks the character that the insertion point moved across. Use the rotor to choose
whether you want to move the insertion point by character or by word.
Select text: Use the rotor to choose edit. Flick up or down to choose between the
Select and Select All functions, then double tap. If you chose Select, the word closest
to the insertion point is selected when you double-tap. If you chose Select All, the
entire text is selected.
Pinch to increase or decrease the selection.
Cut, Copy, or Paste: Make sure the rotor is set to edit. With text selected, flick up or
down to choose Cut, Copy, or Paste, then double-tap.
Undo: Shake iPhone, flick left or right to choose the action to undo, then double-tap.
Using Maps
With VoiceOver, you can zoom in or out, select pins, and get information about
locations.
Zoom in or out: Use the rotor to choose zoom mode, then flick up or down to zoom
in or out.
Select a pin: Touch a pin, or flick left or right to move from one item to another.
Get information about a location: With a pin selected, double-tap to display the
information flag. Flick left or right to select the flag, then double-tap to display the
information page.
Editing Videos and Voice Memos
You can use VoiceOver gestures to trim Camera videos and Voice Memo recordings.
Trim a voice memo: On the Voice Memos screen, select the button to the right of the
memo you want to trim, then double-tap. Then select Trim Memo and double-tap.
Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Flick up to drag to the right, or flick down
to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will
trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim Voice Memo and double-tap.
Trim a video: While viewing a video, double-tap the screen to display the video
controls. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Then flick up to drag to the right,
or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current
position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim and double-tap.
Zoom
Many iPhone applications let you zoom in and out specific elements. For example,
you can double-tap or use the pinch gesture to expand webpage columns in Safari.
Zoom is a special accessibility feature that lets you magnify the entire screen of any
application you’re using to help you see what’s on the display.
Chapter 25 Accessibility 189Turn Zoom on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Zoom and tap the
Zoom On/Off switch.
Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time.
Zoom in or out: Double-tap the screen with three fingers. By default, the screen is
magnified by 200 percent. If you manually change the magnification (by using the tapand-drag gesture, described below), iPhone automatically returns to that magnification
when you zoom in by double-tapping with three fingers.
Increase magnification: With three fingers, tap and drag toward the top of the
screen (to increase magnification) or toward the bottom of the screen (to decrease
magnification). The tap-and-drag gesture is similar to a double-tap, except you don’t
lift your fingers on the second tap—instead, drag your fingers on the screen. Once you
start dragging, you can drag with a single finger.
Move around the screen: When zoomed in, drag or flick the screen with three fingers.
Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger so that you can see more
of the screen. Hold a single finger near the edge of the display to pan to that side of
the screen image. Move your finger closer to the edge to pan more quickly. When you
open a new screen, Zoom always goes to the top-middle of the screen.
White on Black
Use White on Black to invert the colors on the iPhone display, which may make it
easier to read the screen. The screen looks like a photographic negative when White
on Black is turned on.
Invert the screen’s colors: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the
“White on Black” switch.
Mono Audio
Mono Audio combines the sound of the left and right channels into a mono signal
played on both sides. This enables users with hearing impairment in one ear to hear
the entire sound signal with the other ear.
Turn Mono Audio on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the
Mono Audio switch.
Speak Auto-text
Speak Auto-text speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPhone makes when
you’re typing.
Turn Speak Auto-text on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap
the Speak Auto-text switch.
Speak Auto-text also works with VoiceOver or Zoom.
190 Chapter 25 AccessibilityTriple-click Home
Triple-click Home provides an easy way to turn some of the Accessibility features on
or off when you press the Home button quickly three times. You can set Triple-click
Home to turn VoiceOver on or off, turn White on Black on or off, or present the
options to:
• Turn VoiceOver on or off
• Turn Zoom on or off
• Turn White on Black on or off
Triple-click Home is turned off by default.
Set the Triple-click Home function: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility >
Triple-click Home and choose the function you want.
Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features
Many features available on all models of iPhone help make iPhone accessible to all
users, including those with visual or auditory impairments.
Closed Captioning
You can turn on closed captioning for videos in iPod settings. See “Video” on page 158.
Voice Control
Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) lets you make phone calls and control
iPod music playback by using voice commands. See “Voice Dialing” on page 48, and
“Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 77.
Large Phone Keypad
Make phone calls simply by tapping entries in your contacts and favorites lists. When
you need to dial a number, iPhone’s large numeric keypad makes it easy. See “Phone
Calls” on page 47.
Widescreen Keyboards
Several applications let you rotate iPhone when you’re typing so that you can use a
larger keyboard:
• Mail
• Safari
• Messages
• Notes
• Contacts
Chapter 25 Accessibility 191Visual Voicemail
The play and pause controls in visual voicemail let you control the playback of
messages. Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar to repeat a portion of the message
that’s hard to understand. See “Checking Voicemail” on page 52.
Assignable Ringtones
You can assign distinctive ringtones to individuals in your contacts list for audible
caller ID. You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on iPhone. See “Purchasing
Ringtones” on page 162.
Instant Messaging (IM) Chat
The App Store features many Internet Messaging (IM) applications such as AIM,
BeejiveIM, ICQ, and Yahoo! Messenger that are optimized for iPhone.
Minimum Font Size for Mail Messages
To increase readability, set a minimum font size for Mail message text to Large,
Extra Large, or Giant. See “Mail” on page 152.
TTY Support (Available in Some Areas)
Use iPhone in TTY mode with the iPhone TTY Adapter (available separately) to use
a Teletype (TTY) machine. See “Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine” on
page 154.
Universal Access in Mac OS X
Take advantage of the Universal Access features in Mac OS X when you use iTunes
to sync information and content from your iTunes library to iPhone. In the Finder,
choose Help > Mac Help, then search for “universal access.”
For more information about iPhone and Mac OS X accessibility features, go to
www.apple.com/accessibility.
192 Chapter 25 AccessibilityTroubleshooting
A Appendix
Apple iPhone Support Site
Comprehensive support information is available online at
www.apple.com/support/iphone.
General
Low-Battery Image Appears
iPhone is low on power and needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use
it. For information about charging iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43.
or
iPhone Doesn’t Respond
• iPhone may be low on power. Connect iPhone to your computer or to its power
adapter to charge. See “Charging the Battery” on page 43.
• Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a
red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application
you were using quits.
• If that doesn’t work, turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/
Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then
drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo
appears.
• If that doesn’t work, reset iPhone. Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake button and
the Home button for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears.
193iPhone Still Doesn’t Respond After Reset
• Reset iPhone settings. From the Home screen choose Settings > General > Reset
> Reset All Settings. All your preferences are reset, but your data and media aren’t
deleted.
• If that doesn’t work, erase all content on iPhone. See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149.
• If that doesn’t work, restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring
iPhone Software” on page 204.
“This accessory is not made to work with iPhone” Appears
Make sure the dock connector is free of debris.
If you connect iPhone to an accessory not specifically made for it, iPhone may ask
if you want to turn on airplane mode. This is to eliminate radio interference from
cellular signals coming from iPhone. You may be able to use iPhone with the accessory
whether or not you turn on airplane mode. However, the accessory may not charge
iPhone.
If you turn on airplane mode, you won’t be able to make calls, send or receive
text messages, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth devices with iPhone until you
disconnect iPhone from the accessory or turn off airplane mode.
“This accessory is not supported by iPhone” Appears
The accessory you attached may not work with iPhone. Make sure the dock connector
is free of debris.
Connect-to-iTunes Screen Appears
iPhone needs to be activated. Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes if it
doesn’t open automatically.
iPhone Is Too Warm
If the interior temperature of iPhone 3G or later exceeds normal operating
temperatures, you may experience the following as it attempts to regulate its
temperature:
• iPhone stops charging
• the display dims
• the cellular signal is weak
• a temperature warning screen appears
Important: You cannot use iPhone while the temperature warning screen is displayed
except to make an emergency call. If none of the above measures succeeds in
lowering the internal temperature, iPhone automatically goes into a deep sleep mode
until it cools. You cannot make an emergency call when iPhone is in this mode. Move
iPhone to a cooler location and wait a few minutes before trying to use iPhone again.
194 Appendix A TroubleshootingiTunes and Syncing
iPhone Doesn’t Appear in iTunes
• The iPhone battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging
iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43.
• Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPhone to a
different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard).
• Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of
iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press
and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter
your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card
documentation or contact your carrier.
• Restart your computer and reconnect iPhone to your computer.
• Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Syncing Doesn’t Work
• The iPhone battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging
iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43.
• Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPhone to a
different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard).
• Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of
iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press
and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter
your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card
documentation or contact your carrier.
• Restart your computer and reconnect iPhone to your computer.
• Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Contacts, Calendars, or Bookmarks Don’t Sync
• Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Appendix A Troubleshooting 195Yahoo! or Google Contacts Doesn’t Sync
iTunes may not be able to connect with Yahoo! or Google. Make sure your computer
is connected to the Internet, and that you’ve entered the correct ID and password in
iTunes. Connect iPhone to your computer, click the Info tab in iTunes, click Configure in
the Contacts section, then enter your current ID and password.
Yahoo! Address Book Still Has Contacts Deleted From iPhone
Yahoo! Address Book doesn’t allow contacts containing a Messenger ID to be deleted
through syncing. To delete a contact containing a Messenger ID, log in to your Yahoo!
account online and delete the contact using Yahoo! Address Book.
Phone and Voicemail
Can’t Make or Receive Calls
• Check the cell signal icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. If there are no
bars, or if it says “No service,” try moving to a different location. If you’re indoors, try
going outdoors or moving closer to a window.
• Check to make sure you’re in an area with network coverage. Go to your carrier’s
website to see network coverage areas.
• Make sure airplane mode isn’t on. From the Home screen choose Settings, then turn
airplane mode off. If that doesn’t work, turn airplane mode on, wait 15 seconds, then
turn airplane mode off again.
• Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of
iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press
and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter
your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (